T14iCe Operators Manual

FANUC ROBODRILL α-T14iCeFANUC ROBODRILL α-T14iCLeFANUC ROBODRILL α-T14iCSeFANUC ROBODRILL α-T21iCeFANUC ROBODRILL α-T21iCLeFANUC ROBODRILL α-T21iCSe

OPERATOR’S MANUAL

B–85014EN/01

The model covered by this manual, and its abbreviation is :

Product Name Abbreviation

FANUC ROBODRILL α–T14iCe (CLe, CSe)FANUC ROBODRILL α–T21iCe (CLe, CSe)Controller : A04B–0079–B241

A04B–0079–B251FANUC Series 18i–MB

Mechanical Unit : A04B–0079–B111A04B–0079–B112A04B–0079–B113A04B–0079–B114

α–T14iCe (CLe, CSe)α–T21iCe (CLe, CSe)

� No part of this manual may be reproduced in any form.� All specifications and designs are subject to change without notice.

In this manual we have tried as much as possible to describe all thevarious matters.However, we cannot describe all the matters which must not be done,or which cannot be done, because there are so many possibilities.Therefore, matters which are not especially described as possible inthis manual should be regarded as “impossible”.

B–85014EN/01 PREFACE

p–1

PREFACE

1. INTENDED USE OF THE PRODUCT

The FANUC ROBODRILL α–T14/21iCe series are vertical drillingmachine that operates under control of a CNC (computer numericalcontrol unit). It can be used for drilling, tapping, and light milling.It should not be used for any other purposes.

2. DEFINITION OF USERS

2.1 Operator

In this document, the term operator refers to a person who operatesa machine. The operator must read this manual to understand thecontents of the manual. If the operator uses the machine withoutunderstanding the contents of the manual, the operator or peoplearound the operator may be in serious danger. The operator is notallowed to carry out any maintenance that involves :

(1) Any work that becomes possible only after a cover whose removalrequires a tool (fixed cover) is removed.

(2) Installing the machine or moving it from one place to another

2.2 Person in charge of routine maintenance and preventivemaintenance

This person should have completed an advanced course at theFANUC Robomachine School or have the equivalent knowledge andshould also be qualified by the company or organization to which thatperson belongs.The person in charge of routine maintenance and preventivemaintenance must observe the cautions described below :

Cautions that Person in charge of routine maintenance andpreventive maintenance must observe during maintenance

1. Before starting to remove a cover whose removal requires use of a tool(fixed cover), switch off the power to the machine.

2. Before switching on the power to the machine with its cover removed,make sure that nobody is beside the machine.

3. Before starting to run the machine with its cover removed, make sure thatanything extraneous, like a tool, is not left in the machine.

4. When adjusting the machine electrically with is cover removed, be carefulfor shock hazards. Be sure to use electrically insulated tools (such as aplastic screwdriver).

5. The person in charge of routine maintenance and preventive mainte-nance shall not be engaged in replacement of any electrical componentsother than fuses and memory backup batteries. Only the maintenanceengineer is allowed to replace such electrical components.

PREFACE B–85014EN/01

p–2

2.3 Maintenance Engineer

This person should have sufficient mechanical or electricalknowledge to be capable of maintenance and have also completed amaintenance course at the FANUC FA School or FANUCRobomachine School. Alternatively, the person should have theequivalent knowledge and should also be qualified by the companyor organization to which that person belongs. Maintenance engineerare allowed to be engaged in :

(1) Installing the machine and moving it from one place to another

(2) Repairing the machine (such as replacing mechanicalcomponents, and electrical components requiring setting oradjustment after replacement)

The maintenance engineer must also observe the cautions describedabove. Experienced maintenance engineer especially are alerted toaccidents that may occur from negligence or carelessness.

3. ORGANIZATION OF THIS MANUAL

The model covered by this manual, and its abbreviation is :

Product Name Abbreviation

FANUC ROBODRILL α–T14iCe (CLe, CSe)FANUC ROBODRILL α–T21iCe (CLe, CSe)Controller : A04B–0079–B241

A04B–0079–B251FANUC Series 18i–MB

Mechanical Unit : A04B–0079–B111A04B–0079–B112A04B–0079–B113A04B–0079–B114

α–T14iCe (CLe, CSe)α–T21iCe (CLe, CSe)

The following manuals are related to this machine :

(1) FANUC ROBODRILL��T14iCe/T21iCe OPERATOR’S MANUAL(B–85014EN) : This manual. Describes how to operate

and maintain this machine.

(2) FANUC Series 16i/18i/160i/180i/160is/180is–MB OPERATOR’SMANUAL (B–63534EN) :

Describes how to operate numerical control (NC) units and how to prepare programs.

(3) FANUC ROBODRILL ��T14iCe/T21iCe MAINTENANCEMANUAL (B–85015EN) :

Describes alarms, troubleshooting, and replacementof parts.

(4) FANUC Series 16i/18i/21i/160i/180i/210i/160is/180is/210is–MODEL B MAINTENANCE MANUAL (B–63525EN):

Describes troubleshooting and adjustment of NC units.

Before using this machine, be sure to read the necessary part of manual(1).

For daily handling or for reference, use manuals (1) and (2).

Use manuals (3) and (4) for troubleshooting, replacement of parts, andadjustment of the machine.

The NC unit used for this machine is an exclusive controller used forα–T14iCe/T21iCe.

B–85014EN/01 PREFACE

p–3

For the basic specification and the optional specification to which the NCunit is applicable, refer to the principal specification attached to thismanual and the copy of the order specification.

The description of manuals (1) and (3) has priority over that of manuals(2) and (4). When there are differences between the description of themanuals, the description in manuals (1) and (3) applies.

This manual has the following contents :

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS:

Explains safety precautions, cautions, andwarning labels of the machine.

I OUTLINE : Description of what can be done with thismachine. The names of the parts and thedescription of the equipment and devices usedwith this machine are given.

II ROUTINE OPERATIONS :

The flow of operation for machining isdescribed.

III DETAILED OPERATIONS :

Each of the machining operations that can bedone with this machine is described in detail.

IV INSTALLATION : Instructions for initially installing or movingthis machine are given.

V MAINTENANCE : Routine inspection to be done daily beforestarting machining, periodic inspection, andreplacement of the expendable parts aredescribed.

APPENDIXES : The principal specification, various figuresand tables, and other useful information arecompiled.

Before using this machine for the first time, read Chapters I and II. If themachine has been installed yet, read Chapter IV. Also, before moving thismachine, be sure to read Chapter V. Prepare a schedule for inspection andmaintenance.

Individual operation on this machine is described in Chapter III. For NCoperation, however, refer to manual (2).

In this manual the soft keys, the keys on the MDI operator’s panel, andthe keys on the machine operator’s panel are indicated as shown below.(For details on each key, see Section 1–2).

� Soft keys displayed on the bottom of the screen : Enclosed in [ ](Example) [PARAMETER], [ALARM]

� Keys on the operator’s panel (function keys, edit keys, and so forth) :Enclosed in < >

(Example) <CANCEL>, <INPUT>

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS B–85014EN/01

s–1

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

Before using the machine, be sure to read this manual and understand thecontents of the manual thoroughly. Using the machine with insufficientunderstanding can lead to an accident.

First, read this chapter on safety (SAFETY PRECAUTIONS). After fullyunderstanding the contents of this chapter, use the machine.

1. SAFETY FUNCTIONS OF THE MACHINE

The ROBODRILL α–T14/21iCe adopts a door interlock system thatstops the machine when the door is open. This is to protect theoperator from dangerous situations. The door interlock systemconsists of an electromagnetic lock switch, control circuit, andsoftware.A light that lights the machining area can be installed inside the splashguard. The following provides an outline of the machine and thesafety equipment.

B–85014EN/01 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

s–2

Fixed cover

Fixed cover

Operator’s panel

Internal Light

Fixed cover

Electromagnetic lock switch

Front door

Window

α–T14(21)iCe/iCLe

Fixed cover

Fixed cover

Operator’s panel

Internal Light

Fixed cover

Electromagnetic lock switch

Front door

Window

α–T14(21)iCSe


s–3

(a) Electromagnetic lock switchThe electromagnetic lock switch is installed in the upper part of thefront door of the splash guard.When a door open operation is performed, the spindle and X–, Y–,and Z–axis operations stop. After the spindle and X–, Y–, and Z–axisoperations have stopped, the door lock is released, allowing theoperator to open the door.When the machine is delivered, a key to release the door lock issupplied with the machine. This key is used to open the door whenthe power supply is not connected to the machine. After installing themachine, keep the key in the maintenance section. Never hand thiskey to the operator, and never leave the key inserted in the machine.During machine operation, never open the door by using this key.

(b) Fixed covers

Fixed covers are installed around the movable part of the machine.

2. CAUTIONS

When operating the machine, read specifications and other manualson safety to ensure safety.

a) Mechanical danger

Handle workpieces with care.

(1) Be careful with sharp edges and burrs of workpieces.A workpiece will have sharp edges and burrs especially after itis machined. Be careful not to get cuts when handling it. Weara protector such as gloves for safety.

(2) Fasten a workpiece onto a jig securely.When mounting a workpiece on a jig on the table, be sure to fixit to the securely. If not, the workpiece may come off the jig andfly away when it is machined. This is very dangerous.

(3) Do not machine a flammable workpiece.Some workpiece are flammable. Do not process such workpieceson he cutting machine, or otherwise they may catch fire.

(4) When mounting or dismounting a heavy workpiece, use a craneor the like.The crane or the like shall be used to lift anything that isapparently heavy (20 kg or more), cannot be held by hands, or youfeel heavy when you try to lift it.

Handle cutters with care.

(1) When using or exchanging a cutter, be careful not to get cuts onits sharp edge. When handing a cutter, wear a protector such asgloves.

(2) When disposing of cutters, observe any regulations and rulesapplicable to dangerous objects.


s–4

(3) A workpiece may be hot immediately after it is machined, andsimilarly a cutter may be hot immediately after it is used. If youtouch such objects directly with your hand, you may get burned.This is true especially if no coolant is used when machining.Wear a protector such as heat–resistant gloves, as required.

(4) Do not machine workpieces under such a machining conditionthat sparks are caused to fly.Check the machining condition, cutting fluid, material, and typebeforehand.

(5) Make sure that the cutter is fastened onto the securely. The cuttershall be neither worn out nor broken.

(6) When mounting a tool on the turret, fasten it securely accordingto the applicable instructions. If a tool is mounted incorrectly, ifmay come off accidentally.

Carefully handle cuttings.

In handling cuttings, be careful not to hurt yourself. Wear protectorssuch as gloves.

Be careful when operating the machine with the safetydoor (front door) open.

The following manual operations are possible with the safety dooropen.

� Movement along the X–, Y–, or Z–axis at 1.9 m/min or less� Additional axis movement at 600 degrees/min or less� Manual handle heed� Spindle rotation speed at 100 min–1 or less

Do not get close to moving components such as table or turret whenthe safety door (front door) is open.

Air blow operation can be turned on with the safety door open.When turning on air blow operation with the safety door open, wearsafety goggles to protect the eyes from chips.

Be careful not to slip on coolants or lubricants(grease or oil).

(1) If a coolant or lubricant gets to your hand, immediately wipe itoff with a rag.If the hand is dirty with a coolant or lubricant, it is very slippery.It is dangerous to operate the machine with such a slippery hand.

(2) A floor with a coolant or a lubricant on it is very slippery. It cancause serious falls.It a coolant or lubricant spills over around the machine,immediately wipe it up. Make sure that metal chip are notaccumulated at the coolant outlet on the rear of the machine or inthe metal chip holder, so the coolant is not leaking.


s–5

b) Electrical danger

When performing maintenance work, turn off thepower.

(1) Be sure to turn off the power whenever performing maintenancework.

(2) After maintenance work, re–install all removed parts includingscrews.

c) Thermal danger

Always wear heat–resistant gloves when handling hotobjects.

A workpiece may be hot immediately after it is machined, andsimilarly a cutter may be hot immediately after it is used. If you touchsuch objects by hand, you may get burned. This is true especially ifno coolant is used during machining.

Some components of the machine can also get hot. Be careful not totouch them. When handling such hot objects, wear a protector suchas heat–resistant gloves. The following machine components can gethot :

(1) Servo motor of each axis (such as X–, Y–, Z–, and additionalaxes)

(2) Spindle motor(3) Coolant motor(4) Power line(5) Heat generating sections (such as a transformer and heat sink)

in the NC cabinetd) COOLANTS AND LUBRICANTS

Do not inhale, or expose any part of the body to,coolants or lubricants (such as grease and oil).

Coolants and lubricants are very bad for your health, if you inhale, orare exposed to, them. Take the following precautions. In case youshould have inhaled or touched directly any coolant or lubricant, getthe applicable treatment listed below.

Part of the bodyexposed Precaution Medical treatment

Respiratory organs(such as mouth andnose)

Do not inhale vapor or mist. If you feel anything abnor-mal with your body, immedi-ately see a doctor andreceive medical treatment.

Skin (especially one with a scratchor a wound)

Do not touch directly asmuch as possible.

If a coolant or lubricant getson your skin, wash it awaywith tap water or soapywater. If you feel anythingabnormal with your body,immediately see a doctorand receive medical treat-ment.


s–6

Part of the bodyexposed Medical treatmentPrecaution

Mucous membrane(such as eyes)

Wear goggles to protect theeyes from any spatteringcoolant or lubricant.

If a coolant or lubricant getsin your eye, keep washingthe eye in sufficient runningtap water for 15 minutes orlonger. If you feel pain oranything abnormal with theeye, immediately see anophthalmologist (eye doc-tor) and receive medicaltreatment.

Digestive organs(such a mouth)

Be careful not to drink acci-dentally.

If you have drunk a coolantor lubricant accidentally, donot try to vomit it up.Instead, see a doctor andreceive medical treatment.

Handle coolants and lubricants (grease and oil) withcare.

(1) Do NOT use flammable coolants.Be careful that coolants and oil can catch fire even if they are notflammable. Pay sufficient attention to the condition and way thatyou use coolants and lubricants.

(2) When storing coolants and lubricants, handle them in the sameway as other petrochemical products.When disposing of them, observe any regulations and rulesapplicable to industrial wastes.

(3) Coolants become very harmful, when they get rotten.Before a coolant gets rotten, exchange it with a new supply. If acoolant is rotten, stop using it immediately, and exchange it witha new supply.

(4) When handling coolants and lubricants, observe the instructionsfrom the manufacturers.

NOTEWith the ROBODRILL, nitrile rubber (NBR),hydrogenerated nitrile rubber (HNBR), and fluororubber areused as shielding and protection materials. Do not use acoolant that can swell nitrile rubber (NBR), hydrogeneratednitrile rubber (HNBR), and fluororubber.Do not use a strong coolant that can peel off coating.


s–7

Use recommended lubricant.

The following lubricants are recommended:

Brand Manufacturer Component tobe lubricated

Timing ofapplication

ALVANIAGREASE NO. 1

SHOWA SHELLSEKIYU K. K.

GUIDE RAILTURRET GEAR

At the time of maintenance

ALVANIAGREASE NO. 2

SPINDLE NOSEGEAR

MULTEMP LRLNO. 3

KYODO YUSHI BALL SCREW(X, Y, Z)

MOLY HDGREASE

SUMICO SPINDLE TOOLCLAMPSPRINGS

When exchangingTool clampsprings

MOLYSPEEDGREASE NO. 1

SUMICO TURRET MECH-ANISM INSIDE

When overhaulingTurret mechanism

ARCANOLL74V

FAG SPINDLE BEAR-ING

When exchangingSpindle bearings

ANTIRUST P- 1000

Nisseki Mitsubishi GUIDE RAIL(X, Y, Z)TAPERED POR-

At the time ofpacking, transportation,

ANTIRUST P- 3600

TION OF THESPINDLETABLE SURFACE

and storage.

Super MULPUS68

Nisseki Mitsubishi GUIDE RAIL(X, Y, Z)

Replenish whenthe leavings in the

UNIWAY 68BALL SCREW(X, Y, Z)

pump becomesscarce.

Mobil Vactra OilNo.2

Mobil Oil corp.

TETOLA OIL 68 SHOWA SHELL

Tonna Oil T68SEKIYU K.K.

FEBIS K68 EXXON


s–8

Use recommended coolant.

The following coolants are recommended:

Type Manufacturer Brand

Nisseki Mitsubishi UNICUT TG20

OilyIDEMITSU KOSAN CO. LTD. DAPHNE CUT

AS–25FOilySHOWA SHELL SEKIYU K.K. SPEED SC22A

Mobil Oil Corp. Bakumaru 15J

NIPPON OIL COMPANY UNISOLUBLE HD–MUNISOLUBLE HD

IDEMITSU KOSAN CO. LTD. DAPHNE MILCOOL SD

Water–soluble SHOWA SHELL SEKIYU K.K. DROMUS OIL EPL

MOBIL OIL CORPORATION MOBIL MET 150MOBIL MET 150

Yusiro Chemical Industry Co., Ltd. Yusiroken EZ20

Even when recommended coolant is used, it may adversely affectmachine parts or coating depending on how the coolant is used.Therefore, use coolant carefully.When using coolant other than recommended coolants, pay specialattention to use conditions and a method. Some coolants mayadversely affect the human body, machine, and/or environment.

Be careful not to cause a fire.

(1) Do not machine workpieces under such a machining conditionthat sparks can be caused to fly.The operator shall check the machining condition, cutting fluid,workpiece material, and cutter type beforehand.

(2) Do not machine flammable workpieces.Some workpieces are mode of flammable materials. Beforemachining a workpiece, check its material.

(3) Pay attention to coolants and oil.Do NOT use flammable coolants or oil. Be careful that coolantsand oil can catch fire even if they are not flammable. Paysufficient attention to the condition and way that you use acoolant or oil.

(4) Keep combustible and flammable substances away from themachine.Do not place flammables (such as paint thinner or gasoline)around the machine.Moreover, do not use a spray around the machine.

(5) Get a fire extinguisher on hand in the event of a fire.

e) Danger due to unreasonable forms

When installing the machine, provide service accessclearances.

When installing the machine, provide service access clearances.When ascending to a high place, secure a footing.


s–9

When mounting or dismounting a 20–kg or heavierworkpiece or machine component, use a crane or thelike.

Use a crane or the like to lift anything that is apparently heavy, cannotbe held by hands, or you feel heavy when you try to lift it.

Do not work in an unnatural posture.

It is dangerous to work in an unnatural posture, reaching out to mountor dismount a workpiece on the table when it is far away from you.When working with a workpiece on the table, bring the tablesufficiently toward you beforehand so that you can work safety.

When working in a high place, use a ladder, and securea footing.

When working in a high place, use a ladder, and secure a footing.

f) CLOTHING

Always wear safe clothing when working.

Wear protective clothing.

Always wear a cap when working.

Long hair can be caught in machines. This is very dangerous.Besides, long hair narrows your field of vision. Always wear a capwhen working.

Always wear safety shoes when working.

Wear safety shoes to protect the feet if anything drops on them.

When handling a cutter, workpiece, or metal chips,wear gloves.

A machined workpiece has sharp edges and burrs. Be careful not toget cuts when handling it. When using or exchanging a cutter, becareful not to get cuts on its sharp edge. When handling metal chips,be careful not to get cuts.

g) Cautions on power supply, instability, and functional impairment

Pay attention to the storage and packing methods.

When storing or packing the machine, observe the following:

(1) Secure the spindle top and table with fastening materials fortransportation.

(2) Apply rust resisting oil to portions that may rust.


s–10

(3) Secure the turret mechanism with nylon bands.For details, see the chapters on the storage and packing methods inthis manual.

When lifting the machine, pay attention to the capacityof the crane used.

When lifting the machine, pay attention to the balance of the machine.Also, pay attention to the capacities of the crane and hook.

Machine weight: α–T14/21iCe 2000 kgα–T14/21iCLe 2100 kgα–T14/21iCSe 1950 kg

Do not handle the operator’s panel or display unit withyour hands in gloves.

If you handle the operator’s panel or display unit with your hands ingloves, you may press the wrong key or more than one key at a time,possibly causing the machine to run incorrectly or damaging theworkpiece, cutter, or even the machine. When pressing the keys onthe operator’s panel, do not wear gloves.

Install the machine on a flat, secure floor.

The floor on which the machine is to be installed shall:

(1) Withstand a load of 2 t without raising a problem (such asdeformation).

(2) Be flat, with no projection or dent.

(3) Be hard, without being deformed under a pressure of 1.5 Mpa(15 kgf/cm2).

(4) Be smooth.

(5) Not deteriorate with time.

(6) Not deteriorate in an environment for everyday operation.If the machine is installed in a place not meeting any condition above,a failure can occur, possibly resulting in a dangerous situation.Besides, it is impossible to make the most of the machine.

Perform inspections and maintenance to ensuresafety.

Inspections

Perform the following inspections periodically:* Check that the cutter is attached to the arbor securely to allow

normal machining. The cutter must be free from wear andbreakage.

* If the jig is defective, a workpiece may come off. Check thatthe jig is free from defects.

* When a hydraulic or pneumatic device is installed in the jig,check whether appropriate pressure is supplied. If the pressureis too low, a proper clamping force cannot be applied, whichallows the workpiece to come off the jig. If the pressure is toohigh, the hydraulic or pneumatic device is damaged, and so thejig does not work.


s–11

* Check that the leveling bolt is not floating from the mount.* Press the emergency stop button to check that the machine

stops normally.* Check that when a tool change is performed at a position where

no tool is present, an alarm is issued.* Check that the Z–axis brake functions normally. Check that the

amount of the displacement on the Z–axis between before andafter the emergency stop button is pressed is 0.1 mm or less.

* Check that the door is locked.* Check that the bolts fastening the fixing covers are tightened

securely.* Check that machine operation is not obstructed by accumulated

cuttings.* Check that cuttings accumulated at the exit of the coolant in the

rear part of the machine or in the receptacle of cuttings do notcause coolant to leak out.

Maintenance

Perform the following maintenance operations periodically:* Greasing the gear at the end of the spindle and turret gear:

Every 200 operation hours* Greasing the LM guide block: Every 1000 operation hours* Greasing the ball screws: Every 1000 operation hours* Greasing the LM guide of the turret: Every 2000 operation

hours* Replacing the coned disc spring: Every 1,000,000 times of tool

change* Central lubricating device (optional): Add oil when the oil

level in the pump is low.For details, see the chapter on maintenance in this manual.

Before opening the safety door, make sure that theZ–axis dose not come down.

The Z–axis (spindle head) comes down once in a while because of thedefective Z–axis brake failing to work. Before opening the safetydoor, make sure that the Z–axis does not come down.When the safety door is open, be careful that the Z–axis may comedown.While working underneath the Z–axis, place a wooden block betweenthe table and spindle head so that the Z–axis will not come down evenif the brake fails to work.

Fix a tool on the turret securely.

When fixing a tool on the turret, observe the applicable instructionsto fasten it tightly. If a tool is fixed incorrectly, it may come offaccidentally.

Be careful when opening the safety door with thepower switched off.

When opening the safety door with the power switched off, observethe following :


s–12

(1) Make sure that the spindle is not rotating by inertia.If the power is switched off when the spindle is rotating, it willkeep rotating by inertia because it is no longer under control.

(2) Make sure that the Z–axis (spindle head) does not come down.

The operator shall not open the NC cabinet door.

There are high voltages, hence shock hazards, inside the cabinet.

The operator shall not remove a fixed cover.

There are objects rotating or moving at high speed inside the fixedcover. If it is removed, the following may occur :

� Danger of contacting with objects rotating or moving at highspeed

� Chance of a broken cutter or workpiece flying� Change of a cutting chips flying� Chance of a coolant spattering out of the machine� Chance of noise leaking

Do not switch on the power to the machine when afixed cover is removed.

Before removing the fixed cover, switch of the power to the machine.Before switching on the power after maintenance, attach the fixedcover.

Do not switch on the power with a fixed cover removed. If it isnecessary to run the machine, for example, for maintenance with thefixed cover removed, maintenance engineers and servicepersonshaving accurate knowledge and competence for the applicablemaintenance items should do this maintenance.

When replacing maintenance parts, exercise care.

When replacing maintenance parts, use a specified method to replacethe parts properly. During replacement, the power must be off. If areplacement is not performed properly, the machine will not operatenormally. After completing replacement, re–install all removed partsincluding screws.

Before removing the Z–axis motor, be sure to fastenthe spindle top and table securely with packingmaterials.

The Z–axis motor has a built–in brake. Therefore, if the Z–axis motoris removed without fastening the spindle top and table with packingmaterials, the Z–axis falls.

Be careful not to be caught with an automatic door.

If the machine is provided with an automatic door option, the safetydoor is opened and closed automatically by program. Be careful notto be caught with the automatic door when working. (Should you becaught with the automatic door, resulting in excess force beingapplied to it, the safety door is disconnected from the drive unit.)


s–13

h) Other cautions

Telescopic covers on the x and y axes

When leaving the machine unused for a long period of time. If it isintended for dry cutting (cutting without using any coolant), applya lubricant to the surfaces of the telescopic covers by spraying or asimilar method. This will assure rust prevention and smooth sliding.

Bowl of the regulator

The bowl of the regulator is made of polycarbonate. Do not use organic solvents or the like.Avoid using the bowl in such an atmosphere that can deterioratepolycarbonate.

Top cover

When using the cover to fully cover the entire machine, always usea mist collector. Otherwise, the inside of the machine becomes fullof mist, which results in a failure.

3. WARNING LABELS

Warning labels have been attached where special care is requiredduring daily operation. The labels posted on the machine aredescribed below.Keep all warning labels visible. Do not stain, scratch, or remove awarning label.Be aware of a tool on the turret or spindle head.

This warning label is on the turret cover.

During operation, the turret may suddenly rotate or the spindle maybe lowered. When approaching the table to exchange a workpiece,for example, pull the table towards you. Stay away from the turret.

There are hazards from electrical shocks.

This warning label is on a door or other sections of the NC cabinet.

Any person other than the serviceperson shall not touch cables ormetal parts around the label.


s–14

Before opening the safety door, make sure that the machine is notrunning.Do not go inside the machine.

This warning label is on the front surface of the machine.

Even when the power to the machine is switched off, the spindle maybe rotating by inertia, or the Z–axis may drop because of a defectivebrake.(JAPAN and export standard)

Be careful not to get caught with the automatic door.

This warning label is on the front surface of the machine, if it isequipped with the automatic door (option).

The automatic door (option) may move suddenly by program.

* If a warning label is missing, request one from a nearby FANUCservice station or dealer.

B–85014EN/01 Table of Contents

c–1

PREFACE p–1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS s–1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

I. OUTLINE 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1. OUTLINE 3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1 FEATURES 4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1.2 USE OF THE MACHINE 5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1.3 SOUND PRESSURE LEVEL 8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2. PART NAMES 9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1 MACHINE 10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.2 CONTROLLER RACK 12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.3 VIEW AND COMPONENTS OF THE OPERATOR’S PANEL 13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3. OPERATOR’S PANEL 14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4. BASIC OPERATIONS 19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1 SCREEN SWITCHING 20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.1.1 Switching between the QUICK Screen and CNC Screen 20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1.2 CNC Screen Switching 20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.2 ENTERING ALPHABETIC CHARACTERS 22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2.1 Arrangement of the Letter Keys 22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5. TOOLS 24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6. JIGS 31. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7. COOLANT 32. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

II. INSTALLATION

1. CHECKING INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS 37. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2. TRANSPORTATION PROCEDURE 38. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1 PREPARATION BEFORE TRANSPORTATION 39. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.2 TRANSPORTATION 41. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3. INSTALLATION 42. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1 INSTALLING LEVELING BOLTS AND BLOCKS 43. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.2 REMOVING THE EYEBOLTS FOR LIFTING THE MACHINE 44. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.3 REMOVING THE PACKING PLATE 45. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.4 CONNECTING THE POWER SUPPLY 46. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4.1 Cabling and Phase Matching 46. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4.2 Setting of Input Power Supply 50. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

B–85014EN/01Table of Contents

c–2

3.5 CONNECTING THE COMPRESSED AIR SUPPLY 51. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.6 REMOVAL OF CORROSION PREVENTIVE GREASE 53. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.7 MOUNTING A Z–AXIS MOTOR AT MACHINE INSTALLATION 54. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.8 LEVEL ADJUSTING 56. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.9 MOUNTING TOOLS 57. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.10 INSTALLING THE COOLANT UNIT 58. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.11 Y–AXIS TELESCOPIC COVER (Y–COVER F) 61. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4. PACKING 62. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

III. ROUTINE OPERATIONS

1. OPERATING POSITIONS 65. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2. SWITCHING POWER ON AND OFF 67. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1 SWITCHING POWER ON 68. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.2 SWITCHING POWER OFF 69. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3. EMERGENCY STOP 70. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4. OPENING/CLOSING THE SPLASH–GUARD DOOR 71. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1 LOCKING THE SAFETY DOOR 72. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.2 RESTRICTIONS ON THE OPERATION OF THE MACHINE WITH THE SAFETY DOOR OPEN 73. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.3 IF THE SAFETY DOOR IS UNLOCKED DURING OPERATION 74. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.4 OPENING AND CLOSING THE DOOR WHEN THE POWER IS OFF 75. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.5 SWITCHING OF SAFETY DOOR LOCK CONTROL 76. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.6 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS 77. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5. MOUNTING TOOLS 78. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6. MOUNTING JIGS AND WORKPIECES 79. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7. COOLANT SUPPLY 81. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8. PREPARING PROGRAMS [CNC OPERATION] 82. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9. TRIAL RUN 83. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10.AUTOMATIC RUNNING [CNC OPERATION] 88. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.1 STARTING AUTOMATIC RUNNING 89. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10.2 STOPPING AUTOMATIC RUNNING 90. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10.3 RESTARTING AUTOMATIC RUNNING 91. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11.POWER SHUTOFF METHODS 92. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.1 AIR SUPPLY SHUTOFF METHOD 93. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

B–85014EN/01 ��

c–3

11.2 ELECTRIC POWER SUPPLY SHUTOFF METHOD 94. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

IV. DETAILED OPERATIONS

1. QUICK SCREEN 97. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1 OVERVIEW 98. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1.2 CONSTITUTION OF QUICK SCREEN 99. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2.1 Overview 99. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2.2 Descriptions of Screen Displays 100. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2.3 Screen Switching Methods 101. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1.2.3.1 Soft Key–triggered Screen Switching 101. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1.2.3.2 Screen Number and PAGE Key Triggered Screen Switching 101. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1.2.3.3 MENU OPERATION Key–triggered Screen Switching 102. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1.3 EXPLANATION OF EACH SCREEN 103. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3.1 Menu Screen 103. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3.2 Menu Operation 104. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3.3 Coordinate/Tool Compensation 106. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3.4 Data I/O Screen 110. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3.5 Tool Life Management Screen 112. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3.6 Pallet Setting Screen (Option) 115. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3.7 Automatic Operation Screen 117. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3.8 Counter 118. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3.9 Sequence Selection 120. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3.10 MAINTENCE/SETTING 124. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3.11 DIAGNOSIS/ALARM 126. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2. CREATING A PROGRAM 127. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1 EDITING A PROGRAM 128. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.1.1 Creating a Program 128. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1.2 Modifying a Program 129. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1.3 Deleting a Program 132. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1.4 Checking Program Nos. in Memory 132. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1.5 Calling a Program in Memory 132. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.2 PROGRAMMING 133. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2.1 General 133. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2.2 Spindle Speed Function (S Function) 133. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2.3 Miscellaneous Function (M Function) 134. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2.4 Tool Function (T Function) 137. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2.5 Spindle Orientation Function (M19 Function) 138. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2.6 Rigid Tapping Cycle (Function M29) 139. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.3 PLAYBACK 143. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3. DISPLAYING AND CHANGING PARAMETERS 145. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1 DISPLAYING PARAMETERS 146. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.1.1 NC Parameter 146. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1.2 PMC Parameter 148. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.2 CHANGING PARAMETERS 149. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.3 CHANGING OFFSET DATA 152. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.4 CHANGING WORKPIECE COORDINATE SYSTEM DATA 154. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.5 CUSTOM MACRO VARIABLES 156. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.5.1 Custom Macro Variables 156. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


c–4

3.5.2 Setting and Displaying Common Variables 157. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4. MANUAL RUNNING [CNC OPERATION] 158. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1 MANUAL OPERATION OF THE SPINDLE 159. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.2 AUTOMATIC DOOR 160. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.3 AXIS MOVEMENT 161. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5. AUTOMATIC RUNNING [CNC OPERATION] 162. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1 MDI RUNNING 163. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.1.1 MDI Running 163. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.2 MEMORY RUNNING (MEM) 167. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2.1 Settings for Memory Running 167. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2.2 Memory Running Operation 168. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.3 REMOTE RUNNING (REMOT) 170. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3.1 Settings for Remote Running 170. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3.2 Remote Running Operation 170. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.4 SETTINGS AND OPERATIONS OF AUTOMATIC RUNNING 172. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.4.1 Single Block (SINGL BLOCK) 172. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.4.2 Restarting Automatic Running After Feed Hold or Stop 173. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.4.3 Manual Running Execution During Automatic Running 173. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.4.4 MDI Command Execution During Automatic Running 173. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.4.5 Feedrate Override Dial (FEEDRATE OVERRIDE) 174. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.4.6 M01 Stop (OPT STOP) 174. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.4.7 Optional Block Skip 175. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.4.8 Rapid Traverse Rate Override (TRVRS LOW, TRVRS 25%, TRVRS 100%) 175. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6. TOOL CHANGE 176. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.1 TOOL CHANGE PRECAUTIONS 177. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.2 COMMANDS WITH M CODES 178. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.3 “TOOL CHANGE” KEY 179. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.4 MEASURES WHEN AN ERROR OCCURS DURING TOOL CHANGE 180. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7. SPINDLE–SPEED FUNCTIONS 181. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.1 ROTATION OF THE SPINDLE 182. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7.1.1 Method Using the M Code 182. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.1.2 Method Using the Spindle Key (Manual) on the Operator’s Panel 182. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.1.3 Spindle Rotation When the Safety Door is Open 183. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7.2 SPINDLE OVERRIDE 184. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7.3 SPINDLE LOAD METER 185. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7.4 SPINDLE ORIENTATION (M19) 186. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7.5 SPINDLE MOTOR CHARACTERISTIC 187. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8. DISPLAYING ALARM, OPERATOR, AND DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES 188. . . . . . . . 8.1 CNC SCREEN 189. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8.1.1 Alarm Message 189. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.1.2 Operator Message 190. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8.2 QUICK SCREEN 191. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.2.1 Common to Screens 191. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.2.2 Diagnose/Alarm Screen 191. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

B–85014EN/01 ��

c–5

8.3 COMMON TO CNC SCREEN AND QUICK SCREEN 192. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9. RELEASING OVERTRAVEL 193. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10.RELEASING THE TOOL TRAPPING STATE 194. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11.INPUT/OUTPUT PARAMETERS FOR EXTERNAL DEVICES 195. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.1 OVERVIEW 196. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11.2 DETAILS OF THE RELATED PARAMETERS 197. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

12.QUICK EDITOR 204. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.1 OVERVIEW 205. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

12.2 FEATURES AND NOTES OF QUICK EDITOR 206. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.2.1 Features of QUICK EDITOR 206. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.2.2 Notes 206. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

12.3 QUICK EDITOR SCREEN 207. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.3.1 Procedure for Displaying QUICK EDITOR Screen 207. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.3.2 Browse Mode and Edit Mode 208. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.3.3 Selecting an Edit Function 208. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

12.4 INPUT FUNCTION OF QUICK EDITOR 209. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.4.1 Entering Alphabetic Characters and Symbols 209. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.4.2 Simple Input of G and M Codes 210. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.4.3 Simple Input of Words by Input Key 211. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.4.4 Other Operations 211. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

12.5 EDITING FUNCTION OF QUICK EDITOR 212. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.5.1 Selecting the Program 212. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.5.2 Deleting the Program 213. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.5.3 Registering the Program 215. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.5.4 Copy and Move (by Line) 216. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.5.5 Cursor Jump 217. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.5.6 Search for the Specified Word 217. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.5.7 Entering a Macro Statement 218. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.5.8 Entering a Comment 219. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.5.9 Setting and Cancel of Continuous Line 219. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.5.10 Inserting a Line 220. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.5.11 Deleting a Line 220. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.5.12 Setting of Inserting or Overwriting Mode 220. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.5.13 Selecting the Function 220. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.5.14 Screen Change and Program Selection after Editing 221. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

13.QUICK CONVERSATIONAL PROGRAMMING (SUPER C.A.P iM) 222. . . . . . . . . . . 13.1 OVERVIEW (SUPER C.A.P iM) 223. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

13.2 CONVERSATIONAL PROGRAMMING FUNCTION 224. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.2.1 Operation 224. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.2.2 Notes 225. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

13.3 SETTING SEVERAL DATA 228. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.3.1 Cutting Condition File 229. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.3.2 Tool File 231. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.3.3 Pre–Tool File 234. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.3.4 Tool Geometry Compensation 236. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.3.5 Workpiece Coordinate System 237. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


c–6

13.4 CREATING A MACHINING PROGRAM 239. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

13.5 MACHINING PROGRAM OPTIMIZATION 251. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.5.1 Optimal Process Editing Function (Automatic Alteration) 253. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.5.2 Optimal Process Editing Algorithm 255. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.5.3 Optimal Process Editing Function (Manual Alteration) 258. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

13.6 MACHINING PROGRAM CHECK 261. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.6.1 Tool Path Drawing 261. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.6.2 Animated Simulation 269. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

13.7 NC STATEMENT OUTPUT FUNCTION 274. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.7.1 NC Statement Output Function 274. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

13.8 DATA I/O 276. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

13.9 STANDARD DATA 278. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.9.1 Cutting Condition File 278. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.9.2 Tool File 279. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.9.3 Pre–Tool File 282. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.9.4 Default File 283. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

14.AI TOOL MONITOR 284. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.1 OVERVIEW 285. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

14.2 TOOL LIFE SCREEN 286. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

14.3 SETTING DATA 290. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

14.4 TOOL GROUP CREATION AND AUTOMATIC TOOL EXCHANGE 293. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.4.1 Setting a Tool Group 293. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.4.2 Program Creation 294. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.4.3 Registering a Tool Length Compensation Value 294. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

14.5 CONFIRMING THE CURRENT STATUS AND CLEARING 295. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

14.6 SUPPLEMENT TO PROGRAM COMMANDS 297. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

14.7 ALARM MESSAGES DISPLAYED BY THE AI TOOL MONITOR FUNCTION 300. . . . . . . . . . . . .

14.8 SIGNAL OUTPUT 301. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

15.EXTERNAL INTERFACE FUNCTION 302. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.1 OVERVIEW 303. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

15.2 SETTING INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNALS AND FUNCTIONS 304. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

15.3 OUTPUT SIGNAL CHECK FUNCTION 306. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

15.4 INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNALS 307. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.4.1 Detailled Description of Input/Output Signals 313. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

15.5 EXTERNAL INTERFACE CONNECTION 329. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

15.6 EMERGENCY STOP 333. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

15.7 EXTERNAL POWER SUPPLY 334. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

15.8 RELAY MODULE 335. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.8.1 Overview 335. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.8.2 Connection 335. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

15.8.2.1 Internal connection diagram 335. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

15.8.2.2 Pin allocation 336. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

15.8.3 Specifications 336. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

15.8.3.1 Ordering information 336. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

15.8.3.2 Rating 337. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

15.8.3.3 Outside dimensions 337. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

B–85014EN/01 ��

c–7

15.9 USER TERMINAL BLOCK MODULE 338. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.9.1 Overview 338. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.9.2 Connection 339. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.9.3 Specifications 340. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

15.9.3.1 Ordering information 340. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

15.9.3.2 Outside dimensions 340. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

15.10 RELAY TERMINAL BLOCK MODULE 341. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.10.1 Overview 341. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.10.2 Connection 341. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.10.3 Specifications 346. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

15.10.3.1Ordering information 346. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

15.10.3.2Outside dimensions 346. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

15.11 RELAY TERMINAL BLOCK MODULE B 347. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.11.1 Overview 347. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.11.2 Connection 347. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.11.3 Specifications 350. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

15.11.3.1Ordering information 350. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

15.11.3.2Outside dimensions 350. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

16.Z–AXIS THERMAL DISPLACEMENT COMPENSATION FUNCTION 351. . . . . . . . . 16.1 OVERVIEW 352. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

16.2 ENABLING THE Z–AXIS THERMAL DISPLACEMENT COMPENSATION FUNCTION 353. . . .

16.3 ADJUSTING THERMAL DISPLACEMENT COMPENSATION 354. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.3.1 History of the Amounts of Estimated Thermal Displacements 354. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.3.2 Adjustment Procedure 355. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

17.AUTOMATIC POWER SUPPLY SHUT–OFF 358. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

18.COOLANT (OPTION) 360. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.1 COOLANT UNIT (OPTION) 361. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

18.2 MACHINE CLEANING COOLANT CONTROL (OPTIONAL) 364. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

19.BLOWER CONTROL FUNCTION (OPTION) 365. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

20.OPENING AND CLOSING THE AUTOMATIC DOOR (OPTION) 366. . . . . . . . . . . . .

21.INTERNAL LIGHT (OPTION) 370. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

22.STATUS LIGHTS (OPTION) 371. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

23.ADDITIONAL AXIS CONTROL (OPTION) 372. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23.1 SETTING SERVO PARAMETERS 373. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

23.2 OTHER RELATED PARAMETERS (STANDARD SETTING) 375. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

23.3 CALCULATING THE FLEXIBLE FEED GEAR (DETECTION MULTIPLY DMR) 376. . . . . . . . . .

23.4 GRID SHIFT 377. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

23.5 REMOVING AUXILIARY AXES 378. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

23.6 SERVO PARAMETERS (STANDARD) 379. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

23.7 INDEX TABLE FUNCTION (OPTION) 390. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


c–8

23.8 ADDITIONAL AXIS CABLE FOR THE INDEX TABLE (JAPAN AND EXPORT STANDARD) 396. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

23.8.1 Connectors 396. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23.8.2 Connectors 397. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23.8.3 Additional Axis Cable for the Index Table (4th axis) 398. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

24.AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH MEASUREMENT 409. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.1 COMMAND FORMAT 411. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

24.2 COMPENSATION METHOD BY USING AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH MEASUREMENT 412. .

24.3 MEASURING LIMIT 413. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

24.4 PARAMETERS AND MACRO VARIABLES 414. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

24.5 ALARM MESSAGES AND RELEASING METHOD 415. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

24.6 FLOWCHART 416. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

24.7 MACRO PROGRAM 421. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

25.SMALL–HOLE PECK DRILLING CYCLE (OPTION) 424. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.1 OUTLINE OF THE FUNCTION 425. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

25.2 USAGE 427. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

25.3 SETTING THE SMALL–HOLE PECK DRILLING CYCLE MODE 428. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

25.4 DETAILED SPECIFICATIONS 429. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

25.5 RELATED PARAMETERS (STANDARD SETTINGS) 431. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

26.FACTOLINK FUNCTIONS 433. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26.1 OVERVIEW 434. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

26.2 SETTINGS 435. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26.2.1 Setting Up Ethernet 435. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26.2.2 Setting Up FACTOLINK 438. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26.2.3 Setting NC Parameters 439. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

26.3 LOGGING DATA FUNCTION 440. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

26.4 SWITCHING TO FACTOLINK SCREEN 441. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

26.5 SELECT FUNCTION 442. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

26.6 LOGGING DATA FORMAT 443. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

27.HIGH–SPEED SERIAL BUS (HSSB) INTERFACE FUNCTION (OPTION) 444. . . . . 27.1 OVERVIEW 445. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

27.2 STARTING AND ENDING THE CNC SCREEN DISPLAY FUNCTION 445. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

27.3 DNC OPERATION USING THE DNC OPERATION MANAGEMENT PACKAGE 445. . . . . . . . . . .

28.CENTER–THROUGH COOLANT (OPTION) 446. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28.1 SPECIFICATIONS 447. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

28.1.1 Spindle 447. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28.1.2 Coolant Unit 447. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28.1.3 Center–through Pump Unit 448. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

28.2 NOTES 449. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28.2.1 Selecting a Coolant 449. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28.2.2 Coolant Unit 449. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

28.3 APPEARANCE AND CONFIGURATION OF THE COOLANT UNIT 450. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

B–85014EN/01 ��

c–9

28.3.1 Appearance of the Coolant Unit 450. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28.3.2 Names and Functions of the Parts 453. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

28.4 INSTALLATION 457. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28.4.1 Notes on Installation 457. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28.4.2 Installation Area 457. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28.4.3 Piping 457. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28.4.4 Wiring 458. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28.4.5 Checking Operation After Installation 459. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

28.5 OPERATION 460. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28.5.1 Command M Codes 460. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28.5.2 Manual Operation 460. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28.5.3 Commands in a Program 460. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

28.6 SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE 461. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28.6.1 Daily Inspection 461. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28.6.2 Cleaning the #150 Suction Filter 461. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28.6.3 Replacing the Line Filter 463. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28.6.4 Dry Run After Replacement of the Line Filter 464. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28.6.5 Adjusting the Relief Valve 465. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28.6.6 Other Maintenance 465. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

28.7 MAINTENANCE PARTS 466. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28.7.1 Line Filter 466. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28.7.2 Other Maintenance Parts 466. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

28.8 CIRCUIT DIAGRAM OF CENTER–THROUGH COOLANT AND COMPRESSED AIR 468. . . . . . 28.8.1 Coolant Circuit Diagram of Center–through Coolant Unit 469. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28.8.2 Compressed Air Circuit Diagram 470. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

28.9 CENTER–THROUGH COOLANT CONTROL 471. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28.9.1 Overview 471. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28.9.2 M codes 471. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28.9.3 Manual Operation 471. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28.9.4 Commands in a Program 471. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28.9.5 Control 472. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28.9.6 Alarm Operator Messages 473. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28.9.7 Parameters (PMC Parameters) 474. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28.9.8 DI/DO 475. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28.9.9 Restriction 475. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

28.10 ELECTRIC CONTROL CIRCUIT DIAGRAM OF CENTER THROUGH COOLANT 476. . . . . . . . . 28.10.1 Power Supply 476. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28.10.2 Input/Output –Output 477. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28.10.3 Input/Output–Input 478. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

29.AI HIGH–PRECISION CONTOUR CONTROL FUNCTION/MODELER CONTROL II FUNCTION (OPTION) 479. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

30.HIGH–SPEED SKIP FUNCTION (OPTION) 480. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.1 OVERVIEW 481. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

30.2 ACCELERATION AND SERVO DELAY COMPENSATION (TYPE A/B) 482. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

30.3 COMMAND 483. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

30.4 ADDRESS 483. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

30.5 PARAMETERS 484. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

30.6 CONNECTION 485. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

30.7 INPUT SIGNAL SPECIFICATIONS 486. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


c–10

31.HIGH–SPEED POSITIONING AND DRILLING CANNED CYCLE FUNCTIONS 487. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.1 OVERVIEW 488. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

31.2 CANNED CYCLES 489. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.2.1 Differences from Conventional G73 and G81 through G83 Codes 492. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.2.2 Retreat Operation 493. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.2.3 Positioning Operation 493. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.2.4 Single–Block Stop 493. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.2.5 Return to Initial Point/Point R 493. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.2.6 Cancellation 493. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.2.7 Rapid Traverse Overlapping 493. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

31.3 ADDITIONAL PARAMETERS 494. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

31.4 NOTES 495. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

31.5 EXAMPLE OF CYCLE OPERATION 496. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

32.TOOL CHANGE PROHIBITION FUNCTION 497. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32.1 OVERVIEW 498. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

32.2 SPECIFICATION 499. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

32.3 ALARM 500. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

32.4 PARAMETERS 501. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

33.MACRO CALL USING G CODE 502. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

34.SPINDLE AIR BLOW TIME EXTENSION FUNCTION 503. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34.1 OVERVIEW 504. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

34.2 SEQUENCE 505. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

34.3 PARAMETERS 506. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

34.4 NOTE 509. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

35.TOUCH PROBE CONTROL FUNCTION 510. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35.1 OVERVIEW 511. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

35.2 FUNCTION 512. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

35.3 CONNECTION 513. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

35.4 EXTERNAL INTERFACE SIGNAL ASSIGNMENT 514. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

35.5 PARAMETERS 515. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

35.6 ALARMS 516. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

35.7 SPINDLE ROTATION DISABLE FUNCTION 517. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

35.8 AUTOMATIC TURN–OFF OPERATION OF THE TOUCH PROBE 518. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

36.MANUAL GUIDE 519. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36.1 OVERVIEW 520. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

36.2 NOTES 521. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

36.3 OPERATION OF THE MANUAL GUIDE 522. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36.3.1 Explanation of Sample Program 522. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36.3.2 Switching Over to Manual Guide Screen 524. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36.3.3 Data Setting 526. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36.3.4 Selection of NC Program 527. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

B–85014EN/01 ��

c–11

36.3.5 Creation of NC Program 529. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36.3.6 Program Check (Graphic) 557. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36.3.7 Convert to NC Format 560. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36.3.8 Editing Function 563. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36.3.9 Copy and Deleting of NC Program 568. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36.3.10 Auto and MDI Operation 571. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36.3.11 Back Ground Editing 574. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36.3.12 Measurement Cycle Function (Option) 576. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

36.3.12.1Preparation 576. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

36.3.12.2Creating a Program 577. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

36.3.12.3Measurement Cycle Operation 586. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

36.3.12.4Drawing Function and NC Statement Conversion Function 586. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

36.3.12.5Output of Measurement Results to Custom Macro Variables 586. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

V. MAINTENANCE

1. DAILY MAINTENANCE 591. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1 DAILY CHECK–UP 592. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1.1.1 Cleaning 592. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1.2 Replenishing the Tank with Coolant 592. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1.3 Inspecting Cutters 593. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1.4 Inspecting Each Section 593. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1.2 WORK AT CLOSING TIME 594. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2.1 Removing Cut Scraps 594. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2.2 Cleaning 596. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2.3 Inspecting Each Section 596. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2.4 Spindle Run–in (for 15000min–1 Specification) 597. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE 599. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1 LUBRICATING EACH SECTION 601. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.1.1 Greasing 601. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1.2 Concentrated lubrication with Intermittent Oiling System 609. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1.3 Greasing and Oiling Interval 613. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.2 SPECIFIED BRANDS OF LUBRICANT 616. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2.1 Recommended Lubricants (Grease and Oil) 616. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.3 MAINTENANCE OF AC SPINDLE MOTOR 617. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3.1 Periodical Maintenance 617. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.4 REPLACING EXPENDABLE PARTS 618. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.4.1 Battery Replacement Method 618. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.4.2 Fuse 618. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.4.3 Fluorescent Lamp in the Inside Light Unit 618. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3. SERVO MOTOR ORIGIN RESTORATION 621. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4. AUTOMATIC TURRET RESTORATION 626. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5. PARAMETER RESET, CHECK, AND REGISTRATION FUNCTIONS 630. . . . . . . . . 5.1 BASIC OPERATION 631. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.2 RESETTING PARAMETERS 632. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.3 CHECKING PARAMETERS 633. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


c–12

5.4 REGISTERING PARAMETERS 634. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6. RIGID TAPPING RETURN FUNCTION 635. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

APPENDIXES

A. SPECIFICATIONS 639. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

B. DIMENSIONS OF THE MACHINE 646. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.1 SHAPE AND DIMENSIONS OF THE MACHINE 647. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

B.2 DIMENSIONS OF THE TABLE SURFACE AND T GROOVE (NOMINAL WIDTH: 14) 650. . . . . .

B.3 DIMENSIONS OF THE INSIDE OF THE SPLASH GUARD 653. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

B.4 DIMENSIONS OF THE SYSTEM AROUND THE COOLANT OUTLETS 656. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

B.5 DIMENSIONS OF THE END OF THE SPINDLE 657. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

B.6 MIST COLLECTOR MOUNTING HOLE DIMENSIONS 658. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

C. G CODES 659. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

D. OPERATION 663. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

E. STATUS LIST 666. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

F. ERROR CODES 668. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F.1 ERROR CODE DISPLAYED ON LCD 669. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

F.2 SPINDLE AMPLIFIER 727. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F.2.1 Alarms 727. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F.2.2 List of Error Codes 732. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

F.3 POWER SUPPLY MODULE 734. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

F.4 SERVO AMPLIFIER MODULE 735. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

F.5 LIST OF ALARMS (PMC) 737. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

G. OPERATOR MESSAGES, DIAGNOS MESSAGES 744. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G.1 OPERATOR MESSAGES 745. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

G.2 DIAGNOS MESSAGES 749. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

H. PMC PARAMETERS 753. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

I. RECOMMENDED ATA CARD 772. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

J. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION 774. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J.1 EMBEDDED ETHERNET AND PCMCIA ETHERNET 775. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

J.2 LIST OF FUNCTIONS 776. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J.2.1 FACTOLINK Function 776. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J.2.2 FOCAS1/Ethernet Function 776. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J.2.3 DNC1/Ethernet Function 778. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J.2.4 FTP File Transfer Function 779. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

B–85014EN/01 ��

c–13

J.2.5 Functional Differences between the Embedded Ethernet Function and the Ethernet Function Based on the Option Board 780. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

J.3 SETTING THE EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION 782. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J.3.1 Parameter Setting of the FACTOLINK Function 782. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

J.3.1.1 Notes on using the FACTOLINK function for the first time 782. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

J.3.1.2 FACTOLINK parameter setting screen 783. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

J.3.1.3 Parameters 785. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

J.3.1.4 Using the FACTOLINK function on a small network 788. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

J.3.1.5 Configuring a large network 789. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

J.3.2 Parameter Setting of the FOCAS1/Ethernet Function 789. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

J.3.2.1 Notes on using the FOCAS1/Ethernet function for the first time 789. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

J.3.2.2 FOCAS1/Ethernet parameter setting screen 790. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

J.3.2.3 Using the FOCAS1/Ethernet function on a small network 794. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

J.3.2.4 Using the DNC1/Ethernet function on a small network 795. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


J.3.3 Parameter Setting of the FTP File Transfer Function 796. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

J.3.3.1 Notes on using the FTP file transfer function for the first time 796. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

J.3.3.2 FTP file transfer parameter setting screen 797. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

J.3.3.3 Parameters 800. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

J.3.3.4 Using the FTP file transfer function on a small network 801. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


J.3.4 Communication Parameter Input Method 802. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

J.4 SWITCHING BETWEEN THE EMBEDDED ETHERNET DEVICES 810. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

J.5 EMBEDDED ETHERNET OPERATIONS 812. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J.5.1 FACTOLINK Function 812. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J.5.2 FTP File Transfer Function 813. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

J.5.2.1 Host file list display 813. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

J.5.2.2 Host file search 816. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

J.5.2.3 Host file deletion 816. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

J.5.2.4 NC program input 817. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

J.5.2.5 NC program output 818. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

J.5.2.6 Input/output of various types of data 819. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

J.5.2.7 Checking and changing of the connection host 826. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

J.6 EMBEDDED ETHERNET ERROR MESSAGE SCREEN 828. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

J.7 EMBEDDED ETHERNET MAINTENANCE SCREEN 830. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

J.8 TROUBLESHOOTING 836. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J.8.1 Check Items Related to Connection with the HUB 836. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J.8.2 Check Items Related to Connection with a Backbone 836. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J.8.3 Checking the Setting of Each Parameter 837. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J.8.4 Checking Communication 838. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

J.9 ERROR MESSAGES 841. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J.9.1 EMB_ETH MASTER CTRL LOG Screen 841. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J.9.2 EMB_ETH FOCAS1/ETHER LOG Screen 841. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J.9.3 EMB_ETH FTP TRANSFER LOG Screen 842. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J.9.4 EMB_ETH FACTOLINK LOG Screen 842. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

J.10 GLOSSARY FOR ETHERNET 843. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

I. OUTLINE

B–85014EN/01 1. OUTLINEOUTLINE

3

1 OUTLINE

α–T14/21iCe series are vertical CNC drills capable of performingefficient simple milling in addition to drilling and rigid tapping.

1. OUTLINE B–85014EN/01OUTLINE

4

(1) Linear machining and arc machiningHigh precision linear and arc milling at various angles can be done.Drilling and tapping can also be done.

(2) High speed turretThe turret permits short–cut random selection to enable high–speedtool changes. It is not necessary to consider tool interference becausethe spindle goes down independently.

(3) Rigid tappingFor rigid tapping in which the spindle and the Z axis aresynchronously fed, a tap with a floating mechanism is not required.This enables precision tapping in a short time.

(4) Abundant NC functionsA variety of NC functions supporting various types of machiningranging from parts machining such as drilling and tapping to millingand model machining are provided.

(5) Absolute–position detecting systemThe absolute–position detecting system is one of the standardfeatures. Return to the reference position is not required afterswitching the power on (annual battery replacement is necessary).

(6) Highly reliableThe problems that conventionally occurred with pneumatic orhydraulic technology have been solved using electronic technology.As a result, reliability has been sufficiently enhanced and easymaintenance is assured.

(7) Optimum spindle speed selectionThe spindle speed of the spindle motor can be changed over a widerange: 80 min–1 to 8,000 min–1 (150min–1 to 15000min–1 as option).The spindle speed is programmable at every 1 min–1 and therefore theoptimum spindle speed can be set.

(8) High performance AC servo motorAs the servo motors for the X–axis, Y–axis, and Z–axis, AC servomotors are used. So, no maintenance including brush replacement isrequired.The rapid traverse rate along each axis is 48 m/min (X–axis, Y–axis,Z–axis), so that waste time can be minimized when cutting is notperformed.

(9) Quick operation functionA quick operation function beyond the operability of theconventional CNC machine tools is provided as standard. Thisfunction enables the operator to operate the machine as desired withthe graphical screen and guidance.

(10)Safety functionsThe safety–related functions of this machine comply with category3 in accordance with the EN954–1 European Safety Standard.This machine was manufactured in accordance with Appendix 1 ofthe 98/37/EC Machine Directive.

1.1FEATURES


5

The FANUC ROBODRILL α–T14/21iCe series machines are verticaldrilling machines that perform cutting (such as drilling, tapping, andmilling) under control of a CNC (computerized numerical controller).

Do not use the FANUC ROBODRILL α–T14/21iCe series machines forany purpose other than stated above.

The cutting power of the ROBODRILL varies with the workpiece type,cutter, coolant, and other factors. For details, refer to the applicable cutteror coolant operator’s manuals.

The following table lists examples of machining with the ROBODRILL.

Workpiece S45C FC200 ADC12

Drill diameter (mm)Material

20HSS

φ25HSS

φ30HSS

Spindle speed S (min–1) 398 382 637

Feedrate F (mm/min) 80 115 255

Coolant No. 5 of JIS type 2

No. 2 of JIS type 1 (diluted to 1:9)

Load meter (%) 135 140 140

Workpiece S45C FC200 ADC12

Tapping screw designation Pitch

M162

M202.5

M243

Spindle speed S(min–1) 298 264 219

Feedrate F (mm/min) 596 660 657

Coolant No. 5 of JIS type 2

No. 2 of JISW type 1 (diluted to 1:9)

Precision Qualified for JIS class 2

These values depend on the types and rigidity of tooling, cutters, jigs, andworkpieces, the property and supply state of coolant, and so forth.

The following table lists the specifications of the machines.(α–T14iCe series)

ITEM SPECIFICATIONS

α–T14iCSe α–T14iCe α–T14iCLe

Travel X- axis travel (Longitudinal movement of table) 300mm 500mm 700mm

Y- axis (Cross movement of saddle) 300 + 10mm 400mm

Z- axis travel (Vertical movement of spindle head) 330mm

Distance from table surface to spindle edge sur-face

150 to 480mm

Distance from the front surface of the column tothe center line of the spindle

400mm

Table Area 630 × 330mm 650mm × 400mm 850mm × 410mm

Load capacity 150kg (unifom load) 200kg (uniform load) 250kg (uniform load)

Type 3–14–mm slots with a space of 125mm

Spindle Spindle speed range 80 to 8000min- 1

Type of spindle taper hole 7/24 taper No. 30

Feedrate Rapid traverse feedrate (X, Y, Z) 48,000mm/min

cutting feedrate 1 to 15000mm/min

1.2USE OF THEMACHINE


6

ITEM SPECIFICATIONSITEM

α–T14iCLeα–T14iCeα–T14iCSe

Turret Tool change system Turret type(spindle independent from turret)

Type of tool shank MAS BT30

Type of retension knob MAS P30T- 1 (45° )Tool storage capacity 14

Maximum tool diameter Distance from taper gage line /max. diameter:0 to 28mm /50mm

34 to 120mm /80mm120 to 250mm /40mm]

(80mm : in case 3kg tool mass)

Maximum tool length 200mm 250mm (It’s depended on spec.)

Method of tool selection Random shortest path

Maximum tool mass Max. 2 kg/tool (total mass : 15kg)or

Max. 3 kg/tool (total mass : 22kg)

Tool changing time (tool to tool) Approx. 0.9 sec. or Approx. 1.4 sec.

Motor Spindle drive motor FANUC AC SPINDLE MOTOR5. 5 kW (10 min rating)/

3. 7 kW (continuous rating)

Feed motors FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR MODEL αM8iX, Y, Z : αM8i (2.0 kw)

Power sources Electrical power supply 200V AC + 10% to –15%, 3–phase, 50/60Hz �1Hzor 220V AC +10% to –15%, 3–phase,

60Hz 1Hz, �10kVA

Compressed air supply 490kPa (5kgf/cm2) (gage pressure)0.15m3/min (150�/min) (at atmospheric pressure)

Machine size Machine height 2236 ± 10mm

Floor space 995mm × 2207mm 1565mm × 2027mm 2115mm × 2027mm

Mass of machine with the control section Approx. 1650kg Approx. 2000kg Approx. 2100kg

Accuracy (measured in

Positioning accuracy 0.010mm/300mm(measured in compliance with JIS B 6201)

Repeatability ±0.002mm

(α–T21iCe series)

ITEM SPECIFICATIONS






150 to 480mm


400mm









7

ITEM SPECIFICATIONSITEM

α–T21iCLeα–T21iCeα–T21iCSe





34 to 120mm /80mm120 to 250mm /40mm]


Maximum tool length 190mm 250mm*1




Tool changing time (cut to cut) Approx. 1.8 sec. or Approx. 2.4 sec.



Feed motors FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR MODEL αM8iX, Y, Z : αM8i (2.0 kw)


60Hz 1Hz, �10kVA








*1 It’s depended on spec.

Environmental conditions

Ambient temperatureOperating: 0�C to 45�CStorage or transportation: 20�C to 60�C

Temperature drift1.1�C/min or lower

HumidityUsual: 75% or lower (relative humidity)Short–period: 95% or lower

Vibration5 m/s2 (0.5G) or lower

AtmosphereNo corrosive gasNo flammable gas


8

The equivalent continuous A–weighted average sound level measured onthe shop floor where the machine is installed is 70 dB or lower.

The following table lists the measurement conditions.

The following table lists the measurement conditions.

Item Condition

Program O400

Tool See the table below.

Workpiece material S45C (15(l)�9.5(w)�3(d)cm)

Cutting depth 1mm

Coolant See the table below.

Cycle time 57s

Measurement time 57s

Measurement conditions

Item Manufacturer Model

Tool SANDVIK RA265.2–80 (with six teeth)

Tip SANDVIK SM30

Coolant Yushiro Yushiroken EZ20

� Program used

O400

G91G28Z0;

G00G40G49G80G90;

G54G28X0Y0Z0;

M06T01;

M03S800;

G00X0Y0;

G00G90G43Z1.H01;

M08;

G01G90Z–1.F600;

X250.;

Y–40.;

X0;

M05;

G91M09;

G28Z0G49;

M02;

1.3SOUND PRESSURELEVEL

B–85014EN/01 2. PART NAMESOUTLINE

9

2 PART NAMES

2. PART NAMES B–85014EN/01OUTLINE

10

Fig.2.1 (a) Inner view of Machine

2.1MACHINE


11

Fig.2.1 (b) Outer view of Machine

(1) Spindle motor (13) Grip(2) X axis servo motor (Serial pulse coder) (14) Tool(3) Y axis servo motor (Serial pulse coder) (15) Turret gear(4) Z axis servo motor (Serial pulse coder) (16) Spindle (MS) gear(5) Column (17) X axis telescopic cover(6) Bed (18) Y axis telescopic cover (front side)(7) Table (19) Y axis slide cover(8) Saddle (20) Z axis take–up cover(9) Leveling block (21) Splash guard(10) Spindle head (22) Controller operator’s panel(11) Turret support (23) Controller rack(12) Turret

2. PART NAMES B–85014EN/01OUTLINE

12

1 2 34

56 7

Fig.2.2 Inside of Controller rack

(1) Power supply (5) Backup battery for pulse coder(2) Spindle amplifier (6) Circuit breaker(3) Servo amplifier (7) Power panel(4) Connector panel

2.2CONTROLLER RACK


13

(3) Memory card slot

(4) Power switches

(6) Manual pulsegenerator

(9) Cycle startfeed hold

(10)Emergency stop button

(2) Soft keys

(5) Operation keys

(8) Override

(7) Input protection key

(11)RS–232C interface

(1) LCD

2.3VIEW ANDCOMPONENTS OFTHE OPERATOR’SPANEL

3. OPERATOR’S PANEL B–85014EN/01OUTLINE

14

3 OPERATOR’S PANEL

ÃÃÃÃ

1ÃÃÃÃ

2ÃÃÃÃ

10

ÃÃ

3

ÃÃ

4ÃÃÃÃ

5 ÃÃÃÃ

6ÃÃÃÃ

9

ÃÃÃÃ

8

ÃÃ

7

ÃÃÃÃ

2ÃÃÃÃ

12ÃÃ11

ÃÃÃÃ

13

ÃÃ16ÃÃÃÃ

18

ÃÃÃÃ

19

ÃÃÃÃ

17

ÃÃ15

ÃÃÃÃ

20

Fig.3 (a) Standard type operator’s panel

B–85014EN/01 3. OPERATOR’S PANELOUTLINE

15

Fig.3 (b) Full keyboard type operator’s panel


16

No. Name Function

1 Power switches These switches turn the control power on and off. (When an alarm is issued, you cannot sometimes turn off the power.)

2 Operation modeselection keys

[MANUAL (HANDLE) key]Selects the mode that allows the manual pulse generator to be used to causemovement along each axis.[AUTO (MEMORY) key]Selects automatic operation (memory) mode. With the standard operator’spanel, this key is also used to select remote operation mode.[MENU (MDI) key]Selects MDI operation mode. When this key is pressed while QUICK screenis being displayed, MENU OPERATION screen appears.[EDIT key]Selects program editing (EDIT) mode.[(REF.POINT) key] (provided for the full keyboard type only)Selects reference position return mode.[(JOG) key] (provided for the full keyboard type only)Selects jog mode.[(REMOTE) key] (provided for the full keyboard type only)Selects remote operation mode.

3 Spindle operationkeySpindle speedoverride keys

[Spindle operation key]Turns and stops the spindle.[Spindle speed override keys]These keys change the spindle speed specified with the S function by 30 to200%.Decrease : The spindle speed is decreased.100% : The spindle speed specified with the S function is restored.Increase : The spindle speed is increased.(When the front door lock is released, the spindle override is invalid.)

4 Tool change When this key is pressed when the LED of the MENU (MDI) key is on, a toolchange to the adjacent tool on the right on the turret takes place.

5 Coolant Turns coolant or cuttings air blow on and off.

6 DOOR Releases the lock of the front door. After the lock is released, you can open the door.

7 Axis selection keys

Handle magnifica-tion selection keys

[Axis selection keys]In manual mode (reference position return, jog, or handle mode), these keysare used to select the target axis for movement and the movement direction.In reference position return and jog modes � Movement is made only whenthe key is being pressed.In handle mode � A target axis for movement is selected.[Handle magnification selection keys]In handle mode, these keys are used to select the amount of travel per handlefeed unit.

8 Operation selectionkeys

[SINGLE BLOCK key]Selects the function of executing one block in automatic operation then stop-ping automatic operation.[DRY RUN key]Selects the function that sets the rapid traverse rate and cutting feedrate to thejog feed rate in automatic operation, ignoring the programmed F feedrate.[M01 STOP key]Selects the function that stops operation after executing a block containingM01 in a program.[“/” SKIP key] (provided for the full keyboard type only)Selects the function that suppresses the execution of blocks containing “/” in aprogram.[AUTO P.OFF key] (provided for the full keyboard type only)Selects the function that turns off the power automatically when a programterminates or when an alarm is issued.

B–85014EN/01 3. OPERATOR’S PANELOUTLINE

17

No. FunctionName

9 Rapid traverseoverride keys

These keys are used to select the rapid traverse rate. (The 50% key is provided only for the full keyboard type.)

10 Alarm/status key Displays information about alarms, operator messages, diagnosis, and soforth in a window.

11 QUICK/NC Key Switches the LCD display between QUICK screen and CNC screen.

12 Alphabet key (ABC��Z)

Turns on and off the alphabetical character input function using soft keys.When this key is set to ON, alphabetical characters are indicated in soft keysto allow you to enter alphabetical characters. (For the standard type operator’s panel only)

13 MDI keys [Page keys]Used to change pages and screens.[Cursor keys]Used to move the cursor.[Numeric keypad]Used to enter numeric values.[Alphabet keys] (provided for the full keyboard type only)Used to enter alphabetical characters.[Reset key]Used to, for example, release an alarm.[Input key] Used to enter data.[Cancel key]Cancels characters or numbers being entered.[Alter key]Replaces the portion indicated by the cursor with a new command during pro-gram editing on CNC screen.[Insert key]Inserts a new command after the command indicated by the cursor duringprogram editing on CNC screen.[Delete key]Deletes the command indicated by the cursor during program editing on CNCscreen.[Help key] (provided for the full keyboard type only)Used to display the help screen of CNC screen. (You cannot use this keywhen QUICK screen is being displayed.)[Shift key] (provided for the full keyboard type only)Used to enter a character indicated in the lower right part of each address andnumeric key.[Screen change keys] (provided for the full keyboard type only)Used to switch between screens within QUICK screen.<POS>Changes the screen display to a position indication screen.ABS, REL, ALL, MONITOR, etc.<PROG>Changes the screen display to a program indication screen.PROG, [MDI], FROPY, etc.<OFFSET/SETTING>Changes the screen display to an offset indication or setting screen.OFFSET, SETING, WORK, etc.<SYSTEM>Changes the screen display to a parameter or diagnosis screen.PARAMETER, STATUS, [PMC], etc.<MESSAGE>Changes the screen display to an alarm or operator message screen.Alarm, Diagnose, History, etc.<GRAPHIC>Changes the screen display to a graphics display.

14 Manual pulse gen-erator

Used to operate each axis (X, Y, Z) of the machine manually (in handle mode).


18

No. FunctionName

15 Cycle start/feed hold

Automatic operation starts when you press the start button. During operation,the start button is turned on in green. When you press the stop button, themachine is placed in temporary halt state (feed hold state). In this state, thetemporary stop button is turned on in red.

16 Override [Feedrate override dial]The feedrate specified with the F function for an axis is changed by 0 to 200%.For the standard type operator’s panel, the feedrate in dry run operation canalso be changed with this dial.[Jog override dial] (provided for the full keyboard type only)The feedrate in jog mode and dry run operation is changed.

17 Emergency stopbutton

Used to stop machine movement in a moment in case of emergency.

18 Input protectionkey

When this key is set to ON, editing and input of programs and data are dis-abled.

19 RS–232–C interface

Used to connect an external I/O device such as the Handy File.

20 Memory card slot A memory card such as an ATA card is inserted into this slot.

B–85014EN/01 4. BASIC OPERATIONSOUTLINE

19

4 BASIC OPERATIONS

4. BASIC OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01OUTLINE

20

The screens for the ROBODRILL are grouped into the following two types.

CNC screen This is a typical FANUC Series 18i–MB screen.

[Characteristics of the display]

� The title bar is yellow.

� The characters displayed on the right half ofthe title bar are large.

Fig.4.1 (a) CNC screen

QUICK screen This is specially developed for the ROBODRILL.

[Characteristics of the display]

� The title bar is blue.

� The current time is displayed on the right halfof the title bar.

Fig.4.1 (b) QUICK screen

The QUICK screen and CNC screen are alternately displayed each timethe QUICK/NC button is pressed.

The CNC screen is classified as one of the following:

<POS> : Displays the current position.<PROG> : Enables you to edit and view programs.<OFFSET/SETTING>: Enables you to specify offset and workpiece

coordinate data.<SYSTEM> : Enables you to set parameters.<MESSAGE> : Displays alarms and operator messages.<GRAPHIC> : Draws tool paths and animated graphics patterns.

These screen groups can be selected as stated below:

4.1SCREEN SWITCHING

4.1.1Switching between theQUICK Screen andCNC Screen

4.1.2CNC Screen Switching


21

(Operator’s panel of standard type)

To select one of the following screen groups, press the numeral keylabeled the corresponding screen group name, then press a page key.

(POS group)

(PROG group)

(OFFSET/SETTING group)

(SYSTEM group)

(MESSAGE group)

(GRAPHIC group)

+ or � Switched to the respective screen group

(Operator’s panel with a full keyboard)

Press one of the following keys.

4. BASIC OPERATIONS B–85014EN/01OUTLINE

22

On the standard–type operator’s panel, soft keys are used to enteralphabetic characters.

Press the key on the operator’s panel.

Soft keys labeled alphabetic characters appear, enabling alphabeticcharacters to be entered.

Pressing the key again cancels the alphabetic character entry

mode.

� On the QUICK screen, alphabetic character entry is availableonly to the functions that require entering alphabeticcharacters.

� No alphabetic character entry is available on the GRAPHICscreen (such as the PATH GRAPHIC/SOLID GRAPHIC).

The letter keys are arranged in either the HALF pattern for program entryor the FULL pattern for comment entry.

HALF pattern arrangement (switched using a soft key at either end).

O G F M S T X Y Z ;

H I J K P Q R ALTER DELETE :

N / B C D FULL ;

This key switches the mode between FULL and HALF.

ALTER DELETE

4.2ENTERINGALPHABETICCHARACTERS

4.2.1Arrangement of theLetter Keys


23

FULL pattern arrangement (switched using a soft key at either end).

A B C D E F G H I J

K L M N O P Q

ALTER DELETE

T

U V W X Y Z SPACE ;

R S

+ – * / = ? #

ALTER DELETE

;

( ) [ ] , HALF ;

& @

This key switches the mode between FULL and HALF.

5. TOOLS B–85014EN/01OUTLINE

24

5 TOOLS

The standard tools of the former Japan Machine Tool Builder’sAssociation (MAS403–1982 BT30 P30T–1) can be used. When youpurchase tools, confirm the shape and dimensions by referring to thefigure of the taper shank (MAS403–1982 BT30) and the pull stud(MAS403–1982 P30T–1) of the Japan Machine Tool Builder’sAssociation standard shown below.

Fig.5 (a) Taper Shank

Fig.5 (b) Pull Stud

The standard tools of the German industrial standard (DIN 69871–A30)can be used with the machine conforming to the DIN GRIP standard. Usethe pull stud manufactured by FANUC (A290–6056–X801).

B–85014EN/01 5. TOOLSOUTLINE

25

The shapes and the dimensions of the taper shank (DIN 69871–A30) andthe pull stud (A290–6056–X801) of the German industrial standard areshown in the figures below.

Details of the X portion

Fig.5 (c) Taper Shank

Fig.5 (d) Pull Stud


26

Center–through specification

The shape and dimensions of pull studs that comply with thecenter–through specification are shown below.

O RING

Fig.5 (e) Pull Stud (MAS)

O RING

Fig.5 (f) Pull Stud (DIN)


27

Double–plane bound center through spindle (NC5) specification

The figures and dimensions of a taper shank and pull stud based on thedouble–plane bound center through spindle (NC5) specification areshown below.

Fig.5 (g) Taper shank

NOTE1 The distance (0.1 to 0.15) between the φ30.4 reference

diameter and φ46 end face is an adjustment valuededicated to the ROBODRILL.

Fig.5 (h) Pull stud (without center through)


28

Fig.5 (i) Pull stud (with center through)

In the α–T14/21iCe series, the maximum tool diameter, length, andweight are limited as listed below. Before operating the machine, checkthe dimensions and weight of the tool.

(1) Maximum tool diameter

Length (mm) from the taper gauge surface Maximum diameter (mm)

34 or less ø65

From 34 (exclusive) to 120 (inclusive) ø80

From 120 (exclusive) to 250 (inclusive) ø40

(2) Maximum tool length

α–T14iCe/CLe

MACHINE SPLASHGUARD

without Autodoor

with Autodoor

STANDARD 1 door 250mm 250mm

2 doors 250mm 250mm

HIGH COLUMN 100 mm 1 door 235mm 235mm

2 doors 215mm 215mm


2 doors 215mm 215mm


2 doors 250mm 215mm


29

α–T14iCSe200mm

α–T21iCe/CLe

Product MACHINE Maximum tool length

α–T21iCe/CLe SPG 1 door 250mm

SPG 2 doors 215mm

α–T21iCse HIGH COLUMN 0,100mm 190mm

HIGH COLUMN 200mm 90mm

(3) Maximum tool mass: 2 kg (total mass: 15 kg)/3 kg (total mass:22 kg) When mounting a tool of 2 kg ormore (up to 3 kg), set the tool mass to 3 kg.(From a viewpoint of safety, 3 kg isfactory–set.)

Keep relay K0.4 = 0 3 kg settingK0.4 = 1 2 kg setting.

250 (Depend on specifications see Tables)

200 (α–T14iCSe)

(α–T14iCe/CLe,α–T21iCe/CLe)

(Depend on specifications see Tables) (α–T21iCSe)190

Fig.5 (j) Tool Limits

Be careful not to use tools that do not satisfy the dimensional restrictionsabove. Otherwise, the troubles listed below can occur.

(1) A tool longer than the maximum tool length can interfere with thesplash guard in turret turning.

(2) When the maximum tool diameter is exceeded:

* Rigid tapping may not be able to be performed normally.

(3) When the maximum tool weight is exceeded:

* Trouble can occur when the tool is changed.

* If an excessively heavy tool is used, the temperature of the spindlebearing rises abnormally, reducing the life of the spindle bearing.

(Setting the tool mass)

(1) Specify the following PMC parameters:K00#4 = 0: Changes the tool mass to 3 kg.


30

K00#4 = 1: Changes the tool mass to 2 kg.

NOTEBit 4 of parameter K00 is set to 0 (tool mass of 3 kg) beforeshipment from the factory.

(2) Turn the power OFF.

(3) Turn the power ON. The following message appears on the screen.“PARAMETER FOR TOOL MASS 3kg IS SET. ARE YOUSURE?” or “PARAMETER FOR TOOL MASS 2kg IS SET. AREYOU SURE?”

(4) Click soft key [EXEC] or [CANCEL].To automatically change the NC parameters related to the tool mass,click [EXEC].To return bit 4 of parameter K00 to the previous value and cancel thechanging of the NC parameters related to the tool mass, click[CANCEL].

(5) If [EXEC] is clicked in the above step, turn the power OFF and thenON again according to the guidance.

B–85014EN/01 6. JIGSOUTLINE

31

6 JIGS

Three T–shaped grooves with the nominal size of 14 mm are provided atintervals of 125 mm on the top surface of the table. (See Appendix B,“DIMENSIONS OF THE MACHINE”.)

NOTEA maximum load of 200 kg (Max 150kg for α–T14iCSe andα–T21iCSe), including jigs and workpieces, can be put onthe table. Avoid putting more on the table than themaximum load.

7. COOLANT B–85014EN/01OUTLINE

32

7 COOLANT

The capacity of the coolant tank of the ROBODRILL α–T14/21iC seriesare approximately 100 or 200 litres. When water–soluble coolant isthinned with water, take every precaution so water does not drop on themachine or the NC unit.

FANUC recommends the following coolants (cutting fluids).

Type Manufacturer Brand

Nisseki Mitsubishi UNICUT TG20

OilyIDEMITSU KOSAN CO. LTD. DAPHNE CUT

AS–25FOilySHOWA SHELL SEKIYU K.K. SPEED SC22A

Mobil Oil Corp. Bakumaru 15J

Nisseki Mitsubishi UNISOLUBLE HD–MUNISOLUBLE HD

IDEMITSU KOSAN CO. LTD. DAPHNE MILCOOL SD

Water–soluble SHOWA SHELL SEKIYU K.K. DROMUS OIL EPL

MOBIL OIL CORPORATION MOBIL MET 150MOBIL MET 150

Yusiro Chemical Industry Co., Ltd. Yusiroken EZ20

NOTEOn the ROBODRILL, nitrile–butadiene rubber (NBR) andfluorination rubber are used as sealant and protectivematerials. Do not use so strong coolant that will cause paintto peel off.

II. INSTALLATION

B–85014EN/01 INSTALLATION

35

The machine shall be moved or installed by the maintenance personnel.

Moving or installing the ROBODRILL requires understanding it in details.

No person other than the maintenance personnel of the ROBODRILLshall move or install it.

The term “maintenance personnel” refers to those people who haveworking knowledge about machinery and electricity for maintenance andhave finished the maintenance course of the FA school orROBOMACHINE school or who have equivalent knowledge and havebeen certified by the company they work for.

Fork lift or crane operators in charge of moving the ROBODRILL shallhave the relevant license.

To lift the machine, use a crane with an allowable load of at least 3 tons.

Do not use a crane, hook, or rope whose allowable load is below 3 tonsto lift the machine.

If the machine gets out of balance when lifted, put it down on the floor,and adjust the length of the hook and rope, then lift it again.

Place the machine on a flat, stable floor.

The floor on which the machine is installed must satisfy the followingconditions:

1. Placing a load of 2.5 tons on the floor does not deform it ordevelop any other trouble.

2. The floor is completely flat, with no protuberance or hollow.3. The floor surface is hard enough to withstand a pressure of 1.5

MPa (15 kgf/cm2), without being deformed.4. The floor surface is smooth.5. The floor will not deteriorate with time.6. The floor will not deteriorate in regular use.

If the floor does not meet any of the above conditions, it can develop a failure,making it impossible to make the most of the machine performance.

Allow a service clearance in an area where the machine is installed.

Illuminate in the shop floor with a sufficient brightness.

Working in a dark place can invite an incorrect operation, leading to anaccident.

The shop floor on which the machine is installed must be illuminated withat least 300 luxes.

It is recommended that an optional intra–machine lamp be installed.

CAUTIONS

B–85014EN/01INSTALLATION

36

Pay attention to how the mechanism is saved and packed.

When transporting the machine or leaving it unused for a long time,observe the following:

1. Fix the spindle head and table with packing materials.2. Apply a rust inhibitor to the specified portions of the machine.3. Fix the turret mechanism with nylon ties.

Firmly secure the spindle head and table with thepacking materials before removing the Z–axis motor.

The Z–axis motor incorporates a brake. If the Z–axis motor is removedwithout the spindle head and table first being secured with the packingmaterials. therefore, the Z–axis will fall out.

B–85014EN/011. CHECKING INSTALLATION

REQUIREMENTSINSTALLATION

37

1 CHECKING INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

(1) Power supply voltage, frequency (Hz), and power capacity (kVA)Check the following nameplate on the upper side of the NC rack:

JAPAN and export standard

If the value of the power supply voltage indicated on “POWERSUPPLY � V” in the nameplate is in the range of +10% to –15%, thepower supply voltage is valid. (220V is valid for only 60Hz)

(3 PHASE = three phases)If the frequency is 50 �1 or 60 �1 Hz, it is valid.

(2) Ambient temperatureIn operation : 0 �C to 45 �CIn storage or transportation : –20 �C to 60 �C

(3) Temperature changeWithin 1.1 �C/min.

(4) HumidityNormal : 75% or less (relative humidity)Temporary : 95% or less

(5) Compressed air supply0.49 MPa, 150 N�/min

2. TRANSPORTATION PROCEDURE B–85014EN/01INSTALLATION

38

2 TRANSPORTATION PROCEDURE

B–85014EN/01 2. TRANSPORTATION PROCEDUREINSTALLATION

39

Prepare for transporting the machine according to the following steps:

(1) Remove the Y–axis telescopic cover (at the front).

(2) Remove the coolant nozzle base at the bottom of the spindle head.

(3) Move the table to the position indicated by the machine coordinatesX=250(T14/21iCe)/350(T14/21iCLe)/150(T14/21iCSe),Y=–300(T14(21)iCe, iCLe)/–277(T14(21)iCSe).

(4) Firmly secure the packing plate using the M12 tapped hole on the toprear of the table. Be careful not to damage the top of the table.

Fig.2.1 (a) Securing the Packing Plate (at the Table)

(5) Slowly lower the spindle head to the position where Z=–282. Becareful not to hit the spindle head against the packing plate.

(6) Check whether the position of the hole on the packing plate is alignedwith that of the tapped hole for installing the coolant nozzle base atthe bottom of the spindle head. If not, move the table slightly to makethe adjustment.

(7) After the hole position is aligned correctly, lower the spindle headuntil it touches the packing plate.

(8) Turn off the power.

(9) Fix the spindle head to the packing plate with an M12�30 bolt,spring washer, and plain washer.

Fig.2.1 (b) Securing the Packing Plate (at Spindle Head)

2.1PREPARATIONBEFORETRANSPORTATION

2. TRANSPORTATION PROCEDURE B–85014EN/01INSTALLATION

40

(10)Secure the turret with the nylon band or equivalent.

Turret

Bolt

Turret supprt

Spring

Nylon band

Turretcam

Cam groove

Fig.2.1 (c) Securing the Turret

(11)Install two M30 eyebolts in the upper front of the bed and on top ofthe column.

M30 eyebolts

M30 eyebolt

Fig.2.1 (d) Transportation status

NOTEBe sure to make the above preparations before transporting or lifting the machine.

B–85014EN/01 2. TRANSPORTATION PROCEDUREINSTALLATION

41

Fig.2.2 Lift the machine

Three eyebolts and a rope or cable are used to lift the machine.

NOTE1 Use a rope or cable whose permissible load is 3000 kg or

more.2 Be very careful not to impact the machine when lifting it.

That is, lift the machine slowly.3 If the rope can directly touch the machine, insert cloth or

wood between the rope and the machine to prevent themachine from being damaged.

2.2TRANSPORTATION

3. INSTALLATION B–85014EN/01INSTALLATION

42

3 INSTALLATION

B–85014EN/01 3. INSTALLATIONINSTALLATION

43

Position the attached leveling blocks under the four leveling bolts andslowly put the machine on the blocks. Set the nuts over the casting (bed).

Leveling bolt

Nut

Leveling block

α–T14/21iCe

α–T14/21iCLe

α–T14/21iCSe

Fig.3.1 Mount the YC stand with the shown surface (surface with white resin) facing forward.

3.1INSTALLINGLEVELING BOLTSAND BLOCKS


44

Remove the two M30 eyebolts on the top front of the bed.3.2REMOVING THEEYEBOLTS FORLIFTING THEMACHINE


45

Untie the nylon band that secures the turret.

Remove the packing plate according to the following steps:

(1) Remove the bolts fixing the packing plate on the top of the table andat the bottom of the spindle head.

(2) After turning on the power, slowly raise the spindle head and removethe packing plate.(See II–3.4 for connecting the power supply.)

(3) Remove three eye bolts.

3.3REMOVING THEPACKING PLATE


46

Connect the power cable to the power distribution board. Then, connectthe coolant to the terminals of the coolant motor (U.V.W.G.).

Phase Matching

Connect an input terminal block phase rotation meter as shown in Fig.3.4.1 (a), and connect the power supply so that the phase rotation meterdisk rotates clockwise.

To switchboard

Phase rotation meter

Circuit breaker

Fig.3.4.1 (a) Connecting of Phase Rotation Meter

3.4CONNECTING THEPOWER SUPPLY

3.4.1Cabling and PhaseMatching


47

Fuses

Fuses are located in the control unit cabinet as shown below. Confirmthese fuses are not blown out.

Fuses (F1 to F5)

Fuses (F6)

Fig.3.4.1 (b) Locations of Fuses (1/5)

Fuses (1A)

Fig.3.4.1 (c) Locations of Fuses (2/5)


48

Fuses (3.2A)

Fuses (2.0A)Fuses (1.0A)

Fuses (1A)

Fuses (1A)

Fig.3.4.1 (d) Locations of Fuses (3/5)


49

CP1

Fuses (5A)

FUSE

Rear side of LCD

Fig.3.4.1 (e) Locations of Fuses (4/5)

Fuses (5A)

Fig.3.4.1 (f) Locations of Fuses (5/5)


50

Check the following items for each input power supply.

Current values of thermal relay

Thermal Relay Set Value

Coolant MCC1 1.8A (NOTE)

Flood coolant MCC2 2.1A

NOTEAdjust the setting to the midpoint of 1.4 A and 2.2 A. (MCC1)Adjust the setting to the midpoint of 1.7 A and 2.6 A. (MCC2)

3.4.2Setting of Input PowerSupply


51

Compressed air is used for spindle air blow and for opening and closingthe automatic door in the ROBODRILL α–T14/21iCe series.

Connect the compressed air supply satisfying the following specificationwith the IN port (PT 1/4 inch) of the filter regulator at the rear of splashguard.

Specification:

490 kPa (5 kgf/cm2 of gauge pressure)0.5 m3/min (for a machine with an automatic door opening +0.02m3/min are added, respectively.)

3.5CONNECTING THECOMPRESSED AIRSUPPLY


52

Regulator

Air supply inlet

Pressure adjustment valve(to be pulled up and turned)

Top view

Primary filter/regulatorPressure setting : 0.5MPa (Pressure range mark : 0.4MPa to 0.6MPa)

Pressure switchPressure setting : 0.3MPa

Air sealing regulatorPressure setting : 0.04MPa (Pressure range mark : 0.03MPa to 0.05MPa)

Speed con-troller fullyopened

Pressure switchPressure setting : 0.3MPa

Air sealing regulatorPressure setting : 0.04MPa (Pressure range mark : 0.03MPa to 0.05MPa)

Speed control-ler fullyopened

Primary filter/regulatorPressure setting : 0.5MPa (Pressure range mark : 0.4MPa to 0.6MPa)

Rotary–union regulatorPressure setting : 0.3MPa (Pressure range mark : 0.26MPa to 0.34MPa)


53

The following parts are coated with corrosion–preventive grease forpreventing them from being corroded during transportation. Remove thecorrosion–preventive grease from these parts.

� Rolling guides (LM guides) for X, Y, Z axis� Internal face of spindle taper part� Upper face of table� Turret rear side and spindle nose gears

(After removing anticorrosive grease, apply lubricating grease.Refer to V–2.1.1).

3.6REMOVAL OFCORROSIONPREVENTIVEGREASE


54

The ROBODRILL α-T14/21iCe may be shipped with its Z-axis motordismounted. In this case, the Z-axis motor must be mounted so that thefactory-set machine zero point is reestablished correctly when themachine is installed. To achieve this, follow the procedure below.

(1) Turn off the power to the machine, or check that the power to themachine is already off.

(2) Remove the cover from the Z–axis housing. (These items arepackaged separately when shipped.)

(3) Wipe off any rust inhibitor grease from the coupling.(4) After making sure that the motor shaft is provided with a key, place

the servo motor on the housing with the motor shaft key aligned tothe key groove of the coupling.

Coupling Retaining screwTightening torque : 1.4KN (145kg.cm)

(5) As shown below, after making sure that the motor connector is on theleft–hand side of the machine as viewed from the front of themachine, tighten the motor mounting bolts. If the motor and housingmounting bolt holes are not in line, align them by rotating the motormanually with a relatively strong force.

3.7MOUNTING A Z–AXISMOTOR AT MACHINEINSTALLATION


55

(6) Fasten the coupling retaining bolts on the motor shaft side to aspecified torque (1.4 kN or 145 kg.cm). If the bolts are in such a phasethat tightening is impossible, turn on the power and move the Z–axismanually to put them in a phase that allows tightening, then tightenthem. (Do not perform automatic operation with the bolts for thecoupling loose.)

(7) Connect the three Z-axis motor cables.

(8) Mount the Z-axis housing cover, then tighten the screws.

(9) After turning on the power, make a reference position return.

Cover

NOTE1 The motor grid position used as the reference for the zero

point varies from one servo motor to another. If a servomotor is mounted in other than its original machine, themachine zero point will shift, causing abnormal machineoperation. To avoid this, motors must be mounted only onthe machine with which they are supplied.

2 After motor installation, an alarm is issued to request originreturn when the power is turned on. For an explanation ofhow to perform origin return, see Section V3.


56

After removing the devices for transportation, level the machine tool.

(1) Turn on the power and move the table to the middle of X and Y–axisstroke.

(2) After loosening fixing nuts, adjust the leveling bolts to a suitablelength.

(3) Adjust for level by the four leveling bolts by turns to within 0.04mm/m using the 150 mm JIS first class level.Finally, secure the leveling bolts with the fixing nuts.

(4) Confirm that level is maintained, to within 0.04 mm/m at the strokeend of the positive and negative sides of the Y axis.

Fig.3.8 Leveling

3.8LEVEL ADJUSTING


57

(1) Attach one arbor to the grip through the notch of the cover at the rightrear of the turret.

(2) Press the key on the MDI operator’s panel.

(3) Press the key, which is one of the rapid traverse selection

buttons on the machine operator’s panel.

(4) Press the key on the machine operator’s panel. Change cutting

tools once under no–load running.Then, check whether tools were changed smoothly. If not, prepare topress the EMERGENCY STOP key immediately.

(5) Attach one arbor to the grip through the notch.

(6) Press the key.

Check whether the arbor and the spindle head are firmly clampedtogether.

NOTEIf the arbor is not correctly attached to the grip, a failure suchas tool dropping occurs.If tools can be changed smoothly, any of the rapid traverseselection buttons may be pressed on the machineoperator ’s panel.

(7) After repeating the same procedure, check whether fourteen andtwentyone arbors are gripped in the turret.

(8) Turn off the power.

NOTE1 The turret is finely adjusted. Do not carelessly grab or apply

load to the turret.2 The weight of an arbor to be installed in the turret must be

2 kg max. The total weight of the fourteen arbors must notexceed 15 kg and 23kg. When mounting a tool of 2 kg ormore (up to 3 kg), set the tool mass to 3 kg. The tool massis factory–set to 3 kg to assure operator safety.

3 Take into consideration the weight of each arbor wheninstalling the arbors so that the turret is not out of balancein weight.

3.9MOUNTING TOOLS


58

After installing the machine, install the coolant unit (and flood–coolantunit) according to the following steps:

(1) Install the coolant tank at the back of the machine, or under the NCrack. The coolant tank must, however, be installed so that the pumpis positioned at the right of the machine, when viewing the machinefrom the front.

(2) Install the nozzle at the bottom of the spindle head.

(3) Connect the pump to the nozzle, and the pump to the pipe of theflood–coolant unit.

(4) Connect the controller rack to the pump terminal with the coolantcable.

NOTEInsulate the terminals using vinyl caps.

Pump for coolant unit Pump for flood coolant unit

Fig.3.10 (a)

3.10INSTALLING THECOOLANT UNIT


59

Fig.3.10 (b)


60

(5) Press the coolant button. Check that the pump rotates in the directionshown by the arrow when viewing the pump from the window on thetop of the pump. Then stop the rotation of the pump.

Direction of rotation

Fig.3.10 (c) Pump and Surrounding Area

(6) Supply the coolant to the coolant tank.


61

(1) Mount the YC stand with the shown surface (surface with white resin)facing forward.

(2) Mount a telescopic cover. Temporarily tighten the flange securingbolts.

(3) Move the telescopic cover, along the Y–axis toward you, as much aspossible. Push in the free covers as far as possible, so that thetelescopic cover does not push the stopper vertically. Then, tightenthe flange securing bolts.

Cover fixed to the saddle

Free cover

Head

Saddle

Flange securing bolt

Fig.3.11

3.11Y–AXIS TELESCOPICCOVER (Y–COVER F)

4. PACKING B–85014EN/01INSTALLATION

62

4 PACKING

When the machine is moved, transported, or lifted, the machine must bepacked to prevent the machine from being impacted.

Pack the machine according to the following steps:

(1) Sufficiently clean the top of the table and the inside of the splashguard so that cuttings or other foreign matter do not remain in themachine.

(2) Remove the tools from the turret.

(3) See II–2.1 when packing the machine.

III. ROUTINE OPERATIONS

B–85014EN/01 1. OPERATING POSITIONSROUTINE OPERATIONS

65

1 OPERATING POSITIONS

The following figure shows the working places for the α–T14/21iCeseries.

TableInternal Light

Right Fixed cover

Coolant unit

Left Fixed cover

Operator’s panel

Front door

1. OPERATING POSITIONS B–85014EN/01ROUTINE OPERATIONS

66

The following table lists the operating positions and working places.

No. Operation Operating position Working place Viewedfrom

1 Workpiece change and jig setting Machine front section Operator’s panel and table top A

2 Program editing and data input/output Machine front section Operator’s panel A

3 Power on/off Machine front/rearsection

Operator’s panel and controller cabinetrear section

A,B

4 Tool change Machine front section Turret A

5 Chip cleaning Machine front/rear section

Inside the splash guard and coolant unit A,B

6 Coolant replenishment Machine rear section Coolant unit B

7 Fuse replacement Machine rear section Inside the controller cabinet B

8 Air pressure supplying and shutting off Machine rear section Air unit B

9 Greasing Machine front section/both sides

Inside the splash guard A,C,D

10 Lubricant replenishment for the lubrication unit

Machine rear section Lubrication unit B

11 Fluorescent lamp replacement Machine front section Intra–machine lamp A

12 Spindle motor cleaning Machine front section Spindle motor A

Before greasing, turn off the power, and remove the fixed side covers andthe protective cover.

Do not perform operation at a location other than the operation locationsdescribed above. Working in the following places, for example, is likelyto be hazardous because of a bad working condition or unstable footing.

� Inside the machine� On top of the controller cabinet� On top of the column� On top of the splash guard� On top of the turret support

B–85014EN/01 2. SWITCHING POWER ON AND OFFROUTINE OPERATIONS

67

2 SWITCHING POWER ON AND OFF

2. SWITCHING POWER ON AND OFF B–85014EN/01ROUTINE OPERATIONS

68

(1) Turn the handle of the circuit breaker on the control unit rack until itclicks in the ON position. (Check that the door of the control unit rackis closed. If it is open, close it before turning the breaker handle tothe ON position.)

Fig.2.1 Turning the Breaker On

(2) Turn the power on by pressing the POWER ON button on theoperator’s panel.

(3) Several seconds after switching the power on, the “NOT READY”display on the CRT screen disappears, and the machine is ready foroperation.

(4) Confirm that the fan motor for ventilation of the control unit rackrunning.

NOTEWhen the power is switched on, do not simultaneouslypress any button (on the MDI panel or the machineoperator ’s panel) other than the POWER ON button.

2.1SWITCHING POWERON

B–85014EN/01 2. SWITCHING POWER ON AND OFFROUTINE OPERATIONS

69

(1) Confirm that the lamp of the CYCLE START button on the operator’spanel is not lit.

Confirm this lamp is off.

(2) Confirm that no movable parts of the machine are moving.

(3) If any input/output device is connected, turn it off.

(4) Press the POWER OFF button.

(5) Turn the circuit–breaker handle on the door of the control unit rackto the OFF position.

Fig.2.2 Turning the Breaker Off

NOTE1 If the door of the control unit rack is not locked, the door

opens when the breaker handle is fully turned to the OFFside. Normally, the door should be locked.

2 When the power is switched off, do not simultaneouslypress any key (on the MDI panel or the machine operator’spanel) other than the POWER OFF key.

3 An automatic power disconnect function is available. Itturns the power off automatically at the end of a program(M30). (See Section IV–17.)

2.2SWITCHING POWEROFF

3. EMERGENCY STOP B–85014EN/01ROUTINE OPERATIONS

70

3 EMERGENCY STOP

This button is used to instantly stop the movement of the machine at thetime of an emergency.If the machine shows unexpected operation, all operation of the machinecan be stopped by pressing the EMERGENCY STOP button.When the EMERGENCY STOP button is pressed, the following eventsoccur:

(a) All moving axes stop immediately.

(b) The rotating spindle stops immediately.Coolant stops its operation. And all the automatic operation normanual operation become unoperable state.

(c) The control unit is reset and the machine alarm status is assumed.

(d) The Z axis slightly descends.If the EMERGENCY STOP button is pressed while tool change is inprogress, the following takes place depending on the status of operation:

(a) If the spindle orientation is in progress, the spindle stopsimmediately.

(b) If the Z axis is ascending, the Z axis stops moving immediately andthe spindle is freed from the controlled status.

(c) If the turret is rotating, it stops quickly.

(d) If the Z axis is descending, the Z axis stops moving immediately andthe spindle is freed from the controlled status.

(See Section V–4” for recovering the machine after pressing theEMERGENCY STOP button during the tool change job.)

Fig.3 EMERGENCY STOP Button

The EMERGENCY STOP button is locked when it is pressed. It isunlocked when it is turned clockwise.

NOTE1 The emergency stop operation should be done before

anything else when danger arises. Be prepared to press thebutton whenever necessary.

2 The emergency stop causes electric current to the motorsto be cut off.

3 Before releasing the emergency stop, remove the cause ofthe problem.

B–85014EN/014. OPENING/CLOSING

THE SPLASH–GUARD DOORROUTINE OPERATIONS

71

4 OPENING/CLOSING THE SPLASH–GUARD DOOR

The FANUC ROBODRILL α–T14/21iCe series monitors the state of thesplash–guard front door (safety door), using a controller.

To assure safe use of the machine, there are restrictions on the operationof the machine with the safety door open. During machine operation,unlocking the safety door (pressing the <DOOR> key on the operator’spanel) suspends the operation. This function is known as a splash–guarddoor interlock function.

Electromagnetic lock swich

Front door

α–T14(21)iCe/iCLe


Front door

α–T14/21iCSe

4. OPENING/CLOSING THE SPLASH–GUARD DOOR B–85014EN/01ROUTINE OPERATIONS

72

The safety door is equipped with a lock mechanism, which usuallyprevents the door from opening. Performing either of the following stepsunlocks the door, allowing you to open it.

� Press the <DOOR> key.

� Issue M02 or M30 (if bit 6 of PMC parameter K12 = 1).

When the safety door is unlocked, the <DOOR> key LED on theoperator’s panel lights.

Performing the following steps locks the safety door.

When the safety door is open:� Close the safety door.

When the safety door is closed (but not locked):� Press the <DOOR> key on the operator’s panel.

When the safety door is locked, the <DOOR> key LED on the operator’spanel goes off.(If the safety door is released immediately before it is completely closed,the operator message “2004 DOOR IS UNLOCKED FORCIBLY” isdisplayed. This message, however, does not indicate a failure.)

In the following cases, the safety door cannot be unlocked.

� Within about 20 seconds after the power is turned on.

� When the spindle or an axis is moving.

� When an alarm occurs for the spindle or an axis, and safety cannotbe confirmed.

4.1LOCKING THESAFETY DOOR



73

The following restrictions are placed on the operation of the machine withthe safety door open.

1) Automatic operation is impossible.2) MDI operation is impossible.3) No coolant can be supplied. However, an air blow is output even

when the safety door is open.4) Tool exchange is impossible.5) There are speed limits to manual operation. Only the following

operations are possible.� Spindle rotation of 100 min–1 or less (Machines designed to the

CE marking specification are excluded.)

� Manual X–, Y–, and Z–axis movement of 2 m/min or less

� Manual additional axis movement of 700 degrees/min or less

� Manual handle feed

6) During manual operation with the safety door open:� If the mode is switched, the spindle and each axis stop.

� When the safety door is closed, the spindle and each axis stop.

4.2RESTRICTIONS ONTHE OPERATION OFTHE MACHINE WITHTHE SAFETY DOOROPEN


74

When the safety door is locked (closed), unlocking it (pressing the<DOOR> button on the operator’s panel) stops the machine in thesequence stated below.

1) The spindle and axes are decelerated to a stop by effecting feed hold.2) If tool change is under way, the machine is stopped after the tool

change is completed.3) Coolant and air blow output operations stop.4) If rigid tapping is under way, after the drill bit reaches the hole bottom

or R point, the spindle and axes are decelerated to a stop with the rigidmode retained.

5) If dwelling is under way, the dwelling is brought to a pause.6) If spindle orientation is under way, the machine is stopped after the

orientation is finished.To resume automatic operation, follow the steps below.

1) Close the safety door without doing anything else.(Closing the doorlocks it automatically.)If the door is closed but not locked, press the DOOR button on theoperator’s panel.

2) If the spindle was rotating when the safety door was opened, press thespindle rotation button during the manual mode to cause the spindleto start rotating. (If the spindle is not started to rotate, operatormessage No. 2009 will be displayed when the start button is pressed,in which case it is impossible to resume automatic operation.)

3) If coolant and air blow output operations are performed, press thecoolant button then perform another coolant output operation. (If thecoolant button is not pressed, automatic operation is resumed with nocoolant supplied when the start button is pressed.)

4) Select the operation mode, and press the start button.

4.3IF THE SAFETYDOOR IS UNLOCKEDDURING OPERATION



75

(1) To open the door when the power is off, use the LOCK/UNLOCKkey.

(2) When the power is on, do not use the LOCK/UNLOCK key to openthe door.If you open the door with the unlock key, the message “2004 DOORIS UNLOCKED FORCIBLY” is displayed.

(3) When the power is off, no operator is allowed to open the door.

(4) If you need to open the door when the power is off, ask themaintenance personnel.

(5) To open the door when the power is off, the maintenance personnelmust use the LOCK/UNLOCK key, which is managed by the sectorin charge of maintenance. Do no leave the key attached to the door.

Unlocked state Locked state


KEY

4.4OPENING ANDCLOSING THE DOORWHEN THE POWERIS OFF


76

A machine operation related to the locking/unlocking of the safety doorcan be selected.

(1) Safety door control when machining endsWhether to unlock the safety door when machining ends can beselected.

PMCparameter Setting Function

K11.7 *0 When M00/M01 is specified, the safety door is not unlocked.

1 When M00/M01 is specified, the safety door is unlocked.

K12.6 0 When M02/M30 is specified, the safety door is not unlocked.

*1 When M02/M30 is specified, the safety door is unlocked.

The settings marked with * are factory settings.When an automatic door (option) is mounted, these parameters areignored (assumed to be set to 0).

(2) Safety door control in single–block operationWhether to unlock the safety door automatically when operationstops in the single–block operation mode can be selected.


K11.1 *0 The safety door is not unlocked when operation stops in the single–block operation mode.

1 The safety door is unlocked when operation stops in the single–block operation mode.

T82 (No.42) *2000(ms) Wait time from the stop of operation in the single–block operation mode until the safety dooris unlocked

The settings marked with * are factory settings.

(3) General safety door controlWhether the safety door is automatically unlocked when operationstops in the single–block operation mode can be selected.


K12.7 *0 � The safety door is not unlocked when the power is turned on.

� The safety door is locked when the safety door is closed.

� The safety door is not locked when automatic operation/MDI operation is started.

� The safety door is not unlocked after a tool change is made using the tool change buttonon the operator’s panel.

1 � The door is unlocked when the power is turned on.

� The door is not locked even when the safety door is closed.

� The safety door is locked when automatic operation/MDI operation is started.

� The safety door is unlocked after a tool change is made using the tool change button onthe operator’s panel.

The settings marked with * are factory settings.

4.5SWITCHING OFSAFETY DOOR LOCKCONTROL



77

Before opening the safety door, make sure that the Z–axis does notcome down.

The Z–axis (spindle head) comes down once in a while because of theZ–axis brake failing to work. Before opening the safety door, make surethat the Z–axis does not come down.

When the safety door is open, be careful that the Z–axis may come down.

During maintenance underneath the Z–axis, place a wooden blockbetween the table and spindle head so that the Z–axis will not come downeven if the brake fails to work.

Be careful when opening the safety door with the power switchedoff.

Before opening the safety door with the power switched off, make surethat the Z–axis (spindle head) does not come down.

4.6SAFETYPRECAUTIONS

5. MOUNTING TOOLS B–85014EN/01ROUTINE OPERATIONS

78

5 MOUNTING TOOLS

Confirm that all cutters to be used are firmly held on the tools and that thecutters have no abnormal wear or chips.

The used tools must not exceed the maximum tool diameter, themaximum tool length, or the maximum tool weight. For details of thetools that may be used and for the installation of tools, see Section I–3,“TOOLS”.

Install each tool by pushing it into the respective grip until it stops.

After mounting the tools, check whether they are firmly installed.

Install the tools so that they are well–distributed over the turret, and so thatthere is no gross imbalance of weight.

B–85014EN/016. MOUNTING JIGS AND

WORKPIECESROUTINE OPERATIONS

79

6 MOUNTING JIGS AND WORKPIECES

To fix the jigs on the table, the T–bolt having the nominal diameter of 14mm (as specified in JIS B 1166) or the T–nut having the nominal diameterof 14 mm (as specified in JIS B 1167) can be used.

Using a T–bolt Using a T–nut

Before starting automatic running, confirm the following:

(a) Confirm that the jigs are firmly fixed on the table.

(b) Confirm that the workpieces are firmly fixed on the jigs. Especially,when an air cylinder jig is used, confirm that the necessary airpressure is obtained.

NOTE1 The maximum load capacity of the α–T14(21)iCe/iCLe

table is 250 kg and of the α–T14/21iCSe table is 150 kg.2 When the load to be placed on the table weights 100 kg or

more, change the setting of “permissible mass ofworkpiece” to “more than 100 kg” on the QUICK screen. Ifoperation is continued with “less than 100 kg” set, a servoalarm may be generated.

6. MOUNTING JIGS AND WORKPIECES B–85014EN/01ROUTINE OPERATIONS

80

Set table load

B–85014EN/01 7. COOLANT SUPPLYROUTINE OPERATIONS

81

7 COOLANT SUPPLY

Check that the amount of coolant is sufficient. If the amount of coolantis insufficient, add some in the manner shown below:

Some water soluble coolants solidify when the stock solution is put intowater or coolant solution. When water soluble coolant is used, useanother container to thin the stock solution well before pouring it into thetank.

If the coolant is water soluble, a substantial portion of coolant reductionis caused by the evaporation of water. If no degradation of quality isnoticed, only adding water may be necessary.

NOTEDo not spill water into the splash guard. Water can causecorrosion.

8. PREPARING PROGRAMS [CNC OPERATION] B–85014EN/01ROUTINE OPERATIONS

82

8 PREPARING PROGRAMS [CNC OPERATION]

Call the program according to the following procedure.

Press to select [CNC operation].

(1) Press the mode selection key to put the machine in the

operation mode (MEM).

(2) Press and in the stated sequence to select the program

screen.

(3) Call the program by specifying its program number.

Example) To call O0010, press and in the stated

sequence to select the soft key “O search” on the screen.Program O0010 will be called.

NOTEIf O0010 is not found, an alarm is issued. Press the resetkey and enter the program number again.

This is the end of preparation for automatic operation.

B–85014EN/01 9. TRIAL RUNROUTINE OPERATIONS

83

9 TRIAL RUN

The following functions can be used for trial run.

(a) SINGLE BLOCKSingle block is the function that executes one block of the programeach time the CYCLE START button is pressed.

(1) Turn on the SINGL BLOCK key to set the single block.

One block of the program is executed and the machine tool stops.When the CYCLE START button is pressed, the next block isexecuted and the machine tool stops.To release the single block mode press the SINGL BLOCK keyagain.

NOTE1 For G28 and G29, after the single block is executed, the

machine tool stops even during machining.2 The single block stop point in a canned cycle is any of the

end point 1, 2, or 6 in the figure shown below.

3 For a tool change sequence, the machine tool stops at thespecified point and the FEED HOLD lamp lights.

Rapid traverse

1

2

3

4

5

6

Cutting feed

9. TRIAL RUN B–85014EN/01ROUTINE OPERATIONS

84

(b) DRY RUNWhen dry run is effected, the F–function specified in the program isignored and the feedrate is set to the maximum jog feedrate at rapidtraverse or cutting feed command.

Dry run key

NOTE1 During tool change operation, the dry run function cannot be

turned on/off.2 The rapid traverse rate can be held as it is by changing the

sixth bit (RDRN) of parameter 1401 from 1 to 0. For details,refer to the NC Operator’s Manual.

(c) MACHINE LOCKBy making the machine lock on, the machine tool can be displayedas if it were moving although it is not. The display changesmomentarily at the specified speed. This operation support functionis used for program check.To switch machine lock, operate with the quick screen ”SEQ.SELECTION.

NOTE1 Even if the G27 or G28 command is executed, the reference

position LED (HOME) does not light because the machinetool does not move to the reference position.

2 All M and S functions except M06 (tool change command)are executed.

3 After executing a machine lock operation, be sure to turn thepower off then back on.


85

(d) Z AXIS LOCKWhen the Z AXIS LOCK is on, only the Z axis enters the machinelock status. This Z axis lock is useful in checking the programcontents by drawing the axis movement with a ball–point pen.To switch Z axis lock, operate with the quick screen ”SEQ.SELECTION.

NOTE1 Even when the G27 or G28 command is executed, the

reference position lamp does not light because the machinetool does not move to the reference position.

2 The M–function and the S–function are executed. (Only thetool change command, M06, is not executed.)

3 After executing a Z–axis lock operation, be sure to turn thepower off then back on.

(e) RAPID TRAVERSE RATE OVERRIDE

An override of 100%, 25%, or LOW can be applied. If an overrideof 25% is applied when the rapid traverse rate is 48 m/min, the rapidtraverse rate becomes about 12 m/min. When an override of LOWis applied, the fixed rapid traverse rate 400 mm/min is used. A rapidtraverse command for applying this override is as follows:

(1) Rapid traverse by G00

(2) Rapid traverse during a canned cycle

(3) Rapid traverse at G27, G28, or G29

(4) Manual rapid traverse

(5) Rapid traverse for manual return to the reference position

(6) Rapid traverse in tool change sequenceThe following operations are related to the trial run: (For details ofeach operation, see Section III–3, “EMERGENCY STOP” andSection IV–5.4, “Settings and Operations of Automatic Running.”)

(a) CYCLE STARTOperation is started by pressing the CYCLE START button. Whenthe CYCLE START button is pressed in the feed hold mode,operation is restarted.

CYCLE START button

(b) FEED HOLD

9. TRIAL RUN B–85014EN/01ROUTINE OPERATIONS

86

When the FEED HOLD button is pressed, traverse of the axes stopsduring traverse. For restart, press the CYCLE START button.The status of stopping by the feed hold function is called “feed holdstatus”.)

FEED HOLD button

(c) RESETAutomatic running is suspended by pressing the <RESET> key. The<RESET> key is used for other purposes, such as releasing the alarm.

<RESET> key

Trial run is performed using the functions described above.Generally, the dry run function need not be used when a provenmachining program is used. Dry run is useful for checking that theF values in the program are appropriate or for conducting a trial runto check the operation of a program that is used for the first time.The following is the description of an example of a normal trial run:

(1) Show the program screen in the AUTO mode, and call theprogram to be used.

Memory mode button Program screen

Number input + [O.SRH]

Calling a program

+

(2) Enable the single block function and apply rapid traverse override25%.

Single block enabled Rapid traverse feedrate override 25%

(3) Press the CYCLE START button as necessary, and check eachoperation of the program. (If you encounter an unexpectedoperation, immediately press the FEED HOLD button.)


87

CYCLE START button

FEED HOLD button

(4) At a position where the workpiece and the tool are close to eachother, set the rapid traverse override to LOW.

Rapid traverse override LOW

(5) Stop operation by pressing the FEED HOLD button just beforethe workpiece and the tool contact each other. Check the depthof the cut, the workpiece coordinate system, the cuttercompensation in the program, and the remaining traverse amountof the current block that is displayed on the program check screen.

Check the depth of cut, remainingtraverse amount, etc.

(6) Confirm that the machining status is not abnormal in themachining block.

(7) When a series of machining checks have been finished and theprogram has been executed, the trial run ends.

(8) Disable the single block function, apply the 100% rapid traversefeedrate override, and perform regular operation.

Single block disabled 100% rapid traverse override

10. AUTOMATIC RUNNING [CNC OPERATION] B–85014EN/01ROUTINE OPERATIONS

88

10 AUTOMATIC RUNNING [CNC OPERATION]

Machine operation that follows the program is called automatic running.

The starting, stopping, and restarting procedure of automatic running isdescribed in this section. (For details of each operation, see Section IV–5,“AUTOMATIC RUNNING.”)

B–85014EN/0110. AUTOMATIC RUNNING

[CNC OPERATION]ROUTINE OPERATIONS

89

(1) Show the program screen in the memory mode and call the programto be used.

Memory mode button Program screen

Number input + [O.SRH]

Calling a program+

(2) Press the CYCLE START button.

When the CYCLE START button is pressed, automatic runningstarts, and the CYCLE START lamp lights.

10.1STARTINGAUTOMATICRUNNING

10. AUTOMATIC RUNNING [CNC OPERATION] B–85014EN/01ROUTINE OPERATIONS

90

The feed hold function or the single block function stops automaticrunning.

(a) Stop by feed hold function

When the FEED HOLD button is pressed, automatic running stops,and the FEED HOLD lamp lights.At the same time, the CYCLE START lamp goes off.

(b) Stop by single block function

When the single block function is enabled, the machine atops afterexecuting one block of the program. When the CYCLE STARTbutton is pressed again, the machine stops after executing anotherblock.

10.2STOPPINGAUTOMATICRUNNING


[CNC OPERATION]ROUTINE OPERATIONS

91

Press the CYCLE START button again to restart automatic running.

When the CYCLE START button is pressed, the automatic runningrestarts, and the CYCLE START lamp lights. At the same time, theFEED HOLD lamp goes off.

10.3RESTARTINGAUTOMATICRUNNING

B–85014EN/01ROUTINE OPERATIONS11. POWER SHUTOFF METHODS

92

11 POWER SHUTOFF METHODS

B–85014EN/01 ROUTINE OPERATIONS 11. POWER SHUTOFF METHODS

93

Removing the hose from the supply inlet or closing the regulator pressureadjustment valve shuts off the air supply.

Regulator

Air supply inlet

Pressure adjustment valve(to be pulled up and turned)

Top view

Compressed air is used as a spindle taper air blower.

The residual pressure can be released by closing the regulator pressureadjustment valve.

11.1AIR SUPPLYSHUTOFF METHOD

B–85014EN/01ROUTINE OPERATIONS11. POWER SHUTOFF METHODS

94

Setting the main circuit breaker handle on the rear of the machine shutsoff all electric power supplies on the secondary side of the circuit breaker.Note that the power on the primary side remains live. Also keep in mindthat the following units may be connected to the primary side of the maincircuit breaker.

1. External power supply transformer (if provided)2. Non–standard peripheral unit (if installed)

Controller rack

11.2ELECTRIC POWERSUPPLY SHUTOFFMETHOD

IV. DETAILED OPERATIONS

B–85014EN/01 1. QUICK SCREENDETAILED OPERATIONS

97

1 QUICK SCREEN

1. QUICK SCREEN B–85014EN/01DETAILED OPERATIONS

98

“QUICK SCREEN” is the exclusive screen to ROBODRILL. By usingQUICK SCREEN, it is possible to operate the machine and to create amachining program even if a operator is not used to CNC operation. Anda operator who is used to CNC operation well, too, can perform variousoperations by using QUICK SCREEN easily.

1.1OVERVIEW


99

QUICK SCREEN is constituted as follows.

1: MENU

2: MENU OPERATION

SET UP

OPERATION

MAINTENANCE

11: COORDINATES/OFFSET

(Note 1)

12: DATA I/O

13: TOOL LIFE

14: PALLET SETTING

(Note 2)

21: AUTOMATIC OPERATION

22: QUICK C. A. P.

23: QUICK EDITOR

24: COUNTER

(Note 3)

31: SEQ. SELECTION

33: DIAGNOSE / ALARM

32: MAINTENANCE SETTING

NOTE1 Option2 For conversational programming screens, see Section 13, “QUICK CONVERSATIONAL

PROGRAMMING” and Section 36, “MANUAL GUIDE” in Part IV.3 A detailed explanation is provided in manual of Appendix IV–12. QUICK EDTIOR.

1.2CONSTITUTION OFQUICK SCREEN

1.2.1Overview


100

(1) (2) (3)

(5)(6)

(9) (10)(8)(7)

(4)

(1) Screen nameThe number and name of the currently selected QUICK SCREEN aredisplayed.

(2) Selected program numberThe number of the currently selected program is displayed.

(3) Current timeThe current date and time are displayed.

(4) CursorThe selected entry item is indicated. The cursor is moved using thecursor keys on the operator’s panel.

(5) Display of an entered value or operation guidance messageThe data entered from the operator’s panel is displayed.If an entered value or selected soft key is invalid, a guidance messageis displayed.

(6) Display of maximum and minimum valuesA range of values that can be entered to an item where the cursor isset is indicated.

(7) Screen switching soft keysThese soft keys are used to select a QUICK SCREEN.

(8) Function selection soft keysThese soft keys are used to select a function on an individual screen.

(9) Screen group display soft keyThis soft key is used to display a screen group name at (7) when thedisplay is switched to the screen of a different group (for example,from COORDINATES SCREEN “SET UP” group) to AUTOMATICOPERATION SCREEN “OPERATION” group.

1.2.2Descriptions of ScreenDisplays


101

(10)Function selection switching soft keyThis soft key is used to switch functions displayed on the functionselection soft keys (8). It is used if a screen has many functions. (Thissoft key is usable when it has a triangle mark.)

The following three methods can be used for QUICK SCREENswitching:

� Soft keys� Screen number and PAGE key� <MENU> (<MDI>) key

The left–side six soft keys are used for screen switching.

[Example: Switching from the 11:COORDINATES/OFFSET SCREENto the 23:QUICK EDITOR SCREEN]

PRESSScreen group names are displayed on the respectivescreen switching soft keys.

PRESS

The menu of “OPERATION” group is displayed onSOFT–KEYS for screen change.

PRESS

The QUICK EDITOR SCREEN is displayed.

Numeral and page (previous or next page) keys are used for screenswitching.

[Example Switching to the 21:AUTOMATIC OPERATION SCREEN]

Click the <2>, <1>, and <PAGE key> in the stated sequence, because thescreen number of the AUTOMATIC OPERATION SCREEN is 21.

1.2.3Screen SwitchingMethods

1.2.3.1 Soft Key–triggeredScreen Switching

1.2.3.2 Screen Number andPAGE Key TriggeredScreen Switching


102

In addition to the methods described above, a special key can be used todisplay the MENU OPERATION SCREEN; no other screens can bedisplayed using a special key.When a QUICK SCREEN is displayed, pressing the <MENU> (<MDI>)key on the operator’s panel displays the MENU OPERATION SCREEN.

1.2.3.3 MENU OPERATIONKey–triggered ScreenSwitching


103

The constitution of QUICK SCREEN is displayed. The position of each screen is seen by displaying this screen.(This screen is displayed by pressing “1” and PAGE KEY (� or �).)

(1)(2)

Item Contents

1 SCREEN GROUP QUICK SCREEN is classified into three groups, i. e.SET UP, OPERATION, and MAINTENANCE.

2 NAME AND NUMBER OFEACH SCREEN

The number and name of the screen in each groupare displayed.

1.3EXPLANATION OFEACH SCREEN

1.3.1Menu Screen


104

This screen is used to perform one block running by conversationaloperations. (Correspondence to MDI running on CNC SCREEN.)It is possible to run the machine tool by inputting data in accordance withinstructions easily even if a operator is not used to CNC operation.

Item Contents

1 TOOL CHANGE This function is used to change a tool for anotherby conversational operations.The guidance is displayed on screen. Input dataand press CYCLE START button in accordancewith the instructions. Then TOOL CHANGE will befinished.

2 AXES MOVE-MENT

This function is used to move axes to arbitrary posi-tion by conversational operations.The guidance is displayed on screen. Input dataand press CYCLE START button in accordancewith the instructions. Then MOVEMENT OF AXESwill be finished.

3 SPINDLE REVOLUTIONS

This function is intended to rotate and stop thespindle easily, using menus.A specified operation is performed when you enterdata according to guidance messages displayed onthe screen and press the CYCLE START button.

4 RESTORATIONTO THE REFERENCEPOINT

This function is intended to make a reference posi-tion return for a specified axis easily, using menus.A reference position return for the specified axis iscompleted when you operate according to guid-ance messages displayed on the screen.

5 CANCEL This function is intended to cancel a canned cycle,cutter compensation, and tool length compensationeasily, using menus.A specified item is canceled when you select theitem according to guidance messages displayed onthe screen and press the CYCLE START button.

1.3.2Menu Operation


105

ContentsItem

6 EXTERNAL SIG-NAL

This function is intended to output M codes easily,using menus.A specified signal is output when you enter dataaccording to guidance messages displayed on thescreen and press the CYCLE START button.

7 CLAMP This function is intended to clamp and unclampadditional axes easily, using menus.A specified operation is performed when you selectthe corresponding item according to guidance mes-sages displayed on the screen and press theCYCLE START button.

8 NC LANGUAGE This function is intended to execute NC languagecommands for one block easily, using menus.A specified operation is performed when you enterdata according to guidance messages displayed onthe screen and press the CYCLE START button.

To perform an operation described above, enter the correspondingnumber, from 1 to 8.


106

This screen enables you to set up a workpiece coordinate system, a toolcompensation amount, and table payload. It can also be used to save andrestore the data you set up.

(5)

(2)

(1)

(3)(4)

(6)

Item Contents

1 GRAPHICAL DISPLAY

The present position of tool and the origin of work-piece coordinate system are displayed graphically.

2 WORK COORDINATESYSTEM

Input the workpiece coordinate system number.

3 AUTOMATIC SETTING

The current machine position can be set as the ori-gin of the workpiece coordinate system. A positiondetermined by adding desired adjustment values tothe current machine coordinates can also be set.The following WINDOW is displayed by pressing[AUTO SET] of SOFT–KEY.

Clicking the [X–EXEC] or [Y–EXEC] soft key auto-matically sets up, as a workpiece coordinate sys-tem origin, the sum of the current machine coordi-nate and adjustment value for an individual axis.

Supplement) When adding the Z–axis to the auto-matic workpiece coordinate systemsetting, set the following parameter:PMC parameter keep relay K0 bit 2 = 1

1.3.3Coordinate/ToolCompensation


107

ContentsItem

4 SETUP FILE This screen enables you to save and restore allsetup data (such as workpiece coordinate system,tool compensation amount, and tool life manage-ment data) and machining programs at a time, thuscurtailing the required setup time.Clicking the SET UP FILE soft key displays a list ofsetup files in a window as shown below. The cur-sor can be used to select one of 30 setup files. Theselected file can be called, registered, and deleted.

(c)(b)(a)

Item Contents

a READ The selected setup file is read from storagememory and used for automatic setting of the setupdata. If the setup file contains a program, it is pos-sible to select whether to save the program to theCNC memory. If a program included in the file list isavailable, it is called and set at the start position.This is, however, impossible if the program is not inmemory.


108

ContentsItem

b REGISTER Clicking the REGISTER soft key displays the win-dow and soft keys that can be used for registration.Enter the target file name and program number,and the date, then click the #29–3 soft key.The following data can be saved.

� Workpiece coordinate system, workpiece coor-dinate system offset, and 48 workpiece coordi-nate systems (option)(300 workpiece coordinate systems (optional)are not stored.)

� Tool compensation amount (length–figure,length–wear, radius–figure, and radius–wearwhen the option for tool compensation memoryC is selected)

� Table payload

� Magazine data tool management number

� TOOL LIFE AI tool monitor setting and toolgroup setting

� PRODUCT MANAGEMENT function (ON/OFF), name, and M code

� PALLET SETTING machining program number(option)

� Machining programs (whether to register themcan be selected, and the maximum registerablesize is 17 Kbytes.)

c DELETE The SET UP FILE data registered in a memory canbe deleted.


109

ContentsItem

5 OFFSET Clicking the OFFSET soft key displays the windowthat can be used for tool compensation amountsetting as shown below. Move the cursor to thedesired number, using the cursor and page keys,and enter a compensation amount.Also available is a function that automatically setsthe current Z–axis machine coordinates as a com-pensation amount. (AUTO SET soft key)

Supplement) Length–figure, length–wear, radius–figure, and radius–wear data can bedisplayed/input when the option fortool compensation memory C is se-lected.

6 TABLE PAYLOAD Select the [>=100kg] or [<100kg] soft key.

� [<100kg] R If the total load (such as workpieceand jigs) on the table is not heavier thanapproximately 100 kg.

� [>=100kg] R If the total load on the table is 100kg or heavier.


110

This screen enables you to transfer data (such as machining programs andparameters) with a memory card and floppy disk. It also enables you toset up a data server and remote buffer for use.

(1)

(2)

(3)

Item Contents

1 MENU This screen enables you to transfer data (such asmachining programs and parameters) with amemory card and floppy disk. It also enables youto set up a data server and remote buffer for use.

2 I/O channel Select the location to which an input/output deviceis connected.

CH1–0 : RS–232C on the operator’s panel

CH1–1 : RS–232C on the operator’s panel

Memory card : Memory card slot beside the LCD.Select this when data is input to oroutput from a memory card.

Remote buffer: Reader/punch panel (optional) inthe control cabinet. Select thiswhen using a remote buffer.

Data server : Data server (optional). Select thisto enable programmed operation bya data server.

3 COMMUNICATIONPARAMETER

Several pieces of parameter on DATA I/O and theirpresent values are displayed in this section. Andparenthesized values are standard ones.Each value can be modified by pressing [CHANGEPARAM] of SOFT–KEY. By pressing [CHANGEPARAM], cursor is displayed and a display ofSOFT–KEY is changed for [I/O SELECT]. After modifications, press [END] of SOFT–KEY.

1.3.4Data I/O Screen


111

* PROGRAM and SET UP FILEIf PROGRAM or SET UP FILE is selected, the following screen isdisplayed and then data can be written or read easily by using FANUCHandy File or FANUC CASSETTE ADAPTER or a Memory card.

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7)

Item Contents

1 CNC PROGRAMLIST (SET UPFILE LIST)

If you select “1: PROGRAM”, the CNC program listappears. If you select “9: SETUP FILE”, the Set upfile list appears.

2 FILE LIST File list in a floppy disk or a memory card is dis-played by pressing [FILE LIST] of SOFT–KEY.Up to 200 files can be displayed.

3 WRITE CNC PROGRAM or SET UP FILE in a CNCmemory can be written in a floppy disk or a memorycard.

4 READ A file in a floppy disk or a memory card can be readin a CNC memory.

5 RENAME FILE A file in a floppy disk or a memory card can be re-named.

6 DELETE FILE A file in a floppy disk or a memory card can be de-leted.

7 END This screen is closed, by pressing [END] of SOFT–KEY.

NOTE1 Communication parameter has to be standard setting,

except for I/O channel and baud rate.2 “Multivolume file” cannot be treated.3 As a memory card, use an SRAM card/ATA card. (The

FROM card cannot be used.)


112

This screen enables you to set data related to the AI tool monitor function.

(9)(7)(6) (8)

(1)

(5)

(2) (3) (4)

Item Contents

1 AI TOOLMONITOR

Specify whether to use the AI tool monitor function.

OFF : The AI tool monitor function is disabled.

ON : The AI tool monitor function is enabledaccording to the setting of 2 through 4.

2 FILE No. SETTING Set a reference load data file number for each tool.Pressing the FILE key causes a file number to bedisplayed on the screen.

3 OPERATIONWHEN WARNINGLOAD ISREACHED

Select the machine operation to be performedwhen spindle load � warning–level load.

OFF : Machining is continued as is.

FEED DOWN : Tool movement is decelerated toreduce the load on the tool. Ma-chining is continued.

TOOL CHNG : Machining is continued; when thenext tool change command is spe-cified, the tool is changed to a re-served tool registered in the samegroup.

DOWN+CHNG : Tool movement is decelerated;when the next tool change com-mand is specified, the tool ischanged to a reserved tool regis-tered in the same group.

MCHN STOP : Machining is stopped, and the toolis moved along the Z–axis to themachine zero point. Moreover,spindle rotation and coolant outputare stopped, and an alarm is dis-played.

1.3.5Tool Life ManagementScreen


113

ContentsItem

4 OPERATIONWHENBREAKAGE LOADIS REACHED (AItool monitorfunction)

Select a machine operation to be performed whenspindle load � breakage–level load.



5 MONITORED IN-FORMATION DIS-PLAYS ORSPINDLE LOADLEVEL FILE LIST-ING

This box displays monitored information (such asthe load information and tool group informationabout the tool in current use) or a list of spindle loadlevel files.

6 REFERENCELOADCALCULATIONANDREGISTRATIONINTO FILE

When the [SPNDL LOAD] soft key is pressed, thefollowing windows are displayed:

After moving the cursor to an item related to thetarget file number with the page and cursor keys,clicking the [CALC.] soft key calculates the WARN-ING and BREKAGE values from a DETECTED andN–DIA. set up for the file number. To set the ob-tained values in a file, click the [ENTRY] soft key.A value can be entered directly in an item indicatedby the cursor.

7 SWITCHING BE-TWEEN THESPINDLE LOADLEVEL FILE LISTAND THE MON-ITORED–IN-FORMATION DIS-PLAY

This soft key selects a list of spindle load level filesor monitored information as a display in the rightsection of the screen ((5)).If monitored information is displayed, clicking theFILE soft key displays a list of spindle load levelfiles. If a list of spindle load level files is displayed,clicking the [MONITOR] soft key displays monitoredinformation.If monitored information is displayed, clicking thepage key changes the display to another toolgroup. If a list of spindle load level files is dis-played, clicking the page key changes the displayto another file number.

8 CLEAR TOOLINFORMATION

Information (such as use status and lifetime), cur-rently being displayed about the tools in a toolgroup, is cleared.

9 TOOL GROUPSETTING

When the [TOOL GROUP] soft key is pressed, thewindow shown below is displayed.


114

(16)(15)

(10)

(11)

(12)(13) (14)

Item Contents

10 GROUP No. GROUP No. is changed from 1 to 14 by pressingPAGE KEY.The maximum number of groups and the maximumnumber of tools that can be registered per groupcan be changed by setting the following NC param-eters:

The maximum number of groups and maximumnumber of tools are factory–set as follows:T14iC series: Maximum number of groups = 16,

maximum number of tools = 16T21iC series: Maximum number of groups = 32,

maximum number of tools = 8

No.6800 No.6800 Maximum Maximumbit 1 bit0 number of number of

groups tools

0 0 16 16

0 1 32 8

1 0 64 4

1 1 128 2

11 LIFE

TOOL LIFE LIMIT(BY CYCLEQUANTITY OR

Specify the value of tool life of each group.

Specifies the timing when the tool life expirationadvance notice signal is to be output. The signal isoutput when the number of times or the duration

TIME) TOTRIGGER ANEXPIRATIONADVANCENOTICE

that the last tool was used becomes greater than orequal to: Tool life (by cycle quantity or time) minustool life limit (by cycle quantity or time) to trigger anexpiration advance notice

12 USED COUNT orTIME

The present USED COUNT or TIME is displayed graphically.Clicking the USED COUNT ([USED TIME]) soft keychanges USED COUNT (TIME).


115

ContentsItem

13 TOOL INFORMATION

The state of the tool is displayed in TOOL IN-FORMATION as “USING”, “LIFE”, or “WARNING”.

(Note) “USING” : tool which is on use in thegroup.

“LIFE” : tool which arrived at the life.

“WARNING” : tool whose spindle load valuedetected by tool monitor func-tion was beyond the warningvalue.

14 T–CODE,H–CODE, andD–CODE

Set the tool number (T–CODE) that belongs to thetarget group, the tool length compensation number(H–CODE) for the target tool, and the cutter com-pensation value number (D–CODE) as required.Enter 0 for an item if it is not used.

15 CHANGE OFJUDGEMENT OFTOOL LIFE

Select COUNT or TIME as a means to judge TOOLLIFE by pressing [LIFE JUDGE.] of SOFT–KEY.

16 CLEARANCE OFTOOLINFORMATION

It is possible to strike off TOOL INFORMATION inthe group.

If a machining program number is set up for each of workpieces mountedon two pallets (A and B) in advance, the machining programs can beautomatically called and executed.

(3)

(2)

(1)

1.3.6Pallet Setting Screen(Option)


116

Item Contents

1 SETTINGS OFMACHINING PROGRAM

Specify a machining program number for each pal-let (A and B).

The specified program numbers are set to the fol-lowing macro variables respectively.

#998 : A machining program number for the pal-let A.

#999 : A machining program number for the pal-let B.

The machining program number for the current pal-let on the table is set in #990.

(NOTE 1) Do not use the macro variables above(#990, #998, and #999) for other use.

(NOTE 2) Create a machining program as a sub-program.

2 USE OF THEWORK NUMBERSEARCH FUNCTION

Specify whether the work number search function isused for each pallet.

ON � The work number search function is used.In other words, the specified program num-ber (1) is set to #990 after pallet changeand then the program is called andexecuted.

OFF � The work number search function is notused.In this case, the number “9023” is set to#990 after pallet change and then the pro-gram “O9023” is called and executed.(O9023 is already registered and no ma-chining is performed by O9023. )

The program O9023 is registered before-hand.Do not modify the program.

An example of main program is shown below.

� M code for pallet changing operation.

� Calling of a machining program (subprogram)corresponding to the pallet on the table.

� The program is stopped when M01 STOPbutton on the operator’s panel is ON.

� Return to the head of a program.

* main program*O0001 ;

M65 ;

M98 P#990 ;

M01 ;

M99 ;

3 DISPLAY OFALARM ON PALLET CHANGER

Alarms occurred to the pallet changer are dis-played.

[Varieties of alarm]

SAFETY DOOR/PALLET SETTING DETECTION/PALLET TRANSPORT /PALLET EXIST OR NOT/LOCK– UNLOCK (PALLET–A) /LOCK–UNLOCK(PALLET–B) /AUTOMATIC DOOR/PALLET UN-CLAMP


117

This screen enables you to select the desired machining program and getit ready for operation.It is useful to check a program because it displays a running program andmagnifies the display of coordinate values.

(6)

(2)

(1)(5)

(4)

(1)

Item Contents

1 MAGNIFIEDCOORDINATEDISPLAY

Workpiece coordinates, machine coordinates, orremaining travel distance can be displayed inlarge–size text.

Each time the [COORDINATE] soft key is pressed,the magnified display changes as follows:workpiece coordinates –> machine coordinates –>remaining travel distance.

2 MONITORDISPLAY

The feedrate, spindle rotation speed, and spindleload meter reading are displayed.

3 RUNNINGPROGRAMDISPLAY

In automatic operation (MEM) mode, the selectedprogram is displayed.

4 MODALINFORMATIONDISPLAY

Modal information is displayed.

5 PROGRAMSELECTION

Pressing the [PROG. SELECT] soft key displays alist of programs. A desired program can beselected from the list.

6 PROGRAMACCESS

When the [PROG. REWIND] soft key is pressed,the beginning of the current program is accessed.

1.3.7Automatic OperationScreen


118

This screen enables you to set up the production quantity count function.It also displays the current use status and elapsed operation time for alltool groups.

(3)

(4)

(2)(1)

1.3.8Counter


119

Item Contents

1 PRODUCTION/QUALITY COUNT-ER

This box offers two counters for production quantitycounting.

FUNCTION : If the counter is to be used, setthis item to “ON”. If not, set it to“OFF”.

NAME : An arbitrary name consisting ofnumerals, alphabetic letters, andsymbols can be set up. To enteralphabetic letters or symbols,press the <ABC��Z> key on theoperator’s panel.

PARTS COUNT,TOTAL COUNT : These items rep-resent the number of countedproducts and the total number ofproducts, respectively. It is alsopossible to enter a value in thesecounters.

PARTS REQUIRED : The scheduled number ofproducts is entered in this item.When the actual number of prod-ucts reaches the scheduled num-ber, it is possible to turn on a sta-tus display lamp. The operatormessage “PRODUCTION ISCOMPLETED” is displayed whena scheduled number of productsare created.

PIECE COUNT: The number of products per cycle(count scaling factor) is entered inthis item.The two counters stated aboveare incremented by a value en-tered in PIECE COUNT.

M CODE : An M code for counting productsis selected using a soft key. Whenthe selected M code is issued, thenumber of the current productsand the total number of productsare incremented. A dedicated Mcode (M91 or M92) is available forincrementing each of the twocounters.

2 TOOL COUNTER This box lists the tool number (T–CODE) of a tool incurrent use, how many times or how long it wasused, and its service life value for all tool groups. Ifa tool in current use is the last one in a tool group,the tool number is prefixed with an asterisk (*).The box enables you to check the use status of alltool groups at a glance.To set up tool groups, click the TOOL GROUP softkey.


120

ContentsItem

3 SERVICE TIME RUN TIME : The cumulative automatic opera-tion time (excluding the time whenthe machine is at a stop or pause)is displayed.

CYCLE TIME : The duration of one cycle of auto-matic operation (excluding thetime when the machine is at astop or pause) is displayed.This value is automatically presetwith “0” when the cycle starts froma reset state or when the power isturned off.

4 TOOL GROUPSETTING

This soft key enables you to set up tool groups.This function is exactly the same as the tool groupsetting on the TOOL LIFE.See the descriptions about the TOOL LIFE for de-tails.

This screen enables you to set up machine operation modes.

(3)(2)

(1)

1.3.9Sequence Selection


121

Item Contents

1 FLOOD COOLANTINTERNAL LIGHTBLOCK SKIPAUTOMATICPOWER OFFREMOTE MODETEACHING IN(from thepreceding page)

Position the cursor to the desired setting item, thenselect the [ON] or [OFF] soft key.

(When ON is selected, the switch graphic appearsto have been “pressed,” and a black dot (�) appearsin an upper–left corner of the switch graphic.)The functions of each item are as follows.

(1) Various kinds of settingThe following items can be set up.

OFF ON

Item Branch Functions

FLOODCOOLANT(Option)

ON Coolant is supplied by flood coolantunit.

OFF Coolant is not supplied.

AUTOMATICPOWER OFF (Note 1)(Note 2)

ON When M30 is specified, the powerto the CNC is turned off about fiveseconds later.

OFF The power of the CNC unit is notturned off automatically.

REMOTE MODE(Note 1)

ON The machine tool is run accordingto a program stored in externalmemory.

OFF The machine tool is run accordingto a program stored in CNCmemory.

INTERNALLIGHT

ON The internal light goes on.

OFF The internal light goes off.

OPTIONALBLOCK SKIP(Note 1)

ON Commands in program blocks thatcontain a slash (/) are skipped.

OFF Commands in program blocks thatcontain a slash (/) are executed.

MACHINELOCK

OFF The machine runs as directed byprograms. (Normal operation)

ALL Programs are executed without run-ning the machine. This is intendedto check the programs.Each coordinate displayed on thescreen is updated according tomove commands. M and S func-tions are executed.

Z Programs are executed withoutmovement along the Z–axis. Thisis intended to check the programs.

MACHINELOCK

OFF The machine runs as directed byprograms. (Normal operation)



OPTIONALBLOCK SKIP(*1)

ON Commands in program blocks thatcontain a slash (/) are skipped.

OFF Commands in program blocks thatcontain a slash (/) are executed.

MACHINELOCK

The machine runs as directed byprograms. (Normal operation)



MACHINELOCK

The machine runs as directed byprograms. (Normal operation)

ALL Programs are executed without run


OFF


122

ContentsItem

(NOTE) This item is not displayed for a full key-board–type operator’s panel. Use the cor-responding button on the operator’s panel.

Item Branch Functions

TEACHING IN ON The machine position obtained bymanual operation can be stored inmemory and can be used to createa program.

OFF The above function cannot be used.


FUNCTIONSClicking the FUNCTIONS displays the followingwindow.

AUTOMATICDOOR CONTROLFUNCTIONSELECTION (Option)

Specify the automatic door control functions(� = ON � = OFF).

DOOR CLOSING BY START BUTTON: When the cycle start button on theROBODRILL operator’s panel ispressed the door is automaticallyclosed and program operation isstarted.

DOOR OPENING BY M30: When M30 is specified, the door isopened automatically.

DOOR OPENING BY M00, M01: When M00 or M01 is specified,the door is opened automatically.

AUTOMATICPOWER OFF

This item enables you to set up connections foreffecting the automatic power shutoff function. Se-lecting ON enables the following function.

POWER OFF BY ALARM: The automatic power shutoff func-tion works if an alarm conditionoccurs.

RELEASE AT TURN ON THE POWER: The automatic power shutoff func-tion is set to OFF when the poweris turned on. (This function is un-available to the full keyboard–typeoperator’s panel.)

SPINDLESPEED(DOOROPEN) (except forthe CE markingspecification)

If the following conditions are all satisfied during thetime set here (in minutes), the screen is erased toprotect the LCD.


123

ContentsItem

SCREEN SAVER The screen display is cleared to prolong the life ofthe LCD screen if no key input is made for the dura-tion (in seconds) specified in this item. Set 0 whenthis function is not to be used.

� Neither a key (except some) on the operator’spanel nor a soft key is operated.

� No alarm or operator message is issued.

� Both single–block and dry run modes are OFF.

If this function is not to be used, it must be reset to 0.If either of the following functions is met after all dis-plays on the screen are erased, they appear again.

� A key (except some) on the operator’s panel ora soft key is operated.

� An alarm or operator message is issued.

INITIALSCREEN(POWERON)

This item enables you to select the screen to bedisplayed when the power is turned on.

INITIALOPE.MODE(PWON)

This item enables you to select the status in whichthe machine is to be when the power is turned on.

MDI/LOW : The machine is in the MDI mode,and the rapid traverse rate is LOW.

AUTO/100%: The machine is in the MEM mode,and the rapid traverse rate is 100%.

M08 COMMANDSELECTION

Select the use of the M08 command between cool-ant control and air blow control.

COOLANTBUTTONSELECTION

Select the use of the coolant button on the opera-tor’s panel between coolant control and air blowcontrol.

3 BRIGHTNESS ADJUSTMENT

Set the brightness of background color to one offive supported levels. The standard backgroundcolor is the third one.


124

This window enables you to perform various types of maintenance andsetup.To execute any function in this window, enter the corresponding number(from 1 to 6).

Item Contents

1 TURRET RESTO. If the machine stops during tool change because ofan alarm being issued or the power being turnedoff, it becomes necessary to restore the turret to thenormal position.See Chapter 4, “Automatic Turret Restoration,” ofPart V for details.

2 MOTOR ORIGIN If the pulse coder cable is removed during motorreplacement, the controller loses the machine zeropoint, resulting in an alarm being issued for a refer-ence position return. In this case, it is necessary toset the motor to the machine zero point.See Chapter 3, “Servo Motor Zero Point Restora-tion Method,” of Part V for details.

3 PARAMETER This function is used if all parameters have beenlost for some reason or you want to return the pa-rameters to the values to which they were factory–set. It can also be used to compare and check thecurrent parameter settings with the factory settings.See Chapter 5, “Parameter Re–setting, Checking,and Registering,” of Part V for details.

4 RIGID TAPPING This function is used in pulling out a tapping toolfrom a workpiece if it has been caught in it.See Chapter 6, “Rigid Tap Retracting,” of Part V fordetails.

1.3.10MAINTENCE/SETTING


125

ContentsItem

5 EXT.INTERFACE This function enables you to set up and use onlythe desired signals on the terminal board of the RO-BODRILL.See Chapter 15, “External Interface Function,” ofPart IV for details.

6 COMMUNICATION This function enables you to set up the communica-tion parameters that are needed in using the FAC-TOLINK function.See Chapter 26, “FACTOLINK Function”, of Part IVfor details.


126

This window enables you to check the cause of machine trouble.

(6)

(1)

(4)

(5)

(3)

(2)

Item Contents

1 ALARM,DIAG-NOSTIC

These boxes display an alarm, diagnosis informa-tion, or operator message.See Appendixes 6 and 7 for details.

2 COORDINATEDISPLAY

The workpiece coordinates, machine coordinates,and remaining travel are displayed.

3 RUNNING PRO-GRAM DISPLAY

In automatic operation (MEM) mode, the selectedprogram is displayed.

4 DIAGNOSTICMONITOR

These items indicate the operating status of themachine. When a circle is yellow, it is active.The detailed description about the cause is given in(1).

Interlock : Axial movement inhibited

Hold : Program operation stopped

Reset : Reset state

Start inhibited : Program operation start inhibited

The detailed cause is displayed in 1.

5 ALARM/DIAG-NOSTIC DISPLAYPAGE SWITCH

Another page of the alarm/diagnostic display is dis-played.

6 SAFETY MONI. This soft key enables you to monitor various signalsrelated to door lock control.

1.3.11DIAGNOSIS/ALARM

B–85014EN/01 2. CREATING A PROGRAMDETAILED OPERATIONS

127

2 CREATING A PROGRAM

2. CREATING A PROGRAM B–85014EN/01DETAILED OPERATIONS

128

(1) Put the system in the EDIT mode.

(2) Turn off the protect key.

(3) Press the + function key to display the PROGRAM

screen.

(4) Enter the number of a program, insert the necessary wordssequentially, then press the <INSERT> key.

2.1EDITING APROGRAM

2.1.1Creating a Program


129

A program can be modified by changing, inserting, or/and deleting words.

Before modifying a program, select the EDIT mode and press the

+ key. When the PROGRAM screen is displayed, start the

following operation:

(1) To change a word

Cursor

(Example)

Position the cursor on the word to be modified using the cursor keys.

Enter a new word.

Press the <ALTER> key.

2.1.2Modifying a Program


130

(2) To insert a word

(Example)

Position the cursor on the word to be modifiedusing the cursor keys.

Insert the necessary word.

Press the <INSERT> key.

Cursor


131

(3) To delete a word

(Example)

Position the cursor on the word to be modifiedusing the cursor keys.

Press the <DELETE> key.

Cursor

(*) The cursor can be moved by one of the following three methods:

(1) By the cursor keysCursor

Press either of the cursor keys.

(2) By the S key(Example) When moving the cursor to the next S address

or Press the S key, then press thecursor key.

(3) By specifying the word(Example) When moving the cursor to the next S800 word

Enter the word S800, thenpress the cursor key.


132

(1) Select the EDIT mode.

(2) Press the + function key to display the PROGRAM

screen.

(3) For example, when the number of the program to be deleted is 01000,

enter then press the <DELET>

key.

(1) Put the system in the EDIT mode.

(2) The contents of memory and the contents of programs are displayedalternately by pressing the [O.SRH] key.

(1) When the number of the program is not identified


(2) Press the following keys: or [O.SRH]

(2) When the number of the program is identified


(2) For example, when the number of the program to be called isO1000, press the following keys:

or [O.SRH]

NOTEWhen the called program is not found, an alarm indicationappears on the screen. In this case, press the <RESET>key to release the alarm.

2.1.3Deleting a Program

2.1.4Checking ProgramNos. in Memory

2.1.5Calling a Program inMemory


133

S codes are used for spindle speed control, M codes are used for ON/OFFof the various functions of the machine tool. When move command andan S or M code are commanded in the same block, the S or M functionis executed simultaneously with the move command except some Mcodes.

(Example 1) N1 G01 X50.0 Y–50.0 M03; (Spindle rotation clockwise)

Y

X

50

50

The spindle starts to rotate clockwiseat the same time when the axesbegin to move.

Only commands M00, M01, M02, M05, M09 and M30 start to beexecuted when the move command is finished.

(Example 2) N10 G01 X50.0 Y–50.0 M05; (Spindle stop)

Y

X

50

50

Spindle stops at the end of move com-mand.

The spindle speed is directly controlled by address S and a following 2–to 4–digit number.

(Example) S 150 150 min–1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . S 4000 4,000 min–1. . . . . . . . . . . . .

NOTESpindle speed can be specified ranging from 80 min–1 to8,000 min–1 (standard), 150 to 15.000min–1 (15.000min–1

spindle) in increments of 1 min–1.

2.2PROGRAMMING

2.2.1General

2.2.2Spindle SpeedFunction (S Function)


134

Up to three M codes can be specified at the same time. An M code notmarked with * in the table below must be specified as the first M code.

Table 2.2.3 M Function

M code Name Meaning Sequence

M00 Program stop The machine stops after M00. D

M01 Optional stop The machine stops after M01. D

M02 End of program The machine finishes the program. D

M03 Spindle CW The spindle starts to rotate clockwise. I

M04 Spindle CCW The spindle starts to rotate counterclockwise. I

M05 Spindle STOP The spindle will stop. D

M06 Tool change A tool changed will be done. I

*M07 Air blow ON The air for chip will blow. I

*M08 Coolant ON The coolant oil will blow. I

*M09 Coolant OFF The coolant oil will stop. D

*M10 Clamp When clamp/unclamp signal is used by means of addi-tional axis specifications, the 4–axis is clamped.

*M11 Unclamp When clamp/unclamp signal is used by means of addi-tional axis specifications, the 4–axis is clamped.

M17 Touch Probe ON Turn on power to the touch probe. I

M18 Touch Probe OFF Turn off power to the touch probe. I

M19 Orientation The spindle sets the positioning. I

M20 Center–through coolant pumpOFF

Stops the center–through coolant pump. I

M21 Center–through coolant pumpON

Starts the center–through coolant pump. I

M22 Center–through coolant ON Supplies coolant from the tool tip. I

M23 Air purge ON Outputs air from the tool tip. I

M24 Center–through coolant/air purgeOFF

Stops center–through coolant/air purge. D

M28 Small hope peck drilling cycle ON Turns small–diameter, deep hole drilling cycle modeON. (Option)

I

M29 Rigid mode Tapping cycle is rigid mode

M30 End of program The machine finishes the program. D

*M32 Peck cycle Triggers AI function no-load detection. I

*M33 Peck cycle Judges on AI function no-load detection. I

*M34 Peck cycle Ends AI function no-load detection. I

*M40 AI function disable Disables the AI function. I

*M41 AI function enable Enables the AI function. I

2.2.3MiscellaneousFunction (M Function)


135

M code SequenceMeaningName

M42 _ Used by the machine a menu. I

*M43 Tool life status check Checks current tool life status for processing. I

M44 Programmed data rewrite Sets the data of AI tool minitor. I

M45 _ Used by macroprogram 09029.

M46 _ Used by macroprogram 09029.

*M50(NOTE2)

Air blow ON The air for chip will blow. I

M52 Not used

M53 Not used

*M60 to M65

Automatic door opening/closingand output signal ON untilanswer comes

In the case of splashguard B with automatic door opne-ing/closing specifications, the door opens/closes auto-matically.

*M71 The 4–axis clamp When clamp/unclamp signal is used by means of addi-tional axis specifications, the 4–axis is clamped.

*M72 The 4–axis unclamp When clamp/unclamp signal is used by means of addi-tional axis specifications, the 4–axis is unclamped.

*M73 X–axis mirror image ON X–axis turns the mirror image function ON.

*M74 Y–axis mirror image ON Y–axis turns the mirror image function ON.

*M76 The 4–axis mirror image ON The 4–axis turns the mirror image function ON.

*M77 Mirror image OFF Mirror image is OFF

M80 to M89

For external interface See IV–15(5), ”M code output function”. I

M90 Not used

*M91 Product control counter 1 Counts the amount of products for counter 1. I

*M92 Product control counter 2 Counts the amount of products for counter 2. I

M93 Not used

M94 Not used

M95 Not used

M96 Interruption type custom macroON

Enables the custom macro interrupt function. I

M97 Interruption type custom macroOFF

Disables the custom macro interrupt function. I

M98 Calling of subprogram

M99 End of subprogram

M100 to M129

For external interface See IV–15(5), ”M code output function”. I

M198 Subprogram call from externalmemory


136

NOTE1 “I” and “D” in the column “Sequence” means as follows:

I : This function will be active as soon as the block is read.D This function will be active after all commands in the

block have been executed.2 To be specified as the first M code when the center through

coolant specification is applied.

(1) M00: Program stopAutomatic operation is stopped after a block containing M00 isexecuted. Even when the program is stopped, all modal informationremains unchanged as in single block operation. The automaticoperation can be restarted by pushing the CYCLE START button.In the status light (option) specifications, a yellow display lampilluminates.

(2) M01: Optional stopSimilar to the M00, automatic operation is stopped after a blockwhich contains M01 is executed. This code is effective only when theoptional stop switch is ON on the operator’s panel. In the status light(option) specifications, a yellow display lamp illuminates.

(3) M02, M30: End of program(a) Indicates the end of the main program. Used when the program

is loaded in memory from tape.(b) Ends automatic operation and resets.(c) For memory operation, passes program control to the beginning

of the program.(d) In the status light (option) specifications, the yellow display lamp

blinks.(e) M30 puts the automatic power turn–off function into effect,

provided that the function is enabled.

(4) M29: Rigid modeWhen M29 Sxxxx is commanded previous to tapping/reverse tappingcycle command, the machine becomes rigid mode. Refer to IV–2.2.6.

(5) M32 to M34, M40 to M46: AI tool monitorThese M functions are related to the AI tool monitor. For details, seedescriptions about the AI tool monitor.

(6) M60 to M65: Automatic opening and closing of the doorThis function is provided for the splash guard with an automatic door.With this function, the door can be opened while a program is beingexecuted to access the inside of the machine. After the access iscompleted, the door can be closed automatically by applying anexternal signal to the machine. After the door is closed, programexecution resumes.This function is useful when a robot or pallet changer is used.

(7) M98: Calling of subprogramThis code is used to enter a subprogram. Refer to “Execution ofsubprogram” in the Operator’s Manual of NC for details.

(8) M99: End of subprogramThis code shows the end of a subprogram. Executing M99 takes thecontrol back to the main program. Refer to “Preparation ofSubprograms” in the Operator’s Manual of NC for details.


137

NOTE• If there is a block following M00, M01, M02 or M30, it is not

read into the buffer.• Do not use M codes M00 to M99 for the external M code

BCD output function.

Specify a tool position by using a 2–digit or 3–digit number after T.

M 0 6 T �� ( �� : Tool number) or M 0 6 T �� ( �� : Tool group number)

A tool thus specified can be randomly specified via the shortest path.When using the tool life management function, specify a tool groupnumber in the T code. In addition to the T function, the followingincremental command can be specified:

M 0 6 P n (n : the nth from present tool position with CW)

NOTE1 When T is not specified in a command such as M06, the

current tool is changed to the tool with the adjacent toolnumber on the right.

2 When a tool number other than 01, 02, ..., 14(*) is specified,alarm 251 (an ATC error) is issued.

3 If a value other than 1, 2, ..., 14(*) is specified in n after P,the remainder obtained by dividing the value by 14(*) isassumed. For example, when 58 is specified in n, n isassumed to be 2.

4 When a tool change command is executed during cuttercompensation, tool length compensation, or a cannedcycle, alarm 251 (an ATC error) is issued. Before executingthe tool change command, be sure to cancel cuttercompensation, tool length compensation, and cannedcycle. (G49 and G80 can be specified in the block thatspecifies M06.)

5 When Tool change sequence is being executed, Z axis mustnot be moved by manual operation after stopping the Toolchange sequence by single block or pressing the FEEDHOLD button.

6 When the tool change (M06) command is specified, coolantstops. Therefore, specify the command to turn on thecoolant (M08) in the next block as necessary. (When bit 7of PMC parameter K0 is set to 0)

* For the T21iCe series, up to 21.

2.2.4Tool Function (T Function)


138

a) M19 ;

The spindle stops at the position of angle specified in parameter (Note)by means of this command.

NOTEAt this time of the shipment the spindle stop position isadjusted so that the spindle key is parallel with the Y–axisdirection.

b) M19S__;

Angle specification (0� to 359�)

This command enable the angle (0� to 359�) to be specified.

NOTE1 This command is effective until a spindle rotation command

(M03, M04), spindle stop command (M05), or a commandspecifying a miscellaneous function for terminating theprogram (such as M00 and M01) is executed. (The resetkey stops spindle excitation but does not cancel acommand.) When a tool change is specified during thiscommand, alarm 252 (an ATC spindle alarm) is issued.When a spindle index function command is executed duringrigid tapping, alarm 1007 (M19 not permitted duringtapping) is issued.

2 Do not execute this command during canned cycle. In fineboring (G76) and back boring (G87), the spindle index isautomatically performed and the table shifts. Table shiftdirection is set in parameter No. 5101.

2.2.5Spindle OrientationFunction (M19Function)


139

(1) GeneralTapping cycle (G84) and reverse tapping cycle (G74) are effective inboth of rigid mode and conventional mode. These modes areswitched by M code. Rigid tapping is performed by simultaneouslyfeeding the spindle and the Z axis without the floating tapper,therefore, effective for high–speed and high–accuracy tapping.

(2) Command format

G �� X_ Y_ Z_ R_ P_ Q_ F_ K_ ;

Repeat number

Cutting feedrate

Depth of cut in the peck tapping cycle

Dwell time at the bottom of tapping and R–point return

Position command at R–point

Position command at the bottom of tapping

Position command of tapping

G74 – Reverse tapping cycle

G84 – Tapping cycle

NOTE1 The machining start point in a peck tapping cycle and

clearance d in a high–speed peck tapping cycle arespecified in parameter 5114 or 5115.

2 A peck tapping cycle is validated by the Q command in thetapping cycle. When Q0 is specified, no peck tapping cycleis executed.

(3) Rigid modeTo specify the rigid mode, M29Sxxxx; is commanded previous totapping/reverse tapping cycle command. The spindle is stopped, andtapping/reverse tapping cycle is the following command becomesrigid mode.

. . .

. . .

M29Sxxxx;

G �� X___ Y___ Z___ R___ P___ Q___ F___ K___ ;

X___ Y___;

X___ Y___;

. . .

. . .

G80;

. . .

. . .

Rigidmode

2.2.6Rigid Tapping Cycle(Function M29)


140

F ___ Sxxxx; Lead of threadSxxxx should be less than 5000 (5000 min–1) 6000 (6000 min–1)(15000 min–1 spindle). When a value greater than it is command, PSalarm (No. 200) will occur in the G�� block.F ___ should be less than 15000 (15 m/min). If a value more than15000 is commanded, the feed rate does not exceed 15000 (15 m/min).It is impossible to input Sxxxx again before inputting G�� , afterhaving input Sxxxx once. Do not specify M29 during the cannedcycle in the conventional mode. In any case, a PS alarm (No. 203)occurs.When the rigid tapping cycle ends, the spindle stops, that is, S0 isspecified.After specifying G code (G80, other canned cycle G code, or G codein group 01), rigid mode will change to former mode.

NOTE1 G�� indicates the reverse tapping cycle (G74) and tapping

cycle (G84).2 Be sure to input Sxxxx in the M29 block. Even when the

canned cycle cancel (G80) is entered without executing thetapping cycles (G74, G84) after the rigid mode is selectedby M29Sxxxx;, the rigid mode is not released.

3 Specify M29Sxxxx independently without fail.4 Don’t specify M03, M04 and M05 in the block just after G80.5 Don’t specify M03, M04 and M05 in the block between

M29Sxxxx and G80.

(4) Conventional mode (floating tap)Command method in conventional mode remains. Refer to the NC’sOPERATOR’S MANUAL for details.

. . .

. . .

M03 (or M04) Sxxxx;

G �� X___ Y___ Z___ R___ P___ Q___ F___ K___ ;

X___ Y___;

X___ Y___;

. . .

. . .

G80;


141

(5) G84 (Tapping cycle)Command method in conventional mode remains. G84 in rigid modeis shown below.

G84 (G99)G84 (G98)

P

P

P

P

P

Spindle stops Spindlestops

Initial pointInitial pointMovement 1

Movement 2Movement 6

Spindle stops

Movement 5

Point R

Spindle tops rotates CCW

Point ZMovement 4

Spindle stops

Movement 3

Spindle tops rotates CW

Point R

Spindle stops

Spindle tops rotates CCW

Point ZSpindle stops


Rapid traverse

Synchronous feeding of Z axis and spindle

Dwell

NOTE1 Feedrate override during synchronously feeding Z axis and

spindle is assumed 100%. Override of spindle is alsoassumed 100%.

2 Single blockWhen executing tapping cycle in single block, the machinedwells or stops at terminate points of movement 1, 2 and 6.

3 Feed holdWhen specifying feed hold while movement 3 through 5,FEED HOLD lamp will be lit immediately, but the machinewill not stop immediately and stops after movement 6 willfinish. When specifying feed hold while movement 6 isexecuted, the machine will stop immediately.


142

(6) G74 (Reverse tapping cycle)Command method in conventional mode remains. G74 in rigid modeis shown below.

G74 (G99)G74 (G98)

P

P

P

P

P

Spindle stops Spindle stops

Initial point

Spindle tops

rotates CCW

Spindle tops

rotates CCWPoint R Point R

Spindle stops Spindle stops


Point Z


Point ZSpindle stops

Spindle stops

Rapid traverse

Synchronous feeding of Z axis and spindle

Dwell

Refer to notes in (5), G84 tapping cycle.


143

The machine position obtained by the manual operation is inserted in aprogram and a program can be created. In other words, after the tool ismoved by the manual operation (jog or handle feed), the tool can bemoved by the same distance in the automatic operation (playback).

Words other than X, Y, Z (B, C, D, F, G, H, I, J, K, L, M, N, O, P, Q, R,S, T, EOB) can be registered in the memory by exactly the same operationas EDIT mode.

The machine position is inserted by the following procedure.

(1) Set “TEACH IN” switch to “ON” on the QUICK screen.

(2) Set the mode switch to EDIT.

(3) Move the machine to the required position by handle or jog. (Themode must be EDIT.)

(4) Push the + key.

(5) Enter the address X [X] .

(6) Push the key, then the machine position along the X axis

is stored in the memory.If the current machine position is X10.521 Y30.270 Z–15.0, forexample, X10521 is stored in memory as X–axis coordinate

value, by pushing the key.

Content stored in the program = X10521

Push [ Y ], , [ Z ] and keys, then the machine

position along the Y and Z axis is stored in the memoryrespectively.

2.3PLAYBACK


144

NOTE1 After entering the address X, Y or Z, enter numerical values

and push key then the values entered in the

machine position are added and registered. This is used tocorrect the machine position through key entry.

2 The cordinate value registered in this way is an absolutecoordinate. Enter G90 (Absolute command) at the head ofa program.

3 Insert in the same way as edit operation for programcommands other than machine position.

4 Insert an EOB ( [ ; ] , ), and one block registrationcompletes.

B–85014EN/013. DISPLAYING AND CHANGING

PARAMETERSDETAILED OPERATIONS

145

3 DISPLAYING AND CHANGING PARAMETERS

3. DISPLAYING AND CHANGINGPARAMETERS B–85014EN/01DETAILED OPERATIONS

146

NOTEModes need not be changed when parameters are onlymonitored. Modes can be monitored even automaticoperation.

Follow the procedure below to display parameters.

(1) After pressing the key, press the and the section select

soft key [PARAM] to select the parameter screen.

Backward menu key

Soft keys

Soft key display (section select)

Forward menu key

←

(2) The parameter screen consists of multiple pages. Use step (a) or (b)to display the page that contains the parameter you want to display.

(a) Use the page select key , or the cursor move keys

to display the desired page.

(b) Enter the data number of the parameter you want to display fromthe keyboard, then press the [NO.SRH] soft key. The parameterpage containing the specified data number appears with thecursor positioned at the data number. (The data is displayed inreverse video.)

NOTEIf key entry is started with the section select soft keysdisplayed, they are replaced automatically by operationselect soft keys including [NO.SRH]. Pressing the [(OPRT)]soft key can also cause the operation select keys to bedisplayed.

3.1DISPLAYINGPARAMETERS

3.1.1NC Parameter



147

Soft key display (section select)

←

← Data entered from thekeyboard

Cursor


148

(1) After pressing and in the stated sequence, clicking the

chapter selection soft key [PMC] selects the PMCPRM.

(2) Clicking the [PARAMETER] and [KEEPRL] softkeys in the statedsequence displays the “PMC PRM(KEEP RELAY)”.

3.1.2PMC Parameter



149

NOTEParameters can be changed only in the MDI mode when themachine is stopped or in the emergency stop state.Some parameter settings, for example, those for machineoperation, can be changed. After changing parameters, themachine may not operate, or something dangerous mayoccur depending on the situation. Therefore, parametersare usually not changeable (i.e., write–protected).Before changing the data of a parameter, be sure to checkthe number of the desired parameter and the data to be set.

Following is the procedure for changing NC parameters.

(1) Enter the MDI mode, or bring the machine to an emergency stop.

(2) Enable parameter writing.

(2)–1 To display the setting screen, press the + key,

then the [SETTING] section select soft key.The first page of the setting screen appears.

After pressing and in the stated sequence, click

the chapter selection soft key [SETTING].

(2)–2 Position the cursor on “PARAMETER WRITE” using thecursor move keys.

(2)–3 Press the [(OPRT)] soft key to display operation select softkeys.)

3.2CHANGINGPARAMETERS


150

Data entered from thekeyboard

Soft key display (opera-tion select)

(2)–4 To set “PARAMETER WRITE=” to 1, press the [ON:1] softkey, or alternatively enter 1 and press the [INPUT] soft key.From now on, the parameters can be set. At the same time analarm condition (P/S 100 PARAMETER WRITE ENABLE)occurs in the NC.

(3) To display the parameter screen, press the + key, then

the [PARAM] section select soft key.

(4) Display the page containing the parameter you want to set, andposition the cursor on the parameter.

(5) Enter data, then press the [INPUT] soft key. The parameter indicatedby the cursor is set to the entered data.

Example: 12000 [INPUT]

Cursor

Data can be entered continuously for parameters, starting at theselected parameter, by separating each data item with a semicolon (;).Example:Entering 10;20;30;40 and pressing the [INPUT] key assigns values10, 20, 30 and 40 to parameters in order starting at the parameterindicated by the cursor.

(6) Repeat steps (4) and (5) as required.



151

(7) If parameter setting is complete, set “PARAMETER WRITE=” to 0on the setting screen to disable further parameter setting.

(8) Reset the NC to release the alarm condition (P/S 100).If an alarm condition (000 PLEASE TURN OFF POWER) occursin the NC, turn it off before continuing operation.

The program protection key can be used to enable ordisable parameter entry.Set bit 7 of NC parameter No. 3297 to 1.If the program protection key is set to “ON”: Parameterscannot be changed.If the program protection key is set to “RELEASE”:Parameters can be changed.If this function is used, it is impossible to enable“PARAMETER WRITE” on the “SETTING”.


152

For example, let’s set the compensation amount with compensation No.001.Suppose that the setting is –100.0.

Soft key [OFFSET]

+

OFFSET screen appears.

Move the cursor to the target number for setting.Here, place the cursor at 001.

3.3CHANGING OFFSETDATA



153

Enter the following values:


154

For example, let’s set an offset value of the workpiece reference positionin the G54 system.

Assume that the X value is 250.0 and the Y value is –190.0.

Soft key [WORK]

+

The WORK OFSET

(workpiece offset)screen is displayed.

Move the cursor to the number to be set.In this example, move the cursor to Y in No. 1 (offset value of the workpiece reference position in the G54 system).

No. 01

3.4CHANGINGWORKPIECECOORDINATESYSTEM DATA



155

Enter the following values:


156

As shown in the table below, custom macro variables are classified intocommon variables and system variables according to their variablenumbers.

Types of variables

Variable name Variable No. Description Remarks

Local variables (can be used by user)

#1 to #33 Variables used in a macro locally Write are enabled.

Common variables #100 to #149 Data cleared when power is turned offCommon variables (can be used by user) #500 to #531 Data retained when power is turned off

Additional common #100 to #199 Data cleared when power is turned offAdditional common variables #500 to #999 Data retained when power is turned off

#1000 to #1015,#1032

Interface input signal (DI) Write are enabled.

#1100 to #1115,#1132, #1133

Interface output signal (DO)

#2000 to #2200 Tool offset value Write are enabled.

#3000 Macro alarm

#3001, #3002 Clock

#3003, #3004 Automatic operation control

#3005 Setting

#3011, #3012 Clock information

System variables (fixed uses)

#3901, #3902 Number of machined parts, number ofrequired parts

Write are enabled.

System variables (fixed uses) #4001 to #4120 Modal information(fixed uses)

#5001, #5004 Block end position

#5021, #5024 Machine coordinates

#5041 to #5044 Workpiece coordinates

#5061 to #5064 Skip signal position

#5081 to #5083 Tool offset value

#5101, #5104 Servo deviation

#2500 to #2506or #5201,

#5221, #5241, #5261, #5281, #5301, #5321

Workpiece offset (X-axis)

3.5CUSTOM MACROVARIABLES

3.5.1Custom MacroVariables



157

Variable name RemarksDescriptionVariable No.

#2600 to #2606or #5202,

#5222, #5242, #5262, #5282, #5302, #5322

Workpiece offset (Y-axis)

System variables (fixed uses)

#2700 to #2706or #5203,

#5223, #5243, #5263, #5283, #5303, #5323

Workpiece offset (Z-axis)

#2800 to #2806or #5204,

#5224, #5244, #5264, #5284, #5304, #5324

Workpiece offset (fourth axis)

This section explains how to display and set common variables on thescreen. For details on programs that use custom macro variables andsystem variables, refer to “Custom macro” in the CNC Operator’sManual.

(1) Displaying common variables

(a) Press the key + . Press the [�] soft key then the

[MACRO] soft key to select the macro variable screen.(b) Enter variable number, then press the [NO. SRH] key.

(2) Setting common variables

* Turn off the program protect key.(a) Move the cursor to the common variable to be set.(b) Use the numeric keys to enter data for the common variable, then

press the key.

* To set <empty>, just press the [INPUT] soft key without data.

3.5.2Setting and DisplayingCommon Variables

4. MANUAL RUNNING [CNC OPERATION] B–85014EN/01DETAILED OPERATIONS

158

4 MANUAL RUNNING [CNC OPERATION]

To operate the ROBODRILL manually, first select the manual operationmode key on the operator’s panel, then the appropriate function keys(such as spindle, automatic door, and axis movement).

B–85014EN/014. MANUAL RUNNING

[CNC OPERATION]DETAILED OPERATIONS

159

Set the S command with MDI. A combination of and

rotates the spindle.

The spindle speed can be adjusted using and .

4.1MANUALOPERATION OF THESPINDLE

4. MANUAL RUNNING [CNC OPERATION] B–85014EN/01DETAILED OPERATIONS

160

The door is automatically opened or closed by and . It is

opened or closed each time is pressed.

4.2AUTOMATIC DOOR

B–85014EN/014. MANUAL RUNNING


161

(1) First select the manual operation mode using .

(2) Select the target axis using .

(3) Select the feedrate using .

(4) Rotate the handle to drive the tool along the axis.

Feedrate selection Metric Inches

�200 0.2 mm 0.02 inch

�100 0.1 mm 0.01 inch

�10 0.01 mm 0.001 inch

�1 0.001 mm 0.0001 inch

4.3AXIS MOVEMENT

5. AUTOMATIC RUNNING [CNC OPERATION] B–85014EN/01DETAILED OPERATIONS

162

5 AUTOMATIC RUNNING [CNC OPERATION]

Automatic running means to run the machine tool according to a program.



163

A program of one block can be entered to run the machine in the MDImode.

NOTEA program for MDI running can be edited irrespective of theprogram protect key status.

To move the axis

Select the MDI mode.

Select the program screen.

The program (MDI) window appears.

Enter data for each address. For the first keyinput, address data switches to “address”. For thesecond and subsequent key inputs, address dataswitches to “numeric”.

+

Letters are entered using soft keys. See SectionI–4.2.)

[G] [X]

[;]

5.1MDI RUNNING

5.1.1MDI Running

Examples �


164

Press the CYCLE START button.



165

To turn the spindle

M03S500



Press the PRGRM button.

The program (MDI) window appears.+

[M] [S] [;]

Examples �


166

To replace the tool

M06T3



Press the PRGRM button.

The program (MDI) window appears.+

[M] [T] [;]

Examples �



167

Memory running means to run the machine tool according to a programstored in memory.

1. Machining program check

Whether the part program coded by the programmer is correct mustbe checked. Whether jig settings and offset are correct must also bechecked.

This machine tool provides various operation support functions thatcan perform these checks efficiently and safely. An example ofeffectively checking the machining program is given here. Thesesupport functions are validated for the command to be executedimmediately after each function button is turned on and for thesubsequent commands.

Machine lock (1) When the machine lock is on, each axis of themachine tool does not move.

(2) This button is used to check whether the M/Sfunction and command formats, such as Gcode and axis address are correct.

(3) ON/OFF switching operates on the quickscreen. 31: SEQ. SELECTION

Z axis lock (1) This key is used to check the relative move-ment of the spindle and table with the Z axismovement fixed.

(2) ON/OFF switching operates on the quickscreen. 31: SEQ. SELECTION

Single block key (1) Stops the machine each time one block of aprogram is executed. The operator can checka program by executing it on a block–by–blockbasis and pressing the cycle start button.

Dry run (1) When dry run is on, the F function (that is, fee-drate) specified by the program is ignored andthe machine tool is set to the jog feed speed.

(2) Before pressing this key, check that no me-chanical interference occurs during running.

Rapid traverseoverride

(1) The feedrate specified by the move commandfor the machine tool can be reduced accordingto the percentage which corresponds to a keyby pressing one of the rapid traverse overridekeys: TRVRS LOW, TRVRS 25%, TRVRS100%

NOTE1 For these operation support functions, be sure to read

Section III–9 “Trial Run” once to assure safe operation.2 Even if the machine lock or the Z axis lock is on, the spindle

turns and coolant ON/OFF is executed. The tool changecommand is not executed.

5.2MEMORY RUNNING(MEM)

5.2.1Settings for MemoryRunning


168

2. Actual machiningBe sure to turn off the following function keys when doing the actualmachining.

Machine lock button When machine lock has been turned on and aprogram containing axis move commands hasbeen suspended, the power must be turned offthen back on.

Z axis lock button When Z–axis lock has been turned on and a pro-gram containing axis move commands has beensuspended, the power must be turned off thenback on.

Dry run button When machining is started with the dry run on,feedrate is not appropriate, causing danger.

1. Starting memory running

(1) Press the mode selection key.

(2) Press the + function key to display the

PROGRAM screen and enter the number (O–****) of the program

to run. Then use the cursor key to check that the part

program has been searched.

(3) Press the mode selection key.

(4) When the CYCLE START button is pressed, memory

running starts and the CYCLE START lamp lights.

(5) The PROGRAM CHECK screen can also be displayed in step(1).

NOTEThe CYCLE START button is ignored in the following cases:

(a) When the FEED HOLD button is being pressed(b) When the EMERGENCY STOP button is being

pressed(c) When the RESET key is being pressed(d) When the mode is invalid(e) When a sequence number is being searched(f) When an alarm is on(g) When automatic running is in progress(h) When the NC is not ready(i) When the external workpiece number search signal

and the external program number search signal areon

5.2.2Memory RunningOperation



169

2. Stopping memory running

(1) Press the FEED HOLD button.

When the FEED HOLD button is pressed, the FEED HOLDLED lights and the CYCLE START LED goes off.(i) When the axis is moving, the feed stops after deceleration.(ii) When it is being executed, the dwell is halted.(iii) Automatic running stops after M �� and S �� operations

are executed.(1) When the SPINDLE STOP button is pressed, all

operations stop.(2) When an M00 code is entered, the block that includes the

M00 code is executed, then the operation automaticallystops.

(3) When an M01 code is entered with the M01 STOP buttonon, the operation automatically stops and the FEED HOLD LED lights.


170

Machine running by a program stored in external memory is enabled byconnecting FANUC input/output units or a host computer to thereader/punch interface of this machine tool.

This section explains how to connect the “Handy File” FANUC I/O unitfor remote operation of the machine, as an example.

NOTEIf a product other than FANUC products is connected to thereader/punch interface as an input/output unit, a problemmay occur that the control unit of this machine tool cannotstart operation of the product. The following explanation is applicable only to remoterunning enabled when FANUC input/output units areconnected to the reader/punch interface.

To enable remote running, connect the communication cables of theinput/output units to the reader/punch interface and set the parametersrelated to the interface. CNC Parameters Manual.

1. Starting remote running

(1) Connect the input/output device to the reader/punch interfaceof the machine operator’s panel.

(2) Check the program format (ISO/EIA) of the input/outputdevice.

(3) Check the settings of the parameters related to thereader/punch interface, and other settings.

(4) Set REMOTE MODE to ON on the QUICK screen.

(5) Cause the program screen to appear.

(6) Select the mode selection key .

5.3REMOTE RUNNING(REMOT)

5.3.1Settings for RemoteRunning

5.3.2Remote RunningOperation



171

(7) Press the soft key [ � ], and the soft key [SL. SDL] appearsprovided that the I/O devices are connected correctly.

(8) Press the soft key [FL. SDL], and the “FILEDIRECTORY”screen appears.

(9) Press the soft key [SELECT], and the message “SELECTFILE NUMBER =” appears at the lower left section of thescreen.

(10)Enter the target file number and press .

(11)Press the soft key [EXEC], and the message “CURRENTSELECTED: ****” appears at the top of the screen.

(12)Press the CYCLE START button , and the remote

operation starts and the corresponding lamp lights.2. Stopping remote running

Remote running is stopped in the same way memory running isstopped For details, see the next page.

3. When remote running is interrupted by MDI running or manualrunningRemote running can be interrupted by MDI running and manualrunning. See Section 5.2.2 in IV, “Settings and Operations ofAutomatic Running.”

4. Automatic running using a program in memory cannot be executedwith REMOTE ON on the QUICK screen.Turn REMOTE to OFF if the remote operation is not to be donefurther.


172

Single block is the function that executes one block of the program eachtime the CYCLE START button is pressed.

(1) Turn on the SINGL BLOCK key to set the single block.

One block of the program is executed and the machine tool stops.When the CYCLE START button is pressed, the next block isexecuted and the machine tool stops.To release the single block mode press the SINGL BLOCK keyagain.

NOTE1 For G28 and G29, after the single block is executed, the

machine tool stops even during machining.2 The single block stop point in a canned cycle is any of the

end point 1, 2, or 6 in the figure shown below.

3 For a tool change sequence, the machine tool stops at thespecified point and the FEED HOLD lamp lights.

6

53

2

1

4

Rapid traverse

Cutting feed

5.4SETTINGS ANDOPERATIONS OFAUTOMATICRUNNING

5.4.1Single Block (SINGLBLOCK)



173

(1) Return to the feed hold mode.


The FEED HOLD lamp goes off when it is lit.

(1) Press the FEED HOLD button or the SINGL BLOCK button duringautomatic running to stop or halt the machine tool.

or

(2) Look at the position indicator and record the coordinates of the stopposition.

(3) Execute manual running (see 4. in IV).

(4) Return the axis to the recorded coordinates (start point of manualrunning) while looking at the position indicator.

(5) To restart automatic running, switch the mode to the original mode.


(1) Turn on the SINGL BLOCK key. The machine tool stops after oneblock of the program has been executed.

(2) Set the MDI mode.

(3) Operate the MDI (see Section 5.1 in IV).

(4) To restart automatic running, press the MEM mode selection buttonand then the CYCLE START button.

5.4.2Restarting AutomaticRunning After FeedHold or Stop

5.4.3Manual RunningExecution DuringAutomatic Running

5.4.4MDI CommandExecution DuringAutomatic Running


174

NOTE1 Old modal data remains. If new modal data is needed, it

must be registered. (Example: G code, travel during acanned cycle)

2 The modal data specified from the MDI after MDI operationaffects the subsequent automatic running.

3 The MDI cannot be used to specify cutter compensation.4 The MDI command cannot be executed when automatic

running is being stopped by the feed hold.

The F–function can be used to override feedrate for each 10% stepbetween 0% and 200%.

When the block that includes M01 is encountered, the instruction of thatblock is executed. After the block has been executed, the axes and spindlestop, and the coolant power supply is turned off, and the FEED HOLDLED lights. To validate M01, the M01 STOP key must be on.

To restart the operation, press the CYCLE START button.

This LED lights when anoptional stop occurs.)

When M00 is executed, the FEED HOLD LED lights (optional stopstatus) regardless of whether the M01 STOP key is on or off.

5.4.5Feedrate Override Dial(FEEDRATEOVERRIDE)

5.4.6M01 Stop (OPT STOP)



175

This function is intended to skip program blocks that contain a slash (/).

It is enabled/disabled by setting OPTIONAL BLOCK SKIP on theQUICK SCREEN 31:SEQ.SELECTION to ON/OFF.

NOTE1 The information of the block skipped by this function cannot

be stored in the buffer register. When one block is skippedentirely, the next block is stored in the buffer register.

2 A slash must be placed at the beginning of the block to beskipped. If the block to be skipped does not begin with theslash, the portion between the slash and EOB is ignored.

The rapid traverse rate override can be set to 100%, 25%, or LOW. If anoverride of 25% is applied when the rapid traverse rate is 48 m/min, therapid traverse rate becomes about 12 m/min. When the rapid traverseoverride is set to LOW, the rapid traverse rate is 400 mm/minute. Thisoverride is applicable to the following rapid traverses:

(1) Rapid traverse by G00

(2) Rapid traverse during a canned cycle

(3) Rapid traverse at G27, G28, or G29

(4) Manual rapid traverse

(5) Rapid traverse for manual return to the reference position

(6) Rapid traverse in tool change sequence

5.4.7Optional Block Skip

5.4.8Rapid Traverse RateOverride (TRVRS LOW,TRVRS 25%, TRVRS100%)

6. TOOL CHANGE B–85014EN/01DETAILED OPERATIONS

176

6 TOOL CHANGE

B–85014EN/01 6. TOOL CHANGEDETAILED OPERATIONS

177

(1) Never try to install the tool directly on the spindle since it isdangerous. Be sure to install it on the tool cartridge.

(2) Never try to use tool arbors other than those specified. (See Item I.3,“TOOLS” for the tool arbors that can be used.)

(3) When installing the tool to the tool cartridge, be sure to insert it in allthe way to the end until the grip key is fully engaged in the keywayof the tool. Upon completion of the tool installation, confirm that thetool has been firmly secured without any play.

GripTooling

(4) Never try to install the tool on the tool cartridge which is locatedbelow the spindle.)

(5) During changing of tools, the single block mode is disabled. If toolsare changed when the single block mode is set (for example, pressingthe “TOOL CHANGE” key in the MDI mode), the machine cannotbe stopped until the tool change operation is completed.

(6) When the operation is stopped by pressing the “FEED HOLD”button, never try to move the Z–axis in the manual running mode.The unit will lose track of the coordinate and failure will occur.

6.1TOOL CHANGEPRECAUTIONS


178

When specifying the tool change using the program or MDI, the followingcommand needs to be given using the M06 code:

After T, specify the tool to be indexed using a two digit number.

M06 T �� ( �� : Tool No.) or M06 T �� ( �� : Tool group number)

With this command, the tool having the specified number isselected in the shorter path.)

In addition to the above, the following command may be used:

M06 Pn (n: The n–th tool from the current tool in the clockwise direction)

The tool cartridge always rotates clockwise.)

NOTE1 PS alarm (ATC alarm) is displayed when a tool number other

than 01 to 14(*) are specified.2 When a tool number other than 1 to 14(*) are specified for

the “n” following P, the number minus multiple of 14(*) will beeffective. For example, “n” will be 2 when n = 58 is specified.

3 Alarm 252 (ATC alarm) will be displayed when the toolchange command is executed during the cuttercompensation, tool length compensation, or canned cycle.To execute the tool change command, be sure to cancel thecutter compensation, tool length compensation, or cannedcycle. (Commands G49 and G80 may be specified withinthe block for M06.)

4 When X and Y axes movement and a tool change arecommanded within the same block(Example) G00 X500.0 M06 T02

In this case, the tool change operation is executed first.Then, at the same time the Z axis moves to the top, theturret begins to rotate, and the X (Y) axis begins to move.If the X (Y) axis is still moving even after the turret rotationis completed, the tool change operation is temporarily interrupted until the movement of the X (Y) axis is completed.Upon completion of the X (Y) axis movement, the tool change operation resumes.

5 If a specified tool has the same tool number as the currentlyselected tool, spindle orientation and return to the Z–axisreference position are performed, but tool change is not.

* For the T21iCe series, up to 21.

6.2COMMANDS WITH MCODES

B–85014EN/01 6. TOOL CHANGEDETAILED OPERATIONS

179

A tool change can be executed by pressing the tool change button in theMDI mode.

When TOOL CHANGE key is pressed, the tool cartridge rotatesclockwise to select the tool next to the current one.

6.3“TOOL CHANGE”KEY


180

The ROBODRILL series has a function for checking whether an arbor ismounted on the spindle.

This function is designed to stop the machine for safety in an emergencysituation, for example, when the pull stud of the arbor is broken duringmachining.

If the reset button is pressed while the tools are being changed, tool changestops, and an alarm is issued. The following table lists how to recoverfrom an incorrect tool change operation.

Description Action

An incorrecttool numberwas

When a tool is alreadyassigned to the specified toolnumber.

Correct the program.

specified.When no tool is assigned tothe specified tool number.


The specified tool number has no toolassigned to it.

The tool was changed with the tool of aunspecified tool number.

Perform automatic recovery.

The opera-tor stoppedthe machinewhile the

When the machine wasstopped with the EMER-GENCY STOP button or<RESET> key.

Perform automatic recovery.

tool wasbeingchanged.

When the machine wasstopped with the STOP button.

Restart the machine.

When the machine wasstopped by opening the door.

Close the door, then restartthe machine.

The ROBODRILL is provided with an automatic tool change recoveryprogram (described later) so a tool change alarm can be released easily.Most tool change alarms can be released using this program.

For detailed information, see Section V–4.

6.4MEASURES WHENAN ERROR OCCURSDURING TOOLCHANGE

B–85014EN/01 7. SPINDLE–SPEED FUNCTIONSDETAILED OPERATIONS

181

7 SPINDLE–SPEED FUNCTIONS

7. SPINDLE–SPEED FUNCTIONS B–85014EN/01DETAILED OPERATIONS

182

The rotating direction of the spindle is defined when viewing the tip ofthe spindle from the spindle motor side.

Spindle rotation key is lit depending on the direction of the spindlerotation.

The spindle speed can be specified for each rotation using the address Sand a number from two to four (five) digits. The unit of the number ismin–1.

Rotation of the spindle can be controlled by either of the following twomethods:

In the AUTO or MDI mode, the spindle rotation can be controlled by thefollowing M codes:

M03: Rotates the spindle clockwise.M04: Rotates the spindle counterclockwise.M05: Stops the spindle motion after completing all the commands

within a given block.

N01 M03 S1500: Rotates the spindle clockwise at the speed of 1,500 min–1.

N02 S4000: Sets the spindle speed to 4,000 min–1.

N03 M04: Rotates the spindle counterclockwise.

N04 M05: Stops the spindle.

(1) Specify the spindle speed in the MDI mode.

(2) Select one of the MANUAL modes.

(3) When the spindle operation key is pressed, the LED goes on, and thespindle rotates. (The spindle rotates in the same direction as thedirection in which the spindle rotated previously. When the spindlerotates for the first time after power–on, it rotates clockwise.)

(4) When the spindle operation key is pressed again, the LED goes off,and spindle rotation stops.

NOTE1 The spindle rotation can be stopped in any mode.

Pressing this button during automatic operation stops themachine by effecting feed hold.

2 The lamp blinks during the rigid tapping mode.3 If a spindle speed is not specified, pressing the key cannot

cause the spindle to rotate. (When the safety door is closed)

7.1ROTATION OF THESPINDLE

7.1.1Method Using the M Code

Examples

7.1.2Method Using theSpindle Key (Manual)on the Operator’sPanel


183

Even if the safety door is open, pressing the SPINDLE key causes thespindle to rotate under the following conditions.

� The spindle rotates at a specified constant speed (with S commandsignored).The rotation speed is specified at FUNCTIONS on the QUICKscreen 31 : SEQ. SELECTION.

� Spindle overriding is ignored.

7.1.3Spindle Rotation Whenthe Safety Door isOpen


184

The spindle speed may be overridden in all the running modes.

Pressing the SPINDLE OVERRIDE [DOWN] or [UP] key can specify anoverride speed from 30% to 200% in 10% units to control the spindlespeed. When 100% key is pressed, the spindle speed becomes that of Scommand.

With 80% override at S30003,000�80/100 = 2,400(The spindle speed is 2,400 min–1.)

When the overridden spindle speed exceeds the spindle’s maximumspeed, the spindle rotates at its maximum speed.

When an override of 120% is set at S7500 with a maximum spindle speedof 8,000 min–1, the spindle speed is 8,000 min–1 rather than7,500�120/100 = 9,000 min–1. (In case of standard specification.)

NOTEThe override setting for the spindle is not valid in the tappingcycle (G74 and G84).

7.2SPINDLE OVERRIDE

Examples

Examples


185

The load meter is displayed on the spindle monitor screen. Select thisscreen according to the following procedure.

1) Press the + key to cause the system screen to appear.

2) Press the soft key [ � ] to turn over the soft key pages.3) Press the soft key [SP. parameter].4) Press the soft key [SP. monitor].

50Load meter reading (%)

100 150 200

The α–T14/21iCe standard spindle controls the spindle motor in a uniqueway. The continuous rating varies with the speed.

Set the load meter according to the list below.

Speed (min–1)1500 or

less1750 2000 2250 2500

2800 orgreater

Continuous rating(%)

53 62 71 80 89 100

10-minute rating(%), 25%ED

148

* 25%ED means that the motor is turned on for 2.5 minutes and off for7.5 minutes on a cycle time of 10 minutes.

7.3SPINDLE LOADMETER


186

Spindle orientation means to stop the spindle at a position specified witha parameter. This is done using the M19 command.

The machine is factory–set so that the spindle stops with the spindle keyparallel to the Y–axis. Do not change this angle. (Changing this angledisables automatic tool change recovery operation.)

NOTE1 This command remains effective until the spindle rotation

command (M00 or M01), spindle stop command (M05), orprogram end auxiliary function (M00 or M01) is issued.

2 Issuing this command during rigid tapping generates an EXalarm (No. 1007). (M19 cannot be specified during tapping)

3 Do not issue this command during a canned cycle. Fineboring (G76) and back boring (G87) cause automaticspindle orientation.

7.4SPINDLEORIENTATION (M19)


187

2000 4000 800060001500 280000

1

2

3

5

6

4

5.5

3.7

Spindle speed (min–1)

Output characteristics

10 min. rating (40% ED)

Continuous rating

Out

put k

W


Torq

ue N

m

2000 4000 800060001500 280000

10

20

30

40

12.5

39.4

Torque characteristics

10 min. rating

Continuous rating

Note) The graphs shown above are obtained when the efficiency is 1.

Fig.7.5 (a) Spindle Motor Diagram (standard)

10 min. rating (40%ED)

Continuous rating

3000 9000600015000 12000 150000

15

20

30

4.8

23.5


Torque characteristics

Note) The graphs shown above are obtained when the efficiency is 1.

Output characteristics

0

1

2

3

4

0 3000 6000 9000 12000 15000


10 min. rating (40%ED)

1500

3.7

Continuous rating1.5 10

5

25

Fig.7.5 (b) Spindle Motor Diagram (15000min–1)

7.5SPINDLE MOTORCHARACTERISTIC

8. DISPLAYING ALARM, OPERATOR, AND DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES B–85014EN/01DETAILED OPERATIONS

188

DISPLAYING ALARM, OPERATOR, AND DIAGNOSTICMESSAGES8

8. DISPLAYING ALARM, OPERATOR, AND DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGESB–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS

189

If an alarm occurs, [ALARM MESSAGE] is automatically displayed.(When bit 7 of NC parameter No. 3111 is set to 0)

NOTE1 If an alarm occurs during edit operation using background

editing, the alarm is displayed on PROGRAM withoutscreen switching.While you are using background editing, do not press theRESET key. Otherwise, automatic machine operationwould stop.To release an alarm which occurs during backgroundediting, press any key.

8.1CNC SCREEN

8.1.1Alarm Message


190

[Displaying ALARM MESSAGE]

(1) Press the key, then the or key.

(2) Press soft key [ALARM].

When an operator message is issued, [OPERATOR MESSAGE] isautomatically displayed.(When bit 7 of NC parameter No. 3111 is set to 0)

[Displaying OPERATOR MESSAGE]

(1) Press the key, then the or key.

(2) Press soft key [MSG].

8.1.2Operator Message

8. DISPLAYING ALARM, OPERATOR, AND DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGESB–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS

191

When an alarm or operator message is issued, it is displayed at the top ofthe screen.(When bit 7 of NC parameter No. 3111 is set to 0)One message is displayed at a time.An alarm message is displayed in red and an operator message isdisplayed in magenta.

On [33:DIAGNOSE/ALARM], you can check the displayed alarm,operator, and diagnostic messages. (See the figure above.)[ALARM] Window displays all alarms being displayed.(The [ALARM P.PAGE] and [ALARM N.PAGE] soft keys can be used.)[DIAGNOSTIC] Window displays all operator and diagnostic messagesbeing displayed.(The [DGN P.PAGE] and [DGN N.PAGE] soft keys can be used.)Diagnostic messages are numbered 0 to 999. Operator messages arenumbered starting with 2000.

8.2QUICK SCREEN

8.2.1Common to Screens

8.2.2Diagnose/AlarmScreen


192

Pressing the key on the operator’s panel displays [MESSAGE]

Window in the center of the screen.

Pressing the key again closes [MESSAGE] WINDOW.

For details of each message, see the alarm list and operatorand diagnostic message list in Appendix.

When a particular window (such as the OUTPUT NCSTATEMENTS window) of the manual guide screen isdisplayed, close it. Such a window cannot be displayedsimultaneously.

8.3COMMON TO CNCSCREEN AND QUICKSCREEN

B–85014EN/01 9. RELEASING OVERTRAVELDETAILED OPERATIONS

193

9 RELEASING OVERTRAVEL

The term overtravel refers to a fact that the tool goes beyond a rangespecified for each axis. If an overtravel occurs, an alarm is generated. Toreset the overtravel, it is necessary to return the tool to within a specifiedrange.

Overtravel

An alarm from No. 500 to 507 is displayed on the screen.

“500: Overtravel +X”

How to release

An overtravel is released according to the following procedure.

1 Put the machine in the manual operation mode.

2 The axes on which an overtravel occurred are displayed on the screen.Select one using the axis selection key.

3 Rotate the manual pulse generator in the direction opposite to thedirection indicated on the screen to place the tool within a range ofstroke.

4 Pressing the <RESET> key clears the alarm indication and reset thealarm.

Examples

10. RELEASING THE TOOL TRAPPING STATE B–85014EN/01DETAILED OPERATIONS

194

10 RELEASING THE TOOL TRAPPING STATE

If the cutter bites into the workpiece and the machine stops, follow theprocedure below to release the state.

(1) Press Reset key on the operator’s panel to release the alarm.

(2) Press Manual operation mode key .

(3) Press Z axis key .

(4) Turn the manual pulse generator clockwise and pull out the cutterfrom the workpiece.

NOTE1 When a T–slot cutter is trapped, it cannot be pull out

upward. Remove the cutter from the arm bar.2 When a tap is trapped, the rigid tapping return function is

available. See Subsection IV 1.3.10.

B–85014EN/0111. INPUT/OUTPUT PARAMETERS FOR

EXTERNAL DEVICESDETAILED OPERATIONS

195

11 INPUT/OUTPUT PARAMETERS FOR EXTERNALDEVICES

11.INPUT/OUTPUT PARAMETERS FOREXTERNAL DEVICES B–85014EN/01DETAILED OPERATIONS

196

To use an external device other than the Handy File for input/output usingthe RS–232C interface, change parameters to suit the device.

(For normal input/output using the Handy File, the factory–set defaultsneed not be changed.)

(1) Ordinary input/outputTo use an ordinary input/output unit, change the followingparameters according to the device you are going to use.

No. 0100: Output formatNo. 0101: Stop bit, etc.No. 0102: Input/output unit specification numberNo. 0103: Baud rate

Make sure that parameter No. 0020 (I/O channel) is set to “0”.

(2) Memory cardSet “4” to No. 0020 (I/O channel)

(3) Remote buffer (option)To use a remote buffer, set parameter No. 0020 (I/O channel) to “3”.Change the following parameters according to the device you aregoing to use.

No. 0100: Output formatNo. 0131: Stop bit, etc.No. 0132: Input/output unit specification numberNo. 0133: Baud rateNo. 0134: Protocol selectionNo. 0135: RS–422/RS–232–C selection, etc.

(4) When the data server (option) is usedSet No. 0020 (I/O channel) to 5.

NOTE1 Remote buffer connection

Connect the remote buffer to the D–SUB 25 connector in thecabinet (when RS–232C is being used). When usingRS–422, remove the JD28A connector from the FS16ioption board in the rear of the display device and connectit to JD6A.

2 To use a remote buffer, the customers should preparecables to connect it to external equipment by themselves.The RS–232–C connector on the machine operator’s panelmay be used for this purpose. In this case, removeconnector JD36A from the FS16i main PC board in the backside of display and connect it to JD5C on the optional board.

3 For detailed descriptions about the remote buffer, refer tothe Descriptions: Additional Information on the FANUCSeries 15i/150i–MODEL A (Supplement for Remote Buffer)from this manual.

4 For details of the data server, refer to “FAST Ethernet BoardFAST/DATA SERVER OPERATOR’S MANUAL”.

11.1OVERVIEW



197

ROBODRILL has three channels of input/output device interfaces as thereader/puncher interface. The input/output device to be used is specifiedby setting the channel connected to that device in setting parameter I/OCHANNEL.

The specified data, such as a baud rate and the number of stop bits, of aninput/output device connected to a specific channel must be set inparameters for that channel in advance.

For channel 1, two combinations of parameters to specify the input/outputdevice data are provided.

The following shows the interrelation between the input/output deviceinterface parameters for the channels.

– Channel 2 cannot be used.– Channel 3 (remote buffer) is optional.– Channel 5 (data server) is optional.

Specify a channel for an input/output device.

I/O CHANNEL

=0: Channel 1

=1: Channel 1 =2: Channel 2 (Not used)

=3: Channel 3

=4: Memory card

=5: Data server

Input/output channel number (parameter No. 0020)

0020 I/O CHANNEL

0101 Stop bit and other data

0102 Number specified for the input/output device

0103 Baud rate



0113 Baud rate



0123 Baud rate



0133 Baud rate

0134 Selection of protocol

0135 Selection of RS-422 or RS-232C, and other data

I/O CHANNEL=0

(channel 1)

I/O CHANNEL=1

(channel 1)

I/O CHANNEL=2

(channel 2)

I/O CHANNEL=3

(channel 3)

0020 I/O CHANNEL: Selection of an input/output device

Setting entry is acceptable.

[Data type] Byte

[Valid data range] 0 to 5

[I/O CHANNEL] An input/output device used is selected.

0 : The device on channel 1 is selected. (Input/output device connectedto JD36A on the mother board)

11.2DETAILS OF THERELATEDPARAMETERS


198

1 : The device on channel 1 is selected. (Input/output device connectedto JD36A on the mother board)

2 : The device on channel 2 is selected. (Input/output device connectedto JD36B on the mother board)

3 : The device on channel 3 is selected. (Input/output device connectedto the serial communication board)

4 : Memory card

5 : Data server

NOTE1 The input/output device used can be selected also on the

setting screen. Using the setting screen is a more commonmethod for selecting the device.

2 The specified data, such as a baud rate and the number ofstop bits, of an input/output device connected to a specificchannel must be set in parameters for that channel inadvance.I/O CHANNEL=0 and I/O CHANNEL=1 both refer tochannel 1. For each, parameters to set the baud rate, thenumber of stop bits, and other data are provided separately.

3 JD36A, JD36B, JD28A, and JD6A are numbers ofconnectors on the printed circuit boards.

Series 16

MAIN CPU BOARD

Channel 1

RS232C

Channel 2

RS232C

OPTION-1 BOARD

JD28ARS232C

Channel 3

Reader/puncher

I/O CHANNEL=0or

I/O CHANNEL=1

Reader/puncher

I/O CHANNEL=2

Host computer

I/O CHANNEL=3

Host computer

I/O CHANNEL=3

JD36A JD36B JD6ARS422



199

(1) Parameters common to all channels

ENS0100 NCR CTV#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

Setting entry is acceptable.

[Data type] Bit

[CTV] Character counting for TV check on controlling (in the comment section).

0 : Not performed1 : Performed

[NCR] Output of the end of block (EOB) in ISO code

0 : LF, CR, CR are output.1 : Only LF is output.

[ENS] Action taken when a NULL code is found during read of EIA code

0 : The NULL code is ignored.1 : An alarm is generated.

(2) Parameters for channel 1 (I/O CHANNEL=0)

NFD0101 ASI SB2#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

[Data type] Bit

[SB2] The number of stop bits

0 : 11 : 2

[ASI] Code used at data input

0 : EIA or ISO code (automatically distinguished)1 : ASCII code

[NFD] Feed before and after the data at data output

0 : Output1 : Not output

NOTEWhen input/output devices other than the FANUC PPR areused, set NFD to 1.

0102 Number specified for the input/output device (when the I/O CHANNEL is set to 0)

[Data type] Bit

Set the number specified for the input/output device used when the I/OCHANNEL is set to 0, with one of the set values listed in Table 11.2 (a).


200

�� 11.2 (a) Set Value and Input/Output Device

Set value Input/output device

0 RS-232-C (Set the parameters to 0 other than those listed below.)

1 FANUC CASSETTE ADAPTOR 1 (FANUC CASSETTE B1/B2)

2 FANUC CASSETTE ADAPTOR 3 (FANUC CASSETTE F1)

3 FANUC PROGRAM FILE Mate, FANUC FA Card AdapterFANUC FLOPPY CASSETTE ADAPTORFANUC SYSTEM P-MODEL H, FANUC Handy File

4 Not used

5 Portable tape reader

6 FANUC PPRFANUC SYSTEM P-MODEL G, FANUC SYSTEM P-MODEL H

0103 Baud rate (when the I/O CHANNEL is set to 0)

[Data type] Byte

Set the specification number of the input/output device used when the I/OCHANNEL is set to 0, with a set value in Table 11.2 (b).

�� 11.2 (b) Baud Rate Settings

Set value Baud rate Set value Baud rate

1 50 7 600

2 100 8 1200

3 110 9 2400

4 150 10 4800

5 200 11 9600

6 300 12 19200


NFD0111 ASI SB2#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

[Data type] Bit

These parameters are used when I/O CHANNEL is set to 1. The meaningsof the bits are the same as for parameter 0101.


[Data type] Bit

Set the number specified for the input/output device used when the I/OCHANNEL is set to 1, with one of the set values listed in Table 11.2 (a).



201

0113 Baud rate (when I/O CHANNEL is set to 1)

[Data type] Bit

Set the baud rate of the input/output device used when I/O CHANNELis set to 1, with a value in Table 11.2 (b).


NFD0121 ASI SB2#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

[Data type] Bit



[Data type] Bit

Set the number specified for the input/output device used when I/OCHANNEL is set to 2, with a value in Table 11.2 (a).


[Data type] Bit

Set the baud rate of the input/output device used when I/O CHANNELis set to 2, with a value in Table 11.2 (b).


NFD0131 ASI SB2#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

[Data type] Bit


NOTEWhen this parameter is set, the power must be turned offbefore operation is continued.


[Data type] Bit

Set the number specified for the input/output device used when I/OCHANNEL is set to 3, with a number in Table 11.2 (a).


[Data type] Bit

Set the baud rate of the input/output device used when the I/O CHANNELis set to 3 according to the Table 11.2 (c).


202

NOTEValid data range: 1 to 15 (up to a baud rate of 86400 bps)for the RS–422 interface or 1 to 12 (up to a baud rate of19200 bps) for the RS–232–C interface.

�� 11.2 (c) Baud Rate Settings

Set value Baud rate Set value Baud rate

1 50 9 2400

2 100 10 4800

3 110 11 9600

4 150 12 19200

5 200 13 38400

6 300 14 76800

7 600 15 86400

8 1200 — —


0134 CLK NCD SYN PRY#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

[Data type] Bit

[PRY] Parity bit

0 : Not used1 : Used

[SYN] NC reset/alarm in protocol B

0: Not reported to the host1: Reported to the host with SYN and NAK codes

[NCD] CD (signal quality detection) of the RS–232–C interface

0 : Checked1 : Not checked

[CLK] Baud rate clock when the RS–422 interface is used

0 : Internal clock1 : External clock



203

RMS0135 R42 PRA ETX ASC#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

[Data type] Bit

[ASC] Communication code except NC data

0 : ISO code1 : ASCII code

[ETX] End code for protocol A or extended protocol A

0 : CR code in ASCII/ISO1 : ETX code in ASCII/ISO

NOTEUse of ASCII/ISO is specified by ASC.

[PRA] Communication protocol

0 : Protocol B1 : Protocol A

[R42] Interface

0 : RS–232–C interface1 : RS–422 interface

[RMS] State of remote/tape operation when protocol A is used

0: Always 0 is returned.1: Contents of the change request of the remote/tape operation in the

SET command from the host is returned.


12. QUICK EDITOR B–85014EN/01DETAILED OPERATIONS

204

12 QUICK EDITOR

B–85014EN/01 12. QUICK EDITORDETAILED OPERATIONS

205

QUICK EDITOR is a full–screen editor which is the exclusive one toROBODRILL and provides various functions to edit a CNC program onthe QUICK SCREEN.

12.1OVERVIEW


206

(1) QUICK EDITOR provides an editing area of 1000 lines. Each linecan consist of up to 46 characters.

(2) Each editing operation can be performed at an arbitrary position in theediting area by using page key, cursor key, or cursor jump function(see Subsec. 12.5.5).

(3) It is unnecessary to enter EOB (end of block). QUICK EDITOR interprets one line in the editing area as one blockin principle, and add EOB to each line when a program is registeredin the CNC. But some lines in the editing area can be treated as one block by usingcontinuous line function (see Subsec. 12.5.9).

(4) It is possible to edit the machining program in the operation. Consequently the machining program can be modified while themachining processes are checked. But the program is not appliedimmediately because the program cannot be registered in the CNC inthe operation (see Subsec. 12.5.3).

(5) G and M codes can be specified very easily. Consequently the number of use of alphabet is reduced and the factthat no address key exists on the operator’s panel does not causeinconvenience. Furthermore addresses which follow G or M code aredisplayed automatically. This is very useful to a CNC programmer.

(1) The program with lines more than 1000 cannot be edited (created).

(2) During background editing, a program cannot be edited, cannot beregistered, and cannot be deleted by QUICK EDITOR.

(3) If the alphabet keyboard type operator’s panel is provided, somefunctions cannot be used.

(4) Before registering or deleting the program currently being executed,note the contents of the notes appended to each description. Similarly,before performing other operations, note the contents of the relevantnotes.

12.2FEATURES ANDNOTES OF QUICKEDITOR

12.2.1Features of QUICKEDITOR

12.2.2Notes


207

This chapter describes how to display the QUICK EDITOR screen andhow to select each editing function.

QUICK EDITOR screen is in the QUICK SCREEN (screen number:23).Procedures for displaying QUICK EDITOR screen are as follows.

(1) The way by using soft–keysPress the soft–key [OPERATON] for screen change.

The menu of “OPERATION” group is displayed on the soft–key forscreen change.Then press [QUICK EDITOR].

(2) The way by inputting screen number and page keyPress “2”, “3”, and page key on the operator’s panel because QUICKEDITOR screen number is “23”.

2 � � or

P.PAGE

N.PAGE

3PROG SET

QUICK EDITOR screen (next page) is displayed by the above way (1) or(2).

Current mode

12.3QUICK EDITORSCREEN

12.3.1Procedure forDisplaying QUICKEDITOR Screen


208

NOTEThe last program will be read and displayed on the editingarea automatically after QUICK EDITOR screen is selected.But if QUICK EDITOR screen is displayed for the first timeafter power on, the program whose number is selected inthe CNC screen is displayed.

For [QUICK EDITOR], there are two modes: browse mode and editmode.

(1) Browse modeYou can only reference or delete existing programs. You cannotcreate a new program or edit any program.

(2) Edit modeYou can create a new program and edit a program using variousedit functions described later.

[QUICK EDITOR] is in the browse mode immediately after selected. Inthis mode, you can reference a program, but cannot create a new programor edit any program.

Pressing soft key [EDIT] displays the cursor and puts the screen in the editmode. You can create and edit a program.

The current mode is displayed at the upper right of the edit area.

Pressing soft key [EDIT] on [QUICK SCREEN] shown on the previouspage changes the displayed soft keys as shown below. You can create andedit a program. (Edit mode)

In this mode, the screen cannot be changed because the left–side soft keysare also assigned edit functions. To switch to another screen, press END.

Pressing the rightmost soft key changes the edit functions assigned to theright–side soft keys as follows:

For details of each edit function, see Section 12.5, “Quick Editor EditFunctions”.

12.3.2Browse Mode and EditMode

12.3.3Selecting an EditFunction


209

Pressing the key on the operator’s panel displays alphabetic

characters and symbols in the soft key area. You can press a desired softkey to enter the corresponding character or symbol.For entering alphabetic characters and symbols, there are two modes:HALF mode and FULL mode.

(1) HALF mode (frequently used alphabetic characters and symbols)

PAGE

MODE

Switching to the FULL mode

(2) FULL mode (all alphabetic characters and symbols)

Switching to the HALF mode

Pressing the key again displays the names of edit functions in the

soft key area.

NOTEAn operator’s panel having a full keyboard does not havethis function.

12.4INPUT FUNCTION OFQUICK EDITOR

12.4.1Entering AlphabeticCharacters andSymbols


210

When G or M code is entered, addresses possible to follow the G codeor the M code are displayed in the window. Enter numerical values ifnecessary. In the window for G code, some G codes can also be entered.

Only words specified in the window are entered in the editing area bypressing the soft–key [OK] or <INSERT> key on the operator’s panel.

If the soft–key [CANCEL] is pressed, no word is entered in the editingarea. When no numerical value is entered in the window, [CANCEL], [OK],and <INSERT> key are the same function.

A numerical value entered in the window once is canceled by pressing<INPUT> key after moving the cursor.

NOTEThe G code and the M code must be specified with 2 digitslong.

12.4.2Simple Input of G andM Codes


211

Addresses which are frequently used independently of G or M code aredisplayed in the window by pressing <INPUT> key on the operator’spanel. Words can be entered in the editing area similarly to “12.4.2 Simple inputof G and M code” without using alphabet.

See the previous page for details of the use of the operator’s panel (suchas the functions of the [OK], [CANCEL], and <INSERT> keys). Theabove function, which is performed using the <INPUT> key, is useful forrepeating a canned cycle.

(1) To enter a space, use the [INSERT] key on the operator’s panel.

(2) To delete the character to the left of the cursor, use the [CANCEL]key.

(3) To delete the character at the cursor, use the [DELETE] key.

12.4.3Simple Input of Wordsby Input Key

12.4.4Other Operations


212

The above window is displayed by pressing the soft–key [PROG.SELECT] . There are two means to select the program.

(1) Select a desired program number from the program list moving thecursor in the window, and press the soft–key [SELECT] .

(2) Enter a desired program number by using numeric key on theoperator’s panel, (the <INPUT> key need not be pressed) and pressthe soft–key [SELECT] .

When a desired program is selected by using the above means (1) or (2),if the program is already registered, the corresponding program isdisplayed on the editing area. If the program number is for an unregistered program, the only programnumber is displayed and program creation begins.

NOTE1 In the browse mode, you can select only an existing

program.2 In the edit mode, you cannot select any protected program.3 The protected program cannot be selected.4 The program with lines more than 999 cannot be edited and

created.

12.5EDITING FUNCTIONOF QUICK EDITOR

12.5.1Selecting the Program


213

The above window is displayed by pressing the soft–key [PROG.DELETE].

To delete a program, deletion of multiple programs (with specifying arange) either of the following can be selected: the deletion of one programor the deletion of all programs.

(1) Deleting one programSelect a desired program number from the program list moving thecursor in the window, or enter a desired program number by usingnumeric key on the operator’s panel (the <INPUT> key need not bepressed). Then press the soft–key [DELETE].When pressing [DELETE], the following message and soft–key aredisplayed. The program with the specified program number is deletedby pressing [EXEC].

(2) Deletion of multiple programsPressing soft key PLURAL displays the following window. Enter thenumbers of the first and last programs to be deleted to specify adeletion range.

After specifying the deletion range, press soft key EXEC.

(3) Deleting all programsThe following message and soft–key are displayed by pressing thesoft–key [ALL PROGS.].

All programs registered in the CNC are deleted by pressing [EXEC].

12.5.2Deleting the Program


214

NOTE1 When the machine is in the operation, the executing

program cannot be deleted.2 The main program cannot be deleted during execution of a

subprogram.3 While a subprogram is being executed, it is possible to

delete another sub–program called by the same mainprogram. But if a subprogram with the deleted subprogramnumber is not registered before the subprogram is called,alarm (No. 078) occurs.

4 A protected program cannot be deleted.5 When the machine is in the operation, all programs cannot

be deleted.6 When the deletion of all programs is executed, all programs

other than those which have been protected (those havinga program number between 9000 and 9999) will be cleared.


215

The following message and soft–key are displayed by pressing thesoft–key [REGISTER]. Then the program can be registered in the CNC by pressing [EXEC].

(1) When a new program is registered

(2) When a program with the same number has already been registered

NOTE1 When the machine is in the operation, the executing

program cannot be registered until the operation is finished.But it is possible to edit it.

2 After the executing program is edited, if screen change orprogram selection is performed, a message which askswhether to register the program is displayed. (See section12.5.14. )As described in Note 1, however, [YES] cannot be selected.If [NO] is selected, the change will not be reflected in theprogram. In this case, screen change or program selectioncan be executed by the following procedure.(1)Change the program number into an unregistered

number, and register it.(2)Perform screen change or program selection.(3)After the operation is finished, return the program

number (1) to the former one, and register it.(4)The program registered in step (1) is no longer required

(because it was reregistered in step (3)). Delete it.3 While a subprogram is being executed, it is possible to edit

and register another subprogram called by the same mainprogram. But if the subprogram is called in the midst of theregistration, alarm (No. 078) occurs.

4 If an inappropriate format for the CNC exists in a program,the registration might end in failure. In this case, register theprogram again after modification on the inappropriateformat.

5 If the power is turned off without registering a editedprogram, the modification become null.

6 Always enter a four–digit program number following “O” inthe first line.

12.5.3Registering theProgram


216

The above soft–key is displayed by pressing the soft–key[COPY/MOVE].

But [EXEC] is not displayed when this function is selected for the firsttime after displaying QUICK EDITOR screen.

[EXEC] is used to insert the range specified previously or to insert therange in another program.

Procedure for copying

(1) The following soft–key is displayed by pressing the soft–key[COPY].

(2) Move the cursor to the start of the range to be copied and press thesoft–key [START]. Then the following soft–key is displayed.

(3) Specify the range to be copied by moving the cursor. Then the rangeis displayed reversely. The range is specified by pressing the soft–key[END] and then the display is returned to a normal one.

(4) Executing(a) Copying the specified range in the same program

Move the cursor to the line at which the range is to be inserted andpress the soft–key [EXEC] .If you want to copy the same range successively, press[COPY/MOVE] and [EXEC] .

(b) Copying the specified range in another programPress the soft–key [CANCEL] first. (The specified range is notlost by pressing [CANCEL].)Press the soft–key [PROG. SELECT] and select a program inwhich the range is to be inserted.After the program is displayed, move the cursor to the line atwhich the range is to be inserted and press the soft–key[COPY/MOVE] and [EXEC] .

Procedure for moving

Moving is the same as copying, except that the specified range is deleted.

12.5.4Copy and Move (byLine)


217

NOTE1 If the program will exceed 1000 lines by copying, copying

cannot be executed.2 The range to be copied or moved cannot be specified by the

character.3 The range to be copied or moved can be specified up to 100

lines.

The above window and soft–key are displayed by pressing the soft–key[CURSOR JUMP] . Select from the soft–key.

[TOP] The cursor is moved to the top of the program.. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

[GO TO LINE] When the line number of the destination of. . . . . . . jump is entered according to the message, thecursor is positioned to the specified line.

[BOTTOM] The cursor is moved to the bottom of the. . . . . . . . . program.

The above window is displayed by pressing the soft–key [SEARCH].

The [EXEC �] soft key is used to perform downward search, and the[EXEC �] soft key is used to perform upward search.

Upon entering a word for which a search is to be made, it is displayed inreverse video at the bottom of the window. Press the [EXEC �] or [EXEC�] soft key after entering the word. The window is closed and the cursoris positioned to the point at which the specified word was first found.

12.5.5Cursor Jump

12.5.6Search for theSpecified Word


218

If the specified word is not found, the message “THE WORD IS NOTFOUND.” is displayed.

That word for which a search was made most recently remains stored inthe system. Therefore, to subsequently search for the same word again,it is only necessary to press [SEARCH] then [EXEC�]�[EXEC �]. Theword itself does not have to be entered again.

Pressing [SEARCH] causes the word for which a search was last made,if any, to appear at the bottom of the window.

NOTEThe word to be searched for can be specified up to 10letters.

You can simply enter words frequently used for creating custom macros.Pressing soft key [ENTERING A MACRO STATEMENT] displays thefollowing window:

To input a character displayed in the window in the edit area, move thecursor to the character to be input and press INPUT.

NOTEWhen the window is displayed, the cursor in the window ismoved. Before using this function, move the cursor to theposition in which a character is to be input.

12.5.7Entering a MacroStatement


219

Pressing soft key [COMMENT SECTION] displays the following[COMMENT SECTION] Window:

When you enter a character string, it is temporarily displayed at thebottom of the window. After entry, press soft key [EXEC]. The windowis closed and the input comment enclosed by parentheses is inserted oroverwritten in the cursor position.

NOTEA comment input using this function cannot extend overmultiple lines.You can check the positions of the parentheses at thebottom of the window to see the allowable length forinputting a comment in the current position.

(a)

Move the cursor to the desired line and press the soft–key [CONT. LINE].Then the mark of “+” is displayed at the right side of the line. (See theabove (a).)

The mark of “+” means that a line which has the mark is followed by thenext line. And those lines are treated as one block.

If you want to cancel this function, move the cursor to the disired line andpress the soft–key [CONT.LINE] again. Then the mark of “+” disappearsand the treatment as one block is canceled.

12.5.8Entering a Comment

12.5.9Setting and Cancel ofContinuous Line


220

NOTEThis function cannot be used at the bottom of the editingarea.

A line is inserted by pressing the soft–key [INSERT 1 LINE] and then thecursor is moved to the head of the line.

NOTEIf the bottom line (line 999) of the editing area is not empty,this function cannot be executed.

The current line is deleted by pressing the soft–key [DELETE 1 LINE].

Pressing the [ALTER] key on the operator’s panel switches back and forthbetween the insert mode and write–over mode.The currently selected mode is displayed at the upper right of the edit area.

Pressing soft key [FUNCTION SELECTION] displays the followingwindow. You can sets the function of the up and down arrow keys to[ONLY UP AND DOWN] or [GO TO LEFT AFTER THAT].

Then, select a function of the selected item by pressing the [SELECT↑]or [SELECT↓] soft key.

Pressing the [END] soft key closes the window and sets the selectedfunction.

12.5.10Inserting a Line

12.5.11Deleting a Line

12.5.12Setting of Inserting orOverwriting Mode

12.5.13Selecting the Function


221

After editing a program, if screen change or program selection isperformed without registering the program, the following message andsoft–key are displayed. Then select from the soft–key in accordance withthe message.

When changes are made to a read program, UPDATED is displayed at theupper left of the screen.

[YES] Screen change or program selection is. . . . . . . . . . . . . . performed after the current program isregistered.

[NO] Screen change or program selection is. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . performed without registering the currentprogram.

[CANCEL] Screen change or program selection is not. . . . . . . . . . performed.

12.5.14Screen Change andProgram Selectionafter Editing

13.QUICK CONVERSATIONALPROGRAMMING(SUPER C.A.P iM) B–85014EN/01DETAILED OPERATIONS

222

13 QUICK CONVERSATIONAL PROGRAMMING(SUPER C.A.P iM)

B–85014EN/01

13. QUICK CONVERSATIONALPROGRAMMING

(SUPER C.A.P iM)DETAILED OPERATIONS

223

(1) This section uses some abbreviated names as follows:(a) Conversational programming using SUPER C.A.P iM is referred

to as the conversational function.

(b)A part program created and edited by conversational programmingusing SUPER C.A.P iM is referred to as a conversational program.

(c) A part program created and edited in the NC format is referred toas an “NC statement”.

(2) This section briefly describes the conversational function. For detailsincluding the operation, setting data, notes and cautions, and so forthof each function, refer to “FANUC SUPER C.A.P iM OPERATOR’SMANUAL”.

13.1OVERVIEW (SUPER C.A.P iM)


224

(1) Creating and editing a conversational program(a) Study the settings of jigs and tools while viewing the machining

drawings. Keep a record of the study together with the machining drawings.

1 Which program number is to be assigned? (If plural programsalready exist, a unique number must be assigned. )

2 Where is the reference point in a workpiece coordinate syetem?(In general, the center of an air chuck or a corner of the mouthpiece of a machine vise is selected. )In addition, determine whether to machine multiple workpiece.

3 Which tools are used? Which turret numbers are assigned tothe tools?

4 Which surface is used as the reference surface for tool lengthcompensation setting ?(For example, the Z axis coordinate where the tool tip contactsthe workpiece surface is used.)

(b)Upon completion of these studies, proceed to the creation andediting of a conversational program.

1 Create a cutting condition file. A detailed explanation is provided in subsec. 13.3.1.

2 Create a tool file. A detailed explanation is provided in subsec. 13.3.2.

3 Create a pre– tool file. A detailed explanation is provided in subsec. 13.3.3.

4 Set a workpiece coordinate system. A detailed explanation is provided in subsec. 13.3.5.

5 Create and edit a conversational program. A detailed explanation is provided in sections 13.4. , and 13.5.

(2) Conversational program checking and execution1 Mount a tool on the turret, then measure and set tool length

compensation and cutter compensation data.

2 In multiple workpiece machining, set multiple workpiece settingas required.

3 Use the drawing functions (tool path drawing, animatedsimulation) to check a created machining program. See Section 13.6.

4 Select the conversational program subject to execution.

5 Perform test machining in the same way as for memory operation. If there is a problem, correct the program.

13.2CONVERSATIONALPROGRAMMINGFUNCTION

13.2.1Operation

B–85014EN/01



225

Note the restrictions on the conversational function as described below.

(1) Cutting condition file/automatic cutting condition determinationfunction

(a) Even if the cutting condition file data is set again, no spindle speedand feedrate already edited in the conversational program changeafter a conversational program is created and edited.

(b)With the conversational function, the automatic cutting conditiondetermination function determines a spindle speed and feedrate atthe time of program creation. Note that the above function uses only data set in the cuttingcondition file and the number of teeth on the tool in the tool file forits computation. However, actual machining requires some changes after initialsetting. For example, peck drilling requires the setting of a slowerfeedrate to match the hole depth. End milling requires different feedrates for side cutting andgrooving. In these cases, change a spindle speed and feedratedetermined during conversational program creation.

(2) Tool file/pre–tool file/automatic pre–tool selection function(a) Even if the tool file or pre– tool file is set again, the tools and related

conditions set in the conversational program already edited doesnot change after conversational program creation and editing. Tool name is allotted to each tool ID number beforehand.

(3) Functions for random and pattern machining in multiple quantities(a) For multiple workpiece machining, a range of functions are

available. These are the all–copy (random) function, all–copy(pattern) function, group copy (random) function, group copy(pattern) function, and group copy (rotation) function.

Use the all–copy (random and pattern) functions in the processimmediately following initialization. Use the group copy (random,pattern, and rotation) functions immediately after initialization, orin the process immediately after an all–copy operation if selected.

Note that the all–copy (random) function and the all–copy (pattern)function cannot be used together in the same program.

(b)The all–copy (random) function can machine up to six workpieces,placed in arbitrary positions according, to the same machiningprogram. The all–copy (random) function uses workpiececoordinate systems 1 through 6 (G54 through G59) for workpiecepositioning. When the all–copy (random) function is used,machining is performed by changing the settings of workpiececoordinate systems 1 through 6 (G54 through G59).

13.2.2Notes


226

If a program is created without first setting the workpiece positionson the data setting screen of the all–copy (random) function, theprogram is executed using the workpiece coordinate systemsettings available when the program is started. If workpiecepositions are set on the data setting screen of the all–copy (random)function, the settings of the workpiece coordinate systems beforethe program is started will differ from those after the program isterminated.

(c) The all–copy (pattern) function can perform multiple workpiecemachining based on a displacement in the X and Y directions,according to the same program. No limit is imposed on the numberof workpieces to be machined. The all–copy (pattern) functionuses workpiece coordinate system 6 (G56) for workpiecepositioning. When the all–copy (pattern) function is used,machining is performed by changing the setting of workpiececoordinate system 6 (G59) for each workpiece position.

The setting of workpiece coordinate system 6 (G59) before theprogram is started differs from that after the program is terminated.

(d)The group copy (random) function or group copy (pattern) functionis used for multiple workpiece machining at arbitrary positions, orat intervals on the X–Y plane, according to the machining patternof a program. The group copy (rotation) function is used to rotateand copy a machining pattern of a program on the X–Y plane.

(e) In multiple workpiece machining, the workpiece coordinatesystem of each machining data setting screen is ignored; only theworkpiece coordinate system specified on the multi–ple workpiecemachining screen is valid.

(f) For details of the multiple workpiece machining function, refer tothe “FANUC Super CAP iM Operator’s Manual.”

(4) Tool compensation

(a) The following shows the tool length compensation command in theconversational function:

Tool compensation number

Input data at common safety Z point

G 90 G 00 G 43 Z ** H ** ;

Accordingly, as the amount of tool length compensation, set therelative Z axis coordinate where the tool tip contacts the workpiece(or jig) reference plane on the table. See “13.3.4 Tool GeometryCompensation” for how to specify it.

The above instructions do not include G17 (plane specification) .So if G18 or G19 remains as modal before the conversationalprogram is executed, the tool may move along the X or Y axis whenthe instruction above is executed.

B–85014EN/01



227

(b)Cutter compensation C is used for cutter compensation when theconversational function is used. So, as the amount of cuttercompensation, set the radius of a tool.

See “13.3.4 Tool Geometry Compensation” for how to specify it.

(5) Setting a coordinate system for a workpiece(a) With the conversational function, select a number from 1 to 5 for

COORDINATE on each conversational data input screen. Neveruse work piece coordinate system 6.

(b)When a conversational program operation creates a localcoordinate system as in machining multiple workpieces, a localcoordinate system available until then is cancelled.

(6) Other conversational program editing operations(a) A conversational program can insert no comments in parentheses.

(b) If the machine tool is running at the time of conversational programcreation and editing, background editing is selected automatically.Except for this case, the current mode is switched to the edit modeautomatically at the time of conversational program creation andediting.

(c) When using the conversational function for background editing, ifan alarm occurs in the conversational mode, do not press the<RESET> key. Otherwise, the program being executed in theforeground will stop. Once the foreground program stops, it cannotbe restarted. To reset this alarm, press the <CAN> key.

(7) Restrictions on program execution(a) Be sure to execute a conversational program from the beginning of

a program.

(b)No conversational program can be executed, with the mirror imageset on.

(c) Conversational program cannot be called by G66. (Programinitialization specifies the cancellation of modal calling. )

(8) External I/O(a) No offset value for multiple workpiece machining can input/output

to an external memory through the reader/puncher interface.


228

The following data must be specified before a conversational program canbe created.

(a) Cutting condition file : This file contains data from which cuttingconditions are derived for automatic settingaccording to the workpiece and toolmaterials. The file initially contains cuttingconditions for seven types of workpiecematerials. Select [CUTTING CONDITIONFILE] on [QUICK C.A.P SCREEN] of[QUICK SCREEN] to set data.

(b) Tool file : This file contains the specified tool materialsand dimensions. A tool name, tool length,and cutter compensation number are assignedto each tool ID number beforehand, such thatthe tool ID numbers cannot be changed.Select [TOOL FILE] on [QUICK C.A.PSCREEN] of [QUICK SCREEN] of [QUICKSCREEN] to set data.

(c) Pre– tool file : This file specifies the tools used inpreparatory cutting. The tools may include a drill used before thefinal cutting, such as tapping, inmulti–toolmachining, as typified in the caseof prepared holes. Select [PRE–TOOL FILE] on [QUICKC.A.P SCREEN] of [QUICK SCREEN] of[QUICK SCREEN] to set data.

(d) Tool geometry compensation : For cutter compensation, select[TOOL FILE] on [QUICK C.A.PSCREEN] of [QUICK SCREEN] toset data for end mills, face millingcutters, and chamfering tools. For tool length compensation, select[TOOL FILE] on [QUICK C.A.PSCREEN] of [QUICK SCREEN] toset data for all tools. Alternatively,select [MAGAZINE DATA] on[QUICK C.A.P SCREEN] of[QUICK SCREEN].Tool compensation number (H–code,D–code) is allotted to each tool IDnumber beforehand. Therefore specified data is set to thecorresponding tool compensationnumber automatically.

(e) Workpiece coordinate system : Positional data used as a reference inmounting a workpiece is specified. Use [COORDINATES/OFFSETSCREEN] of [QUICK SCREEN] toset data.

13.3SETTING SEVERALDATA

B–85014EN/01



229

The above data can be specified in the QUICK SCREEN. A detailedexplanations are provided in the following sections.

For each of two types of tool materials, cutting conditions (cutting speeds,feedrates) for up to eight types of workpiece materials can be registered.(Cutting conditions for up to seven workpiece materials are alreadyregistered. ) A cutting condition is not set for a special workpiece material. Thismaterial should be specified by the user as required. To set cutting condition data, select [TOOL FILE] on [QUICK C.A.PSCREEN] of [QUICK SCREEN].First, display [QUICK C.A.P SCREEN].

Move the cursor to [TOOL FILE] and press soft key [SELECT]. Thescreen for setting cutting condition data appears.

(2) (4)(3)(1)

(5)

13.3.1Cutting Condition File


230

Item Contents

1 CUTTING SPEED For CARBIDE and HIGH–SPEED STEEL of toolmaterials, the cutting speed for each of workpiecematerials can be registered.

� CARBIDE : including coated car-bide

� HIGH–SPEED STEEL : including powdersinter/coating high–speedsteel

2 FEED FOR EACHCUTTING BLADE

The feed for each cutting blade can be specifiedexcept TAP. The feed is common to all tool materials.It is unnecessary to specify a feedrate for TAP be-cause it is automatically determined by the pitch.

4 FEED COEFFICIENT

The feedrate is adjusted with a compensation factorthat corresponds to the nominal diameter of thetool. This data is common to all tool materials.It is unnecessary to specify this data for TAP.

3 NOMINAL DIAMETER

Specify a range of nominal diameter for feed coeffi-cient (4).This data applies to all tools except TAP.It is unnecessary to specify this data for TAP.

5 TOOL SELEC-TION

A tool can be selected to register cutting conditions.A WINDOW is displayed by pressing [TOOL SE-LECT] of SOFT–KEY.Then operate in accordance with instructions in theWINDOW.

B–85014EN/01



231

For each tool, tool materials and dimensions are specified. With aconversational program, cutting conditions such as S and F can beautomatically determined just by programming the tool ID numbers ofregistered tools. To set tool data, select [TOOL FILE] on [QUICK C.A.P.SCREEN] of[QUICK SCREEN].First, display [QUICK C.A.P.SCREEN].

Move the cursor to [TOOL FILE] and press soft key [SELECT]. Thescreen for setting tool data appears.

(1)

(2)

13.3.2Tool File


232

(1) Tool data

Item Contents

1 TOOL No. TOOL No. is the ID number which is allotted toeach tool beforehand.This is used to create a conversational program.The numbers are allotted as follows.

TOOL NAME TOOL No. TOOL NAME TOOL No.

CENTER DRILLDRILLTAPREAMERBORE

1–1011–5051–7071–7576–80

BACK BOREEND MILLFACE MILLCHAMFER

81– 85 86–105106–110111–115

2 NOMINAL DIA. Specify the outside diameter of the tool.Data on the TOOL No. (the following data) are can-celed by setting “0” to nominal diameter.

3 MATERIAL Select a material of the tool from the followingSOFT–KEYS.

4 RADI. COMP. (ONLY FOR ENDMILL, FACE MILL,AND CHAM–FER)

Specify the tool radius compensation value.A compensation number is assigned to each tool IDnumber as listed in the following table:

TOOL NAME TOOL No. D–CODE

END MILLFACE MILLCHAMFER

86–105106–110111–115

166–185186–190191–195

5 LENG. COMP. Specify the tool length compensation value.A compensation number is assigned to each tool IDnumber as listed in the following table:

TOOL NAME TOOL No. H–CODE

CENTER DRILLDRILLTAPREAMERBOREBACK BOREEND MILLFACE MILLCHAMFER

1– 10 11– 50 51– 70 71– 75 76– 80 80– 85 86–105106–110111–115

41– 50 51– 90101–120121–125126–130131–135136–155156–160161–165

6 PITCH(ONLY FOR TAP)

For TAP, specify the pitch of the tapping screwthread.

7 S–DIA.(ONLY FORCHAMFER)

For CHAMFER, specify the diameter of the smallertool end.

SMALLER DIAMETER

8 No. TOOTH(ONLY FOR ENDMILL, FACE MILL,AND CHAMFER)

Specify the number of teeth.

9 EDGE ANGLE(ONLY FORCHAMFER)

For CHAMFER, specify the angle of the tip of thecutting tool. (typically 90°)

B–85014EN/01



233

ContentsItem

10 LENGTH OF CUT Specify the length of the blade of the cutting tool.

11 HOLE–BOTTOMCOMPENSATION

Specify the distance between the measurementpoint (tool tip) for tool length compensation and apoint to determine the effective depth (correspond-ing to the nominal diameter). When machining holes, this is the hole–bottomcompensation value by which the hole is cut beyondthe specified effective depth.In chamfering, this is the clearance between theblade tip and the smaller–diameter end.

Clearance(ONLY FORCHAMFER)

Hole–bottom compensation value

12 CORNER–R(ONLY FOR ENDMILL, AND FACEMILL)

Specify the radius of the corner on the tip of the endmilling or face milling tool blade.

13 TOOL SELECT Select a target tool for setting tool data.Pressing this soft key displays a window. Enter thenumber of a desired tool according to the instruc-tions. Various types of data items related to theselected tool are displayed on the screen.


234

Program creation and editing for multi– step cutting (such as tapping) canbe simplified by creating a pre– tool file.

When it is necessary to drill a center hole and prepare it for tapping, thedrills used in these steps are specified as pre–tools for taps.

Up to eight pre–tools can be specified for a single final tool. Pre–toolscan be specified for up to 80 final tools.

To set pre–tool data, select [TOOL FILE] on [QUICK C.A.P. SCREEN]of [QUICK SCREEN].First, display [QUICK C.A.P SCREEN].

Move the cursor to [PRE–TOOL FILE] and press soft key [SELECT].The screen for setting pre–tool data appears.

(2)

(1)

13.3.3Pre–Tool File

Example :

B–85014EN/01



235

Item Contents

1 AUX TOOLFIN TOOLPRETOOL1PRETOOL2PRETOOL3PRETOOL4PRETOOL5PRETOOL6PRETOOL7PRETOOL8

Pre–tools can be specified for up to 80 final tools(27 pages).Next page or back page is displayed by pressingPAGE KEY.Specify only TOOL No., which is used to display thetool name and nominal diameter from the tool fileautomatically.

(a) FIN TOOL : Specify TOOL No. of the tool to beused in the final machining step.

(b) PRETOOL1 TO 8 : Specify TOOL No. for ma-chining steps before the finalstep. Use lower numbers forsteps closer to the final step,starting with pre–tool num-ber 1 for the step nearest thefinal step, without skipping anumber.

(c) AUX TOOL : Specify the TOOL No. for thechamfering step that followed adrilling step.

(NOTE1) A machining sequence using pre–toolsis as follows.

PRETOOL8→PRETOOL7→PRETOOL6→PRETOOL5→PRETOOL4→PRETOOL3→PRETOOL2→PRETOOL1→FINAL TOOL→AUXILIARY TOOL

(NOTE2) Set “0” for unnecessary steps.

(NOTE3) For an auxiliary tool, specify the TOOLNo. for a tool used after the final tool.Chamfering tap holes must, however, beperformed before the final or tappingstep.Specify PRETOOL1 for the chamferingstep.

2 TOOL LIST TOOL LIST (TOOL No., tool name, and nominaldiameter) is displayed by pressing SOFT–KEY.Only for DRILL, there are 2 pages and they are dis-played by pressing [DRILL 1/2] or [DRILL 2/2] ofSOFT–KEY alternately.

All other tool data is displayed on a single page.The tool list is useful for setting the managementnumber of an auxiliary tool, final tool, and pre–tools1 to 8.


236

Cutter compensation (tool radius compensation) data is specified only forend mill, face mill, and chamfer in the TOOL FILE SCREEN in theQUICK C.A.P SCREEN. A detailed explanation is provided in “13.3.2Tool file”.

Tool length compensation data is specified for all tools in the TOOL FILESCREEN or the MAGAZINE DATA SCREEN in the QUICK C.A.PSCREEN. A detailed explanation is provided in “13.3.2 Tool file” or thissection (in the case of use of the MAGAZINE DATA SCREEN) .

First, display [QUICK C.A.P. SCREEN], move the cursor to[MAGAZINE DATA], and press soft key [SELECT]. The screen forsetting cartridge data appears.

(2)(1) (3)

Item Contents

1 TOOL No. Set the ID number of a tool to be mounted for eachtool number (T code). When the ID number is in-put, the name and nominal diameter of the tool areautomatically displayed.

(NOTE) You cannot enter the ID number of a toolthat has already been set for another toolnumber.

2 TOOL LENGTHCOMPENSATION

Set tool length compensation. Tool length com-pensation can also be set by selecting [TOOL FILE]on [QUICK C.A.P. SCREEN].Pressing soft key [AUTO SET] can also set the cur-rent Z machine coordinate as tool length com-pensation.A compensation number is assigned to each tool IDnumber as listed in the following table:

TOOL NAME TOOL No. H–CODE

CENTER DRILLDRILLTAPREAMERBOREBACK BOREEND MILLFACE MILLCHAMFER

1– 10 11– 50 51– 70 71– 75 76– 80 80– 85 86–105106–110111–115

41– 50 51– 90101–120121–125126–130131–135136–155156–160161–165

13.3.4Tool GeometryCompensation

B–85014EN/01



237

ContentsItem

3 TOOL LIST The contents of the tool file (ID numbers, toolnames, and nominal diameters) are listed.It is useful to reference this [TOOL LIST] when set-ting an ID number.

Positional data used as a reference in mounting a workpiece is specifiedin the COORDINATES/OFFSET in the QUICK SCREEN.

(2)

(1)

(3)

Item Contents

1 GRAPHICAL DISPLAY

The present position of tool and the origin of work-piece coordinate system are displayed graphically.

2 WORK COORDINATE SYSTEM

Input the workpiece coordinate system number.Then specify the origin of the workpiece coordinagesystem.

13.3.5Workpiece CoordinateSystem


238

ContentsItem

3 AUTOMATIC SETTING

It is possible to set the present machine position toworkpiece coordinates.At this time, you can also set the value obtained byadding a desired adjustment value to each machinecoordinate.

When the window is displayed, press soft key [X–EXEC] or [Y–EXEC]. The value obtained by addingthe adjustment value to the current machine coordi-nate for each axis is automatically set as the work-piece coordinate origin.

Supplement) When adding the Z–axis to the auto-matic workpiece coordinate systemsetting, set the following parameter:PMC parameter keep relay K0 bit 2 = 1

B–85014EN/01

13. QUICK CONVERSATIONAL PROGRAMMING


239

A machining program is created by the following procedure:

Start

Program creation screen

Automatic

Initial setting – Enter the initial data (workpiece material, coolant,

reference coordinate system) required for machining.

Selection of a machining menu

– Select a desired machining menu.

Specification of the machining data – In response to messages displayed on the screen,

(1) Specify a machining method. → Position on the

Z–axis, tool (preparation menu)

(2) Specify the figure data. → Positions on the X– and

Y–axes (figure menu)

(3) Specify the process end.

Repeat these steps until all machining data is specified.

(*1)

(*2)

Program end

– Select [PROGRM END].

End

> INPUT PROGRAM NO.

SEARCHEXEC�

NCLAN-GUAGE

POCKET/GROOV

SIDECUTING

FACINGHOLE

PROGRMEND

AUX-ILIARY

2+1/2CCV

2+1/2CVX

PROGRMEND

AUX-ILIARY

2+1/2CCV

2+1/2CVX

Title input– Enter a program name.

SELECT +

QUICK C.A.P. SCREEN

Position the cursor on [PROGRAM MAKE OR EDIT].

13.4CREATING AMACHININGPROGRAM


240

First, the operator selects a machining menu, then enters the type ofmachining, figure of product, and other data in response to inquiries onthe screen. The operator repeats this process to generate a machiningprogram.

*1 The machining data is specified in the following procedures. Themenu of (1) below is automatically displayed only once immediatelyafter the machining menu is selected.

Preparation menu(1) (2)

Figure menu(3)

Process end

Drilling Hole position

This step can be repeated.

Facing start menu Corresponding facing menu

Side cutting start menu Corresponding side cutting menu

Contouring start menu Corresponding contouring menu

Pocketing start menu Corresponding pocket cutting menu

Contour pocket /

grooving start menu

NC language

Corresponding contouring menu

2 +1/2 start Corresponding 2 +1/2 menu

Auxiliary

Contour end

Process end

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.





Process end

Contour end

Process end

Process end

Process end

�

B–85014EN/01



241

A single machining process has the machining data of the [STARTMENU], [FIGURE MENU], and [PROCES END]. The system checkswhether the machining data consists of the above three elements andprevents the operator from creating a machining program which cannotbe executed.

*2 The screen on which the machining data is specified is basicallyconfigured as shown below. The A, B, and C windows show differentdata.

A B

C

Ten soft keysReturn key Next key

A : Program screen that is always displayed. The data in the B and Cwindows depend on the data input. The A window always lists theexisting programs.

B : Guide screen that displays the data of the C window with a drawingor tool file. The cursor is placed on the corresponding parameter inthe C window.

C : Data input screen. Basically, the data is displayed and specified inthis window. The data which cannot be displayed in this window(data to be determined automatically,cuting conditions, etc.) isdisplayed and specified in the B window.

Return key : Displays the previous screen. When the return key can be

used, [<] is indicated here.

Next key : Displays the next part of the currently displayed soft keys.

When the next key can be used, [+] is indicated here.


242

Examples are given below: (In the following example, the number of theprogram to be created is assumed to be 3000.)

1. Display [QUICK C.A.P. SCREEN] or [QUICK SCREEN].

2. Position the cursor on [PROGRAM MAKE OR EDIT] and press softkey [SELECT]. [PROGRAM DIR] appears.

3. Enter program number 3000 and press the [PROG. SELECT] key.(When the program is present, the editing screen is displayed. Theexplanation of edit operation is omitted here.) After entering aprogram number, you can also press the INPUT key on the operator’spanel to create the program. When a new program is to be created, thename input screen is automatically displayed in the bottom window.On this screen, specify a desired program name of up to 16alphanumeric characters, entered using the MDI keys. Then, press the[INPUT TITLE] key. The program name is registered in part programstorage. You can also press the INPUT key on the operator’s panel toregister the program. To abandon the registration, press the[CANCEL] key.

B–85014EN/01



243

4. When the [INPUT TITLE] key is pressed, the initial setting screen isautomatically displayed in the lower window, as shown below:When the cursor is positioned to an entry in window C, a messagerelating to the entry is displayed above the soft keys. The operatorusually enters necessary data, as instructed by the message. On theguidance in window B, the second cursor blinks at the positioncorresponding to the current entry. Being able to see both cursorsenables the easy input of data.


244

The displayed soft keys differ depending on the cursor position asfollows.

– When the cursor is on [Q: MATERIAL]

– When the cursor is on [M: COOLANT]

NOTE[COOLNT M7] means cutting air blow (option).

– When the cursor is on [W: COORDINATES]

5. After entering all desired data, press the soft key [INPUT END]. Thesystem automatically checks the input data. If the system finds aninvalid value among the input data, the cursor is placed on that dataand an alarm message is displayed. If all the input data is correct, theprogram creation screen is displayed again. The process of initialsetting is incorporated into the following screen:

WARNINGAfter completing input of the initial setting data, ensure thatall required data is set correctly.If any data is not set correctly, machining will be performedunder abnormal cutting conditions, such that the workpiecemay be damaged or the tool may collide with the machineand/or workpiece, possibly causing damage to the tooland/or machine, or even injury to the user or bystanders.

B–85014EN/01



245

6. Select a desired machining menu. When the soft key [HOLE] isselected, for example, the following screen is displayed:

7. Select a required detail menu from among hole machining types. Asan example, [06:TAOOING] is selected. The following screenappears:


246

8. Enter desired data, responding to messages and checking the guidance.When the system asks about the tool ID number, enter the ID numberof the last tool (the tool to be used last in that machining, excludingchamfering tools). If required, press the soft key [TOOL INFORM].The system displays the following screen, on which the required toolID number can be easily checked and specified.

9. On the screen, other information (pre–tool list, tool file, tool list) canbe referenced and specified. For example, press the soft key[PRE–TOOL]. [LIST PRE–TOOL] is displayed on the window asshown below.

To change the data of the pre–tool list or add data to it, press the softkey [WINDOW CHANGE]. The cursor moves to the pre–tool listscreen. Place the cursor at a desired position, then enter the desireddata.

NOTENOTE Never attempt to modify the tool ID numbers, toolnames, T codes, cutter compensation D codes, and toollength compensation H codes in the tool file.

B–85014EN/01



247

10.Enter a desired value for [TOOL ID NO]. Automatic tool selection andautomatic cutting condition selection are executed and automaticallydetermined cutting condition data is displayed on the window.

To change the cutting condition data determined by automatic toolselection and automatic cutting condition selection, press [WINDOWCHANGE] to move the cursor to [CUTTING DATA]. Move thecursor to a desired value and change the value. When a tool ID numberis changed at this time, pressing [F.S. AUTO] executes automaticcutting condition selection for the tool ID number again and displayscutting condition data.

To return the cursor to [C WINDOWS], press [WINDOW CHANGE].

11.After checking that all data is correctly entered, press the soft key[INPUT END]. The system automatically checks all the input data.When all the input data is correct, the drilling process is incorporatedinto the program, and the hole position menu is automaticallydisplayed on the screen.


248

12.Press the soft key [PARALLEL OGRM], for example. The followingscreen is displayed. Enter the desired data. (The data of the point tobe omitted can also be specified.)

13.After entering all the desired data, press the soft key [CHECK].According to the input data, the hole position is drawn in the rightwindow. The input data can be easily checked in the window.

B–85014EN/01



249

14.Check that all data is correctly input, then press [INPUT END]. The[HOLE PATERN PARALLELOGRM] process is inserted into theprogram. The previous [HOLE PATERN] screen appears again.

15.To select another hole position menu, follow the same steps as whenthe parallel diagram menu is selected. To terminate drilling, press thesoft key [PROCESS END]. The original program screen is displayedagain.

Repeat these steps to select another machining menu and enter desireddata until a desired machining program is created.


250

16.To terminate a program, press [PROGRAMEND] in the following softkey display:

As End X Coordinate and End Y Coordinate, specify the position in themachine coordinate system (G53).

After entering the necessary data, press the [INPUT END] key. Thiscompletes the creation of a new machining program. The screen isautomatically cleared and the basic menu screen appears.

WARNINGNo check is made to determine whether the machiningsequence is satisfactory. For example, even if you programtapping without first preparing a hole, or perform finishingwithout first roughing, the machine will nevertheless attemptto execute the programmed machining sequence.For this reason, therefore, when using a conversationalfunction to create a machining program, always confirm thatthe machining is performed in a logical sequence.If the machining sequence is logically incorrect, the tool maycollide with the workpiece, or the machine may be forced toperform machining that exceeds its physical capabilities,possibly causing damage to the tool and/or machine, oreven injury to the user or bystanders.

B–85014EN/01



251

A machining program created using the conversational automaticprogramming function can be edited to create a new machining programby automatically changing the machining sequence as described below.(This function is referred to as the optimal process editing function.)

(1) Optimizing the number of tool change operationsProcesses that use the same tool can be performed in succession tominimize the number of tool change operations, thus reducing themachining time.For this purpose, the optimal process editing function includes afunction that allows processes to be alternated automatically. Thisconcept is shown below.

Process (1)

Process (2)

Process (3)

Automatic

process alteration

[EXEC]

Optimized program

ø5 center drilling

ø10 drilling

ø5 center drilling of process (1)



ø10 drilling of process (1)

ø6.8 drilling of process (2)

øM8 tapping of process (2)


ø5 center drilling

ø6.8 drilling

øM8 tapping

ø5 center drilling

ø7 drilling

13.5MACHININGPROGRAMOPTIMIZATION


252

(2) Optimizing the machining sequenceThe machining sequence of processes automatically determined bythe conversational automatic programming function can be changedso that finishing is performed at the end, thus preventing machiningprecision degradation due to heat distortion.For this purpose, the optimal process editing function includes afunction that allows processes to be alternated manually. Thisconcept is shown below.

Process (1)

Process (2)

Process (3)

[EXEC]

Optimized program

Sequence specification

Manual

process alteration

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

ø5 center drilling

ø10 drilling

ø5 center drilling

ø6.8 drilling

øM8 tapping

ø5 center drilling

ø7 drilling






ø6.8 drilling of process (2)

øM8 tapping of process (2)

Below is a detailed description using an example.

WARNINGEven when the optimal process editing function is used, nocheck is made to determine whether the machiningsequence is satisfactory. For example, even if you programtapping without first preparing a hole, or perform finishingwithout first roughing, the machine will nevertheless attemptto execute the programmed machining sequence.For this reason, therefore, when using a conversationalfunction to create a machining program, always confirm thatthe machining is performed in a logical sequence.If the machining sequence is logical incorrect, the tool maycollide with the workpiece, or the machine may be forced toperform machining that exceeds its physical capabilities,possibly causing damage to the tool and/or machine, oreven injury to the user or bystanders.

B–85014EN/01



253

Then, the following screen for setting termination appears:

1. Display [QUICK C.A.P.] screen of [QUICK] screen.

2. Position the cursor on [OPTIMUM PROGRAM] and press soft key[SELECT]. [PROGRAM DIR] appears.

3. Select a program from the list. The following screen appears:

4. Press soft key [AUTO]. Then, the screen for entering a programnumber appears.

13.5.1Optimal ProcessEditing Function(Automatic Alteration)


254

5. Enter the number of the program to create using the optimal processediting function (3101 in this case), then press [EXEC]. The screenchanges as follows:

You can specify a target range for the optimum process edit function(range specification). Selecting [ALL SELECT] specifies the entireprogram as the range.

NOTE1 Only one range can be specified for each partial range

setting operation. For multiple ranges, perform separatesetting operations for each range.

2 An editing range cannot extend from the main program toa subprogram. If a subprogram is called in a specifiedrange, the subprogram is not subject to sequencealteration.

6. As an example, the entire program is optimized. Press soft key [ALLSELECT]. The screen does not change and the displayed soft keyschange as follows:

B–85014EN/01



255

7. Press [EXEC]. The selected range of machining processes (only thedrilling processes in this example) is rearranged automatically by thesystem algorithm to change the machining sequence.

Optimal process editing is shown as follows:

Rules

Step I Step II� �

Drilling Drill 1

Drill 2

Hole position A

Process end

Drilling Drill 1

Drill 3

Hole position B

Process end

Drilling Drill 1

Hole position A

Process end

Drilling Drill 2

Hole position A

Process end

Drilling Drill 1

Hole position B

Process end

Drilling Drill 3

Hole position B

Process end

Drilling Drill 1

Hole position A

Process end

Drilling Drill 1

Hole position B

Process end

Drilling Drill 2

Hole position A

Process end

Drilling Drill 3

Hole position B

Process end

When [EXEC] is pressed, a new program is created by the followinginternal processing steps:

Step I : Internally creates a program where all tools in the editing rangeare resolved on a process–by–process basis. (This step is alsoused in manual alteration described in the next section.)

Step II:Rearranges the processes of such a resolved program accordingto the rules shown below to create a new program.

13.5.2Optimal ProcessEditing Algorithm


256

Rules

(1) The execution sequence of the processes in the

same machining menu must not be changed.

(2) Processes should be chosen in the order of ma-

chining menu creation where possible.

(3) Processes that use the same tool should be cho-

sen in succession where possible.

Rule (1) must always be satisfied. Rule (2) has higher prioritythan rule (3); rules (2) and (3) may be ignored when these rulescannot be satisfied.

NOTE1 The optimal process editing function changes the sequence of processes by referencing only

the tools used in the program. Therefore, when using the optimal process editing function fora program, be especially careful when the program includes a process or NC statement thatreverses the sequential relationship.When the optimal process editing function is used, the following commands must not beincluded in the editing range:– Rotation around the B axis– Plane selection– Coordinate system rotation– Absolute/incremental command– Workpiece coordinate system setting– Scaling– Inch/metric conversionWhen optimal process editing is applied to a program including any of these processes and NCstatements, the partial range setting capability of the optimal process editing function must beused. After checking for any processes whose execution timing must not be changed, the userwho creates the program can then apply optimal process editing to processes whosesequences may be rearranged. Similarly, be careful not to change the sequence of machiningmenus that cannot be reversed.

B–85014EN/01



257

Set a partial range for this section.

Rotation around the B axis

⋅⋅⋅

Set another partial range for this section.

Drilling Drill 1

Drill 2

Hole position A

Process end

Drilling Drill 1

Drill 3

Hole position B

Process end

Drilling Drill 1

Drill 3

Hole position B

Process end

NOTE2 The complete range setting can be used on programs for which the sequence of machining

menus can be reversed.3 When the system determines that optimization is impossible (for example, when a process for

rotation about the B axis is included in a partial setting range), the system does not performoptimal process editing, but instead outputs the alarm message NOT SUITABLE COMBINEPROGRAM.


258

1. Display [QUICK C.A.P.]screen of [QUICK]screen.

2. Position the cursor on [OPTIMUM PROGRAM] and press soft key[SELECT]. [PROGRAM DIR] appears.

3. Select a program from the list. The following screen appears:

4. Press soft key [ALL SELECT]. Then, the screen for entering aprogram number appears.

13.5.3Optimal ProcessEditing Function(Manual Alteration)

B–85014EN/01



259

5. Enter the number of the program to be created using the optimalprocess editing function (3102 in this case), then press [EXEC]. Theprogram is renumbered, and the following screen appears.

NOTENo number is assigned to processes for the initial setting,figure menu, NC language menu, and other items that neednot be rearranged.

6. Move the cursor to the number of the item to change, then enter a newsequence number. After entering the number, press [NUMBER]. Theentered number appears by the number item. At the same time, theother numbers are changed. (When a number is changed to a uniquenumber, other numbers are changed automatically.) As an example,numbers 3 and 6 for center drills are changed to 2 and 3.


260

NOTEThe system performs a check to prevent the executionsequence of processes in the same machining menu frombeing changed. If an invalid sequence number is entered,the system does not perform the renumbering operation,but instead outputs the alarm message UNJUST NUMBER.

7. Upon completion of sequence number input, press [SET END]. Thescreen remains unchanged, but the following soft keys appear:

8. Press [MOVE]. A machining program is created according to theentered sequence number.

B–85014EN/01



261

This function is used to check a created machining program by drawingit. Two functions are available.

(1) Tool path drawing (wire–frame): The tool path, machining profile,tool figure, etc. are drawn with lines in three dimensions. Themachining program can be checked closely using this drawing.

(2) Animated simulation (solid): A three–dimensional profile subject tomachining is drawn using surfaces. The machining program can beeasily understood by viewing this simulation.

1. PATH GRAPHIC(EXECUTION)

Display [QUICK C.A.P.]screen of [QUICK]screen, position thecursor on [PROGRAM CHECK], and press soft key [SELECT].[PROGRAM DIR] appears. Select a program from the list. Thefollowing screen appears.

The first screen after power–on displays a tool path drawing. Afterthat, the previously displayed screen appears.

NOTE1 Set the operation mode to MEM before starting drawing.2 Press [SOLID GRAPH] to display the animated simulation

screen (solid). A soft key can be used to switch between toolpath drawing and animated simulation.

13.6MACHININGPROGRAM CHECK

13.6.1Tool Path Drawing


262

WARNINGEven after tool path drawing has been used to ensure thatthe programmed tool path is satisfactory, if the actuallyentered data such as the tool offset is not as intended, thetool may collide with the workpiece and/or machine(including the jig), possibly causing damage to the tooland/or machine, or even injury to the user or bystanders. For this reason, before starting actual machining, ensurethat the tool will not collide with the workpiece or machine,for example, by executing the machining program at anextremely low feedrate with no workpiece mounted in themachine.

The meanings of each soft key are indicated below.

Soft key Meaning

SOLID GRAPH Switches to the animated simulation screen (solid).

GRAPH PARAM Press to change drawing parameters.

SCALE Enlarges or reduces a part of the drawn figure.

TOOL POS. Displays the current tool center position with a mark.

ERASE Erases all figures drawn up until this soft key is pressed.

SCALING ON/OFF

Indicates whether to use scaling before drawing. Pressthis soft key to toggle the display of [SCALING ON] and[SCALING OFF].

SINGLE ON/OFF

Sets and cancels single block mode. Pressing this keyindicates [SINGLE ON] and [SINGLE OFF] alternately.

DRAW START Starts drawing after erase and head search operation. Ifscale value setting is incomplete, automatic scaling is per-formed before drawing is started.

NOTEThe soft keys [SCALING ON/OFF] and [SINGLE BLOCK]indicate drawing execution conditions. Pressing these softkeys does not start operation.

� Additional information about [SCALING ON/OFF]

Each time this soft key is pressed, the display of [SCALING ON]switches to [SCALING OFF], or vice versa. Usually, the[SCALING OFF] mode is set. If [DRAW START] is pressed when[SCALING OFF] is displayed, drawing is startedusing the currentscale value data.

If [DRAW START] is pressed when [SCALING ON] is displayed,automatic scaling is peformed before drawing is started. Scalingis performed according to the table below.

B–85014EN/01



263

When the machining profilediplay is provided by thedrawing parameter setting

When the machining profilediplay is not provided by thedrawing parameter setting

Program createdin the conversa-tional mode

Scaling is performed basedon the machining profile.Scaling time is shorter(*1).

Scaling is performed basedon the tool path. Scalingtime is longer.

Ordinary NC pro-gram



*1 When bi–plane drawing is selected, scaling is performed based on themachining profile and the tool path.

After the results of scaling are set in the maximum value and minimumvalue drawing parameters, drawing is started. The tool path drawing isthen displayed in the proper scale on the screen.

#79106

#6PSCL

#5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

PSCL When the previous program number differs from the current programnumber on the graphic screen:

0 : The [SCALING OFF] soft key is displayed.1 : The [SCALING ON] soft key is displayed.

After drawing is performed in the [SCALING ON] mode, the mode isautomatically switched to the [SCALING OFF] mode.

If scaling takes too long, drawing can be started earlier as described below.

1. Stop scaling by using soft key [STOP]. The maximum andminimum values obtained by this time are set.

2. Press [DRAW START].

A slightly inaccurate scale value is used, but drawing can be performedby reducing the time for scaling.

� Additional information about [SINGLE ON/OFF]

Each time this soft key is pressed, the display of [SINGLE ON]switches to [SINGLE OFF], or vice versa. The display of[SINGLE ON] represents the single block mode. When [SINGLEOFF] is displayed, continuous drawing is performed.


264

2. Start of tool path drawing

Press [DRAW START] to start drawing.

Soft key Meaning

SINGLE ON/OFF Sets the single block mode when the characters of this softkey are displayed in reverse video. When this soft key ispressed in this state, the characters are displayed normally;the single block mode is released.

STOP Terminates drawing forcibly.

1 BLOCK EXEC. Performs drawing block–by–block in the single blockmode.

When the [SINGLE ON] state is set during drawing, the single blockmode is set. By pressing [1 BLOCK EXEC.] in this state,block–by–block drawing can be performed. When the [SINGLE OFF]state is set, operation switches to continuous drawing.

Drawing terminates when an end of program (M02 or M30) isencountered. Pressing the leftmost soft key displays QUICK. C.A.Pagain.

B–85014EN/01



265

3. Drawing parameters

Press [GRAPH PARAM] to change the tool path drawing parameters.The following drawing parameter screen appears:

After setting required parameters, press [SET END]. The screendisplay returns to the original execution screen.


266

The meanings of each parameter are described below

(1) Drawing screensSeven types of drawing screens are available for selection.

Y

X

Z

Y

Y

Z

Z

X

Z

X Y

Y

Z X

Y

X

Z

X

X–Y plane Y–Z plane

Bi–plane (X–Y, X–Z)

Isometric projection drawing (ZXY)Isometric projection drawing (XYZ)X–Z plane

Z–Y plane

(2) Horizontal rotation angleThis parameter specifies an angle of rotation (–180 to +180 ) aroundthe vertical axis in degrees.

B–85014EN/01



267

(3) Vertical rotation angleThis parameter specifies a tilt angle (–180 to +180 ) with respect tothe vertical axis.

(4) Scale factorA value from 0.01 to 100.00 can be specified. When 1.0 is set, anactual–size drawing is generated. When 0 is set, a scale factor isautomatically determined. (Usually, a scale factor is automaticallydetermined so that this parameter need not be set.)

(5) Maximum value (center)/minimum valueThe coordinates (X,Y,Z) of a drawing center, or maximum drawingcoordinates (X,Y,Z)/minimum drawing coordinates (I,J,K) are set.These settings depend on the value of the drawing scale factor asindicated below.

Drawing scaleSetting

Drawing scalefactor value

Addresses X, Y, and Z Addresses I, J, and K

Value other than 0 Drawing center coordinateson the X, Y, and Z axes

Ignored

0 Maximum drawing coordi-nates on the X, Y, and Zaxes

Minimum drawing coordi-nates on the X, Y, and Zaxes

(Usually, the scale factor parameter and maximum value(center)/minimum value parameter are automatically determined sothat these parameters need not be set.)

(6) Start sequence numberThis parameter is used only when an NC program is to be checked.This parameter sets the sequence number of a drawing start block witha four–digit number. When 0 is set, drawing starts at the beginningof the program. A sequence number check is made with the mainprogram and subprograms as well.Specify an end sequence number.To check a program created in conversational mode, specify 0.

(7) End sequence numberThis parameter is used only when an NC program is to be checked.This parameter sets the sequence number of a drawing end block witha four–digit number. When 0 is set, drawing is performed until theend of the program is reached. A sequence number check is madewith the main program and subprograms as well.To check a program created in conversational mode, specify 0.

(8) TOOL RADIUS COMPSpecifies whether to draw a tool path with cutter compensationenabled or disabled.


268

(9) PART FIGURE DISPA machining profile drawing program must be registered. For thisreason, set this item to [OFF] because no machining profile can bedrawn for a machining program which is not created in theconversational mode.

(10)TOOL FIGURE DISPDraws the tool figure with a cylinder (the height is 0 as the FANUCstandard) at the start point of each block during a drawing check ofthe tool path of a machining program created in the conversationalmode. The tool figure cannot be drawn for a machining programwhich is not created in the conversational mode.

(11)Color specificationSeven colors (white, red, green, yellow, blue, purple, and light blue)are available for selection.– Path : Specify the color for drawing the tool path.

– Tool position : Specify the color of the mark used to indicatethe current tool position.

– Automatic change : Specify this item when the color of the toolpath is to be automatically changed by a Tcommand.

Yes : Changes the color of a tool path automatically.No : Does not change the color of a tool path automatically.When Yes is specified, the color of the tool path changes in the orderdescribed above each time a T code is specified; when light blue isused, the next color is white.– TOOL FIG: : Specify the color for drawing a tool.

(This item is valid only when tool figuredisplay is provided.)

– TOOL POS: : Specifies the color of the mark indicating thecurrent tool position.

B–85014EN/01



269

1. Animated simulation execution screen

Press [SOLID GRAPH]. The following screen appears:

NOTE1 Set the operation mode to MEM before starting drawing.2 To switch to tool path drawing (wire–frame), press [PATH

GRAPH]. A soft key can be used to switch between toolpath drawing and animated simulation.

3 To draw a blank, specify the drawing parameters for blankdimensions, color, and so forth appropriately.

4 The current machine coordinates are used for drawing.(Commands associated with the workpiece coordinatesystems are ignored.)

The meanings of each soft key are indicated below.

Soft key Meaning

PATH GRAPH Switches to the tool path drawing screen (wire–frame).

GRAPH PARAM Press to change drawing parameters.

ROTATION Rotates a generated drawing.

3–PLAN Generates a triplane drawing from a drawn machiningprofile.

PLANE FIGURE Displays a top view of the drawn machining profile.

SECT. PLANE Displays a sectional view of the drawn machining profile.

DRAW START Starts drawing after drawing a blank and performing thehead search operation.

13.6.2Animated Simulation


270

WARNINGEven after animated simulation has been used to ensurethat the programmed machining operation is satisfactory, ifthe actually entered data such as the tool offset is not asintended, the tool may collide with the workpiece and/ormachine (including the jig), possibly causing damage to thetool and/or machine, or even injury to the user orbystanders. For this reason, before starting actualmachining, ensure that the tool will not collide with theworkpiece or machine, for example, by executing themachining program at an extremely low feedrate with noworkpiece mounted in the machine.

2. Execution of drawing

Press [DRAW START] to execute animated simulation. Duringexecution, only soft key [STOP] can be used.

Soft key Meaning

STOP Terminates drawing forcibly.

When drawing is terminated forcibly using this soft key, it may takea short time before drawing terminates completely.

Drawing terminates when an end of program (M02 or M30) isencountered. Pressing the leftmost soft key displays QUICK. C.A.Pagain.

B–85014EN/01



271

3. Animated simulation drawing parameters

Press [GRAPH PARAM] to change the animated simulation drawingparameters.The following drawing parameter screen appears:

After setting required parameters, press [SET END]. The screendisplay returns to the original execution screen.

Each parameter has the meaning described below.

(1)Blank figures

Up to two types of blank figures can be set:

– Rectangular parallelepiped

– Column/cylinder (parallel to the Z axis)

(2)Blank origin (X,Y,Z)

This parameter sets the coordinates (X,Y,Z) of the referenceposition of a blank in the workpiece coordinate system. When theblank is a rectangular parallelepiped, its reference position is thecorner facing the negative direction along each axis. When theblank is a column or cylinder, its reference position is the center ofthe base.


272

(3)Blank dimensions (I,J,K)

This parameter sets the dimensions of a blank.

Z

Y

X(X,Y,Z)

J

I

K

Z

Y

X

IJ

K

(X,Y,Z)

Rectangular parallelepiped

Column/cylinder (parallel to the Z axis)

(4)Tool radius

This parameter sets the tool radius. Usually, this parameter isdetermined automatically and need not be set for a machiningprogram created in the conversational mode. Note that thisparameter applies only when the tool figure is a cylinder.

(5)Tool tip distance

This parameter sets the distance (usually 0) between theprogrammed point and the tool tip. Usually, this parameter isdetermined automatically and need not be set for a machiningprogram created in the conversational mode.

R

KProgrammed point

Tool tip

B–85014EN/01



273

(6)Start sequence number

This parameter sets the sequence number of a drawing start block.When 0 is set, drawing starts at the beginning of the program. Asequence number check is made with the main program andsubprograms as well.

(7)End sequence number

This parameter sets the sequence number of a drawing end block.When 0 is set, drawing is performed until the end of the programis reached. A sequence number check is made with the mainprogram and subprograms as well.

(8)Animated simulation speed

This parameter sets the interval (0 to 255) used in animatedsimulation drawing. A new drawing is displayed each time themachining of a specified number of blocks has been completed.When 0 is specified, a drawing is generated for each block.

(9)Color specification

Seven colors are available for drawing.

Color White Red Green Yellow Blue Purple Light blue


274

A machining program created in the conversational mode can be directlyexecuted without modification. Such a program can also be converted toan NC statement program for execution or modification.

An NC statement program created by such conversion can be stored in anNC part program storage area or can be punched out on an external storageunit via the reader/punch interface.

This function is optional.

NOTEWhile this type of conversion is in progress, other operationssuch as background editing, manual movement, and datasetting using the MDI cannot be performed.

1. Display QUICK. C.A.P of QUICK screen.2. Position the cursor on CONVERT NC FORMAT and press soft key

SELECT. PROGRAM DIR. appears.3. Select a program from the list. The following screen appears:

4. Specify the destination to which NC statements after conversion areto be output.– [PUNCH] : Outputs the program created by conversion to an

external storage unit via the reader/punch interface.– [MEMORY] : Stores the program created by conversion in an NC

part program storage area. In this case, memoryprotection must be released.

Press one of the soft keys. Here, [MEMORY] is pressed as anexample. Then, the displayed soft keys change as follows:

13.7NC STATEMENTOUTPUT FUNCTION

13.7.1NC Statement OutputFunction

B–85014EN/01



275

5. Change the operation mode to the MEM mode and enter a newprogram number after conversion, then press SELECT. Then, thefollowing [GRAPHIC SCREEN] appears:

Pressing [CONV. START] on this screen executes NC statement outputand tool path drawing. (Always after scaling is executed, the tool path isdrawn.)

The moment tool path drawing starts, the selected machining program isconverted to the NC format program in block units as an NC operationcommand is executed. The converted program is stored in the partprogram storage area or output to an external storage device.

NOTEIf an alarm occurs during conversion, the NC formatprogram converted until that time has already been storedin the part program storage area or external storage device.To perform conversion again, correct the invalid part in themachining program, delete the partially converted NCformat program, then perform the conversion startoperation from the beginning.


276

Various types of conversational data can be input and output using anexternal storage device (such as a Handy File and memory card).

Before using this function, connect an external storage device and setnecessary parameters including a parameter for device selection. (Forsetting, use the screen of [3:DATA I/O].)

On DATA I/O of QUICK screen, position the cursor on C.A.P. DATA andpress soft key SELECT. The following screen appears:

To input or output conversational data, press soft key [DATA I/O]. Then,the following screen appears:

(1) To output conversational data to an external devicePress soft key [PUNCH]. The displayed soft keys change as follows:

Press the soft key corresponding to data to be output. As an example,[ALL DATA] is pressed.(Selecting [ALL DATA] can output all conversational data at a time.)

13.8DATA I/O

B–85014EN/01



277

Press [PUNCH EXEC]. The specified data is output.

(2) To read conversational data from an external devicePress soft key [READ]. The displayed soft keys change as follows:

Press the soft key corresponding to data to be read. As an example,[ALL DATA] is pressed.(Pressing [ALL DATA] can input all conversational data at a time.)Then, enter the number of a file on a data medium (such as a floppydisk).

Press [READ EXEC]. The specified data is read.

NOTE• When the input/output device setting (parameter 102, 112,

122, or 132) is RS–232C, you need not enter a file number.Press [READ EXEC] with entering no data.

• Conversational data output with the old type ROBODRILLcannot be read.Also, output conversational data cannot be read with the oldtype ROBODRILL.


278

The tables below contain factory–set values.

(1) CENTER DRILL

140

3

[%]

31

NOMINAL DIA. FEED COEFFIC

00000000

CARBON STEELALLOY STEELGRAY CASTALMINUM CASTSTAINLESS STLOLED STEELDIE STEELSPECIAL

WORKPIECEMATERIALS

CARBIDE[m/min]

CUTTING SPEED

20152530 82015 0

HIGH–SPD[m/min]

0.600.750.801.000.500.600.750.00

FEED PERCUTTER[mm]

0 �

[mm]

3 � 6 75

6 � 10 100

10 �

(2) DRILL

140

3

[%]

31


35 30 40100 0 35 30 0


WORKPIECEMATERIALS

CARBIDE[m/min]

CUTTING SPEED

20152550102015 0

HIGH–SPD[m/min]

0.750.751.001.500.350.750.750.00

FEED PERCUTTER[mm]

0 �

[mm]

3 � 6 75

6 � 10 100

10 �

(3) TAP

30 25 20 50 0 30 25 0


WORKPIECEMATERIALS

CARBIDE[m/min]

CUTTING SPEED

15131540 81513 0

HIGH–SPD[m/min]

FEED PERCUTTER[mm]

(4) REAMER

107

3

[%]

30


12 10 12 25 0 12 10 0


WORKPIECEMATERIALS

CARBIDE[m/min]

CUTTING SPEED

10 81120 010 8 0

HIGH–SPD[m/min]

0.650.650.751.000.000.650.650.00

FEED PERCUTTER[mm]

0 �

[mm]

3 � 6 60

6 � 10 100

10 �

(5) BORE

100

3

[%]

100


50 43 36 10 30 50 43 0


WORKPIECEMATERIALS

CARBIDE[m/min]

CUTTING SPEED

27262085172726 0

HIGH–SPD[m/min]

0.750.750.750.750.250.750.750.00

FEED PERCUTTER[mm]

0 �

[mm]

3 � 6 100

6 � 10 100

10 �

(6) BACK BORE

100

3

[%]

100


50 43 36 10 30 50 43 0


WORKPIECEMATERIALS

CARBIDE[m/min]

CUTTING SPEED

27262085172726 0

HIGH–SPD[m/min]

0.750.750.750.750.250.750.750.00

FEED PERCUTTER[mm]

0 �

[mm]

3 � 6 100

6 � 10 100

10 �

13.9STANDARD DATA

13.9.1Cutting Condition File

B–85014EN/01



279

(7) END MILL

100

3

[%]

60


40 30 40130 0 40 30 0


WORKPIECEMATERIALS

CARBIDE[m/min]

CUTTING SPEED

35 25 40130 18 35 25 0

HIGH–SPD[m/min]

0.200.180.210.350.050.200.180.00

FEED PERCUTTER[mm]

0 �

[mm]

3 � 6 75

6 � 10 90

10 �

(8) FACE MILL

100

3

[%]

60


120120100192 60120120 0


WORKPIECEMATERIALS

CARBIDE[m/min]

CUTTING SPEED

100100170192 40100100 0

HIGH–SPD[m/min]

0.150.150.150.400.100.150.150.00

FEED PERCUTTER[mm]

0 �

[mm]

3 � 6 100

6 � 10 100

10 �

(9) CHAMFER

140

3

[%]

31


35 30 40100 14 35 30 0


WORKPIECEMATERIALS

CARBIDE[m/min]

CUTTING SPEED

20 15 25 30 0 20 15 0

HIGH–SPD[m/min]

0.750.750.901.000.500.750.750.00

FEED PERCUTTER[mm]

0 �

[mm]

3 � 6 75

6 � 10 100

10 �

(1) CENTER DRILL

1.000HIGH–SPD 0.000 1.500 1.500

NOM–DIAMATERIALLENGTH COMP.LENGTH OF CUTCOMPENSATION

TOOL No. 1

1.600HIGH–SPD 0.000 2.400 2.400

2

2.000HIGH–SPD 0.000 3.000 3.000

3

2.500HIGH–SPD 0.000 3.800 3.800

4

3.150HIGH–SPD 0.000 4.800 4.800

5

4.000HIGH–SPD 0.000 6.000 6.000

NOM–DIA.MATERIALLENGTH COMP.LENGTH OF CUTCOMPENSATION

TOOL No. 6

6.300HIGH–SPD 0.000 9.200 9.200

7

0.000

0.000 0.000 0.000

8

0.000

0.000 0.000 0.000

9

0.000

0.000 0.000 0.000

10

(2) DRILL

1.000HIGH–SPD 0.000 12.000 0.300


TOOL No. 11

2.000HIGH–SPD 0.000 29.000 0.600

12

3.000HIGH–SPD 0.000 42.000 0.900

13

3.800HIGH–SPD 0.000 54.000 1.200

14

4.800HIGH–SPD 0.000 62.000 1.500

15

6.000HIGH–SPD 0.000 70.000 1.800


TOOL No. 16

7.000HIGH–SPD 0.000 73.000 2.100

17

8.000HIGH–SPD 0.000 81.000 2.400

18

9.000HIGH–SPD 0.000 89.000 2.700

19

10.000HIGH–SPD 0.000 95.000 3.000

20

11.000HIGH–SPD 0.000 103.000 3.300


TOOL No. 21

12.000HIGH–SPD 0.000 111.000 3.600

22

13.000HIGH–SPD 0.000 114.000 3.900

23

14.000HIGH–SPD 0.000 122.000 4.200

24

15.000HIGH–SPD 0.000 125.000 4.500

25

13.9.2Tool File


280

16.000HIGH–SPD 0.000 130.000 4.800


TOOL No. 26

17.000HIGH–SPD 0.000 135.000 5.100

27

18.000HIGH–SPD 0.000 140.000 5.400

28

19.000HIGH–SPD 0.000 145.000 5.700

29

20.000HIGH–SPD 0.000 150.000 6.000

30

0.750HIGH–SPD 0.000 9.000 0.240


TOOL No. 31

0.950HIGH–SPD 0.000 11.000 0.290

32

1.250HIGH–SPD 0.000 16.000 0.380

33

1.600HIGH–SPD 0.000 20.000 0.480

34

2.100HIGH–SPD 0.000 29.000 0.630

35

2.500HIGH–SPD 0.000 35.000 0.750


TOOL No. 36

3.300HIGH–SPD 0.000 45.000 0.990

37

4.200HIGH–SPD 0.000 54.000 1.260

38

5.000HIGH–SPD 0.000 62.000 1.500

39

6.800HIGH–SPD 0.000 73.000 2.040

40

8.500HIGH–SPD 0.000 87.000 2.550


TOOL No. 41

10.300HIGH–SPD 0.000 98.000 3.090

42

14.000HIGH–SPD 0.000 122.000 4.210

43

17.500HIGH–SPD 0.000 140.000 5.260

44

0.000

0.000 0.000 0.000

45

(3) TAP

1.000HIGH–SPD 0.000 0.250 5.500 1.250

NOM–DIA.MATERIALLENGTH COMP.PITCHLENGTH OF CUTCOMPENSATION

TOOL No. 51

1.200HIGH–SPD 0.000 0.250 5.500 1.250

52

1.600HIGH–SPD 0.000 0.350 8.000 1.750

53

2.000HIGH–SPD 0.000 0.400 8.000 2.000

54

2.500HIGH–SPD 0.000 0.450 9.500 2.250

55

3.000HIGH–SPD 0.000 0.500 11.000 1.500


TOOL No. 56

4.000HIGH–SPD 0.000 0.700 13.000 2.100

57

5.000HIGH–SPD 0.000 0.800 16.000 2.400

58

6.000HIGH–SPD 0.000 1.000 19.000 3.000

59

8.000HIGH–SPD 0.000 1.250 22.000 3.750

60

10.000HIGH–SPD 0.000 1.500 24.000 4.500


TOOL No. 61

12.000HIGH–SPD 0.000 1.750 29.000 5.250

62

16.000HIGH–SPD 0.000 2.000 32.000 10.000

63

20.000HIGH–SPD 0.000 2.500 37.000 12.500

64

0.000

0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000

65

(4) REAMER

2.000HIGH–SPD 0.000 11.000 0.000


TOOL No. 71

4.000HIGH–SPD 0.000 19.000 0.000

72

6.000HIGH–SPD 0.000 26.000 0.000

73

8.000HIGH–SPD 0.000 33.000 0.000

74

10.000HIGH–SPD 0.000 38.000 0.000

75

(5) BORE

5.000 CARBIDE 0.000 0.000 0.000


TOOL No. 76

10.000 CARBIDE 0.000 0.000 0.000

77

15.000 CARBIDE 0.000 0.000 0.000

78

20.000 CARBIDE 0.000 0.000 0.000

79

0.000

0.000 0.000 0.000

80

(6) BACK BORE

5.000 CARBIDE 0.000 0.000 2.500


TOOL No. 81

10.000 CARBIDE 0.000 0.000 5.000

82

15.000 CARBIDE 0.000 0.000 7.500

83

20.000 CARBIDE 0.000 0.000 10.000

84

0.000

0.000 0.000 0.000

85

B–85014EN/01



281

(7) END MILL

2.000HIGH–SPD 0.000 0.000 2 4.000 0.000

NOM–DIA.MATERIALRADIUS COMP.LENGTH COMP.No. OF TOOTHLENGTH OF CUTCORNER–R

TOOL No. 86

2.500HIGH–SPD 0.000 0.000 2 5.000 0.000

87

3.000HIGH–SPD 0.000 0.000 2 5.000 0.000

88

3.500HIGH–SPD 0.000 0.000 2 6.000 0.000

89

4.000HIGH–SPD 0.000 0.000 2 7.000 0.000

90

5.000HIGH–SPD 0.000 0.000 2 8.000 0.000


TOOL No. 91

6.000HIGH–SPD 0.000 0.000 2 8.000 0.000

92

7.000HIGH–SPD 0.000 0.000 2 10.000 0.000

93

8.000HIGH–SPD 0.000 0.000 2 11.000 0.000

94

9.000HIGH–SPD 0.000 0.000 2 11.000 0.000

95

10.000HIGH–SPD 0.000 0.000 2 13.000 0.000


TOOL No. 96

11.000HIGH–SPD 0.000 0.000 2 13.000 0.000

97

12.000HIGH–SPD 0.000 0.000 2 16.000 0.000

98

14.000HIGH–SPD 0.000 0.000 2 16.000 0.000

99

16.000HIGH–SPD 0.000 0.000 2 19.000 0.000

100

18.000HIGH–SPD 0.000 0.000 2 19.000 0.000


TOOL No. 101

20.000HIGH–SPD 0.000 0.000 2 22.000 0.000

102

0.000

0.000 0.000 0 0.000 0.000

103

0.000

0.000 0.000 0 0.000 0.000

104

0.000

0.000 0.000 0 0.000 0.000

105

(8) FACE MILL

50.000 CARBIDE 0.000 0.000 5 9.000 0.800


TOOL No. 106

63.000 CARBIDE 0.000 0.000 6 12.000 0.800

107

80.000 CARBIDE 0.000 0.000 6 12.000 0.800

108

0.000

0.000 0.000 0 0.000 0.000

109

0.000

0.000 0.000 0 0.000 0.000

110

(9) CHAMFER

7.000HIGH–SPD 0.000 0.000 1.500 90.000 1 0.000 0.750

NOM–DIA.MATERIALRADIUS COMP.LENGTH COMP.S–DIA.EDGE ANGLENo. OF TOOTHLENGTH OF CUTCOMPENSATION

TOOL No. 111

15.000HIGH–SPD 0.000 0.000 2.000 90.000 1 0.000 1.000

112

25.000HIGH–SPD 0.000 0.000 6.000 90.000 1 0.000 3.000

113

0.000

0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0 0.000 0.000

114

0.000

0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0 0.000 0.000

115


282

No.

051 031 1 0 0 0 0 0

AUX TOOLFIN TOOLPRETOOL1PRETOOL2PRETOOL3PRETOOL4PRETOOL5PRETOOL6PRETOOL7PRETOOL8

1

PAGE: 1/27

NAME N–DIA.

TAP 1.000

DRILL 0.750C–DRILL 1.000

No.

052 032 1 0 0 0 0 0

2NAME N–DIA.

TAP 1.200


No.

053 033 1 0 0 0 0 0

3NAME N–DIA.

TAP 1.600


No.

054 034 1 0 0 0 0 0


4

PAGE: 2/27

NAME N–DIA.

TAP 2.000


No.

055 035 2 0 0 0 0 0

5NAME N–DIA.

TAP 2.500


No.

056 036 3 0 0 0 0 0

6NAME N–DIA.

TAP 3.000


No.

057 037 4 0 0 0 0 0


7

PAGE: 3/27

NAME N–DIA.

TAP 4.000


No.

058 038 5 0 0 0 0 0

8NAME N–DIA.

TAP 5.000


No.

059 039 6 0 0 0 0 0

9NAME N–DIA.

TAP 6.000


No.

060 040 6 0 0 0 0 0


10

PAGE: 4/27

NAME N–DIA.

TAP 8.000


No.

061 041 7 0 0 0 0 0

11NAME N–DIA.

TAP 10.000


No.

062 042 7 0 0 0 0 0

12NAME N–DIA.

TAP 12.000


No.

063 043 7 0 0 0 0 0


13

PAGE: 5/27

NAME N–DIA.

TAP 16.000


No.

064 044 7 0 0 0 0 0

14NAME N–DIA.

TAP 20.000


No.15

NAME N–DIA.

13.9.3Pre–Tool File

B–85014EN/01



283

DEFAULT FILE : 1

NO DATA NO. DATA NO. DATA NO. DATA#6101 2.000 #6117 1.000 #6133 #6149 3.000#6102 1.000 #6118 0.000 #6134 #6150 2.000#6103 1.000 #6119 0.000 #6135 #6151 3.000#6104 1.000 #6120 0.000 #6136 #6152 7.000#6105 0.000 #6121 1.000 #6137 #6153 2.000#6106 2.000 #6122 0.000 #6138 2.000 #6154 2.000#6107 2.000 #6123 0.000 #6139 0.000 #6155 5.000#6108 3.000 #6124 0.000 #6140 2.000 #6156 3.000#6109 0.000 #6125 1.000 #6141 1.000 #6157 7.000#6110 1.000 #6126 0.000 #6142 1.000 #6158 2.000#6111 1.000 #6127 1.000 #6143 1.000 #6159 100.000#6112 90.000 #6128 2.000 #6144 1.000 #6160#6113 4.000 #6129 8.000 #6145 4.000 #6161#6114 5.000 #6130 6.000 #6146 2.000 #6162#6115 5.000 #6131 1.000 #6147 6.000 #6163#6116 1.000 #6132 70.000 #6148 6.000 #6164

DEFAULT FILE : 2

NO DATA NO. DATA NO. DATA#6165 #6181 #6197#6166 #6182 #6198#6167 #6183 #6199 99998.000#6168 #6184 #6200 99999.000#6169 #6185#6170 #6186#6171 #6187#6172 #6188#6173 #6189#6174 #6190#6175 #6191#6176 #6192#6177 #6193#6178 #6194#6179 #6195#6180 #6196

NOTETo display DEFAULT FILE SETTING screen, position thecursor on C.A.P DATA and press soft key SELECT on 12:DATA I/O of QUICK screen, then press soft key DEFAULTFILE.

13.9.4Default File

14. AI TOOL MONITOR B–85014EN/01DETAILED OPERATIONS

284

14 AI TOOL MONITOR

B–85014EN/01 14. AI TOOL MONITORDETAILED OPERATIONS

285

The AI TOOL MONITOR function monitors the load on a spindle duringhole machining, issues alarms on any abnormal drilling load, and detectsbreakage. If an alarm condition is detected, the AI TOOL MONITORfunction decelerates the tool, enables tool exchange, and stops themachine. If breakage is detected, it stops the machine.

The AI TOOL MONITOR function is enabled when the followingconditions are satisfied.

(1) The spindle is rotating.

(2) The Z–axis is lowering.

(3) Tapping has not be specified.

(4) The current mode is cutting feed mode.

The execution flow of the AI TOOL MONITOR is shown below:

Register warning and breakage levels

Calculate warning and breakagelevels

Specify tool to be used

[TOOL FILE] screen

[TOOL LIFE/SPINDLE LOAD] screen

Detect spindle load torque from trial machining

[TOOL LIFE] screen

Specify operation to be performedif specified warning or breakage

level is detected

Tool data is created by trial machining

[TOOL LIFE/TOOL GROUP] screen

Specify tool if tool exchange is tobe performed when abnormal

condition is detected

Production machining is started.

Automatic computation

Direct setting

Set nominal diameter for file number to be used

14.1OVERVIEW


286

To use the AI tool monitor function, some data items must be set. To setthese data items, use [13:TOOL LIFE]Screen of [QUICK]Screen. Thissection outlines [TOOL LIFE].

(9)(7)(6) (8)

(5)

(2) (3) (4) (1)

Item Contents

1 AI TOOLMONITOR

Specify whether to use the AI tool monitor function.

OFF : The AI tool monitor function is disabled.

ON : The AI tool monitor function is enabledaccording to the setting of 2 through 5.

2 FILE No. SETTING Set a reference load data file number for each tool.Pressing the FILE key causes a file number to bedisplayed on the screen.

3 OPERATIONWHEN WARNINGLOAD ISREACHED

Select the machine operation to be performedwhen spindle load � warning–level load.


FEED DOWN : Tool movement is decelerated toreduce the load on the tool. Ma-chining is continued.

TOOL CHNG : Machining is continued; when thenext tool change command is spe-cified, the tool is changed to a re-served tool registered in the samegroup.

DOWN+CHNG : Tool movement is decelerated;when the next tool change com-mand is specified, the tool ischanged to a reserved tool regis-tered in the same group.


14.2TOOL LIFE SCREEN


287

ContentsItem

4 OPERATIONWHENBREAKAGE LOADIS REACHED (AItool monitorfunction)

Select a machine operation to be performed whenspindle load � breakage–level load.



5 Monitor display ordirectory display ofspindle load levelfiles

Displays monitor information such as load informa-tion related to the currently used tool and tool groupinformation or directory of spindle load level files.


When the [SPNDL LOAD] soft key is pressed, thefollowing windows are displayed:

Use the page and cursor keys to move the cursorto an item for the target file number and press softkey [CALC.]. The warning level and damage levelare calculated using the detected value and nomi-nal diameter set for the file number. To set the cal-culated values in the file, press soft key [ENTRY].

You can also directly enter a value for the item atthe cursor.


Switching between the directory display of spindleload level files or monitor information display

This soft key switches the display in the right–handpart of the screen ((5)) between the directory displayof spindle load level files or monitor information.

When monitor information is displayed, pressingsoft key [FILE] switches the display to the directoryof spindle load level files. When the directory ofspindle load level files is displayed, pressing softkey [MONITER] switches the display to monitorinformation.

When monitor information is displayed, pressing thepage key changes the displayed tool group. Whenthe directory of spindle load level files is displayed,pressing the page key changes the displayed filenumbers.

8 CLEAR TOOLINFORMATION

Information (such as use status and lifetime), cur-rently being displayed about the tools in a toolgroup, is cleared.

9 TOOL GROUPSETTING

When the [TOOL GROUP] soft key is pressed, thewindow shown below is displayed.


288

(16)(15)

(10)

(11)

(12)(13) (14)

Item Contents

10 GROUP No. GROUP No. is changed from 1 to 16 by pressingPAGE KEY.

11 LIFE

TOOL LIFE LIMIT(BY CYCLEQUANTITY ORTIME) TOTRIGGER ANEXPIRATIONADVANCENOTICE

Specify the value of tool life of each group.

Also set the output start timing of the tool life noticesignal.

When the use count (or time) of the last tool isgreater than or equal to the value obtained by life–count (or life–time) – life–notice–count (or life–no-tice–time), the tool life notice signal is output.

12 USED COUNT orTIME

The present USED COUNT or TIME is displayed graphically.

You can also press soft key [USED COUNT][USED TIME] to change the use count (or time).

13 TOOL INFORMATION

The state of the tool is displayed in TOOL IN-FORMATION as “USING”, “LIFE”, or “WARNING”.

(Note) “USING” : tool which is on use in thegroup.

“LIFE” : tool which arrived at the life.

“WARNING” : tool whose spindle load valuedetected by tool monitor func-tion was beyond the warningvalue.

14 T–CODEH–CODED–CODE

Set the number (T code) of each tool that belongsto the group, and the tool length compensationnumber (H code) and cutter compensation number(D code) of the tool as required. Enter 0 for eachitem that is not to be used.


289

ContentsItem

15 CHANGE OFJUDGEMENT OFTOOL LIFE

All data on TOOL LIFE MANAGEMENT are clearedby selecting [COUNT] or [TIME] .

16 CLEARANCE OFTOOLINFORMATION

It is possible to strike off TOOL INFORMATION inthe group.

Pressing this soft key deletes all registered toolgroup data.


290

(1) Mount a tool to be used on the cartridge.

(2) Display [TOOL LIFE]Screen and assign the file number of a spindleload level file to each tool to be used. At this point, [TOOLMONITOR] should be set to OFF.

(3) Press soft key [SPNDL LOAD]. [SPINDLE LOAD FILE] appears.

(4) Set a tool nominal diameter for each file number set in step (2).

(5) Perform test cutting according to the actual cutting conditions andcheck the load put by test cutting.For the detected spindle load value (%), the maximum torque (%)during test cutting is displayed at termination of hole machining.This detected value is used as the basic value for automaticallycalculating the warning level and damage level.(When the program performs continuous machining, perform singleoperation.)

(6) Calculate the warning level and damage level.Use the page and cursor keys to position the cursor on the file numberset for the tool with which test cutting was performed, and press softkey [CALC.]. In the right–hand part of the window, the automaticallycalculated warning level value and damage level value are displayed.

NOTEPressing [CALC.] without positioning the cursor on the filenumber used for test cutting does not calculate correct data.

14.3SETTING DATA


291

(7) Register the warning level and damage level.Press soft key [ENTRY]. The automatically calculated values areregistered.You can also change the setting for the item at the cursor manually.

(8) After setting data for all file numbers to be used, press soft key [END].[SPINDLE LOAD FILE] is closed.

(9) For each tool to be used, set operation to be performed when thewarning load is detected and that to be performed when the damageload is detected.On [TOOL FILE], move the cursor to [WARNING] or[BREAKAGE] and select operation by pressing the correspondingsoft key.

Operation to be performed when the warning load is detected

OFF : Continues machining even when the warninglevel is exceeded.

FEED DOWN : Reduces the feedrate to decrease the load onthe tool and continues machining when the warning level is reached.(Reduces the feedrate to up to 60%.)

TOOL CHNG : Continues machining when the warning levelisreached, and replaces the tool with the nextone registered to the same group when the nexttool change command is issued.

DOWN�CHANGE: Reduces the feedrate when the warning levelis reached, and replaces the tool with the nextone registered to the same group when the nexttool change command is issued.

MCHN STOP : Stops feeding the tool along the Z–axis whenthe warning level is detected. The Z–axis automatically returns to the reference position.After automatic return, performs spindle or coolant unit stop processing and displays an alarm.For details of operation to be performed for machine stop, see the following.

Operation to be performed when the damage load is detected.

OFF : Continues machining even when the damage levelis exceeded.

MCHN STOP : Stops feeding the tool along the Z–axis when thedamage level is detected. The Z–axis automatically returns to the reference position. After automatic return, performs spindle or coolant unit stop processing and displays an alarm.Operation is performed for machine stop as follows:

(1) Damage to a tool is detected.

(2) Feeding the tool along the axis stops.

(3) The Z–axis automatically returns to thereference position (25% of rapid traverseoverride)

(4) The spindle or coolant unit stops.


292

(5) An alarm is displayed.

The following message is displayed duringreference position return of the Z–axis:“2013 EXECUTING TOOL ESCAPE”The following alarm is displayed whendamage to a used tool is detected:“1010 TOOL BREAKAGE WASDETECTED”

(10)Enable the AI tool monitor function (set it to ON).On [TOOL FILE] Screen, move the cursor to [TOOL MONITOR]and select [ON] by pressing the corresponding soft key.


293

If the spindle load reaches the warning level, a used tool can be replacedwith a spare one when the next tool change command is issued. To replacethe tool, a tool group must be set.

(1) On [TOOL FILE] Screen, press soft key [TOOL GROUP]. [TOOLGROUP SETTING] appears.

(2) Set a desired life value for the tool life item.When the tool use count or time exceeds this life value, the tool isreplaced even when the spindle load does not exceed the warninglevel. When you want to use the AI tool monitor function only forreplacing tools, set a sufficiently large value as the life value.

(3) Set the number (T code) of each tool to be used. (Always set numbersin fields, sequentially from No. 1.)

(4) Set tool length compensation codes (H codes).

(5) Press soft key [END] to terminate tool group setting.

NOTEYou can also manage the life of each tool and replace thetool using the tool use count and time without using the AItool monitor function. In this case, set the correct tool lifetime. For other items, set the same values as when eachtool is replaced using the AI tool monitor function.

14.4TOOL GROUPCREATION ANDAUTOMATIC TOOLEXCHANGE

14.4.1Setting a Tool Group


294

To use a tool group, change the T–code and H–code values as describedbelow.

(1) Specify the T–code using a 3–digit number (T��) correspondingto the tool group.

Example)

M06 T101

T101 ⇐ Tool group 1T102 ⇐ Tool group 2T103 ⇐ Tool group 3 ⋅ ⋅ ⋅

(2) Specify the H–code using the H99 command.

When a tool is exchanged, the H99 command performs compensationusing a tool length compensation code in the tool group window.

Example)

M06 T101

Tool life management screen

T101 : Group 1Specify group 1 as follows:

T1 ⇒ T2 ⇒ T3(H62) (H63) (H64)

G43 Z30. H99

The following compensation values are used:H62 when T1 is usedH63 when T2 is usedH64 when T3 is used

Set a compensation value for each specified tool length compensationcode.

14.4.2Program Creation

14.4.3Registering a ToolLength CompensationValue


295

(1) Confirming the current status

Display [TOOL FILE] Screen. When monitor information is notdisplayed in the right–hand part of the screen, press soft key[MONITOR]. Monitor information is displayed.

Monitor information

Tool group information

For each tool in the tool group displayed in monitor information,[USING], [LIFE], or [WARNING] is displayed according to the usestatus of the tool.

[USING] : The tool is used in the group.

[LIFE] : The life count (or time) of the tool is reached.

[WARNING] : The AI tool monitor function detected the spindle load for the tool exceeding the warninglevel.

Pressing the page key changes the tool group number displayed inmonitor information.

(2) Examples of alarm displays

Alarms are displayed under the following conditions.

1 When a tool breakage is detectedIf operation to be performed when the damage load is detected isset to [MCHN STOP], the machine is stopped on the spot and thefollowing alarm is displayed:“1010 TOOL BREAKAGE WAS DETECTED.”

2 When all tools in a group were used upWhen operation to be performed when the warning load is detectedis set to [TOOL CHNG] or [DOWN�CHANGE] and the loadexceeds the warning level for the last tool in a tool group, thefollowing alarm is displayed at termination of the program.When operation to be performed when the damage load is detectedis set to [MCHN STOP] and the load exceeds the damage level forthe last tool, the following alarm is displayed immediately:“1011 ALL TOOLS IN SAME GROUP ARE USED.”

14.5CONFIRMING THECURRENT STATUSAND CLEARING


296

NOTESet TOOL CHNG or DOWN+CHNG for the last tool in a toolgroup. Otherwise, the alarm messages explained above willnot be displayed.

3 When operation to be performed when the damage load is detectedis set to [MCHN STOP] and damage to the last tool is detected, theabove two alarms are displayed simultaneously.

NOTEIf M99 is specified at the end of a program, or if the programis large.Because the M99 is not assumed to be the last commandof a program, no alarm message will be displayed. SpecifyM43 at any location separately from any other command.M43 is a tool status read command. It can read the statusof tools and cause alarm messages to be displayed (if any).

(3) Clearing

When the load reaches the warning or damage level for all tools in a toolgroup or the life count or time for each of the tools is reached, the toolsmust be replaced with new ones and tool life management must beperformed from the beginning. In this case, clear tool information.On [TOOL FILE] Screen, select a tool group for which information is tobe cleared using the page key and press soft keys [CLR TLINFO.] and[EXEC]. The currently displayed tool group information is cleared.


297

(1) Using program commands to specify whether to enable or disable theAI tool monitor functionM40 : Disables AI TOOL MONITOR.M41 : Enables AI TOOL MONITOR.

01200 ;

G40G49G80G59 ;

G91G28Z0 ;

G28X0Y0 ;

M06T101 ;

G90G43G00Z30. H99 ;

X40. Y20. ;

M08 ;

M03S600 ;

G81Z–20. F150K0 ;

M40 ;

X80 ;

X85 ;

M41 ;

X90 ;

X100 ;

G80M09 ;

G91G28Z0M05 ;

G28X0Y0 ;

G49M30 ;

� When M40 (disable AI TOOL MONITOR) is executed, the AI TOOL MONITOR function is disabled and remainsso until M41 (enable AI TOOL MONITOR) is executed. In this case, “TOOLMN STP” isdisplayed in the lower section of the QUICKscreen. If the setting for operations to be performed on warning and breakage levels has not been specified on the TOOL LIFE screen, these operations will not be per–formed even after M41 is specified. If the setting for operations to be performed on warning or breakage level is turned off in M41 (enable AI TOOL MONITOR), “TOOLMN STP” will not be displayed.

AI TOOL MONITOR is enabled.

AI TOOL MONITOR is disabled.

AI TOOL MONITOR is enabled.

� M41 (Enable AI TOOL MONITOR)

Power ON � When the power is switched on, the AI TOOL MONITOR function is enabled.

NOTEThis function is available when the AI tool monitor functionis enabled ([TOOL MONITOR] is set to ON) on [TOOLFILE]Screen.If [TOOL MONITOR] is set to OFF, the AI tool monitorfunction does not operate even when M41 is issued.

14.6SUPPLEMENT TOPROGRAMCOMMANDS


298

(2) Peck cycle

M32 Starts to detect a no–load condition for the AI function.

M33 Judges on a no–load condition for the AI function.

M34 Checks whether a no–load error has occurred. Disables the no–loaddetection function for a peck cycle. (Enables the standard no–loaddetection function.)

The term peck cycle refers to a peck drilling cycle directed by G73 or G83.In this peck drilling cycle, a workpiece may not be machined in the firstmachining cycle depending on the position of the R point. To overcomethis problem, the commands listed above are provided so as to performcontrol different from a G81 or G82 canned cycle.

When using these M commands :

M32 ;

G83 X Y ––––– ;

M33 ;

X Y ;

M33

X Y ;

M33

G98 X Y (Last hole position)

M34 ;

Program as listed above, so that the program starts with M32, M33 isissued before the position of the hole, and M34 is issued at the end of thepeck cycle.

(3) Using a program command to set AI tool monitor dataYou can use a program command to set the spindle load level filenumber, operation to be performed when the warning load is detected,and that to be performed when the damage load is detected, for eachtool number.

For a tool number (T): :

• File number(U) � 1 to 100

• Operation to be performed when the warning load is detected(V) � 0:Disabled

1:Deceleration 2:Tool change 3:Deceleration + tool change4:Machine stop

• Operation to be performed when the damage level is detected(W) � 0:Disabled

1:Machine stop


299

Command format

M44 T U�� V� W∆ ;

Tool numbers where data is to be updated: 1 to 14 (1 to 21 for the T21iC series), 99(Specifying 99 causes rewriting for the currently used tool.)

M–code for specifying to update data.

To update data in a program, it is necessary to execute O9029, using acustom macro function. For this reason, program number O9029 cannotbe used for another purpose.

NOTEIf data updating in a program is specified incorrectly, analarm will be issued.

(Example) M44 T98 U41.5 V1 W2 ; (1) (2) (3)

(1) T98 is out of a valid range.

(2) A decimal point cannot be used.

(3) W2 is out of a valid range.

If any of the above errors occurs, the message “1013 AI TOOLMONITOR DATA ERROR” will be displayed.

Setting 0 at [U] (management number) disables the AI TOOL MONITORfunction.When specifying 0 as a management number, specify 0 also at [V](operation for warning load level) and [W] (operation for breakage loadlevel), or specify OFF. Otherwise, an alarm will be issued.

The NC unit does not recognize a T–code (current toolnumber) immediately after the power is switched on. Tohave the T–code recognized, exchange a tool. Once a toolis exchanged, the current tool number is recognized. If thisoperation is not performed, the NC unit becomes inoperablewhen T99 is issued for updating data in a program, and analarm will be issued.


300

(1) Alarms

Number Message Description Response

1010 TOOL BREAKAGE WASDETECTED.

The tool in current use reached abreakage level.

Reset the system, then exchange thebroken tool.

1011 ALL TOOL IN SAMEGROUP ARE USED.

All tools in a specified tool groupreached a warning or breakage level.

Reset the system, then check the tool,or exchange the tool and clear dataabout use status.

1013 AI TOOL MONITOR DATAERROR.

Abnormal data related to the AI function• Program format error• Data out of tolerance

Reset the system, then check the specified command, and exchangethe tool if T99 has been specified.

(2) Messages

Number Message Description

2013 EXECUTING TOOLESCAPE.

A breakage level was detected and the machine stopped feeding. The machine is returning to the Z–axis reference position.

14.7ALARM MESSAGESDISPLAYED BY THEAI TOOL MONITORFUNCTION


301

When a warning or breakage level is detected, a signal can be output toan external device. This function can be used regardless of whether the AItool monitor function is abled.

For setting and connection of signal output, see 15 external interfacefunction.

14.8SIGNAL OUTPUT

15. EXTERNAL INTERFACE FUNCTION B–85014EN/01DETAILED OPERATIONS

302

15 EXTERNAL INTERFACE FUNCTION

15. EXTERNAL INTERFACE FUNCTIONB–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS

303

The ROBODRILL is supplied with an external interface (16 output and16 input signals(*)) as standard. You can change the nature of eachinput/output signal without restrictions to suit your machine.

Standard specifications

OUTPUT 1 : M80 OUTPUTOUTPUT 2 : M81 OUTPUTOUTPUT 3 : M82 OUTPUT · · ·

INPUT 1 : WORK NO. SEARCH 1INPUT 2 : WORK NO. SEARCH 2INPUT 3 : WORK NO. SEARCH 3

· ·

User’s requirements

OUTPUT 1 : M CODE BCD OUTPUT 1OUTPUT 2 : M CODE BCD OUTPUT 2OUTPUT 3 : M CODE BCD OUTPUT 3 · · ·

INPUT 1 : PROGRAM NO. SEARCH 1INPUT 2 : PROGRAM NO. SEARCH 2INPUT 3 : PROGRAM NO. SEARCH 3

· ·

Can be customized as desired

NOTE1 If the optional side automatic door is fitted, 14 input points

and 16 output points can be used.2 When the center–through coolant option is installed,

additional eight input signals and eight output signals areused.

3 It can be increased max. input 32 points and max. output 32points as optional.

15.1OVERVIEW


304

The input/output signals and functions are set on the EXT. INTERFACEscreen (a QUICK screen).

(1) Setting the input/output signals

List of I/O signal

Status

I/O signal address

I/O signal title

Switching INPUT/OUTPUT

Position the cursor to a desired address, then enter a number listed inthe SIGNAL LIST.

To set 2 : M CODE OUTPUT BY BCD 2^0 at output address Y0002.0,for example, position the cursor to Y0002.0 and press the followingkeys :

15.2SETTINGINPUT/OUTPUTSIGNALS ANDFUNCTIONS


305

(2) Setting functions1. Setting machine status output

Press the [STAT. OUTPUT] soft key.

Press

Position the cursor to the item corresponding to the desired output,then press the [ON] or [OFF] soft key.Select an output type (LIGHT UP/BLINK). When multiple menuitems (e.g., ALARM and OPERATOR MESSAGE) are selected forthe same output (e.g., OUTPUT 1), the output types of the menu itemsare different (e.g., LIGHT UP for one, and BLINK for the other), andthe conditions of the menu items simultaneously selected are satisfied(e.g., an alarm and operator message are issued), the output types ofthe menu items become LIGHT UP.After setting the output, press the [END] soft key.2. Setting other functions

Press the [FUNCTIONS] soft key.

Press

Position the cursor to the item corresponding to the desired function,then press the [SELECT�] or [SELECT�] soft key. After setting thefunction, press the [END] soft key.


306

This function can turn a signal on or off independently of the output signalsetting. Use this function to check output signal wiring, for example.

Press the [TEST] soft key.

Press

Position the cursor to the address of the output to be checked, then pressthe [ON] or [OFF] soft key.

After checking the output, press the [END] soft key.

When TEST mode terminates, the ON or OFF status set with this functionis automatically cancelled.

NOTEWhen testing an output signal for which 1. FOR CUSTOMPMC is set, disable the custom PMC function (by settingPMC keep relay K15 bit 7 to 0).

15.3OUTPUT SIGNALCHECK FUNCTION


307

The following input/output signals are supported.

(1) Output signals (ROBODRILL � External equipment)

No. Signal name Function

0 Unused Does not output any signal.

1 For custom PMC Output signal reserved for custom PMC.

2 M code output BY BCD 2^0 See (4) in “Detailed description of input/output signals.”




6 M code output BY BCD 2^0*10 See (4) in “Detailed description of input/output signals.”








14 Request of M code data read See (4) in “Detailed description of input/output signals.”

15 Parity check of BCD data See (4) in “Detailed description of input/output signals.”

16 Distribution completion See (4) in “Detailed description of input/output signals.”

17 M80 output See (5) in “Detailed description of input/output signals.”










27 In the AUTO mode Outputs the operation mode status of the α-T14iA. (*1)

15.4INPUT/OUTPUTSIGNALS


308

(2) Output signals (ROBODRILL � External equipment)


28 Cycle start (In progress) Remains on during programmed operation.

29 Feed hold Remains on in the feed hold state.

30 Emergency stop Remains off in the emergency stop state.

31 Reset Remains on in the reset state.

32 Machine status output 1 See (6) in “Detailed description of input/output signals.”



35 Spindle is at hold Remains on in the spindle stop state.

36 Automatic door close state Goes on when the automatic door close limit is reached.

37 Automatic door open state Goes on when the automatic door open limit is reached.

38 Splash guard door close Goes on when the splash guard door is closed.

39 Production completed Goes on when machining has been completed.

40 Search end of the program No. See (3) in “Detailed description of input/output signals.”

41 Read end of the program No. See (3) in “Detailed description of input/output signals.”

42 Warning level detection Goes on when the spindle load exceeds the warning level. (*2)

43 Breakage level detection Goes on when the spindle load exceeds the breakage level. (*2)

44 Door open (M60) See (1) in “Detailed description of input/output signals.”






50 BATTERY ALARM Goes on when the battery voltage drops to a preset level.

51 Tool life Goes on once all of the tools in the tool group have reached theend of their service life.

52 M100 output See “Details of I/O signals 5.”











309

No. FunctionSignal name











72 1st. REF. POINT (X–AXIS) Goes on upon the completion of reference position return.

73 1st. REF. POINT (Y–AXIS) Goes on upon the completion of reference position return.

74 1st. REF. POINT (Z–AXIS) Goes on upon the completion of reference position return.

75 1st. REF. POINT (4TH–AXIS) Goes on upon the completion of reference position return.

76 1st. REF. POINT (5TH–AXIS) Goes on upon the completion of reference position return.

77 Manual mode Goes on when manual mode is selected.

78 Position switch See Input/output signal details (5).

79 Notice of tool life Is set to ON when the number of times that the last tool in thetool group will be able to be used in the future is not greater thanthe tool life limit to trigger an expiration advance notice.

80 Alarm output 2 See (9) in “Details of input/output signals.”

81 In the remote control On during remote operation.

82 Probe ON/OFF See the item describing the touch probe control function.


310

(3) Input signals (External equipment � ROBODRILL)


0 Unused Ignores the signal input.

1 For custom PMC Input signal reserved for custom PMC.

2 Program number search 2^0 See (3) in “Detailed description of input/output signals.”




6 Program number search 2^0*10 See (3) in “Detailed description of input/output signals.”












18 Request of Prog. No. data read See (3) in “Detailed description of input/output signals.”

19 Work number search 2^0 See (2) in “Detailed description of input/output signals.”




23 External start See (3) in “Detailed description of input/output signals.”

24 External hold When turned off, stops the programmed operation. (*3)

25 External reset When turned on, resets the CNC.

26 External emergency stop When turned on, places the machine in the emergency stop state.(*4)

27 Completion (FIN) See (4) in “Detailed description of input/output signals.”

28 Reset & rewind When turned on, resets the CNC and calls the beginning of a pro-gram.


311

(4) Input signals (External equipment � ROBODRILL)


29 External door open control When turned on, opens the automatic door. (*5)

30 External door close control When turned on, closes the automatic door. (*5)

31 DNC operation When turned on, places the machine in DNC operation mode.

32 Request of door close See (1) in “Detailed description of input/output signals.”

33 Single block on When turned on, places the machine in single block operationmode. (*6)

34 Dry run on When turned on, places the machine in dry run operation mode.(*7)

35 M100 FIN See “Details of I/O signals 5.”










45 Tool breakage The signal being on indicates that the tool is damaged.

46 Skip See “Details of I/O signals 7.”

47 Interrupt–type custom macro Another program is called while the current program is beingexecuted.(*9)

48 Auto. measurement of tool leng. See “Details of I/O signals 8.”(*9)

49 Interlock (ALL AXES) When off, movement on any servo axis is inhibited. (*8)

50 Skip 2 See (7) in “Details of I/O signals .”







57 Alarm output 2 release See (9) in “Details of I/O signals .”

58 Probe status See the item describing the touch probe control function.

59 Probe battery low See the item describing the touch probe control function.

60 Probe error See the item describing the touch probe control function.


312

*1 The output status can be selected by setting bit 7 of keep relay K6.

*2 The output status can be selected by setting bit 6 of keep relay K8.

*3 Set [ON] in the EXTERNAL FEED HOLD field of theFUNCTION SELECTION window.

*4 Set [ON] in the EXTERNAL EMG STOP field of the FUNCTIONSELECTION window.

*5 Signal reception mode can be selected by setting bit 1 of keep relayK7.

*6 Set bit 3 of keep relay K8 to 1.

*7 Set bit 4 of keep relay K8 to 1.

*8 At “FUNCTION SELECTION,” set “INTERLOCK (ALLAXES)” to “ON.”

*9 Option

Standard settings are as folllows:


313

(1) Automatic door open/close (option)

M60 to M65 is specified

The automatic door opens

The door open signal is output

The automatic door closes

Operation is resumed

Is the door close request signal being

input?

When one of commands M60 to M65 is specified in automatic (MEM)or MDI mode, the automatic door opens.

When a signal is input to the machine while the door is open, the doorcloses and operation is resumed.

Note 1) The door close request signal (external equipment� ROBO DRILL) is valid only while one of commands M60 to M65 is being executed.The signal is ignored upon a reset or while one of commands M60 to M65 is not being executed.

Note 2) While one of commands M60 to M65 is being executed,operator message “2001 THE DOOR OF THE SPLASHGUARD IS OPEN” is not displayed, even if the door is open.

NO

YES

(2) External work number search functionSome machining programs can be stored in program memory. Arequired program can thus be called by using the rotary switch orsimilar.After selecting the number of the program, press theCYCLE START button. The specified program is selected,

and automatic operation starts.Program numbers O0001 to O0015 can be selected.When using the external work number search function, set EXT.WORK No. SEARCH for PROGRAM SELECTION.

15.4.1Detailled Description ofInput/Output Signals


314

[Relationship between signal statuses and selected program numbers]

Work No. search2^3

Work No. search2^2

Work No. search2^1

Work No. search2^0

Selected programnumber

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

0

0

0

0

1

1

1

1

0

0

0

0

1

1

1

1

0

0

1

1

0

0

1

1

0

0

1

1

0

0

1

1

0

1

0

1

0

1

0

1

0

1

0

1

0

1

0

1

Not selected

O0001

O0002

O0003

O0004

O0005

O0006

O0007

O0008

O0009

O0010

O0011

O0012

O0013

O0014

O0015

NOTE1 This function can be used only in automatic operation (MEM) mode, not during MDI operation.2 The program number must be selected from O0001 to O0015.3 Not all program numbers need be used to store programs in memory.4 If the program corresponding to a specified number is not found in memory, an alarm is output

at activation. (Alarm message “59 PROGRAM NUMBER IS NOT FOUND”)5 No program is selected if the function is started in the automatic operation stop state (single

block stop, for example) or automatic operation halt state (feed hold stop).The currently selected program is resumed from the current stop point.

6 When resuming the execution of a part-completed program, search for a sequence number inautomatic operation (MEM) mode, then restart the program. A program number is not selected,but execution of the currently selected program is resumed from the point at which executionwas stopped.

7 When the function is started with all signals open, no program number is selected, but thecurrently selected program is executed.To enable automatic operation of a program other than O0001 to O0015, follow the steps shownbelow: · Search for a program number (on the screen). · Set all signals for program selection switches to OPEN. · Press the operation start button.

8 This function cannot be used simultaneously with the external program number searchfunction.


315

(3) External program number search functionWhen a sequencer or other external equipment issues a programnumber to the ROBODRILL, this function retrieves thecorresponding program from the memory of the ROBODRILLcontrol unit.Program numbers O0001 to O9999 can be selected. Specify adesired program with a four-digit binary-coded decimal (BCD)number.To use the external program number search function, set[EXT.PRPG.No.SEARCH] for “PRPGRAM SELECTION”.


316

[Interface]

(External equipment � ROBODRILL)

Signal name Function

Program number search 2^0




Program number search 2^0*10












Specify a program with a binary-coded decimal (BCD) number.

Wiring is not required for a bit that is always set to 0.

Omit wiring according to the program numbers to be used.

Program number read request When the signal is input, the ROBODRILL reads the data correspondingto the program number specified by the program number data signal.

External start When a signal is input after a program number has been selected (whilethe ROBODRILL is sending the selection end signal), automatic operationstarts.

Enter a pulse signal of 200 ms or longer.

(Automatic operation starts at the falling edge of the pulse signal.)

(ROBODRILL � External equipment)


Program number selection end Indicates that a program number has been selected and that automaticoperation can be started.

This signal is output after output of the data read end signal ends. Afterthis signal is output, turn the data read request signal off.

This signal goes off at the following timings:

· When operation is activated

· Upon a reset

· When a new program number is selected


317

[Timing of external program number search]

Program number data signal :

Data read request signal :

External start signal :

Data read end signal :

Selection end signal :

ROBODRILL operation :

Number specified

ON

ON

ON

ON

Automaticoperation

SelectionNumberread

NOTE1 This function cannot be used simultaneously with the

external work number search function.2 No program is selected when the function is started in

automatic operation stop state (single block stop, forexample) or automatic operation halt state (feed hold stop).The currently selected program is started from the point atwhich execution stopped.

3 When the program corresponding to the specified numbercannot be found in memory, an alarm is output at activation.(Alarm message “59 PROGRAM NUMBER NOT FOUND”)

4 When program number 0 is specified, no program numbersare selected. The currently selected program is executed.

5 Programs O8000 to O8999 can be protected by setting anNC parameter (bit 0 of NC parameter No. 3202 (NE8)).Programs O9000 to O9999 are protected beforehandaccording to the setting of a parameter (bit 4 of NCparameter No. 3202 (NE9)).


318

(4) External M code BCD output functionThis function outputs a specified M code number to a sequenceror other external equipment.When the external equipment operates according to the specifiedM code, it is interlocked with the ROBODRILL.The M code number is output as a three-digit binary-codeddecimal (BCD) number.To use the external M code BCD output function, set [NEITHERUSE] for “M CODE OUTPUT BY BCD”.


319

[Interface]

(ROBODRILL � External equipment)


M code BCD output 2^0




M code BCD output 2^0*10








A specified M code is output as a binary-coded decimal (BCD) number.

Not all data need be read.

Omit wiring according to the M codes to be used.

M code data read request Indicates that the M code number data signal is being output.

Read the M code number while the signal is being output.

Distribution end Indicates that an auxiliary function (M, S, or T code) is specified and thataxial movement has been completed.

(Usually, this feature is not used.)

BCD data parity check Outputs the results of a parity check.

(PMC parameter)

K1.1 : Switching between even parity check and odd parity check

K4.5 : Switching the output status of the results of parity check

0

Parity check

Even parity check(K1.1=0)

Odd parity check(K1.1=1)

1

0

1

Checksignal

Parity of specified M code

K4.5=0 K4.5=1

Odd

Even

Even

Odd

Even

Odd

Odd

Even

(External equipment � ROBODRILL)


Finish (FIN) The signal is input once operation of the external equipment ends.

When the signal is input, the ROBODRILL terminates M code output andproceeds to the next block of the program.


320

[Timing of external M code BCD output]

M code number data signal :

Data read request signal :

Finish signal :

ROBODRILL operation :

ON ON

ON ON

ON ON

M code specified M code specified

NOTE1 This function cannot be used simultaneously with the M

code output function.2 M0 to M99 must not be used.3 Specify this function with the first M code if two or more M

codes are to be specified.


321

(5) M code output function (M80 to M89, M100 to M129)This function outputs a signal corresponding to a specified Mcode.

M code Signal name Output type Function

M81

M82

M81 output

M82 output

Instantaneous Outputs a pulse signal of 100 ms duration.

M83 Turns an output signal on. (M83)

M84M83 output ON1

Turns an output signal off. (M84)

M80

M85

M86

M87

M88

M89

M80 output

M85 output

M86 output

M87 output

M88 output

M89 output

FIN Turned on at the beginning of the specification of an Mcode.

Turned off when the finish signal is input from the ex-ternal equipment.

M100

M101

M102

M103

M104

M105

M106

M107

M108

M109

M100 output

M101 output

M102 output

M103 output

M104 output

M105 output

M106 output

M107 output

M108 output

M109 output

Selectable Selects an output type from pulse, FIN, ON1, and ON2.

Pulse :Used only by M10X

FIN : Used only by M10X. Individual M codeshave a corresponding FIN signal.

ON/OFF1 : Used in combination with M11X

ON/OFF2 : Used in combination with M11X and M12X.

�: 0 to 9

M110

M111

M112

M113

M114

M115

M116

M117

M118

M119

ON1 Turns off the M10X and M12X output.

This is used when ON1 or ON2 is selected as the out-put type of M100 to M109. Each M code is used incombination with an M code having the same leastsignificant digit. (Example: M100 <––> M110)

�: 0 to 9

M120

M121

M122

M123

M124

M125

M126

M127

M128

M129

M120 output

M121 output

M122 output

M123 output

M124 output

M125 output

M126 output

M127 output

M128 output

M129 output

ON2 Turns off the M10X output and, at the same time, turnson the M12X output.

This is used when ON2 is selected as the output typeof M100 to M109. Each M code is used in combinationwith an M code having the same least significant digit.(Example: M100 <––> M120)

�: 0 to 9


322

M code specification :

Signal output :

(pulse type) (ON1 type)

(FIN type)


Signal output :

External equipment : Operation

Finish signaloutput


Signal output :

ON

M81

ON

M81 M83 M84

ON

(ON2 type)


Signal output1 :

Signal output2 :

ON

M100 M120 M100 M110

ON

ON

When an M code of pulse ON1 or ON2 type is specified, theROBODRILL automatically proceeds to the next program blockafter the signal has been output (or stopped).When an M code of FIN type is specified, the ROBODRILLwaits until a finish signal is input from the external equipment.After this signal is input, the ROBODRILL proceeds to the nextprogram block.To use the function to output M100 to M129, set [M100 – M129]to [ON].


323

To set the output type of M100 to M109, use “M code outputtype”. Press soft key [M–CODE OUTPUT].

Press

Item Contents

1 M CODE OUTPUTTYPE

A desired M code output type is selected by press-ing the corresponding soft key.

2 AUXILIARY DATA This is used when PULSE or FIN is selected as theM code output type.

PULSE type : The ON duration of the pulse signalis set.

FIN type : The duration for waiting for the FINsignal is set. If the completion signalis not input within the specified peri-od, feed hold occurs and operatormessage 2003 TIME OUT (M100 –M109) appears.


324

All of M80 to M89 can be changed to FIN type.To do this, set M80–M89 to FIN TYPE.After FIN TYPE is set, M84 output can be used.

NOTEThe ROBODRILL uses a high-speed M/S/T interface.This interface can be set to emulate a conventional M/S/Tinterface by setting the following parameters.(This change need not be made for an ordinary connectionbetween the ROBODRILL and external equipment.)

(NC parameter)

#7

MHI3001#6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

MHI 1 : Uses the high-speed interface for M/S/T code processing.

0 : Does not use the high-speed interface for M/S/T code processing.

(PMC parameter)

#7

K00#6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

P.MF

P.MF 1 : Does not use the high-speed interface for M/S/T code processing.

0 : Uses the high-speed interface for M/S/T code processing.


325

(6) Machine status output functionThis function outputs machine status signals.Signals are also output to a relay contact, hence can be used tolight a status indicator, for example.Select the machine state in which this signal is output in the SET.OF MAC. STATUS OUT.

Press

ALARM : A signal is output if a CNC alarm oc-curs.

OPE. MESSAGE : A signal is output while an operatormessage is displayed.

PROGRAM EXEC. : A signal is output during programmedoperation.

PROGRAM END : A signal is output upon the completion ofprogrammed operation (execution of M00,M01, M02, or M30).

PRODUCT COMP. : A signal is output upon the completionof machining (QUICK screen - produc-tion management function).

FEED HOLD : A signal is output while the stop but-ton’s indicator on the operator’s panel islit.

NOTICE OF TOOLLIFE

: Is set to ON when the number of timesthat the last tool in the tool group will beable to be used in the future is notgreater than the tool life limit to triggeran expiration advance notice.


326

Select an output type (LIGHT UP/BLINK). When multiple menu items(e.g., ALARM and OPERATOR MESSAGE) are selected for the sameoutput (e.g., OUTPUT 1), the output types of the menu items are different(e.g., LIGHT UP for one, and BLINK for the other), and the conditionsof the menu items simultaneously selected are satisfied (e.g., an alarm andoperator message are issued), the output types of the menu items becomeLIGHT UP.

[Signal connections]

[XT 3]

:

:

:

:

:

XT3–5

XT3–6

XT3–7,8

XT3–9,10

XT3–11,12

�24E

0V

Output 1

Output 2

Output 3

5 7 9 151 3 17 1911 13

6 8 162 4 18 2012 1410

NOTE1 If +24V is not output from 5 and 6 of XT3, check fuse 7 (FU7)

(3.2 A).2 Relay contact capacity: 30 VDC, 2 A 250 VAC, 2 A

(7) Skip function (option)

When a signal is input from the external equipment while a G31move command is being executed, this function instigates thefollowing operation:

� The current coordinates at the time of signal input are storedinto the CNC.

� The current block is terminated and execution of the nextblock is started.

This function is used for the following:

(a) Grinding and other machining for which the end point isnotprogrammed, instead being given by a signal

(b) Workpiece dimension calculation: Movement is made inG31 mode to determine the shape and dimensions of aworkpiece or other object.

The coordinates are calculated and stored in the CNCaccording to the signal received from a sensor.

The dimensions of the workpiece are calculated by a custommacro instruction, based on the stored coordinates.

For details, refer to the “CNC Operator’s Manual.”


327

NOTE1 A block in G31 mode is unconditionally changed to G01

mode.The feedrate specified with an F code is selected.

2 When using this function for measurement, program aconstant feedrate.If the feedrate is allowed to vary, the measurement error willincrease.Provided the feedrate is constant, the measurement errorcan be calculated as follows:

ERRmax : Maximum measurement error (mm or inch)Fm : Feedrate (mm/min or inch/min)

3 The amount of overrun after a skip signal is input iscalculated as follows:

Qmax : Overrun (mm or inch)Fm : Feedrate (mm/min or inch/min)Tc : Cutting time constant (msec)Ts : Servo time constant (usually 33 msec)

4 The skip signal must have a width of at least 10 msec.5 “SKIP” (46) � X0004.7

“SKIP2” (50) � X0004.2“SKIP3” (51) � X0004.3“SKIP4” (52) � X0004.4“SKIP5” (53) � X0004.5“SKIP6” (54) � X0004.6“SKIP7” (55) � X0004.0“SKIP8” (56) � X0004.1Set each item as above.

20+Tc+Ts

1000

ERRmax=Fm� �

4

1000

1

60

Qmax=Fm� � ( )1

60

(8) Automatic tool length measurement function (option)When G37 is specified, the tool moves to a predeterminedmeasurement position.If a signal (measurement position reach signal) is input fromexternal equipment while the tool is moving to the measurementposition, the tool stops immediately.This function adds the difference between the stop position andthe predetermined measurement position to the current toollength compensation.

For details, refer to the “CNC Operator’s Manual.”


328

Feedrate

Rapid traverse rate

Start point

Rapid traverse

Predetermined measurement position

Measurement speed

Deceleration position

Measurement position reach signal

ε : Range in which the measurement position reach signal is valid

ε ε

ON

[Parameter settings]Set the following parameters:NC parametersNo. 6241 : Measurement speedNo. 6251 : Deceleration positionNo. 6254 : Range in which the measurement position reach signal

is valid

NOTESet automatic tool length measurement (48) for addressX0004.2.

(9) Alarm output 2This signal is mainly used for controlling the buzzer when analarm occurs.� Turned on when an alarm occurs.� Turned off when the alarm is released.� Turned off when the alarm output 2 release signal (57) is

input.� Turned off when the specified time (PMC parameter T06) has

elapsed.(when bit 2 of PMC parameter K6 is set to 1)

(10)Position switchesThis signal is turned on when five position switches are on.PMC parameter keep relay K2#5

K2#5 = 0: Uses position switches 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5.K2#5 = 0: Uses position switches 1, 2, 3, 4, and 7.

The data (axis, maximum value, and minimum value) of theposition switches is to be set using NC parameters.


329

(NT 4) (Terminal size M3.5)

Name Address Signal Destination 01 X 4.0 02 X4.1

UDI01 X 4.0 User DI01 XT4–01 03 �24B 04 �24B

UDI02 X 4.1 User DI02 XT4–02 05 X 4.2 06 X 4.3

UDI03 X 4.2 User DI03 XT4–05 07 X 4.4 08 X 4.5

UDI03 X 4.3 User DI04 XT4–06 09 �24B 10 �24B

UDI05 X 4.4 User DI05 XT4–07 11 X 4.6 12 X 4.7

UDI06 X 4.5 User DI06 XT4–08 13 X 5.0 14 X 5.1

UDI07 X 4.6 User DI07 XT4–11 15 �24B 16 �24B

UDI08 X 4.7 User DI08 XT4–12 17 X 5.2 18 X 5.3

19 X 5.4 20 X 5.5

UDI09 X 5.0 User DI09 XT4–13 21 �24B 22 �24B

UDI10 X 5.1 User DI10 XT4–14 23 X 5.6 24 X 5.7

UDI11 X 5.2 User DI11 XT4–17 25 Y 2.0 26 Y 2.1

UDI12 X 5.3 User DI12 XT4–18 27 0V 28 0V

UDI13 X 5.4 User DI13 XT4–19 29 Y 2.2 30 Y 2.3

UDI14 X 5.5 User DI14 XT4–20 31 Y 2.4 32 Y 2.5

UDI15 X 5.6 User DI15 XT4–23 33 0V 34 0V

UDI16 X 5.7 User DI16 XT4–24 35 Y 2.6 36 Y 2.7

37 Y 3.0 38 Y 3.1

UDO01 Y 2.0 User DO01 XT4–25 39 0V 40 0V

UDO02 Y 2.1 User DO02 XT4–26 41 Y 3.2 42 Y 3.3

UDO03 Y 2.2 User DO03 XT4–29 43 Y 3.4 44 Y 3.5

UDO04 Y 2.3 User DO04 XT4–30 45 0V 46 0V

UDO05 Y 2.4 User DO05 XT4–31 47 Y 3.6 48 Y 3.7

UDO06 Y 2.5 User DO06 XT4–32 49 0V 50 �24B

UDO07 Y 2.6 User DO07 XT4–35










15.5EXTERNALINTERFACECONNECTION


330

(XTC1) (Terminal size M3.5)

Name Address Signal Destination 01 X 10.0 02 X10.1

UDI17 X 10.0 User DI17 XTC1–01 03 �24B 04 �24B

UDI18 X 10.1 User DI18 XTC1–02 05 X 10.2 06 X 10.3







19 X 11.4 20 X 11.5



UDI27 X 11.2 User DI27 XTC1–17 25 Y 10.0 26 Y 10.1

UDI28 X 11.3 User DI28 XTC1–18 27 0V 28 0V



UDI31 X 11.6 User DI31 XTC1–23 33 0V 34 0V


37 Y 11.0 38 Y 11.1

UDO17 Y 10.0 User DO17 XTC1–25 39 0V 40 0V

UDO18 Y 10.1 User DO18 XTC1–26 41 Y 11.2 42 Y 11.3


UDO20 Y 10.3 User DO20 XTC1–30 45 0V 46 0V


UDO22 Y 10.5 User DO22 XTC1–32 49 0V 50 �24B

UDO23 Y 10.6 User DO23 XTC1–35











331

NOTE1 Output signals

Output signals are used for driving relays and light–emittingdiodes for indicators. A transistor is used as the driver.(a) Output signal standard [0 V common] current flow type

Output signal specifications: Maximum output current : 200 mA (including

instantaneous values)Maximum voltage : 24 V +20%Saturation voltage : 1.0 V (Max.)Leakage current : 100 �A (Max.)

(b) Output circuit

Relay

+24E

(c) When connecting an inductive load such as a relay, always insert a spark killer. Insert the spark killer nearthe load as much as possible (within 20 cm). When connecting a capacitive load, always insert a resistor forlimiting the current in series so that the load can be usedwithin the rated current and voltage including instantaneous cases.

(d) When a lamp is lit directly by the transistor output, a surge current may flow, resulting in damage to the transistor. For this reason, insert a protection circuit sothat the transistor can be used within the rated currentand voltage including instantaneous cases.

+24E


332

NOTE2 Input signals

(a) Each contact must satisfy the following conditions:Contact capacity : 30 VDC, 16 mA or moreLeakage current between contacts when opened : 1 mA or less (Voltage:

26.4 V)Voltage drop between contacts when closed : 2 V or less (Current:

8.5 mA)(including cable voltage drop)

(b) The following shows the receiver circuit:

ROBODRILL

Receiver circuit

+24V

Filter and levelconverter circuit

External circuit

Direct

current

input signal

Receiver

output

circuit

Transistor

OFF: logic 0

ON : logic 1


333

(1) Terminals for connecting the external emergency stop signal

+24B Emergency stop switch

KA2

XTD–1 XTD–3

KA1

Jumper

� To connect the emergency stop signal of an external device to themachine, remove the XTD3–1/XTD3–2 jumper wire.

(2) Contact which outputs the emergency stop state of the machine

(Up to 2A)

XT3–3

XT3–4

� The emergency stop state of the machine can be output fromXT3–3 and XT3–4.

15.6EMERGENCY STOP


334

The +24B terminal on the external interface terminal block is rated at upto 2 A.

If +24B is not output, check fuse 5 (FU5) (3.2 A).

15.7EXTERNAL POWERSUPPLY


335

The relay module outputs four independent relay contact signals (drycontacts) for an input signal (24 VDC). As a type of contact, a choicebetween contact a and contact b can be made.

� With a coil surge absorption diode� With an operation indication LED

KA3KA2KA1

D1

KA4

D2 D3 D4

LED1 LED2 LED3 LED4

B1

R1

1

A2

B2

R2

3

A3

B3

R3

A4

B4

R4

A5

B5

A1

5 7 9

2 4 6 8 10

+ + + +CNTB1

XTB1

Input side: 24 VDC

Output side: Dry contact

15.8RELAY MODULE

15.8.1Overview

15.8.2Connection

15.8.2.1 Internal connectiondiagram


336

A B

01 TH01 0V

02 TH02 0V

03 TH03 0V

04 TH04 0V

05

1 TH01A

2 TH01B 3 TH02A

4 TH02B 5 TH03A

6 TH03B 7 TH04A

8 TH04B 9

10

Input sideCNTB1HIROSE: HIF3CD–10PA–2.54DSA

Output sideXTB1YOSHIDA: PS7–10A (M3 screw)

Name Specification Contact configuration

(1) Relay module A20B–1007–0720 4a

(2) Relay module A20B–1007–0722 4b

NOTE1 (1) and (2) differ in the internal relay specification.2 Do not use different voltages for the relay contacts on one

module.

15.8.2.2 Pin allocation

15.8.3Specifications

15.8.3.1 Ordering information


337

Per relay

Item Rating Remarks

Rated conducting current 5 A

Maximum switching capacity AC250V 5ADC30V 5A

a contact

ContactAC250V 1ADC30V 1A

b contact

Minimum applicable load DC0.1V 0.1mA

Rated voltage DC24V

Operating voltage 70% or less of the rated voltage

Coil Return voltage 5% or more of the rated voltage

Power consumption 200mW a contact

360mW b contact

Screw size M3

Terminal block Applicable wire 1.25mm2

Tightening torque 0.5 to 0.75N�m

Mounting methodMounting using a DIN35 rail

15.8.3.2 Rating

15.8.3.3 Outside dimensions


338

The user terminal block module is designed to expand 16 input signalsand 16 output signals on the terminal block. Four points are madeavailable so that a three–wire proximity switch of NPN type can behandled. In addition, the user terminal block module can be easilyconnected to a relay module by using a 10–conductor ribbon cable. Theuser terminal block module can be expanded for connection with up tofour relay modules.

15.9USER TERMINALBLOCK MODULE

15.9.1Overview


339

2.1 Block diagram

Connector panelfor T14iC

AdditionalI/O24/16

50–conductor ribbon cable

Relaymodule

Relaymodule

Relaymodule

Relaymodule

4 relays4 relays

4 relays

4 relays

4 relays

Relay terminal block moduleDI/DO: 16/16

50–pin screw terminal blockXTC1 M3.5

10–conductorribbon cable

A B

01 X10.0 +24B.

02 0V

03 X10.1 +24B

04 0V

05 X10.2 +24B

06 0V

07 X10.3 +24B

08 0V

09

10

CNTC6 [AMP 316517–5]

A B

01 Y10.0 0V

02 Y10.1 0V

03 Y10.2 0V

04 Y10.3 0V

05

CNTC2[HIROSE HIF3CD–10PA]

A B

01 Y10.0 0V

02 Y10.1 0V

03 Y10.2 0V

04 Y10.3 0V

05


A B

01 Y10.0 0V

02 Y10.1 0V

03 Y10.2 0V

04 Y10.3 0V

05


A B

01 Y10.0 0V

02 Y10.1 0V

03 Y10.2 0V

04 Y10.3 0V

05


A B

01 X10.0 X10.1

02 +24B +24B

03 X10.2 X10.3

04 X10.4 X10.5

05 +24B +24B

06 X10.6 X10.7

07 X11.0 X11.1

08 +24B +24B

09 X11.2 X11.3

10 X11.4 X11.5

11 +24B +24B

12 X11.6 X11.7

13 Y10.0 Y10.1

14 0V 0V

15 Y10.2 Y10.3

16 Y10.4 Y10.5

17 0V 0V

18 Y10.6 Y10.7

19 Y11.0 Y11.1

20 0V 0V

21 Y11.2 Y11.3

22 Y11.4 Y11.5

23 0V 0V

24 Y11.6 Y11.7

25 0V +24B

CNTC1[HIROSE3CB–50PA]

15.9.2Connection


340

Name Specification Contact configuration

(1) User terminal blockmodule

A20B–1007–0720

Connector for three–wireproximity switch

PNP/NPN switch Connector for relay module

90mm

228mm

62mm

Mounting methodMounting using a DIN35 rail





341

The relay terminal block module, connected via a connector I/O moduleand a cable, allows input/output signals (24 DI signals and 16 DO signals)of the machine to be relayed through a terminal block.Signals can be expanded to up to 96 DI signals and 64 DO signals.

Relay module

Relay module

Relay module

Relay module

I/O LINKJD1A

DI/DO on machineside

+24–V power

Basic moduleA03B–0815–C001

Expansion module 1A03B–0815–C003

CA52CB150

CA53

JD1B

CA52CB150

CA53

CA52

CA53

XP150

XP150

XP150

XP150



I/O LINK cable

Flat cable (34P)

Cable connecting modules

CB150

CB150

CA52

CNC

15.10RELAY TERMINALBLOCK MODULE

15.10.1Overview

15.10.2Connection

AddressInput signals : 24 signals X78.0 to X80.7Output signals : 16 signals Y78.0 to Y79.7


342

When the signals of the basic module [A03B–0815–C001] are assigned to the relay terminal block

XP150 (HIROSE HIF3CB-50PA-2.54DSA)

A1 +24E B1 Y79.0A2 +24E B2 Y78.0A3 0V B3 0VA4 Y79.1 B4 Y79.2A5 Y78.1 B5 Y78.2A6 0V B6 0VA7 Y79.3 B7 Y79.4A8 Y78.3 B8 Y78.4A9 0V B9 DICOM0A10 Y79.5 B10 Y79.6A11 Y78.5 B11 Y78.6A12 X79.0 B12 X79.1A13 Y79.7 B13 X80.0A14 Y78.7 B14 X78.0A15 X79.2 B15 X79.3A16 X80.1 B16 X80.2A17 X78.1 B17 X78.2A18 X79.4 B18 X79.5A19 X80.3 B19 X80.4A20 X78.3 B20 X78.4A21 X79.6 B21 X79.7A22 X80.5 B22 X80.6A23 X78.5 B23 X78.6A24 X80.7 B24 +24VA25 X78.7 B25 +24V

XT150A (YOSHIDA PX7-32A) XT150B (YOSHIDA PX7-32A)

17 +24E 17 +24E1 0V 1 +24E

18 DICOM 18 X80.42 DICOM 2 X80.6

19 X78.0 19 X80.53 X78.2 3 X80.7

20 X78.1 20 0V4 X78.3 4 0V

21 DICOM 21 Y78.05 DICOM 5 Y78.2

22 X78.4 22 Y78.16 X78.6 6 Y78.3

23 X78.5 23 0V7 X78.7 7 0V

24 +24E 24 Y78.48 +24E 8 Y78.6

25 X79.0 25 Y78.59 X79.2 9 Y78.7

26 X79.1 26 0V10 X79.3 10 0V

27 +24E 27 Y79.011 +24E 11 Y79.2

28 X79.4 28 Y79.112 X79.6 12 Y79.3

29 X79.5 29 0V13 X79.7 13 0V

30 +24E 30 Y79.414 +24E 14 Y79.6

31 X80.0 31 Y79.515 X80.2 15 Y79.7

16 X80.332 X80.1

16 0V32 +24V

16 X80.3 16 0V



343

When the signals of the Expansion module 1 [A03B–0815–C003] are assigned to the relay terminal block




17 +24E 17 +24E1 0V 1 +24E

18 DICOM 18 X83.42 DICOM 2 X83.6

19 X81.0 19 X83.53 X81.2 3 X83.7

20 X81.1 20 0V4 X81.3 4 0V

21 DICOM 21 Y80.05 DICOM 5 Y80.2

22 X81.4 22 Y80.16 X81.6 6 Y80.3

23 X81.5 23 0V7 X81.7 7 0V

24 +24E 24 Y80.48 +24E 8 Y80.6

25 X82.0 25 Y80.59 X82.2 9 Y80.7

26 X82.1 26 0V10 X82.3 10 0V

27 +24E 27 Y81.011 +24E 11 Y81.2

28 X82.4 28 Y81.112 X82.6 12 Y81.3

29 X82.5 29 0V13 X82.7 13 0V

30 +24E 30 Y81.414 +24E 14 Y81.6

31 X83.0 31 Y81.515 X83.2 15 Y81.7

16 X83.332 X83.1

16 0V32 +24V

16 X83.3 16 0V



344





17 +24E 17 +24E1 0V 1 +24E

18 DICOM 18 X86.42 DICOM 2 X86.6

19 X84.0 19 X86.53 X84.2 3 X86.7

20 X84.1 20 0V4 X84.3 4 0V

21 DICOM 21 Y82.05 DICOM 5 Y82.2

22 X84.4 22 Y82.16 X84.6 6 Y82.3

23 X84.5 23 0V7 X84.7 7 0V

24 +24E 24 Y82.48 +24E 8 Y82.6

25 X85.0 25 Y82.59 X85.2 9 Y82.7

26 X85.1 26 0V10 X85.3 10 0V

27 +24E 27 Y83.011 +24E 11 Y83.2

28 X85.4 28 Y83.112 X85.6 12 Y83.3

29 X85.5 29 0V13 X85.7 13 0V

30 +24E 30 Y83.414 +24E 14 Y83.6

31 X86.0 31 Y83.515 X86.2 15 Y83.7

16 X86.332 X86.1

16 0V32 +24V

16 X86.3 16 0V



345





17 +24E 17 +24E1 0V 1 +24E

18 DICOM 18 X89.42 DICOM 2 X89.6

19 X87.0 19 X89.53 X87.2 3 X89.7

20 X87.1 20 0V4 X87.3 4 0V

21 DICOM 21 Y84.05 DICOM 5 Y84.2

22 X87.4 22 Y84.16 X87.6 6 Y84.3

23 X87.5 23 0V7 X87.7 7 0V

24 +24E 24 Y84.48 +24E 8 Y84.6

25 X88.0 25 Y84.59 X88.2 9 Y84.7

26 X88.1 26 0V10 X88.3 10 0V

27 +24E 27 Y85.011 +24E 11 Y85.2

28 X88.4 28 Y85.112 X88.6 12 Y85.3

29 X88.5 29 0V13 X88.7 13 0V

30 +24E 30 Y85.414 +24E 14 Y85.6

31 X89.0 31 Y85.515 X89.2 15 Y85.7

16 X89.332 X89.1

16 0V32 +24V

16 X89.3 16 0V


346

Name Specification Remarks

(1) Relay terminalblock module

A03B–0815–C020

The relay module can be mounted by using screws or mounted on a DINrail.

Screw hole

(Unit: mm)





347

The relay terminal block module B, connected via an operator’s panel I/Omodule and a cable, allows input/output signals (24 DI signals and 16 DOsignals) of the machine to be relayed through a terminal block.Signals can be expanded to up to 96 DI signals and 64 DO signals.

Relay module B#1

I/O LINKJD1A

DI=24

DO=16

+24–V power(DOCOM)

CE70

CE70

JA3

CPD1(IN)

CPD1(OUT)

CE56

CE57

+24V Power

+24V Power

Relay module B#2

DI=24

DO=16

Sub–operator’s panel I/O printed circuit board

A20B–2002–0521

JD1A

JD1B

15.11RELAY TERMINALBLOCK MODULE B

15.11.1Overview

15.11.2Connection


348

Pin layout in relay module B#1 [CE56–to–CE70 connection]

CE70 (HIROSE HIF3CB-50PA-2.54DSA)

A1 0V B1 +24VA2 X90.0 B2 X90.1A3 X90.2 B3 X90.3A4 X90.4 B4 X90.5A5 X90.6 B5 X90.7A6 X91.0 B6 X91.1A7 X91.2 B7 X91.3A8 X91.4 B8 X91.5A9 X91.6 B9 X91.7A10 X92.0 B10 X92.1A11 X92.2 B11 X92.3A12 X92.4 B12 X92.5A13 X92.6 B13 X92.7A14 DICOM B14 DICOMA15 B15A16 Y90.0 B16 Y90.1A17 Y90.2 B17 Y90.3A18 Y90.4 B18 Y90.5A19 Y90.6 B19 Y90.7A20 Y91.0 B20 Y91.1A21 Y91.2 B21 Y91.3A22 Y91.4 B22 Y91.5A23 Y91.6 B23 Y91.7A24 DOCOM B24 DOCOMA25 DOCOM B25 DOCOM


17 +0V 17 +24E1 0V 1 +24E

18 DICOM 18 X92.42 DICOM 2 X92.6

19 X90.0 19 X92.53 X90.2 3 X92.7

20 X90.1 20 0V4 X90.3 4 0V

21 DICOM 21 Y90.05 DICOM 5 Y90.2

22 X90.4 22 Y90.16 X90.6 6 Y90.3

23 X90.5 23 0V7 X90.7 7 0V

24 +24E 24 Y90.48 +24E 8 Y90.6

25 X91.0 25 Y90.59 X91.2 9 Y90.7

26 X91.1 26 0V10 X91.3 10 0V

27 +24E 27 Y91.011 +24E 11 Y91.2

28 X91.4 28 Y91.112 X91.6 12 Y91.3

29 X91.5 29 0V13 X91.7 13 0V

30 +24E 30 Y91.414 +24E 14 Y91.6

31 X92.0 31 Y91.515 X92.2 15 Y91.7

16 X92.332 X92.1

16 0V32 +24V

16 X92.3 16 0V


349

Pin layout in relay module B#2 [CE57–to–CE70 connection]

CE70 (HIROSE HIF3CB-50PA-2.54DSA)

A1 0V B1 +24VA2 X93.0 B2 X93.1A3 X93.2 B3 X93.3A4 X93.4 B4 X93.5A5 X93.6 B5 X93.7A6 X94.0 B6 X94.1A7 X94.2 B7 X94.3A8 X94.4 B8 X94.5A9 X94.6 B9 X94.7A10 X95.0 B10 X95.1A11 X95.2 B11 X95.3A12 X95.4 B12 X95.5A13 X95.6 B13 X95.7A14 DICOM B14 DICOMA15 B15A16 Y92.0 B16 Y92.1A17 Y92.2 B17 Y92.3A18 Y92.4 B18 Y92.5A19 Y92.6 B19 Y92.7A20 Y93.0 B20 Y93.1A21 Y93.2 B21 Y93.3A22 Y93.4 B22 Y93.5A23 Y93.6 B23 Y93.7A24 DOCOM B24 DOCOMA25 DOCOM B25 DOCOM


17 +0V 17 +24E1 0V 1 +24E

18 DICOM 18 X95.42 DICOM 2 X95.6

19 X93.0 19 X95.53 X93.2 3 X95.7

20 X93.1 20 0V4 X93.3 4 0V

21 DICOM 21 Y92.05 DICOM 5 Y92.2

22 X93.4 22 Y92.16 X93.6 6 Y92.3

23 X93.5 23 0V7 X93.7 7 0V

24 +24E 24 Y92.48 +24E 8 Y92.6

25 X94.0 25 Y92.59 X94.2 9 Y92.7

26 X94.1 26 0V10 X94.3 10 0V

27 +24E 27 Y93.011 +24E 11 Y93.2

28 X94.4 28 Y93.112 X94.6 12 Y93.3

29 X94.5 29 0V13 X94.7 13 0V

30 +24E 30 Y93.414 +24E 14 Y93.6

31 X95.0 31 Y93.515 X95.2 15 Y93.7

16 X95.332 X95.1

16 0V32 +24V

16 X95.3 16 0V


350

Name Specification Remarks

(1) Relay terminalblock module B

A03B–0815–C022

The relay module B can be mounted by using screws or mounted on a DINrail.

Screw hole

(Unit: mm)

..

.

..

..

.

.

.




B–85014EN/01

16. Z–AXIS THERMAL DISPLACEMENT

COMPENSATION FUNCTIONDETAILED OPERATIONS

351

16Z–AXIS THERMAL DISPLACEMENT COMPENSATIONFUNCTION

16. Z–AXIS THERMAL DISPLACEMENT COMPENSATION FUNCTION B–85014EN/01DETAILED OPERATIONS

352

The Z–axis thermal displacement compensation function estimates theamount of the thermal displacement in the Z–axis direction that isgenerated by the motion of the machine and compensates thedisplacement with using no sensor.

Generally, after the machine starts motion, the Z–axis is extendingdownward and it becomes stable after 2 or 3 hours. Conventionally, formachining requiring a high precision, dry run is performed before start ofmachining to cancel the extension and machining is started when theZ–axis becomes stable. You can use this function to start machiningwithout dry run.

NOTEThe displacement may not be able to be preciselycompensated depending on the use conditions andenvironment.Do not use this function when the displacement is smallbecause the Z–axis becomes more unstable instead. Anydisplacement that is not generated by the motion of themachine, such as the displacement generated due to aworn tool cannot be compensated.

16.1OVERVIEW

B–85014EN/01



353

Set keep relay K17#1 to 1 to enable the Z–axis thermal displacementcompensation function.

K17#1 = 0: Disables the Z–axis thermal displacement compensation function.

= 1: Enables the function.

After setting this parameter, always turn the power off, then on again.

16.2ENABLING THEZ–AXIS THERMALDISPLACEMENTCOMPENSATIONFUNCTION


354

If the thermal displacement compensated by this function (the estimatedthermal displacement) differs from the actual thermal displacement, thethermal displacement compensation amount can be adjusted to decreasethe compensation error.This function uses data tables. For the data tables used, see Tables 16.3(a) and 16.3 (b).

Keep a history of the amounts of estimated thermal displacements at thespecified position on the Z–axis.

(1) First, set the position (Z machine coordinate) at which a history of theamounts of estimated thermal displacements is to be kept in D5940in the data table.

(2) Turn the power off, then on again.

(3) The amounts of the estimated Z–axis thermal displacement and of theestimated spindle thermal displacement at the Z–axis position (calledthe compensation position below) specified for D5940 immediatelyafter power–on are saved in D5948 and D5950, respectively.

(4) After that, the amounts of the estimated Z–axis thermal displacementand of the estimated spindle thermal displacement at thecompensation position are saved at 10–minute intervals to keep themas the history. When 180 minutes have elapsed, keeping the historystops.

NOTE1 To keep a history of the amounts of estimated thermal

displacements at another Z–axis position, set a Z–axismachine position for D5940 again, then turn the power offonce. By this operation, the data table for saving a history(D5948 to D6022) is cleared and keeping a new historystarts.

2 Data is saved as a history at 10–minute intervals until 180minutes have elapsed.

16.3ADJUSTINGTHERMALDISPLACEMENTCOMPENSATION

16.3.1History of the Amountsof Estimated ThermalDisplacements

B–85014EN/01



355

From the actual displacement obtained by measuring workpiecedimensions (a compensation error) and the thermal displacementestimated in the previous subsection, the coefficient is modifiedautomatically.

(1) The workpiece dimensions are measured, and the compensation erroris set in data table D5942.

(2) The thermal displacements of the Z–axis and spindle estimated whenthe workpiece is machined are set in D5944 and D5946, respectively.The thermal displacements (the Z–axis and spindle) estimated at thetime of workpiece machining are based on the history data saved inthe previous subsection.

(3) Turn the power off, then on again. The coefficient for calculating anestimated thermal displacement is now changed and the amount of anestimated thermal displacement obtained by calculation becomesmore precise.

NOTEOnly one position on the Z–axis can be specified.After adjustment, a compensation error may become largerat a position other than the specified position.

Table 16.3.2 (a) Data table set for adjusting thermal displacement compensation

Address DescriptionIncrement

system

D5940 Z machine coordinate of the compensation positionEstimated thermal displacements at this position are saved as a history.

mm

D5942 Compensation error obtained by measuring workpiece dimensions.In case of insufficient compensation (when the compensation amount is to be in-creased further), a positive value is set. In case of excessive compensation (when thecompensation amount is to be decreased), a negative value is set.

�m

D5944 Amount of the estimated Z–axis thermal displacement at termination of machining theworkpieceEstimated using data saved as the history.

�m

D5946 Amount of the estimated spindle thermal displacement at termination of machining theworkpieceEstimated using data saved as the history.

�m

16.3.2Adjustment Procedure


356

Table 16.3.2 (b) Data table for saving estimated thermal displacements as a history (1/2)


system

D5948 Amount of the estimated Z–axis thermal displacement at the compensation position (when keeping a history starts)

�m

D5950 Amount of the estimated spindle thermal displacement (when keeping a history starts) �m

D5952 Amount of the estimated Z–axis thermal displacement at the compensation position (10 minutes after keeping a history started)

�m

D5954 Amount of the estimated spindle thermal displacement (10 minutes after keeping a history started)

�m


�m


�m


�m


�m


�m


�m


�m


�m


�m


�m


�m


�m


�m


�m


�m


�m

B–85014EN/01



357

Table 16.3.2 (b) Data table for saving estimated thermal displacements as a history (2/2)


system


�m


�m


�m


�m


�m


�m


�m


�m


�m


�m


�m


�m


�m


�m


�m


�m


�m


�m

17. AUTOMATIC POWER SUPPLY SHUT–OFF B–85014EN/01DETAILED OPERATIONS

358

17 AUTOMATIC POWER SUPPLY SHUT–OFF

This function automatically shuts off the power supply to the unit upontermination of a given program.

(1) Select the “AUTOMATIC POWER OFF”.

(2) When M30 (end of program) is issued, the power is turned off afterabout 5 seconds.To set conditions related to automatic power–off, use[FUNCTIONS].

POWER OFF BY ALARM :Specifies whether to operate the automatic power–off function(ON) or not (OFF) when an alarm occurs.

RELEASE AT TURN ON THE POWER :Specifies whether to release the automatic power–off setting(ON) or not (OFF) at power–on. (Only for a standard operator’spanel)

B–85014EN/0117. AUTOMATIC POWER SUPPLY

SHUT–OFFDETAILED OPERATIONS

359

NOTE1 This function cannot be activated using the program end

code of M02.2 When the automatic circuit breaker function (option) is

provided, the circuit breaker of the controller is turned off.3 This function does not operate for about 70 seconds after

power–on.

18. COOLANT (OPTION) B–85014EN/01DETAILED OPERATIONS

360

18 COOLANT (OPTION)

A coolant unit is provided as an option. The coolant unit supplies coolantto the machining surface. The reservoir capacity is approx. 100 or 200liters.

NOTESee II–3.10 for installing the coolant unit.

B–85014EN/01 18. COOLANT (OPTION)DETAILED OPERATIONS

361

To supply coolant to the machining surface, follow the proceduredescribed below.

(1) Confirm that the reservoir is filled with coolant. If not, replenish thereservoir with coolant.

(2) Open the valve on the nozzle.

(3) Press the “CLNT” key to rotate the pump. This causes coolant tocome out of the nozzle tip. (The pump can be stopped by pressing thebutton again.)

When the coolant unit is operating When the coolant unit is at a halt

(4) Adjust the nozzle position so that coolant is poured on the correctposition. Do not place the nozzle too close to the tool since it maycause interference between the nozzle and the turret during a toolchange.Never try to adjust the nozzle position while the unit is running sinceit is very dangerous.

Fig.18.1 (a) Nozzle

18.1COOLANT UNIT(OPTION)


362

The coolant unit can be turned on (supplying coolant) and off (stopsupplying coolant) automatically using the M code command ormanually using the coolant button mentioned in step (3) above. Toturn on and off the coolant unit automatically, execute M08 (ON) orM09 (OFF) in either the AUTO (MEM) or MENU (MDI) mode.

NOTE1 Never try to operate the pump for a prolonged period of time

when the coolant reservoir is empty. (Be sure to fill thereservoir with coolant before operating the pump byfollowing step (1) above.) Never try to operate the pumpwith the valve closed. Failure to observe either one of thesepractices may result in pump failure.

2 The coolant unit will be turned on or off during automaticrunning in the M code as follows.

M08: The coolant unit is immediately turned on when the block is read.

M09: The coolant unit is turned off after the block has been executed. (PMC Parameter K0#7=0)

3 The coolant unit is turned off during the tool change. Turnthe coolant unit on using the the coolant key or the M08code as required.

4 Fig. 18.1 (b) shows the rotating direction of the pump.

Direction of rotation

Fig.18.1 (b) Pump

B–85014EN/01 18. COOLANT (OPTION)DETAILED OPERATIONS

363

NOTE5 To use the [COOLANT] key on the operator’s panel and

M08 command for controlling the coolant unit, select[FUNCTIONS] on [31:SEQ.SELECTION]Screen of[QUICK]Screen and set “FOR COOLANT” for [M08COMMAND] and [COOLANT BUTTON].

When using a machine cleaning coolant device, use the shower gun onlywithin the splash guard. If the shower gun is pointed towards the outsideof the splash guard, spilled coolant is likely to make the floor slippery.


364

The ROBODRILL uses a 400–W motor for machine cleaning coolant.

The control unit is rated up to 200 V, 2.6 A.

When using non–FANUC coolant, adjust the thermal setting of thecontrol MCC according to the rating of the coolant motor.

When using the machine cleaning coolant, set [MACHINE CLEANINGCOOLANT] to [ON] on quick screen STANDARD SELECTION.

NOTE1 To stop the inside cleaning coolant unit in the emergency

stop state, set bit 3 of PMC parameter K0 to 1.2 When machining is not performed, the inside cleaning

coolant unit can automatically be stopped.(Set bit 3 of PMC parameter K6 to 1.)When a fixed time (default: 1 minute (PMC parameter T02))has elapsed after termination of programmed operation(including MDI operation), the inside cleaning coolant unitis turned off.When programmed operation starts, the inside cleaningcoolant unit is turned on.Pressing the manual button on the operator’s panel turns oncleaning coolant in the machine.

18.2MACHINE CLEANINGCOOLANT CONTROL(OPTIONAL)

B–85014EN/0119. BLOWER CONTROL FUNCTION

(OPTION)APPENDIX

365

19 BLOWER CONTROL FUNCTION (OPTION)

(1) Turning the blower on or off by specifying an M code

M50 : Blower turned on M09 : Blower turned off

You can also use M08 for turning air blow on.

Select [FUNCTIONS] on [31:SEQ.SELECTION] of [QUICK]Screenand set “FOR BLOWER” for [M08 COMMAND]. (Normally, “FORCOOLANT” is selected.)

(2) Turning the blower on or off from the machine operator’s panel.

[Press]

[Press]

Blower is turned on.

Blower is turned off.

Select [FUNCTIONS]on [31:SEQ.SELECTION] of [QUICK]Screenand set “FOR BLOWER” for [COOLANT BUTTON]. (Normally, “FORCOOLANT” is selected.)

Basic control is the same as for the coolant unit.

Even when the safety door is open, air blow operation can be turned on.

20. OPENING AND CLOSING THE AUTOMATIC DOOR (OPTION) B–85014EN/01DETAILED OPERATIONS

366

20 OPENING AND CLOSING THE AUTOMATIC DOOR (OPTION)

The front door of splash guard, which has the automatic door function, canbe automatically opened and closed by pressing the “DOOR OPEN” or“DOOR CLOSE” key.

(1) Before opening or closing the door, confirm the absence of anyforeign material at the door slides.

(2) The door can be automatically opened or closed by pressing the“DOOR OPEN/CLOSE” key.

(3) When the door has been properly opened or closed, the “DOOROPEN/CLOSE” key lamp lights to indicate that the motion has beencompleted.

or

The <Door Open/Close> key is enabled, regardless of the operationmode. This means that when the <Door Open/Close> key is pressedduring automatic operation, a gradual stop occurs along each axis,and the automatic door opens.To enable the <Door Open/Close> key in the manual mode, set thefollowing parameter:

PMC parameter keep relay K11 bit 2 = 1

To set conditions for opening and closing the door in the automatic(MEM) mode and menu operation (MDI) mode, select [FUNCTIONS] on[31:SEQ.SELECTION]of [QUICK]Screen.

MANUAL mode

AUTO and MENU modes

20. OPENING AND CLOSING THE AUTOMATIC DOOR (OPTION)B–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS

367

DOOR CLOSING BY START BUTTON :Automatically closes the door at the cycle start and startsprogrammed operation.

DOOR OPENING BY M30 :Opens the automatic door when M30 is issued.

DOOR OPENING BY M00, M01 :Opens the automatic door when M00 or M01 is issued.

NOTE1 Pay attention not to get your head or hand caught in the door

when it is automatically moving.2 If the time of door open (or close) operation exceeds 4

seconds due to a foreign matter, alarm “1008 AUTO DOORTOTAL TIME OVER.” is issued. Remove the foreign matterand press the [RESET] key to release the alarm, then pressthe DOOR key to complete door open or close operation.

3 The automatic door does not operate in the emergency stopstate.

4 The door open/close time is 2 seconds or more (not longerthan 2.5 seconds) [3 seconds or more (not longer than 3.5seconds) for L type]. If door operation time is not within thisrange, adjust it with the speed control adjustment screwsmounted on the air cylinder.

20. OPENING AND CLOSING THE AUTOMATIC DOOR (OPTION) B–85014EN/01DETAILED OPERATIONS

368

Inside of the machine

Speed control adjustment screw for closingthe door (The transparent air tude is connected here.)

Speed control adjustment screw foropening the door (The yellow air tubeis connected here.)

Front of the machine

(a) α–T14(21)iCe/iCLe

Inside of the machine

Speed control adjustment screw for closingthe door (The transparent air tude is connected here.)

Speed control adjustment screw foropening the door (The yellow air tubeis connected here.)

Front of the machine

(b) α–T14/21iCSe

20. OPENING AND CLOSING THE AUTOMATIC DOOR (OPTION)B–85014EN/01 DETAILED OPERATIONS

369

� Tightening the adjustment screw by one rotation slows the dooropen/close speed by approximately 0.1 to 0.2 second.

� Do not set the opening/closing time to two seconds or shorter (for theα–T14 (21) iCe/iCSe). If the time is set to two seconds or shorter(three seconds or shorter for the α–T14/21iCLe), defects may occur.

Related parameters

PMC parameters (TIMER)

T20 4000 [ms] Total time for door open and close operations

21. INTERNAL LIGHT (OPTION) B–85014EN/01DETAILED OPERATIONS

370

21 INTERNAL LIGHT (OPTION)

The internal is turned on or off according to the setting of the QuickScreen, “SEQ. SELECTION.”

The internal light is automatically turned off if no key on the operator’spanel (*) is pressed within the specified period (standard setting: 10minutes). Subsequently, pressing any key on the operator’s panel turnson the internal light automatically. In the following cases, however, theinternal light is not automatically turned off even if no key on theoperator’s panel is pressed within the specified period:

� The door is open.

� Dry run mode is selected.

� Single block mode is selected.

To change the period for automatically turning off the internal light,change the PRESET value (PMC parameter counter No. 4) (in units ofminutes: up to 9999 minutes). To disable automatic turn–off, set thisparameter to 0.

NOTE* Sheet keys other than Numeric keypad, Alter, Insert Delete,

Cancel, Input EDIT, Cursor, Page, Reset, QUICK/NC,Alphabet (ABC...Z), Alarm/status.

B–85014EN/01 22. STATUS LIGHTS (OPTION)DETAILED OPERATIONS

371

22 STATUS LIGHTS (OPTION)

The stopped state of the machine is indicated with the red, yellow, andgreen lamps.

The following states are indicated with these three lamps:

(1) A program is being executed. (The green lamp is on.)

(2) The machine is stopped by a program stop (M00), optional stop(M01), or program end (M02 or M30) coded in a program. (Theyellow lamp blinks.)

(3) The machine is stopped by an Alarm. (The red lamp blinks.)

NOTEThe setting of the status indicator can be changed using[MACHINE STATUS OUTPUT] of the [43: EXT.INTERFACE] quick screen.

Position the cursor to the output menu to be set, then press the [ON] or[OFF] soft key. Select an output type (LIGHT UP/BLINK). Aftermaking the desired changes, press the [END] soft key.

23. ADDITIONAL AXIS CONTROL (OPTION) B–85014EN/01DETAILED OPERATIONS

372

23 ADDITIONAL AXIS CONTROL (OPTION)

One or two servo motors can be controlled as the fourth axis (additionalaxis). Controllable motors are as follows:

β0.5/3000 (A06B–0113–B075)α1/3000 (A06B–0371–B075)α2/2000 (A06B–0372–B075)α2/3000 (A06B–0373–B075)α3/3000 (A06B–0123–B075)α6/2000 (A06B–0127–B075)α1/5000i (A06B–0202–B000)α2/5000i (A06B–0205–B000)αM2/5000i (A06B–0212–B000)αM3/5000i (A06B–0215–B000)α4/4000i (A06B–0223–B000)α8/3000i (A06B–0227–B000)

Install an additional axis (option) on the table.

Do not change the setting of the feedrate parameter.

The additional axis (option) is mainly intended to be used with an indexunit (based on a rotation axis) on the table.

The additional axis shall always be installed on the table. If it is installedin any other place, the fixed cover or safety door cannot be used to protectthe operator from the additional axis. This is a very dangerous situation.

In the same way as for the X–, Y–, and Z–axes, the additional axis can bedriven only by manual operation if the safety door is open. It can be fedby the manual handle or at 600 degrees/min or less, which is specified ina parameter. Do NOT change the setting of this parameter.

B–85014EN/0123. ADDITIONAL AXIS CONTROL

(OPTION)DETAILED OPERATIONS

373

(1) Display [QUICK]Screen, [32:MAINTENANCE/ SETTING], then[3:PARAMETER].

(2) Press soft key [RESTORATION]. The cursor is displayed in the[RESTORATION] menu.Move the cursor to “ADD.AXIS PARAMETER” and press soft key[SELECT].

(3) Select the motor model.

(4) The following window appears. Press soft key [EXEC].

23.1SETTING SERVOPARAMETERS


374

(5) After termination of parameter setting, the following windowappears.Turn the power off, then on again, and change and set parameters asrequired.



375

When the gear reduction ratio is 1:90:

B : 4th axis A : 5th axis

PRM No. 76543210 Description

1006B 160001 Bit 5 Reference position return direction (0: +, 1: –)

Bit 0 0: Linear axis, 1: Rotation axis

1020B 66(65)

Axis name (66: B, 65: A)

1820B 20 Command multiply (CMR)

1821B 40000 Reference counter capacity

1850B 10000 Grid shift (When making a shift of 1�, set 10,000.)

2021B 192 Load inertia ratio

2022B 111 Direction of motor rotation (111: Clockwise, -111:Counterclockwise)

2084B 4 (N) Flexible feed gear ratio (DMR) (N/M)

2085B 100 (M) (For a gear reduction ratio of 1/90)

When you change the value of parameter 2084, set the same value forparameter 2078.

When you change the value of parameter 2085, set the same value forparameter 2079.

2078 : Dual position feedback conversion coefficient (numerator)2079 : Dual position feedback conversion coefficient (denominator)

23.2OTHER RELATEDPARAMETERS(STANDARDSETTING)

Example


376

Gear reduction ratio of the index table: 1:90

Servo motor used : α3 (with a serial pulse coder,1000000 P/rev)

Detection unit : 0.0001�

CalculationTarget number of pulses issued per table rotation: = 3600000 pulses

Number of pulses of the pulse coder per table rotation: 1000000 � 90 = 90000000 pulsesFlexible feed gear N/M is calculated as follows:

360

0.0001

N

M

3600000

90,000,000

4

100

(No. 2084B). . . . . .

(No. 2085B). . . . . . = =

NOTEWhen changing the standard setting of the flexible feed gear ratio (N/M) to a nonstandardsetting, also change the reference counter capacity (parameter No. 1821B).

Reference counter capacity (No. 1821B) = � 1000000

Example: Assuming N/M = 6/100,

Reference counter capacity = � 1000000 = 60000 · · · · ( No. 1821B)

N (No. 2084B)

M (No. 2085B)

6

100

23.3CALCULATING THEFLEXIBLE FEEDGEAR (DETECTIONMULTIPLY DMR)

Example



377

Setting a grid shift amount in No. 1850B can shift the reference position(zero point).

NOTE1 Once the parameter is re–set, it is necessary to switch off

the power.2 The parameter can be set with a value from 0 to

�99999999 in the least input increment units. To shift thetable zero point by 1°, set the parameter to “10000.”

23.4GRID SHIFT


378

To remove an auxiliary axis, change the parameters listed below.(Otherwise, a servo alarm occurs and inhibits operation.)

NC parameter Factory-set Removing auxiliary axis

No.0012 bit. 7 0 1

No.1005 bit. 7 1 1

No.1815 bit. 5 1 0

23.5REMOVINGAUXILIARY AXES



379

(1) FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR α/β series

B: fourth axis

Motor β0.5/3000 α1/3000 α2/2000 α2/3000 α3/3000 α6/2000

NO. 76543210 76543210 76543210 76543210 76543210 76543210

0012B 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000

1005B 10000001 10000001 10000001 10000001 10000001 10000001

1006B 00100001 00100001 00100001 00100001 00100001 00100001

1007B 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000

1008B 00000100 00000100 00000100 00000100 00000100 00000100

1020B 66 66 66 66 66 66

1022B 0 0 0 0 0 0

(NOTE)1023B 4 4 4 4 4 4

1220B 0 0 0 0 0 0

1221B 0 0 0 0 0 0

1222B 0 0 0 0 0 0

1223B 0 0 0 0 0 0

1224B 0 0 0 0 0 0

1225B 0 0 0 0 0 0

1226B 0 0 0 0 0 0

1240B 0 0 0 0 0 0

1241B 0 0 0 0 0 0

1242B 0 0 0 0 0 0

1243B 0 0 0 0 0 0

1244B 0 0 0 0 0 0

1250B 0 0 0 0 0 0

1251B 0 0 0 0 0 0

1260B 360000 360000 360000 360000 360000 360000

1310B 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000

1320B 9999999 9999999 9999999 9999999 9999999 9999999

1321B –9999999 –9999999 –9999999 –9999999 –9999999 –9999999

1322B 0 0 0 0 0 0

1323B 0 0 0 0 0 0

1324B 0 0 0 0 0 0

1325B 0 0 0 0 0 0

1326B 99999999 99999999 99999999 99999999 99999999 99999999

1327B –99999999 –99999999 –99999999 –99999999 –99999999 –99999999

1420B 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000

23.6SERVOPARAMETERS(STANDARD)


380

Motor α6/2000α3/3000α2/3000α2/2000α1/3000β0.5/3000

NO. 765432107654321076543210765432107654321076543210

1421B 400 400 400 400 400 400

1423B 400 400 400 400 400 400

1424B 0 0 0 0 0 0

1425B 400 400 400 400 400 400

1427B 600 600 600 600 600 600

1428B 0 0 0 0 0 0

1430B 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000

1432B 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000

1434B 600 600 600 600 600 600

1610B 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000

1620B 152 152 152 152 152 152

1621B 64 64 64 64 64 64

1622B 50 50 50 50 50 50

1623B 0 0 0 0 0 0

1624B 24 24 24 24 24 24

1625B 0 0 0 0 0 0

1722B 0 0 0 0 0 0

1762B 0 0 0 0 0 0

1763B 0 0 0 0 0 0

1783B 300 300 300 300 300 300

1785B 120 120 120 120 120 120

1815B 00110000 00110000 00110000 00110000 00110000 00110000

1816B 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000

1817B 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000

1819B 00000001 00000001 00000001 00000001 00000001 00000001

1820B 20 20 20 20 20 20

1821B 40000 40000 40000 40000 40000 40000

1825B 7000 7000 7000 7000 7000 7000

1826B 5000 5000 5000 5000 5000 5000

1827B 200 200 200 200 200 200

1828B 300000 300000 300000 300000 300000 300000

1829B 5000 5000 5000 5000 5000 5000

1832B 83330 83330 83330 83330 83330 83330

1838B 15000 15000 15000 15000 15000 15000

1850B 0 0 0 0 0 0

1851B 0 0 0 0 0 0

1852B 0 0 0 0 0 0

1860B * * * * * *

1861B * * * * * *



381

Motor α6/2000α3/3000α2/3000α2/2000α1/3000β0.5/3000

NO. 765432107654321076543210765432107654321076543210

1904B 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000

(NOTE)1905B 00000001 00000001 00000001 00000001 00000001 00000001

1923 4 4 4 4 4 4

(NOTE)1924 0 0 0 0 0 0

1942B 700 700 700 700 700 700

1943B 99999999 99999999 99999999 99999999 99999999 99999999

1944B –99999999 –99999999 –99999999 –99999999 –99999999 –99999999

2000B 00011010 00011010 00011010 00011010 00011010 00011010

2001B 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000

2002B 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000

2003B 00001000 00001000 00001000 00001000 00000000 00000000

2004B 00000011 00000011 00000011 00000011 00000011 00000011

2005B 01000010 01000010 01000010 01000010 01000010 01000010

2006B 01000100 01000100 00000000 01000100 01000100 01000100

2007B 01000000 01000000 01000000 01000000 01000000 01000000

2008B 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000

2009B 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000

2010B 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000

2011B 00100000 00100000 00100000 00100000 00100000 00100000

2012B 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000

2013B 00000001 00000001 00000001 00000001 00000001 00000001

2014B 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000

2015B 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000

2016B 00001000 00001000 00001000 00001000 00001000 00001000

2017B 00100001 00100001 00100001 00100001 00100001 00100001

2020B 13 61 46 62 15 16

2021B 128 128 128 128 128 128

2022B 111 111 111 111 111 111

2023B 8192 8192 8192 8192 8192 8192

2024B 12500 12500 12500 12500 12500 12500

2040B 176 312 936 424 946 1643

2041B –864 –1685 –3662 –2645 –4706 –6710

2042B –2556 –2480 –2485 –2490 –3052 –3052

2043B 9 111 91 128 87 99

2044B –79 –997 –812 –1146 –781 –887

2045B 0 0 0 0 0 0

2046B –8235 –8235 –8235 –8235 –8235 –8235

2047B –4789 3806 4674 3311 4858 4639

2048B 0 0 0 0 0 0


382

Motor α6/2000α3/3000α2/3000α2/2000α1/3000β0.5/3000

NO. 765432107654321076543210765432107654321076543210

2049B 0 0 0 0 0 0

2050B 956 956 956 956 956 956

2051B 510 510 510 510 510 510

2052B 0 0 0 0 0 0

2053B 21 21 21 21 21 21

2054B 1894 1894 1894 1894 1894 1894

2055B 319 319 319 319 319 319

2056B 1200 2800 2147 2520 2000 3500

2057B 2000 2330 –7690 –6156 –7690 –6415

2058B 77 57 –1000 –1200 –800 –1600

2059B 5 5 0 5 5 5

2060B 7282 7282 7282 7282 7282 7282

2061B 120 120 120 120 120 120

2062B 32585 32623 32627 32519 32713 32689

2063B 2288 1811 1766 3112 690 991

2064B 4 4 4 4 4 4

2065B 6797 5377 5245 9256 2045 2940

2066B 0 0 0 0 0 0

2067B 0 0 0 0 0 0

2068B 0 0 0 0 0 0

2069B 100 100 100 100 100 100

2070B 0 0 0 0 0 0

2071B 0 0 0 0 0 0

2074B 17384 1680 0 8194 3000 8192

2076B 0 0 0 0 0 0

2077B 0 0 0 0 0 0

2078B 4 4 4 4 4 4

2079B 100 100 100 100 100 100

2082B 0 0 0 0 0 0

2083B 100 100 100 100 100 100

2084B 4 4 4 4 4 4

2085B 100 100 100 100 100 100

2086B 1918 1706 1685 2239 1052 1052

2087B 0 0 0 0 0 0

2088B 0 0 0 0 0 0

2089B 0 0 0 0 0 0

2092B 9200 9200 9200 9200 9200 9200

2095B 0 0 0 0 0 0

2098B 5160 50 0 0 0 10265



383

Motor α6/2000α3/3000α2/3000α2/2000α1/3000β0.5/3000

NO. 765432107654321076543210765432107654321076543210

2099B 400 400 400 400 400 400

2102B 15000 15000 15000 15000 15000 15000

2103B 0 0 0 0 0 0

2104B 0 0 0 0 0 0

2105B 29 51 104 74 251 419

2107B 100 100 100 100 100 100

2109B 16 16 16 16 16 16

2110B 0 0 0 0 32 32

2111B 7790 7715 6194 7780 6214 3960

2115B 0 0 12776 0 0 0

2119B 20 20 20 20 20 20

2127B 400 785 4800 2300 2047 2729

2128B 0 0 2500 3000 1500 5000

2129B 0 0 1806 3088 1812 1556

2133B 0 7710 0 7710 0 0

2134B 0 12830 0 12830 0 0

2143B 16 16 16 16 16 16

2144B 9900 9900 9900 9900 9900 9900

2145B 100 100 100 100 100 100

2156B 0 0 0 0 0 0

2162B 0 0 0 0 0 0

2163B 0 0 0 0 0 0

2164B 0 0 0 0 0 0

2165B 0 0 0 0 0 0

2178B 5000 5000 5000 5000 5000 5000

2200B 00100000 00100000 00100000 00100000 00100000 00100000

2201B 00000001 00000001 00000001 00000001 00000001 00000001

2202B 00000111 00000111 00000111 00000111 00000111 00000111

2203B 00000100 00000100 00000100 00000100 00000100 00000100

2207B 00001000 00001000 00001000 00001000 00001000 00001000

2208B 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000

2209B 00000100 00000100 00000100 00000100 00000100 00000100

2210B 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000

2211B 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000

2212B 01000000 01000000 01000000 01000000 01000000 01000000

2213B 01100000 01100000 01100000 01100000 01100000 01100000

2334B 150 150 150 150 150 150

2335B 100 100 100 100 100 100

3115B 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000


384

Motor α6/2000α3/3000α2/3000α2/2000α1/3000β0.5/3000

NO. 765432107654321076543210765432107654321076543210

3620B 0 0 0 0 0 0

3621B 0 0 0 0 0 0

3622B 0 0 0 0 0 0

3623B 0 0 0 0 0 0

3624B 0 0 0 0 0 0

5401B 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000

5421B 0 0 0 0 0 0

5440B 0 0 0 0 0 0

6131B 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000

8410B 120 120 120 120 120 120

8470B 120 120 120 120 120 120

19510B 120 120 120 120 120 120

(2) FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR αi seriesB: fourth axis

Motor α1/5000i α2/5000i αM2/5000i αM3/5000i α4/4000i α8/3000i

NO. 76543210 76543210 76543210 76543210 76543210 76543210

0012B 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000

1005B 10000001 10000001 10000001 10000001 10000001 10000001

1006B 00100001 00100001 00100001 00100001 00100001 00100001

1007B 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000

1008B 00000100 00000100 00000100 00000100 00000100 00000100

1020B 66 66 66 66 66 66

1022B 0 0 0 0 0 0

(NOTE)1023B 4 4 4 4 4 4

1220B 0 0 0 0 0 0

1221B 0 0 0 0 0 0

1222B 0 0 0 0 0 0

1223B 0 0 0 0 0 0

1224B 0 0 0 0 0 0

1225B 0 0 0 0 0 0

1226B 0 0 0 0 0 0

1240B 0 0 0 0 0 0

1241B 0 0 0 0 0 0

1242B 0 0 0 0 0 0

1243B 0 0 0 0 0 0

1244B 0 0 0 0 0 0

1250B 0 0 0 0 0 0

1251B 0 0 0 0 0 0

1260B 360000 360000 360000 360000 360000 360000



385

Motor α8/3000iα4/4000iαM3/5000iαM2/5000iα2/5000iα1/5000i

NO. 765432107654321076543210765432107654321076543210

1310B 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000

1320B 9999999 9999999 9999999 9999999 9999999 9999999

1321B –9999999 –9999999 –9999999 –9999999 –9999999 –9999999

1322B 0 0 0 0 0 0

1323B 0 0 0 0 0 0

1324B 0 0 0 0 0 0

1325B 0 0 0 0 0 0

1326B 99999999 99999999 99999999 99999999 99999999 99999999

1327B –99999999 –99999999 –99999999 –99999999 –99999999 –99999999

1420B 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000

1421B 400 400 400 400 400 400

1423B 400 400 400 400 400 400

1424B 0 0 0 0 0 0

1425B 400 400 400 400 400 400

1427B 600 600 600 600 600 600

1428B 0 0 0 0 0 0

1430B 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000

1432B 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000

1434B 600 600 600 600 600 600

1610B 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000

1620B 152 152 152 152 152 152

1621B 64 64 64 64 64 64

1622B 50 50 50 50 50 50

1623B 0 0 0 0 0 0

1624B 24 24 24 24 24 24

1625B 0 0 0 0 0 0

1722B 0 0 0 0 0 0

1762B 0 0 0 0 0 0

1763B 0 0 0 0 0 0

1783B 300 300 300 300 300 300

1785B 120 120 120 120 120 120

1815B 00110000 00110000 00110000 00110000 00110000 00110000

1816B 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000

1817B 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000

1819B 00000001 00000001 00000001 00000001 00000001 00000001

1820B 20 20 20 20 20 20

1821B 40000 40000 40000 40000 40000 40000

1825B 7000 7000 7000 7000 7000 7000

1826B 5000 5000 5000 5000 5000 5000


386


NO. 765432107654321076543210765432107654321076543210

1827B 200 200 200 200 200 200

1828B 300000 300000 300000 300000 300000 300000

1829B 5000 5000 5000 5000 5000 5000

1832B 83330 83330 83330 83330 83330 83330

1838B 15000 15000 15000 15000 15000 15000

1850B 0 0 0 0 0 0

1851B 0 0 0 0 0 0

1852B 0 0 0 0 0 0

1860B * * * * * *

1861B * * * * * *

1904B 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000

(NOTE)1905B 00000001 00000001 00000001 00000001 00000001 00000001

1923 4 4 4 4 4 4

(NOTE)1924 0 0 0 0 0 0

1942B 700 700 700 700 700 700

1943B 99999999 99999999 99999999 99999999 99999999 99999999

1944B –99999999 –99999999 –99999999 –99999999 –99999999 –99999999

2000B 00011010 00011010 00011010 00011010 00011010 00011010

2001B 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000

2002B 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000

2003B 00001000 00001000 00001000 00001000 00001000 00001000

2004B 00000011 00000011 00000011 00000011 00000011 00000011

2005B 01000010 01000010 01000010 01000010 01000010 01000010

2006B 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000

2007B 01000000 01000000 01000000 01000000 01000000 01000000

2008B 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000

2009B 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000

2010B 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000

2011B 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00100000 00100000

2012B 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000

2013B 00000001 00000001 00000001 00000001 00000001 00000001

2014B 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000

2015B 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000

2016B 00001000 00001000 00001000 00001000 00001000 00001000

2017B 00100001 00100001 00100001 00100001 00100001 00100001

2020B 252 255 262 265 273 277

2021B 128 128 128 128 128 128

2022B 111 111 111 111 111 111

2023B 8192 8192 8192 8192 8192 8192



387


NO. 765432107654321076543210765432107654321076543210

2024B 12500 12500 12500 12500 12500 12500

2040B 620 760 530 420 993 787

2041B –3034 –3743 –2543 –1748 –4260 –4184

2042B –1256 –1283 –1251 –1276 –1311 –1325

2043B 66 76 39 64 106 113

2044B –594 –680 –350 –574 –953 –1009

2045B 0 0 0 0 0 0

2046B –8235 –8235 –8235 –8235 –8235 –8235

2047B 6384 5578 10853 –661 3980 3760

2048B 0 0 0 0 0 0

2049B 0 0 0 0 0 0

2050B 956 956 956 956 956 956

2051B 510 510 510 510 510 510

2052B 0 0 0 0 0 0

2053B 21 21 21 21 21 21

2054B 1894 1894 1894 1894 1894 1894

2055B 319 319 319 319 319 319

2056B 0 0 0 0 0 0

2057B 0 –12298 –10250 –8974 –11789 –6420

2058B 0 –1275 –2000 –3641 –180 –2000

2059B 0 0 0 0 0 0

2060B 7282 7282 7282 7282 8010 8010

2061B 0 0 0 0 0 0

2062B 32613 32497 32528 32315 32446 32383

2063B 1933 3390 3005 5660 4029 4807

2064B 4 4 4 4 4 4

2065B 5739 10085 8936 16888 11998 14327

2066B 0 0 0 0 0 0

2067B 0 0 0 0 0 0

2068B 0 0 0 0 0 0

2069B 100 100 100 100 100 100

2070B 0 0 0 0 0 0

2071B 0 0 0 0 0 0

2074B 20480 12288 20480 12288 8192 8192

2076B 0 0 0 0 0 0

2077B 0 0 0 0 0 0

2078B 4 4 4 4 4 4

2079B 100 100 100 100 100 100

2082B 0 0 0 0 0 0


388


NO. 765432107654321076543210765432107654321076543210

2083B 100 100 100 100 100 100

2084B 4 4 4 4 4 4

2085B 100 100 100 100 100 100

2086B 1234 1636 1540 2117 1784 1950

2087B 0 0 0 0 0 0

2088B 0 0 0 0 0 0

2089B 0 0 0 0 0 0

2092B 9200 9200 9200 9200 9200 9200

2095B 0 0 0 0 0 0

2098B 0 0 0 0 0 0

2099B 400 400 400 400 400 400

2102B 0 0 0 0 15000 15000

2103B 0 0 0 0 0 0

2104B 0 0 0 0 0 0

2105B 72 109 117 127 201 369

2107B 100 100 100 100 100 100

2109B 16 16 16 16 16 16

2110B 32 32 32 8 32 776

2111B 10260 10280 8995 10295 5130 3870

2115B 0 0 0 0 0 0

2119B 20 20 20 20 20 20

2127B 1188 1276 1137 646 1443 2103

2128B 1667 2000 1000 1667 2000 3500

2129B 3858 3862 3851 3847 3338 1815

2133B 7690 7693 7690 7690 6670 0

2134B 12840 12840 12840 12840 5140 0

2143B 16 16 16 16 16 16

2144B 9900 9900 9900 9900 9900 9900

2145B 100 100 100 100 100 100

2156B 0 0 0 0 0 0

2162B 32767 32766 32766 32765 32766 32765

2163B 13 23 20 40 27 33

2164B 2425 4261 3776 7135 5069 6053

2165B 25 25 25 25 45 45

2178B 5000 5000 5000 5000 5000 5000

2200B 00100000 00100000 00100000 00100000 00100000 00100000

2201B 00000001 00000001 00000001 00000001 00000001 00000001

2202B 00000111 00000111 00000111 00000111 00000111 00000111

2203B 00000100 00000100 00000100 00000100 00000100 00000100



389


NO. 765432107654321076543210765432107654321076543210

2207B 00001000 00001000 00001000 00001000 00001000 00001000

2208B 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000

2209B 00000100 00000100 00000100 00000100 00000100 00000100

2210B 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000

2211B 00001010 00001010 00001010 00001010 00000010 00000000

2212B 01000000 01000000 01000000 01000000 01000000 01000000

2213B 01100000 01100000 01100000 01100000 01100000 01100000

2334B 150 150 150 150 150 150

2335B 100 100 100 100 100 100

3115B 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000

3620B 0 0 0 0 0 0

3621B 0 0 0 0 0 0

3622B 0 0 0 0 0 0

3623B 0 0 0 0 0 0

3624B 0 0 0 0 0 0

5401B 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000

5421B 0 0 0 0 0 0

5440B 0 0 0 0 0 0

6131B 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000

8410B 120 120 120 120 120 120

8470B 120 120 120 120 120 120

19510B 120 120 120 120 120 120


390

(1) Specifying a command� With the clamp/unclamp command

(Clamp or unclamp command for the fourth axis)

M72 : (Unclamp)

B∆∆ : (Index) Note) When using the fourth axis as the B–axis

M71 : (Clamp))

or

M11 : (Unclamp)

B∆∆ : (Index) Note) When using the fourth axis as the B–axis

M10 : (Clamp))

(When making a reference position return, specify the unclamp command before movement along the additional axis starts.)

� Without the clamp/unclamp command

B∆∆ : (Index) Note) When using the fourth axis as the B–axis)

� Entering a value for the move command for the additional axis

Without a decimal point B1 � 0.001�

With a decimal point) B1 � 1�

� Absolute/incremental commandThe absolute or incremental command can be specified with G90or G91.

� Number of axes to be subject to simultaneous controlAmong all axes, including the fourth axes, up to three axes can becontrolled simultaneously. In MANUAL mode, however, only oneaxis can be controlled at a time.

� FeedrateG00/G01 can be applied in the same way as for the X–, Y–, and Z–axes.

23.7INDEX TABLEFUNCTION (OPTION)



391

(2) Manual operationHandle–mode operation can be executed in the same way as for theX–, Y–, and Z–axes.

(Selecting the fourth axis)

[Press]

(3) Return to the zero point (establishing the motor zero point)Display [QUICK]Screen, [32:MAINTENANCE/SETTING], then[2:MOTOR ORIGIN].[For return to the motor origin with a dog]

Pressing the [+] or [–] soft key causes a return to the zero point on thefourth axis (establishing the motor zero point).(Pressing the [+] key instigates movement in the positive direction.Pressing the [–] key instigates movement in the negative direction.)Keep the soft key held down until the completion of return to the zeropoint (establishing the motor zero point).


392

[For return to the motor origin without a dog]

Perform motor origin return operation according to the guidance.

(4) Reference position return (moving to the machine zero point)Specify this operation on the 2: MENU OPERATION screen (aQUICK screen).

Pressing the [B+] or [B–] soft key instigates reference position return(movement to the machine zero point) on the fourth axis.(Pressing the [+] key instigates movement in the positive direction.Pressing the [–] instigates movement in the negative direction.)Keep the soft key held down until the completion of referenceposition return.When motor reference position return is performed with the safetydoor open, alarm 90 REFERENCE RETURN INCOMPLETE maybe issued. In this case, close the safety door, then perform motorreference position return.(When the safety door is open, the move speed about the additionalaxis is limited to 600 deg/min.)



393

(5) Turning the servo motor offIf the clamp or unclamp command is used for the fourth axis, the servooff function can be used to prevent the servo motor from beingoverloaded by the use of the fourth axis.When the servo off function is used, the servo motor is activated ordeactivated according to the status of the clamp/unclamp checkswitch.

(6) Disabling movement along axes (interlock)If the clamp/unclamp command is used for the fourth axis, operationis restricted as described below:

In the clamp state :X–, Y–, and Z–axes � Movement along the axes is

not disabled.Fourth axes � Movement along the axes is

disabled.In the unclamp state :

X–, Y–, and Z–axes � Movement along the axes canbe enabled and disabled as necessary.

Fourth axes � Movement along the axes is not disabled.

(7) Clamp/unclamp command(Fourth axis)

Clamp command : M71 (or M10) Unclamp command : M72 (or M11)

When using the clamp/unclamp command for the fourth axis, specifyM72 or M11 (unclamp command) before movement along the axisstarts, and M71 or M10 (clamp command) after completion of themovement.

NOTEWhen M10, or M71 is specified, an alarm may be issued dueto a position shift or excessively large error. This is becausethe clamp signal is input in the in–position state. In such acase, add a dwell operation before the M10, or M71command.


394

[Clamp/unclamp timing]

Command

Clamp state

Clamp

Unclamp

Clamp check

Unclamp check OFF

Movement along the fourth axis

ON OFF

ON OFF ON

OFF OFFON

OFF OFF

OFF

M72 M71

ONON

ON

(8) Detach functionWhen the power line, signal line, or similar, for the fourth axis isdisconnected, the function automatically sets a detach (axis isolation)parameter so that an axis alarm will not be displayed. When thepower line, signal line, or similar is subsequently reconnected, thedetach (axis isolation) parameter is automatically reset so that the axiscan be used.

After a power line, signal line, or similar has been connected ordisconnected, turn the power on. After a QUICK screen or NC screenis displayed, turn the power off then on again.

(9) Overtravel functionThe range of motion along the fourth axis can be restricted by usinga proximity switch. When the switch is tripped, the following alarmscan be output:

506 OVERTRAVEL: +* (* corresponds to a displayed axis name.)507 OVERTRAVEL: –*



395

(10)Setting parameters(PMC parameters)

Keeprelay Value Function

K 2#1 1

0

In the fourth-axis clamp state, the servo motor is deacti-vated.

In the fourth-axis clamp state, the servo motor is not deac-tivated.

K 3#2 1

0

The clamp/unclamp command is used for the fourth axis.

The clamp/unclamp command is not used for the fourthaxis.

K 3#3 1

0

In the fourth-axis unclamp state, the X-, Y-, and Z-axesare interlocked.

In the fourth-axis unclamp state, the X-, Y-, and Z-axesare not interlocked.

K 12#3 1

0

The detach function and hardware overtravel function arenot used for the fourth axes.

The detach function and hardware overtravel function areused for the fourth axes.

(NC parameters)

Param-eter Value Function

3004#5(OTH)

1

0

The hardware overtravel function is not used for the fourthaxes.

The hardware overtravel function is used for the fourthaxes.


396

(1) Motors for additional axis

Motor model β0.5/3000 α1/3000 α2/3000 α3/3000

Pulse coder βA32B (ABS) αA64 (ABS)

Motor code A06B–0113–B075 A06B–0371–B075 A06B–0373–B075 A06B–0123–B075

(2) Feedback cables

Servo amp. connection

*1 FI40–2015S (Connector, Hirose Electric)FI–20–CV (Connector cover, Hirose Electric)

Control unit Receptacle *1 H/MS3102A 20–29PW (Hirose Electric)connection

Plug *2 H/MS3106A 20–29SW(11) (Straight plug, Hirose Electric)H/MS3108B 20–29SW(11) (Right–angle plug, Hirose Electric)JA06A–20–29SW–J1–EB (Plug, Japan Aviation Electronics Industry)

Motor unit connection

Plug *2 178289–6 (Housing)1–175217–2(Contact)(Tyco Electronics AMP)A06B–6050–K120

HDAB–15S (Connector, Hirose Electric)

HDAW–15–CV (Connector cover, Hirose Electric)

FANUC order number : A06B–6050–K115

H/MS3106A 20–29SW(11)H/MS3108B 20–29SW(11)JA06A–20–29SW–J1–EB

Receptacle *1 178964–6 (Tyco Electronics AMP)

SDAB–15P (Hirose Electric) H/MS3102A20–29PCW4(10)

(3) Power cable and input/output signal cable

Servo AMP Connector *1 1)Additional 1 axis1–917807–2 (Housing)

2)Additional 2 axis1–917807–2,3–917807–2 (Housing)

3)31604D–6(Contact) (Tyco Electronics AMP)

Control unit Receptacle *1 H/MS3102A 22–14P (Hirose Electric)connection

Plug *2 H/MS3106A 22–14S (Straight plug, Hirose Electric)H/MS3108B 22–14S (Right–angle plug, Hirose Electric)JA06A–22–14S–J1 (Plug, Japan Aviation Electronics Industry)


Plug *2 3–178129–6 (Housing)1–175217–2 (Contact)(Tyco Electronics AMP)A06B–6050–K119

176346–8 (Tyco Electronics AMP)FANUC order number : A06B–6050–K121

H/MS3106A 18–10S(10)H/MS3108B 18–10S(10)JA06A–18–10S–J1–(A72)

Receptacle *1 3–179554–3(Tyco Electronics AMP)

176339–2 (Tyco Electronics AMP)

H/MS3102A 18–10P–D–T(10)

*1 Available from FANUC.

*2 Available from the manufacturer of the index table.

*3 All connectors to be used external to the machine shall be waterproof.

23.8ADDITIONAL AXISCABLE FOR THEINDEX TABLE(JAPAN ANDEXPORT STANDARD)

23.8.1Connectors



397

(1) Motors for additional axis

Motor model α1/5000i α2/5000i αM2/5000i αM3/5000i α4/4000i α8/3000i

Pulse coder αA1000i (ABS)

Motor code A06B–0202–B000

A06B–0205–B000

A06B–0212–B000

A06B–0215–B000

A06B–0223–B000

A06B–0227–B000

(2) Feedback cables

Servo amp. connection

*1 FI40–2015S (Connector, Hirose Electric)FI–20–CV (Connector cover, Hirose Electric)

Control unit Receptacle *1 H/MS3102A 20–29PW (Hirose Electric)connection

Plug *2 H/MS3106A 20–29SW(11) (Straight plug, Hirose Electric)H/MS3108B 20–29SW(11) (Right–angle plug, Hirose Electric)JA06A–20–29SW–J1–EB (Plug, Japan Aviation Electronics Industry)


Plug *2 Straight plug JN1DS10SL2, JN1–22–22S: Contact (Japan Aviation Electronics Industry)A06B–6114–K200#S (FANUC number)

*2 Right–angle plug JN1FS10SL2, JN1–22–22S: Contact (Japan Aviation Electronics Industry)A06B–6114–K200#E (FANUC number)

Receptacle *1 JN1AS10UL1 (Japan Aviation Electronics Industry)

(3) Power cable and input/output signal cable

Servo AMP Connector *1 1)Additional 1 axis1–917807–2 (Housing)

2)Additional 2 axis1–917807–2,3–917807–2 (Housing)

3)31604D–6(Contact) (Tyco Electronics AMP)

Control unit Receptacle *1 H/MS3102A 22–14P (Hirose Electric)connection

Plug *2 H/MS3106A 22–14S (Straight plug, Hirose Electric)H/MS3108B 22–14S (Right–angle plug, Hirose Electric)JA06A–22–14S–J1 (Plug, Japan Aviation Electronics Industry)


Plug *2 α1i, α2i, αM2i, αM3i

Straight 1473063–2 (Tyco Electronics AMP) /A06B–6114–K220#S (FANUC number)

Right–angle plug 1473393–2 (Tyco Electronics AMP) /A06B–6114–K220#E (FANUC number)

*2 α4i, α8i

Straight plug H/MS3106A18–10S(10) (Hirose Electric)JA06A–18–10S–J1–EB (Japan Aviation Electronics Industry)MS3106A18–10S–B–BSS (DDK Ltd.)

Right–angle plug H/MS3108B18–10S(10) (Hirose Electric)JA08A–18–10S–J1–EB (Japan Aviation Electronics Industry)MS3108A18–10S–B–BAS (DDK Ltd.)

H/MS3106A18–10S(13) (Hirose Electric)JA06A–18–10S–J1(A72) (Japan Aviation Electronics Industry)MS3106A18–10S–B(D190) (DDK Ltd.)

Receptacle *1 α1i, α2i, αM2i, αM3i 1473060–2 (Tyco Electronics AMP)

*1 α4i, α8i H/MS3102A18–10P–D–T(10) (Hirose Electric)

*1 Available from FANUC.*2 Available from the manufacturer of the index table.*3 All connectors to be used external to the machine shall be waterproof.

23.8.2Connectors


398

(1) AC SV β0.5/3000(a) Connecting the feedback cable

2

5

6

7

9

18

20

12

SD

*SD

REQ

*REQ

+6VA

+5V

+5V

+5V

0V

0V

0V

14

16

A4

B4

A3

B3

A5

A2

B2

A1

B1

A6

B6

A

D

F

G

R

J

K

N

T

S

H

SD

*SD

REQ

*REQ

+6VA

+5V

+5V

0V

0V

0V

SHLD

0.5mm2

0.5mm2

0.5mm2

0.5mm2

0.5mm2

0.18mm2

0.18mm2

0.18mm2

0.18mm2

0.18mm2

0.18mm2

JF1 XS40

βA32B Pulse coder178964–6

Available from FANUC Available from the manufacturer of the index table

ROBODRILL

Servo amp.(4th axis JF1)

INDEX TABLE

Control cabinetMS3102A20–29PW

Grounding plate

Shield Shield

Motor cover

1

23.8.3Additional Axis Cablefor the Index Table(4th axis)



399

(b) Connecting the motor power and index input/output signals

A01

A02

+24V

B01

A04

D

E

F

G

0.5mm2 or greater

0.5mm2 or greater

0.5mm2 or greater

B1

A1

B2

A2

U

V

W

G

A4

A3

A5

A2

L

M

K

U

J

N

B

U

V

W

G0.75mm2 or greater

0.75mm2 or greater

0.75mm2 or greater

0.75mm2 or greater

P

H

R

S

A

V

B02

B06

B05

B04

A05

A03

B03

CLPSW4(X8.0)

*DEC4(X9.3)

*DTCH4(X8.5)

0V

CLAMP4(Y1.7)

M10,M71(Y1.5)

M11,M72(Y1.6)

+OT4(X8.6)

–OT4(X8.7)

T

C 0.5mm2 or greater

CZ2 XS41

XS25

0.5mm2 or greater

0.5mm2 or greater

0.5mm2 or greater

0.5mm2 or greater

0.5mm2 or greater

0.5mm2 or greater

UNCLPSW4(X8.1)

Tyco AMPD–3100D178326–5


ROBODRILL

Servo amp.

INDEX TABLE

Control cabinetMS3102A22–14P

Motor cover

β Motor power178289–61–175217–2

Reference position re-turn switch

4th-axis clamp

4th-axis unclamp

(+) Overtravel

(–) Overtravel

Input common

Unclamp check sewitch

Clamp check switch

Output common

Solenoid valve forbrake


400

(2) AC SV α1/3000 or α2/3000(a) Connecting the feedback cable

2

5

6

7

9

18

20

12

SD

*SD

REQ

*REQ

+6VA

+5V

+5V

+5V

0V

0V

0V

14

16

A4

B4

A3

B3

A5

A2

B2

A1

B1

A6

B6

A

D

F

G

R

J

K

N

T

S

H

SD

*SD

REQ

*REQ

+6VA

+5V

+5V

0V

0V

0V

SHLD

0.5mm2

0.5mm2

0.5mm2

0.5mm2

0.5mm2

0.18mm2

0.18mm2

0.18mm2

0.18mm2

0.18mm2

0.18mm2

JF1 XS40

Available from the manufacturer of the index tableAvailable from FANUC

ROBODRILL INDEX TABLE


Grounding plate

Shield Shield

Motor cover

αA64 Pulse coderD–SUB 15P

Servo amp.(4th axis JF1)

1



401


A01

A02

+24V

UNCLPSW4(X8.1)

B01

A04

D

E

F

G

0.5mm2 or greater

0.5mm2 or greater

0.5mm2 or greater

B1

A1

B2

A2

U

V

W

G

A4

A3

A5

A2

L

M

K

U

J

N

B

U

V

W

G

0.75mm2 or greater

0.75mm2 or greater

0.75mm2 or greater

0.75mm2 or greater

P

H

R

S

A

V

B02

B06

B05

B04

A05

A03

B03

CLPSW4(X8.0)

*DEC4(X9.3)

*DTCH4(X8.5)

0V

CLAMP4(Y1.7)

M10,M71(Y1.5)

M11 ,M72(Y1.6)

+OT4(X8.6)

–OT4(X8.7)

T

C

0.5mm2 or greater

XS25

XS41CZ2

0.5mm2 or greater

0.5mm2 or greater

0.5mm2 or greater

0.5mm2 or greater

0.5mm2 or greater

0.5mm2 or greater

Tyco AMPD–3100D178326–5

Available from FANUC

ROBODRILL

Servo amp.

INDEX TABLE


Motor cover α1, α2 MotorpowerHDAB–15SHDAW–15–CV

Available from the manufacturer of the index table


4th-axis clamp

4th-axis unclamp

(+) Overtravel

(–) Overtravel

Input common


Clamp check switch

Output common



402

(3) AC SV α3/3000(a) Connecting the feedback cable

2

5

6

7

9

18

20

12

SD

*SD

REQ

*REQ

+6VA

+5V

+5V

+5V

0V

0V

0V

14

16

A4

B4

A3

B3

A5

A2

B2

A1

B1

A6

B6

A

D

F

G

R

J

K

N

T

S

H

SD

*SD

REQ

*REQ

+6VA

+5V

+5V

0V

0V

0V

SHLD

0.5mm2

0.5mm2

0.5mm2

0.5mm2

0.5mm2

0.18mm2

0.18mm2

0.18mm2

0.18mm2

0.18mm2

0.18mm2

XS40JF1

1

αA64 Pulse coderMS3102A20

–29PW




Grounding plate

Shield Shield

Motor coverServo amp.(4th axis JF1)



403


B1

A1

B2

A2

U

V

W

G

A4

A3

A5

A2

L

M

K

U

J

N

B

U

V

W

G2.0mm2 or greater

2.0mm2 or greater

2.0mm2 or greater

2.0mm2 or greater

T

CZ2

A01

A02

+24V

UNCLPSW4(X8.1)

B01

A04

D

E

F

G

0.5mm2 or greater

0.5mm2 or greater

0.5mm2 or greater

P

H

R

S

A

V

B02

B06

B05

B04

A05

A03

B03

CLPSW4(X8.0)

*DEC4(X9.3)

*DTCH4(X8.5)

0V

CLAMP4(Y1.7)

M10, M71(Y1.5)

M11, M72(Y1.6)

+OT4(X8.6)

–OT4(X8.7)

C 0.5mm2 or greater

0.5mm2 or greater

0.5mm2 or greater

0.5mm2 or greater

0.5mm2 or greater

0.5mm2 or greater

0.5mm2 or greater

XS25

XS41

Tyco AMPD–3100D178326–5


ROBODRILL

Servo amp.

INDEX TABLE


Motor cover

α3 Motor powerMS3102A18–10P



4th-axis clamp

4th-axis unclamp

(+) Overtravel

(–) Overtravel

Input common


Clamp check switch

Output common



404

(4) AC SV α1/5000i, α2/5000i, αM2/5000i, αM3/5000i(a) Connecting the feedback cable

αA1000i Pulse coderJN1AS10UL1




Grounding plate

Shield Shield


2

5

6

7

9

18

20

12

SD

*SD

RD

*RD

+6V

+5V

+5V

+5V

0V

0V

0V

14

16

6

5

4

8

9

7

10

A

D

F

G

R

J

K

N

T

S

H

RD

*RD

+6V

+5V

+5V

0V

0V0.5mm2

0.5mm2

0.5mm2

0.5mm2

0.18mm2

0.18mm2

0.18mm2

0.18mm2

JF1 XS40

1



405


A01

A02

+24V

UNCLPSW4(X8.1)

B01

A04

D

E

F

G

0.5mm2 or greater

0.5mm2 or greater

0.5mm2 or greater

B1

A1

B2

A2

U

V

W

G

1

2

3

4

L

M

K

U

J

N

B

U

V

W

G0.75mm2 or greater

0.75mm2 or greater

0.75mm2 or greater

0.75mm2 or greater

P

H

R

S

A

V

B02

B06

B05

B04

A05

A03

B03

CLPSW4(X8.0)

*DEC4(X9.3)

*DTCH4(X8.5)

0V

CLAMP4(Y1.7)

M10, M71(Y1.5)

M11 , M72(Y1.6)

+OT4(X8.6)

–OT4(X8.7)

T

C 0.5mm2 or greater

CZ2L XS41

XS25

0.5mm2 or greater

0.5mm2 or greater

0.5mm2 or greater

0.5mm2 or greater

0.5mm2 or greater

0.5mm2 or greater

Tyco AMPD–3100D178326–5


ROBODRILL

Servo amp.

INDEX TABLE


Motor cover

α1, α2, αM2, αM3, Motorpower1473060–2



4th-axis clamp

4th-axis unclamp

(+) Overtravel

(–) Overtravel

Input common


Clamp check switch

Output common



406

(5) AC SV α4/4000i, α8/3000i(a) Connecting the feedback cable

2

5

6

7

9

18

20

12

SD

*SD

RD

*RD

+6V

+5V

+5V

+5V

0V

0V

0V

14

16

6

5

4

8

9

7

10

A

D

F

G

R

J

K

N

T

S

H

RD

*RD

+6V

+5V

+5V

0V

0V0.5mm2

0.5mm2

0.5mm2

0.5mm2

0.18mm2

0.18mm2

0.18mm2

0.18mm2

JF1 XS40

1

αA1000i Pulse coderJN1AS10UL1




Grounding plate

Shield Shield




407


A01

A02

+24V

UNCLPSW4(X8.1)

B01

A04

D

E

F

G

0.5mm2 or greater

0.5mm2 or greater

0.5mm2 or greater

B1

A1

B2

A2

U

V

W

G

L

M

K

U

J

N

B

U

V

W

G2.0mm2 or greater

2.0mm2 or greater

2.0mm2 or greater

2.0mm2 or greater

P

H

R

S

A

V

B02

B06

B05

B04

A05

A03

B03

CLPSW4(X8.0)

*DEC4(X9.3)

*DTCH4(X8.5)

0V

CLAMP4(Y1.7)

M10, M71(Y1.5)

M11 , M72(Y1.6)

+OT4(X8.6)

–OT4(X8.7)

T

C 0.5mm2 or greater

CZ2L XS41

XS25

0.5mm2 or greater

0.5mm2 or greater

0.5mm2 or greater

0.5mm2 or greater

0.5mm2 or greater

0.5mm2 or greater

A

B

C

D

Tyco AMPD–3100D178326–5


ROBODRILL

Servo amp.

INDEX TABLE


Motor cover

α4, α8 MotorpowerH/MS3102A18–10P–D–T(10)



4th-axis clamp

4th-axis unclamp

(+) Overtravel

(–) Overtravel

Input common


Clamp check switch

Output common



408

(6) Connecting the motor power and input/output signals

Tyco AMPD–3100D178326–5


A01

A02

+24V

UNCLPSW4(X8.1)

B01

A04

D

E

F

G

0.5mm2 or greater

0.5mm2 or greater

0.5mm2 or greater

P

H

R

S

A

V

B02

B06

B05

B04

A05

A03

B03

CLPSW4(X8.0)

*DEC4(X9.3)

*DTCH4(X8.5)

0V

CLAMP4(Y1.7)

M10, M71(Y1.5)

M11, M72(Y1.6)

+OT4(X8.6)

–OT4(X8.7)

C 0.5mm2 or greater

0.5mm2 or greater

0.5mm2 or greater

0.5mm2 or greater

0.5mm2 or greater

0.5mm2 or greater

0.5mm2 or greater

XS25

NO

NO

NO


4th-axis clamp

4th-axis unclamp

(+) Overtravel

(–) Overtravel

Input common


Clamp check switch

Output common


NOTEThe 4th–axis detachment signal is used to check the cableconnection status.When the level of the *DTCH4 signal falls to 0, the servomotor is deactivated.(Before connecting or disconnecting a cable, first turn themachine off.)When the 4th–axis detachment signal is not used, thefunction can be PMC parameter No.K012, bit 3

= 0: Validates the 4th–axis detachment function.= 1: Invalidates the 4th–axis detachment funcion.

B–85014EN/0124. AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH

MEASUREMENTDETAILED OPERATIONS

409

24 AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH MEASUREMENT

Installing an automatic tool length measurement device

(1) Mount a switch at a desired point on the table. (Position the switch so that it will not interfere with the jig.)

NOTEThe sealant is made of NBR. Avoid using a coolant thatwould cause the NBR to swell.

(2) Connect the cable.� Usually, fasten the cable to the X–axis motor cable duct, running

down the right edge of the table, using cable ties.� Insert the cable by passing it through the lower sponge opening of the

left cabinet. Be careful to connect the cable to the terminal block.Connect the + and – lines of the switch cable correctly.

Brown line : Positive, +24E XT5–10 on the terminal block

Blue line : Negative, SKIP signal XT5–12 on the terminal block

� After connecting the cable, turn the device on and operate the switchby hand. Check that the LED on the switch lights. Check also thatPMCDGN on the screen can be used to turn the signal on and off.

SKIP signal : X0004, bit 7 (The signal goes to 1 when the switchis set to the ON position.)

(3) Store a macro program for tool length measurement (O9010) inprogram memory.

� A program having a number between O9000 and O9999 is usuallyprotected. When entering the program, release the protection bychanging the parameter. After entering the program, restore theoriginal setting.

O9000’s protection: NE9 bit (bit 4 of NC parameter 3202)When the NE9 bit is set to 1, the program is protected.When the NE9 bit is set to 0, the program is not protected

(can be edited).

(4) Measure the height of the switch.� Select a tool whose tip can reach the surface of the table. Measure

the distance from the surface of the table to the switch–on position.1) Place a sheet of paper on the surface of the table. Lower the

tool along the Z–axis until the tool tip touches the surface ofthe table. Record the Z coordinate.

Note) Do not make any mark on the table.2) Align the tool with the switch and slowly lower the tool along

the Z–axis until the LED of the switch lights. Record the Zcoordinate.

3) Obtain the difference between the Z coordinate of the tablesurface and the Z coordinate of the switch–on position. Setthe difference, as the switch height, in macro variable #900.

24. AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH MEASUREMENT B–85014EN/01DETAILED OPERATIONS

410

(5) Measure the central position of the switch.� Move the tool along the X–axis and Y–axis so that it is aligned with

the center of the switch. Set the machine coordinates in macrovariables #901 and #902.

(6) While referring to the operator’s manual, set the following macrovariables.

� Standard settings without high column#900 = Switch height, (4)#901 = X coordinate of switch central position, (5)#902 = Y coordinate of switch central position, (5)#903 = 480.0#904 = 0.5#905 = 5.0#906 = 450.0

(7) Mount a tool on the spindle and specify G910 S1.� G910 S1 H** B***.*

S1 : The tool length is measured.

H : Compensation number (The measurement result is input.)

B : Provisional tool length (Distance between the spindle tapergauge line and the tool tip, as measured with a scale)

� First, perform the measurement slowly with TRVS set to LOW andsingle block set to ON.

1) The tool temporarily stops 25 mm before the switch.During the temporary stop, determine the approximatedistance.

2) During skip (G31) measurement, override is disabled.� Check that the measured data is set for compensation number (H)

after the operation.

(8) Using the same tool, specify G910 S2.� G910 S2 H**

S2 : Tool failure is detected.The tool length is measured and compared with thepreviously specified compensation. If the length exceedsthe value set in #904, an alarm is issued.

H : Compensation number (compensation number for which themeasured tool length was stored is step 7)

� First, perform measurement slowly with TRVS set to LOW andsingle block set to ON.

1) The tool temporarily stops 5 mm before the switch.During the temporary stop, determine the approximatedistance.

2) During skip (G31) measurement, override is disabled.� Mount a shorter tool and check that an alarm is issued.

Set desired values according the use status.



411

G910 S� H�� B�� D�� M0 ;

S1: Automatic tool length measurement

S2: Automatic tool breakage detecting

Tool offset No.

Temporary tool length (from 30mm to 250mm)

Tool radius (Shift value)

Z axis stops before touching switch(25mm before switch ON)

FORMAT REMARKS

AUTOMATIC TOOL G910S1H__B___. _ Tool length isLENGTH MEASURE-MENT G910S1H__B___. _D__._

250mm, if omit.

G910S1H__B___. _D__._M0

AUTOMATIC TOOLBREAKAGE DETECTING

G910S2H__

NOTE1 The temporary tool length can be set within �#905 value

from true length. if its difference is bigger than #905, the tooland detecting switch may be broken.

2 The tool length which can be measured is limited under theinfluence of the height of detecting switch. Be carefuleabout the tool length and the position of detecting switch.

3 The value set by automatic tool length measurement mustnot be changed by manual.

4 The automatic tool breakage detecting must becommanded after executing automatic tool lengthmeasurement.

24.1COMMAND FORMAT


412

The G43 of tool length measurement is used in following both cases.

a) In case that offset value is the distance between tool edge and tablesureface.(when #903=0, offset is set by “_” value.)

Height ofswitch

(#900)

Detect-ingswitch

Workpieceor jig

Reference point of program

Workpiece height[Work coordinate][Z axis (+ value)]

Offset value(– VALUE)

b) In case that offset value is the tool length (the distance betweenspindle gage line and tool edge) (when #903=480, offset is set by “+”value.)[In case of high column 100mm #903=580][In case of high column 200mm #903=680][In case of high column 300mm #903=780]

Height ofswitch

(#900)

Detect-ingswitch

Workpieceor jig

Reference point of program

Tool length offset (+ value) Work coordinate

[Z axis (– value)]

Workpiece height

Distance betweentable sureface andspindle gage line

24.2COMPENSATIONMETHOD BY USINGAUTOMATIC TOOLLENGTHMEASUREMENT



413

a) Measuring limit of automatic tool length measurement

25mm before switch ON

Switch active position

Permissible overrun valuefrom switch active position(#905)

Tool

Temporary tool length(Commanded value by B)

Rapid traverse area

Measurement permis-sion area(G31 cutting feedrate)

NOTEThe permission overrun value is 5mm, if #905 is not set.

b) Measuring limit of automatic tool breakage detect

10mm before switch ON

Switch active position

Permissible overrun valuefrom switch active position(#905)

Tool

Rapid traverse area

Measurement permis-sion area(G31 cutting feedrate)

NOTEThe permission overrun value is 5mm, if #905 is no set.

24.3MEASURING LIMIT


414

a) NC parametersNo.6050=910 : G code for calling custom macro with program

number 09010. (09010 is called by G910 command.)

b) MACRO VARIABLES#900 : Distance between table sureface and switch position (not

omissible)The height of detecting switch must be heigher than 100mm(from the table sureface), and should be under the positionthat the tool of 250mm length can be measured.

#901 : Distance between X–reference point and switch position (notomissible) (X–axis machine coordinate value at switchposition)

#902 : Distance between Y–reference point and switch position (notomissible) (Y–axis machine coordinate value at switchposition)

#903 : Selection of usage of tool length measurement (notomissible)Using G43, offset is set by “_” value: #903=0Using G44, offset is set by “+” value: #903=480.000(standard)In case of high column 100mm, #903=580.000In case of high column 200mm, #903=680.000In case of high column 300mm, #903=780.000

#904 : Tool breakage detecting tolerance (0.5mm when set “0”.)When the difference between the measuring value ofautomatic tool length measurement and the measuring valueof tool breakage detect exceed the tolerance, the tool brokenalarm occurs.

#905 : Overrun value from switch ON position (5mm when set “0”.)When the switch is not active until the Z axis going down tothe overrun value by measuring with commanded temporarytool length, an alarm occurs.

#906 : Distance between table surface and spindle gage lineIn case of standard: 480.000In case of high column 100mm: 580.000In case of high column 200mm: 680.000In case of high column 300mm: 780.000

24.4PARAMETERS ANDMACRO VARIABLES



415

a) Releasing methodPlease check the alarm message number and contens.Alarms can be released by pressing the reset key [//] on the operator’spanel.After releasing alarm, please check and correct the program or settingvalue acoording to the contents of message.

b) Alarm No.3110DATA ERROR “H” NOT EXIST:

The offset “H” number is not commanded in the program byG910 command.

DATA ERROR “S”: The “S” value is out of range in the program by G910 command.(Please command “S1” or “S2”.)

DATA ERROR “B”: The “B” value of the temporary tool length is too small. (Pleaseset it beigger than 30mm(30.000).)

DATA ERROR B TOOL SHORT: The switch signal is not active until the Z axis going down to theoverrun value by automatic tool length measurement.� The “B” value of the temporary tool length is smaller than

actual tool length.� The setting value of the macro variable #900 or #906 is

wrong.� The switch or its wirring is defective.

SETTING DATA ERROR #900: The value of the macro variable #900 is not set, or too small.(Height of switch)

SETTING DATA ERROR #901: The value of the macro variable #901 is not set.(Switch position of X coordinate)

SETTING DATA ERROR #902: The value of the macro variable #902 is not set.(Switch position of Y coordinate)

SETTING DATA ERROR #903: The value of the macro variable #903 is not set.(Selection of usage of tool length measurement)

SETTING DATA ERROR #906: The value of the macro variable #906 is not set.(Distance between table sureface and spindle gage line)

c) Alarm No.3120TOOL BROKEN: The tool breakage is detected.

The difference between the measuring value of automatic toollength measurement and the measuring value of tool breakagedetect exceed the tolerance (#904).� Please change the broken cutter and carry out automatic tool

length measurement.

NOTE1 If the offset value is changed bigger than the tolerance after

execution of tool length measurement, an alarm occurs.2 Please carry out the tool length measurement again after

changing cutter.

24.5ALARM MESSAGESAND RELEASINGMETHOD


416

ALARM SETTING DATA ERROR#900 to #903

Macro program

Input MODAL DATA to VARIABLE

YES

Checksetting value

YES

Checkcommand value

“H”

YES

Checksetting value

YES

Overrun value=SETTING VALUE

Checksetting value

Z axis reference point return

Reading PRESENT X/Y/Z POSITION

Move to X–Y SWITCH POSITIONand SPINDLE ORIENTATION (M19)

#900 to #903 OK?

NO

H value OK?

NO

#905 OK?

Overrun value=0.5mm

ALARM DATA ERROR “H” NOT EXIST

NO

NOALARM SETTING DATA ERROR#906

(#905=0, not set)

#900: less than 100.0#901: no setting#902: no setting#903: no setting

H: no setting (#11)

(#905�0)

1

Subprogram: 09010

#906: wrong setting

24.6FLOWCHART



417

ALARM DATA ERROR “S”

Check command value

“S”

Checkcommand value

“B”

YES

Z axis goes down by rapid

S OK?

NO (�1, 2)

B OK?

NO

ALARM DATA ERROR “B”

S: Except 1 or 2, or no setting

B: less than 30mm

4

1

2 3

S=1 S=2

YES

to AUTOMATIC TOOLLENGTH MEASUREMENT

to TOOL BREAKAGE DETECTING

(#19)

2

Temporary tool length=250mm

Check command value “D” D ok?

with D

B: no setting

X axis shift value D: Tool radius

25mm before switch position

[AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH MEASUREMENT]

(#2)

(#7)

without D


418

Checkcommand value

“M”

Z axis goes up by rapid

Setting offset value


M OK?

with M

Start button ON

5

[contintinuance of AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH MEASUREMENT]4

RESTART

Z axis SKIP FEED (MEASUREMENT)

Reed SKIP POSITION, calculate TOOLLENGTH MEASUREMENT VALUE

Cancel SHIFT VALUE

Check measurement

value

YES

value OK?

NOALARM DATA ERROR B TOOL SHORT

MEASUREMENT VSLUEis equal with movementcommand end point(no switch detecting)

Checkcommand value

“D” D OK?

with DD: Tool radius

without M

without D

OPTIONAL STOP (M00)SPINDLE NO EXECUTE

End of AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH MEASUREMENT

Z axis down distance: 25mm+Overrun value

Switch position+5mm

(#7)



419

TOOL BREAKAGE DETECTINGTOLERANCE=SETTING VALUE

6

[TOOL BREAKAGE DETECTING]2

ALARM TOOL BROKEN

Check setting value

YES

Check measurement

value

NO

Input OFFSET VALUE to VALIABLE

Z axis goes down by rapid

Z axis SKIP FEED (MEASUREMENT)

Read SKIP POSITION

Z axis goes up by rapid

TOOL BREAKAGE DETECTING TOLERANCE=0.5mm


End of TOOL BREKAGE DETECTING

YES

Setting value OK?

NO (#904=0, no setting)

#904 OK?

5mm before switch position

Z axis down distance: 5mm+Overrun value

Switch position+5mm

(#904�0)

DIfference between OFFSET VALUE and MEASUREMENT VALUE exceeds TOLERANCE


420

Return to main program

Reset MODAL DATA

5

M99

6



421

09010 (AUTOMATIC TOOL OFFSET) ;

(S.T X500.0 Y400.0 Z330.0+150+HC) ;

(TOOL OFFSET MACRO PROGRAM VER–3.0) ;

(G110 S* H** B*** D*** M0) ;

(CHANGE PARAMETER NO.6050 DATA 110) ;

;

(START) ;

#30 =#4001 ;

#31 =#4003 ;

IF[#900GE100.0] GOTO10 ;

#3000 =110 (SETTING DATA ERROR #900) ;

N10 ;

IF[#901NE#0] GOTO20 ;

#3000= 110 (SETTING DATA ERROR #901) ;

N20 ;

IF[#902NE#0] GOTO30 ;


N30 ;

IF[#903NE#0] GOTO40 ;


N40 ;

IF[#11NE#0] GOTO50 ;

#3000 =110 (DATA ERROR “H” NOT EXIST) ;

N50 ;

;

IF[#905EQ0] GOTO60 ;

IF[#905EQ#0] GOTO60 ;

#24 =#905 ;

GOTO70 ;

N60 ;

#24 =5.0 ;

N70 ;

;

IF[#906EQ480.0] GOTO80 ;

IF[#906EQ580.0] GOTO80 ;

IF[#906EQ680.0] GOTO80 ;

IF[#906EQ780.0] GOTO80 ;


N80;

;

24.7MACRO PROGRAM


422

G91 G28 G00 Z0 ;

#22 =#5043 ;

#20 =#5021 ;

#21 =#5022 ;

G00 X[#901–#20] Y[#902–#21] M19 ;

IF[#19EQ1] GOTO1000 ;

IF[#19EQ2] GOTO2000 ;

#3000 =110 (DATA ERROR “S”) ;

;

N1000 ;

(AUTOMATIC TOOL MEASURING) ;

IF[#2EQ#0] GOTO100 ;

IF[#2GT30] GOTO110 ;

#3000 =110 (DATA ERROR “B”) ;

N100 ;

#2 =250.0 ;

N110 ;

IF[#7EQ#0] GOTO120 ;

G00 X#7 ;

N120 ;

;

G00 Z–[#906–#900–#2–25.0] (*) ;

IF[#13EQ#0] GOTO130 ;

S50 M03 ;

G04 X0.1 ;

M05 ;

M00 ;

N130 ;

G31 Z–[25.0+#24] F100 (*) ;

#25 =#5063 ;

#26 =#903–[ABS[#22–#25]+#900] ;

IF[[#906–#900–#2+#24]NE[ABS[#22–#25]]] GOTO160 ;

#3000 =110 (DATA ERROR B TOOL SHORT) ;

N160 ;

Z5.0 ;

G90 G10 L1 P#11 R#26 ;

G91 G28 Z0 ;

IF[#7EQ#0] GOTO3000 ;

G00 X–#7 ;

GOTO3000 ;

;



423

N2000 ;

(AUTOMATIC TOOL BROKEN) ;

#29 =#[2000+#11] ;

#3 =#29+#900–#903 ;

G00 Z–[ABS[#3]–5.0] (*) ;

G31 Z–[5.0+#24] F200 (*) ;

#25 =#5063 ;

Z5.0 ;

IF[#904EQ0] GOTO200 ;

IF[#904EQ#0] GOTO200 ;

#15 =#904 ;

GOTO210 ;

N200 ;

#15 =0.5 ;

N210 ;

IF[ABS[ABS[#3]–ABS[#25–#22]]LT#15] GOTO 220 ;

G91 G28 Z0 ;

#3000 =120 (TOOL BROKEN) ;

N220 ;

G91 G28 Z0 ;

;

N3000;

G#30 G#31 M05 ;

M99 ;

25. SMALL–HOLE PECK DRILLING CYCLE (OPTION) B–85014EN/01DETAILED OPERATIONS

424

25 SMALL–HOLE PECK DRILLING CYCLE (OPTION)

B–85014EN/0125. SMALL–HOLE PECK

DRILLING CYCLE (OPTION)DETAILED OPERATIONS

425

This peck drilling cycle uses an arbor with an overload torque detectionfeature. Upon reception of an overload torque detection signal (using theskip signal), this cycle returns the tool, changes the spindle speed andcutting feedrate, then resumes drilling.

The drilling cycle is illustrated below:

NOTEThis function cannot be used when look–ahead control isenabled. Disable look–ahead control (G08P0) beforeattempting to start a small–hole peck drilling cycle. Enablelook–ahead control (G08P1) after the cycle is completed.

∆

∆: The clearance when the tool is first returned to the R point. In the second and subsequent drilling operations, this is the clearance between the tool and bottom of the hole.

Q: Depth of cut for one drilling operation

indicates the path of rapid movement.indicates the path of movement at the rapid traverse rate (�) (advancing and return speeds) in the cycle set by a parameter.indicates the path of movement at a programmed cutting feedrate.

(Operations that make up the cycle)

* Positioning along the X- and Y-axes

* Positioning to the R point along the Z-axis

* Z-axis: Cutting(first operation, depth of cut Q, incremental)

Q

Overload torque

R point

Z point

Overload torque

Dwell

Return (hole bottom � small clearance ∆, incremental)

Return ( � to the R point, absolute)

Advancing(R point � to a point (hole bottom + ∆ clearance), absolute)

Cutting(second and subsequent operations, depth of cut Q + ∆, incremental)

Repeateduntil the Zpoint isreached

* Dwell

* Return to R point (or the initial point) return along the Z-axis = end of the cycle

25.1OUTLINE OF THEFUNCTION


426

NOTE1 Return and advance operations are subject to

acceleration/deceleration control by accelerating ordecelerating the cutting feed. When return to the R pointtakes place, a position check is performed.

2 When a skip signal is received, even midway through anadvancing operation, return operation starts.



427

Sample program:

N01 M03 S___ ;

N02 M�� ;

N03 G83 X_ Y_ R_ Z_ R_ Q_ F_ I_ K_ P_ ;

N04 X_ Y_ ;

:

:

N10 G80 ;

Description of commands in each block

N01:Specifies forward spindle rotation and spindle speed.

N02:M code specifying G83 as a small-hole peck drilling cycle. This M code is set in parameter No. 5163. (Standard setting: M28)

N03:Specifies the small-hole peck drilling cycle. Drilling data (except data with addresses K and P) is stored, anddrilling is performed.

Specification Address

Hole position XY

Specifies the hole position in the incremental or absolute mode. The pathand feedrate are the same as for positioning by G00.

Drilling data Z Specifies the distance between the R point and bottom of the hole in theincremental mode, or specifies the bottom of the hole in the absolute mode.

Q Depth of cut per operation

R Specifies the distance from the initial level to the R point in the incrementalmode, or specifies the position of the R point in the absolute mode.

F Cutting feedrate

I Feedrate for advancing and return operations (in the same format as F)

(If the specification is omitted, the value set in the parameter is assumed asthe default.)

K Iteration count (If the specification is omitted, K1 is assumed as the default.)

P Dwell time at the bottom of the hole (If the specification is omitted, P0 is as-sumed as the default.)

NOTEG83 is a continuous-state G code. This means that G83remains unchanged unless another canned cycle is specifiedor a G code that cancels the current canned cycle is specified.When the same drilling operation is performed successively,drilling data need only be specified in the first drilling block andneed not be specified separately for each block.

N04:Changes the hole position, and performs the small-hole peck drillingcycle using the same drilling data as N03.

N10:Cancels the small-hole peck drilling cycle. The M code specified inN02 is also canceled.

25.2USAGE


428

In the small-hole peck drilling cycle mode, the drilling cycle can beperformed by specifying G83. The mode is entered by specifying the Mcode set in parameter No. 5163. The mode is canceled by the resetoperation or by specifying G80.

The M code does not wait for FIN. So when specifying this M code withanother M code in the same block, exercise special care.

M�� M03; � Waits for FIN.

M03 M��; � Does not wait for FIN.

25.3SETTING THESMALL–HOLE PECKDRILLING CYCLEMODE

Examples



429

1) This peck drilling cycle is executed by specifying G83 in thesmall-hole peck drilling cycle mode. In this cycle, after a workpieceis positioned along axes other than the axis along which the toolmoves, the small-hole peck drilling cycle execution signal (F066,PECK2) is output during the period from when the tool is positionedto the R point to when the tool returns to the R point or initial level.

2) The skip signal (X0004.7) is used as the overload torque detectionsignal. Supply the tooling overload signal to XT5–12. The skip signalis valid (for activating a return) only when the tool is located betweenthe R and Z points and advancing or cutting operation is beingperformed.

3) During one G83 cycle, the cutting conditions are changed for eachpecking operation (advancing � cutting � return). The cuttingconditions, however, can be kept unchanged by settings bits 1 and 2of parameter No. 5160.

� Changing the cutting feedrate

The cutting feedrate programmed with an F word is changed foreach of the second and subsequent cutting operations. Set twochange rates in parameter Nos. 5166 and 5167: One change rateis used if the skip signal is received in the previous cuttingoperation, and the other is used if no skip signal is received.

Cutting feedrate = F � α

(First operation ) α = 1.0

(Second and subsequent operations) = α � β � 100where β is the change rate for one operation.

When skip is present during the previous cutting operation:

β = b1% (parameter No. 5166)

When skip is not present during the previous cutting operation:

β = b2% (parameter No. 5167)

If change rate a for the cutting feedrate is less than the rate set inparameter No. 5168, the cutting feedrate is not changed. Thecutting feedrate can be increased to up to the maximum cuttingfeedrate.

25.4DETAILEDSPECIFICATIONS


430

� Changing the spindle speed

The spindle speed programmed with an S word is changed for eachof the second and subsequent advance operations. Set two changerates in parameter Nos. 5164 and 5165: One change rate is to beused if the skip signal is received in the previous cutting operation,and the other is used if no skip signal is received.

Spindle speed = S � γ

(First operation ) γ = 1.0

(Second and subsequent operations) γ = γ � δ � 100where δ is the change rate for one operation.

When skip is present during the previous cutting operation:

δ = d1% (parameter No. 5164)

When skip is not present during the previous cutting operation:

δ = d2% (parameter No. 5165)

If the cutting feedrate is clamped to the lower limit, the spindlespeed is not changed. The spindle speed can be changed to up toa value equivalent to the maximum value of the S analog data.

4) Advance and return operations are not treated as positioning in rapidtraverse, but executed as interpolation operations with cutting feed.Exponential acceleration/deceleration is applied. Note that, however,the tool life management function does not decrement the time usedfor advance and return operations from tool life.

When the advance and return feedrate is specified an I word, the sameformat as for the F word is used as follows:

G83 I1000; � 1000 mm/min

G83 I1000.; � 1000 mm/min

An I word specified in the G83 continuous state is in effect until G80or reset is specified.

5) Others

* The following are enabled in the canned cycle mode:

� Specifying a hole position on the X-, Y-, and additional axes

� Arithmetic and branch operations using custom macros

� Calling subprograms (such as hole positioning)

� Switching between absolute and incremental modes

� Rotating the coordinate system

� Scaling command (not valid for depth of cut Q or smallclearance d1)

* Dry run is enabled in every operation state during the canned cycle.

* Feed hold is enabled in every operation state during the cannedcycle.

* By setting the single block mode to ON, the machine stops afterevery return operation.

* Feedrate override is enabled for cutting, return, and advanceoperations during the cycle.



431

PRM No. 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Description

5160 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 Bit 2: Specifies whether to change the feedrate and spindle speed whenthe overload torque signal is received.

0: Not changed, 1: Changed

Bit 1: Specifies whether to change the feedrate and spindle speed whenthe depth of cut per operation is reached before reception of theoverload torque signal.

0: Not changed, 1: Changed

5163 2 8 M code specifying the small-hole peck drilling cycle mode (for M28)

5164 9 0 Percentage (%) of change made to the spindle speed when return operationis performed after reception of the overload torque signal

S2 = S1 � d1 � 100

S1: Spindle speed before change

S2: Spindle speed after change

d1: Percentage to be set

5165 1 0 0 Percentage (%) of change made to the spindle speed when return operationis performed without the overload torque signal

S2 = S1 � d2 � 100

d2: Percentage to be set

5166 9 0 Percentage of change made to the cutting feedrate when return operation isperformed after reception of the overload torque signal

F2 = F1 � b1 � 100

F1: Cutting feedrate before change

F2: Cutting feedrate after change

b1: Percentage to be set

5167 1 0 0 Percentage of change made to the cutting feedrate when return operation isperformed without the overload torque signal

F2 = F1 � b2 � 100

b2: Percentage to be set

5168 1 0 Percentage of the lower limit of the allowable cutting feedrate resulting fromrepeated changes to the specified cutting feedrate

FL = F � BL � 100

F: Specified cutting feedrate

FL: Lower limit of the allowable cutting feedrate

BL: Percentage to be set

5170 1 0 0 Number of a common variable of a custom macro to which the total numberof return operations during cutting is output. Note that the total number isnot output to common variables #500 to #599.

0 or 100 to 149 (0: No output)

25.5RELATEDPARAMETERS(STANDARDSETTINGS)


432

PRM No. Description7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

5171 1 0 1 Number of a custom macro common variable to which the total number ofreturn operations initiated by the overload torque signal during cutting is out-put. The total number is not output to common variables #500 to #599.

0 or 100 to 149 (0: No output)

5172 1 0 0 0 Feedrate at which the tool returns to the R point without an I word specified.(mm/min).

5173 1 0 0 0 Feedrate at which the tool advances to the bottom of the hole machinedimmediately before without an I word specified. (mm/min)

5174 5 0 0 Clearance in the first return to the R point or clearance at the bottom of thehole in the second and subsequent cutting operations during the cycle (leastinput increment)

B–85014EN/01 26. FACTOLINK FUNCTIONSDETAILED OPERATIONS

433

26 FACTOLINK FUNCTIONS

26. FACTOLINK FUNCTIONS B–85014EN/01DETAILED OPERATIONS

434

This chapter explains various types of settings and basic operationsrequired for connecting the ROBODRILL to a personal computer usingFACTOLINK functions.

For details of FACTOLINK functions, refer to “FANUC FACTOLINKScript Function Operator’s Manual.”

26.1OVERVIEW


435

Before using FACTOLINK functions, you must set several items.

(a) When the ROBOMACHINE Ethernet (standard) board is mounted(1) Display Quick Screen – 32: Maintenance/Setting Screen – 6.

Communication Setting.

(2) Press the [ETHERNET] soft key. The ETHERNETPARAMETER screen of the CNC screen is displayed. Press the[OPERATION] soft key to display the following screen:

Press the [EMBEDD] soft key.Press the [BOARD] soft key when a data server board (option) orEthernet board (option) is installed.

26.2SETTINGS

26.2.1Setting Up Ethernet


436

[Built–in Ethernet setting]


437

[Data server/Ethernet board setting]

Page Setting item Details

1/6 IP ADDRESS Set the IP address of the ROBODRILL.

SUBNET MASK Set the mask address of the IP address of the network.

ROUTER ADDRESS Set a router IP address when a router exists on the network.

2/6 IP ADDRESS Set the IP address of the FACTOLINK server (personal computer).

PORT NUMBER Specify a port number to be used with the FACTOLINK function.Set 9000 usually.

After setting all data, turn off the power then turn on the power again ifAlarm 000 “TURN OFF POWER” is issued.


438

(1) Display QUICK screen, 32: MAINTENANCE/SETTING, then 6:COMMUNICATION.

(2) Press soft key [FACTOLINK]. The cursor is displayed and you canset each item.

� INTERFACESelect an Ethernet connection port/FACTOLINK server (personalcomputer).

Setting Ethernet port FACTOLINK server (personal computer)

ETHERNET–0 Built–in Personal computer specified with the IP address on page 2/6 of the built–inEthernet parameter screen

ETHERNET–2 Option board Personal computer specified with IP address 1 on page 2/6 of the Ethernetparameter screen



� MACHINE NAMEName the machine. Do not assign the name used for another machine.Alphanumeric characters and symbols (+, –, =, #, &, @, [, ], (, and )) can be used.Position the cursor to the MACHINE NAME field and press the[ALPHABET] key on the operator’s panel to enter alphanumericcharacters and symbols.

� AUTOMATIC CONNECTIONIf it is set to ON, a FACTOLINK connection is automatically madewhen the power to the machine is turned on.

� LOGGING INTERVALSet an interval at which logging data is sent to the host computer. Ifa shorter logging interval is set, the load on the network and hostcomputer can increase, or the response of the FACTOLINK screencan degrade. As a guideline, set an interval of 30 seconds or more.

26.2.2Setting Up FACTOLINK


439

(3) After setting is complete, press soft key [END].

NOTEWhen soft key [END] is pressed after setting is complete,the following message appears:TURN OFF POWERAfter the power is turned off, then on again, the settings takeeffect.If the power is turned off without pressing the [END] key, thesettings are not changed.

Set the following NC parameters:

For RS–232C connection:

No. Setting Function

801#0 (1) Stop bits (0: 1 bit 1: 2 bits)Specify the same value as for the converter (Comm Assist).

802 1 Communication channel (1: Channel 1)

803 (12) Baud rate (10: 4,800 bps 11: 9,600 bps 12: 19,200bps)Specify the same value as for the converter (CommAssist).

The setting enclosed by parentheses is a recommended value.

26.2.3Setting NC Parameters


440

Set data related to the logging data function in script file Main.Scr asfollows. (You need not set the data when you do not want to use thelogging data function.)

(1) Add the following command:

[Logging]Default = Y,1,200,0

(2) Use the default values for settings in [Logging Detail] other thanRECORDCOUNT.The values are listed below:

SEPARATOR (separator) � , (comma)USERPATTERN (separator between logging data and user data) � (Not used)EXPHEAD (header file extension) � .HEDEXPRING (ring file extension) � .RNGEXPCURRENT (newest data file extension) � .DAT

26.3LOGGING DATAFUNCTION


441

(1) Display ALARM screen.

(2) Press the rightmost soft key.

(3) Press soft key [FALINK].

26.4SWITCHING TOFACTOLINK SCREEN


442

(1) Controlling FACTOLINK screen using the program protection keyWhen the program protection key is placed in the protected state, youcan disable the function of displaying FACTOLINK screen.Set the following parameter:PMC parameter keep relay K9#0 = 1

(2) COUNTER screenOn 24: COUNTER screen of QUICK screen, you can set ORDER,LOT No., and ID CODE.

You can use the logging data function to collect information for theorder, lot number, part number, scheduled production, productioncount, total count, and ID code using the host computer.Set the following parameter:PMC parameter keep relay K9#4 = 1

26.5SELECT FUNCTION


443

A) 00006, Data serial number

A) 1998/11/11 10:24:53, Current time

A) 1000001111000010, Operation status

A) 00000200, Required number of parts

A) 00000100, Number of machined parts

A) 00000001, Program number

A) 000100,999999,999999,999999,999999, Alarm

B) D007 Operator message number

C) 01 Program check mode

C) 01 ROBODRILL operation status

C) 64 Cutting feedrate override

C) 64 Spindle override

D) FFE0F505 Operating time

00 (Reserved)

0000 (Reserved)

0000 (Reserved)

C) 0E Tool number

E) 4D30303030372020202020202020202020 Order

B) E703 Lot number

E) 574F524B30312020202020202020202020 Part number

D) FFE0F505 Scheduled production

D) FFE0F505 Production count

D) FFE0F505 Total production count

E) 54313449412D30372020 ID code

0000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 (Not used)

� For details of data A), refer to “FANUC FACTOLINK ScriptFunction Operator’s Manual.”

� Data B) to E) is hexadecimal.� Convert data B) as follows:

(1) Changes the places of E8 and 03. (E803 � 03E8)

(2) Convert the data to a hexadecimal number as required (03E8 � 1000)

� Convert data D) as follows:

(1) Rearrange the data. (FFE0F505 � 05F5E0FF)

(2) Convert the data to a hexadecimal number as required(05F5E0FF � 99999999)

� Character string E) is represented in ASCII code (hexadecimal).

26.6LOGGING DATAFORMAT

27. HIGH–SPEED SERIAL BUS (HSSB) INTERFACE FUNCTION (OPTION) B–85014EN/01DETAILED OPERATIONS

444

27HIGH–SPEED SERIAL BUS (HSSB) INTERFACEFUNCTION (OPTION)

B–85014EN/01

27. HIGH–SPEED SERIAL BUS (HSSB) INTERFACE

FUNCTION (OPTION)DETAILED OPERATIONS

445

This chapter gives notes on using the CNC screen display function andDNC operation function in a system in which the ROBODRILL isconnected to a personal computer using the high–speed serial bus (HSSB)interface.

To start or end the CNC screen display function, display CNC screen.When QUICK screen is displayed, the CNC screen display functioncannot be started or ended.

(To perform scheduled operation)

� Set bit 6 of PMC parameter K6 to 1 (the DMMC signal is turned onduring remote operation).

� Put the operation mode in the remote operation mode.To switch to the remote operation mode, set REMOTE MODE to ONon SEQ SELECTION of QUICK screen and select AUTO on theoperator’s panel.(When the operator’s panel has a full keyboard, select REMOTE onthe operator’s panel.)

(To call a subprogram)� Set NC parameter No. 20 to 15 (input/output device selection) and

bit 1 of NC parameter No. 8706 to 1 (use of new DNC functions).

27.1OVERVIEW

27.2STARTING ANDENDING THE CNCSCREEN DISPLAYFUNCTION

27.3DNC OPERATIONUSING THE DNCOPERATIONMANAGEMENTPACKAGE

28. CENTER–THROUGH COOLANT (OPTION) B–85014EN/01DETAILED OPERATIONS

446

28 CENTER–THROUGH COOLANT (OPTION)

B–85014EN/0128. CENTER–THROUGH COOLANT


447

Rotational speed 80 to 8000min–1/150 to 15,000min–1

Spindle motor AC SPINDLE MOTOR3.7kw (continuous rating)/5.5kw(10–minute rating)

Filtering precision of center–throughcoolant

25µm/10µm

Center–through coolant connectionpipe (receptacle for connection at thespindle side)

C–8 (JIS B 8363 G3/8 internal thread30 male sheet)

Dimensions (X–axis direction�Y–axis direction�Z–axis direction)

1565�895�795mm (�–T14iC/iCL)1300�1080�795mm (�–T14iCS)

Weight of coolant unit 140kg

Capacity of coolant tank 240L (T14/21iCS:160L)

Configuration Coolant tank

Chip tray

External oiling coolant (AC 0.40kW)

Center–through pump unit

Control box (for center–through)

Option Coolant for cleaning inside of the ma-chine (AC 0.25kW)With a shower gun

28.1SPECIFICATIONS

28.1.1Spindle

28.1.2Coolant Unit


448

Coolant pump motor AC 0.75kW (directly connected)

Maximum delivery pressure 1.72 MPa (17.5kgf/cm2)

Rated delivery pressure 1.47 MPa (15kgf/cm2)

Maximum delivery 15L/min (50Hz)/18L/min (60Hz)

Final filtering precision 25µm/10µm

Filtering system #100 mesh tank partition plate (withpull–up handle)

#150 mesh suction filter (mounted onthe pump)

25–µ m line filter (with clogging detec-tion function based on the pressuredifferential)

Coolant valve 3–port solenoid valve mounted typePilot air: 0.24 to 0.49Mpa (2.5 to 5kgf/cm2)

28.1.3Center–through PumpUnit



449

** Use the center–through coolant under the following conditions only.

(1) The ROBODRILL’s components use polycarbonate, NBR, HNBR,Baiton (fluororubber), nylon, and acrylic resin. Use a coolant whichwill not harm these materials. Note that residual chlorine in the waterused to dilute the coolant will also cause the same problem.

(2) The viscosity of an available water–insoluble coolant must be 16 cStor less.

(3) Use a water–soluble coolant diluted with water at a high rate ofdilution (normally 5 to 15 times). It is advisable to clean the coolanttank and replace the coolant at least once every six months to preventdeterioration due to degraded coolant.

(1) The coolant unit cannot be used for center–through machining usingdry air. If the unit is used for this type of machining, the rotary unionmay be damaged.

(2) When the customer prepares the coolant unit, the following rulesmust be observed:1. Prepare the following pipe fittings:

Coolant unit side A2–9 (JIS B 8363 G3/8 internalthread 30 male sheet)

Spindle side (already mountedon the machine)

C–8 (JIS B 8363 G3/8 internalthread 30 male sheet)

2. Also prepare a check valve unit and pipes for the machineaccording to the capacity of the unit.

3. As the pump capacity, set the maximum pressure to up to 2.5 MPaand the maximum flow rate to up to 20 l/min.

4. See Sections 28.3, “Appearance and Configuration of theCoolant Unit,” 28.9, “Center–through Coolant Control (interfacespecifications),” and 28.10, “ELECTRICAL CIRCUITDIAGRAM OF CENTER–THROUGH COOLANTCONTROL.” Prepare the customer’s unit to conform to thesesections as closely as possible.

5. Create an operator’s manual, maintenance manual, maintenancedrawings, and other documents for the coolant unit and attachthem to the drilling machine.

(Note that FANUC cannot provide maintenance for coolant unit providedby the customer.)

28.2NOTES

28.2.1Selecting a Coolant

28.2.2Coolant Unit


450

Fig.28.3.1 (a) Three faces of coolant (�–T14(21)iCe/iCLe)

28.3APPEARANCE ANDCONFIGURATION OFTHE COOLANT UNIT

28.3.1Appearance of theCoolant Unit



451

Fig.28.3.1 (b) Three faces of coolant (�–T14/21iCSe)


452

RELIEF VALVE

CONTROL UNIT

DEFFERENTIAL SW.

LAMP

#150 SUCTION FILTER

PILOT AIR

HIGH–PRESSUREHOSE

PRESSUREVALVE

HI–PRE PUMP

DIRT INDICATAR

COOLANT VALVE

FILTER HOUSINGFINE FILTER

CONNECTIONPORT

PRESSURE SW. (HI).

PRESSURE SW. (LOW).

Fig.28.3.1 (c) Detail of center–through pump unit



453

(1) Coolant tank1. The coolant tank has casters, a pull–up hook, and level gage (for

visual check).2. This tank can contain up to 240 l of coolant. The upper limit of

the level gage corresponds to 215 l of coolant. The lower limit ofthe level gage corresponds to 165 l (minimum required amount).

(2) Control box1. The control box contains only a circuit breaker, contacts for

starting the pump and coolant valve, and the relay terminal foreach detection switch.

2. The lamp on the front panel indicates whether power is beingsupplied to the control box. Accordingly, when the circuit breakerin the control box is closed, the lamp on the front panel lights.

(3) Center–through pump

#150 suction filter

Air release plug

Inlet pipe

Clogging check gage

Fig.28.3.2 (a) Center–through Pump

1. The center–through pump is a Tocoloid pump for coolant whichis compatible with water–soluble coolants.

2. The pump is directly connected to the drive motor via a coupling.3. The pump contains a relief valve and a #150 mesh (equivalent to

100µm) suction filter (with a clogging check gage and air releaseplug).

4. The temperature is monitored.5. An open mesh strainer (#60 mesh = equivalent to 250 �m) is also

mounted at the end of the inlet pipe. This strainer requires nomaintenance.

28.3.2Names and Functionsof the Parts


454

(4) #100 mesh partition plate (filtering precision of 150 �m orequivalent)

#100 mesh partition

Fig.28.3.2 (b) #100 mesh partition

1. The #100 mesh partition plate separates the chip tray (dirty tankside) from the center–through pump unit (clean tank side).

2. This plate is not fixed and can be pulled out of the tank simplyby lifting the handle.

3. Periodically check the mesh and remove any chips that haveadhered to the net with a brush.

(5) Pressure switch (maximum pressure detection) [SP100]1. The set pressure is 2.5 MPa.2. This switch detects an abnormally high pump pressure caused by

damage to the pump relief valve or some other abnormality.

(6) Pressure switch (minimum pressure detection) [SP102]1. The set pressure is 0.7 MPa.2. This switch detects a low coolant discharge pressure caused by

coolant leakage that may be caused by a loose coupling or anoperation error.

(7) Differential pressure switch (line filter clogging detection) [SP101]1. This switch detects the pressure difference between the line filter

inlet and discharge sides to determine whether the filter hasreached the end of its service life.

2. The setting pressure is �0.18 MPa.3. This switch has a color ring for visual confirmation. Periodically

check the color ring to determine whether the filter has to bereplaced.

(8) Pressure gage (for checking the discharge pressure)1. The normal range of coolant discharge pressure is between 1.0 to

2.0 MPa.

(9) Coolant valve [YV140]1. The coolant valve is a 3–port valve which contains a solenoid

valve (preumatic). This valve is used to control the direction ofthe coolant flow.

2. While power is not supplied, the coolant always returns to thetank.

(10)Air tube (pilot air)



455

1. The air tube supplies air to the coolant valve.(11)Filter housing

1. An air release plug is mounted on the housing head and a drainplug for draining the coolant is mounted on the bottom of the shell(housing body).

2. The housing head and shell are connected with a long bolt and nutso that the filter can be replaced easily. The housing is sealed withan O ring. Filter replacement requires only one adjustablewrench.

(12)Line filter1. Always use a genuine FANUC filter.2. The nominal filtering precision of the standard filter is 25µm.

(The filter is factory–mounted.)3. A filter with a nominal filtering precision of 10µm is also

available.4. The user should order a line filter. For the manufacturer’s contact

details, see Section 28.7.1, “Line filter.”(13)High–pressure hose

1. This hose is capable of withstanding high pressures and iscompatible with both water–soluble and water–insolublecoolant.

2. Instead of PT screws, high–pressure pipe fittings are used at bothends. No seal tape is used. Note this point when replacing orremoving a hose for repair or machine relocation.

(14)Swivel joint

Swivel joint

High–pressure hose

Adapter

Fig.28.3.2 (c) Swivel Joint

1. A rotary joint supports the swivel joint so that the coolant hoseis not twisted by movement along the Z–axis.


456

(15)Check valve assembly

Check valveassembly

Fig.28.3.2 (d) Check valve assembly

1. This unit switches between the spindle taper air blow (air) andcenter–through coolant (liquid). Two pairs of check valves areopposed and used in combination.

Check valve assembly

Swivel joint

Drain tube

Fig.28.3.2 (e) Center–through Piping (Machine Side)



457

(1) Completely drain the coolant, then move the coolant tank carefully,so as not to damage its casters.

(2) Completely drain the coolant, then lift the coolant tank up so that thetank is not distorted.

(3) Before starting disassembly or connection for installation, alwayscheck that the circuit breakers of the main drilling unit and coolantunit control box are off and that power is not supplied. Because powerto the center–through coolant pump is supplied from the secondaryPower Panel unit in the machine body, there is a danger of the pumpstarting when the power to the machine is turned on.

(1) As shown in the floor plan, leave at least 280 mm clearance betweenthe coolant unit and back of the machine (such as a wall). If thisclearance is not provided, the coolant tank cannot be replaced becauseit fouls the unit on the coolant tank.

(1) Connect the high–pressure hose to the inlet on the center–coolantunit. No seal tape is used. (Check that there is no foreign matteraround the thread and taper section.)

Swivel joint

High–pressure hose

Adapter

Fig.28.4.3 Swivel Joint

28.4INSTALLATION

28.4.1Notes on Installation

28.4.2Installation Area

28.4.3Piping


458

(2) Connect the other end of the hose to the adapter on the swivel joint.

(3) Connect the air pipe of the coolant valve for the center–throughcoolant. Connect a 6–mm tube to the secondary cheese of the air blowregulator.

(1) Connect each signal line. The connection terminals are provided onterminal board XT5 of the main drilling unit.

(2) Connect the power line of the center through coolant pump. Theconnection terminal is terminal block XT1 on the mainROBODRILL unit.

Signal line connection position : XT4

Power line connection point: XT1

Fig.28.4.4 (a) Wiring

Connect the air tube of the coolant valve of the center–throughcoolant to the air blow valve joint.

Fig.28.4.4 (b) Pilot Air Piping

28.4.4Wiring



459

(1) Clamp a center–through tool on the spindle.

(2) Perform center–through air purge (using the M23 command) in MDImode and check that air issues from the tool tip. Open the side doorof the splash guard and check that air is issued.

(3) A large amount of air should not be discharged from the transparentnylon tube protruding from the cover on the head of the spindle. (Ifa large amount of air is discharged from the tube, coolant leakage mayoccur.)

(4) To stop the center–through air purge (M23), specify M9, which is alsoused to stop the coolant.

28.4.5Checking OperationAfter Installation


460

Use the following M codes:

M code Function Remarks

M20 Stops the center–through coolantpump.

M21 Starts the center–through coolantpump.

M22 Turns the center–through coolant on(outputs the coolant).

M23 Turns air purge on.

M09M24

Turns the center–through coolant off(stops outputting the coolant).Turns air purge off.

Use either of M24 or M09.Select M24 or M09 usinga parameter.

Specify the above M codes in MDI mode.

The coolant button on the ROBODRILL operator’s panel cannot be used.(These buttons are dedicated to external coolant.)

00060

G80G40G49

G00G91G28Z0.

M6T6

M21

M22

M3S1000

G90G55Z–150.

G01Z–200.F500

G00Z–100.

M09

M02

� Starts the center–through coolant pump.

� Turns the center–through coolant on (provides coolant to the tool).

� Turns the center–through coolant off (stops providing coolant to the tool).

28.5OPERATION

28.5.1Command M Codes

28.5.2Manual Operation

28.5.3Commands in aProgram



461

(1) Inspection before operation1. If the coolant level is low, top it up.2. Check whether any pipes or cables are damaged.3. Draw out the #100 mesh partition plate from the coolant tank and

check whether the net is clogged. If the net is clogged with chips,clean it with a brush.

1. While the center–through coolant unit is operating, the #150suction filter in the pump cannot be cleaned or replaced. Checkthe clogging check gage to determine whether the filter is cloggedduring pump operation. (Note that while the pump is stopped, thegage is in the green zone (unless damaged) because no coolantflows. Thus, clogging cannot be checked.) It may be difficult tocheck for clogging if the pump is started and stopped with a shortcycle time during actual machining. In such a case, keep thecenter–through coolant running continuously to check forclogging of the suction filter.

2. The following photo **** shows the clogging check gage for the#150 suction filter. When this gage indicates 0.05 MPa or more(the needle is to the left of the 12 o’clock position) during coolantpump operation, clean or replace the filter.

Fig.28.6.2 (a) Replacing the filter case

3. For safety, turn the center–through circuit breaker in the control boxoff.

4. Before replacing the suction filter, manually turn the air release plugon this side to release any residual pressure inside the filter.

5. The suction filter is simple to remove. First, turn the width across flatat the top of the aluminum filter case (with the yellow label) using awrench and remove the filter case.

28.6SCHEDULEDMAINTENANCE

28.6.1Daily Inspection

28.6.2Cleaning the #150Suction Filter


462

#150 filter element

Fig.28.6.2 (b) #150 filter element

6. In the filter case you will find the #150 suction filter. (The suctionfilter can easily be removed manually.)

7. When remounting the cleaned filter, be careful not to mount the filterupside down. (The bottom of the filter has an O ring.)

8. Remember to tighten the air release plug.9. Remember to turn the circuit breaker in the control box back on.



463

(1) First, for safety, turn the center–through circuit breaker in the controlbox off.1. Before replacing the line filter, turn the drain plug on the lower

portion of the filter housing using a wrench first to remove theresidual pressure inside the filter.

Drain

Fig.28.6.3 (a) Discharge the coolant of filter housing

2. The line filter is simple to remove. Turn the box nut on the upperportion of the filter housing using a wrench and remove it. Firmlyhold the filter housing to prevent it from falling.

Ioosen the box nut

Fig.28.6.3 (b) Take filter housing to piece (1)

28.6.3Replacing the LineFilter


464

Fig.28.6.3 (c) Take filter housing to piece (2)

3. Take the filter out of the housing and replace it. (No orientationis specified for the filter.)

Fig.28.6.3 (d) Replace the line filter

4. When tightening the screw on the filter housing, be careful notto damage the O ring or another part.

5. Remember to tighten the screw of the drain plug on the lowerportion of the filter housing.

6. Remember to turn the circuit breaker in the control box back on.

(1) The center–through coolant may have the following problemsimmediately after the line filter is replaced. This is caused by the filterhousing and peripheral pipes containing air:1. Noise is produced as air escapes.2. When machining starts using a narrow tool (such as a long drill

3 mm in diameter) without first testing the system, the tool maybe broken due to insufficient coolant pressure or flow rate. Or, thecoolant may leak from the rotary union drain.

(2) To avoid such problems, perform a dry run as follows immediatelyafter replacing the filter:

28.6.4Dry Run AfterReplacement of theLine Filter



465

1. Mount a center–through tool (tool with a through hole as large aspossible, such as a drill at least 6.5 mm in diameter with a throughhole) on the spindle.

2. Execute M23 (spindle air purge) for several minutes to removeforeign matter and coolant from within the pipes and clean themto enable the rotary union to move smoothly.

3. Perform a dry run with the center–through coolant flowing toremove any air from the filter housing and center–through pump.

(1) If the performance of the pump is lowered after prolonged use, adjustthe pressure, referring to the figure below. Be sure to set the pressurewhile checking the pressure gage so that the setting pressure does notexceed 2.0 MPa.1. To increase the pressure, rotate (screw down) the pressure

adjustment bolt CW to contract the spring.2. To decrease the pressure. rotate the pressure adjustment bolt

CCW to elongate the spring.3. Upon completion of pressure adjustment, firmly tighten the

hexagonal nut of the pressure adjustment bolt.

Internal structure (VB type)

O ring

Spring holding plate O ringSpring (Spring

support nut)Hexagon nut

Valve body Pressure adjustingbolt

Valve

Cap (Applying pressure to oilfrom the pump delivery side)

(To the pump inlet side) Packing

Fig.28.6.5 Structure of the Relief Valve

(1) Perform the following work before relocating the machine or beforea long vacation:1. Mount a center–through tool (tool with a through hole as large as

possible) on the spindle and execute M23 (spindle air purge) forseveral minutes to remove the coolant from within the spindleand clean it.

2. Execute M23 to remove the coolant within the through hole,replacing the tool used for machining. Also, clean away anysludge from the surface, as well as the fine–grain chips whichaccumulate in the gap around the collet.

3. Clean away any chips sticking to the machine cover andmechanical unit.

28.6.5Adjusting the ReliefValve

28.6.6Other Maintenance


466

1. One 25–µm line filter is supplied with the main unit as a spare part.Users in Japan must directly contact the following vendor for furthersupplies of this filter. Filters are available in packs of ten.

2. A line filter with a filtering precision of 10µm is also available. Theservice life of this filter is shorter, however. Contact the followingvendor directly. The specifications are listed below.

3. Overseas users should contact their FANUC agent.4. Contact: Tokyo CUNO SALES CO., LTD Tel: 03–3425–3351/Fax.:

03–3425–5633

Filtering precision Product name Manufacturer specification

FANUC order specification Re-marks

10µm CUNO FILTER CARTRIDGE G78–C8–1N A98–0005–0145#G78C8–10 Set of 10

25µm CUNO FILTER CARTRIDGE G78–F8–1N A98–0005–0145#G78F8–10 Set of 10

1. The parts listed in the following table incur friction that degrades theirperformance over the long term. ROBODRILL has a function whichtracks the total operating time and outputs an operator message oncethese parts have reached the end of their service life. When thismessage is output, replace each part. (The actual operating time in thetable indicates the cumulative time for the center–through coolantoperation cycles.)

Part name Specification Required quantity

Life Remarks

Rotary union A97L–0201–0861#320327 1 Actual operating time

10000h

Mounted on the upper portionof the spindle motorFor replacement, contact theFANUC Service Division.

CT pump A97L–0201–0859#CTPUMP 1 Actual operating time

10000h

Center–through coolant pump(single–motor). Mounted on thecoolant tank.For replacement, contact theFANUC Service Representa-tive.The relief pressure has beenadjusted.

28.7MAINTENANCEPARTS

28.7.1Line Filter

28.7.2Other MaintenanceParts



467

2. The specifications of other maintenance units related tocenter–through are listed below.

Part name Specification Required quantity

Setting and adjustment

Remarks

Suction filter A97L–0201–0859#150SCF 1 Not required #150 suction filter of the pump

#100 partition A97L–0201–0859#100PTI 1 Not required #100 mesh partition plate

Coolant valve A97L–0201–0859#CLTVAL 1 Not required YV140

Pressure gate A97L–0201–0859#PRGAUGE 1 Adjusted

High–pressurehose

A97L–0201–0859#HP–HOSE 1 Not required

Check valve A290–6078–V893#STD 1 Not required

Swivel joint A290–6079–V894#STD 1 Not required

SP100 A97L–0201–0859#SP100 1 Adjusted Pressure switch (high)

SP101 A97L–0201–0859#SP101 1 Adjusted Differential pressure switch

SP102 A97L–0201–0859#SP102 1 Adjusted Pressure switch (low)


468

28.8CIRCUIT DIAGRAMOF CENTER–THROUGHCOOLANT ANDCOMPRESSED AIR



469

400W

Fig.28.8.1 Coolant circuit diagram

Detail A (for piping) Coolant unit side adapter G 3/8 Outer thread with 30� Female taper sheet

Spindle side adapter G 3/8 Inner thread with 30� Male taper sheet

28.8.1Coolant CircuitDiagram ofCenter–throughCoolant Unit


470

Additional control for center–through coolant

0.49MPa 0.29MPa

Air seal for the rotating union

Pilot air for coolant valve

Spindle taper hole air blow

Fig.28.8.2 Compressed Air Circuit Diagram

28.8.2Compressed Air CircuitDiagram



471

The following functions are provided:

� Clears the coolant from the oil hole at the tip of the tool.� Air purges the remaining coolant from within tool.

(Air is output from the oil hole at the tip of the tool.)

Use the following M codes.

M code Function Remarks

M20 Stops the center–through coolant pump.

M21 Starts the center–through coolant pump.

M22 Turns the center–through coolant on (outputs the coolant).

M23 Turns the air purge on.

M09M24

Turns the center–through coolant off (stops output of thecoolant).Turns air purge off.

Use either M24 or M09.Select M24 or M09 using a parameter.

Specify each M code listed above in MDI mode.

The coolant buttons on the ROBODRILL operator’s panel cannot beused. (The buttons are dedicated to external coolant.)

00060

G80G40G49

G00G91G28Z0.

M6T6

M21

M22

M3S1000

G90G55Z–150.

G01Z–200.F500

G00Z–100.

M09

M02

� Starts the center–through coolant pump.

� center–through coolant on (outputs the coolant).

� Turns the center–through coolant off (stops output of the coolant).

28.9CENTER–THROUGHCOOLANT CONTROL

28.9.1Overview

28.9.2M codes

28.9.3Manual Operation

28.9.4Commands in aProgram


472

(1) [Center–through coolant pump](a) The center–through coolant pump is started by the M21

command and stopped by the M20 command.When keep relay K3#4=1 is specified, however, the pump is kepton regardless of whether the above M code commands arespecified. In this case, M21 or M20 need not be specified in theprogram.

(b) In the following cases, the pump starts automatically. (Only whenkeep relay K3#5=0 is specified)When the mode is changed to automatic, MDI, or remote modeWhen menu operation is determinedWhen the start button is pressed

(c) In the following case, the pump stops automatically. (Only whenkeep relay K3#5=0 is specified)When one minute elapses after the center–through coolant isturned off

(d) When an alarm related to the center–through coolant (alarmnumber: 1031, 1032, 1033, or 1035) occurs, the pump stops.

(2) [Center–through coolant](a) The center–through coolant is turned on by the M22 command

and turned off by the M09 command.(b) When the M22 command is specified, the center–through coolant

pump may stop. In this case, alarm 1034 “Center–throughcoolant pump not started” is issued.Start the pump, then specify the command.

(c) If the door is opened during automatic operation, thecenter–through coolant is turned off.Upon restart, the center–through coolant is automatically turnedon.

(d) When stop by a feed hold is specified during automatic operation,the center–through coolant does not stop. (The CE makingspecification stops.)

(e) When an alarm related to the center–through coolant (alarmnumber: 1031, 1032, 1033, or 1035) occurs, the center–throughcoolant is turned off.

(f) When the reset key on the ROBODRILL operator’s panel ispressed, the center–through coolant is turned off. (Only whenkeep relay K1#7=1 is specified)

(g) When air purge is specified, the center–through coolant is turnedoff.

(3) [Air purge](a) The air purge is turned on by the M23 command and turned off

by the M09 command.(b) When the air purge is specified, the air is pulse–output. When the

tool moves up in the Z–axis direction during ATC operation, aircontinues to be output regardless of whether the M23 commandis specified.

(c) If the door is opened during automatic operation, air purge isturned off. Upon restart, air purge is automatically turned on.

(d) When stop by a feed hold is specified during automatic operation,air purge does not stop.

(e) The CE making specification stops.(f) When the reset key on the ROBODRILL operator’s panel is

pressed, air purge is turned off. (Only when keep relay K1#7=1is specified)

(g) When center–through coolant, spindle rotation, or rigid tappingis specified, air purge is turned off.

28.9.5Control



473

Number Message Cause

1031 Abnormal center–through coolant pressure (upperlimit)

The viscosity of the coolant is too high.The coolant pump is improperly adjusted.

1032 Abnormal center–through coolant pressure (lowerlimit)

The coolant level is low.The coolant leaks due to a piping error or dam-aged pipe.

1033 Clogging of the center–through coolant filter The line filter has been clogged for more than 100hours.

1034 Center–through coolant pump not started M22 is specified when the center–through coolantis not started.

1035 Overloading of the center–through coolant motor The center–through coolant motor is overloaded.

1036 Lower limit of the coolant The coolant level is low.

2017 Lower limit of the coolant The coolant level is low.

2018 Clogging of the center–through coolant tank filter The line filter is clogged.

2019 End of the service life of the rotary union The operating time of the rotary union has ex-ceeded 9999 hours.

2020 End of the service life of the center–through cool-ant pump

The operating time of the center–through coolantpump has exceeded 9999 hours.

2021 Adjust the center–coolant pressure. The operating time of the center–through coolantpump has exceeded 3000, 6000, or 9000 hours.

2022 SUCTION FILTER LOADING The suction filter is clogged.

28.9.6Alarm OperatorMessages


474

Number Default Function

K3#4 0 0: Controls on and off of the center–through coolant pump.1: The center–through coolant pump is always turned on.

K3#5 0 0: Enables automatic on and off of the center–through coolant pump.1: Disables automatic on and off of the center–through coolant pump.

K3#6 0 0: Disables the detection of the coolant lower limit.1: Enables detection of the lower limit of the coolant.

K4#1 0 0: Disables the detection of a clogged suction filter.1: Enables the detection of a clogged suction filter.

K4#2 0 0: Disables manual button control for center through coolant.1: Enables manual button control for center through coolant.

K4#3 1 0: Displays only operator messages when the coolant is at the lower limit.1: Displays the operator messages and alarm when the level of the coolant is at thelower limit.

K4#4 1 0: Turns the center–through coolant off according to the M09 command.1: Turns the center–through coolant off according to the M24 command.

K5#4 1 0: Disables center–through coolant control.1: Enables center–through coolant control.

T00 60000 Waiting time until the pump stops after the center–through coolant is turned off

T38 300 Pulse output on time for the air purge

T40 300 Pulse output off time for the air purge

T42 10000 Waiting time until the air seal valve is turned off after the center–through coolant isturned off

T44 2000 Monitoring time for abnormal coolant pressure (upper limit)

T46 1000 Monitoring time for abnormal coolant pressure (lower limit)

C16 100 Filter clogging monitoring time

C20 9999 Monitoring time for service life of the rotary union

C24 9999 Monitoring time for service life of the center–through coolant pump

D82 3000 Monitoring interval for operating time of the center–through coolant pump

28.9.7Parameters(PMC Parameters)



475

Signal name Address Connectionterminal

Remarks

Center–through coolant pump control Y3.0 XT4–37 When this signal is on, the pump operates.

Center–through coolant valve control Y3.1 XT4–38 When this signal is on, coolant is output.

Air seal valve control Y3.2 XT4–41 When this signal is on, air is output.

Coolant lower limit detection X5.0 XT4–13 This signal is turned off if the lower limit isdetected.

Abnormal coolant pressure (upper limit)detection

X5.1 XT4–14 This signal is turned off if an abnormalpressure is detected.

Filter clogging detection X5.2 XT4–17 This signal is turned off if the filter isclogged.

Abnormal coolant pressure (lower limit)detection

X5.3 XT4–18 This signal is turned off if an abnormalpressure is detected.

Overheating center–through coolant pump X5.4 XT4–19 This signal is turned on if the center–through coolant pump overheats.

Suction Filter clogging detection X5.5 XT4–20 This signal is turned off if the filter isclogged.

Center–through coolant pump on/off button X11.5 XTC1–20 This signal is accepted when a pulse 100ms or longer is input.

Center–through coolant on/off button X11.6 XTC1–23 This signal is accepted when a pulse 100ms or longer is input.

Air purge on/off button X11.7 XTC1–24 This signal is accepted when a pulse of100 ms or longer is input.Valid only in manual mode

� When center–through coolant control is enabled (K5#4=1), externalinterfaces Y3.0 to Y3.7 and X5.0 to X5.7 are unavailable.(These interfaces are dedicated to the center–through coolant.)When the manual button for the center through coolant is disabled (bit4 of parameter K5 is equal to 1 and bit 2 of parameter K4 is equal to1), X11.5 to X11.7 cannot be used.

28.9.8DI/DO

28.9.9Restriction


476

CTC PUMP=Center though coolant pump

28.10ELECTRIC CONTROLCIRCUIT DIAGRAMOF CENTERTHROUGH COOLANT

28.10.1Power Supply



477

C.T.C CONTROL UNIT=Center though coolant control unit

28.10.2Input/Output –Output


478

28.10.3Input/Output–Input

B–85014EN/01

29. AI HIGH–PRECISION CONTOUR CONTROL FUNCTION/MODELERCONTROL II FUNCTION (OPTION)DETAILED OPERATIONS

479

29AI HIGH–PRECISION CONTOUR CONTROL FUNCTION/MODELER CONTROL II FUNCTION (OPTION)

For these functions, refer to the relevant CNC operator’s manuals.

Modeler control II function = AI nano contour control function

When using the AI high–precision contour control function/modelercontrol II function, note the following:

1) When specifying a tool change, be sure to turn off the AIhigh–precision contour control function/modeler control II function.To turn off the AI high–precision contour control function: G05 P0To turn off the modeler control II function: G05.1 Q0

30. HIGH–SPEED SKIP FUNCTION (OPTION) B–85014EN/01DETAILED OPERATIONS

480

30 HIGH–SPEED SKIP FUNCTION (OPTION)

B–85014EN/01

30. HIGH–SPEED SKIP FUNCTION (OPTION)DETAILED OPERATIONS

481

A skip function that uses a high–speed skip signal (to be connecteddirectly to the CNC not via the PMC) instead of the ordinary skip signal(X4.7) is available. When the high–speed skip signal is used, up to 8signals can be input. In ordinary skip signal input, the detection delay andvariation are from 0 to 2 msec (on the CNC side only). In high–speed skipsignal input, however, the detection delay and variation do not exceed 0.1msec to allow high–precision measurement.

30.1OVERVIEW


482

With the skip function, the current position in the NC is stored using theskip signal. However, the current position in the NC includes a servosystem delay, so that the current position is shifted by a servo system delayfrom the position where the skip signal is actually input. This shiftamount can be found from the positional deviation held by the servosystem and the accumulated pulses due to acceleration/deceleration forfeed in the NC. When this shift amount is considered, the need to includea servo system delay in a measurement error is eliminated.

This shift amount can be compensated for by one of two types of methodswith bit 0 of NC parameter No. 6201 or bit 1 of NC parameter No. 6201.

1) Type A: A value found from a cutting time constant and servo timeconstant (loop gain) is used as a shift amount.

2) Type B: A positional deviation and accumulated pulses due toacceleration/deceleration when the skip signal is turned onare used as a shift amount.

Q

Pnc

P

Tool move direction

High–speedskip signal

Coordinatesystemorigin

Actual toolstop position

Position where theskip signal is input

Pnc: Position where the skip signal is input and the tool is actuallystopped [mm/inch]

P: Distance to be measured [mm/inch]

Q: Servo system delay [mm/inch]

In the above, P = Pnc – Q is calculated in the NC with bit 0 of NC parameterNo. 6201 or bit 1 of NC parameter No. 6201. A shift amount calculationof type A (bit 0 of NC parameter No. 6201 = 1) is made as follows:

Q = Fm � 1/60 � (� � Tc/1000 + Ts/1000)

Fm: Feedrate [mm/min or inch/min]

Tc: Cutting time constant [msec]NC parameter No. 1622:

For exponential acceleration/decelerationNC parameter No. 1628:

For linear acceleration/deceleration before interpolationTc = 0 when bit 7 of NC parameter No. 6200 = 0

Ts: Servo time constant [msec]Let G be a loop gain (NC parameter No. 1825) (Unit: 1/sec).Then, Ts = 1000/G

�: = 1 for exponential acceleration/deceleration = 1/2 for linearacceleration/deceleration after interpolation

30.2ACCELERATION ANDSERVO DELAYCOMPENSATION(TYPE A/B)

B–85014EN/01


483

NOTEWhen using type A (bit 0 of NC parameter No. 6201 = 1),turn on the skip signal in constant–speed state.

(Example) G31 Z–200.F10G31 is valid only in the specified block.

#7

HDI7F122#6

HDI6#5

HDI5#4

HDI4#3

HDI3#2

HDI2#1

HDI1#0

HDI0

30.3COMMAND

30.4ADDRESS


484

#7

6200#6

SRE#5 #4

HSS#3 #2 #1 #0

HSS With the skip function, a high–speed skip signal is:

0 : Not used.1 : Used.

SRE When a high–speed skip signal is used:

0 : The signal is assumed to be input on the rising edge (0 � 1).1 : The signal is assumed to be input on the falling edge (1 � 0).

#7

6201#6 #5

IGX#4 #3 #2 #1

SEB#0

SEA

SEA When the skip function is used and a high–speed skip signal is turned on,acceleration/deceleration and a servo delay are:

0 : Not considered.1 : Considered and compensated for (type B).

SEB When the skip function is used and a high–speed skip signal is turned on,acceleration/deceleration and a servo delay are:

0 : Not considered.1 : Considered and compensated for (type B).

IGX When the high–speed skip function is used, X4.7 is:

0 : Enabled as a skip signal.1 : Disabled as a skip signal.

#71S86202

#61S7

#51S6

#41S5

#31S4

#21S3

#11S2

#01S1

1S1 to 1S8 Specify which high–speed skip signal to enable for a G31 skip command.The correspondence between the bits and signals is indicated below. Thesetting of each bit has the following meaning:

0 : Disables the high–speed skip signal corresponding to each bit.1 : Enables the high–speed skip signal corresponding to each bit.

1S1 — HDI01S2 — HDI11S3 — HDI21S4 — HDI31S5 — HDI41S6 — HDI51S7 — HDI61S8 — HDI7

NOTEHDI0 to HDI7 are the high–speed skip signals.

30.5PARAMETERS

B–85014EN/01


485

XTA1

01 HDI0 08 15 HDI5

02 0V 09 16 0V

03 HDI2 10 0V 17 HDI6

04 0V 11 HDI1 18 0V

05 0V 12 0V 19 HDI7

06 HDI4 13 HDI3 20 0V

07 14 0V 21

30.6CONNECTION


486

[Circuit configuration]

CNC

VH/VL

External device

LiH/IiLDriver

Shield

Filter Receiver

[Absolute maximum rating] Input voltage range Vin: –3.6 to +13.6 V

[Input characteristics]

Item Symbol Specification Unit Remarks

High–level input voltage VH 3.6 to 11.6 V

Low–level input voltage VL 0 to 1.0 V

High–level input current IiH 0.5max mA Vin = 5V

9.3max mA Vin = 10V

Low–level input current IiL –8.0max mA Vin = 0V

Input signal pulse width 20min �s

NOTE1 The + sign of IiH/IiL indicates the direction of flow into the

receiver, and the – sign of IiH/IiL indicates the direction offlow from the receiver.

2 A high–speed skip signal is assumed to be 1 when the inputvoltage is low. A high–speed skip signal is assumed to be0 when the input voltage is high.

30.7INPUT SIGNALSPECIFICATIONS

B–85014EN/01

31. HIGH–SPEED POSITIONING AND DRILLING CANNED

CYCLE FUNCTIONSDETAILED OPERATIONS

487

31HIGH–SPEED POSITIONING AND DRILLINGCANNED CYCLE FUNCTIONS

31. HIGH–SPEED POSITIONING AND DRILLING CANNED CYCLE FUNCTIONS B–85014EN/01DETAILED OPERATIONS

488

To reduce non–cutting time for machining multiple holes in succession,the drilling cycles provide a coasting distance above point R. A reducedoperation time is achieved by rapid traverse overlapping and three–axis(X–/Y–/Z–axis) positioning.The commands used are the same as the conventional commands G73 andG81 through G83. A coasting distance is specified using parameter No.5150. A rapid traverse overlapping deceleration ratio used in a cannedcycle is common to all axes, and is to be specified in parameter No. 5151.When bit 0 (RBDCY) of parameter No. 5104 is set to 1, coastingoperation is performed in either the initial point return mode or the R pointreturn mode.

31.1OVERVIEW

B–85014EN/01



489

High–speed peck–drilling canned cycle (G73)

q

q

q

d

d

q

q

q

d

d

Coasting end point

Coasting distance

Passing point I

Coasting end point

Coasting distance

Passing point RPoint R

Point I

Point Z

Point R

G73 (G98) G73 (G99)

G73 X_Y_Z_R_Q_F_K_

X_Y_ : Hole position dataZ_ : Distance from point R to hole bottomR_ : Distance from initial point to point RQ_ : Depth of each cutF_ : Cutting feedrateK_ : Number of repeats

31.2CANNED CYCLES

(Command format)


490

Drilling/spot drilling canned cycle (G81)

Coasting end point

Coasting distance

Passing point I Coasting end point

Coasting distance

Passing point RPoint R

Point I

Point Z

Point R

G81 (G98) G81 (G99)

Point Z

Point I

G81 X_Y_Z_R_F_K_

X_Y_ : Hole position dataZ_ : Distance from point R to hole bottomR_ : Distance from initial point to point RF_ : Cutting feedrateK_ : Number of repeats

(Command format)

B–85014EN/01



491

Drilling/counter boring canned cycle (G82)

Coasting end point

Coasting distance

Passing point I

Coasting end point

Coasting distance

Passing point IPoint R

Point I

Point Z

Point R

G82 (G98) G82 (G99)

Point Z

Point I

P P

G82 X_Y_Z_R_P_F_K_

X_Y_ : Hole position dataZ_ : Distance from point R to hole bottomR_ : Distance from initial point to point RP_ : Dwell time at hole bottomF_ : Cutting feedrateK_ : Number of repeats

(Command format)


492

Peck drilling canned cycle (G83)

Coasting end point

Coasting distance

Passing point I

Coasting endpoint

Coasting distance

Passing point IPoint R

Point I

Point Z

Point R

G83 (G98) G83 (G99)

Point Z

Point I

q

q

q

d

d

q

q

q

d

d

G83 X_Y_Z_R_Q_F_K_

X_Y_ : Hole position dataZ_ : Distance from point R to hole bottomR_ : Distance from initial point to point RQ_ : Depth of each cutF_ : Cutting feedrateK_ : Number of repeats

The operations below are performed:

1) Rapid traverse to XY–specified position

2) Rapid traverse to point R

3) Cutting feed from point R to point Z

4) Rapid traverse from point Z to coasting end point

When bit 0 (RBDCY) of parameter No. 5104 is set to 1, these codesoperate as the high–speed positioning and drilling canned cycles. Whenbit 0 (RBDCY) of parameter No. 5104 is set to 0, these codes operate asthe conventional canned cycles, G73 and G81 to G83.

(Command format)

31.2.1Differences fromConventional G73 andG81 through G83Codes

B–85014EN/01



493

The tool moves in rapid traverse to a coasting end point, which isdetermined by adding a coasting distance to initial point/point R.

Positioning (X–/Y–axis) to the next hole position in the cycle is startedby rapid traverse overlapping during retreat operation. At this time,positioning to point R along the Z–axis is also started.

Single–block stop operation is performed at the following points:

1) Position where positioning to the first hole position is completed

2) Point R before drilling the first hole

3) Position (coasting end point) where retreat operation from the bottomof the first hole is completed

4) Point R before drilling the second hole

5) Position (coasting end point) where retreat operation from the bottomof the second hole is completed

If a single–block stop operation is performed at 3) or 5), rapid traverseoverlapping is not actuated, but the tool moves up to a coasting end point.

In either the initial point return mode (G98) or the R point return mode(G99), coasting operation is performed.

When G80 or a G code of group 01 (G00 to G03, G60 (when bit 0 (MDL)of parameter No. 5431) is set to 1) is specified, a high–speed positioningand drilling canned cycle is cancelled. At the time of cancellation, the toolis positioned at a coasting end point along the Z–axis.

If rapid traverse blocks are specified in succession in a high–speedpositioning and drilling canned cycle, rapid traverse overlapping isapplied. Parameter No. 5151 is used to specify a rapid traverseoverlapping deceleration ratio.

To disable rapid traverse overlapping, set 0 in parameter No. 5151.

In a high–speed positioning and drilling canned cycle, rapid traverseoverlapping is enabled even when the move direction is reversed. Set theparameter, taking influences such as a shock to the machine intoconsideration.

31.2.2Retreat Operation

31.2.3Positioning Operation

31.2.4Single–Block Stop

31.2.5Return to InitialPoint/Point R

31.2.6Cancellation

31.2.7Rapid TraverseOverlapping


494

#7

5104#6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

RBDCY

[Data type] Bit

RBDCY The high–speed positioning and drilling canned cycles are:

0 : Enabled.1 : Disabled.

5150

In a high–speed positioning and drilling canned cycle, set a coastingdistance.

[Data type] 2–word

[Unit of data]

Increment system IS–A IS–B IS–C Unit

Millimeter input 0.01 0.001 0.0001 mm

Inch input 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 inch


5151

Set a rapid traverse overlapping deceleration ratio to be used betweenrapid traverse blocks in a high–speed positioning and drilling cannedcycle. During the cycle, this setting is applied to all axes.

[Data type] Byte

[Unit of data] %


NOTEIn a high–speed positioning and drilling canned cycle, rapidtraverse overlapping is applied even when bit 4 (RT0) ofparameter No. 1601 is set to 0.To disable rapid traverse overlapping, set 0 in thisparameter.

31.3ADDITIONALPARAMETERS

B–85014EN/01



495

1 The high–speed positioning and drilling canned cycles are enabledwhen the drilling axis is the Z–axis. (Bit 0 (FXY) of parameter No.5101 = 0)

2 Drilling operation is not performed in a block that specifies none of theX–axis, Y–axis, Z–axis, R–axis, and addition axes.

3 Specify a R command in a block that performs drilling operation. AR command, when specified in a block that does not perform drillingoperation, is not stored as modal data. (However, a R commandspecified in a block that specifies K0 is stored as modal data.)

4 Do not specify a G code of group 01 (G00 to G03, G60 (when bit 0(MDL) of parameter No. 5431) is set to 1) in a block that specifies G81.Otherwise, G81 is cancelled.

5 In the canned cycle mode, tool offset data is ignored.

6 When bit 0 (RBDCY) of parameter No. 5104 is set to 1, the high–speedpositioning and drilling canned cycles are enabled either in the initialpoint return mode (G98) or in the R point return mode (G99).

7 During a high–speed positioning and drilling canned cycle, rapidtraverse overlapping is enabled even when bit 4 (RT0) of parameterNo. 1601 is set to 0. A rapid traverse overlapping deceleration ratiois to be set in parameter No. 5151.

8 Before specifying a rapid traverse overlapping deceleration ratio fora high–speed positioning and drilling canned cycle in the parameter,conduct a test run sufficiently to ensure that a slant retreat operationis not performed.Rapid traverse overlapping is applied even when the move directionis reversed. So, consider influences such as a shock to the machinewhen setting a value in the parameter. To disable rapid traverseoverlapping during a cycle, set 0 in parameter No. 5151.

9 The high–speed positioning and drilling canned cycles are enabled inthe cycles of G73 and G81 to G83.

31.4NOTES


496

From point R to point Z of the first hole, cutting feed is executed at aspecified feedrate value of F. From the hole bottom of the first hole,retreat operation is performed to a coasting end point along the R–axis,which is determined by adding a parameter–set value to point I or pointR. During retreat operation, the tool moves along the X–axis, Y–axis, andZ–axis by rapid traverse overlapping. At this time, rapid traverse ofinterpolation type is performed, and the tool is positioned at the secondhole along a straight path. Then, the cutting feed for the second hole isexecuted at a specified feedrate value of F.

During a high–speed positioning and drilling canned cycle, rapid traverseoverlapping is enabled even when the move direction is reversed.

G98

G99

� Rapid traverse overlapping

Coasting endpoint

Coasting distance

Coasting endpoint

Coasting distance

Point I

Point RWorkpiecesurface

Point Z Point Z

31.5EXAMPLE OF CYCLEOPERATION

B–85014EN/01

32. TOOL CHANGE PROHIBITION FUNCTIONDETAILED OPERATIONS

497

32 TOOL CHANGE PROHIBITION FUNCTION

32. TOOL CHANGE PROHIBITION FUNCTION B–85014EN/01DETAILED OPERATIONS

498

If the table is not placed at a particular position, tool change operation isprohibited. This function is used, for example, when the tool interfereswith a workpiece or jig at the time turret turning in tool change operation.

32.1OVERVIEW

B–85014EN/01


499

Y

X(0,0) (500,0)

(0,–380)(500,–380)

Table move stroke

Tool change prohibition area

g The maximum stroke along the X–axis is 700 mm for T14/21iCL.The maximum stroke along the X–axis is 300 mm for T14/21iCS.

If the table is placed in the tool change prohibition area (X and Y machinecoordinates) in the figure above, tool change operation is prohibited.

� An alarm is issued when the TOOL CHANGE button on the operator’spanel is pressed in MDI operation.

� An alarm is issued when M06 is specified in automatic operation/MDIoperation.

� One tool change prohibition area can be specified by specifying anarbitrary table position (X and Y machine coordinates).

NOTEIf tool change operation and table movement are specifiedat the same time (Example: G54 X100.Y100.M6 T1), andthe table is placed in the tool change prohibition area duringturret turning (during tool change operation), tool changeoperation and table movement gradually stop and an alarmis issued.Create a machining program so that the table is not placedin the tool change prohibition area at tool change time.If the machine stops in the state above, perform turretrecovery operation. Turret recovery operation is performedeven when the table is placed in the tool change prohibitionarea. So, ensure that the tool does not interfere with aworkpiece and jig.

32.2SPECIFICATION

32. TOOL CHANGE PROHIBITION FUNCTION B–85014EN/01DETAILED OPERATIONS

500

Message: 1015 TABLE IS PLACED IN TOOL CHANGEPROHIBITION AREA.

This alarm can be reset by pressing the RESET key on the operator’spanel.

32.3ALARM

B–85014EN/01


501

[NC parameters]

No. Setting Details

6914 1 Axis along which a tool change prohibition area is speci-fied (1: X–axis)

6915 2 Axis along which a tool change prohibition area is speci-fied (2: Y–axis)

6934 Maximum X–axis value for tool change prohibition area

6935 Maximum Y–axis value for tool change prohibition area

6954 Minimum X–axis value for tool change prohibition area

6955 Minimum Y–axis value for tool change prohibition area

[PMC parameter keep relay]

No. Setting Details

K2#7 1 The tool change prohibition function is enabled.

K2#6 1 Specified area or tool change prohibition area

(Example) To set a tool change prohibition area of 0 to 250 mm alongthe X–axis and 0 to –190 mm along the Y–axis

6934 250000

6935 99999999(*)

6954 –99999999(*)

6955 –1900000

NOTEFor safety, the area outside the operation area is alsospecified as a tool change prohibition area.

32.4PARAMETERS

33. MACRO CALL USING G CODE B–85014EN/01DETAILED OPERATIONS

502

33 MACRO CALL USING G CODE

For these functions, refer to the relevant CNC operator’s manuals.

When using the Macro Call Using G Code, note the following :

• It is not possible to use G code from 100 to 899.These are special G code for conversational automatic programmingfunction (Manual Guide).In case of SUPER C.A.P iM installation, G code for Macro call has noabovelimit.

B–85014EN/01

34. SPINDLE AIR BLOW TIMEEXTENSION FUNCTIONDETAILED OPERATIONS

503

34 SPINDLE AIR BLOW TIME EXTENSION FUNCTION

34. SPINDLE AIR BLOW TIME EXTENSION FUNCTION B–85014EN/01DETAILED OPERATIONS

504

This function extends the spindle air blow time when tools are changed.This function is useful for removing chips adhered to the taper shank ofthe tooling.

34.1OVERVIEW

B–85014EN/01


505

Tool change sequence:

1. In the same manner as the ordinary tool change sequence, the toolrises along the Z–axis, the turret turns, then the tool lowers along theZ–axis until Z = about 98 mm.

2. The spindle air blow starts.The tool lowers along the Z–axis at rapid traverse LOW speed.

3. When the tool has lowered along the Z–axis to a specified position,the tool change sequence stops. The stop takes place with the spindleair blow kept output.

If the specified time has elapsed before the tool lowers along theZ–axis to the specified position, operation 4. takes place.

4. Operation returns to the ordinary tool change sequence.

34.2SEQUENCE


506

[NC parameters]

No.

6919 3

This parameter specifies the axis of which operation is to be stoppedat the time of spindle air blow.Always set 3 (the Z–axis).

No.

6939 65000 (Standard value)

This parameter specifies the Z–axis stop position at the time of spindleair blow. (Standard value: Z = 65 mm)

Data type : 2 bytesUnit of data : 0.001 mmValid data range : 0 to 100000

No.

6959 –350000

Data related to the Z–axis stop position at the time of spindle air blow.Always set –350000 (–350 mm).

34.3PARAMETERS

B–85014EN/01


507

[PMC parameters (data table)]

No.

D 850 Spindle air blow extension time for tool number T1

D 851 T2

D 852 T3

D 853 T4

D 855 T6

D 854 T5

D 856 T7

D 857 T8

D 858 T9

D 859 T10

D 861 T12

D 860 T11

D 862 T13

D 863 T14

D 864 T15

D 865 T16

D 865 T18

D 865 T17

D 865 T19

D 865 T20

D 865 T21

These parameters set the extension time for spindle air blow. (Settingon a tool–by–tool basis)Specifying 0 does not extend the spindle air blow time. (Ordinary toolchange sequence)

Data type : 1 byteUnit of data : 48 msValid data range : –128 to 127

When setting is 1 to 127:Setting × 48 msWhen setting is –1 to –128:(256 + setting) × 48 ms

Example 1 : When 100 is set:100 × 48 ms = 4800 ms (4.8 s)Example 2 : When –56 is set:(256 – 56) × 48 ms = 9600 ms (9.6 s)


508

(Additional information)

The data table display type is factory–set to the word type (displaying D850,D852, D854, and so on).To change the display type to the byte type (displaying D850, D851, D852, andso on), set “TYPE” on the PMC data group setting screen of the PMC screen to0.

B–85014EN/01


509

1. When Z–axis operation stops at the position specified in NCparameter No. 6939, the actually stopped position may vary within1 mm of the parameter–specified position.

34.4NOTE

35. TOUCH PROBE CONTROL FUNCTION B–85014EN/01DETAILED OPERATIONS

510

35 TOUCH PROBE CONTROL FUNCTION

B–85014EN/01

35. TOUCH PROBECONTROL FUNCTIONDETAILED OPERATIONS

511

This control function is provided for the touch probe MP11 manufacturedby Renishaw plc.

35.1OVERVIEW


512

M17 : Turns on the power to the touch probe.M18 : Turns off the power to the touch probe.

(Sample program)

G00 G90 G54 X4. 186 Y20. 659 Move to measurement start pointZ–148. 560 Move to measurement start pointM17 Turn on touch probeG184 Z7. R15. F50 W2 MeasurementM18 Turn off touch probe

NOTEWhen specifying M17 (or M18) then M18 (or M17), provide aninterval of at least 10 seconds between these commands.

35.2FUNCTION

B–85014EN/01


513

1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29

2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30

(XT4)

Pin No. Address Signal Line color Wire mark

XT4–07 X4.4 Probe status Light blue XT4–07

XT4–08 X4.5 Probe battery Purple XT4–08

XT4–11 X4.6 Probe error Green XT4–11

XT4–12 X4.7 Skip Yellow XT4–12

XT4–09 (+24B) Input common Pink, orange XT4–09/+24B

XT4–28 (0V) Input common Blue, gray XT4–28/0V

XT4–25 Y2.0 Probe ON/OFF White XT4–25

XT4–27 (0V) Output common Brown XT4–27/0V

XT4–21 (+24B) Power supply Red XT4–21/+24B

XT4–27 (0V) Power supply Black XT4–27/0V

PE Ground line Shield PE

35.3CONNECTION


514

Address Signal name

X4.4 58 : Probe status

X4.5 59 : Low probe battery

X4.6 60 : Probe error

X4.7 46 : Skip

Y2.0 82 : Probe ON/OFF

35.4EXTERNALINTERFACE SIGNALASSIGNMENT

B–85014EN/01


515

[PMC parameter keep relay]

No.

K17 1

Bit 2 of K17 = 1: Enables control of the touch probe MP11.

[PMC parameter (data table)]

No.

D100 Touch probe tool number

This parameter sets the number of the magazine to which the touchprobe is attached.When 0 is set, an ordinary tool is assumed.

Data type : One wordUnit of data : NoneValid data range : 0 to 21

35.5PARAMETERS


516

No. Message Description

1040 PROBE SYSTEM ERROR

A probe system failure.Check the wire connections, cabling, and external interface settings.The probe or receiving sensor may be defective.

1041 PROBE ON/OFFERROR

There is no response to a probe ON/OFF command.Check the probe and receiving sensor orientations, and check whether the probeand receiving sensor window are dirty.This error may be due to a probe switching problem, dead battery, or receiving sen-sor failure.

1042 PROBE SIGNALERROR

An error signal was output from the probe.Check the wire connections, cabling, and external interface settings.The probe battery may be dead.

1043 PROBE BATTERY LOW The voltage of the probe battery has lowered.

1053 SPINDLE ROTATION ISPROHIBITED

A spindle rotation was specified with the probe attached to the spindle. While theprobe is attached to the spindle, spindle rotation is not permitted.The number of the magazine to which the probe is attached is set in PMC parameterdata table D100.

35.6ALARMS

B–85014EN/01


517

When the touch probe is attached to the spindle, spindle rotation can bedisabled to prevent the touch probe from being damaged.Set the number of the magazine to which the touch probe is attached indata table D100. (See Section 35.5.)When the currently used magazine number is set in D100 (the touch probeis attached to the spindle), the ROBODRILL operates as follows:

� When spindle rotation is specified (by pressing the spindle rotationbutton on the operator’s panel or specifying M3 or M4), alarm 1053is indicated, and the spindle does not rotate.

� You can specify tool change.� You can specify spindle orientation.

Additional information : This function can be used also when the touchprobe control function is not used (bit 1 of K17= 0).

35.7SPINDLE ROTATIONDISABLE FUNCTION


518

When the power to the ROBODRILL is turned on/off, the touch probe isturned off automatically to save the battery of the touch probe.When the power to the ROBODRILL is turned off less than 10 secondsafter M17 (or M18) is specified, the touch probe is not turned offautomatically.

35.8AUTOMATICTURN–OFFOPERATION OF THETOUCH PROBE

B–85014EN/01 36. MANUAL GUIDEDETAILED OPERATIONS

519

36 MANUAL GUIDE

36. MANUAL GUIDE B–85014EN/01DETAILED OPERATIONS

520

This chapter provides an overview of the manual guide. For operation andsetting for each function, notes, and other detailed information, refer to“FANUC Manual Guide Operator’s Guide for Milling”.

36.1OVERVIEW


521

1. Guidance machining (option) of the manual guide function isunavailable.

2. To use the manual guide function, set the following parameter:Bit 2 of parameter No. 5001 = 0: The address used for specifying thecompensation number of cutter compensation C is D.

3. When the detail input window or OUTPUT NC STATEMENTSwindow is displayed, the alarm/diagnosis window cannot bedisplayed. When the alarm/diagnosis window is displayed, the detailinput window and OUTPUT NC STATEMENTS window cannot bedisplayed.

36.2NOTES


522

80mm

25mm

X+

Y+

Z+

120mm

Work Size : Cube120(W) × 80(D) × 25(H)

Work Origin : The top and center of work

Process:

Order Process Tool T.Radius T code H code D code

1 Facing Face mill D60 1 1 11

2 Hole Machining Drill D8 2 2 12

3 Pocketing End mill D10 3 3 13

φ8

36.3OPERATION OF THEMANUAL GUIDE

36.3.1Explanation of SampleProgram


523

Process order of Contour Pocket :

NC Program :

1. Tool Change to T12. Modal Command3. Rapid traverse to Common Safety Z Point4. Facing5. Tool Change to T26. Modal Command7. Rapid traverse to Common Safety Z Point8. Hole Machining9. Tool Change to T310. Modal Command11. Rapid traverse to Common Safety Z Point12. Pocketing13. Process End

The Name which is marked [ ] : Soft–keyThe Name which is marked < > : Hard–key on ROBODRILLOperator’s panel


524

Display QUICK screen.

Hit [C.A.P] soft–key.

MANUAL GUIDE screen is displayed.

Operation mode is switched to EDIT mode automatically, ifscreen is changed to MANUAL GUIDE screen.But in program operation, operation mode is no switched toEDIT mode.

36.3.2Switching Over toManual Guide Screen


525

Softkey

Status Window

Program Window

Graphic Window

Key in Buffer

Status Window : Current position (Absolute), Current speed,Operating NC Program and Modal data is displayed.

Graphic Window : Tool Path or Anime Graphic is displayed.

Program Window : Editing or operating NC program is displayed.

Key in Buffer : Comment of Data, Inputted data is displayed.

Soft–key : Information is changed according to operation mode, edit menu, operation menu.


526

Set Work Coordinates and Offset data.

Hit [WRK CD] soft–key.

WORK COORDINATES window is displayed. Set the data. (G54 X=150.000 Y=–150.000) After set data, hit [RETURN] soft–key.

Hit [OFFSET] soft–key.

OFFSET window is displayed. Set the data. (001=–100.000 002=–110.000 003=–120.000 011=30.000 012=4.000013=5.000)After set data, hit [RETURN] soft–key.

Normally, D code is no use on hole machining. But in thiscase,Tool Radius data of Drill is set to D code.This data is used for hole size data on Anime Graphic.If you don’t use the Anime Graphic, it is not possible to setthis data for hole machining tools.

36.3.3Data Setting


527

Select NC program.

Hit [LIST] soft–key.

Program Directory is displayed. Key in Program No. (2000)Hit [SELECT] soft–key.

It is not necessary to input character “O”, when you inputthe NC program number.Hit [RETURN] soft–key, if you cancel to select NC program.

Specified Program No. is stored to memory.

When new program is created, created date and time is stamped.Let’s modify comment. Hit <RIGHT CURSOR> Key.

36.3.4Selection of NCProgram


528

Cursor selects word. When <RIGHT CURSOR> Key is hit again, cursormoves to comment part. And when <ABC...Z> key is hit, soft–key function is switched toalphabet mode.Input new comment. ((TEST PROGRAM))(The characters “(” and “)” for comment needs.)

After set data, hit <ALTER> key. Comment is changed.When <ABC...Z> key is hit again, soft–key function is switched tonormal mode.

When <LEFT CURSOR> Key is hit twice, cursor selects one line.


529

Create NC program.

Hit [EDIT] soft–key.

Hit the left side soft–key, if above soft–key does not isdisplayed.If the left side soft–key is hit in state of above soft–keydisplayingMANUAL GUIDE function finishes and QUICK screen isdisplayed.

(1) Tool Change to T1

36.3.5Creation of NCProgram


530

Edit Menu is displayed on soft–key. Hit [TOOL] soft–key.

TOOL SET window is displayed. Set data.(TOOL NO. T=1 CUTTER OFFSET NO. D=11 LENGTH OFFSETNO. H=1)After set data, hit <INSERT> key. Edited data is stored to memory.

G301 command includes G80 (Cancel of canned cycle),G40 (Cancel of cutter compensation), G49 (Cancel of toollength compensation), M05 (Spindle stop) and M09(Coolant stop).

When [DETAIL]soft–key is hit, setting item of “Next ToolNo.” is displayed. But this item does not use onROBODRILL.


531

After set data, hit <INPUT> key.If <INPUT key> does not be hit, this data does not decideand not stored to memory.

If [RETURN] soft–key is hit instead of <INSERT> key afterdata inputted, edited data does not be stored to memory.

Put on cursor to on line then hit <ALTER> key, If you wantto modify the data. Data input Window is displayed.

If cursor is on to one line and <DELETE> key is hit, one lineis deleted.

(2) Modal CommandHit [INIT] soft–key.

INITIAL SET window is displayed. Set data.(WORK CO–ORD. W=G54 WORK SHAPE P=NO OUT)


532

Hit [DETAIL] soft–key. Set data.(ABS/INC A=G90 PLANE SELECTION S=XYPLN INPUT UNITM=NO OUT)

Hit [RETURN] soft–key, then DETAIL SET window is closed. Hit<INSERT> key.

Hit [MSF] soft–key.


533

MSF CODE window is displayed. Set data. (M CODE M=8)Hit <INSERT> key.

Next, you have to command spindle rotation (M03 S3000).Using MSF code window, you can input data.The another way, it is possible to store command to memory directly.This operation is as follows,Put on cursor to one line, then hit <ABC...Z> key.Soft–key function is switched to alphabet mode.Input (M3 S3000;), then hit <INSERT> key.


534

Inputted NC command is stored to memory.

(3) Rapid traverse to Common Safety Z PointHit [COMP] soft–key.

COMPENSATION window is displayed. Set data.(LENGTH COMP. G=G43 RAPID/CUT G=RAPID END POINTX X=0.000 END POINT Y Y=0.000 END POINT Z Z=5.000)


535

Hit <INSERT> key.

CUTTER COMP. and CUTTER OFFSET NO. is no set. Becausenext process (Hole machining, Facing, Side Cutting, Pocketing) doesnot use Cutter compensation function.But D–code (Tool Radius data) needs for tool path calculation andanime graphic.D–code does not command on this window, because already D–codeis commanded on Tool Set window. And you don’t have to commandH–code too.

Hit <CANCEL> –> <INPUT> key, if you want to cancel(empty) the inputted data on data input window.

(4) FacingHit [CYCLE] soft–key.

Cycle Menu is displayed on soft–key. Hit [FACE] soft–key.


536

Facing Menu is displayed on soft–key. Hit [SQUARE] soft–key.

SQUARE FACE window is displayed. Set data.

(MACH. PROCESS P=ROUGH END POINT Z=–5.000REMOVAL DEPTH B=5.000 REMOVAL STEP J=5.000FINISHING ALW. H=0.000 CUTTING WIDTH(%) C=70.000FEED RATE F=500 CENTER POINT X=0.000 CENTER POINTY Y=0.000 U–LENGTH U=120.000 V–LENGTH V=80.000)


537

Hit <INSERT> key.

(5) Tool Change to T2Set data in the same way 1).TOOL SET window :(TOOL NO. T=2 CUTTER OFFSET NO. D=12 LENGTH OFFSETNO. H=2)

(6) Modal CommandSet data in the same way 2).INITIAL SET window :(WORK CO–ORD. W=G54 WORK SHAPE P=NO OUT)INITIAL SET (DETAIL) window :(ABS/INC A=G90 PLANE SELECTION S=XYPLN INPUT UNITM=NO OUT)MSF CODE window :(M CODE M=8)MSF CODE window :(M CODE M=3 SPINDLE SPEED S=5000)

(7) Rapid traverse to Common Safety Z PointSet data in the same way 3).(LENGTH COMP. G=G43 RAPID/CUT G=RAPID END POINT XX=0.000 END POINT Y Y=0.000 END POINT Z Z=5.000)

(8) Hole MachiningHit [CYCLE] soft–key.

Cycle Menu is displayed on soft–key. Hit [HOLE] soft–key.


538

Drilling menu is displayed on soft–key. Hit [DRILL] soft–key.

DRILLING CYCLE window is displayed. Set data.(MACHINE PATTERN G=NO DWL Z POINT Z=–25.000 R POINT R=2.000 FEED RATE F=500)Hit <INSERT> key.

Hole Pattern Menu is displayed on soft–key.


539

Hit [SQUARE] soft–key.

SQUARE window is displayed. Set data.(START POINT X X=–55.000 START POINT Y Y=–35.000U–LENGTH U=110.000 V–LENGTH V=70.000 U–NUMBER I=3V–NUMBER J=3 PATTERN CONT. Q=END)Hit <INSERT> key.


540

It is possible to input expression and calculate (+,–,*,/, sin,cos, tan, square root and etc) on data input window.

Input expression, then hit <INPUT>key.

Calculated data is displayed. Hit <INPUT>key again.

Calculated data is set.


541

(9) Tool Change to T3Set data in the same way 1).TOOL SET window :(TOOL NO. T=3 CUTTER OFFSET NO. D=13 LENGTH OFFSETNO. H=3)

You have to set D–code for anime graphic in case of HoleMachining yet.

(10)Modal CommandSet data in the same way 2).INITIAL SET window :(WORK CO–ORD. W=G54 WORK SHAPE P=NO OUT)INITIAL SET (DETAIL) window :(ABS/INC A=G90 PLANE SELECTION S=XYPLN INPUT UNITM=NO OUT)MSF CODE window :(M CODE M=8)MSF CODE window :(M CODE M=3 SPINDLE SPEED S=1200)

(11)Rapid traverse to Common Safety Z PointSet data in the same way 3).(LENGTH COMP. G=G43 RAPID/CUT G=RAPID END POINT XX=0.000 END POINT Y Y=0.000 END POINT Z Z=5.000)

(12)PocketingHit [CYCLE] soft–key.

Cycle Menu is displayed on soft–key. Hit [POCKET] soft–key.

Pocket Menu is displayed on soft–key. Hit [CONTR] soft–key.


542

CONTOUR POCKET window is displayed. Set data.(MACH. PROCESS P=ROUGH END POINT Z Z=–15.000REMOVAL DEPTH B=10.000 REMOVAL STEP J=5.000 ZFINISH AMOUNT H=0.000 SIDE FINISH AMOUNT D=0.000CUTTING WIDTH(%) C=70.000 FEED RATE F=250 Z–CUTFEED RATE E=100)Hit <INSERT> key.


543

1. Instructing the start pointDisplay of soft–key is changed to contour menu. Hit [START]soft–key.

START POINT window is displayed. Set data.(START POINT X X=0.000 START POINT Y Y=–30.000START POINT TYPE E=START)Hit <INSERT> key.

Created contour figure is displayed on Graphic window.


544

2. Instructing the clockwise arc figureHit [CW] soft–key.

ARC CW window is displayed. Set data.(RADIUS E=30.000 CENTER POINT X V=0.000 CENTERPOINT Y W=0.000)Hit <INSERT> key.


545

3. Instructing the tangent line figureThis line is tangent to above clockwise arc. In this case, hit[TANGNT] soft–key, then hit [LINE] soft–key.

LINE window is displayed. Set data. (DIRECTION B=L–UP)Hit <INSERT> key.

Cross point is calculated and set automatically, when“TANGENT” is commanded.


546

4. Instructing the tangent clockwise arc figureHit [TANGNT]soft–key, then hit [CW]soft–key.ARC CW window is displayed. Set data.(RADIUS E=15.000 CENTER POINT X V=–35.000 CENTERPOINT Y W=0.000)Hit <INSERT> key.

Contour figure is displayed by full line on Graphic window,when end point of figure block is decided.

5. Instructing the tangent line figureHit [TANGNT] soft–key, then hit [LINE]soft–key.LINE window is displayed. Set data. (DIRECTION B=R–UP)Hit <INSERT> key.


547

6. Instructing the tangent clockwise arc figure

Hit [TANGNT] soft–key, then hit [CW] soft–key.ARC CW window is displayed. Set data.(RADIUS E=30.000 CENTER POINT X V=0.000 CENTERPOINT Y W=0.000)

Hit <INSERT> key.

7. Instructing the tangent line figure

Hit [TANGNT] soft–key, then hit [LINE]soft–key.LINE window is displayed. Set data. (DIRECTIONB=R–DOWN)

Hit <INSERT> key.


548

8. Instructing the tangent clockwise arc figureHit [TANGNT] soft–key, then hit [CW] soft–key.ARC CW window is displayed. Set Data.(RADIUS E=15.000 CENTER POINT X V=35.000 CENTERPOINT Y W=0.000)Hit <INSERT> key.

9. Instructing the tangent line figureHit [TANGNT] soft–key, then hit [LINE] soft–key.LINE window is displayed. Set data. (DIRECTIONB=L–DOWN)Hit <INSERT> key.


549

10. Instructing the tangent clockwise arc figure

Hit [TANGNT] soft–key, then hit [CW] soft–key.ARC CW window is displayed. Set data.(RADIUS E=30.000 CENTER POINT X V=0.000 CENTERPOINT Y W=0.000 END POINT X M=0.000 END POINT YN=–30.000)

Hit <INSERT> key.

11. Instructing the end of figure and instructing the island figure

Hit [END] soft–key.

END window is displayed.Select “CONT”, because Island figure will instruct on nextprocess. (CONTINUE P=CONT)


550

Hit <INSERT> key.

12. Instructing the start point of island figureHit [START] soft–key.

START POINT window is displayed. Set data.(START POINT X X=0.000 START POINT Y Y=–10.000START POINT TYPE E=ISLAND ISLAND Z CO–ORD.Z=–5.000)


551

Hit <INSERT> key.13. Instructing the line figure

Hit [LINE] soft–key.

LINE window is displayed. Set data.(DIRECTION B=LEFT END POINT X M=–15.000 ENDPOINT Y N=–10.000)


552

Hit <INSERT> key.

14. Instructing the line figureHit [LINE] soft–key. LINE window is displayed. Set data.(DIRECTION B=UP END POINT X M=–15.000 END POINTY N=10.000)Hit <INSERT> key.


553

15. Instructing the line figureHit [LINE] soft–key. LINE window is displayed. Set data.(DIRECTION B=RIGHT END POINT X M=15.000 ENDPOINT Y N=10.000)Hit <INSERT> key.

16. Instructing the line figureHit [LINE] soft–key. LINE window is displayed. Set data.(DIRECTION B=DOWN END POINT X M=15.000 ENDPOINT Y N=–10.000)Hit <INSERT> key.


554

17. Instructing the line figureHit [LINE]soft–key. LINE window is displayed. Set data.(DIRECTION B=LEFT END POINT X M=0.000 END POINTY N=–10.000)Hit <INSERT> key.

18. Instructing the end of figureHit [END] soft–key.


555

END window is displayed. Set data. (CONTINUE P=END)Hit <INSERT> key.

(13)Process EndHit [MSF] soft–key.

MSF CODE window is displayed. Set data. (M CODE M=30)


556

Hit <INSERT>key.


557

Hit <AUTO> key. Menu of soft–key is changed.

Hit [CHECK] soft–key.

(PATH GRAPHIC)

Menu of Tool path graphic is displayed on soft–key. Hit [PARAM]soft–key.

PATH GRAPHIC PARAMETER window is displayed. Set data. (AXES= XYZ)After set data, hit [END] soft–key.

Hit [EXEC] soft–key. Tool path is drawn.

36.3.6Program Check(Graphic)


558

Graphic window is displayed by full–size, if [FUL ON] soft–key is hit.It is possible to see the big size of tool path figure.

If alarm occurs in drawing, hit <ALARM/STATUS> key andcheck alarm message.

(ANIME GRAPHIC)

Hit [ANIME] soft–key.


559

Menu for anime graphic is displayed on soft–key. Hit [PARAM]soft–key.

ANIME GRAPHIC PARAMETER window is displayed. Set data.(BLANK FORM = CUBE BLANK POSITION X=–60.000 Y=–40.000Z=–25.000BLANK DIMENSION I=120.000 J=80.000 K=25.000)After set data, hit [END] soft–key.

Hit [EXEC]soft–key. Anime graphic is operated.

(In case of Full Size OFF)


560

(In case of Full Size ON)

Hit [RETURN] soft–key. Graphic function is finished.

Hit <AUTO> key. Menu of soft–key is changed.

Hit the right side soft–key.

Hit [LIST] soft–key.

36.3.7Convert to NC Format


561

PROGRAM DIRECTORY window is displayed. Hit [CNV NC]soft–key.

Input converted NC program No. (2001)Hit [SELECT] soft–key.


562

Hit [EXEC] soft–key. Covert to NC format and Tool path graphic isstarted.After converted, hit [RETURN] soft–key.

OUTPUT NC STATEMENTS window is displayed, if [ON/OFF]soft–key is hit

Close the Alarm / Diagnose window (The window which isdisplayed by <ALARM/STATUS> key), when you want todisplay OUTPUT NC STATEMENTS window.


563

(Move or Copy of part program)

Hit <EDIT> key.Hit the right side soft–key. Menu of soft–key is changed.Put on cursor to start point of move or copy by <UP CURSOR> key and<DOWN CURSOR> key.

Hit [MOVE] or [COPY] soft–key.

Select move or copy area by <UP CURSOR> key and <DOWNCURSOR> key.After selected, hit[DECIDE] soft–key.

36.3.8Editing Function


564

Move the cursor to insert position by <UP CURSOR> key and <DOWNCURSOR> key.

After moved cursor, hit [EXEC] soft–key.

Move or copy area is inserted to the next line which is puton cursor.

Move or Copy is completed.

(Delete of part program)


565

Hit <EDIT> key.Hit the right side soft–key. Menu of soft–key is changed.Put on cursor to start point of delete by <UP CURSOR> key and <DOWNCURSOR> key.

Hit [DELETE] soft–key.

Select the delete area by <UP CURSOR> key and <DOWN CURSOR>key.After selected, hit [DECIDE] soft–key.]


566

Check the area which is deleted, then hit [EXEC] soft–key.

Selected area is deleted.


567

(Alteration of part program)

Hit <EDIT> key.Hit the right side soft–key. Menu of soft–key is changed.Put on cursor to part program which you want to alter by <UP CURSOR>key and <DOWN CURSOR> key.

Hit [ALTER] soft–key.

Data Input Window is displayed. After changed data, hit <INSERT> key.Alternation is completed.

It is possible to use <ALTER> key instead of [ALTER]soft–key.


568

Hit <EDIT> or AUTO> key.Hit the right side soft–key. Menu of soft–key is changed.Hit [LIST] soft–key.

(COPY)

Put on cursor to Program number which you want to copy by <UPCURSOR> key and <DOWN CURSOR> key.Hit [COPY] soft–key.

36.3.9Copy and Deleting ofNC Program


569

Input new NC program No. (3000)Hit [EXEC] soft–key.

Copy of NC program is completed.

(DELETE)Put on cursor to Program number which you want to delete by <UPCURSOR> key and <DOWN CURSOR> key.Hit [DELETE] soft–key.


570

Check the NC program No. which is deleted. Hit [EXEC] soft–key.

Selected NC program is deleted.

At Edit mode, current program number is changed after NCprogram was deleted. Take care.At Auto mode, current program number is no changed.


571

(AUTO OPERATION)

Hit <AUTO> key.

Input NC program number (2000) then hit [O SRH] soft–key, if you knowthe NC program number.

Specified NC program is selected.

36.3.10Auto and MDIOperation


572

Hit the right side soft–key then hit [LIST] soft–key, if you want to searchProgram number.

Put on cursor to Program number by <UP CURSOR> key and <DOWNCURSOR> key, then hit [SELECT] soft–key.

Specified NC program is selected.

Hit <START> button.

Cursor moves to the top of NC program, if [REWIND]soft–key is hit.


573

(MDI OPERATION)

Hit <MENU> key.

Input command (G91 G28 ZO ;) then hit <INSERT> key.

MDI command is stored to memory. Hit <START> button.

MDI operation is started. After MDI operation finished, MDI commandis cleared.


574

It is possible to edit NC Program in operation.

Hit [BGEDIT] soft–key.

NC Program directory window is displayed.

36.3.11Back Ground Editing


575

Put on cursor to Program number or key in Program number (3000), thenhit [SELECT] soft–key.

Program is selected. It is possible to edit NC program like normal mode.After edited, hit [RETURN] soft–key.


576

Set the following NC parameters:Bit 0 of parameter No. 9110 = 1 : Enables user window display on

the edit screen.Bit 1 of parameter No. 9110 = 1 : Enables user window display on

the operation screen.

Display the manual guide screen. Select the [EDIT] soft key.

Select the [USRWIN] soft key.

The CALIBRATION CYCLE – DATA SET window appears.Set each data item.

PROBE LENGTH:Length from the gage surface of the spindle taper to the end of the stylus

STYLUS BALL DIAMETER FOR X/Y AXIS:Diameter of the ball at the end of the stylus

STYLUS BALL OFFSET FOR X/Y AXIS:Amount of compensation for the difference between the stylus centerposition and the spindle center position

MEASURING FEEDRATE OF 1ST (f):Feedrate at which the stylus moves to touch the measurement surfaceat the first measurement

36.3.12Measurement CycleFunction (Option)

36.3.12.1 Preparation


577

APPROACH DISTANCE OF 1SWT (α):Distance in mm between the stylus and measurement surface after thestylus approaches at the first measurement

ESCAPING DISTANCE OF 1ST (β):Distance in mm the stylus retracts after the first measurement (= approach distance at the second measurement)

MEASURING OVERLAP DISTANCE (γ):Distance in mm the stylus moves from the measurement surface

APPROACH FEEDRATE TO START PT (fa):Feedrate at which movement is made to the measurement start point

ESCAPE DISTANCE OF 2ND (ε):Distance in mm the stylus retracts after the second measurement

F

ε

γβ

Measurementstart point

Measurementsurface

Second measurement

fa f

α γ

β


Measurement-surface

First measurement

F: Feedrate specified in each measurement menu item

The values set in PROBE LENGTH, STYLUS BALLDIAMETER FOR X/Y AXIS, and STYLUS BALL OFFSETFOR X/Y AXIS can also be measured using a calibrationcycle. To do this, prepare a ring gage. For details, refer to“Manual Guide Operator’s Guide for Milling.”

Before specifying a measurement cycle G code, you need to specify thefollowing three commands:

� Command for turning on the probe� Command for moving the probe to the measurement start position� Command for disabling advanced preview control (The skip

function G31 must be specified with advanced preview controldisabled.)

After the measurement cycle ends, you need to specify the following twocommands:

� Command for enabling advanced preview control� Command for turning off the probe (to save the battery in the probe)

36.3.12.2 Creating a Program


578

(Sample program)00002 (MEASUREMENT TEST)G301 T14 ; Mount probe (tool change)M17 ; Turn on probeG300 W1. P3. A1. S1. M3 ; Specify modal informationG60 G0 X0 Y0 Z–100. ; Move probe to measurement start

positionG08 P0 ; Disable advanced preview controlG180 A1. VO D10. F100. W1. ; Measurement cycleG08 P1 ; Enable advanced preview controlM18 ; Turn off probeM02 ; End

M codes used for turning the probe on and off may vary fromthe M codes shown in the above program, so check the Mcodes before using them.The above M codes are used for the touch probe controlfunction provided as a standard function of theROBODRILL.

Generate commands for turning on the probe, moving the probe to themeasurement start position, and disabling advanced preview control.Then, select the [CYCLE] soft key.

Select the [MEASUR] soft key.


579

The soft key display field shows a measurement menu. Select the soft keyof the menu item to be used. Selecting the rightmost soft key [+] displaysthe next menu page.

For example, let’s select [FACE].

MEASURE POSITION (A): Select the workpiece end face (the X–, Y–, or Z–axis) to be measured.

WORK CO–ORD. VALUE (V): Set the workpiece coordinate valueof the measurement position.

DISTANCE FOR MOVE (D): Distance of movement from the measurement start position to the endface to be measured

FEEDRATE FOR MOVE (F): Feedrate of movement at measurement (second)

WORK CO–ORD. SYSTEM (W): The measurement position is set ina specified workpiece coordinate system. (Can be omitted)


580

Enter data, then press the <insert> key.

Add the command for enabling advanced preview control and thecommand for turning off the probe to complete the program.


581

The measurement cycle for X/Y/Z end face measurement operates as follows:

<1> The probe approaches the workpiece from themeasurement start point over the distance[DISTANCE FOR MOVE (D) + MEASURINGOVERLAP DISTANCE (γ) – stylus radius] atMEASURING FEEDRATE OF 1ST (f).

<2> When the probe has touched the workpiece, itretracts over the distance ESCAPINGDISTANCE OF 1ST (β) at the rapid traverse rate.

<3> The probe again approaches the workpieceover the distance [ESCAPING DISTANCE OF1ST (β) + MEASURING OVERLAP DISTANCE(γ)] at FEEDRATE FOR MOVE (F).

<4> When the probe has touched the workpiece, theprobe retracts over the distance ESCAPEDISTANCE OF 2ND (ε) at the rapid traverserate.

The operation varies depending on the measurement menu item selected.For details, refer to “Manual Guide Operator’s Guide for Milling.”

f

D


Measurementsurface

γ

Measurementsurface

Rapidtraverse

β

Measurementsurface

Rapidtraverse

β

Measurementsurface

Rapidtraverse

ε


582

The measurement cycle menu items shown below are provided.For details, refer to “Manual Guide Operator’s Guide for Milling.”

[MEASUREMENT OF X/Y/Z SINGLE SURFACE]Measurement result• Measurement value of the end face

(machine coordinate system)• Measurement value of the end face

(workpiece coordinate system)

[MEASUREMENT OF WEB WIDTH]Measurement results• Center coordinate value of the

protrusion along the X–axis (machine coordinate system)

• Center coordinate value of the protrusion along the Y–axis (machine coordinate system)

• Center coordinate value of the protrusion along the X–axis (workpiececoordinate system)

• Center coordinate value of the protrusion along the Y–axis (workpiececoordinate system)

• Protrusion width

[MEASUREMENT OF GROOVE WIDTH]Measurement results• Center coordinate value of the groove

along the X–axis (machine coordinate system)

• Center coordinate value of the groove along the Y–axis (machine coordinate system)

• Center coordinate value of the groove along the X–axis (workpiece coordinatesystem)

• Center coordinate value of the groovealong the Y–axis (workpiece coordinatesystem)

• Groove width


583

[MEASUREMENT OF OUTSIDE CIRCLE]Measurement results• X coordinate value of the circle center

(machine coordinate system)• Y coordinate value of the circle center

(machine coordinate system)• X coordinate value of the circle center

(workpiece coordinate system)• Y coordinate value of the circle center

(workpiece coordinate system)• Radius of the circle

[MEASUREMENT OF INSIDE CIRCLE]Measurement results• X coordinate value of the circle center

(machine coordinate system)• Y coordinate value of the circle center

(machine coordinate system)• X coordinate value of the circle center

(workpiece coordinate system)• Y coordinate value of the circle center

(workpiece coordinate system)• Radius of the circle

[MEASUREMENT OF OUTSIDE RECTANGULAR]Measurement results• X coordinate value of the center of the

rectangle (machine coordinate system)• Y coordinate value of the center of the

rectangle (machine coordinate system)• X coordinate value of the center of the

rectangle (workpiece coordinate system)

• Y coordinate value of the center of therectangle (workpiece coordinate system)

• X–axis length of the rectangle• Y–axis length of the rectangle


584

[MEASUREMENT OF INSIDE RECTANGULAR]Measurement results• X coordinate value of the center of the

rectangle (machine coordinate system• Y coordinate value of the center of the

rectangle (machine coordinate system)• X coordinate value of the center of the

rectangle (workpiece coordinate system)

• Y coordinate value of the center of therectangle (workpiece coordinate system)

• X–axis length of the rectangle• Y–axis length of the rectangle

[MEASUREMENT OF OUTSIDE CORNER]Measurement results• X coordinate value of the corner

(machine coordinate system)• Y coordinate value of the corner

(machine coordinate system)• X coordinate value of the corner

(workpiece coordinate system)• Y coordinate value of the corner


[MEASUREMENT OF INSIDE CORNER]Measurement results• X coordinate value of the corner

(machine coordinate system)• Y coordinate value of the corner

(machine coordinate system)• X coordinate value of the corner

(workpiece coordinate system)• Y coordinate value of the corner



585

[MEASUREMENT OF BOLT–HOLE CIRCLE]Measurement results• X coordinate value of the center of the

bolt–hole circle (machine coordinate system)

• Y coordinate value of the center of thebolt–hole circle (machine coordinate system)

• X coordinate value of the center of thebolt–hole circle (workpiece coordinate system)

• Y coordinate value of the center of thebolt–hole circle (workpiece coordinate system)

• Radius of the bolt–hole circle

[MEASUREMENT OF 4 HOLES CENTER]Measurement results• X coordinate value of the center of the

four holes (machine coordinate system)• Y coordinate value of the center of the

four holes (machine coordinate system)• X coordinate value of the center of the

four holes (workpiece coordinate system)

• Y coordinate value of the center of thefour holes (workpiece coordinate system)

[MEASUREMENT OF WORK PIECE ANGLE]Measurement result• Angle between the workpiece and

X–axis

[MEASUREMENT OF 2 HOLES ANGLE]Measurement result• Angle between the X–axis and the

straight line passing through the two holes


586

In the same way that you execute a machining program, change theoperation mode to the automatic (memory) operation mode and press thestart button on the operator’s panel.

Measurement results can be checked on the measurementresult window of the measurement cycle.Select the [USRWIN] soft key, then select the [RESULT]soft key.

Measurement cycles (G180 to G192) cannot be used with the drawingfunction and NC statement conversion function. These G codes areignored.

Data measured by each measurement cycle can be output to custom macrovariables. Set the following NC parameter:

Parameter No. 9200 : Starting number of the custom macro variablesto which the measurement results ofmeasurement cycles are to be outputSix consecutive custom macro variables startingwith the variable having the specified numberare used as the custom macro variables dedicatedto measurement result output. When setting anumber, make sure that six consecutive custommacro variables can be acquired by that number.

(Example: When a measurement of protrusion width (MEASUREMENTOF WEB WIDTH) (G181) is made with parameter No. 9200 set to 500)

Custom macro variable #500 : Center coordinate value of theprotrusion along the X–axis (machinecoordinate system)

Custom macro variable #501 : Center coordinate value of theprotrusion along the Y–axis (machinecoordinate system)

Custom macro variable #502 : Center coordinate value of theprotrusion along the X–axis (workpiececoordinate system)

Custom macro variable #503 : Center coordinate value of theprotrusion along the Y–axis (workpiececoordinate system)

Custom macro variable #504 : Protrusion width

When a measurement cycle is executed following the abovemeasurement, the previously output measurement results are overwritten.When using more than one measurement cycle within the same program,copy measurement results to other custom macro variables after ameasurement cycle is executed.

36.3.12.3 Measurement CycleOperation

36.3.12.4 Drawing Function andNC StatementConversion Function

36.3.12.5 Output of MeasurementResults to CustomMacro Variables


587

Example:

:G180****** ; Measurement of X/Y/Z end face#600 = #500 ; Copy end face measurement value (machine

coordinate system) to #600#601 = #501 ; Copy end face measurement value (workpiece

coordinate system) to #601G181****** ; Measurement of protrusion width#602 = #500 ; Copy center coordinate value of protrusion along

X–axis (machine coordinate system) to #602#603 = #501 ; Copy center coordinate value of protrusion along

Y–axis (machine coordinate system) to #603#604 = #502 ; Copy center coordinate value of protrusion along

X–axis (workpiece coordinate system) to #604#605 = #503 ; Copy center coordinate value of protrusion along

Y–axis (workpiece coordinate system) to #605#605 = #504 ; Copy protrusion width to #606

::

(Example: Measurement menu items and measurement results when parameter No. 9200 is set to 500)

Menu #500 #501 #502 #503 #504 #505

X/Y/Z end face(G180)

End face coor-dinate value(M)

End face coor-dinate value(W)

Protrusionwidth(G181)

Center coordi-nate value ofprotrusionalong X–axis(M)

Center coordi-nate value ofprotrusionalong Y–axis(M)

Center coordi-nate value ofprotrusionalong X–axis(W)

Center coordi-nate value ofprotrusionalong Y–axis(W)

Protrusionwidth

Groove width(G182)

Center coordi-nate value ofgroove alongX–axis(M)

Center coordi-nate value ofgroove alongY–axis(M)

Center coordi-nate value ofgroove alongX–axis(W)

Center coordi-nate value ofgroove alongY–axis(W)

Groove width

Outside circle(G183)

X coordinatevalue of circlecenter(M)

Y coordinatevalue of circlecenter(M)

X coordinatevalue of circlecenter(W)

Y coordinatevalue of circlecenter(W)

Radius of circle

Inside circle(G184)

X coordinatevalue of circlecenter(M)

Y coordinatevalue of circlecenter(M)

X coordinatevalue of circlecenter(W)

Y coordinatevalue of circlecenter(W)

Radius of circle

Outside rectangle(G185)

X coordinatevalue of centerof rectangle(M)

Y coordinatevalue of centerof rectangle(M)

X coordinatevalue of centerof rectangle(W)

Y coordinatevalue of centerof rectangle(W)

X–axis lengthof rectangle

Y–axis lengthof rectangle

Inside rectangle(G186)

X coordinatevalue of centerof rectangle(M)

Y coordinatevalue of centerof rectangle(M)

X coordinatevalue of centerof rectangle(W)

Y coordinatevalue of centerof rectangle(W)

X–axis lengthof rectangle

Y–axis lengthof rectangle


588

Menu #505#504#503#502#501#500

Outside corner(G187)

X coordinatevalue of corner(M)

Y coordinatevalue of corner(M)

X coordinatevalue of corner(W)

Y coordinatevalue of corner(W)

Inside corner(G188)

X coordinatevalue of corner(M)

Y coordinatevalue of corner(M)

X coordinatevalue of corner(W)

Y coordinatevalue of corner(W)

Bolt–hole circle(G189)

X coordinatevalue of centerof bolt–holecircle(M)

Y coordinatevalue of centerof bolt–holecircle(M)

X coordinatevalue of centerof bolt–holecircle(W)

Y coordinatevalue of centerof bolt–holecircle(W)

Radius of bolt–hole circle

4 holes(G190)

X coordinatevalue of centerof four holes(M)

Y coordinatevalue of centerof four holes(M)

X coordinatevalue of centerof four holes(W)

Y coordinatevalue of centerof four holes(W)

Workpieceangle(G191)

Angle betweenworkpiece andX–axis

2–hole angle(G192)

Angle betweenX–axis andstraight linepassingthrough twoholes

(M) : Machine coordinates (W) : Workpiece coordinates

V. MAINTENANCE

B–85014EN/01 1. DAILY MAINTENANCEMAINTENANCE

591

1 DAILY MAINTENANCE

1. DAILY MAINTENANCE B–85014EN/01MAINTENANCE

592

Before turning on the power to the machine, clean the machine as follows.

� Remove cut scraps from the area surrounding the spindle, inparticular, the keys and gear.

� Wipe the tapered portions of the tool arbors installed in the turretclean. Remove cut scraps from the grips.

� Spray oil (CRC–556 or equivalent) on the top of the table and thetelescopic covers.

� Wipe the entire operator’s panel with a soft cloth. If possible, soakthe cloth with neutral detergent.

The coolant gradually decreases if it is used. If the coolant is watersoluble, a considerable amount decreases each day because the water inthe coolant evaporates. When starting work, be sure to check the amountof the coolant in the tank. If the tank is short of the coolant, replenish thetank with new coolant or supply water to the tank.

An indicator for checking the amount of the coolant is located on the sideof the machine next to the pump on the tank.

Replenish the tank with the coolant so that the value indicated by theindicator does not exceed H.

Use the cut scrap receiver when pouring additional coolant or water in thetank.

Fig.1.1.2 Daily Maintenance (1)

1.1DAILY CHECK–UP

1.1.1Cleaning

1.1.2Replenishing the Tankwith Coolant


593

Check whether the tools set in the turret correspond correctly to the toolnumbers marked on the turret, whether the tools are broken, and whetherthe tools are entwined with cut scraps.

Respecify the offset amount and replace the tool that is worn out with anew one as required.

Before turning on the power, check again whether something is wrongwith the machine according to the following check items:

� Are the telescopic covers damaged?� Is there any foreign matter on the table or telescopic covers?� Are the tools firmly mounted on the turret?� Is the jig firmly secured to the table?� Have cut scraps collected inside the machine?� Does the coolant tank contain enough coolant?

1.1.3Inspecting Cutters

1.1.4Inspecting EachSection


594

If cut scraps are left in the machine, the mechanical section will bedamaged because the cut scraps gather in the mechanical section.

To prevent this, be sure to remove the cut scraps in the machine everydayat closing time according to the following procedure. Before removingthem, however, turn off the power to the machine for safety.

(1) Sweep away the cut scraps off the turret and the area surrounding thespindle.

NOTERemove metal chips and other extraneous materials fromthe cooling air vents (both intake and exhaust) of the spindlemotor to secure air flow, using a brush.

Fig.1.2.1 (a) Daily Maintenance (2)

1.2WORK AT CLOSINGTIME

1.2.1Removing Cut Scraps


595

(2) Remove the cut scraps from the Z–axis cover and the surroundingarea.

Fig.1.2.1 (b) Daily Maintenance (3)

(3) Brush the chips off the turret cum (groove). (Right side of the headof the spindle. See (10), Section 2.1, IV.)

(4) Sweep away the other cut scraps.(5) Sweep away the cut scraps on the table.

(6) Sweep away the cut scraps on the X–axis telescopic cover.

(7) Sweep away the cut scraps on the Y–axis telescopic cover to the rightand left.

(8) Remove the cut scraps that have collected under the Y–axis telescopiccover (at the front).

Fig.1.2.1 (c) Daily Maintenance (4)

(9) Sweep away the cut scraps along the slope of the head groove.

(10)If the machine is equipped with the coolant unit, sweep away the cutscraps into the cut scrap receiver.


596

NOTEIf the turret cum is left with chips on it, the turret mechanicalunit may be damaged.

After turning off the power, clean the machine in the same way as forstarting work.

Inspect each section of the machine in the same way as for starting work.

1.2.2Cleaning

1.2.3Inspecting EachSection


597

Immediately after a machine is installed, when the spindle has not beenrotated for about one week or longer, or when a spindle unit component(such as the shaft and motor) has been replaced, the spindle must be runin.

%O1001(SP RUNNING)#100=0N1M3S7500G4X30.M5G4X90.#100=#100+1G4X0.1IF[#100 LE 5]GOTO1

#100=0N2M3S15000G4X15.M5G4X105.#100=#100+1G4X0.1IF[#100 LE 5]GOTO2




1.2.4Spindle Run–in (for15000min–1

Specification)


598



#100=0N8M3S15000G4X105.M5G4X15.#100=#100+1G4X0.1IF[#100 LE 5]GOTO8N10M3S15000G4X3600.M5M02%

The calculated life under the use of the high–speed spindle (15,000 min–1)is 12,600 hours in continuous 15,000 min–1 operation. However, the lifevaries with the usage condition. If an unusual sound, vibration, or a toohigh temperature is detected, contact the nearest FANUC technical center.

B–85014EN/01 2. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCEMAINTENANCE

599

2 PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE

Only the maintenance engineer is allowed to carry out periodicmaintenance.

The term maintenance engineer here refers to a person who has sufficientknowledge about machinery and electricity to carry out maintenance, andan appropriate certification from the organization to which he or shebelongs or from an applicable qualified organization.

The periodic maintenance of the machine involves removing a fixed coverusing a tool, and working with controller doors open. This job isdangerous to ordinary operators. Any operator is not allowed to carry outperiodic maintenance.

Keep the power to the machine shut off during maintenance.

Keep the power to the machine shut off during maintenance.

When you are finished with maintenance, make sure that all removedparts (including every screw) are attached to the locations where theywere.

Before starting to work with any Controller cabinet door open, shut offthe power at the main circuit breaker.

Before opening an Controller cabinet door, for example, for exchanginga fuse or battery, be sure to shut off the power at the main circuit breaker.

There may remain voltages at components in the Controller cabinet evenafter the power is shut off at the main circuit breaker. Such voltages arestill dangerous. Be careful not to touch any metal part recklessly.

When a cable is disconnected, do not switch on the power to themachine.

To avoid shock hazards, do not switch on the power with a cabledisconnected.

For work at a high elevation, use a secure scaffold.

When working with that part of the machine which is higher than your eyelevel, be sure to use a step.

If you clamber up the machine or get on an object not intended for use asa step (such as chair or desk), you may lose balance, resulting in anaccident.

Cautions for maintenance parts replacement

2. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE B–85014EN/01MAINTENANCE

600

Maintenance parts replacement shall be carried out strictly in accordancewith the applicable maintenance manual. If a part is attached incorrectly,it may damage the machine.

After parts replacement, make sure that all components (including everyscrew) removed for maintenance purposes are attached to the locationswhere they were.

Be sure to carry out periodic maintenance to maintain safe operation.)

To maintain the normal state of the machine, carry out the followingperiodic maintenance:

� Apply grease to the gear at the end of the spindle, and the turret gearevery 200 hours of operation.

� Apply grease to the LM guide block every 1,000 hours of operation.� Apply grease to the ball screw every 1,000 hours of operation.� Lubricate grease to the turret LM guide every 2000 hours of

operation.� Replace the disk springs every 1,000,000 times of tool exchange.� Replenish the centralized lubrication unit (option) with oil, when the

remaining oil in the pump is low.


601

NOTEUse a grease gun with a straight–type greasing rod (10 to13 in dia.). The chuck type cannot be used.

Straight–type

Chuck–type Hose–type

(1) X axis ball screwLubricate grease to the X axis ball screw as described below.Move the table to the “+” or “–” stroke end of the X axis and removethe cover on the side of the table.1) Remove the X axis telescopic covers.

2) Move the X axis full stroke in the “–” or “+” direction. Thinly apply the grease to the ball screw, and wipe off an excessof grease.(Not necessary when concentrated lubrication unit (option) )

2.1LUBRICATING EACHSECTION

2.1.1Greasing


602

3) At this time, clean the inside of the saddle.

NOTEIf shavings inside the saddle are left as they are, they maybe a cause of failure.

(2) Y axis ball screwLubricate grease to the Y axis ball screw as described below.1) Remove the Y axis telescopic cover.

2) Move the Y axis full stroke in the “–” direction. thinly applya grease to the ball screw, and wipe off a excess of grease.(Not necessary when concentrated lubrication unit (option) )

3) At this time, clean the inside of the bed.

NOTEIf shavings inside the bed are left as they are, they may bea cause of failure.


603

(3) Z axisLubricate grease to the Z axis ball screw as described below.1) Remove Z–axis roll cover.

2) Thinly apply a grease to the ball screw, and wipe off an excess ofgrease.

3) At this time, clean the inside of the slide cover.

NOTEIf shavings inside the Z–axis roll cover are left as they are,they may be a cause of failure.


604

(4) X axis LM guidesLubricate grease to the X axis LM guides as described below.1) Remove the covers at the front and back of the table.

Cover (front)

Table

Cover (back)

2) Grease the four LM blocks for the X–axis. Wipe off any excessgrease.

Table

Lubricate by grease gun

(5) Y axis LM guidesGrease the four LM blocks for the Y–axis under the saddle. Wipe offany excess grease.

Saddle

Lubricate by grease gun

Fig.(a) ROBODRILL α-T14/21iCe


605

(b) ROBODRILL α-T14/21iCLe

(c) ROBODRILL α-T14/21iCSe


606

(6) Z axis LM guideLubricate grease to the Z axis guide as described below.1) Remove the cover from the turret support and the cover from the

bottom of the spindle head.

2) Move the Z axis to the “–” stroke end, lubricate grease to theLM guide by a grease gun, and wipe off an excess of grease.(Not necessary when concentrated lubrication unit (option) )


607

(7) Turret LM guide1) Remove the TS cover.2) Lubricate grease to the LM guide with a grease gun every 2000

hours of operation (Alvania No.2 is recommended). Wipe off theextra grease, if any.

(8) Greasing turret and spindle gearsAccording to the following procedure, apply grease to the turret andspindle gear.1) Apply grease to the spindle gear.

2) Remove the cover at the back of turret and apply grease to the turret gear.


608

3) Apply grease to the turret cam.

4) Upon completion of the application of grease, change tools to rotate the turret at least one round or more for complete lubrication.


609

If the optional concentrated lubrication with intermittent oiling system isspecified for the machine, the ball screws and LM guides of each axis arelubricated automatically and periodically. Greasing in 2.1.1 is thereforenot required for these screws and guides. (However, the turret and spindlegears in (7) in V–2.1.1 must be greased.)

In concentrated lubrication, as soon as the power is turned on, the oilpump supplies lubricant to the ball screws and LM guides of each axis.

Before the amount of lubricant in the oil tank reaches a low level,replenish the oil tank with a lubricant shown in the following table:

NOTEFine metal chips and other materials may accumulate on thesaddle and bed. Remove the telescopic cover and cleanthem periodically.

�� 2.1.2 Recommended Brands of Lubrican

Product Manufacturer

Mulpus 68 Nisseki Mitsubishi

Super Mulpus 68 Nippon Oil Co., Ltd.

UNIWAY 68 Nippon Oil Co., Ltd.

Mobil Vactra Oil No. 2 Mobil Sekiyu K.K.

Tonna Oil T68 Showa Shell Sekiyu K.K.

FEBIS K68 Esso Sekiyu K.K.

NOTE1 The tank has a 1.8 � capacity. The feeding amount of the

tank has been adjusted to 1.0 cc/15 minutes.2 Before the machine is shipped, approx. 0.9 � of lublicant

(Mulpus 68) (only a little) has already been supplied to thetank for future leakage and feeding tests.

2.1.2Concentratedlubrication withIntermittent OilingSystem


610

ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ

ÃÃÃÃ

1.0

cc

ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ

0.8

cc

ÃÃÃÃ

0.6

cc

ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ

0.4

cc

ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ

0.2

cc

Dat

um

leve

l

Oili

ng p

ort

Man

ual h

andl

e

Mou

ntin

g ho

le 3

–M6

Term

inal

uni

t (w

ith c

over

)

Mot

or

Labe

lP

acki

ng

Ear

th m

ark

Ear

th te

rmin

al (M

3)

Labe

l

ÃÃÃD

isch

arge

port

Fig.2.1.2 (a) External Diagram and Adjustment of Oil Supply Amount, etc.


611

Fig.2.1.2 (b) ROBODRILL �–T14/21iCe

Fig.2.1.2 (c) ROBODRILL �–T14/21iCLe


612

Fig.2.1.2 (d) ROBODRILL �–T14/21�CSe

Fig.2.1.2 (e) Z–axis


613

Replenish grease and oil at the intervals indicated on the plate on themachine.

(Standard greasing)

2.1.3Greasing and OilingInterval


614

(With concentrated piping for lubrication)


615

(With concentrated oiling system)


616

FANUC recommends the lubricants listed below.



ALVANIAGREASE NO. 1


GUIDE RAILTURRET GEAR

At the time of maintenance

ALVANIAGREASE NO. 2

SPINDLE NOSEGEAR

MULTEMP LRLNO. 3

KYODO YUSHI BALL SCREW(X, Y, Z)

MOLY HDGREASE

SUMICO SPINDLE DISKSPRINGS

When exchangingDisk springs

SumiplexPS NO. 1

SUMICO TURRET MECH-ANISM INSIDE

When overhaulingTurret mechanism

LGSP1 SKF SPINDLE BEAR-ING

When exchangingSpindle bearings

FANUC recommends the following grease if the machine is providedwith the centralized greasing pipe (option).



ALVANIAGREASE NO. 1


GUIDE RAIL(X, Y, Z)

At the time ofmaintenance

LUBER FS–2 LUBERBALL SCREW(X, Y, Z)

FANUC recommends the following oil for the centralized lubricationpipe (option).



Super MULPUS68

Nisseki Mitsubishi GUIDE RAIL(X, Y, Z)

Replenish whenthe leavings in the

TETOLA OIL 68 SHOWA SHELLSEKIYU K.K.

BALL SCREW(X, Y, Z)

pump becomesscarce.

FANUC recommends the rust inhibitors listed below.



ANTIRUST P- 1000

Nisseki Mitsubishi GUIDE RAIL(X, Y, Z)TAPERED POR-

At the time ofpacking, transportation,

ANTIRUST P- 3600

TAPERED POR-TION OF THESPINDLETABLE SURFACE

transportation,and storage.

2.2SPECIFIED BRANDSOF LUBRICANT

2.2.1RecommendedLubricants (Grease andOil)


617

The table below gives a summary of periodical maintenance.

Semiannuary maintenance (at least once a year)

(1) Cleaning(Fan, air intake openings, and fan protectionnet)(2) Noise and vibration check

The maintenance period described above is applied to regular operation,and should be adjusted to meet actual operation conditions.

(1) CleaningDirt on the fan, air intake opening, or fan protection net may cause thespindle motor to overheat. Periodically clean them to prevent themotor from overheating.Follow the procedure below to clean the spindle motor section:1. Lower the Z–axis to a position around machine coordinate –250

mm in the manual mode with taking care not to make the toolinterfere with any item such as the jig mounted on the table, thenturn the power off.

2. Use the LOCK/UNLOCK key to open the front door.3. Use an air gun to remove dirt from the fan, air intake openings,

and fan protection net as much as possible. Then, wipe off dirtwith rags and brushes.

Spindle motor

Protection net

Air intake openings

Spindle head

Rags

Air gun

Air gun

During cleaning, wear items to protect you from dirt and dust such asmask, protection goggles, and cap.

(2) Noise and vibration checkIf there is an abnormality in a spindle motor bearing, abnormal noiseor vibration may be produced. Check the noise and vibration whenthe spindle motor is running.

2.3MAINTENANCE OFAC SPINDLE MOTOR

2.3.1Periodical Maintenance


618

(1) Replacing the CNC memory backup battery

(2) Replacing the absolute pulse coder batteryRefer to Section 2.9 of the FS16i/18i/160i/180i–MODEL A MaintenanceManual.

If the small window of the fuse unit is white, the fuse has blown.Disconnect the fuse unit and replace the fuse unit with a new one.

The inside light unit is located on the back of the front door as shown inthe figure below.Fluorescent lamp: FANUC specification A49L–0001–0070#A

Cabinet lamp assemblyFront door

(1) Turn the power off.

(2) Release the door lock and open the front door. (See Section 5.4 in III,“Opening and Closing Doors when the Power Is Off.”)

(3) Remove the screws from the two holders, then remove the inside lightunit from the holders.

(4) Slide the cover, then take out the contents of the inside light unit fromthe glass tube.

(5) Use a tool having a thin tip to disengage the part for fixing thefluorescent lamp as shown in the view from B.

(6) Turn and pull out the old fluorescent lamp as shown in the view fromC with the red button held down.

(7) Push in and mount a new fluorescent lamp as shown in the view fromD with the red button held down.

2.4REPLACINGEXPENDABLEPARTS

2.4.1Battery ReplacementMethod

2.4.2Fuse

2.4.3Fluorescent Lamp inthe Inside Light Unit


619

(8) Put the contents of the inside light unit back in the glass tube andmount the cover.

(9) Mount the inside light unit on the two holders.

NOTECarefully replace the fluorescent lamp not to cut yourselfwith any metal sheet in the inside light unit.The life of a fluorescent lamp is about 10,000 hours. Whenthe fluorescent lamp is burned out or begins blinking,replace it immediately.


620

Cabinet : A49L–0001–0070#SLCE124

��

Lamp unit

Screw

Cover Glass tube

Fluorescent tubeA49L–0001–0070#A

Terminal block

Button(color : red)

Tool with a thin tip Flurescent tube

Fluorescent tube

Pay attentionto this edge

�� ARROW C

ARROW D

B–85014EN/013. SERVO MOTOR ORIGIN

RESTORATIONMAINTENANCE

621

3 SERVO MOTOR ORIGIN RESTORATION

When the pulse coder connector of the servo motor is reconnected afterdisconnection, for example, the position of the origin will be lost, causingan alarm to be issued to request servo motor origin return. In such a case,servo motor origin return must be performed. (Here, manual origin returnoperation is generally referred to as origin restoration.) Origin restorationis based on the marks provided on the X-axis, Y-axis, and Z-axis. (Seethe figure below.)

X–axis

Z–axis

Y–axis

3. SERVO MOTOR ORIGIN RESTORATION B–85014EN/01MAINTENANCE

622

Follow the procedure below.

(1) First, select handle mode. Next, turn the handle through one or moreturns along a desired restoration axis (12 mm or more along the eachaxis). Then, turn the machine power off, then back on again.

(2) Display QUICK screen, then MAINTENANCE/SETTING.

(3) Select MOTOR ORGN. Press 2, then the INPUT key. The followingscreen appears.

(4) Position the cursor to EXEC for the desired restoration axis by usingcursor key or . The message “SET HANDLE MODE, THENTURN HANDLE ONE OR MORE TURNS ALONGRESTORATION AXIS ...” is displayed. This operation can beskipped if it was performed as part of step (1).



623

(5) Press the [EXEC] soft key. The following screen appears.

(6) Separate the diamond mark from the notch mark by at least 30 mm,according to guidance 1. This operation is not required if the twomarks are already separated by 30 mm or more.

�

30 mm ��

(7) Turn the handle in the negative (–) direction in handle mode until thediamond mark is aligned with the notch mark, then press the [EXEC]soft key, according to guidance 2.

Carefully move the tool along the X– and Y–axes so that the rhombusmark is always between the two circles.

3. SERVO MOTOR ORIGIN RESTORATION B–85014EN/01MAINTENANCE

624

(8) On the displayed screen, press the [MODE CHANGE] soft keyaccording to guidance 3. The message “ORGN REST. MODE ON”appears.



625

(9) Press the [ORIGIN REST.] soft key, according to guidance 4. Thisoperation causes a very slight movement along the axis to establishthe origin. Check that the two diamond marks are precisely alignedwith each other after this operation. If the marks are not so aligned,the position of the origin may be displaced. In such a case, contactyour local FANUC service center.

Correct origin position Incorrect origin position

X–axis

The rhombus mark is alignedwith the right circle.

The rhombus mark is not aligned with the right circle.

Y–axis

The rhombus mark isaligned with the left circle. The rhombus mark is not aligned with the left circle.

Z–axis

The rhombus mark is alignedwith the upper circle.

The rhombus mark is not aligned with the upper circle.

(10)Display the alarm screen by pressing the RESET button, then checkthat the origin return request alarm for the origin restoration axis hasbeen cleared. To perform origin restoration for another axis, repeatthe above procedure.

4. AUTOMATIC TURRET RESTORATION B–85014EN/01MAINTENANCE

626

4 AUTOMATIC TURRET RESTORATION

The ROBODRILL features a turret restoration function, which enablesthe automatic restoration of the normal state if a tool change operationshould be interrupted or upon the issue of an alarm during or after toolchange. If a problem related to tool replacement occurs, you can use thisfunction to restore the system to the normal status in most cases. You canalso perform operations according to the instructions displayed on thescreen to complete restoration easily.

Follow the procedure below.


(2) Select TURRET REST. Press 1, then the INPUT keys in this order.The following screen appears.

B–85014EN/014. AUTOMATIC TURRET


627

(3) Press the [MODE CHANGE] soft key, according to guidance 1. Thefollowing screen appears. To help ensure successful restoration, themode is fixed after this point, thus disabling any unnecessaryoperations. (The only way to stop restoration is to turn off the power.)

(4) Clear any alarm by pressing the emergency stop button, according toguidance 2. (The alarm is released.)

(5) After checking that the program number displayed at the top of thescreen is O9040, press the cycle start button, according to guidance3. Then, restoration starts. If any unusual sound is heard, stop theoperation immediately. Upon the completion of restoration, thefollowing screen appears.

4. AUTOMATIC TURRET RESTORATION B–85014EN/01MAINTENANCE

628

(6) Check and enter the selected tool number. When the tool numberlocated at the bottom of the turret is 3, press 3, then the INPUT key.When a tool number is entered, the following screen appears.

(7) Turn the power off, then back on again, according to the message. If,however, the lowest side of the turret is not level, as shown below,when restoration is completed, a mechanical problem is involved. Insuch a case, contact your local FANUC service center.

Correct turret indexing Incorrect turret indexing

Not level

B–85014EN/014. AUTOMATIC TURRET


629

NOTEIf the pull stud is broken, the broken pull stud will be leftinside the spindle. This prevents an arbor from beingclamped to the spindle. To enable restoration from the statewhere the pull stud is broken, first perform turret restorationwithout attaching an arbor. Next, check that the broken pullstud has dropped out of the spindle taper hole. Then, attacha tool to the turret and perform another turret restorationoperation.

5. PARAMETER RESET, CHECK, AND REGISTRATION FUNCTIONS B–85014EN/01MAINTENANCE

630

5PARAMETER RESET, CHECK, AND REGISTRATIONFUNCTIONS

Factory–set data for various types of parameters is saved in non–volatilememory.

If parameter data is erased due to a problem such as the exhausted CNCbattery, you can use the saved data to simply restore factory–set data. Thisis called the parameter reset function. You can also compare the savedparameter data with the parameter data currently set for the ROBODRILLand list the results. This is called the parameter check function.

After changing parameter data, you can save it in non–volatile memory.This is called the parameter registration function.

B–85014EN/015. PARAMETER RESET, CHECK,

AND REGISTRATION FUNCTIONSMAINTENANCE

631


(2) Select PARAMETER. Key in [3] and [INPUT]. The followingscreen appears. Press soft key [RESTORETION], [INSPECTION],or [STORE].

5.1BASIC OPERATION


632

(1) Press the EMG STOP button.Position the cursor on data to be reset and press soft key [SELECT].(“CONVERSATIONAL DATA” is displayed only when the quickconversational programming function incorporates SUPER C.A.PiM.)

(2) If you have registered your data, the following window appears.Position the cursor on FACTORY–SET DATA to set factory–set dataor on STORED PARAMETER to set the registered data, then presssoft key [SELECT].

If you have not registered your data, this window does not appear.(The factory–set data is set.)


(4) When the following window appears, reset operation is complete.Turn the power off, then on again.

(5) Check that the parameter settings are the same as the values listed inthe data sheet (parameters) supplied with the machine.Perform motor reference position return.

5.2RESETTINGPARAMETERS

B–85014EN/015. PARAMETER RESET, CHECK,

AND REGISTRATION FUNCTIONSMAINTENANCE

633

(1) Position the cursor on data to be checked and press soft key[SELECT].

(2) If you have registered your data, the following window appears.Position the cursor on the FACTORY–SET DATA to compare thecurrent data with the factory–set data or on the STOREDPARAMETER to compare it with the registered data, then press softkey [SELECT].

If you have not registered your data, this window does not appear.(The current data is compared with the factory–set data.)


(4) When the check is complete with different data found, a window asshown below appears:

5.3CHECKINGPARAMETERS


634


(2) When the following window appears, registration is complete.

When registration is complete, the screen changes as follows:

�

NOTE1 Never turn the power off during data registration. The

non–volatile memory is damaged.2 NC parameter, PMC parameter, and pitch error data can be

registered.Setup data such as offset data and machining programs arenot registered.

3 If the non–volatile memory becomes faulty or is damaged,the registered data is erased.Backing up data such as parameter data using the HandyFile or memory card is recommended to prepare for theworst.After changing parameters, write the changes in the datasheet supplied with the machine.

5.4REGISTERINGPARAMETERS

B–85014EN/01 6. RIGID TAPPING RETURN FUNCTIONMAINTENANCE

635

6 RIGID TAPPING RETURN FUNCTION

If a tap bites into the workpiece and the machine stops due to anabnormality such as an operator error or power failure, the tap can bepulled out up to a position near point R.

(1) Display QUICK SCREEN, then MAINTENANCE/SETTING.

(2) Select 4.RIGID TAPPING. Key in [4] and [INPUT]. The followingscreen appears. (The operation mode automatically changes to theMDI mode.)

Press the Z AXIS button on the operator’s panel. Rigid tapping returnoperation is executed.

6. RIGID TAPPING RETURN FUNCTION B–85014EN/01MAINTENANCE

636

NOTE1 When the Z AXIS button is released during return operation,

the operation stops. To restart the operation, press the ZAXIS button again.

2 If rigid tapping stops at emergency stop or due to a powerfailure, the position of the spindle is lost.For this reason, after return operation, the relationshipbetween the spindle and Z–axis positions is notguaranteed.

3 By rigid tapping return operation which stops at emergencystop or due to a power failure, then restarts, the tap may notcompletely be pulled out from the workpiece. In this case,set the amount of return (�) (NC parameter No. 5382).By this operation, the tap is returned by the amount (�).

4 The CNC internally executes a return program to performtapping return operation.For this reason, when tapping return operation isperformed, modal information may partly be changed.

APPENDIXES

B–85014EN/01 A. SPECIFICATIONSAPPENDIXES

639

A SPECIFICATIONS

Mechanical section (– : Unavailable)

SPECIFICATIONSITEM






150 to 480mm


400mm












34 to 120mm /80mm120 to 250mm /40mm]









Feed motors FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR MODEL α3/αM8iX, Y, Z : αM8i (2.0 kw)


60Hz 1Hz, �10kVA








A. SPECIFICATIONS B–85014EN/01APPENDIXES

640

ITEMSPECIFICATIONS

ITEMα–T14iCLeα–T14iCeα–T14iCSe

Safety andmaintenance

Splash guard Totally enclosed type (Door is open/closed manually.)

Interlock input function

Control system FANUC Series 18i- MB

Controlled controlled axes 3 axes: X, Y, Zaxes Simultaneously controllable axes 3 axes: XYZ and

2 axes: XY, YZ, ZX

SPECIFICATIONSITEM






150 to 480mm


400mm












34 to 120mm /80mm120 to 250mm /40mm]









Feed motors FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR MODEL α3/αM8iX, Y, Z : αM8i (2.0 kw)


60Hz 1Hz, �10kVA






641

ITEMSPECIFICATIONS

ITEMα–T21iCLeα–T21iCeα–T21iCSe




Safety andmaintenance

Splash guard Totally enclosed type (Door is open/closed manually.)

Interlock input function

Control system FANUC Series 18i- MB

Controlled controlled axes 3 axes: X, Y, Zaxes Simultaneously controllable axes 3 axes: XYZ and

2 axes: XY, YZ, ZX

Control sectionITEM SPECIFICATIONS

Programming Least input increment 0.001mm/0.0001inmethods Least command increment 0. 001mm

Max. programmable dimension ±99999.999mm/±9999.9999in

Absolute/incremental programming G90/G91

Decimal point programming Provided

Inch/millimeter selection G20/G21

Play back Provided

Programming resolution multiplied by 10 Provided

Tape code Automatic recognition of EIA RS–244–B/ISO 840 code

Interpolation Positioning G00

Linear interpolation G01

Circular interpolation G02/G03 (multi–quadrant command is possible)

Buffer register Provided

FeedCutting feedrate

Programming with character F and 4 digits in mm/min, or F and 5 digits in inch/min

Dwell G04

Rapid tapping M29 (Max.5000 min–1 6000min–1)

Handwheel feedManual pulse generator

0.001/0.01/0.1/0.2mm x 0.02mm/0.0001/0.001/0.01/0.02 in per graduation

Automatic acceleration/deceleration Provided

Rapid traverse override F0/25/100%

Cutting feed override 0 – 200% in 10% increment

Part program Part program storage Punch tape of 320mstorage and edit Part program edit Delete, insert, alter

Program number search Provided

Sequence number search Provided

Address search Provided

No. of programs registered 200

Background editing Another program can be edited during machining

Expanded tape editingProvided

Copies, moves, and links programs.

Operation and Conversational programming MANUAL GUIDE or SUPER C. A. P�Mdisplay Display section 10. 4″ color LCD

Operator’s panelOperation section Keyboard with membrane switches

Display functionCurrent positions, specified values, compensation data,

parameters, etc.

MDI function Provided

Dynamic graphic display Solid drawings with shade are displayed.


642

ITEM SPECIFICATIONS

I/O function I/O interface Reader/punch interface (For FANUC I/O equipment)and devices Quick output M81, M82

Auxiliary output On–off output M83/M84 : ON/OFF

Response waiting output M80, M85 to M89

M code BCD output

Provided

Ordinary miscellaneous outputs are not generated. Twodigits of a miscellaneous function (M code) are output inBCD, instead. To use this function, the customers shouldprepare necessary external devices and cables by them-selves.

External work number search

Provided

Up to 15 machining programs can be selected for activationaccording to input signals. To use this function, the custom-ers should prepare necessary switches, controls, andcables by themselves.

External program number search

Provided

All machining programs in memory can be selected foractivation according to input signals. To use this function,the customers should prepare necessary switches, con-trols, and cables by themselves.

Directory display of the Floppy Cassette Provided

Functions Spindle speed function S4- digit programming with character S and 4 digits

Spindle speed override 30 to 200% in 10% increment

Tool function Programming with character T and 2 digits.

Miscellaneous function Programming with character M and 3 digits.

Tool compensation Tool length offset G43, G44/G49

Cutter compensation G41, G42/G40

Number of tool offsets 200

Tool length measurementProvided

Attaches the current tool position to the offset data at atouch of a button.

Tool life management

Al tool monitor

Provided

Performs tool life management (tool damage and weardetection) according to programmed commands. Use ofthis function does not require the customers to prepareexternal devices and cables by themselves.

Coordinate Manual return to reference position Providedsystem Automatic return to reference position G28

Reference position return check G27

Return from reference position G29

Automatic coordinate system setting Provided

Coordinate system setting G92

Workpiece coordinate system selectionProvided

G54 to G59

Coordinate system rotationProvidedG68/G69

Operation Label skip Providedsupport Single block Providedfunction

Optional stop Provided

Optional block skip Provided

Dry run Provided

Machine lock Provided


643

ITEM SPECIFICATIONS

Operation Mirror image X, Y axessupport Z- axis feed cancel Providedfunction

Program stop Provided

Program end Provided

Feed hold Provided

Circuit interpolation radius programming Provided

Canned cycle G73, G74, G76, G81–G89/G80

Sub–program M98/M99

Macro program Custom macro B

Exact stop check G90

Exact stop check mode G61/G64

Programmable data input G10

Automatic corner overrideProvidedG62/G64

Automatic deceleration at the corner

Mechanical error Backlash compensation Providedcompensation Pitch error compensation Provided

Machine controlsub–port function Integrated PMC

Provided

Automation support Skip function G31function

Automatic power offProvided

Power is turned off when machining is completed or analarm occurs.

Safety and Emergency stop Providedmaintenance Overtravel Provided

Stored stroke check Provided

Expanded stored stroke check 2 Provided

Self diagnosis Alarm display, I/O signal diagnosis, etc.

Enclosure and Enclosure Sealed dust–proof typeinstallation

Power supply200 VAC +10% to –15%, 3–phase, 50/60Hz �1Hz or220 VAC +10% to –15%, 3–phase, 60Hz �1Hz, 10kVA

Room temperature 0 to 45�C (No freezing)

Environmental Temperature change 1.1�C/min maxEnvironmentalconditions Relative humidity 75% or less (normal), 95% max. (temporary)

Vibration 5m/S2 (0.5g) or less

Servo systemServo motors

FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR MODEL αX, Y, Z : MODEL αM6

Servo unit Digital AC servo

Position detectorsFully electronic absolute position detector

(αseries pulse coder)


644

Mechanical section optionITEM SPECIFICATIONS

DIN tooling DIN (For Europa)

High column 100/200/300mm(S type 100/200mm)

Coolant Cutting agent motor : 0.25 kW ACCutting agent tank capacity : 100 liters/200 litersRear placement : Full–close splash guard is required.

Flood coolant Cutting agent motor : 0.25 kW/0.4 kW ACCutting agent tank capacity : 100 liters/200 litersWith cleaning oil gun

Double splash guard door Front double door(A double door is included as standard for the S type)

Automatic splash guard side door Automatic right–side doorPneumatic pressure source: Flow rate at an atmospheric pressure

Splash guard door automatic opening/closing

Automatic front doorCompressed air supply : +0.12 m3/min (+120 liters/min)measured under atmospheric pressureFront door only. It is opened or closed according to a programmed command or by press-ing a button.

Top cover Simple cover/full cover

Centralized intermittent lubrication unit Lubricator motor : 3 W ACLubricant oil tank capacity : 1.8 litersAutomatic intermittent lubrication for ball screws and LM guides

Centralized greasing piping Piping for greasing ball screws and LM guideStatus indicator lamp Three–stage (green, yellow, and red)

(green, yellow, and blue)(For general use in Japan and foreign countries)(For CE marks)Indicates machining in progress, program end, and alarm.

Courtesy lamp Fluorescent lamp in the splash guardVoltage : 24 VACWattage : 24 W

Chip air blower For dry cutting

Color specification The color of the splash guard can be changed as specified by the customer.

Power cord Length of the primary power cable connected to the breaker in the NC cabinet : 5m

Transportation material Needed for transportation.

High–speed spindle Maximum speed : 15000min–1/rigid tapping, 6000min–1

Motor : 3.7kW (10–minute rating)/1.5 kW (continuous rating)

Center–through coolant specification Coolant tank capacity : 240� (�–T14iCS 200�)

Center–through motor : AC, 0.75 kW

Rated discharge pressure : 15 kgf/cm2

Specification of the two–side restrainedspindle (NC5)

Maximum speed: 8000min–1


645

Control section optionITEM SPECIFICATIONS

Control on one additional axisControl on two additional axes

Maximum number of concurrently controlled axes: 4Power capacity: +2 KVAServo motor: FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR MODEL�0.5/3000, �1/3000, �2/2000, �2/3000, �3/3000, �1/5000�� 2/5000�� M2/5000��M3/5000�� 4/4000�� 8/3000�

Operator’s panel with alphabet key NC statement of conventional type

Program storage capacity expansion Amount equivalent to 1280m of tape (total)

Remote buffer Provided

AI High precision contour control Provided

Data server (160MB/100BASE–T) Provided

Ethernet (100BASE–T) Provided

HSSB interface Provided

FANUC Handy File Provided

Additional I/O Can be selected as required.

FANUC RENSCAN400 Provided

Power Failure Backup Provided

Software optionsITEM SPECIFICATIONS

48 workpiece coordinate systems Provided.

300 workpiece coordinate systems Provided.

Helical interpolation Provided.

Tool offset Provided.

Interruption type custom macro Provided.

Scaling Provided.

Polar coordinate command Provided.

Small–diameter peck drilling cycle Provided.

Unidirectional positioning Provided.

Automatic tool length measurement Provided.

High–speed remote buffer B Provided.

400 registerable programs Provided.

Modeler control II (AI namo contour control)

Provided.

NURBS interpolation Provided.

Cylindrical interpolation Provided.

One–digit F code feed Provided.

Multistage skip function Provided.

Figure copy Provided.

Three–dimensional coordinate conversion Provided.

Inverse time feed Provided.

Tool offset memory C Provided.

Basic FACTOLINK package Provided.

ROBODRILL Program Manager Provided.

FAPT LADDER–III Provided.

B. DIMENSIONS OF THE MACHINE B–85014EN/01APPENDIXES

646

B DIMENSIONS OF THE MACHINE

B–85014EN/01 B. DIMENSIONS OF THE MACHINEAPPENDIXES

647

Fig.B.1 (a) Shape and Dimensions of the Machine (α–T14/21iCe)

B.1SHAPE ANDDIMENSIONS OF THEMACHINE


648

Fig.B.1 (b) Shape and Dimensions of the Machine (α–T14/21iCLe)


649

Fig.B.1 (c) Shape and Dimensions of the Machine (α–T14/21iCSe)


650

Fig.B.2 (a) Dimensions of the Table Surface and T Groove (nominal width: 14) (α–T14/21iCe)

B.2DIMENSIONS OF THETABLE SURFACEAND T GROOVE(NOMINAL WIDTH:14)


651

T–SLOT

Table4–M12 depth24

Fig.B.2 (b) Dimensions of the Table Surface and T Groove (nominal width: 14) (α–T14/21iCLe)


652

T–SLOT

Table 4–M12 depth24

Fig.B.2 (c) Dimensions of the Table Surface and T Groove (nominal width: 14) (α–T14/21iCSe)


653

ÃÃÃDoor openingwidth 550

Turret body (α–T14iC)

Max. tool length reachingarea (α–T21iC)

Max. tool length reaching area (α–T14iC)

Turret body (α–T21iC)

Fig.B.3 (a) Internal Dimensions of Splash Guard (α–T14/21iCe)

B.3DIMENSIONS OF THEINSIDE OF THESPLASH GUARD


654

ÃÃÃDoor openingwidth 825

Turret body (α–T14iCL)

Max. tool length reachingarea (α–T21iCL)

Max. tool length reaching area (α–T14iCL)

Turret body (α–T21iCL)

Fig.B.3 (b) Internal Dimensions of Splash Guard (α–T14/21iCLe)


655

Door openingwidth 525

Turret body (α–T14iCS)

Max. tool length reachingarea (α–T21iCS)

Max. tool length reaching area (α–T14iCS)

Turret body (α–T21iCS)

Fig.B.3 (c) Internal Dimensions of Splash Guard (α–T14/21iCSe)


656

Fig.B.4 (a) Dimensions of the System Around the Coolant Outlets (α–T14 (21) iCe/iCLe)

Fig.B.4 (b) Dimensions of the System Around the Coolant Outlets (α–T14/21iCSe)

B.4DIMENSIONS OF THESYSTEM AROUNDTHE COOLANTOUTLETS


657

Fig.B.5 Dimensions of the End of the Spindle

B.5DIMENSIONS OF THEEND OF THESPINDLE


658

8–burring–M6 (convex on back)

NBR rubber section 8–8 dia.Note) Adhere NBR rubber 70� t2 to the portion indicatedby shading after coating.

Dimensions of mist collector duct mounting sheet metal

Sheet metal mounting hole dimensions

cut

cut

Fig.B.6 (A) α – T14 (21) �Ce/CLe

8–burring–M6 (convex on back)NBR rubber section 8–8 dia.

Note) Adhere NBR rubber 70� t2 to the portion indicatedby shading after coating.

Dimensions of mist collector duct mounting sheet metal

Sheet metal mounting hole dimensions

cut

cut

Fig.B.6 (B) α – T14 (21) �Cse

B.6MIST COLLECTORMOUNTING HOLEDIMENSIONS

B–85014EN/01 C. G CODESAPPENDIXES

659

C G CODES

The following G codes are offered.

G code Group Function

*G00 Positioning

*G01 Linear interpolation

G0201

Circular interpolation/Helical interpolation CW (Note 7)

G03 Circular interpolation/Helical interpolation CCW (Note 7)

G04 Dwell, exact stop

G05.1

00

Modeler control (AI contour control) (G05.1 Q1) (Note 7)Modeler control (AI namo contour control) (G05.1 Q1)

G05.4

00

High–speed HRV function

G05 AI High precision contouring control (G05P10000) (Note 7)

G06.2 01 NURBS interpolation (Note 7)

G07.1 Cylindricalinter polation (Note 7)

G08 Precession control (G08 P1)

G0900

Exact stop

G10 Setting of data

*G15 Polar coordinate command cancel (Note 7)

G1617

Polar coordinate command (Note 7)

*G17 XY plane selection

*G18 02 ZX plane selection

*G19 YZ plane selection

G20 Input in inch

G2106

Input in mm

*G22 Stored stroke check ON (Note 7)

G2304

Stored stroke check OFF (Note 7)

G27 Reference point return check

G28 Return to reference point

G29 00 Return from reference point

G31 Skip function

G37 Automatic tool length measurement (Note 7)

C. G CODES B–85014EN/01APPENDIXES

660

G code FunctionGroup

*G40 Cutter compensation cancel

G41 07 Cutter compensation left

G42 Cutter compensation right

G43 Tool length compensation + direction

G4408

Tool length compensation – direction

G45 Tool position offset extension (Note 7)

G4600

Tool position offset reduction (Note 7)

G47 Tool position offset two-hold extension (Note 7)

G4800

Tool position offset 1/2 reduction (Note 7)

*G49 08 Tool length compensation cancel

*G50 Scaling cancel (Note 7)

G5111

Scaling (Note 7)

G52 Local coordinate system setting

G5300

Machine coordinate system selection

*G54 Work coordinate system 1 setting

G54.1 Additional workpiece coordinate system selection (Note 7)

G55 Work coordinate system 2 setting

G56 14 Work coordinate system 3 setting




G60 00 One direction positioning (Note 7)

G61 Exact stop mode

G62 15 Automatic corner

*G64 Cutting mode

G65 00 Macro call

G66 Custom macro modal call

*G6712

Cancel of custom macro modal call

G68 Coordinate system rotation/3–dimensional coordinate systemconversion (Note 7)

*G6916

Canceling coordinate system rotation/Canceling 3–dimension-al coordinate system conversion (Note 7)

G72.1 00 Figure copying (Note 7)

B–85014EN/01 C. G CODESAPPENDIXES

661

G code FunctionGroup

G73 Peck drilling cycle

G74 Counter tapping cycle

G76 Fine boring cycle

*G80 Canned cycle cancel

G81 Drilling cycle, spot boring

G82 09 Drilling cycle, counter boring

G83 Peck drilling cycle

G84 Tapping cycle

G85 Boring cycle

G86 Boring cycle

G87 Back boring cycle

G88 Boring cycle

G8909

Boring cycle

*G90 Absolute command

*G9103

Incremental command

G92 00 Programming of absolute zero point

G93 Inverse time feed (Note 7)

*G9405

Feed per minute

*G98 Return to initial point in canned cycle

G9910

Return to R point in canned cycle

C. G CODES B–85014EN/01APPENDIXES

662

NOTE1 G codes marked * are initial G codes in turning power on.

For G20 and G21, the G code before turning power offremains.

2 G codes of group 00 are not modal. There are only effectivein the block in which they are specified.

3 If a G code not listed in the table of G codes is inputted, orG code for an option not specified in the NC is commanded,an alarm (No. 010) is displayed.

4 A number of G codes can be specified in the same block.When more than one G code of the same group is specified,the G code specified later is effective.

5 If any G code in group 01 is specified in a canned cyclemode, the canned cycle is automatically cancelled and theG80 condition is entered. However G codes in group 01 isnot affected by any of the canned cycle G codes.

6 G code is displayed by each group number.7 Option. (For G02 and G03, only clockwise and

counterclockwise helical interpolation are optional. For G68and G69, only three–dimensional coordinate conversionand three–dimensional coordinate conversion cancel areoptional.)

B–85014EN/01 D. OPERATIONAPPENDIXES

663

D OPERATION

Classifica-tion Function

Programprotect

key

SettingPWE-1 Mode Function

button Operation

Clear Memory all clear Power ON _ [RESET] + [DELETE]

Parameters and offset value

Power ON _ [RESET]

Clearing stored pro-gram

Power ON _ [2] and [5] (manipulated on the IPL screen) � select [3].

Reset Run time _ Currentposition

[(OPRT)] [TIME:0] � [EXEC]

Number of parts _ POS [(OPRT)] [PART:0] � [EXEC]

OT alarm Power ON _ [2] and [5] (manipulated on theIPL screen) � select [5].

Data inputfrom MDI

Parameter � MDI or emergency

stop

SYSTEM(Parame-

ter)

Parameter No.� [NO.SRH]�DATA� [INPUT] �PWE=0� [RESET]

Offset value � _ Offset Offset No. � [NO.SRH] � Offset Data � [INPUT]

Setting data � MDI Setting Setting No. � [NO.SRH] � Data � [INPUT]

Inputting PMC param-eters (for the counterand data table)

� MDI mode oremergency

stop

SYSTEM(PMC)

[PMCPRM]� [COUNTER] or [DATA] � Data � [INPUT]

Inputting PMC param-eters (for the timer andkeep relay)

� MDI mode oremergency

stop

SYSTEM(PMC)

[PMCPRM] � [TIMER] or [KEEPRL] � Data � [IN-PUT]

Tool length measure-ment

MANUAL Currentposition �

Offset

[POS] (Displaying relative coordinates)�[Z]�[CAN] � [OFFSET] � Place a toolto the specified position.Offset No. � [NO.SRH] � [EOB] and [Z] � [INPUT]

Data inputfrom External I/O

Parameter � EDIT oremergency

stop

SYSTEM(PARAM)

[(OPRT)] � [ � ] � [READ]

� [EXEC]

PMC parameter � Emergencystop

SYSTEM(PMC)

[I/O]�(CHANNEL) “1” [INPUT]� (DEVICE) [FDCAS] �(FUNCTION) [READ] � (DATAKIND) [PARAM] � (FILE NO.)file number � [EXEC]

Data inputfrom

Offset value � EDIT [(OPRT)] � [ � ] � [READ]� [EXEC]

External I/OProgram input � EDIT PROG [(OPRT)] � [ � ] � [READ]

� [EXEC]

D. OPERATION B–85014EN/01APPENDIXES

664

Classifica-tion

OperationFunctionbutton

ModeSettingPWE-1

Programprotect

keyFunction

Output to External I/O

Parameter EDIT SYSTEM(PARAM)

[(OPRT)] � [ � ] �

[PUNCH] � [EXEC]

Offset value EDIT OFFSET [(OPRT)] � [ � ] � [PUNCH]� [EXEC]

All program EDIT PROG [O]� –9999 � [ � ] � [PUNCH] � [EXEC]

One program EDIT PROG [O]� Program No. � [ � ] � [PUNCH] � [EXEC]

Search Program No. search MEMORY orEDIT

PROG [O] � Program No. �

[O.SRH]

Sequence No. search AUTO PROG Program No. Search � N � Sequence No. � [ N.SRH]

Address word search EDIT PROG Searching DATA�[ SRH � ]or [ SRH �]

Address search EDIT PROG Searching Address � [ SRH � ] or [ SRH �]

Offset No. _ OFFSET Offset No. � [NO.SRH]

Diagnosis _ SYSTEM(��

��)

Diagnosis No. � [NO.SRH]

Parameter No. _ SYSTEM(PARAM)

Parameter No. � [NO.SRH]

Program editing

Displaying the capac-ity of memory used

EDIT PROG [LIBRARY]

Deletion of all pro-grams

� EDIT PROG [O] � –9999 � [DELET]

Deletion of a program � EDIT PROG [O] � Program No. � [DELET]

Deletion of severalblocks

� EDIT PROG [N] � Sequence No. � [DELET]

Deletion of a block � EDIT PROG EOB � [DELET]

Deletion of a word � EDIT PROG Search the word to be Deleted� [DELET]

Alteration of a word � EDIT PROG Search the word to be Altered� Address � Data � [ALTER]

Insertion of a word � EDIT PROG Search the word before theplace in the program � Address � Data �

[INSRT]

Collation Collation in memorywith tape

EDIT PROG [(OPRT)] � [ � ] � [READ]� [EXEC]

B–85014EN/01 D. OPERATIONAPPENDIXES

665

Classifica-tion

OperationFunctionbutton

ModeSettingPWE-1

Programprotect

keyFunction

Input from oroutput to the

Program input � EDIT PROG [N] � File No. � [ � ] � [READ]] �[EXEC]

Handy FileAll programs output EDIT PROG [O] � –9999 � [ � ]

� [READ] � [EXEC]

One program output EDIT PROG [O] � Program No. � [ � ] � [READ] � [EXEC]

File search EDIT PROG [N] � File No. � [ � ] � [F SRH] � [EXEC]

Deletion of file � EDIT PROG [N] � File No. � [ � ] � [F DELETE] � [EXEC]

Collation of program EDIT PROG Searching a file for its beginning � [O]� Program No. � [(OPRT)] � [ � ] � [READ] � [EXEC]

Play back NC data input EDIT, MANUAL

PROG Display QUICK screen, then 31:SEQ SELECTION. � SelectTEACHING IN using [�] or [�]. �Select [ON].Start the machine. � [X] [Y]or [Z] � [INSERT] � (NCdata) [INSERT] � [EOB]� [INSERT]

Tool change Changing tools MDI _ [TOOL CHANG]

Coolant Applying coolant Power ON _ [CLNT]

Flood coolant

Applying flood coolant Power ON _ Display QUICK screen, then 31:SEQ SELECTIOM. � SelectFlood coolant using [�] or [�]. �Select [ON].

INTERNAL LIGHT

Turning on the light inthe machine

Power ON _ Display QUICK screen, then 31:SEQ SELECTIOM. � Select INTERNAL LIGHT using [�] or[�]. � Select [ON].

E. STATUS LIST B–85014EN/01APPENDIXES

666

E STATUS LIST

� : The status is not changed or the movement is continued.� : The status is cancelled or the movement is interrupted.

Item When turning power on When reset

Setting data Offset value � �

Data set by the MDI setting operation

� �

Parameter � �

Other data Programs in memory � �

Contents in the buffer storage × �: MDI mode× : Other mode

Display of sequence number × �

One shot G code × ×

Modal G code Initial G codes.(For G20 and G21, the one effective before cutting off thepower is effective.)

�

F Zero �

S, T, M × �

Repetition specification (K) × ×

Coordinate Work coordinate value Zero �

Action in Movement × ×operation

Dwell × ×

Issuance of M, S and T codes × ×

Tool length × � : MDI modeOther modes depend on parameter “RS43”.

Cutter compensation × �: MDI mode× : Other mode

Storing called subprogram number

× ×(Note)

B–85014EN/01 E. STATUS LISTAPPENDIXES

667

Item When resetWhen turning power on

Output signalsfor indication

ALM Extinguishes if there is no causefor the alarm

Extinguishes if there is no causefor the alarm

of LEDsNOT READY × ×

(Lights in emergency stop)

BUF Extinguishes �: MDI mode× : Other mode

REFERENCE POINT RETURNCOMPLETION LED

× �

(× : Emergency stop)

S and T codes × �

M code × ×

M, S and T strobe strobe signals

× ×

Spindle revolution signal (S analogue signal)

� �

NC ready signal(MA, MB)

ON �

Servo ready signal ON (When other than servo alarm)

ON (When other than servo alarm)

CYCLE TART LED × ×

FEED HOLD LED × ×

NOTEWhen a reset is performed during execution of asubprogram, execution returns to the head of the program.Execution cannot be started from the middle of thesubprogram.

F. ERROR CODES B–85014EN/01APPENDIXES

668

F ERROR CODES

B–85014EN/01 F. ERROR CODESAPPENDIXES

669

(1) P/S Alarm

MessageNumber

ContentsRemedy Remarks

000 PLEASE TURN OFF POWER Confirm the contents of the set parame-

Parameter which requires the power supply tobe disconnected once was set.

ter. Turn off the power, then turn it on.

001 TH PARITY ALARM Correct the program or tape.

Character with incorrect parity was input.

002 TV PARITY ALARM Correct the program or tape. Valid when system

The number of characters in a block is odd.NC parameter (No. 0000#0) is 1.

003 TOO MANY DIGITS Correct the program.

Data exceeding the maximum number of digitswas input.

004 ADDRESS NOT FOUND Correct the program. Ex.

A numeral or the sign “–” was input without anaddress at the beginning of the block.

X 10.5

005 NO DATA AFTER ADDRESS Correct the program. AddressData

The address was not followed by data but wasfollowed by the next address or EOB code.

006 ILLEGAL USE OF NEGATIVE SIGN

The sign “–” was input with an address whichcannot use the sign “–”. Or, two or more “–”signs were input. (Sign “–” input error)

007 ILLEGAL USE OF DECIMAL POINT

The decimal point “.” was input with an addresswhich cannot use the decimal point “.”. Or, twoor more decimal points “.” were input. (Decimal point “.” input error)

009 ILLEGAL ADDRESS INPUT For example, if “G00P100” is comman-

Unusable address was input in significant in-formation area.Alternatively, an address that is not related tothe specified G code was entered in the blockin which the G code is specified.

ded, this alarm occurs. (In this case, the unusable address is P.)Modify the program.

010 IMPROPER G–CODE

An invalid G code was specified. Alternatively, a G code corresponding to anunavailable option was specified.

Correct the program. Confirm which op-tions are available.

F.1ERROR CODEDISPLAYED ON LCD


670

Number RemarksRemedyMessage

Number RemarksRemedyContents

011 NO FEEDRATE COMMANDED Correct the program.

Feedrate was not commanded during cuttingfeed. Or, feedrate command was inappropri-ate.

014 CAN NOT COMMAND G95 Correct the program.

A synchronous feed is specified without the option forthreading/synchronous feed.

015 TOO MANY AXES COMMANDED Correct the program.

Attempt was made to shift a number of axiswhich exceeded the number of simultaneous-ly controlled axis.

020 OVER TOLERANCE OF RADIUS Correct the program. Adjust the setting

In circular interpolation (G02 or G03), the dif-ference of the distance between the start pointand the center of an arc and that between theend point and the center of the arc exceededthe value specified in parameter No. 3410.

for NC parameter No. 3410.

021 ILLEGAL PLANE AXIS COMMANDED Correct the program. XY, XZ, or YZ plane

An axis not included in the plane specification(G17, G18, G19) was commanded in circularinterpolation.

022 NO CIRCLE RADIUS Correct the program.

For circular interpolation, R (arc radius), or I, J,and K (distance from a start point to the center)are not specified.

025 CANNOT COMMAND F0 IN G02/G03 (M series)


F0 (rapid traverse) was specified for one–digitF code feed in circular interpolation.

027 NO AXES COMMANDED IN G43/G44 (M series)

Specify the G43 or G44 code with an axisfor which the tool length has been com-

In tool length compensation C, an axis was notspecified in the block in which G43 or G44 wasspecified. Alternatively, an attempt was madeto compensate the other axis without cancel-ing the offset in tool length compensation C.

pensated. Specify the G49 code to can-cel the G43 or G44 code when an axis tobe compensated is changed.

028 ILLEGAL PLANE SELECT For plane selection, specify two axes XY, XZ, or YZ plane

Two or more axes which are parallel oneanother were specified in the plane selection.

which are not parallel.

029 ILLEGAL OFFSET VALUE Select a correct offset number. Or, modify

The offset value selected by H code is toolarge.

the offset amount.


671



030 ILLEGAL OFFSET NUMBER Specify a correct offset number.

The offset number specified by D/H code forthe cutter compensation or the tool length off-set is too large.Otherwise, the number specified by a P codefor the additional workpiece coordinate sys-tem is too large.


031 ILLEGAL P COMMAND IN G10 Correct the program.

In the offset amount program input (G10), thevalue of P to specify the offset number is toolarge. Or, P was not commanded.

032 ILLEGAL OFFSET VALUE IN G10 Correct the program.

The offset value set by programmable data in-put (G10) or written by a system variable is toolarge.

033 NO SOLUTION AT CRC Correct the program.

The coordinates of an intersection cannot becalculated in cutter compensation C.

034 NO CIRC ALLOWED IN ST–UP /EXT BLK Cutter compensation C cannot be speci-fied in a block immediately before or after

Starting or cancelingcutter compensa-

Startup or cancel was going to be performed inG02 or G03 mode in cutter compensation C.

a block in which circular cutting (G02 orG03) is specified. Add a linear cuttingcommand (G01).

tion C can be speci-fied together with lin-ear movement.

036 CAN NOT COMMANDED G31(M series)


Skip turning (G31) is specified in the cuttercompensation C mode.

037 CAN NOT CHANGE PLANE IN CRC The plane must be changed in the offset

A compensation plane (G17, G18, G19) wasswitched in cutter compensation C.

cancel mode (G40 enabled). Correct theprogram.

038 INTERFERENCE IN CIRCULAR Correct the program.

Overcutting may occur in cutter compensationC because the arc start point or end point coin-cide with the arc center.

041 INTERFERENCE IN CRC Correct the program.

Overcutting will occur in cutter compensationC. Two or more blocks are consecutively spe-cified in which functions such as the auxiliaryfunction and dwell functions are performedwithout movement in the cutter compensationmode.


672



042 G45/G48 NOT ALLOWED IN CRC(M series)

The tool offset command cannot be is-sued in the cutter compensation mode.

The tool offset command was issued in the cut-ter compensation mode.

Specify the tool offset command aftercanceling the offset.

044 G27–G30 NOT ALLOWED IN FIXED CYC (M series)


One of G27–G29 was commanded in canedcycle mode.

045 ADDRESS Q NOT FOUND (G73/G83) (M series)


In G73 or G83 for specifying a canned cycle,Q (depth of cut for each cutting feed) is notspecified or Q0 is specified.

046 ILLEGAL REFERENCE RETURN COMMAND


A code other than P2, P3, or P4 is specified forthe 2nd, 3rd, or 4th reference position returncommand.

047 ILLEGAL AXIS SELECT Correct the program.

At the startup of three–dimensional tool com-pensation or three–dimensional coordinateconversion, two or more axes are specified inthe same direction (basic and parallel axes).

048 BASIC 3 AXIS NOT FOUND Correct the program.

At the startup of three–dimensional tool com-pensation or three–dimensional coordinateconversion, the three basic axes used whenXp, Yp, and Zp are omitted are not specified inparameter No. 1022.

049 ILLEGAL OPERATION (G68/G69) (M series)


The commands for three–dimensional coordi-nate conversion (G68, G69) and tool lengthcompensation (G43, G44, G45) are notnested. Modify the program.

050 CHF/CNR NOT ALLOWED IN THRD BLK (M series)


Optional–angle chamfering or corner round-ing is specified in a threading block.


673



051 MISSING MOVE AFTER CHF/CNR(M series)

The value specified for chamfering orrounding a corner was larger than the val-

Improper movement or the move distance wasspecified in the block next to the optionalchamfering or corner R block.

ue specified for movement. Alternatively, the specified direction ofmovement was incorrect. Correct the pro-gram.

052 CODE IS NOT G01 AFTER CHF/CNR (M series)


The block next to the chamfering or corner Rblock is not G01,G02 or G03.

053 TOO MANY ADDRESS COMMANDS (M series)


For optional–angle chamfering or cornerrounding, a value other than R or C was speci-fied following a comma (,).

055 MISSING MOVE VALUE IN CHF/CNR (M series)


In an optional–angle chamfering or cornerrounding block, the specified travel distance isless than the amount of chamfering or cornerrounding.

058 END POINT NOT FOUND(M series)


In an optional–angle chamfering or cornerrounding block, an axis which was not in theselected plane was specified.

059 PROGRAM NUMBER NOT FOUND Check the program number and modify it.

The program was not found in the external pro-gram number selection. Otherwise, the num-ber of a program being edited in backgroundprocessing was searched for.

060 SEQUENCE NUMBER NOT FOUND Check the sequence number. If it is incor-

Sequence number to be searched was notfound.

rect, enter a correct number.

070 NO PROGRAM SPACE IN MEMORY Rearrange memory or delete any unnec-

The memory area is insufficient.essary programs, then perform registra-tion again.

071 DATA NOT FOUND Check the address data or the program

The address data to be searched was notfound. Or, the program with the specified num-ber was not found in the program numbersearch.

number and correctly input them.


674



072 TOO MANY PROGRAMS Delete unnecessary registered pro-

The number of registered programs exceed-ed 200 or 400 (option).

grams.

073 PROGRAM NUMBER ALREADY IN USE Change the program number or delete

Attempt was made to register a same programnumber as an already registered programnumber.

the registered program.

074 ILLEGAL PROGRAM NUMBER Correct the program.

The program number is other than 1–9999.

075 PROTECT Change the program number. Alterna-

An attempt was made to register a programwhose number was protected.

tively, set bit 0 or 4 of NC parameter No.3202 to 0.

076 ADDRESS P NOT DEFINED Correct the program.

P was not specified in the block with M98, G65or G66.

077 SUB PROGRAM NESTING ERROR Correct the program.

The subprogram was called in five times.

078 NUMBER NOT FOUND Check the program number or sequence

The program number or the sequence numberspecified by address P in the block with M98,M99, or G66 was not found.The sequence number specified by a GOTOstatement was not found. Otherwise, the num-ber of a program being edited in backgroundprocessing was called.

number and modify it.

079 PROGRAM VERIFY ERROR Check both the contents of memory and

In memory or program collation, a programstored in memory does not agree with thatread from an external I/O device.

those of the program read from the exter-nal I/O device.

080 G37 ARRIVAL SIGNAL NOT ASSERTED (M series)

Check the position of the switch for mea-suring the tool length and position speci-

Parameter No. 6254,signal ZAE, bit 2 of

In the automatic tool length measurementfunction (G37), the measurement positionreach signal is not turned on within the areaspecified for parameter 6254 (value �). Other-wise, automatic tool length measurement wasspecified for the X– or Y–axis.

fied by the program. Then, correct theprogram. Check that the switch is con-nected correctly.Automatic tool–length measurement canbe used for the Z–axis only in the ROBO-DRILL α–T14iB.

X1004

081 OFFSET NUMBER NOT FOUND IN G37 Correct the program.

Automatic tool length measurement (G37)was specified with specifying no H code for theautomatic tool length measurement function.


675



082 H–CODE NOT ALLOWED IN G37 Correct the program.

H code and automatic tool length measure-ment (G37) were specified in the same blockfor the automatic tool length measurementfunction.

083 ILLEGAL AXIS COMMAND IN G37 Specify automatic tool–length measure- If measurement is

An axis other than the Z–axis was specified inautomatic tool–length measurement. Alterna-tively, incremental programming was used.(Automatic tool–length measurement func-tion)

ment for the Z–axis with the absolute pro-gramming method.

specified for the X–or Y–axis, alarm No.080 is issued.

085 COMMUNICATION ERROR Check parameter. Check the tape reader Relativeparameters

When entering data in the memory by usingReader / Puncher interface, an overrun, parityor framing error was generated. The number ofbits of input data or setting of baud rate orspecification No. of I/O unit is incorrect.

and the tape. Check that the values in theparameters match the settings of the tapereader.

When channel iscommon, No. 0000, No. 0001,No. 0020, No. 0100When parameter I/Ois 0, No. 0101, No.

086 DR SIGNAL OFF Check whether the power to the I/O de-0102, No. 0103When parameter I/O

When inputting/outputting/via/reader/puncherinterface, the ready signal (DR) of the input/output devices is off.

vice is on. The cable may not be con-nected or the printed circuit board may befaulty.

is 1, No. 0111, No.0112, No. 0113

087 BUFFER OVERFLOW Check whether the parameter values

When reading via reader/puncher interface,although the read terminate command is spe-cified, input was not stopped even after 10characters were read.

agree with the settings for the external I/Odevice. Also check how the external I/Odevice is controlled according to each NCI/O control signal. The I/O device orprinted circuit board may be faulty.

090 REFERENCE RETURN INCOMPLETE After moving the target axis for motor ref-

Motor reference position return was per-formed without rotating the motor of each axisthrough one or more turns. (X–, Y–, and Z–axes, and additional axes without dogs)The start point of motor reference position re-turn is too close to the reference position or thespeed is too slow. (Additional axes with dogs)

erence position return by about 12 mm inthe handle mode, turn the power off, thenon again, and perform motor referenceposition return. (X–, Y–, and Z–axes, andadditional axes without dogs)Separatethe start point far enough from the refer-ence position, then perform motor refer-ence position return. Alternatively, in-crease the rapid traverse rate for motorreference position return. (Additionalaxes with dogs)

091 REFERENCE RETURN INCOMPLETE Press the RESET on the operator’s pan-

In the automatic operation halt state, manualreference position return cannot be per-formed.

el, then perform manual reference posi-tion return.

092 AXES NOT ON THE REFERENCE POINT Correct the program.

The reference point return check (G27) foundthat the specified axis did not return to the ref-erence point.


676



100 PARAMETER WRITE ENABLE Set PWE to 1, then press the RESET key.

Write enable parameter was set to “1” (1=val-id).

101 PLEASE CLEAR MEMORY The memory area must be cleared. When the operator’s

The power supply was turned off while rewrit-ing the contents of the memory in programedit.

HALF ALTER DELETE ;

1. Display the CNC screen, then pressan alphanumeric character key on themachine operator’s panel.

2. Press a soft key to display the follow-ing (FULL mode):

3. While holding down the soft key be-tween [HALF] and [ALTER], press the<RESET> key on the machine opera-tor’s panel.

panel has a full keyboard, press<PROG> and <RESET> simulta-neously.

109 FORMAT ERROR IN G08 Correct the program.

A value other than 0 or 1 was specified for P fol-lowing G08 or no value was specified.

110 DATA OVERFLOW Modify the program such that the abso-

The absolute value of the fixed decimal pointdisplay data exceeded the allowable range.

lute value becomes less than 8 digits.

111 CALCULATED DATA OVERFLOW The allowable range is – 1047 –1047.

The calculation result of the macro instructionexceeded the allowable range.

Check the program for the equation andresult.

112 DIVIDED BY ZERO Correct the program.

Division by zero was specified.(Including tan 90°)

113 IMPROPER COMMAND Correct the program.

A function which cannot be used in custommacro was commanded.

114 FORMAT ERROR IN MACRO Correct the program.

Incorrect format outside of <equation>

115 ILLEGAL VARIABLE NUMBER Check the variable number and modify it.

A number not defined as a variable numberwas specified.

Or, define the variable number in ad-vance.

116 WRITE PROTECTED VARIABLE Check the common variable and change

A variable for which a value cannot be substi-tuted was specified at the left side of the equa-tion.

to an assignable variable number.


677



118 PARENTHESIS NESTING ERROR Correct the program.

The multiplicity of parentheses exceeded fivetimes.

119 ILLEGAL ARGUMENT Correct the program.

A negative value was specified for the SQRT(square root) or BCD (binary–coded decimal)argument, or a value other than 0 to 9 was spe-cified as a digit of the BIN argument.

122 FOUR FOLD MACRO MODAL–CALL Correct the program.

The macro modal call was doubly specified.

123 CAN NOT USE MACRO COMMAND IN DNC Correct the program.

A macro control command is used during DNCoperation.

124 MISSING END STATEMENT Correct the program.

DO and END statements are not paired cor-rectly.

125 FORMAT ERROR IN MACRO Correct the program.

Incorrect format outside of <equation>.

126 ILLEGAL LOOP NUMBER The nesting level of the DO loop must be

A value from one to three was specified in n ofthe DO n instruction.

three or less.Correct the program.

127 NC, MACRO STATEMENT IN SAME BLOCK Specify the macro command uniquely.

NC commands and macro commands aremixed in the same block.

128 ILLEGAL MACRO SEQUENCE NUMBER Check the jump destination number spe-

The sequence number of the branch destina-tion in the branch command was not 0 – 9999.Or, the sequence number was not found.

cified in the custom macro instruction.Correct the program.

129 ILLEGAL ARGUMENT ADDRESS Correct the addresses used in the cus-

An address which is not allowed in <ArgumentSpecification> is used.

tom macro instructions.

131 TOO MANY EXTERNAL ALARM MESSAGES

A software error occurred. Contact thenearest FANUC Technical Center.

Five or more external alarms were issued.

132 ALARM NUMBER NOT FOUND PMC sequence error. Contact the near-

There was no corresponding alarm numberwhen the issued alarm was to be cleared.

est FANUC Technical Center.


678



133 ILLEGAL DATA IN EXT. ALARM MSG PMC sequence error. Contact the near-

Subclass data was erroneous in the externalalarm message and external operator mes-sage.

est FANUC Technical Center.

141 CAN NOT COMMAND G51 IN CRC G51 cannot be commanded.

G51 (Scaling ON) was commanded in the cut-ter compensation mode.

Specify scaling on (G51) first, then speci-fy cutter compensation.

142 ILLEGAL SCALE RATE (M series) Modify the scaling multiple. A scaling factor is

The scaling multiple was specified as a valueother than 1 – 999999.

obtained by multi-plying the specifiedinteger by 1/1000.

143 SCALED MOTION DATA OVERFLOW Scaling cannot be performed by this mul-

Move distance, coordinate value and circularradius exceeded the maximum command val-ue when scaling was scaling executed.

tiple. Reduce the scaling multiple.

144 ILLEGAL PLANE SELECTED The respective planes should be same.

The coordinate rotation plane differs from arcor tool offset C plane.

Modify the program.

145 ILLEGAL CONDITIONS IN POLAR COORDI-NATE INTERPOLATION

1) G12.1 or G13.1 is specified in modeother than G40.

The conditions for starting or canceling polarcoordinate interpolation are incorrect.

2) Plane selection is incorrect. (Settingerror in parameter No. 5460 or 5461)

Correct the program or parameter set-ting.

146 IMPROPER G CODE Modify the program.

An illegal G code was specified in the polarcoordinate interpolation mode.

148 ILLEGAL SETTING DATA Reset the parameters such that the range Related parameters:

Deceleration (MDR) and the judgement angle( θp) of auto corner override are out of range.

becomes:1% � MDR (1% step ) � 100%2°� θp � 178°.

Nos. 1710, 1711,1712, 1713, 1714

149 FORMAT ERROR IN GIOL3 Modify the program.

A code other than Q1, Q2, P1 or P2 was speci-fied as the life count type in the extended toollife management.

150 ILLEGAL TOOL GROUP NUMBER The tool group number (P) must be 128 or P=1–128

The specified tool group number exceededthe maximum number.

less. Correct the program.

151 TOOL GROUP NUMBER NOT FOUND Display QUICK screen, TOOL FIFE, then

The tool group specified in the machining pro-gram was not set in tool life management.

TOOL GROUP SETTING, and set thetool group.


679



152 NO SPACE FOR TOOL ENTRY Check the specified number of tools in Related parameter:

The specified number of tools in the group ex-ceeded the maximum value.

each group. Correct it, if necessary. Themaximum number of tools is 16 pergroup.

No. 6800

153 T–CODE NOT FOUND Correct the program.

In registration of tool life data, a T code was notspecified in a block where it was required.

154 NOT USING TOOL IN LIFE GROUP The H99 and D99 codes can only be spe-

When a tool group was not specified, the H99or D99 code was specified.

cified for a tool number for which a toolgroup is specified.

155 ILLEGAL T–CODE IN M06 Check the tool number specified in the T Related parameter:

In the machining program, the T code speci-fied with the M06 code in the block did not cor-respond to the tool group being used. When bit6 of parameter No. 6800 is set to 1, the alarmis ignored.

code and the specified tool group.Depending on the conditions, specify theparameter so that the tool number is ig-nored.

No. 6800

156 P/L COMMAND NOT FOUND Specify the P and L commands at the top

The P and L commands were not specified atthe top of the program which set the tool group.

of the program.

157 TOO MANY TOOL GROUPS Correct the number of tool groups. Related parameter:

The number of tool groups to be specified ex-ceeded the maximum value.

No. 6800

158 ILLEGAL TOOL LIFE DATA The maximum value that can be set is

Too large life period4300 minutes or 65535 times.

159 TOOL DATA SETTING INCOMPLETE Execute the program which sets tool

The power was turned off while the setting pro-gram was being executed.

groups again.

160 G72.1 NESTING ERROR (M series) Correct the program.

Code G72.1 was specified again in a subpro-gram which performed rotational copy speci-fied by G72.1.

161 G72.1 NESTING ERROR Correct the program.

Code G72.2 was specified again in a subpro-gram which performed rotational copy speci-fied by G72.2.

175 ILLEGAL G107 COMMAND Specify the condition in format “G07.1

A condition for starting or canceling cylindricalinterpolation is invalid.

rotation–axis–name radius–of–cylinder”.


680



176 IMPROPER G–CODE IN G107 The following G codes cannot be speci-

An invalid G code was specified in the cylindri-cal interpolation mode.

fied in the cylindrical interpolation mode:

1. G codes for positioning (such as G28,G73, G74, G76, G78, and G81 toG89, including the codes specifyingthe rapid traverse cycle)

2. G codes for setting a coordinate sys-tem (G52 and G92)

3. G codes for selecting a coordinatesystem (G53 and G54 to G59)Correct the program.

177 CHECK SUM ERROR (G05 MODE) Correct the program.

A checksum error occurred.

178 G05 COMMANDED IN G41/G42 MODE Correct the program.

Code G05 was specified in the G41/G42mode.

179 PARAM. (NO. 7510) SETTING ERROR Modify the parameter setting.

The number of controlled axes set by parame-ter No. 7510 exceeds the maximum number.

180 COMMUNICATION ERROR (REMOTE BUF) Check that the parameters match the set- Related parameters

Remote buffer line alarmtings of the external I/O unit. Check thatthe external unit is connected correctly.

Nos. 0000,0001, 0020, 0100,0131, 0132Nos. 0133, 0134,0135, 7501, 7510

190 ILLEGAL AXIS SELECT Axis specification P is beyond the permis-

In constant surface speed control, an incorrectaxis specification is found. (See the setting ofparameter No. 3770.)

sible range. Correct the program.

199 MACRO WORD UNDEFINED Check the arithmetic operation and con-

An undefined reserved macro word was used.trol commands specified by the custommacro.

200 ILLEGAL S CODE COMMAND Correct the program.

In rigid tapping, the specified spindle speedwas out of range, or a spindle speed was notspecified.

201 FEEDRATE NOT FOUND IN RIGID TAP Correct the program.

In rigid tapping, a feedrate was not specified.

202 POSITION LSI OVERFLOW Turn off the power, then turn it on. If the

In rigid tapping, too many pulses were distrib-uted to the spindle.

alarm is not reset by turning the power offand on, or if an error occurs when rigidtapping is specified again, contact thenearest FANUC Technical Center.


681



203 PROGRAM MISS AT RIGID TAPPING Specify “M29 Sxxxx ;” immediately be-

In rigid tapping, the rigid M29 or S code wasspecified in an incorrect position.

fore the G84 and G74 codes.

204 ILLEGAL AXIS OPERATION Specify “M29 Sxxxx ;” and “G84 Z–xx

In rigid tapping, movement along an axis (in-cluding tool change) was specified betweenthe rigid M code and the G84 or G74 code.

Fxxxx ;” in succession.

205 RIGID MODE DI SIGNAL OFF Turn off the power, then turn it on. G61.0

Although the rigid M code was specified in rigidtapping, the rigid mode DI signal did not go onwhen the block in which the G84 and G74codes were specified was executed.

If the alarm is not reset by turning thepower off and on, or if an error occurswhen rigid tapping is specified again,contact the nearest FANUC TechnicalCenter.

206 CAN NOT CHANGE PLANE (M series) Correct the prgoram. Only when the X–Y

Switching a plane was specified in the rigidmode.

plane (G17) is speci-fied.

207 RIGID DATA MISMATCH Correct the prgoram.

The specified distance was too short or toolong in rigid tapping.

210 CAN NOT COMAND M198/M199 A program which is executed while being

The M198 and M099 codes were executed inscheduled operation. The M198 code wasexecuted in DNC operation.

input from the floppy disk cannot call asubprogram.

212 ILLEGAL PLANE SELECT Correct the program.

On a plane including an additional axis, option-al–angle chamfering/corner rounding is speci-fied.

222 DNC OP. NOT ALLOWED IN BG.–EDIT Perform correct operation.

Input and output are executed at a time in thebackground edition.

224 RETURN TO REFERENCE POINT Reference position return is necessary Related parameter

Reference position return has not been per-formed before the automatic operation starts.

before cycle start. No.1005#0


682



231 ILLEGAL FORMAT IN G10 OR L50 Check the program for format.

The programmable parameter input, “G10 L50...” had the following format errors:1) Address N or R was not entered.2) A parameter number which does not exist

was entered.3) Axis number is too large.4) Axis number was not specified for the

axis–type parameter.5) Axis number was specified for a non–axis–

type parameter. ��

� � �� !�

" �� #� �� $ � �

�� $ � ��

Command format:G10 L50 ; Parameter input mode N·· R·· ; N·· P·· R·· ;

G11; Canceling parameter input mode

Parameter data

Parameter numberAxis number (1 to 4)

232 TOO MANY HELICAL AXIS COMMANDS Correct the program.

Three or more axes (two or more axes in thenormal direction control mode) were specifiedas helical axes in helical interpolation.

233 DEVICE BUSY Stop the function using the RS–232C in-

The RS–232C interface has been being usedby another function.

terface. The faulty Mother board is anoth-er possible cause.

239 BP/S ALARM Perform background editing after punch–

While punching was being performed with thefunction for controlling external I/O units ,back-ground editing was performed.

out operation is completed.

240 BP/S ALARM After termination of MDI operation, per-

Background editing was performed duringMDI operation.

form background editing.

241 ILLEGAL FORMAT IN G02.2/G03.2 Modify the program.

In involute interpolation, the end point, I, J, K,or R is not specified.

242 ILLEGAL COMMAND IN G02.2/G03.2 Modify the program.

An incorrect value is specified in involute inter-polation.

� The specified start point or end point is with-in the base circle.

� 0 was specified in I, J, K, or R.

� The start point or end point is located be-yond 100 turns from the point at which the in-volute curve begins.


683



243 OVER TOLERANCE OF END POINT Modify the program.

The end point is not on the involute curvepassing the start point and is beyond the rangespecified in parameter No. 5610.

246 ENCODE PROGRAM NUMBER ERROR Check the program number.

When an encrypted program was read, an at-tempt was made to register the program, but itsnumber was beyond the protection range.(See parameter Nos. 3222 and 3223.)

Check the values set in parameter Nos.3222 and 3223.

247 ILLEGAL CODE USED FOR OUTPUT

Specify ISO.

When an encrypted program is output, thepunch code is EIA.

250 Z AXIS WRONG COMMAND (ATC) Moving the Z–axis cannot be specified to-

An attempt was made to specify moving the Z–axis simultaneously with a simultaneous posi-tioning command when the tool change opera-tion was specified.

gether with the tool change command.

251 ATC ERROR The cause is indicated in diagnosis mes- Related diagnostic

The following errors occurred when the toolchange command was issued.1) An invalid T code was used to specify the

tool number.2) The tool change command was issued

when the tool had a Z coordinate greaterthan that of the machine zero point.

3) The current tool number is set to 0.4) The tool change command was issued in

tool length compensation mode (G43 orG44).

5) The tool change command was issued inthe canned cycle mode (G73 to G89).

6) The tool change command was issued ina block in which the reference position re-turn command (G27 to G29) was specified.

7) The machine lock or Z–axis lock was spe-cified for Z–axis movement while the toolwas being changed.

sage No. 530.Correct the program and parameters.1) Specify a value from one to ten with

address T.2) Issue the tool change command

only when the tool is positioned at aZ coordinate smaller than that of themachine zero point.

3) Specify a tool number in parameterNo. 7810.

4,5) Be sure to issue the commands forcanceling the tool length com-pensation (G49) and for cancelingthe canned cycle mode (G80) be-fore specifying the tool change com-mand.

6) The tool change command and ref-erence position return commandcannot be specified at the sametime.

7) Do not lock the Z–axis while the toolis being changed.

data No. 530


684

Diagnostic data related to alarms concerning tool change

530 A99 A98 A97 A96 A95 A43

Diagnosticdata number #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

When A99 is 1: A99 is not for the user.

� Action to be taken →A malfunction occurred in the internal signal processing. Contactyour nearest FANUC Technical Center.

When A98 is 1: The Z–axis was locked while the tool wasbeingchanged.

� Action to be taken →Perform turret recovery.

When A97 is 1: The tool change command was issued in the toollength compensation mode (G43, G44) or thecannedcycle mode (G73 to G89).

� Action to be taken →The alarm can be reset by pressing the RESET key on the operator’spanel. Correct the program so that the command for canceling cuttercompensation (G40), tool length compensation (G49) and the cannedcycle mode (G80) are issued before the tool change command isissued. The G49 and G80 codes can be specified in the block in whichthe tool change command is specified.

When A96 is 1: The current tool number is set to 0.

� Action to be taken →Specify a tool number in parameter No. 7810.

When A95 is 1: The tool was changed when it was positioned at aZ–coordinate greater than that of the machine zeropoint.

� Action to be taken →Perform turret recovery by specifying it in the recovery menu on thequick operation screen.

When A43 is 1: An invalid T code is issued in M06 T��.

� Action to be taken →The alarm can be reset by pressing the RESET key on the operator’spanel. Correct the program so that a correct T code (1 to 10) is used.

Number Contents Remedy Remarks

252 The following errors were detected in spindleoperation at tool change.1) Excessive error in magazine indexing2) ATC and spindle positioning sequence er-

ror3) LSI overflow4) Excessive drift5) Excessive error with the spindle moving6) Excessive error with the spindle at a rest7) Excessive spindle distribution

The cause is indicated in diagnosis mes-sage No. 531.1) It is likely that the tool is too heavy

or that tool weight is unbalancedexcessively. Check the weight ofthe tool.

2 to 7) It is likely that the parameter set-ting is incorrect or that the internalprocessing is improper. Check thediagnosis message and contactthe FANUC service centernearby.


685

Diagnosis data related to alarm concerning tool change

531 585 584 583 582 581 580 502


When No. 585 is 1: An excessive error occurred in magazine indexing.

� Action to be taken →The error occurred because the load was too great during magazineindexing. Check on the tool weight and whether the tool weight isbalanced. If there is no excessive condition, contact the FANUCTechnical Center nearby.

When No. 584 is 1: An ATC & spindle positioning sequence erroroccurred.

� Action to be taken →The internal processing was found incorrect. Contact the FANUCTechnical Center nearby.

When No. 583 is 1: An LSI overflow occurred.


When No. 582 is 1: The drift amount was excessive.


When No. 581 is 1: An excessive error occurred when the spindle ismoving.


When No. 580 is 1: An excessive error occurred when the spindle is ata halt.


When No. 502 is 1: An excessive spindle distribution was detected.


MessageNumber


253 G05 IS NOT AVAILABLE Specify G08 P0 ; to cancel the look–

Binary–input operation with a high–speed re-mote buffer (G05) or high–speed cycle ma-chining (G05) was specified in the look–aheadcontrol mode.

ahead control mode.


686

(2) Background editing (BP/S alarm)

MessageNumber


??? BP/S alarm Correct the program. See the note below.

The BP/S alarms are issued with the samenumbers (070 to 074 and other numbers) asthose for the P/S alarms which are issued innormal program editing.

Pressing <RESET>is not necessary.

140 BP/S alarm The program selected in foreground edit- See the note below.

The program selected in foreground editingwas also selected in background editing, or anattempt was made to delete it backgroundediting.

ing cannot be selected in backgroundediting, or it cannot be deleted in back-ground editing.

Pressing <RESET>is not necessary.

NOTEBackground editing alarms are indicated not on the ordinaryalarm screen, but on the key input line on the backgroundediting screen. These alarms can be released by pressingthe <Cancel> key.Never use the <RESET> key to cancel alarms inbackground editing. Otherwise, a program being executedin the foreground stops.


687

(3) Alarms related to the absolute pulse coder (APC)

MessageNumber


300 APC alarm: nth–axis origin return Perform motor reference position return

Motor reference position return is required forn axis. This alarm occurs in a case such aswhen a motor signal cable is disconnected.

for the specified axis.

301 APC alarm: nth–axis communication The pulse coder, cable or servo interface If an alarm is issued

n–axis APC communication errormodule may be faulty. Turn the power off,then turn it on again. If the alarm is still on,

for the fourth axis,check that the motor

302 APC alarm: nth–axis over timecontact the nearest FANUC TechnicalCenter.

for the additionalaxis is installed.

n–axis APC time–out error

303 APC alarm: nth–axis framing

n–axis APC framing error

304 APC alarm: nth–axis parity

n–axis APC parity error

305 APC alarm: nth–axis pulse error The pulse coder, cable or servo interfacemodule may be faulty. Turn the power off,

n–axis APC missing pulse errorthen turn it on again. If the alarm is still on,contact the nearest FANUC TechnicalCenter.

306 APC alarm: nth–axis battery voltage 0 Check the battery. This alarm also oc-

The voltage of the n–axis APC battery hasonce dropped to the level at which data cannotbe held.

Also check whether the servo motorcable is connected.

curs when the cableof the Z–axis motorhas been removedwhen delivered. If an

307 APC alarm: nth–axis battery low 1 Replace the pulse coder battery.alarm is issued forthe additional axis,

The n axis APC battery voltage reaches thebattery replacement level.

check that the motorfor the additionalaxis is installed.

308 APC alarm: nth–axis battery low 2 Check whether the servo motor cable is

axis is installed.

The n axis APC battery voltage reached thebattery replacement level (including a case ofpower–off).

connected.If alarm No. 307 occurs simultaneously,take action for alarm No. 307.

309 APC ALARM: n AXIS ZRN IMPOSSIBL Rotate the motor through one or more

An attempt was made to perform referenceposition return without rotating the motorthrough one or more turns.

turns, then turn the power off, then onagain, and perform reference position re-turn.


688

(4) Alarms related to the serial pulse coder (SPC)

No. Message Remedy

Description

360 n AXIS : ABNORMAL CHECKSUM (INT) When power off then on

A checksum error occurred in the built–in pulse coder.and the error occuresagain, consult our, ser-

361 n AXIS : ABNORMAL PHASE DATA (INT)vice department.

A phase data error occurred in the built–in pulse coder.

362 n AXIS : ABNORMAL REV.DATA (INT)

A rotation speed count error occurred in the built–in pulse coder.

363 n AXIS : ABNORMAL CLOCK (INT)

A clock error occurred in the built–in pulse coder.

364 n AXIS : SOFT PHASE ALARM (INT)

The digital servo software detected invalid data in the built–in pulse coder.

365 n AXIS : BROKEN LED (INT)

An LED error occurred in the built–in pulse coder.

366 n AXIS : PULSE MISS (INT)

A pulse error occurred in the built–in pulse coder.

367 n AXIS : COUNT MISS (INT)

A count error occurred in the built–in pulse coder.

368 n AXIS : SERIAL DATA ERROR (INT)

Communication data from the built–in pulse coder cannot be received.

369 n AXIS : DATA TRANS. ERROR (INT)

A CRC or stop bit error occurred in the communication data being received from thebuilt–in pulse coder.

Diagnostic data concerning alarms related to the serial pulse coder

202 CSA BLA PHA RCA BZA CKA SPH


When CSA is 1: Error of the serial pulse coder

� Action to be taken →Replace the pulse coder.

When BLA is 1: The voltage of the battery is too low.

� Action to be taken →Replace the pulse coder battery for the servo motor.

When PHA is 1: Error in the serial pulse coder or the feedback cable


689

� Action to be taken →Replace the cable or pulse coder.

When RCA is 1: Serial pulse coder error

� Action to be taken →Replace the pulse coder.

When BZA is 1: Power was supplied to the serial pulse coder for thefirst time.

� Action to be taken →Check that the cable is connected to the motor properly. Turn thepower off, then turn it on again. After turning the power off, then onagain, perform motor reference position return for the axis for whichthe alarm occurred. This alarm also occurs if the Z–axis motor ormotor cable is disconnected at delivery of the machine. For anadditional axis, check whether the additional axis motor has beenmounted. This alarm also occurs if the cable is disconnected atinstallation of an additional axis.

This alarm also occurs when the Z–axis motor or the cable of the motoris removed when the machine is delivered. When an additional axisis used, also check that the additional–axis motor is mounted. Thisalarm also occurs when the cable is removed at installation of anadditional axis.

When CKA is 1: Serial pulse coder error

� Action to be taken →The pulse coder needs to be replaced with a new one. Contact yournearest FANUC Technical Center.

When SPH is 1: Error in the serial pulse coder or feedback cable

� Action to be taken →The cable or pulse coder needs to be replaced with a new one. Contactyour nearest FANUC Technical Center.

When diagnostic data bit is 0, no alarm has occurred for that bit.

DTE203 CRC STB PRM


When DTE is 1: Transmission error in the serial pulse coder.

When CRC is 1: The pulse coder, feedback cable, or feedback

When STB is 1: reception circuit is abnormal.

� Action to be taken →Replace the pulse coder, feedback cable, or NC axis board.

When PRM is 1: An invalid parameter alarm occurred. An invalidservo parameter alarm (No. 417) is also indicated.

� Action to be taken →By selecting [QUICK]Screen, [32:MAINTENANCE/SETTING],then [3:PARAMETER], check NC parameters to see if any parametermodification has been made inappropriately.

When any of the above bits is 0, no alarm has occurred for that bit, or thealarm has already been reset.


690

(5) Sevo alarm

MessageNumber


401 SERVO ALARM: n–TH AXIS VRDY OFF Contact the FANUC technical center use-

The servo amplifier ready signal (DRDY) forthe n–axis went off.

ing your locality.

402 SERVO ALARM: SV CARD NOT EXIST

The axis control card is not provided.

403 SERVO ALARM: CARD/SOFT MISMATCH

The combination of the axis control card andservo software is incorrect.The servo software or monitor software is notinstalled in flash memory.

404 SERVO ALARM: n–TH AXIS VRDY ON See the troubleshooting procedure.

Although the n–axis ready signal (MCON)went off, the servo amplifier ready signal(DRDY) does not go off. Alternatively, whenthe power is turned on, the DRDY is on al-though the MCON is off (n: X, Y, Z, or an addi-tional axis). (V ready on)

405 SERVO ALARM: (ZERO POINT RETURNFAULT)

Perform motor reference position returnoperation.

Position control system error. There is a possi-bility that reference position return is not per-formed correctly due to an NC internal error orservo system error. (Reference position return error)

409 SERVO ALARM: n AXIS TORQUE ALM � Check that no chips have collected

An abnormal load was detected.around the moving axis.

� Check that the machine is not operat-ing under conditions or a load that ex-ceeds the capacity of the machine

� Check whether collision with the tool,workpiece, jig, and so forth has oc-curred because of an error such as aprogram error.

By selecting [QUICK]Screen, [32:MAIN-TENANCE/SETTING], then [3:PARAME-TER], check NC parameters to see if anyparameter modification has been madeinappropriately.


691



410 SERVO ALARM: n–TH AXIS – EXCESS ER-ROR

Check the weight of the load to be placedon the table. The maximum load capacity

Related parameters:No. 1829, No. 1832

Position deviation along the n–axis exceededthe setting when the machine stopped (n: X, Y,Z, or an additional axis). (Excess error)

of the table is 200 kg. If the load weights100 kg or more, change the setting of“permissible mass of workpiece” to “morethan 100 kg”.

411 SERVO ALARM: n–TH AXIS – EXCESS ER-ROR

Related parameter:No. 1828

Position deviation along the n–axis exceededthe setting during machine operation (n: X, Y,Z, or an additional axis). (Excess error)

413 SERVO ALARM: n–th AXIS – LSI OVER-FLOW

Related parameters:Nos. 1800 to 1852,

The value of the n–axis error register exceed-ed ± 231 (n: X, Y, Z, or an additional axis). (LSI overflow) The parameter is probably set incorrectly.

Nos. 2000 to 2098

415 SERVO ALARM: n–TH AXIS – EXCESSSHIFT

Related parameter:No. 1820

An attempt was made to specify a speed ex-ceeding 511875 detection units/sec for the n–axis (n: X, Y, Z, or an additional axis). (Excesstravel). CMR is probably set incorrectly.

417 SERVO ALARM: n–TH AXIS – PARAMETERINCORRECT

By selecting [QUICK]Screen, [32:MAIN-TENANCE/SETTING], then [3:PARAME-

Related parameters:No. 1023, No. 2020,

This alarm is issued when the parameters areset as follows for the n–axis (n: X, Y, Z, or anadditional axis); (Digital servo system error)1) Parameter No. 2020 (type of motor) is set

to a value which is out of range.2) Parameter No. 2022 (direction of the motor

rotation) is not set to a correct value, 111 or–111.

3) Parameter No. 2023 (the number of speedfeedback pulses per motor rotation) is setto an incorrect value, such as 0 or less.

4) Parameter No. 2024 (the number of posi-tion feedback pulses per motor rotation) isset to an incorrect value, such as 0 or less.

5) Parameters No. 2084 and No. 2085 (flex-ible gear feed rate) are not specified.

6) Parameter No. 1023 (servo axis number)is not set to 1, 2, 3, or 4. Alternatively, discrete integers are speci-fied.

TER], check NC parameters to see if anyparameter modification has been madeinappropriately.

No. 2022, No. 2023,No. 2024, No. 2084,No. 2085


692



421 SERVO ALARM: n AXIS EXCESS ER (D) By selecting [QUICK]Screen, [32:MAIN- Related parameters:

The difference between the errors in the semi–closed loop and closed loop has become ex-cessive during dual position feedback. Checkthe values of the dual position conversion co-efficients in parameters No. 2078 and 2079.

TENANCE/SETTING], then [3:PARAME-TER], check NC parameters to see if anyparameter modification has been madeinappropriately.

No. 2078, No. 2079,

430 n AXIS : SV. MOTOR OVERHEAT Turn the power off, then turn it on again.

A servo motor overheat occurred.If the alarm is still activated, contact thenearest FANUC Terminal Center.

431 n AXIS : CNV. OVERLOAD

PSM: Overheat occurred.

432 n AXIS : CNV. LOW VOLT CONTROL

PSM: Phase missing occurred in the inputvoltage.

433 n AXIS : CNV. LOW VOLT DC LINK

PSM: The DC link voltage has dropped.

434 n AXIS : INV. LOW VOLT CONTROL

SVM: The control power supply voltage hasdropped.

435 n AXIS : INV. LOW VOLT DC LINK

SVM: The DC link voltage has dropped.

436 n AXIS : SOFTTHERMAL (OVC)

The digital servo software detected the softthermal state (OVC).

437 n AXIS : CNV. OVERCURRENT POWER

PSM: Overcurrent flowed into the input circuit.

438 n AXIS : INV. ABNORMAL CURRENT

SVM: The motor current is too high.


693



439 n AXIS : CNV. OVERVOLT POWER Turn off the power then back on. If the

PSM: The DC link voltage is too high.alarm persists even after the power isturned off then back on, contact FANUC

441 n AXIS : ABNORMAL CURRENT OFFSETTechnical Center.

The digital servo software detected an ab-normality in the motor current detection circuit.

442 n AXIS : CNV. CHARGE FAILURE

PSM: The spare discharge circuit of the DClink is abnormal.

443 n AXIS : CNV. COOLING FAN FAILURE

PSM: The internal stirring fan failed.

444 n AXIS : INV. COOLING FAN FAILURE

SVM: The internal stirring fan failed.

445 n AXIS : SOFT DISCONNECT ALARM

The digital servo software detected a brokenwire in the pulse coder.

446 n AXIS : HARD DISCONNECT ALARM

A broken wire in the built–in pulse coder wasdetected by hardware.

449 n AXIS : INV. IPM ALARM

SVM: IPM (intelligent power module) detectedan alarm.

453 n AXIS : SPC SOFT DISCONNECT ALARM Turn the power off, then turn it on again.

The monitor detected a signal error in the �pulse coder for the n axis.

If the alarm is still activated, contact thenearest FANUC Terminal Center.

456 ILLEGAL CURRENT LOOP

The current control interval setting (No.2004, bit 0 of No. 2003, and bit 0 of No.2013) is incorrect.

Possible problems are as follows:

– For two servo axes having successiveodd and even servo axis numbers (set inparameter No. 1023) in this order (for ex-ample, the first axis and second axis, thefifth axis and sixth axis, and so on), differ-ent current control interval settings aremade.

– The required number of slaves, type,connection method, and so on for provid-ing the set current control interval are notmet.


694



457 ILLEGAL HI HRV (250US) Turn the power off, then turn it on again.

When the current control interval was 250 us,a setting that uses high–speed HRV wasmade.


458 CURRENT LOOP ERROR

The current control interval setting and the ac-tual current control interval do not match.

459 HI HRV SETTING ERROR

When two servo axes have successive oddand even servo axis numbers (set in parame-ter No. 1023) in this order (for example, the firstaxis and second axis, the fifth axis and sixthaxis, and so on), high–speed HRV control canbe performed for the servo amplifier of oneaxis but cannot be performed for the servo am-plifier of the other axis. Check the servo ampli-fier specifications.

460 n AXIS : FSSB DISCONNECT

FSSB communication was disconnected sud-denly. The possible causes are as follows:1) The FSSB communication cable was dis-

connected or broken.2) The power to the amplifier was turned off

suddenly.3) A low–voltage alarm was issued by the

amplifier.

461 n AXIS : ILLEGAL AMP INTERFACE

The axes of the 2–axis amplifier were as-signed to the fast type interface.

462 n AXIS : SEND CNC DATA FAILED

Because of an FSSB communication error, aslave could not receive correct data.

463 n AXIS : SEND SLAVE DATA FAILED

Because of an FSSB communication error, theservo system could not receive correct data.

464 n AXIS : WRITE ID DATA FAILED

An attempt was made to write maintenance in-formation on the amplifier maintenancescreen, but it failed.


695



465 n AXIS : READ ID DATA FAILED Turn the power off, then turn it on again.

At power–up, amplifier initial ID informationcould not be read.


466 n AXIS : MOTOR/AMP COMBINATION

The maximum current rating for the amplifierdoes not match that for the motor.

467 n AXIS : ILLEGAL SETTING OF AXIS

The servo function for the following has notbeen enabled when an axis occupying asingle DSP (corresponding to two ordinaryaxes) is specified on the axis setting screen.High–speed current loop (bit 0 of parameter

No. 2004 = 1)

468 HI HRV SETTING ERROR(AMP)

Use of high–speed HRV is specified for a con-trolled axis, but high–speed HRV cannot beused for the amplifier of that axis.

470 n AXIS:ILLEGAL RAM (MNT) Turn off the power (turn off the circuit

A monitor RAM error occurred. Replace theaxis control card.

breaker) then back on. If the alarm per-sists even after the power is turned offthen back on, contact FANUC Technical

471 n AXIS:SPC SOFT DISCONNECT (MNT)Center.

The monitor detected a signal error in the �pulse coder.Replace the � pulse coder.

473 n AXIS:SOFT PHASE ALARM(INT/MNT)

The monitor detected a data missing error inthe velocity feedback signal for the n axis. Re-place the � pulse coder. Alternatively, takenoise prevention measures for the feedbackcable.

474 n AXIS:EXCESS ERROR (STOP:MNT)

When the safety door was open, the positionaldeviation in stopped state exceeded the de-fault.

475 n AXIS:EXCESS ERROR (MOVE:MNT)

When the safety door was open, the positionaldeviation during movement exceeded the de-fault.


696



476 n AXIS:ILLEGAL SPEED CMD. (MNT) Turn the power off, then turn it on again.

When the safety door was open, a specifiedfeedrate exceeded the safety feedrate (X, Y, Z= 2000 mm/min, additional axes = 700 deg/min).


477 n AXIS:ILLEGAL MACHINE POS.(MNT)

When the safety door is open, the machineposition is not within the safety area.

478 n AXIS:ILLEGAL AXIS DATA (MNT)

An abnormality occurred during axis datatransfer. The alarm may be issued as a resultof a modification to the servo amplifier configu-ration. In such a case, perform axis numbersetting operation for the servo amplifier (set bit4 of parameter No. 2212 for the axis in ques-tion to 1, reset the bit to 0, then turn off the pow-er (also turn off the circuit breaker).

479 ILLEGAL SAFETY DI (MNT)

There is an inconsistency in safety input sig-nals monitored by two programs.

480 n AXIS:ILLEGAL SAFETY MODE (MNT)

Although the release of the door lock was notspecified, the door lock was released.

481 n AXIS:SAFETY PARAM ERROR (MNT)

A safety parameter error occurred.

482 n AXIS:AXIS NUMBER NOT SET (MNT)

No axis number is set for the servo amplifier.The axis number is set automatically. Turn offthe power (and also turn off the circuit break-er).

483 MONITOR SAFETY FUNCTION ERROR

The monitor safety function became abnor-mal.

� The monitor safety function was notexecuted.

� The check result of the monitor safety func-tion and the check result of the servo orCNC safety function did not match.

� An abnormality occurred during the moni-tor CPU test.


697



484 n AXIS:SERVO SAFETY FUNCTION ERR Turn the power off, then turn it on again.

The servo safety function became abnormal.

� The servo safety function was notexecuted.

� The check result of the servo safety func-tion and the check result of the monitorsafety function did not match.

� An abnormality occurred during the servoRAM check.

� An abnormality occurred during the servoCPU test.


486 ILLEGAL SAFETY DI (CNC)

There is an inconsistency in safety input sig-nals monitored by two programs.

487 ILLEGAL SAFETY MODE (CNC)

Although the release of the door lock was notspecified, the door lock was released.

488 SAFE TEST OVER TIME

MCC interruption test could not be executednormally.

489 SAFETY PARAM ERROR (CNC)

A safety parameter error occurred.

490 CNC SAFETY FUNCTION ERROR

The CNC safety function became abnormal.

� The CNC safety function was notexecuted.

� The check result of the CNC safety func-tion and the check result of the monitor orspindle safety function did not match.

� An abnormality occurred during the CNCRAM check.

� An abnormality occurred during the CPUtest of the CPU.

� The MCC interruption test was not per-formed when the CNC was turned on.

491 LOCAL BUS TEST ERROR

An abnormality occurred during the local bustest. The mother board may be faulty.


698



492 F–BUS TEST ERROR Turn the power off, then turn it on again.

An abnormality occurred during the F–BUStest. The mother board or option board may befaulty.


494 n AXIS:ILLEGAL SPEED CMD. (CNC)

When the safety door was open, a specifiedfeedrate exceeded the safety feedrate (X, Y, Z= 2000 mm/min, additional axes = 700 deg/min).

495 n AXIS:ILLEGAL MACHINE POS.(CNC)

When the safety door is open, the machineposition is not within the safety area.

496 n AXIS:ILLEGAL AXIS DATA (CNC)

An abnormality occurred during axis datatransfer. The alarm may be issued as a resultof a modification to the servo amplifier configu-ration. In such a case, perform axis numbersetting operation for the servo amplifier (set bit4 of parameter No. 2212 for the axis in ques-tion to 1, reset the bit to 0, then turn off the pow-er (also turn off the circuit breaker).

497 n AXIS:SAFETY PARAM TRANS ERROR

An abnormality occurred during safety param-eter transfer.

498 n AXIS:AXIS NUMBER NOT SET (CNC)

No axis number is set for the servo amplifier.The axis number is set automatically. Turn offthe power (and also turn off the circuit break-er).


699

The details of servo alarm are displayed in the diagnosis display (No. 200,No. 201 and No.204) as shown below.

#7OVL200

#6LV

#5OVC

#4HCA

#3HVA

#2DCA

#1FBA

#0OFA

#7 (OVL) : An overload alarm is being generated. (No. 201 shows the details)

#6 (LV) : A low voltage alarm is being generated in servo amp.

#5 (OVC) : A overcurrent alarm is being generated inside of digital servo.

#4 (HCA) : An abnormal current alarm is being generated in servo amp.

#3 (HVA) : An overvoltage alarm is being generated in servo amp.

#2 (DCA) : A regenerative discharge circuit alarm is being generated in servo amp.

#1 (FBA) : A disconnection alarm is being generated.

#0 (OFA) : An overflow alarm is being generated inside of digital servo.

#7ALD201

#6 #5 #4EXP

#3 #2 #1 #0

When OVL equal 1 in diagnostic data No.200 (servo alarm No. 400 isbeing generated):

#7 (ALD) 0 : Motor overheating

1 : Amplifier overheating

When FBAL equal 1 in diagnostic data No.200 (servo alarm No. 416 isbeing generated):

ALD EXP Alarm details

1 0 Built–in pulse coder disconnection (hardware)

1 1 Separately installed pulse coder disconnection(hardware)

0 0 Pulse coder is not connected due to software.

#7204

#6OFS

#5MCC

#4LDA

#3PMS

#2 #1 #0

#6 (OFS) : A current conversion error has occured in the digital servo.

#5 (MCC) : A magnetic contactor contact in the servo amplifier has welded.

#4 (LDA) : The LED indicates that serial pulse coder C is defective

#3 (PMS) : A feedback pulse error has occured because the feedback cable isdefective.

� Details of servo alarm


700

(6) Over–travel alarms

MessageNumber


500 OVER TRAVEL : +n See “Releasing overtravel (OT)” in Part Related parameters:

The stroke limit I at the positive side of the n–axis was exceeded.

III, “DETAILS OF OPERATIONS.”In automatic turret recovery and turret ad-justment mode, the values set in NC pa-

Nos. 1300, 1310,1320, 1321, 1322,1323, 1326, 1327

501 OVER TRAVEL : –nrameter Nos. 1326 and 1327 are used asthe stroke limit values.

Stroke limit I at the negative side of the n–axiswas exceeded.

502 OVER TRAVEL : +n

Stroke limit II at the positive side of the n–axiswas exceeded.

503 OVER TRAVEL : –n

Stroke limit II was exceeded at the negativeside of the n–axis.

506 OVER TRAVEL : +n Check the operating area of the addition- Related parameter:

Hardware OT was exceeded at the positiveside of the n–axis.

al axis. Alternatively, see the descriptionof the additional axis control in III, “DE-TAILS OF OPERATIONS,” and check the

Bit 5 of No. 3004

507 OVER TRAVEL : –nsignal lines. When the hard OT is notused, set bit 5 of NC parameter No. 3004

Hardware OT was exceeded at the negativeside of the n–axis.

to 1.

510 OVER TRAVEL: +n Correct the program.

The pre–travel stroke check detected that ablock end point is within the inhibited strokearea on the positive side of the N axis.

511 OVER TRAVEL: –n

The pre–travel stroke check detected that ablock end point is within the inhibited strokearea on the negative side of the N axis.

(7) Servo alarms

MessageNumber


600 n AXIS: INV. DC LINK OVER CURRENT (1) Check the inter–phase short–circuit

The DC link current of the servo amplifier is toohigh.

and grounding of the power line.

(2) Check the inter–phase short–circuitand grounding of the motor winding.

(3) Replace the servo amplifier.


701



601 n AXIS: INV. RADIATOR FAN FAILURE (1) Replace the fan.

The heat sink cooling fan of the servo amplifieris faulty.


602 n AXIS: INV. OVERHEAT (1) Check the motor use condition.

The servo amplifier is overheated.(2) Check the ambient temperature of the

amplifier.

(3) Check the chiller unit.


603 n AXIS: INV. IPM ALARM(OH) (1) Check the motor use condition.

The intelligent power module (IPM) of the ser-vo amplifier detected an overheat alarm.

(2) Check the ambient temperature of theamplifier.

(3) Check the chiller unit.


604 n AXIS: AMP. COMMUNICATION ERROR (1) Replace the communication cable.

Communication between the servo amplifierand power supply is abnormal.


606 n AXIS: CNV. RADIATOR FAN FAILURE (1) Replace the external cooling fan.

The external heat sink cooling fan of the powersupply is faulty.

607 n AXIS: CNV. SINGLE PHASE FAILURE (1) Check the power supply voltage

Phase missing occurred in the input powersupply.

(8) Overheat alarms

MessageNumber


700 OVERHEAT: CONTROL UNIT Check the CNC fan motor located on the

The CNC overheats.rear side of the LCD, and replace it.

701 OVERHEAT: FAN MOTOR

The fan motor of the CNC is stopped.

704 OVERHEAT: SPINDLE For heavy cutting, ease the cutting condi-

The spindle overheated during detection ofspindle speed fluctuation.

tions. Check whether the tool is dull. Thespindle amplifier can also be consideredto be faulty.


702

(9) Spindle alarms

MessageNumber


740 RIGID TAP ALARM: EXCESS ERROR Select [QUICK]Screen, [32:MAINTE- Related parameters:

While spindle rotation was stopped, a positionerror during rigid tapping exceeded a predeter-mined limit.

NANCE/SETTING], then [3:PARAME-TER], to make an NC parameter checkto see if any parameter modification hasbeen made inappropriately.

3700 to 4999

741 RIGID TAP ALARM: EXCESS ERROR

While the spindle was rotating, a position errorduring rigid tapping exceeded a predeterminedvalue.

742 RIGID TAP ALARM: LSI OVERFLOW

An LSI overflow occurred on the spindle sideduring rigid tapping.

749 S–SPINDLE LSI ERROR Turn off the power (turn off the circuit

A serial communication error occurred whilesystem activation was in progress after power–on. The possible causes of the error are as fol-lows:1) The optical fiber cable is connected poorly,

disconnected, or broken.2) The mother board is faulty.3) The spindle amplifier printed circuit board is

faulty.

breaker), then check whether the cablesconnected to the spindle control unit areattached properly and whether the set-ting pins of the spindle control unit are setcorrectly.After checking, turn on the power againto check whether the alarm is released.If the alarm is still issued after the power(circuit breaker) is turned on and off, con-tact the FANUC technical center servingyour locality.

750 SPINDLE SERIAL LINK START FAULTyour locality.

When a system with a serial spindle is turnedon, this alarm is issued if the spindle amplifiercannot be activated normally. The main pos-sible causes of this problem are as follows:1) The optical fiber cable is connected poorly,

or the power to the spindle amplifier is off.2) The power to the NC was turned on when

an alarm other than SU–02 or AL–24 wasindicated on the LED indicator of thespindle amplifier.

3) Others (such as incorrect hardware com-bination)

For details, see internal diagnostic data No.409.

752 FIRST SPINDLE MODE CHANGE FAULT Turn off the power (turn off the circuitbreaker), then check whether the cables

The following are not yet completed under con-trol of the serial spindle:� Spindle positioning� Changing the mode to rigid tapping mode,

tool change mode, or spindle control mode(The alarm is raised when the spindle controlunit does not respond normally to the changecommand issued by the NC.)

breaker), then check whether the cablesconnected to the spindle control unit areattached properly and whether the set-ting pins of the spindle control unit are setcorrectly.After checking, turn on the power againto check whether the alarm is released.If the alarm is still issued after the power(circuit breaker) is turned on and off, con-tact the FANUC technical center servingyour locality.


703



754 SPINDLE–1 ABNORMAL TORQUE ALM In case of heavy cutting, ease the cutting Related parameters:

Abnormal spindle motor load has been de-tected.

conditions. Check whether the tool isdull.By selecting [QUICK]Screen, [32:MAIN-TENANCE/SETTING], then [3:PA-RAMETER], check NC parameters tosee if any parameter modification hasbeen made inappropriately.

Nos. 4247, 4248,4249, 4250, 4341,

755 SPINDLE–1 SAFETY FUNCTION ERROR Turn the power off, then turn it on again.

In the spindle, the safety function became ab-normal.� The spindle safety function was not

executed.� An abnormality occurred during safety pa-

rameter transfer.


756 BUS ERROR

In the spindle, the spindle amplifier connectionstatus and the spindle amplifier hardware set-ting do not match. The alarm may be issued asa result of a modification to the spindle amplifierconfiguration. In such a case, make settings onthe spindle amplifier side properly.

757 L–BUS ERROR

When the safety door was open, the spindlemotor speed exceeded 200 rpm.Alternatively, the speed determined by theCNC software and the speed determined bythe spindle software did not match.

Details of diagnostic data

409 SPE S2E S1E SHE


When SPE = 1: The serial spindle parameter does not satisfy the spindleamplifier activation condition.

� Action to be taken →Check the parameters related to spindle control.

When S1E = 1: In spindle activation, an abnormality was detected on thespindle.

� Action to be taken →See the list of spindle amplifier alarms.

When SHE = 1:An error was detected in the serial communicationmodule in the NC.

� Action to be taken →Turn the power off then on. If the alarm still exists after the power isturned off then on, it is necessary to replace the mother board.

When all bits are 0, no alarm is being raised.


704

(10) System alarms

MessageNumber


900 ROM PARITY Turn the power off, then turn it on again.

ROM parity error.

Re–install the indicated software.

If the alarm is still raised, contact the near-est FANUC Technical Center.When a system alarm is issued, the pow-er–off button on the operator’s panel can-

910 SRAM PARITY : (BYTE 0)er–off button on the operator’s panel can-not be used.

A RAM parity error occurred in the RAM mod-ule for part program storage (byte 0 to 1).Clear the memory. Alternatively, replace theSRAM module or mother board.

Turn off the circuit breaker.When contacting the FANUC technicalcenter, report all the data displayed on thesystem alarm screen.

911 SRAM PARITY : (BYTE 1)

A RAM parity error occurred in the RAM mod-ule for part program storage (byte 0 to 1).Clear the memory. Alternatively, replace theSRAM module or mother board.

912 DRAM PARITY : (BYTE 0)to

919 DRAM PARITY : (BYTE 1)

DRAM PARITY : (BYTE 2)






RAM parity error in the DRAM module (BYTE 0 to 7)Replace the DRAM module.

920 SERVO ALARM (1–4 AXIS)

Servo alarm. A watchdog alarm condition oc-curred, or a RAM parity error occurred in theaxis control card.Replace the axis control card.


705



921 SERVO ALARM (5–8 AXIS) Turn the power off, then turn it on again.

Servo alarm. A watchdog alarm condition oc-curred, or a RAM parity error occurred in theaxis control card.Replace the axis control card.

If the alarm is still raised, contact the near-est FANUC Technical Center.When a system alarm is issued, the pow-er–off button on the operator’s panel can-not be used.

926 FSSB ALARMTurn off the circuit breaker.When contacting the FANUC technical

FSSB alarm.Replace the axis control card.

center, report all the data displayed on thesystem alarm screen.

930 CPU INTERRUPT

CPU error (abnormal interrupt).The mother board or CPU card may be faulty.

935 SRAM ECC ERROR

An error occurred in RAM for part programstorage. Replace the SRAM module.

950 PMC SYSTEM ALARMPCxxx YYYYYYYYYYYYYY

An error occurred in the PMC.For details, see the list of PMC alarms.

951 PMC WATCH DOG ALARM

Error occured in the PMC (Watch dog alarm).The motherboard may be faulty.

972 NMI OCCURRED IN OTHER MODULE

A NMI was generated on a board other thanthe mother board. An option board may befaulty.

973 NON MASK INTERRUPT

An NMI whose cause is unknown occurred.

974 F–BUS ERROR

A bus error occurred on the FANUC bus.The motherboard or option board may befaulty.

975 BUS ERROR

A bus error occurred on the motherboard.The motherboard may be faulty.

976 L–BUS ERROR

A bus error occurred on the local bus.The motherboard may be faulty.


706

(11) Machine alarms

MessageNumber


1000 POWER FAILURE BACKUP MODULE ALM The possible causes are as follows:

� The power failure backup module isfaulty.

� The cable for connecting the powerfailure backup module is connectedincorrectly or broken.

An alarm related to the power failure backupmodule was detected.

incorrectly or broken.

� The connector panel or the I/O mod-ule on the connector panel is faulty.

� Parameter setting error (The I/O mod-ule on the connector panel is dis-abled. The power failure backupmodule is not installed, but is enabledby the parameter.)

1001 FUSE IS BLOWN After checking the circuit, replace the

A fuse on the connector panel printed circuitboard has blown.

fuses.

1002 EXT. EMERGENCY STOP SIGNAL ON Using the control unit in the external Select

The emergency stop signal input from externaleqipment was off.During use of the external emergency stop sig-nal for the external interface, an error occurredin the external equipment, and the emergencystop signal input was off.

equipment, check whether an alarm israised while the external equipment isconnected. When no error occurs in theexternal equipment, check the status ofexternal equipment connection. Eliminat-ing the alarm raised in the external equip-ment automatically eliminates themachine alarm. If the alarm cannot beeliminated after the connection status ischecked when no external equipment isconnected, contact the nearest FANUCtechnical center.

[QUICK]Screen,[32:MAINTE-NANCE/SET-TING]Screen,[5:EXT.INTER-FACE, FUNC-TIONS, then EX-TERNAL EMGSTOP.

1003 EMERGENCY STOP Check whether the emergency stop but-ton is pressed. If the emergency stop but-

The emergency stop button was pressed.ton is pressed. If the emergency stop but-ton is pressed, investigate the reason,then release the button.Releasing the emergency stop buttonautomatically eliminates the machinealarm.If the emergency stop button was notpressed, and the machine alarm cannotbe reset, it is likely that the internal circuitis defective. Contact the FANUC Techni-cal Center nearby.

1004 DOOR OPEN/CLOSE SW IS DEFECTIVE Replace the defective limit switch and X5.6: For checking

There is something wrong in a limit switch todetect whether the automatic door is open.There is something wrong in a limit switch ofsplash guard door interlock.A signal indicating a closed door state and sig-nal indicating an open door state are both on.

make necessary adjustment.Replace the limit switch for splash guarddoor interlock and adjust it.If the alarm occurs again after the limitswitch is replaced, contact the FANUCTechnicall Center nearby.

open stateX5.7: For checkingclosed state


707



1005 PROGRAM ERROR (NO TOOL) Rotate the spindle with a tool mounted on X6.1: For checking

The spindle rotation command was issuedwhile no tool is mounted on the spindle. Thespindle can be rotated only while a tool ismounted. (If the system settings are such thatno alarm is issued, even when no tool ismounted on the spindle)

the spindle. tool clamping

1006 SPINDLE HAS NO TOOL If no tool is attached to the spindle, attach

The tool arbor fell free.a tool to the spindle.Excessive load may be applied duringmachining, allowing the tool to come offmomentarily. Check the machiningconditions.If the alarm is still issued after the aboveitems are checked, contact the FANUCtechnical center.

1007 PROGRAM ERROR (M19) Spindle positioning cannot be specified

The rigid tapping (M29) was performed duringspindle positioning (M19).

during rigid tapping. Correct the program.This alarm can be released by pressingthe <RESET> key.

1008 AUTO DOOR TOTAL TIME OVER Check whether the automatic door can Standard timer

The automatic door open/close mechanism isabnormal. When the automatic door open/close option is provided, the operation timefrom the specification of door open/close op-eration until operation is completed exceedsthe setting. This may be caused by incorrectsetting of the door open/close operation timeor misadjustment of the door open/closemechanism (the air pressure, the air damper ofthe flow control valve, and the proximityswitch).

be opened/closed completely within fourseconds. (Normally the door is opened/closed in 2 to 3.5 seconds.)Check the timer setting in a PMC parame-ter.This alarm can be released by pressingthe <RESET> key.

valueT20=4000

1009 TCZ LIMIT SW IS DEFECTIVE Check the operation of the tool change

The tool change area detection switch may bedefective.The tool change area has been detected dur-ing an operation other than tool change or tur-ret recovery. (The switch contacts hasopened.).When the tool change area detection switch isactivated by the dog in the tool change area,both of the switch contacts are opened.

1

area detection switch by moving lits lever.The switch status is as follows under thenormal status:

TCZ=X6.0

In the toolexchangearea

Out of thetool exchangearea

TCZ 0

1010 TOOL BREAKAGE WAS DETECTED Replace or check the cutter, or check the When tool damage

The tool damage detection function (AI moni-tor function) detected a failure.This alarm is generated when:The current spindle load exceeds a specifieddamage level value during drilling.A spindle load value greater than or equal tothe rated value cannot be detected during dril-ling.

spindle load damage level value. Thealarm can be reset using the reset key onthe operator’s panel.

is detected, an auto-matic return to theZ–axis referencepoint occurs.


708



1011 ALL TOOL IN SAME GROUP ARE USED Replace the tools. Clear the tool informa-

The tool life management function detectedthat the operating life of all tools in the samegroup expired.

tion on the tool life management screenunder the quick operation screen.

1012 IN THE TOOL CHANGE AREA Perform turret recovery operation.

The Z–axis stopped in the tool change area(+area).

1013 AI TOOL MONITOR DATA ERROR Check the command.

The programmed data rewrite function (AI toolmonitor function) detected an out–of–range orinvalid command error.

1014 APC ALARM Refer to the operation manual for the An alarm exclusive

An alarm related to the Kawata Tech palletchanger occurred.

Kawata Tech pallet changer. for Kawata Tech pal-let changer.

1015 TOOL CHANGE INHIBIT AREA Refer to the operation manual for the Keep relay

A tool exchange command was issued whenthe table was in an area where it might interferewith the pallet changer cables. The positionswitch is used to monitor the interference area.

Kawata Tech pallet changer.The NC parameters for specifying a pro-hibition area are as follows:X–axis: No. 6914, No. 6934, No. 6954Y–axis: No. 6915, No. 6935, No. 6955

K2#6K2#7

1016 MAIN CONTACTOR IS WELDING Press and release the emergency stop

Although the emergency stop state of theROBODRILL has been cancelled, the maincontactor fails to turn on despite the lapse of apreset interval. Alternatively, the main contac-tor fails to turn off even though the ROBO-DRILL has entered the emergency stop state.

button, while checking whether X8.4 isset to 1 and 0, respectively. If the bit canbe set to 1 and 0 by pressing and releas-ing the emergency stop button, replacethe main contactor.

1017 SPINDLE KEY IS DEFECTIVE If you are holding down the spindle key,

The spindle key on the operator’s panel is ONcontinuously for 5 seconds or more.

release the key.The operator’s panel is considered to befaulty.


709



1018 TCZ SWITCH IS WELDING Related

The tool exchange area detection switch mayhave malfunctioned.Alternatively, the dog or parameter setting maybe incorrect.The alarm occurs under the following condi-tion.� During tool change, the tool has been

detected as being outside the tool changearea, even though was still within the area.(The tool change area detection switchhave closed. Or, the tool change area dogis worn.)

� The TCZ switch has been closed (indicat-ing that the tool is outside the tool changearea) while the position switch is outsidethe specified range.

� Check the parameter values for theposition switch with the data sheet.

� Check that the tool exchange areaswitch operate normally. Under thenormal condition, the switch shouldreceive the inputs listed below.

TCZ=X6.0

� Make sure that the two contacts of thetool exchange area detection switchwork at 15 � 2 mm on the Z–axis.

In the toolexchangearea

Out of thetool exchangearea

TCZ 0 1

parameters:No.6938No.6958

The cables for the tool exchange area detec-tion switch may be defective or connectedincorrectly.

� Check the cables.Replace them if necessary.

1019 “SPINDLE IS DEFECTIVE” The CNC or spindle is considered to be Standard timer

In the emergency stop state (with the spindlestopped), the spindle stop state could not bedetected.Alternatively, in the turret recovery mode, thespindle rotated at a speed higher than the spe-cified value.

faulty.Check the timer setting in a PMC parame-ter. After turning the circuit breaker offthen on, turn on the power again. If thealarm is still issued, contact the FANUCtechnical center serving your locality.When a spindle–related alarm has beenissued or when the spindle is coasting, ig-nore this alarm.

valueT58 = 4000

1020 “KA4 RELAY IS DEFECTIVE.” Please consult to FANUC service repre-

A relay for the safety circuit is abnormal. Whenthe servo contactor control (Y0.0) and MCCoff–relay monitor (X7.3) are in the followingstate, an alarm is issued 200 ms later:Y0.0 = 0 and X7.3 = 0, orY0.0 = 1 and X7.3 = 1

sentative.

1021 “KA5 RELAY IS DEFECTIVE.” Contact the FANUC technical center.

A relay for the safety circuit is abnormal. Whenthe servo ready (Y0.6) and servo ready relaymonitor (X7.4) are in the following state, analarm is issued 200 ms later:Y0.6 = 0 and X7.4 = 0, orY0.6 = 1 and X7.4 = 1


710



1022 BREAK RELAY IS DEFECT. (Emergency stop) Please consult to FANUC service repre-

A relay for controlling the emergency stop isdefective.When emergency stop input and relay contactpoint input are following status, alarm occursafter 500msecX8.4=0 X8.4=1X9.5=0 X9.5=1

or

sentative.

1023 BREAK RELAY IS DEFECT. (Z AXIS)

A relay for controlling the Z–axis brake isdefective.When servo ready SA and relay contact pointinput are following status, alarm occures after200msecY0.2=0 Y0.2=1X7.5=0 X7.5=1

or

1024 “KA8 RELAY IS DEFECTIVE.”

A relay for the safety circuit is abnormal. Whenthe guard lock relay monitor (X7.5) and FSSBI/O guard lock relay monitor (X7.6) are in thefollowing state, an alarm is issued 500 ms lat-er:X7.5 = 0 and X7.6 = 1, orX7.5 = 1 and X7.6 = 0

1025 “KA9 RELAY IS DEFECTIVE.”

A relay for the safety circuit is abnormal. Whenthe MCC (X7.0) and FSSB I/O MCC off relaymonitor (X7.7) are in the following state, analarm is issued 8 ms later:X7.0 = 0 and X7.7 = 1, orX7.0 = 1 and X7.7 = 0

1026 “DOOR CAN NOT UNLOCK.” Pressure may be applied to the front door,

Although the release of the door lock is speci-fied, the door lock cannot be released.

preventing the pin of the lock mechanismfrom being removed. When releasing thedoor lock, be careful not to exert force tothe door by, for example, pulling the han-dle or leaning against the door.

1027 “CLAMP SPRINGS LIFE OVER.” Disassemble the spindle clamp/unclamp Counter

The useful life of the spring for the arbor clampof the spindle has been reached. The numberof times tools are changed is counted. Thisalarm is issued when the number of expan-sions/contractions of the spring for clampingthe arbor to the spindle has exceeded the set-ting.

mechanism, and check and replace theconed disc spring for clamping the arbor.Contact the FANUC Technical Center.

No. 001No. 002

1028 OIL LEVEL IS LOWER THAN LIMIT. Add oil. X9.7: Detection oflow oil level

The oil level in the centralized lubricant tank islow.

Keep relayK12#5NOTE 1)


711



1029 KAA3 RELAY IS DEFECTIVE The relay KAA3 is considered to be faulty,

The relay for the automatic side door is abnor-mal. This alarm is issued 500 msec after theautomatic side door operation enable signal(Y0.5) and KAA3 relay monitor signal (X4.0)are set as follows:Y0.5 = 1 and X4.0 = 1orY0.5 = 0 and X4.0 = 0

or the cable is considered to be con-nected incorrectly or broken. Alternative-ly, the parameter for enabling automaticside door control is set for a machine thathas no automatic side door.

1031 C.T.COOL. PRESSURE ALM (UPPER) 1 Check the coolant viscosity. If the vis- X5.1: Detection of

The coolant viscosity is too high.The coolant pump is not adjusted properly.

cosity is too high, change the coolant.2 Adjust the pressure of the center–

through pump.3 If the alarm is still issued after the

above actions are applied, checkwhether there is a switch problem orfaulty cabling.

upper pressure limit

1032 C.T.COOL. PRESSURE ALM (LOWER) 1 Add coolant. X5.3: Detection of

The coolant level is low.There is coolant leakage due to the use of thewrong piping or damage to the piping.

2 Check the piping, and repair anyloose or damaged joints if any.

3 The pump has malfunctioned. Re-place it.

4 If the above alarm is still issued afterthe above actions are applied, checkwhether there is a switch problem orfaulty wiring.

lower pressure limit

1033 FILTER LOADING (C.T.COOLANT) 1 Replace the line filter. X5.2: Detection of

The line filter has been clogged for more than100 hours.

2 If the alarm is still issued after the filteris replaced, check whether there is aswitch problem or faulty wiring.

clogged state

1034 NOT READY C.T.COOLANT PUMP 1 There is a program error. Correct the

M22 is specified before the center–throughpump starts.

program.2 Specify M21 before the block contain-

ing M22.

1035 C.T.COOLANT MOTOR OVERHEAT Check the following items, and take ap- X5.4: Detection of

The center–through coolant motor is over-loaded.

propriate action:1 Check whether idling is performed.2 Check whether the set pressure is too

high.3 Check whether the suction filter is

clogged and whether there is anyleakage from the suction pipe.

4 Check whether there is any leakagefrom the pump.

5 If the pump leaks, replace the pump.

overload

1036 COOLANT LOWER LIMIT 1 Add coolant. X5.0: Detection of

The coolant level is low. 2 If the alarm is still issued after coolantis added, check whether there is aswitch problem or faulty wiring.

lower limitNOTE 1)


712



1037 TIME OVER (M CODE) Check the peripheral equipment corre-

The M code operation time exceeds the speci-fied value (standard: 30 s).

sponding to the M code command thatcaused the time–out alarm.

1038 “DUST CATCHER ALARM.” Refer to the manual on the dust collector. X5.7: Alarm

An alarm is issued in the dust collector.

1039 “CYCLE START SIGNAL IS DEFECTIVE.” The start button must be pressed only Keep relay

The start button was pressed at the end of aprogram or when operation stopped.

when needed. The start button (X21.6)may be faulty.

K6#5

1040 PROBE SYSTEM ERROR Check the wire connections, cabling, andexternal interface settings.

Keep relayK17#1

The probe system is defective. The probe or receiving sensor may be de-fective.

1041 PROBE ON/OFF ERROR Check the probe and receiving sensororientations, and check whether theprobe and receiving sensor window are

There is no response to a probe ON/OFF com-mand.

dirty.This error may be due to a probe switch-ing problem, dead battery, or receivingsensor failure.

1042 PROBE SIGNAL ERROR Check the wire connections, cabling, and Keep relay

An error signal was output from the probe.external interface settings.The probe battery may be dead.

K17#1

1043 PROBE BATTERY LOW Replace the battery.

The voltage of the probe battery has lowered.

1044 OVER TRAVEL (STYLUS) Check the setting of the working probe.

The stylus on the scanning probe manufac-tured by RENISHAW is bent excessively.

Check the various settings of the NC pro-gram and offset data.

1045 PROBE ERROR For details, refer to the manual of the

The scanning probe manufactured by RENI-SHAW does not operate normally.

scanning probe.

1046 PROBE IS MOUNTING An operation that rotates the spindle is

A tool change or spindle rotation was specifiedwith a cable connected to the scanning probemanufactured by RENISHAW.

prohibited.


713



1047 INTERNAL FAN STOP (SERVO AMP.) Replace the fan.

The fan installed on the top of the servo ampli-fier case stopped.

1048 EXTERNAL FAN STOP (SERVO AMP.)

The fan for cooling the servo amplifier heatsink stopped.

1049 INTERNAL FAN STOP (PWR SUPPLY)

The cooling fan inside the power supplystopped.

1050 EXTERNAL FAN STOP (PWR SUPPLY)

The fan for cooling the power supply heat sinkstopped.

1051 OVERHEAT (POWER SUPPLY) Turn off the circuit breaker, and halt op-

The power supply is overheated.eration for a while.If an alarm cannot be released, contact

1052 OVERHEAT (SERVO AMP.) the FANUC technical center.

The servo amplifier is overheated.

1053 SPINDLE ROTATION IS PROHIBITED While the probe is attached to the spindle,spindle rotation is not permitted.

A spindle rotation was specified with the probeattached to the spindle.

The number of the magazine to which theprobe is attached is set in PMC parame-ter data table D100.

NOTE1 These alarms are detected in the following cases:

� When the power is turned on (when the servo system is activated)� When machining ends (when any of the following codes is specified: M00, M01 (when the

M01 stop button on the operator’s panel is ON), M02, M30, M60, M61, M62, M63, M64, andM65)


714

(12) Alarms related to the conversational programming function

A) SUPER C.A.P iM: Alarms other than alarms in contouring (number: 3175)

Message Explanation Related menu

INPUT VALUE IS ERRONEOUS Necessary data is not input.Input data is not correct.

All menus

COPIED DOUBLE DEFINITION An already set copy was set again. Copy

ERROR IN COPY TOTAL The total number of copies is incorrect.The number of inputs is insufficient for the total number of copies.

Copy (random)

WORK COORD.SELLING COM.

Although all/group copy is specified, the workpiece coordinatesystem is used for each menu.

All menus

UNAPPLI, TOOL WAS SETTED A tool of unusable type is specified. Drilling

DATA IS LACKING Although both X and Y must be specified, only X or Y is specified. Copy (random)Point group

OFFSET VALUE IS UNDER 0 The offset data corresponding to the specified D code is 0 or less. Facing

INTERFERE WITH WORK (RING) The tool interferes with the opposite face. Ring machining

CHAMF, TOOL EXCEDS Z POINT The chamfering tool interferes with the bottom plane (Z point) dur-ing chamfering.

Side machiningPocket cutting

CHAMF. TOOL ANGLE IS SMALL During machining such as tapering of a side face, the tapering toolangle is smaller than the taper angle.

Side machining

OFFSET VALUE IS 0 The offset data corresponding to the specified D code is 0. Side machiningPocket cutting

DIA. IS BIGGER THAN R. Because the cutter diameter is larger than the corner radius, thecorner cannot be rounded.


TAPER IS INSUFFICIENT When tapering was performed with reference to the top surface,the cutting allowance at the bottom became insufficient becauseof the too large taper angle.

Side machining

TAPER ANGLE IS TOO BIG In internal side face machining, side faces intersect, so there is nobottom. This is because the taper angle is too large.

Side machining

APPROACH AMOUNT IS BIG Because the approach amount is too large, interference with anopposite side occurs.


CUT WAIDTH IS TOO SMALL Because of the cutting width, the travel distance per cut is 0.00001or less.

Pocket cutting

TOOL IS TOO BIG Because of the too large cutter diameter, machining is impossible. Side machiningPocket cutting

T–CODE IS NOT CORRECT The T code is blank or invalid. All menus

CHAMF.TOOL ANGLE IS LACK. No chamfering tool angle is set in the tool file. Side machiningPocket cutting


715

B) SUPER C.A.P iM: Alarms in contouring

Alarm No. Message Explanation

3190, 3191, 3192 LACKING BOTTOM REMOV The cutting allowance is 0.

3190, 3191, 3192 LACKING Z POINT The coordinates of the Z point are not input.

3190, 3191 LACKING SIDE REMOVE The cutting allowance is 0.

3190, 3191, 3192 LACKING RGH. TOOL ID NO. The tool ID number is not input.

3190, 3191, 3192 LACKING FIN. TOOL ID NO. The tool ID number is not input.

3190, 3191, 3192 LACKING CHM. TOOL ID NO. The tool ID number is not input.

3190, 3191, 3192 LACKING RGH. SPINDLE SPEED The spindle speed is not input.

3190, 3191, 3192 LACKING FIN.SPINDLE SPEED The spindle speed is not input.

3190, 3191, 3192 LACKING CHM. SPINDLE SPEED The spindle speed is not input.

3191 UNABLE TO EXECUTE TOOL TRACE The loci of the pocket outside wall and island out-side wall interfere.

3191 CLOSE TO OUTER AND ISLAND There is a conflict in mesh search.

3191 TOOL IS TOO SMALL In machining of an outside wall, the start point andend point of the tool path are not closed.

3191 UNABLEBI–DIRECTIONAL CUTTING Bi–directional cutting can be performed only forsimple shapes with no island.

3191 TO T. ISLAND GT 6 Up to six islands are permitted.

3190, 3191, 3192 EFFICTIVE CUTTING WIDTH IS 0 The valid cutting width is 0.

3190, 3191, 3192 TOOL OFF SET MEASUREMENT IS 0 No cutter compensation data is set.

3190, 3191, 3192 BOTTOM REMOV. LT BOTTOM FIN. The cutting allowance of the bottom is smaller thanthe finishing allowance.

3190, 3191 SIDE REMOV. LT SIDE FINSH The cutting allowance of the side face is smallerthan the finishing allowance.

3190, 3191, 3192 LACKING RGH. H–CODE NO. No length compensation number is input.

3190, 3191, 3192 LACKING FIN. H–CODE NO. No length compensation number is input.

3190, 3191, 3192 LACKING CHM. H–CODE NO. No length compensation number is input.

3190, 3191, 3192 LACKING RGH. D–CODE NO. No diameter compensation number is input.

3190, 3191, 3192 LACKING FIN. D–CODE NO. No diameter compensation number is input.

3190, 3191, 3192 LACKING CHM. D–CODE NO. No diameter compensation number is input.

3191Pocket outside wallPocket island

INCORRECT OFFSET DIRECTION There is no input data for inquiry item OFFSETDIRECTION.

3191 INCORRECT CUTTING DIRECTION There is no input data for inquiry item CUTTINGDIRECTION.

3191 INCORRECT END OF ISLAND There is no input data for pocket island continua-tion.


716

C) Manual Guide

Alarm No. Message Explanation

3001 INPUT VALUE IS ERRONEOUS. Necessary data is not entered. Or entered data is invalid.Display the block data of pop–up window, at which is occurred thealarm, and enter the correct data after confirming it.

3002 OFFSET VALUE IS UNDER 0. The offset data corresponding to the specified D code is 0 or less.Confirm the D code, at which is occurred the alarm and enter thecorrect data to the offset table.

3003 INTERFERE WITH WORK (RING) The tool interferes with the opposite surface.Confirm the tool, at which is occurred the alarm and select the toolof smaller radius than the last time.

3004 TOOL IS TOO BIG. Machining is impossible because the cutter diameter is too large.Confirm the tool, at which is occurred the alarm and select the toolof smaller radius than the last time.

3005 APPROACH AMOUNT IS BIG. The tool interferes with the opposite edge because the length ofapproach is too long.Confirm the approach data, at which is occurred the alarm and en-ter the correct data to the approach.

3006 CORNER RADIUS (R) IS BIG. Corner R interferes with the opposite one because the radius ofcorner R is too large.Confirm the radius of corner R, at which is occurred the alarm andenter the correct data to the radius.

3007 CHAMFER AMOUNT IS BIG. Corner C interferes with the opposite one because the chamferamount is too large.Confirm the chamfer amount of corner C, at which is occurred thealarm and enter the correct data to the chamfer.

3008 DIA. IS BIGGER THAN R. Corner R machining can not be performed because the cutter di-ameter is larger than corner R.Confirm the tool, at which is occurred the alarm and select the toolof smaller radius than the last time.

3012 CHAMF. TOOL EXCEDS A POINT The chamfering tool interferes with the bottom surface (Z point) inchamfering.Confirm the block data related to chamfer tool, at which is oc-curred the alarm and enter the correct data to it.

3013 CHAMF. TOOL ANGLE IS LACK The angle at which the chamfering tool is placed is not specified.Confirm the block data related to chamfer tool, at which is oc-curred the alarm and enter the correct data to it.

3014 MEMORY IS NOT SUFFICIENT The tool path can not create because the memory for the calcula-tion is over the limitation.Divide the entered contour figure block or machining area.

3015 INCORRECT MACHINING FIGURE The tool path can not create because the contour shape is not cor-rect. Confirm the block data of the contour shape, at which is occurredthe alarm and enter the correct data to it.

3016 INCORRECT CUT CONDITIONS The tool path can not create because the data of cutting conditionis not correct.Confirm the block data related to the cutting condition, at which isoccurred the alarm and enter the correct data to it.


717

Alarm No. ExplanationMessage

3017 INCORRECT START POINT The machining can not be performed because the cutting startpoint positions at the outer machining field. Confirm the block data related to the cutting condition and contourshape, at which is occurred the alarm and enter the correct datato it.

3018 START POING NOT OBTAINED The cutting start point can not be calculated because the data isnot correct.Confirm the block data related to the cutting condition and contourshape, at which is occurred the alarm and enter the correct datato it.

3019 NUMBER OF CUTS OVER LIMIT The maximum allowable number of cuts was exceeded.Check the machining figure and machining condition data of theblock that caused the alarm, then reenter correct values.

3020 INTERFERES MACHINING FIG. The tool interferes with the machining shape. Confirm the block data related to the cutting condition and contourshape, at which is occurred the alarm and enter the correct datato it.

3022 D–CODE IS NOT SPECIFIED D code is not specified.Before the block at which is occurred the alarm, specify D code byusing Tool Setting menu.

3101 SETTING DATA ERROR. ADD. A No input item is entered for argument address A.Enter data.

3102 SETTING DATA ERROR. ADD. B No input item is entered for argument address B.Enter data.

3103 SETTING DATA ERROR. ADD. C No input item is entered for argument address C.Enter data.

3104 SETTING DATA ERROR. ADD. I No input item is entered for argument address I.Enter data.

3105 SETTING DATA ERROR. ADD. J No input item is entered for argument address J.Enter data.

3106 SETTING DATA ERROR. ADD. K No input item is entered for argument address K.Enter data.

3107 SETTING DATA ERROR. ADD. D No input item is entered for argument address D.Enter data.

3108 SETTING DATA ERROR. ADD. E No input item is entered for argument address E.Enter data.

3109 SETTING DATA ERROR. ADD. F No input item is entered for argument address F.Enter data.

3111 SETTING DATA ERROR. ADD. H No input item is entered for argument address H.Enter data.

3113 SETTING DATA ERROR. ADD. M No input item is entered for argument address M.Enter data.

3117 SETTING DATA ERROR. ADD. Q No input item is entered for argument address Q.Enter data.

3118 SETTING DATA ERROR. ADD. R No input item is entered for argument address R.Enter data.


718


3119 SETTING DATA ERROR. ADD. S No input item is entered for argument address S.Enter data.

3120 SETTING DATA ERROR. ADD. T No input item is entered for argument address T.Enter data.

3121 SETTING DATA ERROR. ADD. U No input item is entered for argument address U.Enter data.

3122 SETTING DATA ERROR. ADD. V No input item is entered for argument address V.Enter data.

3123 SETTING DATA ERROR. ADD. W No input item is entered for argument address W.Enter data.

3124 SETTING DATA ERROR. ADD. X No input item is entered for argument address X.Enter data.

3125 SETTING DATA ERROR. ADD. Y No input item is entered for argument address Y.Enter data.

3126 SETTING DATA ERROR. ADD. Z No input item is entered for argument address Z.Enter data.

3130 ERROR:PROBE LENGTH The probe length is null or not greater than 0.Enter correct data.

3131 ERROR:STYLUS BALL DIAM. X The stylus ball diameter along the X–axis is null or not greater than0.Enter correct data.

3132 ERROR:STYLUS BALL DIAM. Y The stylus ball diameter along the Y–axis is null or not greater than0.Enter correct data.

3133 ERROR:STYLUS BALL OFS X The X–axis compensation amount at the stylus position is null.Enter data.

3134 ERROR:STYLUS BALL OFS. Y The Y–axis compensation amount at the stylus position is null.Enter data.

3135 ERROR:MEASURING 1ST FEED The feedrate (f) in the first measurement is null or not greater than0.Enter correct data.

3136 ERROR:MEASURING 1ST DIST The first measurement distance (a) is null or not greater than 0.Enter correct data.

3137 ERROR:MEASURING 2ND DIST The second measurement value (b) is null or not greater than 0.Enter correct data.

3138 ERROR:MEASURING OVERLAP The overrun amount (g) at measurement is null or not greater than0.Enter correct data.

3139 ERROR:FEED FOR APPROACH The approach feedrate (fa) at measurement is null or not greaterthan 0.Enter correct data.

3140 ERROR:ESCAPE OFFSET Return amount (e) after the second contact is null or not greaterthan 0.Enter correct data.


719


3141 CHECK SENSOR SIGNAL The G31 skip signal was already ON before measurement. (Theskip signal was turned ON at the measurement start position.)Check the touch probe wire connections and so forth.

3142 NO TOUCH Even when the overrun amount has been reached, the signal wasnot turned ON.Check the touch probe wire connections and so forth.Check whether the power to the touch probe is on.

3143 PROBE TOUCHED WHILE APPR. The G31 skip signal went ON before the measurement start pointwas reached.Check the touch probe wire connections and so forth.Check the measurement program to see if there is probe contactduring approach.

3147 PARAM. NO. 9150 IS UNDEFINED 0 is set in parameter No. 9150.Check the setting. (Standard value: 800)

3148 PARAM NO. 12050 IS UNDEF. 0 is set in parameter No. 12050.Check the setting. (Standard value: 19)

3149 NO OPTION There is no measurement cycle option.Add the option.


720

(13) Program errors (P/S alarms 5000 and up)

MessageNumber

Contents

5000 ILLEGAL COMMAND CODE

The specified code was incorrect in the high–precision contour control mode. (High–precision contour control)

5003 ILLEGAL PARAMETER (HPCC)

There is an invalid parameter. (High–precision contour control)

5004 HPCC NOT READY

The RISC board is not operable. (AI high precision contour control)

5006 TOO MANY WORD IN ONE BLOCK

The number of words specified in a block exceeded 26. (High–precision contour control)

5007 TOO LARGE DISTANCE

In the HPCC mode, the machine moved beyond the limit. (High–precision contour control)

5009 PARAMETER ZERO (DRY RUN)

The maximum feedrate (parameter No. 1422) or the feedrate in dry run (parameter No. 1410) is 0. (High–preci-sion contour control)

5010 END OF RECORD

The end of record (%) was specified. I/O is incorrect. modify the program.

5011 PARAMETER ZERO(CUT MAX)

The maximum cutting feedrate (parameter No. 1422)is 0. (High–precision contour control)

5012 G05 P10000 ILLEGAL START UP (HPCC)

Function category:High–precision contour controlAlarm details:G05 P10000 has been specified in a mode from which the system cannot enter HPCC mode. (High–precisioncontour control)

5013 HPCC: CRC OFS REMAIN AT CANCEL

G05P0 has been specified in G41/G42 mode or with offset remaining. (High–precision contour control)

5014 TRACE DATA NOT FOUND

Transfer cannot be performed because no trace data exists.

5015 NO ROTATION AXIS

The specified rotation axis does not exist for tool axis direction handle feed.

5016 ILLEGAL COMBINATION OF M CODE

M codes which belonged to the same group were specified in a block. Alternatively,an M code which must bespecified without other M codes in the block was specified in a block with other M codes.


721

NumberMessage

NumberContents

5043 TOO MANY G68 NESTING

Three–dimensional coordinate conversion G68 has been specified three or more times.

5044 G68 FORMAT ERROR

A G68 command block contains a format error. This alarm is issued in the following cases:1. I, J, or K is missing from a G68 command block (missing coordinate rotation option).2. I, J, and K are 0 in a G68 command block.3. R is missing from a G68 command block.

5050 ILL–COMMAND IN CHOPPING MODE

A command for switching the major axis has been specified for circular threading. Alternatively, a commandfor setting the length of the major axis to 0 has been specified for circular threading.

5059 RADIUS IS OUT OF RANGE

A radius exceeding nine digits has been specified for circular interpolation with the center of the arc specifiedwith I, J, and K.

5060 ILLEGAL PARAMETER IN G02.3/G03.3

There is a parameter setting error.Parameter No. 5641 (linear axis setting) is not set.The axis set in parameter No. 5641 is not a linear axis.Parameter No. 5642 (rotation axis setting) is not set.The axis set in parameter No. 5642 is not a rotation axis.The linear axis and rotation axis cannot be controlled by the CNC. (More than the value set in parameter No.1010 is set.)

5061 ILLEGAL FORMAT IN G02.3/G03.3

There is a format error in the exponential interpolation command (G02.3/G03.3).Address I, J, or K is not specified.0 is set in address I, J, or K.

5062 ILLEGAL COMMAND IN G02.3/G03.3

An illegal value is specified in the exponential interpolation command (G02.3/G03.3).A value that makes exponential interpolation impossible is specified. (For example, a negative value is speci-fied in In.)

5064 DIFFERRENT AXIS UNIT (IS–B, IS–C)

Circular interpolation has been specified on a plane consisting of axes having different increment systems.

5067 G05 PO COMMANDED IN G68/G51 MODE (HPCC)

High–precision contour control mode cannot be canceled during G51 (scaling) or G68 (coordinate systemrotation). Correct the program.

5068 G31 FORMAT ERROR

One of the following errors is found in the continuous high–speed skip command:1. The movement axis is not specified.2. More than one movement axis is specified.


722

NumberMessage

NumberContents

5073 NO DECIMAL POINT

No decimal point has been specified for an address requiring a decimal point.

5074 ADDRESS DUPLICATION ERROR

The same address has been specified two or more times in a single block. Alternatively, two or more G codesin the same group have been specified in a single block.

5082 DATA SERVER ERROR

This alarm is detailed on the data server message screen.

5110 NOT STOP POSITION (G05.1 G1)

An illegal G code is specified in modeller control mode (G5.1 Q1).

5111 IMPROPER MODEL G–CODE (G05.1 G1)

When modeller control mode (G5.1 Q1) is specified, an illegal G code is modal.

5112 G08 CAN NOT BE COMMANDED (G05.1 G1)

Look–ahead control (G08) is specified in modeller control mode (G5.1 Q1).

5113 CAN NOT ERROR IN MDI MODE (G05.1)

Simple high–precision contour control (G05.1) was specified in MDI mode.

5114 NOT STOP POSITION (G05.1 Q1)

At the time of restart after manual intervention, the coordinates at which the manual intervention occurred havenot been restored.

5115 SPL : ERROR

There is an error in the specification of the rank.

No knot is specified.

The knot specification has an error.

The number of axes exceeds the limits.

Other program errors

5116 SPL : ERROR

There is a program error in a block under look–ahead control.

Monotone increasing of knots is not observed.

In NURBS interpolation mode, a mode that cannot be used together is specified.

5117 SPL : ERROR

The first control point of NURBS is incorrect.

5118 SPL : ERROR

After manual intervention with manual absolute mode set to on, NURBS interpolation was restarted.


723

NumberMessage

NumberContents

5122 ILLEGAL COMMAND IN SPIRAL

There is a specification error in spiral interpolation or conical interpolation. Specifically, this alarm is issuedfor the following causes:

1) L=0 is specified.2) Q=0 is specified.3) R/, R/, C is specified.4) Height increment 0 is specified.5) Three axes or more are specified as the height axes.6) When there are two height axes, height increment is specified.7) Although there is no helical interpolation option, conical interpolation is specified.8) When difference in radius > 0, Q < 0 is specified.9) When difference in radius < 0, Q > 0 is specified.10) Although no height axis is specified, height increment is specified.

5123 OVER TOLERANCE OF END POINT

The difference between the specified end point position and the calculated end point position exceeds the per-missible range (parameter No. 3471).

5124 CAN NOT COMMAND SPIRAL

Spiral interpolation or conical interpolation was specified in the following modes:

1) Scaling2) Programmable mirror image3) Polar coordinate interpolation

In cutter compensation C mode, the start point is set to the center, or the end point is set to the center.

5134 FSSB : OPEN READY TIME OUT

Initialization did not place FSSB in the open ready state.

5135 FSSB : ERROR MODE

FSSB has entered error mode.

5136 FSSB : NUMBER OF AMPS IS SMALL

In comparison with the number of controlled axes, the number of amplifiers recognized by FSSB is not enough.

5137 FSSB : CONFIGURATION ERROR

FSSB detected a configuration error.

5138 FSSB : AXIS SETTING NOT COMPLETE

In automatic setting mode, axis setting has not been made yet.

5139 FSSB : ERROR

Servo initialization did not terminate normally.The optical fiber cable may be faulty, or connection to an amplifier or between modules may be incorrect.Check the optical fiber cable and connection.


724

NumberMessage

NumberContents

5157 PARAMETER ZERO (AICC)

Zero is set in the parameter for the maximum cutting feedrate (parameter No. 1422 or 1432).Zero is set in the parameter for the acceleration/deceleration before interpolation (parameter No. 1770 or1771).Set the parameter correctly.

5196 ILLEGAL OPERATION (HPCC)

Detachment was performed during high–precision contour control.When detachment is performed during high–precision contour control, this alarm is issued after the currentlyexecuted block terminates.

5197 FSSB : OPEN TIME OUT

The CNC permitted FSSB to open, but FSSB was not opened.

5198 FSSB : ID DATA NOT READ

Temporary assignment failed, so amplifier initial ID information could not be read.

5199 FINE TORQUE SENSING PARAMETER

There is an error in a parameter related to the fine torque sensing function.� The storage interval is invalid.� An invalid axis number is set for a target axis.Correct the parameter.

5212 SCREEN COPY : PARAMETER ERROR

There is a parameter setting error. Check whether 4 is set as the I/O channel.

5213 SCREEN COPY : COMMUNICATION ERROR

The memory card cannot be used.Check the memory card. (Check whether the card is write–protected or defective.)

5214 SCREEN COPY : DATA TRANSFER ERROR

Data transfer to a memory card failed.Check for the available space on the memory card. Also check whether the memory card was removed duringdata transfer.

5219 CAN NOT RETURN

You cannot perform manual intervention and restoration during three–dimensional coordinate conversion.

5220 REFERENCE POINT ADJUSTMENT MODE

A parameter for automatically setting the reference position is set (bit 2 of parameter No. 1819 = 1).Perform automatic setting.(Position the machine to the reference position manually, then perform manual reference position return.)Supplement: Automatic setting sets bit 2 of parameter No. 1819 to 0.

5222 SRAM CORRECTABLE ERROR

An SRAM correctable error cannot be removed.Cause: A problem occurred in memory during memory initialization.Action: Replace the SRAM module.

5257 G41/G42 NOT ALLOWED IN MDI MODE

G41/G42 (cutter compensation C) was specified in MDI mode. (The setting of bit 4 of parameter No. 5008 isfollowed.)


725

NumberMessage

NumberContents

5300 SET ALL OFFSET DATAS AGAIN

When the setting for enabling or disabling the inch/metric automatic conversion function of tool offset data (bit0 of parameter No. 5006) has been changed, all tool offset data must be set again.This is posted to the operator.When this alarm is issued, set all tool offset data again. If the machine is used without setting data again, themachine will malfunction.

5302 ILLEGAL COMMAND IN G68 MODE

Setting of a coordinate system was specified in the coordinate system rotation mode.

5306 MODE CHANGE ERROR

In one–touch macro call, mode switching at the start time is not performed correctly.

5307 INTERNAL DATA OVER FLOW

In the following function, internal data exceeds the permissible range:

1) Improvement in rotation axis feedrate

5311 FSSB:ILLEGAL CONNECTION

FSSB connection is invalid.

1. This alarm is issued when axes with adjacent odd and even servo axis numbers (parameter No. 1023) areassigned to amplifiers connected to different FSSB systems.

2. This alarm issued when the system does not satisfy the requirements for high–speed HRV control, twoFSSBs use different current control intervals, and the pulse module used is connected to a different FSSBsystem.

5400 SPL:ILLEGAL AXIS COMMAND

There is an axis specification error in spline interpolation or smooth interpolation.When an axis that is not a spline axis is specified in the spline interpolation mode, this alarm is issued.The spline axis refers to an axis specified in the block containing G06.1 or the following block. In case ofsmooth interpolation, the axis specified in G5.1Q2 is illegal.

5401 SPL:ILLEGAL COMMAND

In a G code mode in which G06.1 must not be specified, G06.1 is specified.

5402 SPL:ILLEGAL AXIS MOVING

A movement was made along an axis that was not a spline interpolation axis.For example, when spline interpolation with the X– and Y–axes set as two spline axes is performed in thethree–dimensional tool compensation mode in which the three components of the offset vector include the X–,Y–, and Z–axes, a movement along the Z–axis occurs, causing this alarm.

5411 NURBS:ILLEGAL ORDER

The number of steps is specified incorrectly.

5412 NURBS:NO KNOT COMMAND

No knot is specified. Alternatively, in NURBS interpolation mode, a block not relating to NURBS interpolationis specified.

5413 NURBS:ILLEGAL AXIS COMMAND

An axis not specified with controlled points is specified in the first block.


726

NumberMessage

NumberContents

5414 NURBS:ILLEGAL KNOT

The number of blocks containing knots only is insufficient.

5415 NURBS:ILLEGAL CANCEL

Although NURBS interpolation is not completed yet, the NURBS interpolation mode is turned off.

5416 NURBS:ILLEGAL MODE

A mode that cannot be used with NURBS interpolation mode is specified in NURBS interpolation mode.

5417 NURBS:ILLEGAL MULTI–KNOT

As many knots as the number of steps are not specified at the start and end points.

5418 NURBS:ILLEGAL KNOT VALUE

Knots do not increase in monotone.

5425 ILLEGAL OFFSET VALUE

The offset number is illegal.

5440 ILLEGAL DRILLING AXIS SELECTED

The hole machining axis specified for the hole machining canned cycle is illegal.The Z point of the hole machining axis is not specified in the block specifying a canned cycle G code. Alterna-tively, when there is a parallel axis, the axis parallel to the hole machining axis is also specified simultaneously.

5446 CRC:NO AVOIDANCE

Because there is no interference evade vector, the interference check evade function of cutter compensationcannot evade interference.

5447 CRC:DANGEROUS AVOIDANCE

The interference check evade function of cutter compensation determines that an evade operation will leadto danger.

5448 CRC:INTERFERENCE TO AVD.

In the interference check evade function of cutter compensation, a further interference occurs for an alreadycreated interference evade vector.

5455 ILLEGAL ACC. PARAMETER

There is an error in permissible acceleration parameters for optimum torque acceleration/deceleration. Thecause is one of the following:

1) The ratio of the deceleration to the acceleration is lower than the limit.

2) The time for decelerating the feedrate to 0 exceeds the maximum value.


727

CNCscreendisplay

SPMindication Description Action

71019001

01 MOTOR OVERHEAT 1 Check the ambient temperature and load status(cutting condition and acceleration/decelerationfrequency).

2 If the cooling fan stops, replace it.3 Check and correct the parameter.4 Replace the feedback cable.

71029002

02 EXCESSIVE VELOCITY ERROR 1 Check and correct the cutting conditions to de-crease the load.

2 Correct parameter No. 4082.

71039003

03 DC LINK FUSE BLOWN 1 Replace the spindle amplifier.2 Check the motor insulation status.

71049004

04 INPUT POWER SUPPLY OPENPHASE AND POWER

Check the state of power input to the power supply.

71069006

06 MOTOR THERMAL DETECTIONDISCONNECTED

1 Check and correct the parameter.2 Replace the feedback cable.

71079007

07 OVERSPEED 1 Replace the feedback cable.2 Check for a sequence error. (For example,

check whether spindle synchronization was spe-cified when spindle motor could not be turned.)

71099009

09 MAIN CIRCUIT OVERLOAD/IPMOVERLOAD

1 Improve the heat sink cooling status.2 Check load status.

71119011

11 DC LINK OVERVOLTAGE 1 Check the power supply selection.2 Replace the power supply.

71129012

12 DC LINK OVERCURRENT/IPMALARM

1 Check the motor insulation status.2 Check the parameter specific to each motor

model.3 Replace the spindle amplifier.

71159015

15 SPEED RANGE SWITCHING ANDSPINDLE SWITCHING ALARM

1 Check the ladder program.2 Replace the magnetic contactor for switching.

71169016

16 SPN_n_ : RAM FAULT Replace the spindle amplifier control printed circuitboard.

71189018

18 PROGRAM DATA ERROR INSUM–CHECK

Replace the spindle amplifier control PC board.

71199019

19 PHASE U CURRENT DETECTORCIRCUIT EXCESSIVE OFFSET

Replace the spindle amplifier.

F.2SPINDLE AMPLIFIER

F.2.1Alarms


728

CNCscreendisplay

ActionDescriptionSPMindication

71209020

20 PHASE V CURRENT DETECTORCIRCUIT EXCESSIVE OFFSET


71219021

21 WRONG SETTING IN ROTATIONALDIRECTION OF POSITION SENSOR

Check and correct the parameters. (No. 4001#4)

71249024

24 SERIAL TRANSFER DATA ERROR 1 Place the CNC–to–spindle cable away from thepower cable.

2 Replace the communication cable.

7126 26 SPN_n_ : DISCONNECT C–VELO DETECT

1 Replace the cable.

2 Re–adjust the preamplifier.

71279027

27 POSITION CODER SIGNALDISCONNECTED

1 Replace the feedback cable.2 Replace the position coder.

7128 28 SPN_n_ : DISCONNECT C–POS DETECT

1 Replace the cable.2 Re–adjust the preamplifier.

71299029

29 SHORT–PERIOD OVERLOAD Check and correct the load status.

71309030

30 PSM MAIN CIRCUIT OVERCURRENT

1 Replace the power supply.2 Check the reactor specifications.

71319031

31 SPEED DETECTION SIGNALDISCONNECTED AND MOTOR LOCKALARM

Check and correct the load status.

71329032

32 SERIAL COMMUNICATION LSIINTERNAL RAM ERROR

Replace the spindle amplifier contrCheck and cor-rect the load status.ol PC board.

71339033

33 DC LINK PRE–CHARGE FAILURE Replace the power supply.

71349034

34 PARAMETER DATA OUT OFSPECIFICATION

Correct the parameter setting.

71359035

35 SPN_n_ : EX SETTING GEAR RATIO Correct the parameter setting.

71369036

36 ERROR COUNTER OVERFLOW 1 Check and correct the gear ratio, position error,and the parameter for position detector mountingdirection setting.

2 Check and correct the sequence.

71379037

37 SPEED DETECTOR PARAMETERERROR

Modify the speed detector parameter setting.

7139 39 SPN_n_ : 1–ROT Cs SIGNAL ERROR 1 Adjust the one–rotation signal in the preamplifier.2 Check the shield status of the cable.3 Replace the cable.

71409040

40 SPN_n_ : NO 1–ROT Cs SIGNAL DETECT

Replace the spindle amplifier control printed circuitboard.

71419041

41 POSITION CORDER ONE–ROTATIONSIGNAL DETECTION ERROR

1 Check and correct the parameter.2 Replace the feedback cable.3 Replace the position coder.


729

CNCscreendisplay


71429042

42 POSITION CORDER ONE–ROTATIONSIGNAL NOT DETECTED

1 Replace the feedback cable.2 Replace the position coder.

71439043

43 SPN_n_ : DISCON. PC FOR DIF. SP.MODE

Replace the cable.

71449044

44 SPN_n_ : CONTROL CIRCUIT(AD)ERROR

Replace the spindle amplifier control printed circuitboard.

71469046

46 POSITION CORDER ONE–ROTATIONSIGNAL DETECTION ERRORDURING THREAD CUTTING

1 Check and correct the parameter.2 Replace the feedback cable.3 Replace the position detector.

71479047

47 POSITION CORDER SIGNAL ERROR 1 Replace the feedback cable.2 Replace the position coder.

71499049

49 SPN_n_ : HIGH CONV. DIF. SPEED Check whether the calculated differential rate ex-ceeds the maximum motor speed.

71509050

50 EXCESSIVE SPEED COMMANDCOMPUTED VALUE DURING THESYNCHRONIZATION CONTROL OFTHE SPINDLE

Check and correct the gear ratio and position gainsettings.

71519051

51 DC LINK UNDER VOLTAGE 1 Check and correct the power supply voltage.2 Replace the magnetic contactor.

71529052

52 ITP SIGNAL ERROR I 1 Replace the spindle amplifier control PC board.2 Replace the spindle interface printed circuit

board in the CNC.

71539053

53 ITP SIGNAL ERROR II 1 Replace the spindle amplifier control PC board.2 Replace the spindle interface printed circuit

board in the CNC.

71549054

54 OVERLOAD CURRENT ALARM Review the load state.

71559055

55 POWER LINE STATE ERROR ATSPINDLE OR SPEED RANGESWITCHING

1 Replace the magnetic contactor.2 Check and correct the sequence.

71569056

56 CONTROL CIRCUIT COOLING FANSTOPPED

Replace the cooling fan inside the spindle amplifier.

71579057

57 EXCESSIVE CONVERTERDECELERATION POWER

Reduce the acceleration/deceleration duty cycle.

71589058

58 PSM MAIN CIRCUIT OVERLOAD 1 Check the cooling state of the power supply.2 Replace the power supply.

71599059

59 PSM COOLING FAN STOPPED Replace the cooling fan inside the power supply.

71629062

62 OVER RANGE IN MOTOR SPEEDCOMMAND

Check and correct the parameters.(No. 4021, 4056 to 4059)

71669066

66 SPM/SPM TRANSMISSION DATAERROR (EGB MODE)

1 Replace the cable.2 Check and correct the connection.


730

CNCscreendisplay


71699069

69 SERIAL SPINDLE ERROR (SAFETYSPEED EXCEEDED)

Check the parameter.

71709070

70 SERIAL SPINDLE ERROR (AXISDATA ERROR)

Check the spindle amplifier setting.

71719071

71 SERIAL SPINDLE ERROR (SAFETYPARAMETER ERROR)

Turn off the power then turn on the power.

71729072

72 SERIAL SPINDLE ERROR (MOTORSPEED DECISION MISMATCH)


71739073

73 SPINDLE SENSOR SIGNAL FORMOTOR DISCONNECTED

1 Replace the feedback cable.2 Check the shield processing.3 Check and correct the connection.4 Adjust the sensor.

71749074

74 HARDWARE DIAGNOSTIC TESTERROR 1 (CPU)


71759075

75 HARDWARE DIAGNOSTIC TESTERROR 2 (CPU)


71769072

76 SERIAL SPINDLE ERROR (CPUTEST ERROR)


71779072

77 SERIAL SPINDLE ERROR (AXISNUMBER DECISION MISMATCH)


71789072

78 SERIAL SPINDLE ERROR (SAFETYPARAMETER DECISION MISMATCH)


71799079

79 HARDWARE DIAGNOSTIC TESTERROR 3 (INITIAL CHECK)


71819081

81 ONE–ROTATION SIGNALDETECTION ERROR IN SPINDLESENSOR SIGNAL FOR MOTOR

1 Check and correct the parameter.2 Replace the feedback cable.3 Adjust the sensor.

71829082

82 ONE–ROTATION SIGNAL INSPINDLE SENSOR SIGNAL FORMOTOR NOT DETECTED

1 Replace the feedback cable.2 Adjust the sensor.

71839083

83 SIGNAL ERROR IN SPINDLESENSOR SIGNAL FOR MOTOR


71849084

84 SPINDLE SENSOR SIGNAL FOREXTERNAL FEEDBACKDISCONNECTED

1 Replace the feedback cable.2 Check the shield processing.3 Check and correct the connection.4 Check and correct the parameter.5 Adjust the sensor.

71859085

85 ONE–ROTATION SIGNALDETECTION ERROR IN SPINDLESENSOR SIGNAL FOR EXTERNALFEEDBACK

1 Check and correct the parameter.2 Replace the feedback cable.3 Adjust the sensor.


731

CNCscreendisplay


71869086

86 ONE–ROTATION SIGNAL INSPINDLE SENSOR SIGNAL FOREXTERNAL FEEDBACK NOTDETECTED


71879087

87 SIGNAL ERROR IN SPINDLESENSOR SIGNAL FOR EXTERNALFEEDBACK


71889088

88 SPN_n_ : COOLING RADIFANFAILURE

Replace the external cooling fan of the spindleamplifier.

71979097

97 SPN_n_ : OTHER SPINDLE ALARM Check the alarm indication of the spindle amplifier.

71989098

98 SPN_n_ : OTHER CONVERTERALARM

Check the alarm indication of the power supply.

9110 b0 SPN_n_ : AMP COMMUNICATIONERROR

1 Replace the communication cable between theamplifier modules.

2 Replace the spindle amplifier control printed cir-cuit board or power supply control printed circuitboard.

9111 b1 SPN_n_ : CONV.LOW VOLT CONTROL

Replace the power supply control printed circuitboard.

9112 b2 SPN_n_ : CONV.EXDISCHARGEPOW.

1 Check the regenerative resistor connection.2 Check the selected motor.3 Replace the power supply unit.

9113 b3 SPN_n_ : CONV.COOLING FAN FAILURE

Replace the cooling fan.

9120 c0 SPN_n_ : COMMUNICATION DATAERROR

1 Replace the communication cable between theCNC and spindle amplifier.

2 Replace the spindle amplifier control printed cir-cuit board.

3 Replace the spindle interface printed circuit boardon the CNC side.










732

If a parameter is set incorrectly or the sequence is incorrect, the error LED(yellow) of the indicator on the spindle amplifier is turned on, and an errornumber is displayed. Check the error number displayed on the amplifierindicator, and take an action according to the table below.

Indication Description of error Action

01 Although neither *ESP (emergency stop signal; there aretwo types of signals including the PMC signal and PSMcontact signal(*2)) nor MRDY (machine ready signal) isinput, SFR (forward rotation signal)/SRF (reverse rota-tion signal)/ORCM (orientation command) is input.

Check the *ESP and MRDY sequence. (ForMRDY, pay attention to the parameter setting re-garding the use of the MRDY signal (bit 0 of param-eter No. 4001).)

02 When the spindle motor is equipped with a high–resolu-tion magnetic pulse coder (CS sensor), 128 λ/rev (bits 2,1, and 0 of parameter No. 4011 = 0, 0, 0) must be set forthe speed detector, but other than 123 λ/rev is set.In this case, the motor is not activated.

Check the setting of the parameter.(bit 2, 1 and 0 of parameter 4011)

03 Although setting for use of a high–resolution magneticpulse coder (bit 5 of parameter No. 4001 = 1) or settingfor use of the Cs contour control function by the a sensor(bit 4 of parameter No. 4018 = 1) is not made, a Cs controlcommand is input.In this case, the motor is not activated.

Check the setting of the parameter.(bit 5 of parameter 4001, bit 4 of parameter 4018)

04 Although parameter setting for use of the position codersignal (bit 2 of parameter No. 4001 = 1) is not made, theservo mode (rigid tapping and spindle positioning) orspindle synchronization is specified. In this case, the mo-tor is not activated.

Check the setting of the parameter.(bit 2 of parameter 4001)

05 The option parameter of the orientation function is notset, but ORCM (orientation command) is input.

Check the parameter setting of the orientationfunction.

06 The option parameter of the output switch control func-tion is not set, but a low–speed winding is selected (RCH= 1).

Check the parameter setting of the output switchcontrol function and the power line state check sig-nal (RCH).

07 A Cs contour control command is input, but SFR (forwardrotation command)/SRV (reverse rotation command) isnot input.

Check the sequence

08 A command for controlling a servo mode (such as rigidtapping and spindle positioning) is input, but SFR (for-ward rotation command)/SRV (reverse rotation com-mand) is not input.

Check the sequence

09 A spindle synchronization control command is input, butSFR (forward rotation command)/SRV (reverse rotationcommand) is not input.

Check the sequence

10 A Cs contour control command is input, but anothermode (servo mode, spindle synchronization, or orienta-tion) is specified.

During execution of the C–axis control command,do not specify another operation mode. Before en-tering another mode, cancel the Cs contour controlcommand.

11 A command for a servo mode (such as rigid tapping andspindle synchronization) is input, but another mode (Cscontour control, spindle synchronization, or orientation)is specified.

During execution of the servo mode command, donot specify another operation mode. Before enter-ing another mode, cancel the servo mode.

F.2.2List of Error Codes


733

Indication ActionDescription of error

12 A spindle synchronization command is input, but anothermode (Cs contour control, servo mode, or orientation) isspecified.

During execution of the spindle synchronizationcommand, do not specify another operation mode.Before entering another mode, cancel the spindlesynchronization command.

13 An orientation command is input, but another mode (Cscontour control, servo mode, or spindle synchronization)is specified.

While orientation is specified, do no switch toanother mode.Before switching to another mode, cancel theorientation command.

14 The SFT and SRV signals are both input at the sametime.

Specify one of the commands.

15 The parameter (bit 5 of No. 4000 = 1) is set for using thedifferential speed control function, but a Cs contour con-trol command is input.

Check the parameter setting and the input signal.

16 The parameter (bit 5 of No. 4000 = 0) is set for not usingthe differential speed control, but DEFMD (differentialmode command) is input.

Check the parameter setting and the differentialmode command.

17 The parameter setting (bits 2, 1, 0 of No. 4011) for thespeed detector is incorrect. No pertinent speed detectorexists.

Check the setting of the parameter.

18 The parameter (bits 3, 2, 1, 0 of No. 4002 = 0, 0, 0, 0) isset for not using a position sensor (for not exercising posi-tion control), but orientation based on the position coderis specified.

Check the parameter setting and the input signal.

19 A command for orientation based on the magnetic sen-sor is input, but another mode (Cs contour control, servomode, or spindle synchronization) is specified.

During execution of the orientation command, donot specify another operation mode. Before enter-ing another mode, cancel the orientation com-mand.

24 When continuous indexing is performed in orientationbased on the position coder, an incremental operation(INCMD = 1) is first performed, then an absolute positioncommand (INCMD = 0) is input.

Check INCMD (incremental command).To execute an absolute position command se-quentially, be sure to perform absolute positioncommand orientation first.

25 Although spindle amplifier SPM Type4 is not used, set-ting for use of the Cs contour control function by the αsensor (bit 4 of parameter No. 4018 = 1) is made.

Check the setting of the parameter. (bit 4 of parameter 4018)

29 The parameters (bit 6 of No. 4018 = 0, No. 4320 throughNo. 4323 0) are set for using the shortest time orienta-tion.

With the �i series spindle amplifier, the shortesttime orientation function cannot be used. Useanother type of orientation.

The table below does not indicate alarm states, but indicates normaloperation modes.

Indication LED display Description

NOT READY — Indicates that the motor is not ready for being driven.

READY 0 Indicates that the AC voltage charging is completed, and the motor isready for being driven.


734

CNCscreendisplay

Alarmindication Description Action

43771309030

1 OVERCURRENT INPUT (1) Check the power supply voltage.(2) Check the operation condition.(3) Replace the power supply.

44371599059

2 INTERNAL COOLINGFAN STOPPED

(1) Replace the internal cooling fan.

43171589058

3 OVERHEAT (1) The cooling fan is faulty.(2) Contamination by dust(3) Check the operation condition.

43371519051

4 DC LINK SECTIONUNDERVOLTAGE

(1) Check the power supply voltage (including momentary powerfailures).

(2) Check the DC link cabling (for short–circuits).

44271339033

5 CHARGE ERROR (1) Check the DC link cabling (for short–circuits).(2) Replace the power supply.

43271049004

6 CONTROL POWERSUPPLYUNDERVOLTAGE

(1) Check the input power supply (200 V).(2) Check the inter–module cables for short–circuits.(3) Replace the power supply.

43971119011

7 DC LINK SECTIONOVERVOLTAGE

(1) Excessive regenerative power (insufficient PSM capability)(2) Check the DC link and input power supply cabling.(3) Replace the power supply.

60671889088

A EXTERNAL COOLINGFAN STOPPED

(1) Replace the external cooling fan.

60771979097

E POWER SUPPLYMISSING PHASE

(1) Check the power supply voltage.

The following indications are not alarms. They correspond to the normaloperating statuses of the unit.

Type LEDindication Description

NOT READYThe power supply module is not ready fordriving a motor.

READYThe power supply module has charged itsDC voltage section and is now ready for driv-ing a motor.

F.3POWER SUPPLYMODULE


735

CNCscreendisplay

Alarmindication Description Action

444 1 INTERNAL COOLINGFAN STOPPED

(1) Replace the fan.(2) Replace the servo amplifier.

434 2 CONTROL POWERSUPPLYUNDERVOLTAGE

(1) Check 24 V control power output from the power supply.(2) Replace the inter–module cables.(3) Replace the servo amplifier.

435 5 DC LINK SECTIONUNDERVOLTAGE

(1) Check the input power supply voltage.(2) Check whether the short bar for the DC link is screwed tightly.(3) Replace the servo amplifier.

602 6 OVERHEAT (1) Check the motor use condition.(2) Check the ambient temperature of the amplifier.(3) Check the chiller unit.(4) Replace the servo amplifier.

601 F HEAT SINK COOLINGFAN STOPPED

(1) Replace the fan.(2) Replace the servo amplifier.

604 P COMMUNICATIONERROR BETWEENAMPLIFIER MODULES

(1) Replace the communication cables.(2) Replace the servo amplifier.

600 8 ABNORMAL L–AXIS DCLINK CURRENT

(1) Check the inter–phase short–circuit and grounding of thepower line.

600 9 ABNORMAL M–AXIS DCLINK CURRENT

(2) Check the inter–phase short–circuit and grounding of the mo-tor winding.


600 A ABNORMAL N–AXIS DCLINK CURRENT


449 8. L–AXIS IPM ALARM (1) Check the inter–phase short–circuit and grounding of thepower line.

449 9. M–AXIS IPM ALARMpower line.

(2) Check the inter–phase short–circuit and grounding of the mo-

449 A. N–AXIS IPM ALARMtor winding.


603 8. L–AXIS IPM ALARM (OH) (1) Check the motor use condition.

603 9. M–AXIS IPM ALARM(OH)

(2) Check the ambient temperature of the amplifier.(3) Check the chiller unit.

603 A. N–AXIS IPM ALARM (OH)(4) Replace the servo amplifier.

438 b ABNORMAL L–AXISMOTOR CURRENT

(1) Check the settings of the motor ID No. and ID.(2) Check the inter–phase short–circuit and grounding of the

438 C ABNORMAL M–AXISMOTOR CURRENT

power line.(3) Check the inter–phase short–circuit and grounding of the mo-

tor winding.

438 d ABNORMAL N–AXISMOTOR CURRENT

(4) Replace the servo amplifier.(5) Replace the servo motor.

F.4SERVO AMPLIFIERMODULE


736

The following indications are not alarms. They correspond to the normaloperating statuses of the unit.

Type LEDindication Description

NOT READYThe servo amplifier module is not ready fordriving a motor.

READYDC power has been charged and it is readyfor driving a motor.


737

(1) Alarm messages (PMC)

Alarm number Faulty location/corrective action Contents

ER01 PROGRAM DATA ERROR 1) Re–input the ladder program.2) Replace the master printed circuit

board.

The ladder program is invalid.

ER02 PROGRAM SIZE OVER 1) Reduce the ladder program. The ladder program is too large.The lad-der program is invalid.

ER03 PROGRAM SIZE ERROR(OPTION)

1) Reduce the ladder program. The ladder program is too large.

ER04 PMC TYPE UNMATCH By using FAPT LADDER–III, convert theladder program to a one for use with thecorrect PMC type (SB7).

The setting of the type in the ladder pro-gram differs from the actual type.

ER07 NO OPTION(LADDER STEP) Set the parameter again. The CNC parameter is not set correctly.

ER08 OBJECT UNMATCH 1) Contact FANUC. An unsupported function is used in theladder program.

ER09 PMC LABEL CHECKERRORPLEASE TURN ON POWERAGAIN WITH PUSH ’O’&’Z’. (CLEARPMC SRAM)

1) While holding down both of the keys“2” and “5”, turn on the power to theCNC. Execute 7.PMC SRAMCLEAR from the ROBOMACHINEIPL menu.

2) Replace the backup battery.3) Replace the master printed circuit

board.

With a change in the PMC type, for exam-ple, the retention–type memory of thePMC must be initialized.

ER10 OPTION AREA NOTHING(xxxx)

Contact FANUC to reconfigure the PMCmanagement software.

The PMC management software is notloaded correctly.

ER12 OPTION AREA ERROR(xxxx) Contact FANUC to reconfigure the PMCmanagement software.

The PMC management software is inval-id.(The series of BASIC and OPTION donot match.)

ER14 OPTION AREA VERSIONERROR (xxxx)


The PMC management software is inval-id.(The editions of BASIC and OPTIONdo not match.)

ER16 RAM CHECK ERROR(PROGRAM RAM)

Replace the master printed circuit board. The initialization of the memory used tostore the ladder program failed.

ER17 PROGRAM PARITY 1) Re–input the ladder program.2) Replace the master printed circuit

board.

The parity of the ladder program is inval-id.

ER18 PROGRAM DATA ERROR BYI/O

Re–input the ladder program. While the ladder program was beingread, an interrupt command was gener-ated.

ER19 LADDER DATA ERROR Display the Ladder edit screen again andexit from editing by using the [<<] key.

During Ladder editing, the system wasforcibly switched to the CNC screen witha function key.

F.5LIST OF ALARMS(PMC)


738

Alarm number ContentsFaulty location/corrective action

ER20 SYMBOL/COMMENT DATAERROR

Display the symbol/comment edit screenagain and exit from editing by using the[<<] key.

During symbol/comment editing, thesystem was forcibly switched to the CNCscreen with a function key.

ER21 MESSAGE DATA ERROR Display the message data edit screenagain and exit from editing by using the[<<] key.

During message data editing, the systemwas forcibly switched to the CNC screenwith a function key.

ER22 PROGRAM NOTHING 1) Re–input the ladder program.2) Replace the master printed circuit

board.

The ladder program is empty.

ER23 PLEASE TURN OFF POWER Turn the CNC off and then back on. With a change in the PMC type, for exam-ple, the power must be turned off andthen back on.

ER25 SOFTWARE VERSIONERROR (PMCAOPT)


The PMC management software is inval-id.(The edition of PMCAOPT does notmatch.)

ER26 PMC CONTROL MODULEERROR(PMCAOPT)

1) Contact FANUC to reconfigure thePMC management software.

2) Replace the master printed circuitboard.

The initialization of the PMC manage-ment software failed.

ER27 LADDER FUNC. PRM IS OUTOF RANGE

Modify the ladder program. Change theparameter number of the functioninstruction to a value within the validrange.

An out–of–range parameter number isspecified with function instruction TMR,TMRB, CTR, DIFU, or DIFD.

ER32 NO I/O DEVICE 1) Check that the I/O device is on.2) Check that the I/O device was turned

on before the CNC was turned on.3) Check the connection of the cable.

An I/O device such as the I/O Link, con-nection unit, and Power Mate is not con-nected.

ER33 I/O LINK ERROR Replace the master printed circuit board. The LSI of the I/O Link is defective.

ER34 I/O LINK ERROR (xx) 1) Check the connection of the cableleading to a device in group xx.

2) Check that the I/O device was turnedon before the CNC.

3) Replace that device in group xx inwhich the PMC control module isinstalled.

In a slave in group xx, an error occurredin communication with an I/O device.

ER35 TOO MUCH OUTPUT DATAIN GROUP (xx)

Reduce the amount of output data ingroup xx.

The amount of output data in I/O Linkgroup xx exceeds the limit (33 bytes).The excess data is nullified.

ER36 TOO MUCH INPUT DATA INGROUP (xx)

Reduce the amount of input data ingroup xx.

The amount of input data in I/O Linkgroup xx exceeds the limit (33 bytes).The excess data is nullified.

ER38 MAX SETTING OUTPUTDATA OVER (xx)

Modify the total amount of output data ineach group to 128 bytes or less.

The I/O Link I/O area is insufficient.(Theallocation of any group after group xx onthe output side is nullified.)

ER39 MAX SETTING INPUT DATAOVER (xx)

Modify the total amount of input data ineach group to 128 bytes or less.

The I/O Link I/O area is insufficient.(Theallocation of any group after group xx onthe input side is nullified.)


739


ER40 I/O LINK–II SETTING ERROR(CHx)

Set I/O Link–II again. The I/O Link–II setting is illegal.(CH1: Primary board, CH2: Secondaryboard)

ER41 I/O LINK–II MODE ERROR(CHx)

Set I/O Link–II again. The I/O Link–II mode setting is illegal.(CH1: Primary board, CH2: Secondaryboard)

ER42 I/O LINK–II STATIONNO.ERROR (CHx)

Set I/O Link–II again. The I/O Link–II station number setting isillegal.(CH1: Primary board, CH2: Secondaryboard)

ER97 I/O LINK (CHxyyGROUP) 1) Check the cabling of the I/O units ofthe yy group.

2) Check the power supply of the I/Ounits.

3) Check the parameter setting for theI/O link assignment data selectionfunction.

Assignment of the I/O modules of the yygroup does not match the number of I/Ounits actually connected.

WN02 OPERATE ADDRESSERROR

Modify the setting of the PMC system pa-rameter, address of the operator’s panelfor Series 0.

The setting of the PMC system parame-ter, address of the operator’s panel forSeries 0, is invalid.

WN03 ABORT NC–WINDOW/EXIN 1) Check that the Ladder program isfree from problems and then restartthe Ladder program (by pressing theRUN key).

2) Turn the CNC off and then back on.

The Ladder program was stopped duringcommunication between the CNC andPMC.Function instructions such asWINDR, WINDW, EXIN, and DISPB maynot be executed normally.

WN05 PMC TYPE NOCONVERSION

By using FAPT LADDER–III, convert theladder program to a one for use with thecorrect PMC type.

The setting of the type in the ladder pro-gram differs from the actual type.(Example: For the PMC–SB5, the Lad-der program of the PMC–SA3/SA5 wastransferred.)

WN07 LADDER SP ERROR(STACK)

Modify the ladder program so that thesubprogram nesting level is eight or less.

For a subprogram call with the functioninstruction CALL or CALLU, the nestinglevel is too deep (exceeds 8).


740

(2) System alarm messages

Alarm number Faulty location/corrective action Contents

PC004 CPU ERR xxxxxxxx:yyyyyyyy






2) If the error recurs even after the re-placement, contact FANUC to reportthe status (displayed message, sys-tem configuration, operation, whenthe error occurs, occurrence frequen-cy, etc.).

A CPU error occurred in the PMC.xxxxxxxxand yyyyyyyyy are internal error codes.

PC030 RAM PARITY aa:bb 1) Replace the master printed circuitboard.

2) If the error recurs even after the re-placement, contact FANUC to reportthe status (displayed message, sys-tem configuration, operation, whenthe error occurs, occurrence frequen-cy, etc.) and the above internal errorcodes.

A RAM parity error occurred in the PMC.aaand bb are internal error codes.

PC050 I/O LINK(CH1) aa:bb aa:bb

PC050 IOLINK CH1 aaaa–bbbb:cccc

1) Check that the I/O allocation datamatches the actual I/O device con-nection.

2) Check that the cable is connectedproperly.

3) Check the cable specifications.4) Replace the I/O device interface

module, cable, master printed circuitboard, etc.

A communication error occurred in the I/OLINK.aa, bb and cc are internal error co-des.If this alarm is generated, probablecauses include the following:1) Although the base expansion is as-

signed when the I/O Unit A is used, thebase is not connected.

2) A cable is not connected securely.3) Cabling is faulty.4) I/O equipment (I/O unit, Power Mate,

etc.) is faulty.5) Power failure of Master or Slave device

on I/O Link6) Short circuit of DO terminal on I/O device7) The motherboard is faulty.

PC060 FBUS xxxxxxxx:yyyyyyyyPC061 FL–R xxxxxxxx:yyyyyyyyPC062 FL–Wa

xxxxxxxx:yyyyyyyy



A bus error occurred in the PMC.

PC070 SUB65 CALL (STACK) Check the correspondence between theCALL/CALLU and SPE instructions.

A stack error occurred in Ladder functioninstruction CALL/CALLU.


741


PC080 SYS EMGxxxxxxxx:yyyyyyyy

PC081 FL EMGxxxxxxxx:yyyyyyyy

Report to FANUC the conditions in whichthis error occurred (display message,system configuration, operation, time atwhich the error occurred, error frequen-cy, and so on) and the LED status oneach board.

A system alarm was caused by other soft-ware.

PC097 PARITY ERR (LADDER)PC098 PARITY ERR (DRAM)



An error occurred in a RAM check.


742

(3) Alarm messages (For EDIT 1)

Error message Contents and solution

PROGRAM NOTHING There is no program on flash ROM.

ERASE ERRORF–ROM WRITE ERROR 13F–ROM WRITE ERROR 28

Flash ROM is abnormal. Replacement is required. Ask FANUC Service Repre-sentative for replacement.

WRITE ERRORF–ROM WRITE ERROR 12F–ROM WRITE ERROR 29

READ ERROR

ANOTHER USEDF–ROM WRITE ERROR 9F–ROM WRITE ERROR 36

Flash ROM is used by other than PMC.

F–ROM WRITE ERROR 10F–ROM WRITE ERROR 37

The CNC is not placed in the emergency stop state.

I/O OPEN ERROR nn nn = –1: RS–232C is used by other than PMC.Remedy) Check whether RS–232C is used by other than PMC.

On the online setting screen (see Section 8.5.1 in III), check that“NOT USE” is indicated for RS–232C.

nn = 6: The RS–232C option is not found.nn = 20: RS–232C connection is incorrect.Remedy) Check whether channel setting, connection, baud rate, and other

settings are correct.

I/O WRITE ERROR nn nn = 20: RS–232C connection is incorrect.Remedy) Check whether channel setting, connection, baud rate, and other

settings are correct.nn = 22: Communication cannot be performed correctly.Remedy) Check whether the cable is broken.

I/O READ ERROR nn nn = 20: RS–232C connection is incorrect.Remedy) Check whether channel setting, connection, baud rate, and other

settings are correct.nn = 22: Communication cannot be performed correctly.Remedy) Check whether the cable is broken.

DATA ERROR Illegal data was read.Remedy) Check the cable and setting (speed).

PROGRAM DATA ERROR An attempt was made to output data, but the data was illegal.Remedy) Check the alarm on the alarm screen.

WRITE PROTECT The memory card is protected.Remedy) Set the protect switch of the memory card to OFF.

FILE NOT FOUND The specified file number or file name is not found.Remedy) With LIST, check the file name or file number.


743

Error message Contents and solution

I/O WRITE ERROR nnI/O READ ERROR nnI/O COMPARE ERROR nnI/O DELETE ERROR nnI/O LIST ERROR nnI/O FORMAT ERROR nn

nn = 30: No memory card is installed.Remedy) Check whether a memory card is installed.nn = 31: The memory card cannot be written to.Remedy) Set the protect switch of the memory card to OFF.

Replace the memory card with an S–RAM card.nn = 32: The battery for the memory card is too weak.Remedy) Replace the memory card battery.nn = 102: There is not enough free space on the memory card.Remedy) Delete files to create free space.nn = 135: The memory card is unformatted.nn = 105: The memory card is unformatted.Remedy) Format the memory card.nn = 114: The specified file is not found.Remedy) With LIST, check the file name or file number.nn = 115: The specified file is protected.Remedy) Check the file attribute.

COMPARE ERR XXXXXX=AA : BB CONT? (Y/N)

Data differs between the device and PMC.XXXXXX: Address aa: Data on the PMC bb: Data on the deviceRemedy) To continue operation, enter Y; otherwise, enter N. Then, press the

INPUT key.

G. OPERATOR MESSAGES, DIAGNOS MESSAGES B–85014EN/01APPENDIXES

744

GOPERATOR MESSAGES, DIAGNOS MESSAGES

B–85014EN/01G. OPERATOR MESSAGES,

DIAGNOS MESSAGESAPPENDIXES

745

MessageNumber


2000 COOLANT MOTOR OVERHEAT Close the splash guard door.

The thermal relay for the coolant motor on therelay and interface PCB was tripped. (Thecoolant motor overheated.)When the motor rotates rapidly and overheatsbecause of insufficient coolant, or and whenthe motor does not move because the insideof the motor is clogged with cuttings, exces-sive load is applied to the motor, and the cur-rent of the motor increases. A current greaterthan the specified current flows through theMCC (magnetic conductor) that controls thecoolant motor. The thermal relay is then acti-vated, raising the alarm.This alarm may also be raised when the loadto the coolant motor increases because theviscosity of the coolant is high.The alarm is also raised when the rated currentof the motor is high during use of the FANUCstandard coolant unit.

Turn off the coolant unit and wait a whileuntil the coolant motor has cooled off.Check the level gage in the coolant unit.If the coolant tank is short of coolant,replenish the coolant. Check whether thecoolant motor is running. If the motor isnot running, or if an unusual sound isheard while it is running, the inside of themotor requires cleaning, or the motormust be replaced. When cuttings or simi-lar materials accumulate on the bottom ofthe coolant tank, clean the inside of thetank.Use a coolant with the lowest possibleviscosity. When using concentrated cool-ant, dilute it down to a solution suitable forthe workpiece to be machined.When a unit other than the FANUC stan-dard coolant unit is used, check the per-missible current range for the coolantcontrol MCC, then use a motor whoserated current is in the specified range.Since there is a difference between therated output (W) of the motor and the cur-rent value (A) during normal operation,the rated current of the motor must be cor-rect when the motor is used. Also checkthe value of the current used to start themotor.Turn off the power to release the trippedthermal relay in the coolant control MCC.Turning on the power again automaticallyeliminates the alarm.

Permissible currentrange for the MCCfor the coolantmotor: 2.2 A max.Normal setting:

1.8 AX 20.4:Overload

2001 THE DOOR OF THE SPLASH GUARD ISOPEN.

Close the front door.

The front door is not locked.

2002 AIR PRESSURE LOW Check the pressure regulating valve and X6.4: Low air pres-

The air supply pressure for the regulator is low.air supply source of the regulator.Check the air hose connection.

sure

2003 TIME OVER (M100–M109) Check the external device. Alternatively,

A command between M100 and M109 wasspecified, but the external device did not sendthe corresponding operation completion sig-nal within the predetermined period.

change the input monitoring period for theoperation completion signal (M CODEOUTPUT of quick screen EXT. INTER-FACE).

G.1OPERATORMESSAGES


746



2004 DOOR LOCK IS RELEASED BY FORCE Set the electromagnetic lock switch toLOCK by using the release key. Evenwhen the electromagnetic lock switch is

The electromagnetic lock switch at the top ofthe front door is unlocked by the release key.

set to LOCK, the message is displayed ifthe front door is stopped immediately be-fore being completely closed. However,the message thus output does not repre-sent a failure.

2005 DISK SPRING LIFE OVER The spindle clamp/unclamp mechanism

The disc spring for the arbor clamp of thespindle was detected as requiring replace-ment. (i.e., the disc spring was used the speci-fied number of times.)This alarm is raised when the number of timesthe disc spring for clamping the arbor to thespindle opens and closes exceeds the speci-fied value after the number of times tools arechanged is counted.

must be disassembled to inspect andreplace the disc spring for clamping thearbor. Contact the nearest FANUC tech-nical center.

2006 TURN OFF THE POWER Turn off the power.

Adjustment parameters were set.

2007 OVERHEAT (EXTERNAL TRANSFORMER) Stop operation until the external trans-former is cooled.When the external transformer is over-

X6.5: Overheatdetection.Set to 0 at the time of

The external transformer is overheated.heated, spindle rotation, coolant output,intra–machine cleaning coolant outputare turned off. Programmed operation isdisabled.

overheat.



747



2008 THE FLOOD COOLANT MOTOR THERMALRELAY ON THE POWER PANEL PCB OPER-ATED(FLOOD COOLANT MOTOR OVERHEAT)

Turn off the coolant unit and wait a whileuntil the coolant motor has cooled off.Check the oil level gage in the coolantunit. If the coolant tank is short of the cool-

Permissible currentrange for the MCCfor the coolantmotor: 2.6 A max.

The thermal relay for the flood coolant motoron the relay and interface PCB was tripped.(The flood coolant motor overheated.)When the motor rotates rapidly and overheatsbecause of insufficient coolant, or when themotor does not move because the inside of themotor is clogged with cuttings, excessive loadis applied to the motor, and the current of themotor increases. A current greater than thespecified current flows through the MCC (mag-netic conductor) that controls the flood coolantmotor. The thermal relay is then activated,raising the alarm.This alarm may also be raised because theviscosity of the coolant is high when the loadto the coolant motor increases.The alarm is also raised when the rated currentof the motor is high during use of the FANUCstandard flood coolant unit.

ant, replenish the coolant. Checkwhether the flood coolant motor is run-ning. If the motor is not running, or if anunusual is heard while it is running, theinside of the motor requires cleaning, orthe motor must be replaced. When cut-tings or similar materials accumulate onthe bottom of the coolant tank, clean theinside of the tank.Use the coolant whose viscosity is as lowas possible. Before using concentratedcoolant, dilute it down to a sulution suit-able for the workpiece to be machined.When a unit other than the FANUC stan-dard flood coolant unit is used, check thepermissible current range for the floodcoolant control MCC, then use a motorwhose rated current is in the specifiedrange. Since there is a differencebetween the rated output (W) of the motorand the current value (A) during normaloperation, the rated current of the motormust be correct when the motor is used.Also check the value of the current usedto start the motor.Turn off the power to release the trippedthermal relay in the flood coolant controlMCC. Turning on the power again auto-matically eliminates the alarm.

Normal setting:2.1 A

X 20.5:Overload

2009 SPINDLE SHOULD BE TURNED BEFORECYCLE Y START

Before restarting the program, set manu-al mode, and turn the spindle. Then, set

After the spindle rotation was stopped be-cause program operation was halted, programoperation was restarted without restarting thespindle rotation.

automatic mode, and press the cyclestart button.

2010 OIL’S LEVEL IS LOWER THAN LIMIT Add oil. If there is sufficient oil, check the X9.7: Detection of

There is little central lubricant oil left.cable connection for oil level detection orthe setting of PMC parameter K12#5.

low oil levelKeep relayK12#5

2013 EXECUTING TOOL ESCAPE Wait until the cutter has returned to the

The tool breakage detection subfunction of theAI tooL monitor function was activated. Thecutter is automatically returned to the refer-ence position along the Z–axis.

reference position.

2015 PRODUCTION IS COMPLETED Reset the production count.

The PRODUCTION COUNT has reached orexceeded the PLANNED PRODUCTIONCOUNT specified on the PRODUCTIONMANAGEMENT FUNCTION screen (aQUICK screen).


748



2017 COOLANT LOWER LIMIT Add coolant. X5.0: Lower limit of

The coolant level is low.coolant levelKeep relayK3#6

2018 FILTER LOADING (C.T.COOL. TANK) Replace the line filter. X5.2: Filter clogged

The line filter is clogged.state

2019 ROTALY UNION LIFE OVER Replace the rotary union.

The operation time of the rotary union has ex-ceeded 9999 hours.

2020 C.T.COOLANT PUMP LIFE OVER Replace the center–through coolant

The operation time of the center–through cool-ant pump has exceeded 9999 hours.

pump.

2021 ADJUST C.T.COOLANT PRESSURF Adjust the pressure of the center–

The operation time of the center–through cool-ant pump has reached 3000 hours, 6000hours, or 9000 hours.

through coolant.

2022 SUCTION FILTER LOADING Replace the suction filter. X5.5: Filter clogged

The suction filter of the center through coolantpump is clogged.

state

2024 PRESS A PALLET SET UP WHEN READY Set workpieces in each pallet, then press With pallet changer

Machining is completed.the setup button on the pallet changer op-erator’s panel. After pallets are changed,

manufactured byKawata Tec

2025 PRESS B PALLET SET UP WHEN READY

erator’s panel. After pallets are changed,machining is restarted.

Kawata Tec

Machining is completed.



749

Namber Message Detailed

0001

0005

INTERLOCK: n–AXIS(COSTOM PMC)

Axis movement is inhibited by the custom PMC.Keep relay K14#5 is set to 1.

0006

0011

INTERLOCK: n–AXIS(m–AXIS CLAMP UNFINISHED)

Because the additional axis is not yet clamped, axis move-ment is inhibited.Keep relay K3#3 is set to 1. (When m = 4)

0012

0013

INTERLOCK: m–AXIS(m–AXIS UNCLAMP UNFINISHED)

Because the additional axis is not yet unclamped, the move-ment on the additional axis is inhibited.Keep relay K3#2 is set to 1. (When m = 4)

0014

0016

INTERLOCK: n–AXIS(PALLET CHNGER)

Axis movement is inhibited by the pallet changer.

0017 INTERLOCK:Z–AXIS(TOOL CHANGE AREA)

Because the Z–axis is in the tool change area, axis move-ment is inhibited.

0018 INTERLOCK: ALL AXES (DOOROPEND)

Because the door is open, axis movement is inhibited.

0019 INTERLOCK: ALL AXES (PROGRAMSTOP)

Because program operation is halted by operation such asdoor open operation, axis movement is inhibited.

0020 INTERLOCK: ALL AXES (SPINDLESPEED CHECK)

Because program operation is halted, and the spindle speedis below the specified speed, axis movement is inhibited.

0021 INTERLOCK: ALL AXES (EXTERNALSIGNAL)

Because a signal from a peripheral device is OFF, axis move-ment is inhibited. The use of all–axis interlock, indicated byselecting QUICK screen, 32: MAINTENANCE/SETTING, 5:EXT. INTERFACE, then FUNCTION SELECTION, is speci-fied.

0022 INTERLOCK: ALL AXES (POWER OFF) Because the power OFF button has been pressed on the op-erator’s panel, axis movement is inhibited.

0030 HOLD (SPINDLE STOP BUTTON) Because the spindle rotation/stop button is pressed on theoperator’s panel, program operation is disabled.

0031 HOLD (DOOR OPEND) Because the door is not locked, program operation is dis-abled.

0032 HOLD (FLOOD COOLANT MOTEROVERHEAT)

Because the thermal relay for the coolant motor for cleaningthe inside of the machine trips, program operation is disabled.

0033 HOLD (FEED HOLD BUTTON) Because the stop button is pressed on the operator’s panel,program operation is disabled.

0034 HOLD (COOLANT MOTER OVERHEAT) Because the thermal relay for the coolant motor trips, programoperation is disabled.

0035 HOLD (M00, M01, STOP) M00 or M01 is specified, so program operation is currentlystopped.

0036 HOLD (PRODUCTION COMPRETED) In the production management function on QUICK screen, thefollowing condition is detected, so program operation is cur-rently stopped:Scheduled production quantity � production quantityKeep relay K7#5 is set to 1.

G.2DIAGNOSMESSAGES


750

Namber DetailedMessage

0037 HOLD (HOST COMPUTER) Program operation is currently stopped by a command fromthe host computer.Keep relay K3#1 is set to 1.

0038 HOLD (EXTERNAL SIGNAL) Because a signal from a peripheral device is OFF, programoperation is disabled. The use of external feed hold, indicatedby selecting QUICK screen, 32: MAINTENANCE/SETTING, 5:EXT. INTERFACE, then FUNCTION SELECTION, is speci-fied.

0039 HOLD (CUSTOM PMC) Program operation is inhibited by the custom PMC.Keep relay K14#7 is set to 1.

0040 HOLD (M100–M109) Because a command from M100 to M109 was specified andthe completion signal was not input within the defined time,program operation is currently stopped.The output type, indicated by selecting QUICK screen, 32:MAINTENANCE/SETTING, 5: EXT. INTERFACE, then MCODE OUTPUT, is the FIN type.

0041 HOLD (MANUAL OPERATION MODE) Because manual mode is set, program operation is disabled.

0042 HOLD (POWER OFF) Because the power OFF button has been pressed on the op-erator’s panel, program operation is disabled.

0043 HOLD (DUST CATCHER) Because the signal from the dust collector is OFF, programoperation is disabled.

0044 HOLD (SIDE DOOR OPENED) Because the side door is not locked, program operation isdisabled.

0045 HOLD (ADJUSTABLE MODE) The system is now in turret adjustment mode.Keep relay K11#0 is set to 1.

0046 HOLD (AIR PRESSURE LOW) Because the air pressure supplied to the regulator is low, pro-gram operation is disabled.

0047 HOLD (EXTERNAL TRANSFORMEROVERHEAT)

The external transformer is overheated. Programmed opera-tion is disabled.

0050 RESET (EXTERNAL SIGNAL) Because a signal from a peripheral device is ON, reset opera-tion is being performed.

0051 RESET (CUSTOM PMC) The custom PMC outputs the reset command.

0052 RESET (HOST COMPUTER) According to the command from the host computer, reset op-eration is being performed.Keep relay K3#1 is set to 1.

0060 EMERGENCY STOP (OPERATOR’SPANEL)

The system is in the emergency stop state because theemergency stop button has been pressed on the operator’spanel.

0061 EMERGENCY STOP (EXTERNAL SIG-NAL)

Because a signal from a peripheral device is OFF, the systemis in the emergency stop state.The use of the external emergency stop function, indicated byselecting QUICK screen, 32: MAINTENANCE/SETTING, 5:EXT. INTERFACE, then FUNCTION SELECTION, is speci-fied.

0062 EMERGENCY STOP (CUSTOM PMC) According to the command from the custom PMC, the emer-gency stop state has been entered.Keep relay K14#6 is set to 1.



751


0063 EMERGENCY STOP (TOOL UNCLAMP) No tool is attached to the spindle, so the system is in theemergency stop state.Keep relay K1#0 is set to 0.

0064 EMERGENCY STOP (PALLET CHANG-ER)

According to the command from the pallet changer, the emer-gency stop state has been entered.

0065 EMERGENCY STOP (SPINDLE ALARM) Because an alarm is issued in the spindle, the system is in theemergency stop state.

0066 EMERGENCY STOP (AUTO.DOORSWITCH IS DEFECTIVE)

Because of abnormality in the automatic door, the system is inthe emergency stop state.

0067 EMERGENCY STOP (UNREADY) Because the operation ready signal is not input, the system isin the emergency stop state.

0068 EMERGENCY STOP (POWER FAILUREBACKUP MODULE)

Because of a power failure, the system is in the emergencystop state.

0080 START–LOCK (DOOR OPENED) Because the door is not locked, program operation cannot bestarted.

0081 START–LOCK (SERVO UNREADY) Because the servo system is not ready, program operationcannot be started.

0083 START–LOCK (HOST COMPUTER) A command to inhibit start was issued from the host PC, sothe start disable state has been entered. (Drill monitor func-tion)

0084 START–LOCK (POWER FAILURE BACK-UP MODULE)

Because the power failure backup module is not ready, pro-gram operation cannot be started.

0085 START–LOCK (AUTOMATIC POWEROFF)

Because the automatic power cut–off function is operating,program operation cannot be started.

0090

0091

DETACHED: m–AXIS The signal line of the m–th axis (additional axis) is not con-nected, so the m–th axis is in the detach state (axis discon-nection).Keep relay K12#3 is set to 0.

0092

0093

SERVO OFF: m–AXIS Because the m–th axis (additional axis) is clamped, the axis isin the servo off state (excitation OFF).Keep relay K2#1 is set to 1. (When m = 4)

0100

0105

ATC ALARM (****) An ATC alarm is issued.**** indicates the cause of the alarm.

0110 START SIGNAL ON This message appears for about one second when the start ofoperation is specified in automatic or MDI mode.

0111

0115

MIRROR IMAGE ON: n–AXIS The mirror image function for the n–th axis is activated.

0116 FEEDRATE OVERRIDE 0% The feedrate override is set to 0%.

0117 JOG FEEDRATE OVERRIDE 0% The jog override is set to 0%.

0118 MACHINE LOCK ON The machine lock function is activated. On 31: SEQ SELEC-TION selected from QUICK screen, all axes are set for ma-chine lock.

0119 Z–AXIS LOCK ON The Z–axis lock function is activated. On 31: SEQ SELEC-TION selected from QUICK screen, the Z–axis is set for ma-chine lock.


752


0120 IN REMOTE OPERATION Remote operation mode is selected.On 31: SEQ SELECTION selected from QUICK screen, re-mote mode is set to ON. (For the standard type operator’spanel)The remote operation button on the operator’s panel is on.(For the full–keypad type operator’s panel)

0121 START COMMAND WAS IGNORED.(OPERATOR’S PANEL)

The custom PMC is programmed so that the start button isdisabled.

0122 TOOL CHANGE OF MODE IS PRO-HIBITED.

Keep relay K8#2 is set to 1.

0123 A CHANGE OF MODE IS PROHIBITED. On 31: SEQ SELECTION selected from QUICK screen, theitem for disabling mode switching is set to ON. (For the CEspecification only)

0124 THE OPERATOR’S PANEL IS UNAVAIL-ABLE.

Keep relay K16#0 is set to 1, and the use of the operator’spanel of the ROBODRILL is inhibited by the custom PMC.

0125 THE CUTTING OVERRIDE SWITCH ISUNAVAILABLE.

A cutting feed override is specified by the custom PMC or thelike. Bit 1 of PMC parameter K14 is set.

0126 THE SPINDLE OVERRIDE BUTTON ISUNAVAILABLE.

A spindle override is specified by the custom PMC or the like.Bit 1 of PMC parameter K14 is set.

0140 SPINDLE ROT. IS PROHIBITED (CUSTOM PMC)

Spindle rotation is disabled by the custom PMC (SO9.6).

0141 SPINDLE ROT. IS PROHIBITED (SIDE DOOR OPENED)

Because the automatic side door is open, spindle rotation isdisabled.

0142 SPINDLE ROT. IS PROHIBITED (SPECIAL TOOL)

Because a special tool (specified in D100) is attached to thespindle, spindle rotation is disabled.

B–85014EN/01 H. PMC PARAMETERSAPPENDIXES

753

H PMC PARAMETERS

[Timer]

No. Address Default Function

1 T 00 60000 Standby time until the center–through coolant pump stopsautomatically.

2 T 02 60000 Wait time until coolant for cleaning the inside of the machinestops automatically

3 T 04 300000 Wait time until spindle air purge stops

4 T 06 300000 Wait time until alarm output 2 (for buzzer) stops

5 T 08

6 T 10

7 T 12

8 T 14

9 T 16 272 Wait time from door lock until operation starts

10 T 18 1000 Start button ON time from automatic door closure until opera-tion starts

11 T 20 4000 Automatic door total time

12 T 22 120 For checking automatic door close

13 T 24 144 M81, M82 output duration

14 T 26 104 Wait time until automatic door lock is released

15 T 28 48 For spindle speed zero detection

16 T 30 0 For adjustment of rigid tapping mode setting

17 T 32 48 Spindle activation completed in rigid tap mode

18 T 34 96 For monitoring the switch of tool exchange area.

19 T 36 200 For checking automatic door close

20 T 38 296 Center–through coolant air purge pulse output ON time

21 T 40 296 Time during which air blow pulse output is OFF

22 T 42 10000 Air seal valve OFF delay

23 T 44 5000 Monitoring time for abnormal coolant pressure (upper limit)

24 T 46 3000 Monitoring time for abnormal low coolant pressure (lower limit)

25 T 48 1000 Delay from issue of a servo alarm until the spindle stops

26 T 50 30000 M code monitoring time

27 T 52 0 (Reserved)

28 T 54 0 Spindle restart check before operation

H. PMC PARAMETERS B–85014EN/01APPENDIXES

754

[Timer]

No. FunctionDefaultAddress

29 T 56 800 Spindle restart check

30 T 58 4000 For spindle abnormality detection(only for the CE marking specification)

31 T 60 5000 Wait time until power is turned off automatically

32 T 62 480 For external reset adjustment

33 T 64 2000 Wait time until the FACTOLINK screen is called automatically

34 T 66 5000 Time for monitoring low air pressure condition

35 T 68 32 Tool unclamp state monitoring delay time

36 T 70 60000 Spindle air purge restart wait time

37 T 72 5000 Spindle air purge execution time at restart

38 T 74 248 Spindle load monitor start delay after decrease in the feedrate

39 T 76 48 For judging the spindle load warning level

40 T 78 1000 For monitoring attained spindle speed

41 T 80 2000 Door lock operation monitoring time

42 T 82 2000 Wait time from a single–block stop until the door is unlocked.

43 T 84 104 Alarm 1006 ignore time after tool change completion

44 T 86 744 Blinking ON time for state indication and so forth

45 T 88 736 Blinking OFF time for state indication and so forth

46 T 90 3000 Wait time until remote operation is canceled forcibly

47 T 92 5000 Wait time until power–off is specified by remote operation

48 T 94

49 T 96

50 T 98


755

[Counter]

No. Address Default Function

C 00 9999 Preset lifetime of conical disc spring1

C 02 **** Current value for conical disc spring lifetime (�1)

C 04 9999 Preset lifetime of conical disc spring2

C 06 **** Current value for conical disc spring lifetime (�10000)

C 08 20 Preset number of spindle axis override stages3

C 10 **** Current number of spindle axis override stages

C 12 10 Preset value for the time allowed before the internal light goesoff automatically.

4C 14 **** Current value for the time allowed before the internal light

goes off automatically.

C 16 100 Preset value of monitoring time for clogged–filter alarm5

C 18 **** Current value of monitoring time for clogged–filter alarm

C 20 9999 Preset value of the rotary union operation time6

C 22 **** Current value of the rotary union operation time

C 24 9999 Preset value of the center–through coolant pump operationtime

7C 26 **** Current value of the center–through coolant pump operation

time

C 28 0 (Not used)8

C 30 0 (Not used)

C 32 0 (Not used)9

C 34 0 (Not used)

C 36 120 Preset value for DI/DO test10

C 38 0 Current value for DI/DO test

C 40 0 (Not used)11

C 42 0 (Not used)

C 44 0 (Not used)12

C 46 0 (Not used)

C 48 0 (Not used)13

C 50 0 (Not used)

C 52 0 (Not used)14

C 54 0 (Not used)

C 56 0 (Not used)15

C 58 0 (Not used)

C 60 0 (Not used)16

C 62 0 (Not used)


756

[Counter]

No. FunctionDefaultAddress

C 64 0 (Not used)17

C 66 0 (Not used)

C 68 0 (Not used)18

C 70 0 (Not used)

C 72 3 Preset value for external equipment control19

C 74 0 Current value for external equipment control

C 76 10 Preset number of feedrate deceleration stages20

C 78 **** Current number of feedrate deceleration stages


757

[Keep relay] (A circle indicates the default)

Keep relay Setting Function

K 0.0 � 0

1

Uses the high-speed interface for M/S/T/B code processing

Uses the standard interface for M/S/T/B code processing

K 0.1 � 0

1

Does not allow the edit button to display DATA I/O.

Allows the edit button to display DATA I/O.

K 0.2 � 0

1

Automatic setting of work coordinate screen is X and Y axis

Automatic setting of work coordinate screen is X, Y and Z axis

K 0.3 � 0

1

Does not OFF Flood coolant at emergency stop

OFF flood coolant at emergency stop

K 0.4 � 0

1

Tool weight 3kg

Tool weight 2kg

K 0.5 � 0

1

Disables the alarm/diagnostic window automatic display function.

Enables the alarm/diagnostic window automatic display function.

K 0.6

K 0.7 0

� 1

Does not restart the coolant after changing the tool

Restarts the coolant after changing the tool

K 1.0 0

� 1

Outputs an alarm at tool unclamp

Does not output an alarm at tool unclamp

K 1.1 � 0

1

Executes an even parity check

Executes an odd parity check

K 1.2 � 0

1

The spindle does not stop when the all–axis interlock signal is off

The spindle stops when the all–axis interlock signal is off

K 1.3 � 0

1

Turret release is disabled if the program is in the protected state

Turret release is enabled if the program is in the protected state

K 1.4 � 0

1

The override values are initialized when power is turned on

The override values are not initialized when power is turned on

K 1.5 � 0

1

The tool life expiration advance notice value is set by cycle quantity or time

The tool life expiration advance notice value is set by percent

K 1.6 � 0

1

When QUICK screen or COORDINATES/OFFSET screen is being dis-played, pressing the menu operation button switches between screens.

When QUICK screen or COORDINATES/OFFSET screen is being dis-played, pressing the menu operation button does not switch betweenscreens.

K 1.7 � 0

1

Pressing the reset key does not stop the spindle or coolant

Pressing the reset key stops the spindle and coolant


758



K 2.0 0

� 1

Neither operator message 2005 nor 2010 is treated as alarm

Both operator messages 2005 and 2010 are treated as alarm

K 2.1 � 0

1

Does not deactivate the fourth axis in the clamp state

Deactivates the fourth axis in the clamp state

K 2.2

K 2.3 � 0

1

M63 does not turn on the machine status output (with Kawata Tech APC)

M63 turns on the machine status output (with Kawata Tech APC)

K 2.4 � 0

1

Does not extend the output duration of the spindle taper air blow.

Extends the output duration of the spindle taper air blow.

K 2.5 � 0

1

Use the position switch signal 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 of external interface.

Use the position switch signal 1, 2, 3, 4, 7 of external interface.

K 2.6 � 0

1

A tool exchange enabled area is set up using the position switch

A tool exchange disabled area is set up using the position switch

K 2.7 � 0

1

The tool exchange disabled area setting function is disabled.

The tool exchange disabled area setting function is enabled.

K 3.0 0

� 1

Energy saving control is exercised for spindle air purge operation.

Spindle air purge operation is turned on at all times.

K 3.1

(Note)

� 0

1

Disables the interface for the automatic laser measurement test.

Enables the interface for the automatic laser measurement test.

K 3.2 � 0

1

Does not use the fourth-axis clamp/unclamp command

Uses the fourth-axis clamp/unclamp command

K 3.3 � 0

1

Enables movement along the X-, Y-, and Z-axes in the fourth-axis unclampstate

Disables movement along the X-, Y-, or Z-axes in the fourth-axis unclampstate

K 3.4 � 0

1

Performs ON/OFF control of the center–through coolant pump.

Keeps the center–through coolant pump ON at all times.

K 3.5 � 0

1

Enables automatic control of the center–through coolant pump.

Disables automatic control of the center–through coolant pump.

K 3.6 � 0

1

Disables the detection of the lower coolant limit.

Enables the detection of the upper coolant limit.

K 3.7 � 0

1

The preview control ON parameter is set.

The preview control OFF parameter is set.

NOTEBe sure to set 0.


759



K 4.0

K 4.1 � 0

1

Disables the control of the manual button for the center through coolant.

Enables the control of the manual button for the center through coolant.

K 4.2 � 0

1

Disables the detection of the clogging of the suction filter.

Enables the detection of the clogging of the suction filter.

K 4.3 � 0

1

When the coolant oil level becomes low, a message is just displayed.

When the coolant oil level becomes low, cycle termination occurs and analarm is displayed.

K 4.4 � 0

1

Center–through coolant air purge is turned off by M09.

Center–through coolant air purge is turned off by M24.

K 4.5 � 0

1

Outputs the parity check signal to contact a

Outputs the parity check signal to contact b

K 4.6 � 0

1

When production is completed, an operator message is displayed.

When production is completed, no operator message is displayed.

K 4.7 � 0

1

Does not monitor the M code operation time.

Monitors the M code operation time.

K 5.0

K 5.1 (Factory-adjusted according to the specifications of the machine)



K 5.4 0

1

Disables center–through coolant control.

Enables center–through coolant control.





760



K 6.0 � 0

1

Displays a message when the door is opened by M00

Does not display a message when the door is opened by M00

K 6.1 � 0

1

Displays an operator message when the door is opened

Does not display an operator message when the door is opened

K 6.2 � 0

1

Does not stop alarm output 2 automatically.

Stops alarm output 2 automatically.

K 6.3 � 0

1

Does not automatically stop coolant for cleaning the inside of the machine.

Automatically stops coolant for cleaning the inside of the machine.

K 6.4 � 0

1

Specifies M06 in TOOL CHANGE selected from MENU OPERATION.

Does not specify M06 in TOOL CHANGE selected from MENU OPERA-TION.

K 6.5 � 0

1

Disables the cycle start signal check function.

Enables the cycle start signal check function.

K 6.6 � 0

1

Does not turn on the DMMC signal at remote operation.

Turns on the DMMC signal at remote operation.

K 6.7 � 0

1

Outputs the auto mode signal in a mode other than manual mode

Outputs the auto mode signal in AUTO mode

K 7.0 � 0

1

Does not light the feed hold lamp in the operation stop state

Lights the feed hold lamp in the operation stop state

K 7.1 � 0

1

Enables the external door control signal in a mode other than AUTO mode

Always enables the external door control signal

K 7.2 � 0

1

The remote mode is set for remote operation.

The remote mode is set for direct operation.

K 7.3 � 0

1

Does not restart coolant/air blow at a restart of operation.

Restarts coolant/air blow at a restart of operation.

K 7.4 � 0

1

Turns the M83 output OFF at the end of a cycle.

Does not turn the M83 output OFF at the end of a cycle.

K 7.5 � 0

1

Does not stop operation upon the completion of machining by M91 or M92

Disables the stop operation by M91 or M92 upon the completion of machin-ing

K 7.6 � 0

1

Does not cancel the screen saver when the door is opened.

Cancels the screen saver when the door is opened.

K 7.7

(Note)

� 0

1

Disables the side automatic door adjustment function

Enables the side automatic door adjustment function

NOTEBe sure to set 0.


761



K 8.0 � 0

1

The internal light is turned on or off according to the setting on the screen.

The internal light is turned on or off according to an external signal.

K 8.1 � 0

1

ON the block skip function on the operator’s panel screen setting.

ON the block skip signal on the external signal.

K 8.2 � 0

1

Enables the tool change button on the operator’s panel.

Disables the tool change button on the operator’s panel.

K 8.3 � 0

1

Enables activation of the single block function from the machine operator’spanel

Enables activation of the single block function by the input of an externalsignal

K 8.4 � 0

1

Enables activation of the dry run function from the machine operator’s panel

Enables activation of the dry run function by the input of an external signal

K 8.5 � 0

1

Does not use feed by single–digit F code.

Uses feed by single–digit F code.

K 8.6 � 0

1

Turns off warning-level or breakage-level detection output upon a reset

Turns off warning-level or breakage-level detection output upon a reset orwhen the tool is changed

K 8.7 � 0

1

Enables a warning level and destruction level to be detected and outputwhen the AI tool monitor function is used.

Enables a warning level and destruction level to be detected and output,regardless of whether the AI tool monitor function is used.

K 9.0 � 0

1

Displays FACTOLINK and the screen when the program protection key is“protection.” (K9#6=1)

Does not display FACTOLINK and the screen when the program protectionkey is “protection.” (K9#6=1)

K 9.1 � 0

1

The logging data operation time is determined from NC parameters Nos.6751 and 6752.

The logging data operation time is determined from NC parameters Nos.6757 and 6758.

K 9.2

(Note 3)

� 0

1

Does not turn machine state output 2 ON when the message transfer flash-ing light turn–on command is issued.

Turns machine state output 2 when the message transfer flashing light turn–on command is issued.

K 9.3

(Note 3)

� 0

1

Does not turn machine state output 3 ON when the message transfer flash-ing light turn–on command is issued.

Turns machine state output 3 ON when the message transfer flashing lightturn–on command is issued.

K 9.4 � 0

1

Does not display the order, lot number, and ID code on COUNTER screen.

Displays the order, lot number, and ID code on COUNTER screen.

K 9.5 � 0

1

The flashing light is turned on when a flashing light turn–on command isspecified with message transfer.

The flashing light blinks when a flashing light turn–on command is specifiedwith message transfer.


762


Keep relay FunctionSetting

K 9.6 � 0

1

Does not switch the screen display to the FACTOLINK screen even whenyou press an alphanumeric key.

Switches the screen display to the FACTOLINK screen when you press analphanumeric key.

K 9.7

NOTEWhen K9.2 and K9.3 are equal to 0 or when K9.2 and K9.3are equal to 1, machine state output 1 turns ON.



K 10.0 � 0

1

Disables the hard copy function.

Enables the hard copy function.

K 10.1

K 10.2 � 0

1

For FACTOLINK

K 10.3 � 0

1

Lamp checking function OFF

Lamp checking function ON

K 10.4 � 0

1

For FACTOLINK

K 10.5 (Reservation)

K 10.6

K 10.7 (For adjustment)

K 11.0 � 0

1

Makes turret adjustment mode invalid.

Makes turret adjustment mode valid.

K 11.1 � 0

1

The door is not unlocked at single–block operation stop time.

The door is unlocked at single–block operation stop time.

K 11.2 � 0

1

Enables the automatic door open/close button, regardless of the operationmode.

Enables the automatic door open/close button in the manual mode only.

K 11.3 � 0

1

Enables spindle rotation when the door is unlocked.

Disables spindle rotation when the door is unlocked.

K 11.4 � 0

1

When a special tool is mounted, spindle orientation is enabled.

When a special tool is mounted, spindle orientation is disabled.



K 11.7 � 0

1

The door is not unlocked with M00/M01.

The door is unlocked with M00/M01.


763



K 12.0 0

� 1

The air pressure drop signal is normally open.

The air pressure drop signal is normally closed.

K 12.1

K 12.2

K 12.3 � 0

1

Uses the detach function and overtravel function for the fourth and fifth axes

Does not use the detach function and overtravel function for the fourth andfifth axes


K 12.5 � 0

1

Sets the oil level signal to normal open

Sets the oil level signal to normal close

K 12.6 � 0

1

The door will not be unlocked when M02 or M30 is executed (only for the CEmarking specification).

The door will be unlocked when M02 or M30 is executed.

K 12.7 � 0

1

Door lock control A

Door lock control B


K 13.1 � 0

1

Does not turn on the start button and automatic operation in–progress signalwhile the automatic door is being opened and closed.

Turns on the start button and automatic operation in–progress signal whilethe automatic door is being opened and closed.

K 13.2 � 0

1

The automatic door is closed when the start button is released.

The automatic door is closed when the start button is pressed.


K 13.4



K 13.7 (For adjustment)


764



K 14.0 � 0

1

Enables custom PMC editing.

Disables custom PMC editing.

K 14.1 � 0

1

The custom PMC function does not control spindle and cutting feed over-rides.

The custom PMC function controls spindle and cutting feed overrides.

K 14.2 0

� 1

Turns on SI8.0 in the MEM mode/remote mode.

Turns on SI8.0 in the MEM mode.

K 14.3 0

� 1

Uses the additional axis clamp control signal as standard.

Assigns the additional axis clamp control signal with the custom PMC func-tion.

K 14.4 � 0

1

Does not allow the custom PMC function to control the coolant for cleaningthe inside of the machine.Allows the custom PMC function to control the coolant for cleaning the insideof the machine.

K 14.5 � 0

1

Does not execute axis interlock control using the custom PLC function

Executes axis interlock control using the custom PLC function

K 14.6 � 0

1

Does not execute emergency stop control using the custom PLC function

Executes emergency stop control using the custom PLC function

K 14.7 � 0

1

Does not execute feed hold control using the custom PLC function

Executes feed hold control using the custom PLC function







K 15.6

K 15.7 � 0

1

Does not use the custom PLC function

Uses the custom PLC function

K 16.0 � 0

1

Disables the operator’s panel disable function.

Enables the operator’s panel disable function.

K 16.1 � 0

1

While the operator’s panel is in the disabled state, the M01 stop button isalso disabled.

While the operator’s panel is in the disabled state, the M01 stop button isenabled.

K 16.2 � 0

1

While the operator’s panel is in the disabled state, the door open/close but-ton is also disabled. (For CE mark specifications only)

While the operator’s panel is in the disabled state, the door open/close but-ton is enabled. (For CE mark specifications only)


765



K 16.3 � 0

1

While the operator’s panel is disabled, spindle rotation and coolant supplyare canceled.

While the operator’s panel is disabled, spindle rotation and coolant supplyare not canceled.

K 16.4

K 16.5

K 16.6 (System–reserved)

K 16.7 (System–reserved)


766




K 17.1 � 0

1

Disables the thermal displacement compensation function.

Enables the thermal displacement compensation function.

K 17.2 � 0

1

Renishaw’s touch probe is not controlled.

Renishaw’s touch probe is controlled.

K 17.3

K 17.4

K 17.5

K 17.6

K 17.7 (Factory–adjusted according to the specifications of the machine)




K 18.3

K 18.4

K 18.5

K 18.6

K 18.7

K 19.0

K 19.1

K 19.2

K 19.3






767



K 20.0 � 0

1

The remote operator’s panel is of the standard type.

The remote operator’s panel is of the full keypad type.

K 20.1 � 0

1

In remote operation, operations on the standard selection screen are disabled.

In remote operation, operations on the standard selection screen are notdisabled.

K 20.2 � 0

1

In remote operation, program editing and data setting are not permitted.

In remote operation, program editing and data setting are permitted.

K 20.3 � 0

1

Spindle override from the PC is specified with an override value.

Spindle override from the PC is specified as the number of stages.

K 20.4 � 0

1

At remote mode key switching on the operator’s panel, operation is stopped.

At remote mode key switching on the operator’s panel, operation is notstopped.

K 20.5

K 20.6 � 0

1

In remote operation, the screen switch and display keys on the operator’spanel can be used.

In remote operation, the screen switch and display keys on the operator’spanel cannot be used.

K 20.7 � 0

1

When MDI mode is selected by remote operation, the screen display is notchanged to the menu operation screen.

When MDI mode is selected by remote operation, the screen display ischanged to the menu operation screen.

K 21.0

K 21.1

K 21.2

K 21.3

K 21.4

K 21.5

K 21.6

K 21.7

K 22.0

K 22.1

K 22.2

K 22.3

K 22.4

K 22.5

K 22.6

K 22.7

K 23.0


768



K 23.1

K 23.2

K 23.3

K 23.4

K 23.5

K 23.6

K 23.7


769

[Data table] (A circle indicates the default)

Address Default Function

D 0 11 Number of feed deceleration stages in the warning level

D 2 130 Constant for calculating the warning level

D 4 **** Constant for calculating the breakage level

D 6 11 Constant for calculating the breakage level

D 8 0 Constant for calculating the breakage level

D 10 **** No-load level

D 12 0 (For adjustment)

D 14 0 (For adjustment)

D 16

D 18

D 20 155 Override of feed deceleration stage 0











D 42 0 Magazine number for which no alarm is issued at tool unclamp time.

D 44 3000 Interval for monitoring center through coolant pump operation time

D 46 96 Used for additional axis reference position return adjustment

D 48

D 50 **** Values of NC parameter No. 1620X and No. 6171X when a table load lessthan 100 kg is selected

D 52 **** Values of NC parameter No. 1620Y and No. 6171Y when a table load lessthan 100 kg is selected

D 54 **** Values of NC parameter No. 1621X and No. 6191X when a table load lessthan 100 kg is selected

D 56 **** Values of NC parameter No. 1621Y and No. 6191Y when a table load lessthan 100 kg is selected

D 58 **** Values of NC parameter No. 1620X and No. 6171X when a table load of 100kg or more is selected

D 60 **** Values of NC parameter No. 1620Y and No. 6171Y when a table load of 100kg or more is selected


770


Address FunctionDefault

D 62 **** Values of NC parameter No. 1621X and No. 6191X when a table load of 100kg or more is selected

D 64 **** Values of NC parameter No. 1621Y and No. 6191Y when a table load of 100kg or more is selected

D 66 **** Value of NC parameter No. 6172X when a table load less than 100 kg isselected

D 68 **** Value of NC parameter No. 6172Y when a table load less than 100 kg isselected

D 70 **** Value of NC parameter No. 6192X when a table load less than 100 kg isselected

D 72 **** Value of NC parameter No. 6192Y when a table load less than 100 kg isselected

D 74 **** Value of NC parameter No. 6172X when a table load of 100 kg or more isselected

D 76 **** Value of NC parameter No. 6172Y when a table load of 100 kg or more isselected

D 78 **** Value of NC parameter No. 6192X when a table load of 100 kg or more isselected

D 80 **** Value of NC parameter No. 6192Y when a table load of 100 kg or more isselected

D 82 **** Values of NC parameter No. 1620Z and No. 6171Z when a tool weight of 3kg is selected




D 90 **** Value of NC parameter No. 6172Z when a tool weight of 3 kg is selected




D 98

D 100 0 Magazine number of special tool

D 850 0 T1 spindle taper air blow extension time







771


Address FunctionDefault
















I. RECOMMENDED ATA CARD B–85014EN/01APPENDIXES

772

I RECOMMENDED ATA CARD

1. Card standardPCMCIA (personal Computer Memory Card InternationalAssociation)PC Card standard Release 2.1, PCMCIA PC Card ATA Release 1.02

2. Card configurationPCMCIA TYPE I to TYPE II

3. Card operation modePC–ATA specification

4. Power supply voltage5V type or 5V/3.3V type (automatic change)

5. Flash ATA card which Fanuc has checked the operations

Manufacturer Product Name MemoryCapacity

Power supplyvoltage

(C) HITACHI HB286008A3 8MB Discontinued

HB286015A3 15MB

HB286030A3 30MB

HB286045A3 45MB

HB289016A4 16MB Under volume

HB289032A4 32MBproduction

HB289048A4 48MB

(C) MATSUSHITA BN–012AB 12MB

BN–020AB 20MB

BN–040AB 40MB

(C) SanDisk SDP3B–4 4MB

SDP3B–8 8MB

SDP3B–16 16MB

SDP3B–20 20MB

SDP3B–32 32MB

SDP3B–40 40MB

B–85014EN/01 I. RECOMMENDED ATA CARDAPPENDIXES

773

NOTE1 Recommended for data input/output. Operation for other

applications is not guaranteed.2 Fanuc canot guarantee Flash ATA card except aboe cards.3 The cards above support automatic switching between 5 V

and 3.3 V, and can be used with T14iA, T14iB, and T14iConly. With models other than T14iA, T14iB, and T14iC, thecards above can be physically inserted into the memorycard slot, but the memory card or CNC control unit iselectrically destroyed when the power is turned on. Becareful when handling the cards above.

4 It’s impossible to use 3.3V type card.

J. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION B–85014EN/01APPENDIXES

774

J EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION

This chapter describes the specifications of the embedded Ethernetfunction for Series 16i/18i/21i160i/180i/210i/160is/180is/210is–B.

B–85014EN/01 J. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTIONAPPENDIXES

775

The embedded Ethernet function can be used by selecting one of twotypes of devices: the embedded Ethernet port and PCMCIA Ethernet card.

The PCMCIA Ethernet card is to be inserted into the memory card slotto the left of the front LCD for temporary communication.

The PCMCIA Ethernet card is to be inserted into the memory card slotto the left of the front LCD for temporary communication.

NOTE1 Use the PCMCIA Ethernet card for temporary

communication only. Do not use the PCMCIA Ethernet cardfor routine communication.

2 The PCMCIA Ethernet card is to be inserted into thememory card slot to the left of the LCD. This means thatsome part of the card is projected. When using the PCMCIAEthernet card, be careful not to damage the card by hittingthe card with an object.After using the PCMCIA Ethernet card, remove the cardimmediately to prevent the card from being damaged.

3 With FS21i–B, the built–in Ethernet port cannot be used.4 In the description of the PCMCIA Ethernet card given here,

the card is assumed to be installed in the Series16i/18i/21i–B. When the PCMCIA Ethernet card is installedin the Series 160i/180i/210i/160is/180is/210is–B, the cardcannot be used for the embedded Ethernet function.

J.1EMBEDDEDETHERNET ANDPCMCIA ETHERNET


776

With the embedded Ethernet function, the following functions can beoperated:

� FACTOLINK function

� FOCAS1/Ethernet function

� DNC1/Ethernet function

� FTP file transfer function

With the FACTOLINK function, data such as work instructions can bedisplayed on the CNC screen, and NC data can be transferred byoperations on the NC.For details, refer to “FANUC FACTOLINK Script Function Operator’sManual (B–75054EN)”.

NOTEThe FACTOLINK function is usable with the control softwarefor the built–in Ethernet function series 656A and edition 02and later.

Data such as work instructions created using a personal computer can bedisplayed on the NC screen by operations on the NC.

The following NC data can be transferred by operations on the NC:

� NC program

� NC file data

� Parameter

� Ladder program

� C language executor execution form

� Macro executor execution form

� NC system file

� PMC data

� Addresses T, K, C, D

Machine state information can be automatically sent to the personalcomputer.

The FOCAS1/Ethernet function allows a personal computer to remotelycontrol and monitor the CNC. The FOCAS1/Ethernet function cantransfer a wider range of NC data than the DNC1/Ethernet function. Fordetails, refer to “FANUC Open CNC FOCAS1/Ethernet CNC/PMC DataWindow Library Description”.

The following NC data can be transferred by operations on the personalcomputer:

� Data related to control axes/spindles

� Absolute position

J.2LIST OF FUNCTIONS

J.2.1FACTOLINK Function

Screen display

NC data transfer

Logging

J.2.2FOCAS1/EthernetFunction

NC data transfer


777

� Relative position

� Machine position

� Remaining travel amount

� Actual speed

� NC program

� Part program storage directory information

� NC data file

� Parameter

� Tool offset value

� Custom macro variable

� Workpiece origin offset

� Setting data

� P code macro variable

� Pitch error compensation

� Tool life management data

� History data

� Operation history data

� Alarm history data

� Servo–/spindle–related data

� Data related to waveform diagnosis

� Modal data

� Diagnosis data

� A/D conversion data

� Alarm information

� NC system identification information

� PMC data

� Addresses G, F, Y, X, A, R, T, K, C, D

� Extended nonvolatile data

From the personal computer, the following operations can be performed:

� NC program selection

� NC program deletion

� External reset

NOTEWith the FOCAS1/Ethernet function of the built–in Ethernetfunction, DNC operation cannot be performed.

Remote operation


778

The DNC1/Ethernet function allows a personal computer to remotelycontrol and monitor the CNC. The DNC1/Ethernet function providessoftware libraries in a simpler function call format when compared withthe FOCAS1/Ethernet function.For details, refer to “FANUC Personal Computer FA System WindowsNT Version Operator’s Manual (B–75044EN)”.

The following NC data can be transferred by operations on the personalcomputer:

� NC program

� Part program storage directory information

� NC file data

� Parameter


� Custom macro variable

� Alarm information

� NC system identification information

� PMC data

� Addresses G, F, Y, X, A, R, T, K, C, D

From the personal computer, the following operations can be performed:

� NC program selection

� NC program deletion

� External reset

NOTEWith the DNC1/Ethernet function of the built–in Ethernetfunction, DNC operation cannot be performed.

J.2.3DNC1/EthernetFunction

NC data transfer

Remote operation


779

Differences between the FOCAS1/Ethernet function and DNC1/Ethernet function

Compared with the FOCAS1/Ethernet function, the DNC1/Ethernetfunction provides software libraries in a simpler function call format forfrequently used functions.

The FTP file transfer function transfers files with FTP. The function canread and punch NC programs and various types of NC data.

NOTEThe FTP file transfer function is usable with the controlsoftware for the built–in Ethernet function series 656A andedition 02 and later.

The following NC data can be transferred by operations on the NC:

� NC program

� NC file data

� Parameter


� Workpiece origin offset

� Pitch error compensation

� M code group (Series 16i/18i/160i/180i/160is/180is–B only)

� History data

� Operation history data

J.2.4FTP File TransferFunction

NC data transfer[Personal computer �Part program storage]


780

The table below indicates the differences between the embedded Ethernetfunction and the Ethernet function based on the option board.

Embedded Ethernet Option board

FOCAS1/Ethernet function Available Available

CNC screen display function Not available Available

DNC operation Not available Available

Data server function Not available(NOTE 1)

Available

FACTOLINK function Available Available

J.2.5Functional Differencesbetween the EmbeddedEthernet Function andthe Ethernet FunctionBased on the OptionBoard


781

NOTE1 The built–in Ethernet function includes the FTP file transfer

function.This function is equivalent to the NC data transfer functionin the FTP mode of the data server function of the optionboard.

2 Compared with the option board, the built–in Ethernetfunction allows a smaller number of FOCAS1/Ethernetclients to be connected simultaneously.

3 Communications using the built–in Ethernet function isprocessed by the CPU of the CNC. This means that theoperation state of the CNC can affect the performance ofcommunication based on the built–in Ethernet function, andcommunication based on the built–in Ethernet function canaffect the processing of the CNC.The built–in Ethernet function has lower priority thanaxis–by–axis processing such as automatic operationprocessing and manual operation. So, when automaticoperation is being performed or many controlled axes areinvolved, communication may become slower.

On the contrary, the built–in Ethernet function has higherpriority over CNC screen display processing, C languageexecutor processing (excluding high–level tasks), andmacro executor processing (excluding execution macros).So, communication based on the built–in Ethernet functioncan decrease the performance of such processing.

4 Note that when the built–in Ethernet function is connectedto an intranet that handles large volumes of broadcast data,for example, the processing of broadcast data can take alonger time, resulting in a decrease in performance ofprocessing such as CNC screen display processing.

Number of personalcomputers that can be

connected simultaneously

Number of clients thatcan be connected

simultaneously

EmbeddedEthernet

1 unit(recom–mended)

5 clientsmaximum

Fast Ethernetboard

20 unitsmaximum

20 clientsmaximum

Ethernet board

10 unitsmaximum

10 clientsmaximum


782

This section describes the setting of the parameters for the embeddedEthernet function for the Series16i/18i/21i160i/180i/210i/160is/180is/210is–B.

This subsection describes the settings required to operate theFACTOLINK function when the embedded Ethernet function for theSeries 16i/18i/21i160i/180i/210i/160is/180is/210is–B is used.

CAUTIONWhen using the built–in Ethernet function for the first time,make various settings including IP address setting carefullyand conduct a communication test sufficiently, consultingwith your network manager.Note that if an incorrect IP address is set, for example, theentire network can suffer from a communication error.

NOTE1 When the FACTOLINK function is used, the optional

function corresponding to a CNC used is required.Series 16i–TB A02B–0281–S708Series 16i–MB A02B–0282–S708Series 18i–TB A02B–0283–S708Series 18i–MB A02B–0284–S708Series 21i–TB A02B–0285–S708Series 21i–MB A02B–0286–S708

2 With the FACTOLINK function, only one FACTOLINK servercan be connected to one CNC.

J.3SETTING THEEMBEDDEDETHERNETFUNCTION

J.3.1Parameter Setting ofthe FACTOLINKFunction

J.3.1.1 Notes on using theFACTOLINK function forthe first time


783

On the Ethernet parameter setting screen, set the parameters for operatingthe FACTOLINK function.

Display

1 Place the CNC in the MDI mode.

2 Press the function key SYSTEM .

3 Press the continuous menu key at the right end of the soft key display.

4 Press the [ETHPRM] soft key. The Ethernet parameter setting screenappears. The Ethernet functions currently available are displayed.

The upper row displays the usable embedded Ethernet functiondevice.The embedded port or PCMCIA card is displayed.The lower row displays the usable Ethernet option boards. When nooption board is installed, no information is displayed.

5 By pressing the [EMBEDD] soft key, the parameters for the embeddedEthernet port can be set.By pressing the [PCMCIA] soft key, the parameters for the PCMCIAEthernet card can be set.

NOTEThe parameters for the built–in Ethernet port and theparameters for the PCMCIA Ethernet card are independentof each other.

6 By using the MDI keys and soft keys, enter and update data.

J.3.1.2 FACTOLINK parametersetting screen

Procedure


784

7 Switch the screen display with the page keys PAGE

PAGE

.

If data is already registered, the data is displayed.


785

Display item and setting items

The item related to the embedded Ethernet function is displayed.

Item Description

MAC ADDRESS Embedded Ethernet MAC address

Set the TCP/IP–related items of the embedded Ethernet.

Item Description

IP ADDRESS Specify the IP address of the embedded Ethernet.(Example of specification format: “192.168.1.1”)

SUBNET MASK Specify a mask address for the IP addresses of the net-work. (Example of specification format: “255.255.255.0”)

ROUTER IP ADDRESS

Specify the IP address of the router.Specify this itemwhen the network contains a router.(Example of specification format: “192.168.1.254”)

Set the items related to the host computer with which the FACTOLINKserver operates.

Item Description

IP ADDRESS Specify the IP address of a personal computer to beaccessed by the FACTOLINK function.(Example of specification format: “192.168.1.100”)

PORT NUMBER Specify a port number to be used with the FACTOLINKfunction. The valid input range is 5001 to 65535.A specified port number must match “ocsnc” of the ser-vices file of the personal computer.For details, refer to “FANUC FACTOLINK Script Func-tion Operator’s Manual (B–75054EN)”.

The NC parameters related to the FACTOLINK function are describedbelow.

0802 Communication channel

[Data type] Byte[Valid data range] 21: Select the embedded Ethernet.

#70810

#6 #5MONO

#4TIME

#3 #2 #1 #0BGS

[Data type] BitBGS When the FACTOLINK screen is not displayed:

1 : Logging is performed in the background.0 : Logging is not performed.

Display item related tothe embedded Ethernetfunction

Embedded EthernetTCP/IP setting items

FACTOLINK settingitems

J.3.1.3 Parameters

Parameters


786

TIME For time display:

1 : “97/11/12 00:00” format is used.

0 : “Wed Nov 12 00:00:00” format is used.

MONO When the FACTOLINK screen is displayed:

1 : Two–tone monochrome display is used.

0 : Color display is used.

0811 Type of logging

[Data type] Byte

[Valid data range] 0, 1, 10, 20, 21

0 : D address area

1 : R address area

10 : Fixed data only

20 : D address area + fixed data

21 : R address area + fixed data

0812 PMC address for logging data

[Data type] Word

[Valid data range] 0 to 65535Set a start PMC address for storing logging data.

0813 Data length of logging data

[Data type] Word

[Unit of data] Number of bytes

[Valid data range] 0 to 65535Set the data length of logging data.

0814 Trigger PMC address for logging

[Data type] Word

[Valid data range] 0 to 65535Set a PMC address that serves as a trigger for specifying logging data.

0815 Logging data transmission interval

[Data type] Double–word

[Unit of data] Seconds

[Valid data range] 0 to 4294967295Set a time interval used for transmitting logging data (fixed data only).If 0 is set, logging data is transmitted at connection time only.


787

0820 Machine name posted to the host computer (1st byte)

0821 Machine name posted to the host computer (2nd byte)

0822 Machine name posted to the host computer (3rd byte)

0823 Machine name posted to the host computer (4th byte)






[Data type] Byte

[Valid data range] 32 to 126Set a machine name that is unique to each CNC and is required for the hostcomputer to identify each CNC. Use ASCII codes in decimal foralphanumeric characters and blanks to set a machine name.

#7NPA3111

#6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

[Data type] Bit

NPA When an alarm is issued while the FACTOLINK screen is displayed:

1 : The screen display does not switch to the alarm screen.

0 : The screen display switches to the alarm screen.


788

An example of minimum setting required to operate the FACTOLINKfunction on a small network is provided below.In this example, one personal computer is connected to two CNCsthrough FACTOLINK.� On personal computer 1, the server of the FACTOLINK function

operates.� On CNC 1 and CNC 2, the client of the FACTOLINK function

operates.

10BASE–T or 100BASE–TX

CNC 1 CNC 2PC 1

CNC 1 CNC 2

IP address 192.168.1.1 192.168.1.2

Subnet mask 255.255.255.0 255.255.255.0

Router IP address None None

IP address 192.168.1.100 192.168.1.100

Port number 9000 9000

NC parameter No. 802 21 21

NC parameter No. 820 67 ’C’ 67 ’C’

NC parameter No. 821 78 ’N’ 78 ’N’

NC parameter No. 822 67 ’C’ 67 ’C’

NC parameter No. 823 49 ’1’ 50 ’2’

PC 1

IP address 192.168.0.100

Subnet mask 255.255.255.0

Default gateway None

ocsnc 9000/TCP

ocscomm 9001/TCP

ocsapplication 9002/TCP

J.3.1.4 Using the FACTOLINKfunction on a smallnetwork

The Ethernet parameter screen is used forsetting.

The parameter screen is used for setting.

“Microsoft TCP/IP property” of the personal computer(Windows NT) is used for setting.

Refer to “FANUC FACTOLINK Script Function Opera-tor’s Manual (B–75054EN)”.


789

When configuring a large network or expanding an existing network,consult with your network manager to set an IP address, subnet mask, androuter IP address.

This subsection describes the settings required to operate theFOCAS1/Ethernet function (or DNC1/Ethernet function) when theembedded Ethernet function for the Series16i/18i/21i160i/180i/210i/160is/180is/210is–B is used.


NOTE1 The FOCAS1/Ethernet function allows up to five

FOCAS1/Ethernet clients to be connected to one CNC.2 If multiple application software products or multiple

personal computers access the CNC simultaneously, thecommunication load on the CNC can increase, resulting indecreased communication speed and degraded CNCscreen display processing.

J.3.1.5 Configuring a largenetwork

J.3.2Parameter Setting ofthe FOCAS1/EthernetFunction

J.3.2.1 Notes on using theFOCAS1/Ethernetfunction for the first time


790

On the Ethernet parameter setting screen, set the parameters for operatingthe FOCAS1/Ethernet function.

Display



3 Press the continuous menu key at the right end of the soft key display.4 Press the [ETHPRM] soft key. The Ethernet parameter setting screen

appears. The Ethernet functions currently available are displayed.






PAGE

.

J.3.2.2 FOCAS1/Ethernetparameter setting screen

Procedure


791



792



Item Description



Item Description


SUBNET MASK Specify a mask address for the IP addresses of the net-work. (Example of specification format: “255.255.255.0”)

ROUTER IP ADDRESS

Specify the IP address of the router.Specify this item when the network contains a router.(Example of specification format: “192.168.1.254”)

Set the items related to the FOCAS1/Ethernet function.

Item Description

PORT NUMBER(TCP)

Specify a port number to be used with the FOCAS1/Ethernet function. The valid input range is 5001 to65535.When using a port number for the DNC1/Ethernet func-tion, refer to “FANUC Personal Computer FA SystemWindows NT Version Operator’s Manual (B–75044EN)”.

PORT NUMBER(UDP)

Specify this item when using the DNC1/Ethernet func-tion. Specify a UDP port number for transmitting UDPbroadcast data.The valid input range is 5001 to 65535.For details, refer to “FANUC Personal Computer FASystem Windows NT Version Operator’s Manual(B–75044EN)”.Set 0 when using the FOCAS1/Ethernet function orwhen transmitting no UDP broadcast data.

TIME INTERVAL(NOTE 1)

Specify this item when using the DNC1/Ethernet func-tion.Specify a time interval at which UDP broadcast dataspecified above with a UDP port number is transmitted.The unit is 10 ms. The valid input range is 10 to 65535.This means that a value less than 100 ms cannot bespecified.Set 0 when using the FOCAS1/Ethernet function orwhen transmitting no UDP broadcast data.Example)100: Broadcast data is transmitted at intervalsof one second [1000 ms] (= 100�10).



FOCAS1/Ethernet settingitems


793

NOTE1 When a small value is set for the item of time interval,

communication load increases, and the performance of thenetwork can be adversely affected.

2 The parameters for the PCMCIA Ethernet card are set to thefollowing default values before shipment:IP address: 192.168.1.1Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0Router IP address: NoneTCP port number: 8193UDP port number: 0Time interval: 0


794

An example of minimum setting required to operate theFOCAS1/Ethernet function on a small network is provided below.In this example, one personal computer is connected to two CNCsthrough FOCAS1/Ethernet.� On personal computer 1, the client of the FOCAS1/Ethernet function

operates.

� On CNC 1 and CNC 2, the server of the FOCAS1/Ethernet functionoperates.


CNC 1 CNC 2PC 1

CNC 1 CNC 2

IP address 192.168.1.1 192.168.1.2

Subnet mask 255.255.255.0 255.255.255.0


TCP port number 8193 8193

UDP port number 0 0

Time interval 0 0

PC 1

IP address 192.168.1.101



CNC 1 NC IP address 192.168.1.1

NC TCP port number 8193

CNC 2 NC IP address 192.168.1.2


J.3.2.3 Using theFOCAS1/Ethernetfunction on a smallnetwork


“Microsoft TCP/IP property” of the personal computer(Windows 95/98/NT/2000) is used for setting.

The arguments of the data window library functioncnc_allclibhndl3 are used for setting.


795

An example of minimum setting required to operate the DNC1/Ethernetfunction on a small network is provided below.In this example, one personal computer is connected to two CNCsthrough DNC1/Ethernet.� On personal computer 1, the client of the DNC1/Ethernet function

operates.� On CNC 1 and CNC 2, the server of the DNC1/Ethernet function

operates.


CNC 1 CNC 2PC 1

CNC 1 CNC 2

IP address 192.168.1.1 192.168.1.2

Subnet mask 255.255.255.0 255.255.255.0


TCP port number 8193 8193

UDP port number 8192 8192

Time interval 100 100

PC 1

IP address 192.168.1.101



FANUC_C4_SERVER 8192/udp

CNC 1 Machine No. 1

NC IP address 192.168.1.1


CNC 2 Machine No. 2

NC IP address 192.168.1.2


J.3.2.4 Using the DNC1/Ethernetfunction on a smallnetwork



Refer to “FANUC Personal Computer FA System Win-dows NT Version Operator’s Manual”.


796


This subsection describes the settings required to operate the FTP filetransfer function when the embedded Ethernet function for the Series16i/18i/21i160i/180i/210i/160is/180is/210is–B is used.


NOTEWith the FTP file transfer function, only one FTP sessioncan be established with one CNC.


J.3.3Parameter Setting ofthe FTP File TransferFunction

J.3.3.1 Notes on using the FTPfile transfer function forthe first time


797

On the Ethernet parameter setting screen, set the parameters for operatingthe FTP file transfer function.

Display









J.3.3.2 FTP file transferparameter setting screen

Procedure


798


PAGE

.



799



Item Description



Item Description


SUBNET MASK Specify a mask address for the IP addresses of the net-work.(Example of specification format: “255.255.255.0”)

ROUTER IP ADDRESS

Specify the IP address of the router.Specify this item when the network contains a router.(Example of specification format: “192.168.1.254”)

Make settings related to the FTP file transfer function.Settings for up to three host computers can be made.

Item Description

PORT NUMBER Specify a port number to be used with the FTP filetransfer function.An FTP session is used, so that “21” is to be specifiedusually.

IP ADDRESS Specify the IP address of the host computer.(Example of specification format: “192.168.1.150”)

USERNAME Specify a user name to be used for logging in to thehost computer with FTP.(Up to 31 characters can be specified.)

PASSWORD Specify a password for the user name specified above.Be sure to set a password.(Up to 31 characters can be specified.)

LOGIN DIR Specify a work directory to be used when logging in tothe host computer.(Up to 127 characters can be specified.)



FTP file transfer settingitems


800

The NC parameters related to the FTP file transfer function are describedbelow.

0020 I/O CHANNEL: Input/output device selection

[Data type] Byte

[Valid data range] 9: Select the embedded Ethernet as the input/output device.

0931 Special character (No. 1)





[Data type] Byte

[Valid data range] 32 to 126NC parameters No. 931 to No. 935 enable soft keys to substitute forcharacters unavailable with the MDI keys.When a number other than 0 is set in each of these parameters, [CHAR–1]to [CHAR–5] are displayed in the input soft keys for special characters.

Example) When 33 is set in parameter No. 931, pressing the [CHAR–1]soft key enters “!”.

J.3.3.3 Parameters

Parameters


801

An example of minimum setting required to operate the FTP file transferfunction on a small network is provided below. (Windows NT 4.0Workstation is used as the OS for the personal computer.)In this example, one personal computer is connected to two CNCsthrough the FTP file transfer function.� On personal computer 1, the FTP server function operates.

� On CNC 1 and CNC 2, the FTP client operates as the FTP file transferfunction.


CNC 1 CNC 2PC 1

CNC 1 CNC 2

IP address 192.168.1.1 192.168.1.2

Subnet mask 255.255.255.0 255.255.255.0


Connection host Port number 21 211

IP address 192.168.1.150 192.168.1.150

User name FANUC FANUC

Password FANUC FANUC

Login DIR None None

NC parameter No. 20 9 9

PC 1

IP address 192.168.1.150



User name FANUC

Password FANUC

Login DIR Default

J.3.3.4 Using the FTP filetransfer function on asmall network


The parameter screen is used for setting.


“User manager” of the personal computer (WindowsNT) is used for setting.

“Internet service manager” of the personal computer(Windows NT) is used for setting.


802


This subsection describes the method of parameter input when theembedded Ethernet function for the Series16i/18i/21i160i/180i/210i/160is/180is/210is–B is used.

Basic method of data input

The basic method of data input is described below, using an example ofIP address input.


2 Display the Ethernet parameter screen.

3 Move the cursor to a desired input item with cursor keys.

4 Type data with MDI keys.

5 Press the [INPUT] soft key or the function key INPUT to enter the data.

NOTEWhen deleting numeric data already set, enter 0. Whendeleting character data already set, enter SP (space).

Example) Setting 192.168.1.1 as IP address data

(a) Move the cursor to the item of IP address.


J.3.4CommunicationParameter InputMethod

Procedure


803

(b)Type 192.168.1.1 with the MDI keys.

(c) Press the [INPUT] soft key or the function key INPUT to enter the

data.

This stores the parameter in the nonvolatile memory of the CNC.

NOTETo make the new parameter settings effective, turn thepower off then back on, or select the [RESET] soft key onthe maintenance screen of the embedded Ethernet.


804

Method of lowercase character input

The method of entering lowercase characters when specifying a username, password, and login DIR is described below.



3 Move the cursor to a desired input item with cursor keys.

4 When the [UNLOCK] soft key is displayed, uppercase characters areactually entered through MDI keys. For lowercase character input,press the [UNLOCK] soft key. The soft key display changes from[UNLOCK] to [LOCK].

5 Then, press the MDI keys A through Z. All of these characters areentered as lowercase characters.

6 To enter uppercase characters, press the [LOCK] soft key.

Procedure


805

Method of entering a long character string

The method of entering a character string longer than 32 characters forspecifying a login DIR is described below.As an example, the processing for setting the character string“/NCDATA/NCPROGRAM/LINE001/GROUP002” is described.



3 Move the cursor to LOGIN DIR with cursor keys.

4 Press the [STRING] soft key. The cursor position and soft key displaychange as shown below.

Procedure


806

5 Type “/NCDATA/NCPROGRAM/LINE001/GROUP0” with theMDI keys, then press the [INPUT] soft key.

6 Next, type the remaining character string “02” with the MDI keys, thenpress the [INPUT] soft key.

[Tip]If the maximum number of characters specifiable at one time, that is, 32characters, is not used, but the character string is divided into“/NCDATA/NCPROGRAM” and “/LINE001/GROUP002” for twoinput operations, for example, the same result can be obtained.


807

7 To insert “/FACTORY0010” between “NCPROGRAM” and“/LINE001”, move the cursor to “/” prefixed to “LINE001” then type“/FACTORY0010” with the MDI keys. Finally, press the [INSERT]soft key.

8 To delete a character, move the cursor to the character to be deleted,then press the [DEL.CH] soft key. This operation deletes a characteron which the cursor is placed one at a time.

9 To overwrite a character, move the cursor to the character to beoverwritten, then type a desired character with the MDI key. Finally,press the [INPUT] soft key. This operation overwrites a character onwhich the cursor is placed.

10 Upon completion of character string input, press the [RETURN] soft key.This operation returns the cursor position and soft key display to the stateof step 1, and stores the set data in the nonvolatile memory of the CNC.


808

Method of entering special characters

The method of entering special characters such as “\” unavailable with theMDI keys is described below.As an example, the procedure for setting the character string “PROG$”is described.



3 Move the cursor to LOGIN DIR with cursor keys.

4 Type “PROG” with the MDI keys, then press the continuous menu keyat the right end of the soft key display.

NOTEThose characters unavailable with the MDI keys that areused frequently such as :, \, $, and _ can be entered usingsoft keys. To enter a character other than these characters,set the ASCII code of the character in a parameter fromparameters No. 931 through No. 935.For details, see Subsection 17.3.3.3, “Parameters”.

Procedure


809

5 Press the [$] soft key.

6 Press the [INPUT] soft key.


810

There are two types of embedded Ethernet devices: the embeddedEthernet port and PCMCIA Ethernet card.Screen operation is required to switch between these two types of devices.






J.4SWITCHINGBETWEEN THEEMBEDDEDETHERNET DEVICES

Procedure


811

5 Press the [SWITCH] soft key. The screen for switching between theembedded Ethernet port and the PCMCIA Ethernet card appears.

6 Press the [PCMCIA] soft key. A confirmation message appears. Pressthe [EXEC] soft key to switch the device.

NOTEInformation about the switched device is stored in thenonvolatile memory.So, when you turn on the power next time, the previouslyselected device can be used directly.


812

This section describes the operation required of each embedded Ethernetfunction.

The operation of the FACTOLINK function is described below.

Display

1 Press the function key MESSAGE .


3 Press the [FALINK] soft key. The FACTOLINK screen appears.The screen shown below is a sample FACTOLINK screen.

J.5EMBEDDEDETHERNETOPERATIONS

J.5.1FACTOLINK Function

Procedure


813

The operation of the FTP file transfer function is described below.

A list of the files held on the hard disk embeddedto the host computer isdisplayed.

1 Press the function key PROG .


3 Press the [HOST] soft key. The host file list screen appears. TheEthernet functions currently available are displayed.


4 When you press the [EMBEDD] soft key, a list of the files held on thehost computer specified with the embedded Ethernet port is displayed.If the usable embedded Ethernet function device is the PCMCIA card,the [PCMCIA] soft key is displayed instead of the [EMBEDD] softkey. When you press the [PCMCIA] soft key, a list of the files heldon the host computer specified with the PCMCIA Ethernet card isdisplayed.

J.5.2FTP File TransferFunction

J.5.2.1 Host file list display

Procedure


814

NOTE1 File names including kanji, hiragana, or katanana

characters are not displayed correctly.2 Depending on the FTP server software, the number of

displayed programs may differ between the host file listscreen above and the host file list (detail) screen describedbelow.

5 When a list of files is larger than one page, the screen display can be

switched using the page keys PAGE

PAGE

.

6 Press the [UPDATE] soft key to update the screen display.

7 Press the [SWITCH] soft key. The host file list (detail) screen appears.


815

NOTEThe host file list (detail) screen shown above is an exampleof screen display, and information displayed may varyaccording to the specification of the FTP server used withthe host computer.

Display items

The number of files registered in the directory (folder) of the hostcomputer currently connected is displayed.

The number of the host currently connected is displayed.

List of operations

This operation switches between normal display and detail display.

This operation updates information displayed.

This operation stops [SEARCH] operation.

This operation updates screen information so that a file specified by itsfile number is placed at the start of the list.

This operation deletes a file held on the hard disk embeddedto the hostcomputer.

This operation reads a file held on the hard disk embeddedto the hostcomputer to the CNC part program storage. This soft key is displayedonly when 9 is set as the input/output device number of the CNC, and theCNC is placed in the EDIT mode.

This operation outputs a file held in the CNC part program storage to thehard disk embeddedto the host computer. This soft key is displayed onlywhen 9 is set as the input/output device number of the CNC, and the CNCis placed in the EDIT mode.

� Number of registeredprogram files

� Currently connectedhost

� SWITCH

� UPDATE

� STOP

� SEARCH

� DELETE

� READ

� PUNCH


816

When a list of the files held on the hard disk embeddedto the hostcomputer is displayed, a file can be placed at the start of the list byspecifying its file number.

1 Display the host file list screen.

2 Press the [SEARCH] soft key.

3 Type the file number of a file to be displayed at the start of the list withthe MDI keys.[Input format]

<file–number>

4 Press the [EXEC] soft key.

5 During search, “SEARCH” blinks in the lower–right corner of thescreen.

A file held on the hard disk embeddedto the host computer can be deleted.


2 Press the [DELETE] soft key.

3 Type the file number or file name of a file to be deleted, with the MDIkeys. [Input format]

<file–number>or<file–name>


5 During deletion, “DELETED” blinks in the lower–right corner of thescreen.

NOTE1 When a file number is used for deletion, only a file displayed

on the host file list screen can be deleted.2 The information displayed at the right end of the host file list

(detail) screen is recognized as a file name. So, whendeleting a host file from the host file list (detail) screen byspecifying its file number, check that a file name is displayedat the right end of the screen, before specifying the filenumber.

3 When a host file to be deleted includes a kanji, hiragana, orkatakaka character, switch from the host file list (detail)screen to the host file list screen then specify its file numberfor deletion.

J.5.2.2 Host file search

Procedure

J.5.2.3 Host file deletion

Procedure


817

A file (NC program) held on the hard disk embeddedto the host computercan be read to the part program storage.

For the host file list screen

1 Place the CNC in the EDIT mode.


3 Press the [READ] soft key.

4 Type the file number or file name of an NC program to be input, withthe MDI keys. [Input format]

<file–number>or<file–name>


6 During input, “INPUT” blinks in the lower–right corner of the screen.

CAUTION1 If the part program storage holds an NC program that has

the same O number as that of an NC program to be input,the NC program in the part program storage is overwrittenwhen bit 2 of parameter No. 3201 is set to 1.

2 If an NC program is input when bit 0 of parameter No. 3201is set to 1, all NC programs in the part program storge areautomatically deleted before NC program input.

[Example of use]When a file with the file name O0001.DAT held on the hard diskembeddedto the host computer is to be input to the part program storage,enter O001.DAT. Note, however, that the O number input to the partprogram storage depends on the O number described in the file namedO0001.DAT.

NOTEWhen a file is input from this screen to the part programstorage, the O number described in the file is input.

J.5.2.4 NC program input

Procedure


818

For the program screen




4 Press the [PRGRM] soft key. The program screen appears.

5 Press the [(OPRT)] soft key.



8 Type the O number of an NC program to be input, with the MDI keys.[Input format]

<O–number>



CAUTION1 If the part program storage holds an NC program that has

the same O number as that of an NC program to be input,the NC program in the part program storage is overwrittenwhen bit 2 of parameter No. 3201 is set to 1.

2 If an NC program is input when bit 0 of parameter No. 3201is set to 1, all NC programs in the part program storge areautomatically deleted before NC program input.

NOTEThe valid O number of a file to be input to the part programstorage is Oxxxx (with xxxx representing a number) only.

A file (NC program) held in the part program storage can be output to thehard disk embeddedto the host computer.

For the host file list screen



3 Press the [PUNCH] soft key.

4 Type the O number of an NC program to be output, with the MDI keys.[Input format]

<O–number>


6 During output, “OUTPUT” blinks in the lower–right corner of thescreen.

Procedure

J.5.2.5 NC program output

Procedure


819

[Example of use]When an NC program (O0001) held in the part program storage is to beoutput to the hard disk embeddedto the host computer, enter O0001.

NOTEA file name to be output to the hard disk built into the hostcomputer is Oxxxx at all times.

For the program screen




4 Press the [PRGRM] soft key. The program screen appears.




8 Type the O number of an NC program to be output, with the MDI keys.[Input format]

<O–number>



NOTEA file name to be output to the hard disk built into the hostcomputer is Oxxxx at all times.

With the FTP file transfer function, the types of data listed below can beinput/output. This subsection describes the input/output method.1) NC parameter2) Tool offset value3) Custom macro variable4) Workpiece origin offset5) Pitch error compensation6) M code group7) Operation history data

Procedure

J.5.2.6 Input/output of varioustypes of data


820

Parameter input

The file (NC parameter) held on the hard disk embeddedto the hostcomputer can be input to the CNC memory.




4 Press the [PARAM] soft key. The parameter screen appears.






The fixed file name PRAMETER is used.

Refer to the operator’s manual of each CNC.

Parameter output

The file (NC parameter) held in the CNC memory can be output to thehard disk embeddedto the host computer.




4 Press the [PARAM] soft key. The parameter screen appears.





9 During output, “UTPUT” blinks in the lower–right corner of thescreen.

The fixed file name PRAMETER is used.


Procedure

File name

File format, restrictions

Procedure

File name



821

Tool offset value input

The file (tool offset value) held on the hard disk embeddedto the hostcomputer can be input to the CNC memory.


2 Press the function key OFFSETSETTING .


4 Press the [OFFSET] soft key. The tool compensation screen appears.






The fixed file name TOOLOFS is used.


Tool offset value output

The file (tool offset value) held in the CNC memory can be output to thehard disk embeddedto the host computer.




4 Press the [OFFSET] soft key. The tool compensation screen appears.






The fixed file name TOOLOFS is used.


Procedure

File name


Procedure

File name



822

Workpiece origin offset input

The file (workpiece origin offset) held on the hard disk embeddedto thehost computer can be input to the CNC memory.




4 Press the [COOR–SYS] soft key. The workpiece coordinate systemsetting screen appears.






The fixed file name WORKOFS is used.


Workpiece origin offset output

The file (workpiece origin offset) held in the CNC memory can be outputto the hard disk embeddedto the host computer.




4 Press the [COOR–SYS] soft key. The workpiece coordinate systemsetting screen appears.






The fixed file name WORKOFS is used.


Procedure

File name


Procedure

File name



823

Pitch error compensation input

The file (pitch error compensation) held on the hard disk embeddedto thehost computer can be input to the CNC memory.




4 Press the [PITCH] soft key. The pitch error setting screen appears.






The fixed file name PITCH is used.


Pitch error compensation output

The file (pitch error compensation) held in the CNC memory can beoutput to the hard disk embeddedto the host computer.




4 Press the [PITCH] soft key. The pitch error setting screen appears.






The fixed file name PITCH is used.


Procedure

File name


Procedure

File name



824

M code group input

The file (M code group) held on the hard disk embeddedto the hostcomputer can be input to the CNC memory.




4 Press the [M CODE] soft key. The M code group setting screenappears.






The fixed file name M–CODE is used.


M code group output

The file (M code group) held in the CNC memory can be output to the harddisk embeddedto the host computer.




4 Press the [M CODE] soft key. The M code group setting screenappears.






The fixed file name M–CODE is used.


Procedure

File name


Procedure

File name



825

Operation history data input

The file (operation history data) held on the hard disk embeddedto the hostcomputer can be input to the CNC memory.




4 Press the [OPRT–HISTORY] soft key. The operation history screenappears.






The fixed file name HISTORY is used.


Operation history data output

The file (operation history data) held in the CNC memory can be outputto the hard disk embeddedto the host computer.




4 Press the [OPRT–HISTORY] soft key. The operation history screenappears.






The fixed file name HISTORY is used.


Procedure

File name


Procedure

File name



826

The host computer to which the FTP file transfer function attempts tomake a connection as the current communication destination can bechecked.



3 Press the [CNCT–HOST] soft key. The connection host change screenappears. The Ethernet functions currently available are displayed.


4 When you press the [EMBEDD] soft key, a list of the connection hostcomputers specified with the embedded Ethernet port is displayed.If the usable embedded Ethernet function device is the PCMCIA card,the [PCMCIA] soft key is displayed instead of the [EMBEDD] softkey. When you press the [PCMCIA] soft key, a list of the connectionhost computers specified with the PCMCIA Ethernet card isdisplayed.

J.5.2.7 Checking and changingof the connection host

Procedure


827

NOTEThe title of the host computer that is the currentcommunication destination of the data server board isdisplayed in reverse video.

5 The connected host can be changed by pressing the [CON–1],[CON–2], or [CON–3] soft key.

Display items

Those values that are set on the Ethernet parameter setting screen aredisplayed.

List of operations

This operation changes the connected host to host 1.



� Port number, IP address,user name, login DIR

� CON–1

� CON–2

� CON–3


828

If an error occurs with each function of the embedded Ethernet function,the error message screen for the embedded Ethernet function displays anerror message.

Display

1 Press the function key MESSAGE .


3 Press the [ETHLOG] soft key. The Ethernet log screen appears. TheEthernet functions currently available are displayed.


4 By pressing the [EMBEDD] soft key or the [PCMCIA] soft key, theerror message screen for the embedded Ethernet function can bedisplayed.The error message screen does not differ between the embeddedEthernet port and PCMCIA Ethernet card. The same screen is shared.

J.6EMBEDDEDETHERNET ERRORMESSAGE SCREEN

Procedure


829


PAGE

.

[Tip]The latest error message is displayed at the top of the screen. To the rightof an error message, the date and time data of the occurrence of the erroris displayed. The format of date and time data is ddhhmmss where ddrepresents a day, hh represents hours, mm represents minutes, and ssrepresents seconds.

Configuration

The embedded Ethernet log screen consists of the screens below.

(1)EMB_ETH MASTER CTRL LOG screen (2 screens)Log screen used to set the parameters of the embedded Ethernetfunction and display error messages at the time of embedded Ethernetinitialization

(2)EMB_ETH FOCAS1/ETHER LOG screen (2 screens)Log screen used to display error messages related to theFOCAS1/Ethernet function (DNC1/Ethernet function)

(3)EMB_ETH PMC LOG screen (2 screens)Log screen used to display error messages related to the PMC onlinemonitor functions such as FAPT LADDER–III

(4)EMB_ETH FACTOLINK LOG screen (2 screens)Log screen used to display error messages related to the FACTOLINKfunction

(5)EMB_ETH FTP TRANSFER LOG screen (2 screens)Log screen used to display error messages related to the FTP filetransfer function


830

With the embedded Ethernet function, a dedicated maintenance screen isavailable.The maintenance screen enables operations to be checked when theembedded Ethernet function operates abnormally.

Display



3 Press the [ETHMNT] soft key. The Ethernet maintenance screenappears. The Ethernet functions currently available are displayed.


4 By pressing the [EMBEDD] soft key or the [PCMCIA] soft key, themaintenance screen for the embedded Ethernet function can bedisplayed.The maintenance screen does not differ between the embeddedEthernet port and PCMCIA Ethernet card. The same screen is shared.


PAGE

.

J.7EMBEDDEDETHERNETMAINTENANCESCREEN

Procedure


831

6 The screen below is used to check the state of the communication cableand whether a communication destination exists.Enter the IP address of a communication destination through MDIkeys, then press the [PING] soft key. Communication is performedthree times with the specified communication destination, and theresults are displayed.

Messages displayed:

Reply from IP–address

This message indicates that a response was received from thespecified communication destination and that the specifiedcommunication destination exists on the network.

Request Timed out IP–address

This message indicates that no response was received from thespecified communication destination and that the specifiedcommunication destination does not exist on the network.Check if the power to the communication destinationequipment is turned on. Check also the parameter settings andnetwork installation for errors.

IP address Error (IP–address)

The specified IP address is incorrect. Check the entered IPaddress.


832

7 The screen below is used to check the communication state of theembedded Ethernet function and the error detection count of theEthernet controller.

The screen consists of two pages: one page for an error detection countfor transmission, and the other for an error detection count forreception.

By pressing the [CLEAR] soft key, the error detection counters fortransmission and reception can be cleared to 0.

By pressing the [RESET] soft key, the current communication devicecan be initialized and communication can be performed from theinitial state. Use this key to reset communication based on theembedded Ethernet function.


833

8 The screen below is used to check the state of each task of theembedded Ethernet function.

Symbol Meaning

MASTER CTRL E Ethernet controller being initialized

D Data being processed(NOTE)

W Waiting for data processing(NOTE)

P Waiting for parameter setting

S Parameters being set

FOCAS1 #0 X Waiting for completion of Ethernet controllerinitialization

E Being activated

C Waiting for connection from the personal com-puter

O Connection being processed

N FOCAS1/Ethernet execution disabled

FOCAS1 #1, #2 X Waiting for completion of Ethernet controllerinitialization

C Waiting for connection from the personal com-puter



UDP X Not executed yet. Waiting for completion ofEthernet controller initialization.

E Being activated




834

MeaningSymbol

PMC X Waiting for completion of Ethernet controllerinitialization



FTP X Waiting for completion of Ethernet controllerinitialization



FACTOLINK X Waiting for completion of Ethernet controllerinitialization



NOTEA state change occurs between the states “Data beingprocessed” and “Waiting for data processing” even whencommunication is not performed actually.

9 Information about the interface between the FTP file transfer functionand CNC is displayed.


835

Item Description

EMPTY COUNTER Indicates a buffer empty count during NC pro-gram transfer from the FTP file transfer functionto the CNC.This counter is initialized to 0 at pow-er–on, then is incremented each time a certaincondition is satisfied.

TOTAL SIZE Indicates the total number of bytes transferredwhen one NC program is transferred using theFTP file transfer function.

READ POINTERWRITEPOINTER

Indicates internal buffer management informationwhen the FTP file transfer function is used.


836

This section describes troubleshooting and check items associated withthe embedded Ethernet function.

1) Is an STP cable used for connection between the hub and embeddedEthernet?

2) Is the STP cable connected correctly?In general, a straight cable is used for connection between the hub andcommunication device.

3) Is the power to the hub turned on?4) The PCMCIA Ethernet card is used only with 10BASE–T. Is a hub

for 10BASE–T used when the PCMCIA Ethernet card is used?5) Is the link LED turned on when the embedded Ethernet port is used?

The link LED is not turned on when the hub is not connected or thepower to the hub is not turned on.

6) Is the LED (for link display) of the connected hub turned on?(Some hubs are not provided with a link LED.)The LED is not turned on when the hub is not connected with theembedded Ethernet or the power to the CNC is not turned on.

This subsection can be ignored when a network is built only with a hubto which the embedded Ethernet is connected.The general check items are listed below. For network installation,consult with vendors specialized in this area. Install cables away fromnoise sources.

When a 10BASE–5 backbone is used

1) Are transceivers connected to the backbone cable correctly?� If the transceivers are connected correctly, the resistance between

the backbone shield and central conductor is about 25 ohms (whenterminating resistors are attached).

� A special tool may be required for transceiver installation. (Thespecial tool varies from one vendor to another. For details, refer tothe relevant manual of each vendor.)

� At a location where a transceiver was once installed, do not installa transceiver again. (The backbone cable can be damaged.)

2) Are transceivers installed at correct intervals?� Transceivers need to be spaced from each other by 2.5 m or more.

It is recommended that transceivers be installed at intervals of anintegral multiple of 2.5 m. Usually, installation locations aremarked on a backbone cable.

3) Are terminating resistors attached?� A terminating resistor (50 ohms) needs to be attached to each end

of the backbone cable.4) Is the length of the backbone cable 500 m or less?5) Does the cable (transceiver cable) connecting a hub to a transceiver

satisfy the specified length?

J.8TROUBLESHOOTING

J.8.1Check Items Related toConnection with theHUB

J.8.2Check Items Related toConnection with aBackbone


837

� Usually, the maximum allowable length of a transceiver cable is 50m. However, the maximum allowable length of some thin cablesmay be less than 50 m. Check the specification of the cable.

When a 10BASE–2 backbone is used

1) Is the length of one cable 0.5 m or more?

� The minimum allowable span between nodes (devices) is 0.5 m.

2) Is the length of the backbone cable (total length of the cables) 185 mor less?

3) Are terminating resistors attached?

� A terminating resistor (50 ohms) needs to be attached to each endof the backbone cable.

This subsection describes how to check the minimum settings requiredfor communication.

Checking the settings on the embedded Ethernet side

1) Is the MAC address of the embedded Ethernet displayed?

� The MAC address of a embedded Ethernet port is set for each CNC,and can be checked on the parameter setting screen.

� A unique MAC address is assigned to each PCMCIA Ethernet card.When a PCMCIA Ethernet card is selected and inserted, MACaddress display is provided.

2) Is a correct IP address set?

� Check if an IP address already specified for another device is set.

3) Is a correct subnet mask set?

� The subnet mask setting must match the subnet mask setting on thecommunication destination device.

4) Is a correct router IP address set when communication via a router isperformed?

Checking the settings on the personal computer side

1) Is a correct IP address set?

� Check if an IP address already specified for another device is set.

2) Is a correct subnet mask set?

� The subnet mask setting must match the subnet mask setting on thecommunication destination device.

3) Is a correct router IP address set when communication via a router isperformed?

J.8.3Checking the Setting ofEach Parameter


838

This subsection describes how to check the state of communicationbetween the CNC and personal computer.

Checking the connection status and settings

If communication with the CNC is not satisfactory or fails from time totime, check the communication link by using the method describedbelow. The ping command is used to check communication.

See Item 6 of Section J.7, “EMBEDDED ETHERNET MAINTENANCESCREEN”.

If no response is received from the remote device, the cause is consideredto be a hardware connection error and/or software setting error. Check thehardware connection and software settings.

An example where a personal computer (OS: Windows NT 4.0) is usedis described below.

Method of checking:

Open the command prompt, then enter “ping NC–IP–address”. A normalconnection has been established if a response is received.The example below supposes that the IP address of the CNC is192.168.1.1.

1) When a response is received (normal)

J.8.4CheckingCommunication

Checking from theembedded Ethernet side

Checking from thepersonal computer side


839

2) When no response is received (error)

If no response is received from the CNC, the cause is considered to bea hardware connection error and/or software setting error. Check thehardware connection and software settings.

Checking the influence of noise

The method of checking communication errors caused by noise isdescribed below.The ping command is used for this checking as well.

The –t option of the ping command is used. Until the Ctrl and C keys arepressed simultaneously, ping packets are transmitted.


840

1. Influence of noise from peripheral equipment (device)

1) Turn on the power to the machine with the embedded Ethernetfunction for which a noise influence check is to be made, and ensurethat communication is enabled.

2) Press the emergency stop button of the machine to turn offservo/spindle amplifier activation, then issue a ping commandfrom the personal computer.

3) Count the number of lost packets (to which no response isreturned).If lost packets occur in this state, there is probably an influence ofnoise from peripheral equipment.

Action: Locate the noise source and recheck the cabling toeliminate the influence of noise.

2. Influence of noise from the installed machine

1) Next, release the emergency stop state of the machine to turn onservo/spindle amplifier activation, then issue another pingcommand from the personal computer.

2) Count the number of lost packets.If this number is greater than the number of Item 1 above, the causeis considered to be noise generated by the machine itself. Ingeneral, the grounding of the machine or the grounding of thecommunication destination is defective.

Action: Check the grounding of the machine and thecommunication destination, and insulate the machinefrom the communication backbone.


841

If an error occurs with the embedded Ethernet function, the log screen ofthe embedded Ethernet function displays an error message.This section describes error messages displayed on the log screen.The major error messages are described below.

If an error occurs, display the log screen and check the error message toidentify the cause of the error.Multiple error messages may be displayed for an error. So, check thedisplay times of error messages.

� OWN IP ADDRESS IS NOTHING:The IP address of the local node is not set. Set an IP address correctly.

� OWN IP ADDRESS (???) IS INVALID:The setting (???) of the IP address of the local node is incorrect.Correct the IP address.

� SUBNET MASK IS NOTHING:The subnet mask of the local node is not set. Set a correct subnet mask.

� SUBNET MASK (???) IS INVALID:The setting (???) of the subnet mask of the local node is incorrect.Correct the subnet mask.

� ROUTER IP ADDRESS (???) IS INVALID:The setting (???) of the IP address of the router is incorrect. Correctthe IP address of the router.

� TCP PORT NUMBER (???) IS INVALID:The setting (???) of the TCP port number is incorrect. Correct the TCPport number.

� UDP PORT NUMBER (???) IS INVALID:The setting (???) of the UDP port number is incorrect. Correct theUDP port number.

� UDP INTERVAL TIME (???) IS INVALID:The setting (???) of the time interval for UDP transmission is incorrect.Correct the time interval.

� Embedded LANC SelfTest Error [???]:An error was detected when the LAN controller of the embeddedEthernet was initialized.The error code is [???]. Hardware replacement is needed.

� TCP PORT NUMBER (???) IS INVALID:The setting (???) of the TCP port number is incorrect. Correct the TCPport number.

� Illegal Broadcast IP ADDRESS:The broadcast address for UDP transmission is incorrect. Correct thesubnet mask and IP address of the local node.

� Illegal Power–on Date or Time:The current time setting of the CNC is incorrect. Correct the clock ofthe CNC.

J.9ERROR MESSAGES

J.9.1EMB_ETH MASTERCTRL LOG Screen

J.9.2EMB_ETHFOCAS1/ETHER LOGScreen


842

� ALL TASKS (C1) ARE BUSY:The FOCAS1/Ethernet function or DNC1/Ethernet function is alreadyengaged in communication with five applications. Terminateunnecessary communication applications on the personal computer.If the cable is disconnected before communication is completed, theembedded Ethernet may need to be reset and initialized.

� Err accept ( ) [???]:An error occurred when a connection request from the personalcomputer is being awaited. The error code is [???]. This error messageis output, for example, when the embedded Ethernet is reset.

� Err recv ( ) [???]:An error occurred during data reception. The error code is [???].This error message is output, for example, when the embeddedEthernet is reset before communication is closed.

� Login User is invalid:The setting of the user name or password is incorrect. Check the username and password.

� Parameters are invalid:The port number and IP address of the host computer set on theparameter setting screen are incorrect. Check the settings of the portnumber and IP address.

� (???) is not found: The host computer with which an attempt is made to perform FTPcommunication cannot be found on the network. The IP address of thehost computer to be connected with is indicated by (???). Check if thepower to the host computer is turned on and if the host computer isconnected to the network correctly.

� FACTOLINK#1 IP ADDRESS (???) IS INVALID:The setting of the IP address (???) of the FACTOLINK server isincorrect. Check the setting of the IP address.

� FACTOLINK#1 PORT NUMBER (???) IS INVALID:The port number (???) of the FACTOLINK server is incorrect. Checkthe setting of the program number.

� Err ALREADY CONNECTED:An additional request is made for connection with a port alreadyconnected.The embedded Ethernet needs to be reset.

J.9.3EMB_ETH FTPTRANSFER LOGScreen

J.9.4EMB_ETH FACTOLINKLOG Screen


843

This section briefly describes Ethernet–related terms.The descriptions below provide minimum information only. For furtherinformation, refer to relevant publications available on the market.

For Ethernet–based communication, the TCP/IP (Transmission ControlProtocol/Internet Protocol) protocol is generally used. A protocol is a setof rules used to ensure smooth communication between communicationdevices connected via a transmission line. The TCP/IP protocol is a partof the hierarchical structure consisting of the protocols and servicesindicated below.

Hierarchy Protocol/network service

Application layer User services such as FTP

Transport layer Protocols such as TCP and UDP

Network layer Protocols such as IP and ICMP

Data link layer

MAC layerProtocols such as ARP and RARP

Physical layer Hardware such as cables and devices

In general, the TCP/IP protocol is a generic term that represents theprotocols installed in the transport layer and network layer.

With TCP/IP, an address referred to as an IP address (INET address) isused to identify a specified communication device among thecommunication devices connected via Ethernet. So, for communicationusing TCP/IP, each communication device connected to Ethernet musthave a unique IP address assigned.

An IP address is four octets (bytes) long. Usually, an IP address isrepresented by four 8–bit (octet or byte) fields separated by a period fromeach other. Each octet can have a value from 0 to 255.

An IP address consists of the address of the network to which thecommunication device is connected, and the host address of thecommunication device. Networks are classified into three classes bygroup size: class A, class B, and class C.

First octet value Network ad-dress section

Host addresssection

Class A 0 to 127 xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx

Class B 128 to 191

xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx

xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx

Class C 192 to 223

xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx

xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx

(A hatched portion indicates the section of each address.)

If a network supports no more than 255 communication devices, class Cis generally used.

The IP addresses of all communication devices on one network have thesame network address, and only the host address of each communicationdevice is unique on the network.

J.10GLOSSARY FORETHERNET

TCP/IP

IP address (INETaddress)


844

An IP address with its network address and host address all set to 0 or 255is unusable.

IP addresses are internationally managed systematically. This means thatbefore an IP address can be used, the IP address must be obtained formallyfrom the international organization.In Japan, a formal IP address can be obtained from Japan NetworkInformation Center (JPNIC).For the method of application, visit the home page of JPNIC(URL:http://www.nic.ad.jp/index–j.html) where the document forapplication released by JPNIC is available.

If the network used by a user is a local network closed within the user’senvironment (not connected to an outside network), unique IP addressesmay be set freely under the control and responsibility of the user. For alocal network, the following network addresses can be used withoutformal registration: 1 address (10) for class A, 16 addresses (172.16 to172.31) for class B, and 256 addresses (192.168.0 to 192.168.255) forclass C. So, it is recommended that IP addresses with these networkaddresses be used for a local network.

Mask address for indicating the network address section of an IP address.For a network of class A, specify 255.0.0.0.For a network of class B, specify 255.255.0.0.For a network of class C, specify 255.255.255.0.

A MAC address is assigned to the Ethernet control board of eachcommunication device, and is used to identify each communicationdevice on the MAC layer (lower part of the data link layer). A uniqueaddress obtained from an international organization is used so that noaddress duplication occurs among Ethernet control board suppliers.

The port number is a 16–bit integer used to associate the transport layer(TCP or UDP) of TCP/IP and a process of the application layer. Portnumbers from 0 to about 8000 are called well–known port numbers andassigned to standard applications (such as Telnet and FTP). Theassignment of port numbers is described in Assigned Numbers[RFC1340].When using the FOCAS1/Ethernet function and DNC1/Ethernetfunction, assign port numbers other than the well–known port numbers.

Transmitting a message to all nodes in the same segment

Device or application that requests a service

Device or application that provides a service

Subnet mask (maskaddress)

MAC address (Ethernetaddress)

Port number

Broadcast

Client

Server

IndexB–85014EN/01

i–1

[Symbols]“Tool Change” Key, 179

[A]Acceleration and Servo Delay Compensation (Type

A/B), 482

Additional Axis Cable for the Index Table, 398

Additional Axis Cable for the Index Table (Japan andExport St, 396

Additional Axis Control (Option), 372

Additional Parameters, 494

Address, 483

Adjusting the Relief Valve, 465

Adjusting Thermal Displacement Compensation, 354

Adjustment Procedure, 355

AI High–Precision Contour Control Function/ModelerControl II Function (Option), 479

AI Tool Monitor, 284

Air Supply Shutoff Method, 93

Alarm, 500

Alarm Message, 189

Alarm Messages and Releasing Method, 415

Alarm Operator Messages, 473

Alarms, 516, 727

Animated Simulation, 269

Appearance and Configuration of the Coolant Unit,450

Appearance of the Coolant Unit, 450

Arrangement of the Letter Keys, 22

Auto and MDI Operation, 571

Automatic Door, 160

Automatic Operation Screen, 117

Automatic Power Supply Shut–Off, 358

Automatic Running [CNC Operation], 88, 162

Automatic Tool Length Measurement, 409

Automatic Turn–off Operation of the Touch Probe,518

Automatic Turret Restoration, 626

Axis Movement, 161

[B]Back Ground Editing, 574

Basic Operation, 631

Basic Operations, 19

Battery Replacement Method, 618

Blower Control Function (Option), 365

Browse Mode and Edit Mode, 208

[C]Cabling and Phase Matching, 46

Calculating the Flexible Feed Gear (Detection Multi-ply DMR), 376

Calling a Program in Memory, 132

Cancellation, 493

Canned Cycles, 489

Center–through Coolant (Option), 446

Center–through Coolant Control, 471

Center–through Pump Unit, 448

Changing OFFSET Data, 152

Changing Parameters, 149

Changing Workpiece Coordinate System Data, 154

Check Items Related to Connection with a Backbone,836

Checking and changing of the connection host, 826

Checking Communication, 838

Checking Installation Requirements, 37

Checking Operation After Installation, 459

Checking Parameters, 633

Checking Program Nos. in Memory, 132

Checking the Setting of Each Parameter, 837

Cheek Items Related to Connection with the HUB,836

Circuit Diagram of Center –through Coolant andCompressed Air, 468

Cleaning, 592, 596

Cleaning the #150 Suction Filter, 461

CNC Screen, 189

CNC Screen Switching, 20

Command, 483

Command Format, 411

Command M Codes, 460

Commands in a Program, 460, 471

Commands with M Codes, 178

Common to CNC Screen and Quick Screen, 192

Common to Screens, 191

Communication Parameter Input Method, 802

Index B–85014EN/01

i–2

Compensation Method by Using Automatic ToolLength Measurement, 412

Compressed Air Circuit Diagram, 470

Concentrated lubrication with Intermittent Oiling Sys-tem, 609

Configuring a large network, 789, 796, 802

Confirming the Current Status and Clearing, 295

Connecting the Compressed Air Supply, 51

Connecting the Power Supply, 46

Connection, 335, 339, 341, 347, 485, 513

Connectors, 396, 397

Constitution of Quick Screen, 99

Control, 472

Controller Rack, 12

Conversational Programming Function, 224

Convert to NC Format, 560

Coolant, 32

Coolant (Option), 360

Coolant Circuit Diagram of Center–through CoolantUnit, 469

Coolant Supply, 81

Coolant Unit, 447, 449

Coolant Unit (Option), 361

Coordinate/Tool Compensation, 106

Copy and Deleting of NC Program, 568

Copy and Move (by Line), 216

Counter, 118

Creating a Machining Program, 239

Creating a Program, 127, 128

Creating a program, 577

Creation of NC Program, 529

Cursor Jump, 217

Custom Macro Variables, 156

Cutting Condition File, 229, 278

[D]Daily Check–up, 592

Daily Inspection, 461

Daily Maintenance, 591

Data I/O, 276

Data I/O Screen, 110

Data Setting, 526

Default File, 283

Deleting a Line, 220

Deleting a Program, 132

Deleting the Program, 213

Descriptions of Screen Displays, 100

Detailed Specifications, 429

Details of the Related Parameters, 197

DI/DO, 475

Diagnos Messages, 749

Diagnose/Alarm Screen, 191

Diagnosis/Alarm, 126

Differences from Conventional G73 and G81 throughG83 Codes, 492

Dimensions of the End of the Spindle, 657

Dimensions of the Inside of the Splash Guard, 653

Dimensions of the Machine, 646

Dimensions of the System around the Coolant Outlets,656

Dimensions of the Table Surface and T Groove (nomi-nal width: 14), 650

Displaying Alarm, Operator, and Diagnostic Mes-sages, 188

Displaying and Changing Parameters, 145

Displaying Parameters, 146

DNC Operation Using the DNC Operation Manage-ment Package, 445

DNC1/Ethernet Function, 778

Drawing Function and NC Statement ConversionFunction, 586

Dry Run After Replacement of the Line Filter, 464

[E]Editing a Program, 128

Editing Function, 563

Editing Function of QUICK EDITOR, 212

Electric Control Circuit Diagram of Center ThroughCoolant, 476

Electric Power Supply Shutoff Method, 94

EMB_ETH FACTOLINK Log Screen, 842

EMB_ETH FOCAS1/Ether Log Screen, 841

EMB_ETH FTP TRANSFER Log Screen, 842

EMB_ETH MASTER CTRL Log Screen, 841

Embedded Ethernet and PCMCIA Ethernet, 775

Embedded Ethernet Error Message Screen, 828

Embedded Ethernet Function, 774

Embedded Ethernet Maintenance Screen, 830

Embedded Ethernet Operations, 812

B–85014EN/01 Index

i–3

Emergency Stop, 70, 333

Enabling the Z–axis Thermal Displacement Com-pensation Function, 353

Entering a Comment, 219

Entering a Macro Statement, 218

Entering Alphabetic Characters, 22

Entering Alphabetic Characters and Symbols, 209

Error code displayed on LCD, 669

Error Codes, 668

Error Messages, 841

Example of Cycle Operation, 496

Explanation of Each Screen, 103

Explanation of Sample Program, 522

External Interface Function, 302

External Interface Signal Assignment, 514

External Power Supply, 334

[F]FACTOLINK Function, 776, 812

FACTOLINK Functions, 433

FACTOLINK parameter setting screen, 783

Features, 4

Features and Notes of QUICK EDITOR, 206

Features of QUICK EDITOR, 206

Feedrate Override Dial (FEEDRATE OVERRIDE),174

Flowchart, 416

Fluorescent Lamp in the Inside Light Unit, 618

FOCAS1/Ethernet Function, 776

FOCAS1/Ethernet parameter setting screen, 790

FTP File Transfer Function, 779, 813

FTP file transfer parameter setting screen, 797

Function, 512

Functional Differences between the Embedded Ether-net Function and the Ethernet Function Based on theOption Board, 780

Fuse, 618

[G]G Codes, 659

Glossary for Ethernet, 843

Greasing, 601

Greasing and Oiling Interval, 613

Grid Shift, 377

[H]High–Speed Positioning and Drilling Canned Cycle

Functions, 487

High–Speed Serial Bus (HSSB) Interface Function(Option), 444

High–Speed Skip Function (Option), 480

History of the Amounts of Estimated Thermal Dis-placements, 354

Host file deletion, 816

Host file list display, 813

Host file search, 816

[I]If The Safety Door Is Unlocked During Operation, 74

Index Table Function (Option), 390

Input Function of QUICK EDITOR, 209

Input Signal Specifications, 486

Input/output of various types of data, 819

Input/Output Parameters for External Devices, 195

Input/Output Signals, 307

Input/Output–Input, 478

Input/Output–Output, 477

Inserting a Line, 220

Inspecting Cutters, 593

Inspecting Each Section, 593, 596

Installation, 42, 457

Installation Area, 457

Installing Leveling Bolts and Blocks, 43

Installing the Coolant Unit, 58

Internal connection diagram, 335

Internal Light (Option), 370

[J]Jigs, 31

[L]Level Adjusting, 56

Line Filter, 466

List of Alarms (PMC), 737

List of Error Codes, 732


i–4

List of Functions, 776

Locking the Safety Door, 72

Logging Data Format, 443

Logging Data Function, 440

Lubricating Each Section, 601

[M]M codes, 471

M01 Stop (OPT STOP), 174

Machine, 10

Machine Cleaning Coolant Control (Optional), 364

Machining Program Check, 261

Machining Program Optimization, 251

Macro Call Using G Code, 502

Macro Program, 421

Maintenance of AC Spindle Motor, 617

Maintenance Parts, 466

Maintence/Setting, 124

Manual Guide, 519

Manual Operation, 460, 471

Manual Operation of the Spindle, 159

Manual Running [CNC Operation], 158

Manual Running Execution During Automatic Run-ning, 173

MDI Command Execution During Automatic Run-ning, 173

MDI Running, 163

Measurement Cycle Function (Option), 576

Measurement Cycle Operation, 586

Measures When an Error Occurs During Tool Change,180

Measuring Limit, 413

Memory Running (MEM), 167

Memory Running Operation, 168

Menu Operation, 104

MENU OPERATION Key–triggered Screen Switch-ing, 102

Menu Screen, 103

Method Using the M Code, 182

Method Using the Spindle Key (Manual) on the Oper-ator’s Panel, 182

Miscellaneous Function (M Function), 134

Mist Collector Mounting Hole Dimensions, 658

Modifying a Program, 129

Mounting a Z–Axis Motor at Machine Installation, 54

Mounting Jigs and Workpieces, 79

Mounting Tools, 57, 78

[N]Names and Functions of the Parts, 453

NC Parameter, 146

NC program input, 817

NC program output, 818

NC Statement Output Function, 274

Note, 509

Notes, 449, 495, 521

Notes on Installation, 457

Notes on using the FACTOLINK function for the firsttime, 782

Notes on using the FOCAS1/Ethernet function for thefirst time, 789

Notes on using the FTP file transfer function for thefirst time, 796

[O]Opening and Closing the Automatic Door (Option),

366

Opening and Closing the Door when the Power is Off,75

Opening/Closing the Splash–Guard Door, 71

Operating Positions, 65

Operation, 224, 460, 663

Operation of the Manual Guide, 522

Operator Message, 190

Operator Messages, 745

Operator Messages, Diagnos Messages, 744

Operator’s Panel, 14

Optimal Process Editing Algorithm, 255

Optimal Process Editing Function (Automatic Alter-ation), 253

Optimal Process Editing Function (Manual Alter-ation), 258

Optional Block Skip, 175

Ordering information, 336, 340, 346, 350

Other Maintenance, 465

Other Maintenance Parts, 466

Other Operations, 211

Other Related Parameters (Standard Setting), 375

Outline of the Function, 425


i–5

Output of Measurement Results to Custom MacroVariables, 586

Output Signal Check Function, 306

Outside dimensions, 337, 340, 346, 350

Overview, 341, 347, 504, 511, 520

Overview (Super C.A.P iM), 223

[P]Packing, 62

Pallet Setting Screen (Option), 115

Parameter Reset, Check, and Registration Functions,630

Parameter Setting of the FACTOLINK Function, 782

Parameter Setting of the FOCAS1/Ethernet Function,789

Parameter Setting of the FTP File Transfer Function,796

Parameters, 484, 501, 506, 515, 785, 800

Parameters (PMC Parameters), 474

Parameters and Macro Variables, 414

Part Names, 9

Periodical Maintenance, 599, 617

Pin allocation, 336

Piping, 457

Playback, 143

PMC Parameter, 148

PMC Parameters, 753

Positioning Operation, 493

Power Shutoff Methods, 92

Power Supply, 476

Power Supply Module, 734

Pre–Tool File, 234, 282

Preparation, 576

Preparation Before Transportation, 39

Preparing Programs [CNC Operation], 82

Procedure for Displaying QUICK EDITOR Screen,207

Program Check (Graphic), 557

Program Creation, 294

Programming, 133

[Q]Quick Conversational Programming (Super C.A.P

iM), 222

Quick Editor, 204

QUICK EDITOR Screen, 207

Quick Screen, 97, 191

[R]Rapid Traverse Overlapping, 493

Rapid Traverse Rate Override (TRVRS LOW, TRVRS25%, TRVRS 100%), 175

Rating, 337

Recommended ATA Card, 772

Recommended Lubricants (Grease and Oil), 616

Registering a Tool Length Compensation Value, 294

Registering Parameters, 634

Registering the Program, 215

Related Parameters (Standard Settings), 431

Relay Module, 335

Relay Terminal Block Module, 341

Relay Terminal Block Module B, 347

Releasing Overtravel, 193

Releasing the Tool Trapping State, 194

Remote Running (REMOT), 170

Remote Running Operation, 170

Removal of Corrosion Preventive Grease, 53

Removing Auxiliary Axes, 378

Removing Cut Scraps, 594

Removing the Eyebolts for Lifting the Machine, 44

Removing the Packing Plate, 45

Replacing Expendable Parts, 618

Replacing the Line Filter, 463

Replenishing the Tank with Coolant, 592

Resetting Parameters, 632

Restarting Automatic Running, 91

Restarting Automatic Running After Feed Hold orStop, 173

Restriction, 475

Restrictions on the Operation of the Machine with theSafety Door Open, 73

Retreat Operation, 493

Return to Initial Point/Point R, 493

Rigid Tapping Cycle (Function M29), 139

Rigid Tapping Return Function, 635

Rotation of the Spindle, 182

[S]Safety Precautions, 77


i–6

Scheduled Maintenance, 461

Screen Change and Program Selection after Editing,221

Screen Number and PAGE Key Triggered ScreenSwitching, 101

Screen Switching, 20

Screen Switching Methods, 101

Search for the Specified Word, 217

Select Function, 442

Selecting a Coolant, 449

Selecting an Edit Function, 208

Selecting the Function, 220

Selecting the Program, 212

Selection of NC Program, 527

Sequence, 505

Sequence Selection, 120

Servo Amplifier Module, 735

Servo Motor Origin Restoration, 621

Servo Parameters (Standard), 379

Setting and Cancel of Continuous Line, 219

Setting and Displaying Common Variables, 157

Setting Input/Output Signals and Functions, 304

Setting NC Parameters, 439

Setting of Input Power Supply, 50

Setting of Inserting or Overwriting Mode, 220

Setting Servo Parameters, 373

Setting Several Data, 228

Setting the Embedded Ethernet Function, 782

Setting the Small–Hole Peck Drilling Cycle Mode,428

Setting Up Ethernet, 435

Setting Up FACTOLINK, 438

Settings, 435

Settings and Operations of Automatic Running, 172

Settings for Memory Running, 167

Settings for Remote Running, 170

Shape and Dimensions of the Machine, 647

Signal Output, 301

Simple Input of G and M Codes, 210

Simple input of words by input key, 211

Single Block (SINGL BLOCK), 172

Single–Block Stop, 493

Small–Hole Peck Drilling Cycle (Option), 424

Soft Key–triggered Screen Switching, 101

Sound Pressure Level, 8

Specification, 499

Specifications, 346, 350, 447, 639

Specified Brands of Lubricant, 616

Spindle, 447

Spindle Air Blow Time Extension Function, 503

Spindle Amplifier, 727

Spindle Load Meter, 185

Spindle Motor Characteristic, 187

Spindle Orientation (M19), 186

Spindle Orientation Function (M19 Function), 138

Spindle Override, 184

Spindle Rotation Disable Function, 517

Spindle Rotation When the Safety Door is Open, 183

Spindle Run–in (for 15000min–1 Specification), 597

Spindle Speed Function (S Function), 133

Spindle–Speed Functions, 181

Standard Data, 278

Starting and Ending the CNC Screen Display Func-tion, 445

Starting Automatic Running, 89

Status Lights (Option), 371

Status List, 666

Stopping Automatic Running, 90

Supplement to Program Commands, 297

Switching Between the Embedded Ethernet Devices,810

Switching between the QUICK Screen and CNCScreen, 20

Switching of Safety Door Lock Control, 76

Switching Over to Manual Guide Screen, 524

Switching Power Off, 69

Switching Power On, 68

Switching Power On and Off, 67

Switching to Factolink Screen, 441

[T]Tool Change, 176

Tool Change Precautions, 177

Tool File, 231, 279

Tool Function (T Function), 137

Tool Geometry Compensation, 236

Tool Life Management Screen, 112

Tool Path Drawing, 261


i–7

Tools, 24

Touch Probe Control Function, 510

Transportation, 41

Transportation Procedure, 38

Trial Run, 83

Troubleshooting, 836

[U]Usage, 427

Use of the Machine, 5

User Terminal Block Module, 338

Using the DNC1/Ethernet function on a small net-work, 795

Using the FACTOLINK function on a small network,788

Using the FOCAS1/Ethernet function on a small net-work, 794

Using the FTP file transfer function on a small net-work, 801

[V]View and Components of the Operator’s Panel, 13

[W]Wiring, 458

Work at Closing Time, 594

Workpiece Coordinate System, 237

[Y]Y–axis Telescopic Cover (Y–cover F), 61

[Z]Z–axis Thermal Displacement Compensation Func-

tion, 351

Rev

isio

n R

eco

rd

FAN

UC

RO

BO

DR

ILL

α–T

14iC

e/iC

Le/

iCS

e, α

–T21

iCe/

iCL

e/iC

Se

OP

ER

AT

OR

’S M

AN

UA

L (

B–8

5014

EN

)

01Ju

l., 2

002

Edi

tion

Dat

eC

onte

nts

Edi

tion

Dat

eC

onte

nts

T14iCe Operators Manual

Documents

Transcript of T14iCe Operators Manual